From 70e05e80042e1e0b40202c65384883b446f03654 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Norbert Preining Date: Sun, 25 Jul 2021 03:00:49 +0000 Subject: CTAN sync 202107250300 --- FILES.byname | 694 +- FILES.byname.gz | Bin 2329817 -> 2330224 bytes FILES.last07days | 819 +- graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/README.txt | 22 + .../pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.pdf | Bin 0 -> 56511 bytes .../pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.tex | 21 + graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.pdf | Bin 0 -> 983611 bytes graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.tex | 3809 ++++++ graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons.sty | 1713 +++ info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog | 1516 ++- info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile | 59 +- info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS | 13 + info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README | 31 +- info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws | 30 +- info/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi | 47 +- info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css | 9 +- info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk | 4955 +++++-- info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html | 13641 +++++++++++-------- info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.info | 8000 +++++++---- info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf | Bin 1082921 -> 1345654 bytes info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi | 5218 +++++-- info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt | 9501 ++++++++----- info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml | 9363 ++++++++----- macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.dtx | 80 +- macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.pdf | Bin 599164 -> 602784 bytes macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.dtx | 129 +- macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.pdf | Bin 193288 -> 207664 bytes macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.pdf | Bin 385078 -> 385078 bytes macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.sty | 579 +- macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.tex | 6 +- macros/latex/contrib/semantex/stripsemantex.sty | 2 +- macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.dtx | 92 +- macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.pdf | Bin 68676 -> 70916 bytes macros/musixtex/README | 16 +- macros/musixtex/doc/ChangeLog-134.txt | 9 + macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc.pdf | Bin 1410320 -> 1416764 bytes macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/extensions.tex | 51 + macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/frontmatter.tex | 2 +- macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/miscellaneous.tex | 74 +- macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.pdf | Bin 93845 -> 119810 bytes macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.tex | 4 + macros/musixtex/map/frenchtab.map | 1 + macros/musixtex/tex/musixftab.tex | 148 + macros/musixtex/tex/musixtex.tex | 60 +- macros/musixtex/tfm/frenchtab.tfm | Bin 0 -> 1304 bytes macros/musixtex/type1/frenchtab.pfb | Bin 0 -> 14449 bytes .../texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl | 7 - systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb | 224 +- systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5 | 2 +- systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512 | 2 +- .../texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc | 14 +- systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz | Bin 2321600 -> 2323716 bytes systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma | Bin 591231 -> 591254 bytes .../win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma | Bin 591126 -> 591288 bytes systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini | 10 +- systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini | 12 +- timestamp | 2 +- 57 files changed, 41535 insertions(+), 19452 deletions(-) create mode 100644 graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/README.txt create mode 100644 graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.pdf create mode 100644 graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.tex create mode 100644 graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.pdf create mode 100644 graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.tex create mode 100644 graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons.sty create mode 100644 macros/musixtex/doc/ChangeLog-134.txt create mode 100644 macros/musixtex/map/frenchtab.map create mode 100644 macros/musixtex/tex/musixftab.tex create mode 100644 macros/musixtex/tfm/frenchtab.tfm create mode 100644 macros/musixtex/type1/frenchtab.pfb diff --git a/FILES.byname b/FILES.byname index 63fcdc460d..c68221d97a 100644 --- a/FILES.byname +++ b/FILES.byname @@ -5100,7 +5100,7 @@ 1990/10/02 | 5440 | dviware/vutex/vaxvms.hlp 1990/10/02 | 812 | dviware/vutex/vaxvms.ins 1990/10/02 | 127576 | dviware/vutex/vutex.web -2021/07/23 | 89857 | FILES.last07days +2021/07/24 | 95447 | FILES.last07days 2020/08/14 | 104065 | fonts/academicons/academicons.pdf 2020/08/14 | 17247 | fonts/academicons/academicons.sty 2020/08/14 | 6546 | fonts/academicons/academicons.tex @@ -143019,6 +143019,13 @@ 2021/01/22 | 26060 | graphics/pgf/contrib/penrose/penrose.tex 2021/01/22 | 472 | graphics/pgf/contrib/penrose/README 2021/01/23 | 1034990 | graphics/pgf/contrib/penrose.zip +2021/07/23 | 56511 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.pdf +2021/07/23 | 525 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.tex +2021/07/23 | 983611 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.pdf +2021/07/23 | 141840 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.tex +2021/07/23 | 61847 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons.sty +2021/07/23 | 1044 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/README.txt +2021/07/24 | 972897 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons.zip 2018/08/21 | 34321 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pgf-blur/pgf-blur.dtx 2018/08/21 | 250036 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pgf-blur/pgf-blur.pdf 2018/08/21 | 2254 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pgf-blur/README.md @@ -170277,9 +170284,9 @@ 1996/06/21 | 42303 | info/laan/pwt/pwt.txt 1996/06/27 | 2324 | info/laan/pwt/readme.fst 2006/06/04 | 115170 | info/laan/pwt.zip -2018/08/09 | 2255 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws -2018/10/15 | 119900 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog -2018/10/08 | 380 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi +2021/07/23 | 2485 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws +2021/07/24 | 161438 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog +2018/11/14 | 1676 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi 2018/03/06 | 41 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo-fr/aspell.fr.pws 2020/12/30 | 157212 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo-fr/ChangeLog 2018/11/19 | 1676 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo-fr/common.texi @@ -170297,29 +170304,29 @@ 2020/12/30 | 2466841 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo-fr.zip 2018/06/08 | 8851 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/asy/list.asy 2018/06/08 | 284 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/README -2018/09/15 | 770 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css -2018/10/14 | 907562 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk +2021/07/23 | 769 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css +2021/07/24 | 1041784 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk 2018/06/08 | 71222 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.eps 2018/06/08 | 10128 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.pdf 2018/06/08 | 74651 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.png 2018/06/08 | 1326 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.txt -2018/10/14 | 1371730 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html -2018/10/14 | 743380 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.info -2018/10/14 | 1082921 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf -2018/10/14 | 611025 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi -2018/10/14 | 693913 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt -2018/10/14 | 1186028 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml +2021/07/24 | 1583057 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html +2021/07/24 | 849429 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.info +2021/07/24 | 1345654 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf +2021/07/24 | 706300 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi +2021/07/24 | 794690 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt +2021/07/24 | 1356806 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml 2017/07/12 | 11573 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ltx-help.el -2018/10/13 | 4999 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile -2018/10/15 | 7836 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS -2018/10/15 | 1049 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README +2021/07/23 | 6099 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile +2021/07/24 | 8138 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS +2021/07/24 | 1361 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README 2018/03/29 | 370468 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.dbk 2017/07/25 | 705595 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.html 2018/03/29 | 328007 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.info 2018/03/29 | 675395 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.pdf 2018/03/29 | 296674 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.txt 2018/03/29 | 505350 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.xml -2018/10/16 | 3474608 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo.zip +2021/07/24 | 3928970 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo.zip 2019/01/19 | 8535 | info/latex4musicians/abctab.pdf 2019/01/19 | 15267 | info/latex4musicians/bravura.pdf 2019/01/19 | 9833 | info/latex4musicians/chordii.pdf @@ -173292,7 +173299,7 @@ 2021/07/05 | 214186 | install/macros/luatex/latex/lualatex-math.tds.zip 2010/12/14 | 322044 | install/macros/luatex/latex/luatextra.tds.zip 2018/04/25 | 5009580 | install/macros/luatex/latex/novel.tds.zip -2021/07/07 | 2455249 | install/macros/musixtex.tds.zip +2021/07/24 | 2525761 | install/macros/musixtex.tds.zip 2013/07/02 | 153964 | install/macros/plain/contrib/plstmary.tds.zip 2008/05/18 | 22279 | install/macros/plain/plnfss.tds.zip 2020/02/21 | 1370731 | install/macros/unicodetex/latex/fontspec.tds.zip @@ -186413,7 +186420,7 @@ 2013/04/01 | 14776 | macros/context/contrib/context-visualcounter/tex/context/third/visualcounter/t-visualcounter.mkvi 2018/03/05 | 11 | macros/context/contrib/context-visualcounter/VERSION 2018/03/22 | 276789 | macros/context/contrib/context-visualcounter.zip -2021/07/22 | 122959167 | macros/context/latest/cont-tmf.zip +2021/07/23 | 122738904 | macros/context/latest/cont-tmf.zip 2016/04/21 | 32846 | macros/cstex/base/cmexb.tar.gz 2016/06/26 | 1728262 | macros/cstex/base/csfonts-t1.tar.gz 2007/03/01 | 187106 | macros/cstex/base/csfonts.tar.gz @@ -197736,11 +197743,11 @@ 2008/02/10 | 19110 | macros/latex/contrib/ean13isbn/License.txt 2021/01/24 | 422 | macros/latex/contrib/ean13isbn/README 2021/01/24 | 322624 | macros/latex/contrib/ean13isbn.zip -2021/07/23 | 156802 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.dtx +2021/07/24 | 158196 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.dtx 2021/07/03 | 1627 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.ins -2021/07/23 | 599164 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.pdf +2021/07/24 | 602784 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.pdf 2021/07/14 | 1664 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook/README.md -2021/07/23 | 639020 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook.zip +2021/07/24 | 643047 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook.zip 2009/06/17 | 82589 | macros/latex/contrib/easy/doc/docbib.pdf 2009/06/17 | 78378 | macros/latex/contrib/easy/doc/docbmat.pdf 2009/06/17 | 99132 | macros/latex/contrib/easy/doc/doceqn.pdf @@ -206103,11 +206110,11 @@ 2016/07/03 | 1176 | macros/latex/contrib/milog/README.md 2016/07/03 | 488253 | macros/latex/contrib/milog.zip 2021/03/10 | 19106 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/LICENSE -2021/05/26 | 18042 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.dtx +2021/07/24 | 21443 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.dtx 2021/03/12 | 1705 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.ins -2021/05/26 | 193288 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.pdf +2021/07/24 | 207664 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.pdf 2021/03/17 | 396 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/README.md -2021/05/26 | 204714 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow.zip +2021/07/24 | 219380 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow.zip 2013/06/21 | 72 | macros/latex/contrib/minibox/minibox.ins 2013/06/21 | 280644 | macros/latex/contrib/minibox/minibox.pdf 2013/06/21 | 7633 | macros/latex/contrib/minibox/minibox.tex @@ -211594,12 +211601,12 @@ 2019/12/10 | 537307 | macros/latex/contrib/selinput/selinput.pdf 2019/12/11 | 541126 | macros/latex/contrib/selinput.zip 2021/06/10 | 1660 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/README.md -2021/07/18 | 385078 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.pdf -2021/07/18 | 311149 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.sty -2021/07/18 | 177482 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.tex +2021/07/24 | 385078 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.pdf +2021/07/24 | 317791 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.sty +2021/07/24 | 177492 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.tex 2020/10/03 | 12086 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/stripsemantex.lua -2021/07/18 | 4730 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/stripsemantex.sty -2021/07/18 | 442431 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex.zip +2021/07/24 | 4730 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/stripsemantex.sty +2021/07/24 | 442567 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex.zip 2020/01/29 | 1014 | macros/latex/contrib/semantic-markup/README 2020/01/29 | 266707 | macros/latex/contrib/semantic-markup/semantic-markup.pdf 2020/01/29 | 4666 | macros/latex/contrib/semantic-markup/semantic-markup.sty @@ -212518,10 +212525,10 @@ 2016/10/06 | 136549 | macros/latex/contrib/spalign/spalign.pdf 2016/10/06 | 132943 | macros/latex/contrib/spalign.zip 2021/06/27 | 571 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/README.md -2021/07/23 | 13280 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.dtx +2021/07/24 | 15545 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.dtx 2021/06/27 | 1365 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.ins -2021/07/23 | 68676 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.pdf -2021/07/23 | 71959 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark.zip +2021/07/24 | 70916 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.pdf +2021/07/24 | 74552 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark.zip 2010/10/31 | 241052 | macros/latex/contrib/sphack/sphack-doc.pdf 2010/10/31 | 4122 | macros/latex/contrib/sphack/sphack-doc.tex 2010/12/23 | 4230 | macros/latex/contrib/sphack/sphack.sty @@ -224367,6 +224374,7 @@ 2021/01/07 | 82 | macros/musixtex/doc/ChangeLog-131.txt 2021/05/13 | 190 | macros/musixtex/doc/ChangeLog-132.txt 2021/07/07 | 292 | macros/musixtex/doc/ChangeLog-133.txt +2021/07/24 | 252 | macros/musixtex/doc/ChangeLog-134.txt 2017/07/25 | 861 | macros/musixtex/doc/ChangeLog-musixdoc.txt 2017/07/25 | 16264 | macros/musixtex/doc/examples/adagio.tex 2017/07/25 | 25036 | macros/musixtex/doc/examples/albinoni.tex @@ -224454,19 +224462,19 @@ 2017/07/25 | 19225 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/changing.tex 2017/07/25 | 9512 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/embedding.tex 2021/05/24 | 5797 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/examples.tex -2021/05/27 | 68645 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/extensions.tex +2021/07/24 | 70227 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/extensions.tex 2017/07/25 | 4087 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/extracting.tex 2017/07/25 | 11619 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/fonts.tex -2021/07/07 | 5451 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/frontmatter.tex +2021/07/24 | 5451 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/frontmatter.tex 2017/07/25 | 274 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/index.tex 2021/05/27 | 36899 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/introduction.tex 2020/10/13 | 9181 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/layout.tex 2017/07/25 | 17525 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/lyrics.tex -2021/07/06 | 38227 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/miscellaneous.tex +2021/07/24 | 38136 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/miscellaneous.tex 2021/07/06 | 1978 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/musixdoc.ltx 2021/07/01 | 4828 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/musixdoc.sty 2019/05/01 | 10935 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/parameters.tex -2021/07/07 | 1410320 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc.pdf +2021/07/24 | 1416764 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc.pdf 2017/12/25 | 12902 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/preparing.tex 2021/01/20 | 8283 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/repeats.tex 2020/04/17 | 7254 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/restsdoc.tex @@ -224484,8 +224492,8 @@ 2017/07/25 | 245264 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixlyr/mxlyrdoc.pdf 2017/07/25 | 69437 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixlyr/mxlyrdoc.tex 2017/07/25 | 2619 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixlyr/README.musixlyr -2017/07/25 | 93845 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.pdf -2017/07/25 | 6901 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.tex +2021/07/24 | 119810 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.pdf +2021/07/24 | 7032 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.tex 2017/07/25 | 2435 | macros/musixtex/doc/notationMistakes/coulhack.tex 2017/07/25 | 126207 | macros/musixtex/doc/notationMistakes/sottieng.pdf 2017/07/25 | 29043 | macros/musixtex/doc/notationMistakes/sottieng.tex @@ -224507,7 +224515,8 @@ 2017/07/25 | 30 | macros/musixtex/latex/musixfll.sty 2017/07/25 | 1199 | macros/musixtex/latex/musixltx.tex 2017/07/25 | 42 | macros/musixtex/latex/musixtex.sty -2021/07/07 | 3068 | macros/musixtex/README +2021/07/24 | 35 | macros/musixtex/map/frenchtab.map +2021/07/24 | 3439 | macros/musixtex/README 2017/07/25 | 254 | macros/musixtex/scripts/musixflx.bat 2019/05/19 | 34855 | macros/musixtex/scripts/musixflx.lua 2020/03/20 | 265 | macros/musixtex/scripts/musixtex.bat @@ -224535,6 +224544,7 @@ 2017/07/25 | 624 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixevo.tex 2017/07/25 | 920 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixext.tex 2017/07/25 | 1361 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixfll.tex +2021/07/24 | 5627 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixftab.tex 2017/07/25 | 12397 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixgre.tex 2017/07/25 | 1586 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixgui.tex 2017/07/25 | 1265 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixhor.tex @@ -224556,12 +224566,14 @@ 2017/07/25 | 621 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixstf.tex 2017/07/25 | 1505 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixstr.tex 2019/01/15 | 13876 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixsty.tex -2021/07/07 | 195275 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixtex.tex +2021/07/24 | 196127 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixtex.tex 2017/07/25 | 5379 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixtmr.tex 2017/07/25 | 2071 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixtri.tex 2021/06/13 | 6204 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixvbm.tex 2017/07/25 | 946 | macros/musixtex/tex/tuplet.tex -2021/07/07 | 2438331 | macros/musixtex.zip +2021/07/24 | 1304 | macros/musixtex/tfm/frenchtab.tfm +2021/07/24 | 14449 | macros/musixtex/type1/frenchtab.pfb +2021/07/24 | 2484586 | macros/musixtex.zip 2016/01/31 | 1043 | macros/musixtnt/doc/msxlint.1 2016/01/31 | 4148 | macros/musixtnt/doc/msxlint.pdf 2016/01/31 | 3604 | macros/musixtnt/doc/TransformNotes.3 @@ -268494,8 +268506,8 @@ 2019/02/28 | 648 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context-typescripts.doc.r47085.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 9224 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context-typescripts.r47085.tar.xz 2021/02/25 | 472 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context.universal-darwin.r57908.tar.xz -2021/06/03 | 10808 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context-vim.doc.r59432.tar.xz -2021/06/03 | 10120 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context-vim.r59432.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 10808 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context-vim.doc.r60025.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 10116 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context-vim.r60025.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 263536 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context-visualcounter.doc.r47085.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 3992 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context-visualcounter.r47085.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 6744 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context-visualcounter.source.r47085.tar.xz @@ -269635,9 +269647,9 @@ 2021/07/19 | 313228 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easing.doc.r59975.tar.xz 2021/07/19 | 2220 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easing.r59975.tar.xz 2021/07/19 | 7876 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easing.source.r59975.tar.xz -2021/07/21 | 590152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.doc.r59999.tar.xz -2021/07/21 | 16024 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.r59999.tar.xz -2021/07/21 | 36624 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.source.r59999.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 597976 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.doc.r60026.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 16392 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.r60026.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 37516 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.source.r60026.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 4540 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easy.doc.r19440.tar.xz 2020/09/08 | 175976 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easyfig.doc.r56291.tar.xz 2020/09/08 | 1936 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easyfig.r56291.tar.xz @@ -271539,9 +271551,9 @@ 2019/02/28 | 456 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/ietfbibs.r41332.tar.xz 2021/07/13 | 111352 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/iexec.doc.r59909.tar.xz 2021/07/13 | 1480 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/iexec.r59909.tar.xz -2021/07/14 | 173680 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/ifallfalse.doc.r59918.tar.xz -2021/07/14 | 1200 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/ifallfalse.r59918.tar.xz -2021/07/14 | 2852 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/ifallfalse.source.r59918.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 175068 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/ifallfalse.doc.r60027.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 1248 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/ifallfalse.r60027.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 3084 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/ifallfalse.source.r60027.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 28352 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/iffont.doc.r38823.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 1348 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/iffont.r38823.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 3452 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/iffont.source.r38823.tar.xz @@ -272517,8 +272529,8 @@ 2020/05/08 | 16240 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinus.doc.r55064.tar.xz 2021/02/27 | 553012 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinus-fonts.doc.r57948.tar.xz 2021/02/27 | 1659740 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinus-fonts.r57948.tar.xz -2021/01/13 | 593988 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinus-otf.doc.r57398.tar.xz -2021/01/13 | 3724 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinus-otf.r57398.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 594072 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinus-otf.doc.r60023.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 3728 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinus-otf.r60023.tar.xz 2020/05/08 | 972 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinus.r55064.tar.xz 2021/06/03 | 1432140 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinust1math.doc.r59430.tar.xz 2021/06/03 | 1011400 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinust1math.r59430.tar.xz @@ -273031,8 +273043,8 @@ 2021/01/08 | 3476 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/lua-visual-debug.r57349.tar.xz 2021/03/04 | 95132 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/luavlna.doc.r58087.tar.xz 2021/03/04 | 7628 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/luavlna.r58087.tar.xz -2020/12/21 | 112252 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/luaxml.doc.r57183.tar.xz -2020/12/21 | 30800 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/luaxml.r57183.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 123408 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/luaxml.doc.r60030.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 32060 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/luaxml.r60030.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 344 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/lwarp.aarch64-linux.r46208.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 344 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/lwarp.amd64-freebsd.r43292.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 344 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/lwarp.amd64-netbsd.r43292.tar.xz @@ -273059,9 +273071,9 @@ 2019/02/28 | 54896 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/ly1.r47848.tar.xz 2019/05/29 | 865844 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/lyluatex.doc.r51252.tar.xz 2019/05/29 | 17864 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/lyluatex.r51252.tar.xz -2021/07/19 | 185220 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.doc.r59980.tar.xz -2021/07/19 | 2160 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.r59980.tar.xz -2021/07/19 | 3640 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.source.r59980.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 180764 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.doc.r60028.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 2176 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.r60028.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 3712 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.source.r60028.tar.xz 2020/09/08 | 185624 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macros2e.doc.r56291.tar.xz 2020/09/08 | 820 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macros2e.r56291.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 163332 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macroswap.doc.r31498.tar.xz @@ -275245,9 +275257,9 @@ 2019/02/28 | 2324 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/progressbar.r33822.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 80808 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/progress.doc.r19519.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 4192 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/progress.r19519.tar.xz -2021/07/13 | 662916 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/projlib.doc.r59910.tar.xz -2021/07/13 | 11928 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/projlib.r59910.tar.xz -2021/07/13 | 34092 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/projlib.source.r59910.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 666464 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/projlib.doc.r60029.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 12020 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/projlib.r60029.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 34092 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/projlib.source.r60029.tar.xz 2019/05/23 | 372132 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/proof-at-the-end.doc.r51194.tar.xz 2019/05/23 | 4440 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/proof-at-the-end.r51194.tar.xz 2019/05/23 | 12500 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/proof-at-the-end.source.r51194.tar.xz @@ -275368,8 +275380,8 @@ 2019/02/28 | 928 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-am.source.r19591.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 302008 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-antiprism.doc.r46643.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 2584 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-antiprism.r46643.tar.xz -2019/02/28 | 125672 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-arrow.doc.r41980.tar.xz -2019/02/28 | 5524 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-arrow.r41980.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 132760 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-arrow.doc.r60024.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 5868 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-arrow.r60024.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 271600 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-asr.doc.r22138.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 6156 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-asr.r22138.tar.xz 2019/02/28 | 1110916 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-barcode.doc.r45096.tar.xz @@ -279034,16 +279046,16 @@ 2020/07/18 | 47816 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/zztex.doc.r55862.tar.xz 2020/07/18 | 101724 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/zztex.r55862.tar.xz 2021/05/02 | 105152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl -2021/07/23 | 6811142 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz -2021/07/23 | 152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512 -2021/07/23 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512.asc +2021/07/24 | 6811156 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz +2021/07/24 | 152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512 +2021/07/24 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512.asc 2021/04/11 | 4945 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.bat -2021/07/23 | 20811251 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe -2021/07/23 | 153 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512 -2021/07/23 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512.asc -2021/07/23 | 25585318 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip -2021/07/23 | 145 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512 -2021/07/23 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512.asc +2021/07/24 | 20811253 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe +2021/07/24 | 153 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512 +2021/07/24 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512.asc +2021/07/24 | 25585318 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip +2021/07/24 | 145 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512 +2021/07/24 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512.asc 2021/04/01 | 1229 | systems/texlive/tlnet/README.md 2021/04/01 | 0 | systems/texlive/tlnet/TEXLIVE_2021 2021/07/03 | 7181 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/gpg/pubring.gpg @@ -279095,12 +279107,12 @@ 2021/05/16 | 20371 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLCrypto.pm 2021/05/16 | 5402 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLDownload.pm 2021/05/16 | 27555 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLPaper.pm -2021/07/23 | 17328413 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb -2021/07/23 | 48 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5 +2021/07/24 | 17328413 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb +2021/07/24 | 48 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5 2021/05/16 | 86511 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLPDB.pm -2021/07/23 | 144 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512 -2021/07/23 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc -2021/07/23 | 2323448 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz +2021/07/24 | 144 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512 +2021/07/24 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc +2021/07/24 | 2321600 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz 2021/05/16 | 58801 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLPOBJ.pm 2021/05/16 | 42084 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLPSRC.pm 2021/05/16 | 16103 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/TeXLive/TLTREE.pm @@ -282753,7 +282765,7 @@ 2014/09/29 | 121076 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-croatian.tar.lzma 2014/05/21 | 206798 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-czech.tar.lzma 2021/02/10 | 144839 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-danish.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 833664 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 836249 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel__doc.tar.lzma 2020/10/31 | 160797 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-dutch.tar.lzma 2021/06/06 | 131377 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-english__doc.tar.lzma 2021/06/06 | 6637 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-english__source.tar.lzma @@ -282761,7 +282773,9 @@ 2014/05/21 | 135549 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-esperanto.tar.lzma 2015/08/07 | 103973 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-estonian.tar.lzma 2021/02/10 | 156762 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-finnish.tar.lzma -2020/10/10 | 573307 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-french.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 481712 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-french__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 80644 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-french__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 16067 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-french.tar.lzma 2016/03/01 | 143626 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-friulan.tar.lzma 2014/05/21 | 476730 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-galician.tar.lzma 2018/03/10 | 5358 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-georgian.tar.lzma @@ -282798,11 +282812,11 @@ 2014/05/21 | 215576 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-slovak.tar.lzma 2021/02/10 | 143940 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-slovenian.tar.lzma 2021/02/10 | 219913 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-sorbian.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 687271 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 688037 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel__source.tar.lzma 2015/05/25 | 5256 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-spanglish.tar.lzma 2021/05/29 | 222183 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-spanish.tar.lzma 2021/02/10 | 148420 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-swedish.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 180839 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 180622 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel.tar.lzma 2014/05/21 | 234101 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-thai.tar.lzma 2019/07/06 | 309208 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-turkish.tar.lzma 2021/01/17 | 159246 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-ukrainian.tar.lzma @@ -282856,7 +282870,9 @@ 2016/10/04 | 457031 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamertheme-cuerna.tar.lzma 2015/12/08 | 1525974 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamertheme-detlevcm.tar.lzma 2016/05/31 | 168629 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamertheme-epyt.tar.lzma -2020/11/24 | 503617 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamertheme-focus.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 288252 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamertheme-focus__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 209314 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamertheme-focus__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 4630 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamertheme-focus.tar.lzma 2007/02/22 | 1899 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamerthemejltree.tar.lzma 2021/04/07 | 227582 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamerthemelalic.tar.lzma 2019/01/30 | 100626 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamertheme-light.tar.lzma @@ -283158,7 +283174,9 @@ 2011/02/21 | 152161 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/catchfilebetweentags.tar.lzma 2019/12/13 | 306397 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/catchfile.tar.lzma 2015/11/17 | 558115 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/catcodes.tar.lzma -2018/11/05 | 405032 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/catechis.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 398081 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/catechis__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 6785 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/catechis__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1893 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/catechis.tar.lzma 2014/09/08 | 55144 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/catoptions.tar.lzma 2020/12/21 | 429315 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/causets.tar.lzma 2021/06/06 | 189148 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cbcoptic__doc.tar.lzma @@ -283267,9 +283285,9 @@ 2021/06/26 | 13734 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-gs-integrate__doc.tar.lzma 2021/06/26 | 3878 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-gs-integrate__source.tar.lzma 2021/06/26 | 34393 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-gs-integrate.tar.lzma -2021/07/18 | 157608 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/18 | 4320 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/18 | 8645 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 157498 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 4346 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 8898 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko.tar.lzma 2016/05/17 | 154897 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjkpunct.tar.lzma 2015/04/21 | 2297115 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk.tar.lzma 2009/01/02 | 511775 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjw.tar.lzma @@ -283952,7 +283970,7 @@ 2020/10/03 | 318630 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/filehook.tar.lzma 2012/12/04 | 924573 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fileinfo.tar.lzma 2011/09/21 | 281409 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/filemod.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 591231 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma +2021/07/24 | 591254 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma 2001/05/14 | 5617 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/finbib.tar.lzma 2015/10/20 | 44379 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/findhyph.tar.lzma 2011/10/21 | 89323 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fink.tar.lzma @@ -283963,7 +283981,9 @@ 2009/07/13 | 504177 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/first-latex-doc.tar.lzma 2020/11/24 | 148406 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/first-packages.tar.lzma 2019/02/23 | 504679 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fitbox.tar.lzma -2021/05/29 | 1579417 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fithesis.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 731729 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fithesis__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 44837 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fithesis__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 791920 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fithesis.tar.lzma 2020/07/19 | 1202960 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fitr.tar.lzma 2015/11/05 | 221723 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fix2col.tar.lzma 2015/11/17 | 204335 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fixcmex.tar.lzma @@ -284018,7 +284038,8 @@ 2017/08/22 | 278877 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fontloader-luaotfload.tar.lzma 2017/03/20 | 94879 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fontmfizz.tar.lzma 2021/01/02 | 128815 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fontname.tar.lzma -2021/04/07 | 176187 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fontools.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 126391 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fontools__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 52288 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fontools.tar.lzma 2005/06/25 | 33931 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fontsampler.cab 2020/02/13 | 2425284 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fonts-arundina.tar.lzma 2020/10/03 | 1907391 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fonts-churchslavonic.tar.lzma @@ -284373,9 +284394,9 @@ 2021/07/13 | 110442 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/iexec__doc.tar.lzma 2021/07/13 | 2117 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/iexec__source.tar.lzma 2021/07/13 | 1672 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/iexec.tar.lzma -2021/07/14 | 174103 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ifallfalse__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/14 | 3258 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ifallfalse__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/14 | 1398 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ifallfalse.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 175538 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ifallfalse__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3487 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ifallfalse__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1454 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ifallfalse.tar.lzma 2015/11/17 | 33124 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/iffont.tar.lzma 2010/12/23 | 262776 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ifmslide.tar.lzma 2018/04/17 | 40293 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ifmtarg.tar.lzma @@ -284481,7 +284502,9 @@ 2016/07/29 | 12360 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jknappen.tar.lzma 2011/12/19 | 28973 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jlabels.tar.lzma 2021/03/17 | 86897 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jlreq-deluxe.tar.lzma -2021/05/29 | 655370 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jlreq.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 514314 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jlreq__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 8661 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jlreq__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 136506 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jlreq.tar.lzma 2020/10/03 | 1810556 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jmlr.tar.lzma 2006/04/13 | 7131 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jneurosci.cab 2020/11/09 | 602780 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jnuexam.tar.lzma @@ -284632,9 +284655,9 @@ 2021/06/20 | 2028658 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latex-graphics-dev__doc.tar.lzma 2021/06/06 | 52562 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latex-graphics-dev__source.tar.lzma 2021/06/06 | 15361 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latex-graphics-dev.tar.lzma -2021/06/20 | 914756 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latexindent__doc.tar.lzma -2021/06/20 | 113400 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latexindent__source.tar.lzma -2021/06/20 | 61029 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latexindent.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 919327 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latexindent__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 113493 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latexindent__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 62930 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latexindent.tar.lzma 2021/01/07 | 716957 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latex-make.tar.lzma 2021/06/09 | 279382 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latexmk__doc.tar.lzma 2021/06/09 | 14661 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latexmk__source.tar.lzma @@ -284678,7 +284701,9 @@ 2019/10/20 | 628747 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/leipzig.tar.lzma 2013/07/01 | 451593 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lengthconvert.tar.lzma 2019/12/05 | 298537 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/letltxmacro.tar.lzma -2020/02/08 | 465724 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/letterswitharrows.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 482607 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/letterswitharrows__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 5727 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/letterswitharrows__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3488 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/letterswitharrows.tar.lzma 2020/04/15 | 1026143 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lettre.tar.lzma 2020/03/30 | 295938 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lettrine.tar.lzma 2011/03/15 | 56985 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/levy-font.tar.lzma @@ -284695,7 +284720,9 @@ 2017/06/18 | 343703 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinegc.tar.lzma 2020/03/30 | 15094509 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertine.tar.lzma 2021/03/03 | 2216455 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinus-fonts.tar.lzma -2021/01/13 | 599586 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinus-otf.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 587676 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinus-otf__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 9238 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinus-otf__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3961 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinus-otf.tar.lzma 2021/06/03 | 2463101 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinust1math.tar.lzma 2020/05/07 | 17336 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinus.tar.lzma 2021/02/19 | 10239524 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinus-type1.tar.lzma @@ -284719,7 +284746,9 @@ 2019/12/20 | 1447184 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/linguisticspro.tar.lzma 2016/06/07 | 229127 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/linop.tar.lzma 2020/06/09 | 1474101 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lion-msc.tar.lzma -2021/03/06 | 974463 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lipsum.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 750484 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lipsum__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 17078 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lipsum__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 125327 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lipsum.tar.lzma 2015/10/27 | 921603 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lisp-on-tex.tar.lzma 2016/07/16 | 366613 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/listbib.tar.lzma 2021/06/06 | 2164587 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/listings__doc.tar.lzma @@ -284868,7 +284897,9 @@ 2021/07/06 | 6904 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lua-uni-algos.tar.lzma 2021/01/11 | 294199 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lua-visual-debug.tar.lzma 2021/03/03 | 103795 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/luavlna.tar.lzma -2020/12/21 | 143289 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/luaxml.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 114774 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/luaxml__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 9723 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/luaxml__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 32214 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/luaxml.tar.lzma 2006/09/27 | 4412 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lublack.cab 2006/09/22 | 43488 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lubright.cab 2006/09/27 | 4517 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lucallig.cab @@ -284892,9 +284923,9 @@ 2011/01/18 | 57807 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ly1.tar.lzma 2019/05/29 | 884130 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lyluatex.tar.lzma 2006/01/13 | 1323609 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/m3d.cab -2021/07/14 | 180893 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/macrolist__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/14 | 3894 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/macrolist__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/14 | 2401 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/macrolist.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 181436 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/macrolist__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 4166 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/macrolist__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2424 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/macrolist.tar.lzma 2011/07/28 | 185912 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/macros2e.tar.lzma 2013/08/27 | 167652 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/macroswap.tar.lzma 2006/09/22 | 66033 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mafr.tar.bz2 @@ -284975,9 +285006,9 @@ 2009/03/18 | 17661 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcaption.tar.lzma 2016/07/20 | 44764 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mceinleger.tar.lzma 2017/12/31 | 253456 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcexam.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 894313 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcf2graph__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 29942 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcf2graph__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 23782 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcf2graph.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 897273 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcf2graph__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 30404 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcf2graph__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 24002 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcf2graph.tar.lzma 2013/09/17 | 427099 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mciteplus.tar.lzma 2016/07/16 | 147633 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcite.tar.lzma 2021/01/07 | 539724 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcmthesis.tar.lzma @@ -285268,9 +285299,9 @@ 2018/01/12 | 157226 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zip-bin-x64.tar.lzma 2021/07/17 | 39091 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zlib-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/17 | 43361 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zlib-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 229200 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1314368 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1223018 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 230560 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1316782 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1225015 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/17 | 13442 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzip-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/17 | 14316 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzip-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2016/07/15 | 35914 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mil3.tar.lzma @@ -285463,197 +285494,197 @@ 2018/04/09 | 400132 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/newunicodechar.tar.lzma 2011/09/19 | 101312 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/newvbtm.tar.lzma 2021/03/17 | 232249 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/newverbs.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 591126 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma -2021/07/23 | 51111 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 56472 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 975018 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1077989 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 29036 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 31351 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 29839 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 34664 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 50150 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 57548 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 83540 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 95401 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 67819 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 75792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 27197 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 30821 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 330786 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 392792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 32672 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 36627 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 51308 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 56682 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 241811 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 263958 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 180010 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 195635 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 54631 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 61811 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 21223 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 23364 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 461811 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 45904 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 51201 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 284579 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 325042 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 41193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 45310 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 119819 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 133862 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1291300 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1421866 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 100624 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 112981 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 43027 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 48252 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 25020 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 28179 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 56316 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 62785 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 136816 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 154426 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 73195 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 77948 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 71668 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 80447 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 258880 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 295203 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 22049 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 24994 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 97338 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 112086 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 64426 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 73147 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 96632 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 115350 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 38139 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 43002 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 483653 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 566529 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 147372 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 159577 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 94798 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 109030 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 16356 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 17979 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 28390 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 30057 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 629400 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lcdf-typetools-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 681249 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lcdf-typetools-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 531850 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 596930 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 476918 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 510587 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 94310 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 103399 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1713891 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 2009901 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 67617 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 74208 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 27356 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 31618 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 7720 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 8767 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 196869 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 215248 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 250263 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 284023 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 98379 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 103202 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 60635 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 68022 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 124280 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 136820 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 178352 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 196739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 199731 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 180118 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 67482 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 76825 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 31230 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 35082 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 37803 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 42709 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 42888 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 46906 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 45969 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 52522 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 194381 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omegaware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 206604 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omegaware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 35691 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-patgen-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 40226 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-patgen-bin-x64.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 744116 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 815241 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 198168 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 202794 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 208047 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 243425 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 78774 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 87775 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1169718 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1301192 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 20135 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 23901 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 31535 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 37238 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 64185 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 72205 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 50392 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 57726 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1340929 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1464202 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 42385 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 51748 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 56513 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 60038 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-x64.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 25290 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 27389 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 16412 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 18175 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 63777 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 69913 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 154806 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 169242 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 57013 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 65784 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 98259 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 105222 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 2672610 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 2796724 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 56355 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 62227 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 33545 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-upmendex-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 37358 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-upmendex-bin-x64.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 27728 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 33633 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 65616 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 70647 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 312108 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 345739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 55497 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xml2pmx-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 57138 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xml2pmx-bin-x64.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 589848 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 624651 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 39129 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 43426 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 229229 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1314849 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1223016 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 13465 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 14349 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 591288 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma +2021/07/24 | 51111 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 56474 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 975018 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1077989 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 29036 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 31351 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 29840 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 34664 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 50150 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 57548 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 83539 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 95400 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 67820 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 75792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 27198 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 30823 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 330786 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 392793 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 32672 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 36628 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 51307 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 56685 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 241812 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 263959 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 180010 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 195633 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 54632 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 61811 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 21223 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 23364 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 461812 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 45904 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 51201 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 284581 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 325043 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 41193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 45309 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 119819 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 133864 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1291302 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1421866 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 100624 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 112983 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 43027 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 48251 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 25020 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 28179 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 56316 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 62786 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 136814 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 154425 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 73195 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 77951 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 71668 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 80447 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 258880 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 295204 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 22049 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 24995 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 97339 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 112089 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 64429 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 73147 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 96632 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 115349 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 38140 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 43002 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 483651 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 566526 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 147371 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 159579 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 94798 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 109029 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 16356 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 17979 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 28389 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 30056 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 629399 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lcdf-typetools-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 681250 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lcdf-typetools-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 531850 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 596930 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 476920 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 510587 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 94309 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 103401 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1713894 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2009905 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 67617 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 74209 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 27356 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 31618 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 7720 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 8768 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 196871 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 215248 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 250264 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 284023 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 98379 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 103203 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 60637 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 68022 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 124281 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 136821 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 178351 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 196739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 199732 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 180120 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 67481 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 76825 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 31230 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 35083 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 37805 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 42710 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 42891 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 46906 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 45969 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 52523 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 194381 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omegaware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 206604 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omegaware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 35691 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-patgen-bin.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 40228 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-patgen-bin-x64.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 744117 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 815240 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 198170 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 202795 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 208047 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 243424 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 78774 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 87776 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1169717 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1301192 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 20136 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 23902 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 31539 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 37241 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 64185 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 72205 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 50393 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 57728 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1340930 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1464200 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 42385 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 51749 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 56514 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 60038 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-x64.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 25289 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 27389 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 16412 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 18176 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 63777 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 69913 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 154803 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 169241 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 57014 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 65785 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 98260 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 105222 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2672609 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2796725 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 56354 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 62227 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 33543 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-upmendex-bin.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 37358 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-upmendex-bin-x64.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 27727 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 33632 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 65617 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 70648 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 312106 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 345739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 55497 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xml2pmx-bin.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 57139 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xml2pmx-bin-x64.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 589841 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 624655 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 39129 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 43424 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 230576 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1317250 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1224997 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 13464 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 14348 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2019/03/12 | 1412 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nextpage.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1153 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini +2021/07/24 | 1153 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini 2018/07/06 | 145915 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nexus-otf.tar.lzma 2017/03/30 | 191149 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nfssext-cfr.tar.lzma 2012/12/20 | 612251 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicefilelist.tar.lzma 2017/06/22 | 263407 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/niceframe.tar.lzma 2017/06/22 | 276883 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/niceframe-type1.tar.lzma -2021/07/16 | 1732511 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicematrix__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/16 | 129512 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicematrix__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/16 | 30128 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicematrix.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1749428 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicematrix__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 131246 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicematrix__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 30641 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicematrix.tar.lzma 2015/11/25 | 2555178 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicetext.tar.lzma 2018/07/30 | 243633 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nidanfloat.tar.lzma 2016/01/26 | 74424 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nihbiosketch.tar.lzma @@ -285833,9 +285864,9 @@ 2019/11/20 | 111715 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfjam.tar.lzma 2018/02/13 | 89850 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdflatexpicscale.tar.lzma 2019/12/09 | 306824 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdflscape.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 8172334 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfmanagement-testphase__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 118025 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfmanagement-testphase__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 46758 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfmanagement-testphase.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 8163792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfmanagement-testphase__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 120102 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfmanagement-testphase__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 47458 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfmanagement-testphase.tar.lzma 2011/08/11 | 384460 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfmarginpar.tar.lzma 2021/03/03 | 557874 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfoverlay.tar.lzma 2015/07/28 | 1817839 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfpagediff.tar.lzma @@ -286010,7 +286041,7 @@ 2020/10/20 | 342254 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/preview.tar.lzma 2019/06/20 | 375963 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/prftree.tar.lzma 2021/04/23 | 274028 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/principia.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 937 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini +2021/07/24 | 948 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini 2010/09/27 | 248469 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/printlen.tar.lzma 2008/06/17 | 77313 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/proba.tar.lzma 2017/07/12 | 988486 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/probsoln.tar.lzma @@ -286024,9 +286055,9 @@ 2017/05/12 | 61936 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/program.tar.lzma 2014/05/05 | 89072 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/progressbar.tar.lzma 2010/10/16 | 85014 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/progress.tar.lzma -2021/07/13 | 645546 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/projlib__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/13 | 34443 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/projlib__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/13 | 12156 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/projlib.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 649274 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/projlib__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 34449 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/projlib__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 12242 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/projlib.tar.lzma 2019/05/23 | 390400 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/proof-at-the-end.tar.lzma 2019/04/26 | 299565 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/proofread.tar.lzma 2019/10/04 | 890932 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/prooftrees.tar.lzma @@ -286057,7 +286088,9 @@ 2009/09/28 | 60609 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-abspos.tar.lzma 2010/09/11 | 848488 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-am.tar.lzma 2018/02/14 | 304799 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-antiprism.tar.lzma -2016/09/06 | 131664 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-arrow.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 126819 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-arrow__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 7050 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-arrow__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 6133 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-arrow.tar.lzma 2011/04/21 | 278588 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-asr.tar.lzma 2017/08/25 | 1212138 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-barcode.tar.lzma 2009/03/18 | 180945 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-bar.tar.lzma @@ -286386,9 +286419,9 @@ 2010/11/01 | 286025 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/selectp.tar.lzma 2019/12/13 | 547951 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/selinput.tar.lzma 2015/10/27 | 566297 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/selnolig.tar.lzma -2021/07/06 | 374645 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semantex__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/06 | 35127 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semantex__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/06 | 23609 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semantex.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 375726 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semantex__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 35307 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semantex__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 23892 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semantex.tar.lzma 2020/01/30 | 273901 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semantic-markup.tar.lzma 2016/07/29 | 397016 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semantic.tar.lzma 2008/01/28 | 514794 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semaphor.tar.lzma @@ -286465,9 +286498,9 @@ 2008/07/22 | 360807 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/sistyle.tar.lzma 2011/04/21 | 76017 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/sitem.tar.lzma 2007/12/09 | 81490 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/siunits.tar.lzma -2021/07/08 | 2862925 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/siunitx__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/08 | 105933 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/siunitx__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/08 | 60945 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/siunitx.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2864325 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/siunitx__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 105924 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/siunitx__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 60950 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/siunitx.tar.lzma 2009/02/21 | 477338 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/skaknew.tar.lzma 2018/02/08 | 221377 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/skak.tar.lzma 2011/06/23 | 1471957 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/skb.tar.lzma @@ -286508,10 +286541,12 @@ 2017/01/03 | 143479 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/sparklines.tar.lzma 2019/04/14 | 106425 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spark-otf.tar.lzma 2021/02/22 | 1423643 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spath3.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 68531 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spbmark__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 4828 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spbmark__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/01 | 2479 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spbmark.tar.lzma -2019/02/20 | 2704444 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spectralsequences.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 68234 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spbmark__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 4846 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spbmark__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2505 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spbmark.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1788647 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spectralsequences__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 52671 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spectralsequences__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 71962 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spectralsequences.tar.lzma 2021/01/07 | 3600720 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spectral.tar.lzma 2013/06/25 | 157432 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spelling.tar.lzma 2011/01/07 | 246641 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/sphack.tar.lzma @@ -286537,9 +286572,9 @@ 2013/09/09 | 240139 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/sseq.tar.lzma 2013/12/04 | 24166 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/sslides.tar.lzma 2016/07/18 | 10706 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ssqquote.tar.lzma -2021/07/16 | 350701 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/stackengine__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 350480 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/stackengine__doc.tar.lzma 2021/07/16 | 17694 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/stackengine__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/16 | 5542 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/stackengine.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 5621 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/stackengine.tar.lzma 2016/07/20 | 6148 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/stack.tar.lzma 2005/04/09 | 58072 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/stage.cab 2020/02/25 | 157005 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/stage.tar.lzma @@ -286701,9 +286736,9 @@ 2018/12/18 | 272914 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdate.tar.lzma 2020/10/03 | 168830 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdef.tar.lzma 2009/09/25 | 9715 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdiff.tar.lzma -2021/07/16 | 6127 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdimens__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/16 | 4122 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdimens__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/16 | 890 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdimens.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 6024 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdimens__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 5929 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdimens__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 889 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdimens.tar.lzma 2017/07/04 | 7548 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdirflatten.tar.lzma 2019/05/07 | 498094 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdraw.tar.lzma 2008/11/14 | 11124 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tex-ewd.tar.lzma @@ -286839,9 +286874,9 @@ 2009/04/04 | 8096508 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tipa.tar.lzma 2021/05/09 | 455058 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tipauni.tar.lzma 2015/01/13 | 388795 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tipfr.tar.lzma -2021/06/11 | 126414 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tiscreen__doc.tar.lzma -2021/06/11 | 1995 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tiscreen__source.tar.lzma -2021/06/11 | 1338 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tiscreen.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 134584 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tiscreen__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2028 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tiscreen__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1391 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tiscreen.tar.lzma 2015/02/28 | 265279 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/titlecaps.tar.lzma 2001/05/14 | 3146 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/titlefoot.tar.lzma 2006/08/17 | 861587 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/titlepage-uni-dortmund.tar.bz2 @@ -286862,9 +286897,9 @@ 2016/01/19 | 452797 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tkz-orm.tar.lzma 2020/05/06 | 371237 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tkz-tab.tar.lzma 2019/06/24 | 446730 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tlc-article.tar.lzma -2021/07/16 | 186756 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/to-be-determined__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/16 | 2020 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/to-be-determined__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/16 | 1659 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/to-be-determined.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 186403 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/to-be-determined__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2022 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/to-be-determined__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1666 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/to-be-determined.tar.lzma 2010/10/16 | 327380 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tocbibind.tar.lzma 2019/07/20 | 932365 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tocdata.tar.lzma 2020/01/13 | 532318 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tocloft.tar.lzma @@ -287040,12 +287075,16 @@ 2020/10/27 | 4843255 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/utfsym.tar.lzma 2016/07/18 | 1310 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/util-half.tar.lzma 2006/11/19 | 220289 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/utopia.cab -2021/05/09 | 126090 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ut-thesis.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 141365 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ut-thesis__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 7216 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ut-thesis__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3013 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ut-thesis.tar.lzma 2020/12/05 | 400367 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/utthesis.tar.lzma 2016/07/20 | 15292 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/uwmslide.tar.lzma 2008/04/20 | 40552 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/uwthesis.tar.lzma 2021/05/18 | 146333 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/vancouver.tar.lzma -2018/02/13 | 137571 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/variablelm.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 135271 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/variablelm__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1302 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/variablelm__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3762 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/variablelm.tar.lzma 2006/09/22 | 80260 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/variations.tar.bz2 2013/11/28 | 272725 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/varindex.tar.lzma 2017/05/02 | 188643 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/varsfromjobname.tar.lzma @@ -287178,6 +287217,9 @@ 2021/07/02 | 6359 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xintsession.tar.lzma 2021/07/14 | 394796 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xint__source.tar.lzma 2021/07/14 | 79816 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xint.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 307779 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xistercian__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 12928 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xistercian__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 4575 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xistercian.tar.lzma 2020/07/03 | 547474 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xits.tar.lzma 2019/10/22 | 228077 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xkcdcolors.tar.lzma 2021/06/06 | 386830 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xkeyval__doc.tar.lzma @@ -287202,7 +287244,9 @@ 2020/03/05 | 379688 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xsavebox.tar.lzma 2021/02/10 | 3034191 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xsim.tar.lzma 2019/06/24 | 817342 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xskak.tar.lzma -2019/02/06 | 669067 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xstring.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 637939 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xstring__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 38389 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xstring__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 11494 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xstring.tar.lzma 2011/08/04 | 386836 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xtab.tar.lzma 2007/01/19 | 103552 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xtcapts.tar.bz2 2018/03/21 | 994797 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xtuthesis.tar.lzma @@ -287397,7 +287441,7 @@ 2004/06/04 | 404 | tds/tds.sed 2004/06/23 | 65418 | tds/tds.tex 2019/05/29 | 304264 | tds.zip -2021/07/24 | 186 | timestamp +2021/07/25 | 186 | timestamp 2002/08/26 | 61898 | usergrps/dante/antrag.pdf 2002/08/26 | 118217 | usergrps/dante/antrag.ps 2017/06/30 | 917 | usergrps/dante/dtk/doc/beispiel.bib diff --git a/FILES.byname.gz b/FILES.byname.gz index ac6ada39d2..b1212ec179 100644 Binary files a/FILES.byname.gz and b/FILES.byname.gz differ diff --git a/FILES.last07days b/FILES.last07days index 31f753bde4..8b73dcaf5d 100644 --- a/FILES.last07days +++ b/FILES.last07days @@ -1,255 +1,458 @@ -2021/07/23 | 98379 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 98259 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 975018 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 97338 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 96632 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 98379 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 98260 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 975018 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 97339 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 972897 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons.zip +2021/07/24 | 9723 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/luaxml__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 96632 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 95400 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 948 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini +2021/07/24 | 94798 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 94309 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 9238 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinus-otf__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 919327 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latexindent__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 897273 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcf2graph__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 889 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdimens.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 8898 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 87776 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 8768 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 8661 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jlreq__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 849429 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.info +2021/07/24 | 836249 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 83539 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 8163792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfmanagement-testphase__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 815240 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 8138 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS +2021/07/24 | 80644 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-french__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 80447 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 794690 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt +2021/07/24 | 791920 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fithesis.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 78774 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 77951 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 7720 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 76825 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 75792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 750484 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lipsum__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 74552 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark.zip +2021/07/24 | 744117 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 74209 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 73195 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 731729 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fithesis__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 73147 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 72205 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 7216 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ut-thesis__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 71962 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spectralsequences.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 71668 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 70916 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.pdf +2021/07/24 | 70648 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 706300 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi +2021/07/24 | 7050 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-arrow__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 7032 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.tex +2021/07/24 | 70227 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/extensions.tex +2021/07/24 | 69913 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 688037 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 68234 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spbmark__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 681250 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lcdf-typetools-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 6811156 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz +2021/07/24 | 68022 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 6785 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/catechis__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 67820 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 67617 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 67481 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 666464 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/projlib.doc.r60029.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 65785 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 65617 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 649274 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/projlib__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 64429 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 643047 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook.zip +2021/07/24 | 64185 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 637939 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xstring__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 63777 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 629399 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lcdf-typetools-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 62930 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latexindent.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 62786 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 624655 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 62227 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 61811 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 6133 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-arrow.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 60950 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/siunitx.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 60637 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 602784 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.pdf +2021/07/24 | 6024 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdimens__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 60038 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-x64.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 597976 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.doc.r60026.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 596930 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 594072 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinus-otf.doc.r60023.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 5929 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/texdimens__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 591288 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma +2021/07/24 | 591254 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma +2021/07/24 | 589841 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 587676 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinus-otf__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 5868 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-arrow.r60024.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 57728 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 57548 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 5727 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/letterswitharrows__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 57139 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xml2pmx-bin-x64.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 57014 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 56685 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 566526 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 56514 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 56474 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 56354 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 56316 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 5627 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixftab.tex +2021/07/24 | 5621 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/stackengine.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 55497 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xml2pmx-bin.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 54632 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 5451 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/frontmatter.tex +2021/07/24 | 531850 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 52671 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spectralsequences__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 52523 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 52288 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fontools.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 51749 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 514314 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jlreq__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 51307 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 51201 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 51111 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 510587 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 50393 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 50150 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 48 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5 +2021/07/24 | 4846 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spbmark__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 483651 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 482607 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/letterswitharrows__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 48251 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 481712 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-french__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 476920 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 47458 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfmanagement-testphase.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 4730 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/stripsemantex.sty +2021/07/24 | 46906 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 4630 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamertheme-focus.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 461812 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 45969 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 45904 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 4575 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xistercian.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc +2021/07/24 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512.asc +2021/07/24 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512.asc +2021/07/24 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512.asc +2021/07/24 | 45309 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 44837 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fithesis__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 442567 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex.zip +2021/07/24 | 4346 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 43424 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 43027 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 43002 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 42891 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 42710 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 42385 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 4166 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/macrolist__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 41193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 40228 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-patgen-bin-x64.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 398081 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/catechis__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3961 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/libertinus-otf.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3928970 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo.zip +2021/07/24 | 392793 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 39129 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 385078 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.pdf +2021/07/24 | 38389 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xstring__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 38140 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 38136 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/miscellaneous.tex +2021/07/24 | 37805 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3762 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/variablelm.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 375726 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semantex__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 37516 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.source.r60026.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 37358 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-upmendex-bin-x64.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3728 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/libertinus-otf.r60023.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 37241 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3712 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.source.r60028.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 36628 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 35 | macros/musixtex/map/frenchtab.map +2021/07/24 | 35691 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-patgen-bin.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 35307 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semantex__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 35083 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 350480 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/stackengine__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3488 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/letterswitharrows.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3487 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ifallfalse__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 34664 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 345739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 34449 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/projlib__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3439 | macros/musixtex/README +2021/07/24 | 34092 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/projlib.source.r60029.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 33632 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 33543 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-upmendex-bin.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 330786 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 32672 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 325043 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 32214 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/luaxml.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 32060 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/luaxml.r60030.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 317791 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.sty +2021/07/24 | 31618 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 31539 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 31351 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 31230 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 312106 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3084 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/ifallfalse.source.r60027.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 30823 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 307779 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xistercian__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 30641 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicematrix.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 30404 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcf2graph__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 3013 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ut-thesis.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 30056 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 29840 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 295204 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 29036 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 288252 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamertheme-focus__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2864325 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/siunitx__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 284581 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 284023 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 28389 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 28179 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2796725 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 27727 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 27389 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 27356 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 27198 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2672609 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 263959 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 258880 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 25585318 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip +2021/07/24 | 252 | macros/musixtex/doc/ChangeLog-134.txt +2021/07/24 | 25289 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2525761 | install/macros/musixtex.tds.zip +2021/07/24 | 2505 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spbmark.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 250264 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 25020 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 24995 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2484586 | macros/musixtex.zip +2021/07/24 | 243424 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2424 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/macrolist.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 241812 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 24002 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/mcf2graph.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 23902 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 23892 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/semantex.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 23364 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2321600 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz +2021/07/24 | 230576 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 230560 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 22049 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 219380 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow.zip +2021/07/24 | 2176 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.r60028.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 215248 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 21443 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.dtx +2021/07/24 | 21223 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 209314 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/beamertheme-focus__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 20811253 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe +2021/07/24 | 208047 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 207664 | macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.pdf +2021/07/24 | 206604 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omegaware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2028 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tiscreen__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 202795 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2022 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/to-be-determined__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 20136 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 2009905 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 199732 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 198170 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 196871 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 196739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 196127 | macros/musixtex/tex/musixtex.tex +2021/07/24 | 195633 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 194381 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omegaware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1893 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/catechis.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 186403 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/to-be-determined__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 18176 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 181436 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/macrolist__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 180764 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.doc.r60028.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 180622 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 180120 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 180010 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 17979 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1788647 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/spectralsequences__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 178351 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 177492 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.tex +2021/07/24 | 175538 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ifallfalse__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 175068 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/ifallfalse.doc.r60027.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 1749428 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicematrix__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 17328413 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb +2021/07/24 | 1713894 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 17078 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lipsum__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 169241 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1666 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/to-be-determined.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 16412 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 16392 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.r60026.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 16356 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 161438 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog +2021/07/24 | 16067 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/babel-french.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 159579 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1583057 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html +2021/07/24 | 158196 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.dtx +2021/07/24 | 157498 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 15545 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.dtx +2021/07/24 | 154803 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 154425 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 153 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512 +2021/07/24 | 152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512 +2021/07/24 | 147371 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1464200 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 145 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512 +2021/07/24 | 1454 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ifallfalse.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 144 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512 +2021/07/24 | 14449 | macros/musixtex/type1/frenchtab.pfb +2021/07/24 | 14348 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1421866 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1416764 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc.pdf +2021/07/24 | 141365 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/ut-thesis__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1391 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tiscreen.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 136821 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 136814 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 136506 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/jlreq.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1361 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README +2021/07/24 | 1356806 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml +2021/07/24 | 135271 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/variablelm__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 13464 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 134584 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/tiscreen__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1345654 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf +2021/07/24 | 1340930 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 133864 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 132760 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pst-arrow.doc.r60024.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 1317250 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1316782 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 131246 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/nicematrix__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1304 | macros/musixtex/tfm/frenchtab.tfm +2021/07/24 | 1302 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/variablelm__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1301192 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 12928 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xistercian__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1291302 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 126819 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pst-arrow__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 126391 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/fontools__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 125327 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lipsum.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1248 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/ifallfalse.r60027.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 124281 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 123408 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/luaxml.doc.r60030.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 1225015 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1224997 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 12242 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/projlib.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 12020 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/projlib.r60029.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 120102 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pdfmanagement-testphase__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 119819 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 119810 | macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.pdf +2021/07/24 | 1169717 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1153 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini +2021/07/24 | 115349 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 11494 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/xstring.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 114774 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/luaxml__doc.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 113493 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/latexindent__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 112983 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 112089 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 109029 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 10808 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context-vim.doc.r60025.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 1077989 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 105924 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/siunitx__source.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 105222 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 1041784 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk +2021/07/24 | 103401 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 103203 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/24 | 10116 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/context-vim.r60025.tar.xz +2021/07/24 | 100624 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/23 | 983611 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.pdf 2021/07/23 | 9617 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml-transform.lua 2021/07/23 | 9541 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/IfElseFi.pm -2021/07/23 | 95401 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 94798 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 946088 | support/latexindent/documentation/latexindent.pdf -2021/07/23 | 94310 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 937 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini 2021/07/23 | 9353 | support/latexindent/documentation/subsec-conflicting-poly-switches.tex -2021/07/23 | 87775 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 8767 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 835 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Version.pm 2021/07/23 | 835852 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/babel.doc.r60021.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 83540 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 8208 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/jlreq.source.r60015.tar.xz 2021/07/23 | 8181364 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pdfmanagement-testphase.doc.r60016.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 815241 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 80447 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 7970 | support/latexindent/documentation/sec-introduction.tex 2021/07/23 | 7881 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/LogFile.pm -2021/07/23 | 78774 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-png-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 77948 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 775547 | macros/latex/contrib/projlib.zip -2021/07/23 | 7720 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-md5-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 76825 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 75792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 744116 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pdftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 74208 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 73195 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fonts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 73147 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/23 | 769 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css 2021/07/23 | 7223 | support/latexindent/documentation/subsubsec-no-add-remaining-code-blocks.tex -2021/07/23 | 72205 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 71959 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark.zip -2021/07/23 | 71668 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freeglut-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 7161 | support/latexindent/documentation/figure-schematic.png -2021/07/23 | 70647 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 69913 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 68797 | support/latexindent/documentation/sec-default-user-local.tex 2021/07/23 | 687756 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/babel.source.r60021.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 68676 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.pdf 2021/07/23 | 6856 | macros/latex/contrib/ifallfalse/ifallfalse.dtx -2021/07/23 | 681249 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lcdf-typetools-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 6811142 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz -2021/07/23 | 68022 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 6793 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/MandatoryArgument.pm -2021/07/23 | 67819 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibtex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 67672 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/spbmark.doc.r60018.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 67617 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lzma-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 67482 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpmcli-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 6589 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/FileExtension.pm -2021/07/23 | 65784 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 65616 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-web-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 64426 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-graphite2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 64185 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ps2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 6408 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Item.pm -2021/07/23 | 639020 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook.zip 2021/07/23 | 6385 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/TrailingComments.pm -2021/07/23 | 63777 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex4ht-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 6375580 | support/latexindent/latexindent.exe 2021/07/23 | 635326 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.dtx 2021/07/23 | 6335 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Environment.pm -2021/07/23 | 629400 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lcdf-typetools-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 62785 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 626124 | fonts/libertinus-otf/doc/libertinus-otf-doc.pdf -2021/07/23 | 624651 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 62227 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 61811 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/23 | 61847 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons.sty 2021/07/23 | 61612 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/AlignmentAtAmpersand.pm 2021/07/23 | 61464 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/siunitx.r60017.tar.xz +2021/07/23 | 6099 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile 2021/07/23 | 60980 | fonts/libertinus-otf/doc/libertinus-otf-doc.tex -2021/07/23 | 60635 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 6062 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/OptionalArgument.pm 2021/07/23 | 6042 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/BackUpFileProcedure.pm -2021/07/23 | 60038 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin-x64.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 599164 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.pdf 2021/07/23 | 598910 | fonts/libertinus-otf.zip 2021/07/23 | 5974 | support/latexindent/documentation/subsubsec-commands-with-arguments.tex 2021/07/23 | 5969 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Else.pm -2021/07/23 | 596930 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 591231 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma -2021/07/23 | 591126 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma -2021/07/23 | 589848 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-yap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 5777 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/UnNamedGroupingBracesBrackets.pm -2021/07/23 | 57726 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 57548 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 57138 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xml2pmx-bin-x64.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 57013 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texify-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 56682 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 566529 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 56513 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tdsutil-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 56472 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 56355 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 56316 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fmt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/23 | 56511 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.pdf 2021/07/23 | 562 | graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-arrow/README -2021/07/23 | 55497 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xml2pmx-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 54631 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cweb-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 5356 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/stackengine.r60019.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 531850 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-libressl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 5312 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/KeyEqualsValuesBraces.pm 2021/07/23 | 5284 | support/latexindent/documentation/subsubsec-headings.tex 2021/07/23 | 527 | graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-arrow/latex/pst-arrow.sty -2021/07/23 | 52522 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 51748 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/23 | 525 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.tex 2021/07/23 | 51706 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/GetYamlSettings.pm -2021/07/23 | 51308 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cjkutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 51201 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 51111 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-arctrl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 510924 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/jlreq.doc.r60015.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 510587 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 50392 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-psutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 50150 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bibarts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 492 | support/latexindent/documentation/cmhlistings.tex -2021/07/23 | 48 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5 2021/07/23 | 4869 | support/latexindent/documentation/subsubsec-ifelsefi.tex -2021/07/23 | 483653 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 48252 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 4798 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/BlankLines.pm -2021/07/23 | 476918 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-log4cxx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 47336 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pdfmanagement-testphase.r60016.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 46906 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 466543 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdf 2021/07/23 | 4659302 | support/latexindent.zip -2021/07/23 | 461811 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 45969 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-m-tx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 45904 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvicopy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc -2021/07/23 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512.asc -2021/07/23 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512.asc -2021/07/23 | 455 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512.asc -2021/07/23 | 45310 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 4464 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/spbmark.source.r60018.tar.xz 2021/07/23 | 44096 | support/latexindent/documentation/logo.png 2021/07/23 | 4355 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/RoundBrackets.pm -2021/07/23 | 43426 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 43027 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-expat-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 43002 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 42888 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mtprint-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 4284 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/NamedGroupingBracesBrackets.pm -2021/07/23 | 42709 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 42385 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-synctex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 41193 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipng-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 41070 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml-namedentities.lua -2021/07/23 | 40226 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-patgen-bin-x64.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 398708 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.doc.r60012.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 392792 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 39129 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zlib-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 3847 | support/latexindent/documentation/subsubsec-special.tex -2021/07/23 | 38139 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 37803 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mthelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 37358 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-upmendex-bin-x64.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 37238 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 367108 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/stackengine.doc.r60019.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 36627 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 3618 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Replacement.pm 2021/07/23 | 3608 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/variablelm.r60014.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 35691 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-patgen-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 35082 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 34664 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 3463 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Preamble.pm -2021/07/23 | 345739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 3451 | support/latexindent/documentation/subsubsec-environments-with-items.tex 2021/07/23 | 3394 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/HorizontalWhiteSpace.pm -2021/07/23 | 33633 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 33545 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-upmendex-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 330786 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-cairo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 327901 | macros/latex/contrib/projlib/ProjLib-doc-cn.pdf 2021/07/23 | 3273 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Tokens.pm -2021/07/23 | 32672 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-chktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 32630 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml.tex -2021/07/23 | 325042 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 3239 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml-testxml.lua -2021/07/23 | 31618 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 31535 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-posix-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 31351 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 31230 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mspack-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 312108 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-xetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 30821 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 30546 | graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-arrow/doc/pst-arrow-doc.tex -2021/07/23 | 30057 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 29839 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-axohelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 295203 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 29177 | macros/context/contrib/context-vim.zip -2021/07/23 | 29036 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-autosp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 2902 | support/latexindent/documentation/subsec-partnering-poly-switches.tex 2021/07/23 | 2860836 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/siunitx.doc.r60017.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 284579 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 284023 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 28390 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lacheck-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 28179 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 2796724 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 27728 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-uriparser-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 27389 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 27356 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-makeindex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 27197 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-bzip2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 2672610 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texworks-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 2647 | support/latexindent/latexindent.pl -2021/07/23 | 263958 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 258880 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-freetype2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 25585318 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip 2021/07/23 | 25475 | fonts/libertinus-otf/latex/libertinus-otf.sty -2021/07/23 | 25290 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-teckit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 250263 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metapost-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 25020 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-findtexmf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 24994 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/23 | 2485 | info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws 2021/07/23 | 246 | support/latexindent/documentation/references.tex -2021/07/23 | 243425 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 241811 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-console-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 23901 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 23600 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Arguments.pm 2021/07/23 | 233 | graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-arrow/Changes -2021/07/23 | 23364 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 23256 | support/latexindent/documentation/latexindent.tex -2021/07/23 | 2323448 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz -2021/07/23 | 229229 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 229200 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb1-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 22855 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Verbatim.pm 2021/07/23 | 2265 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml-pretty.lua 2021/07/23 | 2236 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/spbmark.r60018.tar.xz 2021/07/23 | 2212 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Logger.pm -2021/07/23 | 22049 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 21671 | support/latexindent/documentation/sec-replacements.tex -2021/07/23 | 215248 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 212416 | graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-arrow/doc/pst-arrow-doc.pdf -2021/07/23 | 21223 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-devnag-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 2118 | support/latexindent/documentation/sec-demonstration.tex 2021/07/23 | 2109 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml-parse-query.lua 2021/07/23 | 21053 | graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-arrow/tex/pst-arrow.tex 2021/07/23 | 20812 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/ModifyLineBreaks.pm -2021/07/23 | 20811251 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe -2021/07/23 | 208047 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 20712 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml-mod-xml.lua -2021/07/23 | 206604 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omegaware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 206071 | macros/latex/contrib/projlib/ProjLib-doc-fr.pdf 2021/07/23 | 20575 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Indent.pm 2021/07/23 | 204461 | macros/latex/contrib/projlib/ProjLib-doc-en.pdf -2021/07/23 | 202794 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 20135 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-popt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 2009901 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 19993 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Document.pm -2021/07/23 | 199731 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 1992 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Switches.pm 2021/07/23 | 19864 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Sentence.pm -2021/07/23 | 198168 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-pixman-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 196869 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-metafont-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 196739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 1957 | fonts/libertinus-otf/Changes -2021/07/23 | 195635 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 194381 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-omegaware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 1932013 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix.zip 2021/07/23 | 1896 | support/latexindent/documentation/figure-schematic.tex 2021/07/23 | 18926 | support/latexindent/documentation/sec-how-to-use.tex @@ -260,94 +463,50 @@ 2021/07/23 | 18453 | support/latexindent/defaultSettings.yaml 2021/07/23 | 184302 | macros/latex/contrib/macrolist/macrolist.pdf 2021/07/23 | 183569 | macros/latex/contrib/macrolist.zip -2021/07/23 | 18175 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 180508 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/babel.r60021.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 180118 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mpfr-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 180010 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-curl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 17979 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 178390 | macros/latex/contrib/ifallfalse/ifallfalse.pdf -2021/07/23 | 178352 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 177038 | macros/latex/contrib/ifallfalse.zip -2021/07/23 | 17328413 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb -2021/07/23 | 1713891 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-luatex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 170147 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.tex -2021/07/23 | 169242 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 1686 | support/latexindent/documentation/sec-conclusions-know-limitations.tex 2021/07/23 | 16693 | support/latexindent/documentation/subsubsec-environments-and-their-arguments.tex 2021/07/23 | 1664 | support/latexindent/documentation/logo.tex -2021/07/23 | 16412 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 16356 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-kpathsea-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 161739 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml.zip 2021/07/23 | 16051 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml-domobject.lua -2021/07/23 | 159577 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 156802 | macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.dtx 2021/07/23 | 1558 | support/latexindent/latexindent-module-installer.pl -2021/07/23 | 154806 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-tex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 154426 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 153 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-windows.exe.sha512 -2021/07/23 | 152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl-unx.tar.gz.sha512 2021/07/23 | 14954 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml-cssquery.lua 2021/07/23 | 149359 | graphics/pstricks/contrib/pst-arrow.zip 2021/07/23 | 1483 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/DoubleBackSlash.pm 2021/07/23 | 1479 | support/latexindent/documentation/title.tex -2021/07/23 | 147372 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-hunspell-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1464202 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 145 | systems/texlive/tlnet/install-tl.zip.sha512 -2021/07/23 | 144 | systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512 -2021/07/23 | 14349 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1421866 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/23 | 141840 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.tex 2021/07/23 | 14049 | support/latexindent/documentation/subsec-commands-and-their-options.tex 2021/07/23 | 137080 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/jlreq.r60015.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 136820 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 136816 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-fontconfig-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 1357 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml-entities.lua 2021/07/23 | 13572 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Special.pm 2021/07/23 | 1355018 | macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix/nicematrix.pdf 2021/07/23 | 135332 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tiscreen.doc.r60020.tar.xz 2021/07/23 | 134724 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/variablelm.doc.r60014.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 13465 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzip-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1340929 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-runtime-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 133862 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 13280 | macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.dtx -2021/07/23 | 1314849 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1314368 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb2-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 13111 | support/latexindent/documentation/appendices.tex -2021/07/23 | 1301192 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1291300 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 12661 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Braces.pm 2021/07/23 | 1250 | macros/latex/contrib/ifallfalse/README.md -2021/07/23 | 124280 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 1230 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml-stack.lua 2021/07/23 | 12302 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/HiddenChildren.pm -2021/07/23 | 1223018 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 1223016 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-zzdb3-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/23 | 122738904 | macros/context/latest/cont-tmf.zip 2021/07/23 | 12053 | support/latexindent/documentation/sec-fine-tuning.tex -2021/07/23 | 119819 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-dvips-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 118668 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pdfmanagement-testphase.source.r60016.tar.xz 2021/07/23 | 1184 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/tiscreen.r60020.tar.xz 2021/07/23 | 11823 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/FileContents.pm 2021/07/23 | 118190 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml.pdf -2021/07/23 | 1169718 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-poppler-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 1155 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/README -2021/07/23 | 1153 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini -2021/07/23 | 115350 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gregorio-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 1137 | macros/latex/contrib/macrolist/README.md 2021/07/23 | 11332 | macros/luatex/generic/luaxml/luaxml-mod-handler.lua 2021/07/23 | 11314 | macros/latex/contrib/macrolist/macrolist.dtx -2021/07/23 | 112981 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 112086 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-gd-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 109857 | support/latexindent/documentation/sec-the-m-switch.tex -2021/07/23 | 109030 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-jpeg-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 10858 | support/latexindent/documentation/sec-indent-config-and-settings.tex 2021/07/23 | 10806 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Heading.pm 2021/07/23 | 108044 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/texlive-scripts.r60012.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 1077989 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-asymptote-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/23 | 105856 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/siunitx.source.r60017.tar.xz -2021/07/23 | 105222 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-texware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma +2021/07/23 | 1044 | graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/README.txt 2021/07/23 | 10361 | support/latexindent/LatexIndent/Command.pm -2021/07/23 | 103399 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-lua53-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 103202 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-mfware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/23 | 100624 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/miktex-epstopdf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma 2021/07/22 | 98189 | macros/latex/contrib/siunitx/siunitx-unit.dtx 2021/07/22 | 964 | macros/latex/contrib/siunitx/README.md 2021/07/22 | 9040 | macros/latex/contrib/siunitx/siunitx-symbol.dtx @@ -431,7 +590,6 @@ 2021/07/22 | 133505 | macros/latex/contrib/tiscreen/doc/tiscreen-doc.pdf 2021/07/22 | 131536 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/fontools.doc.r60005.tar.xz 2021/07/22 | 125056 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/lipsum.r60008.tar.xz -2021/07/22 | 122959167 | macros/context/latest/cont-tmf.zip 2021/07/22 | 11 | macros/context/contrib/context-vim/VERSION 2021/07/22 | 117978 | language/japanese/jlreq/jlreq.pdf 2021/07/22 | 115830 | macros/latex/contrib/siunitx/siunitx-number.dtx @@ -458,7 +616,6 @@ 2021/07/21 | 596 | macros/generic/texdimens/LICENSE.md 2021/07/21 | 594809 | macros/latex/contrib/pdfmanagement-testphase/l3backend-testphase.pdf 2021/07/21 | 59427 | macros/latex/contrib/stackengine/stackengine.tex -2021/07/21 | 590152 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.doc.r59999.tar.xz 2021/07/21 | 580 | macros/latex/contrib/pdfmanagement-testphase/transparent-ltx.sty 2021/07/21 | 577451 | macros/latex/contrib/pdfmanagement-testphase/l3pdfannot.pdf 2021/07/21 | 576432 | macros/latex/contrib/pdfmanagement-testphase/l3pdffield-radiobutton.pdf @@ -487,7 +644,6 @@ 2021/07/21 | 3828 | macros/generic/xstring/README 2021/07/21 | 37798 | macros/generic/xstring/test_etex.tex 2021/07/21 | 3729 | fonts/utilities/fontools/share/fontools_t2b.enc -2021/07/21 | 36624 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.source.r59999.tar.xz 2021/07/21 | 3651 | fonts/utilities/fontools/share/fontools_t2c.enc 2021/07/21 | 35 | macros/latex/contrib/to-be-determined/DEPENDS.txt 2021/07/21 | 3080 | fonts/utilities/fontools/share/fontools_ts1.enc @@ -533,7 +689,6 @@ 2021/07/21 | 1660 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/catechis.r59998.tar.xz 2021/07/21 | 160879 | fonts/utilities/fontools/bin/autoinst 2021/07/21 | 160448 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/cjk-ko.doc.r59996.tar.xz -2021/07/21 | 16024 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easybook.r59999.tar.xz 2021/07/21 | 15944 | macros/latex/contrib/pdfmanagement-testphase/ltdocinit.dtx 2021/07/21 | 1590 | macros/latex/contrib/to-be-determined/to-be-determined.sty 2021/07/21 | 15876 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/babel-french.r59997.tar.xz @@ -630,7 +785,6 @@ 2021/07/19 | 4062 | macros/latex/contrib/beamer-contrib/themes/beamertheme-focus/focus-logo.pdf 2021/07/19 | 400 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/latex-via-exemplos.r59977.tar.xz 2021/07/19 | 39897 | graphics/pgf/contrib/spectralsequences/examples/HFPSS-KO.pdf -2021/07/19 | 3640 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.source.r59980.tar.xz 2021/07/19 | 3640 | macros/latex/contrib/beamer-contrib/themes/beamertheme-focus/README.md 2021/07/19 | 35777 | macros/latex/contrib/beamer-contrib/themes/beamertheme-focus/focus-demo/demo-titlepage.jpg 2021/07/19 | 35571 | macros/latex/contrib/beamer-contrib/themes/beamertheme-focus/focus-demo/demo-subsectionpage.jpg @@ -656,7 +810,6 @@ 2021/07/19 | 224972 | graphics/pgf/contrib/spectralsequences/examples/ASS-tmf_2.pdf 2021/07/19 | 2220 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/easing.r59975.tar.xz 2021/07/19 | 22150 | graphics/pgf/contrib/spectralsequences/src/sseqmacromakers.code.tex -2021/07/19 | 2160 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.r59980.tar.xz 2021/07/19 | 21492 | graphics/pgf/contrib/spectralsequences/examples/unstable_ASS_SO.pdf 2021/07/19 | 2088204 | graphics/pgf/contrib/spectralsequences.zip 2021/07/19 | 2065324 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/latex-via-exemplos.doc.r59977.tar.xz @@ -665,7 +818,6 @@ 2021/07/19 | 197604 | graphics/pgf/contrib/spectralsequences/examples/ASS-S_2.pdf 2021/07/19 | 19718 | graphics/pgf/contrib/spectralsequences/manual/spectralsequencesmanualpreamble.tex 2021/07/19 | 1936 | macros/latex/contrib/beamer-contrib/themes/beamertheme-focus/beamerthemefocus.sty -2021/07/19 | 185220 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/macrolist.doc.r59980.tar.xz 2021/07/19 | 1819 | graphics/pgf/contrib/spectralsequences/examples/MaySS-bo-A(1).tex 2021/07/19 | 17782 | macros/latex/contrib/letterswitharrows/letterswitharrows.dtx 2021/07/19 | 1656 | graphics/pgf/contrib/spectralsequences/examples/unstable_ASS_SO.tex @@ -710,7 +862,6 @@ 2021/07/18 | 87 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/style/base.ins 2021/07/18 | 8732 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/style/mu/med.dtx 2021/07/18 | 869 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/locale/slovak.ins -2021/07/18 | 8645 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko.tar.lzma 2021/07/18 | 845 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/locale/czech.ins 2021/07/18 | 8201 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/easing__source.tar.lzma 2021/07/18 | 8082 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-ped-czech-color.eps @@ -751,7 +902,6 @@ 2021/07/18 | 499 | systems/win32/miktex/source/miktex-21.7.tar.xz.asc 2021/07/18 | 4793 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-fss-english-color.eps 2021/07/18 | 4779 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-fss-english.eps -2021/07/18 | 4730 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/stripsemantex.sty 2021/07/18 | 4657 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-fsps-czech-color.pdf 2021/07/18 | 4652 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-fsps-czech.pdf 2021/07/18 | 4615 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-phil-english-color.eps @@ -772,12 +922,10 @@ 2021/07/18 | 44910 | graphics/mcf2graph/mcf_man_soc.mf 2021/07/18 | 4485 | graphics/mcf2graph/README 2021/07/18 | 443164 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/lwarp.source.r59959.tar.xz -2021/07/18 | 442431 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex.zip 2021/07/18 | 441414 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/lwarp__source.tar.lzma 2021/07/18 | 4398 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-sci-czech-color.pdf 2021/07/18 | 4393 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-sci-czech.pdf 2021/07/18 | 4386 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/longdivision__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/18 | 4320 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko__source.tar.lzma 2021/07/18 | 43104 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/emoji.r59961.tar.xz 2021/07/18 | 42257 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/emoji.tar.lzma 2021/07/18 | 4119 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-ped-czech-color.pdf @@ -790,7 +938,6 @@ 2021/07/18 | 4000 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-ped-english.eps 2021/07/18 | 3953 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-med-english-color.eps 2021/07/18 | 3939 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-med-english.eps -2021/07/18 | 385078 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.pdf 2021/07/18 | 38432 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-law-color.eps 2021/07/18 | 3841 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base-czech-color.pdf 2021/07/18 | 3837 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base-czech.pdf @@ -822,7 +969,6 @@ 2021/07/18 | 31390 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-fsps.eps 2021/07/18 | 3128 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-phil-english-color.pdf 2021/07/18 | 3123 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-phil-english.pdf -2021/07/18 | 311149 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.sty 2021/07/18 | 3097 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-fss-english-color.pdf 2021/07/18 | 30927 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base-color.eps 2021/07/18 | 3091 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-fss-english.pdf @@ -869,11 +1015,9 @@ 2021/07/18 | 19363 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-ped-color.eps 2021/07/18 | 184371 | graphics/mcf2graph/mcf_mplib_exa.pdf 2021/07/18 | 18339 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-law.pdf -2021/07/18 | 177482 | macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.tex 2021/07/18 | 1760 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/LICENSE.tex 2021/07/18 | 17579 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-law-color.pdf 2021/07/18 | 15892 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base.pdf -2021/07/18 | 157608 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/cjk-ko__doc.tar.lzma 2021/07/18 | 15264 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/locale/english.dtx 2021/07/18 | 15062 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-base-color.pdf 2021/07/18 | 14978 | graphics/mcf2graph/CHANGELOG @@ -900,234 +1044,3 @@ 2021/07/18 | 1018 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/twemoji-colr__doc.tar.lzma 2021/07/18 | 101310 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-pharm-color.eps 2021/07/18 | 101282 | macros/latex/contrib/fithesis/logo/mu/fithesis-pharm.eps -2021/07/17 | 98248 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-texware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 98190 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mfware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 973826 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-asymptote-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 97157 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-gd-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 96281 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-gregorio-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 95344 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 94784 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-jpeg-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 94344 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-lua53-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 89 | macros/latex/contrib/lwarp/lwarp_baseline_marker.png -2021/07/17 | 87630 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-png-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 8758 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-md5-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 83582 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 8208 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/changes.r59950.tar.xz -2021/07/17 | 818937 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-pdftex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 80680 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-freeglut-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 78739 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-png-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 78126 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-fonts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 7689 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-md5-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 76804 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mpmcli-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 75747 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-bibtex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 743079 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-pdftex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 74139 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-lzma-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 73215 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-fonts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 73108 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-graphite2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 72162 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-ps2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 719 | macros/latex/contrib/lwarp/lwarp_baseline_marker.eps -2021/07/17 | 71693 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-freeglut-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 716102 | fonts/twemoji-colr.zip -2021/07/17 | 70738 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-web-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 69958 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-tex4ht-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 68388 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pyluatex.doc.r59954.tar.xz -2021/07/17 | 68060 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-bibtex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 680603 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-lcdf-typetools-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 68039 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 67588 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-lzma-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 67431 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mpmcli-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 673 | fonts/twemoji-colr/README.md -2021/07/17 | 65685 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-texify-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 65508 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-web-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 64345 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-graphite2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 63882 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-ps2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 63832 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-tex4ht-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 629433 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-lcdf-typetools-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 62743 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-fmt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 625132 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-yap-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 6245 | macros/luatex/latex/emoji/emoji.sty -2021/07/17 | 62185 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 6217 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/changes.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 61865 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-cweb-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 60717 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mkfntmap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 59943 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-tdsutil-bin-x64.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 595612 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-libressl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 590269 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-yap-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 5872 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/pyluatex.r59954.tar.xz -2021/07/17 | 57796 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-psutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 57537 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-bibarts-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 574520 | info/latex-via-exemplos/latex-via-exemplos.tex -2021/07/17 | 57151 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-xml2pmx-bin-x64.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 57030 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-texify-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 56627 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-cjkutils-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 566257 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 56512 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-tdsutil-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 56441 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-arctrl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 56354 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-fmt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 56347 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-ttf2pk2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 55485 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-xml2pmx-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 54674 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-cweb-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 531913 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-libressl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 52393 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-m-tx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 51766 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-synctex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 51291 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-cjkutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 51188 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-dvicopy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 510798 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-log4cxx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 51068 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-arctrl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 509729 | systems/win32/miktex/doc/miktex.pdf -2021/07/17 | 50623 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-psutils-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 50026 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-bibarts-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 4856 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/expkv.r59949.tar.xz -2021/07/17 | 484096 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-harfbuzz-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 48198 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-expat-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 476714 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-log4cxx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 476672 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/expkv.doc.r59949.tar.xz -2021/07/17 | 46981 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mtprint-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 461757 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 45942 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-m-tx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 45935 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-dvicopy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 45423 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-dvipng-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 43361 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zlib-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 43126 | macros/latex/contrib/longdivision/longdivision.sty -2021/07/17 | 43015 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 43012 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-expat-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 42844 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mtprint-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 42649 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mthelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 425704 | macros/luatex/latex/emoji/emoji-table.def -2021/07/17 | 42368 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-synctex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 4162896 | install/macros/latex/contrib/lwarp.tds.zip -2021/07/17 | 41121 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-dvipng-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 40229 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-patgen-bin-x64.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 399 | graphics/pgf/contrib/easing/README -2021/07/17 | 392679 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-cairo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 39155 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/changes__source.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 39091 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zlib-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 38141 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-gsf2pk-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 37762 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mthelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 37331 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-upmendex-bin-x64.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 37248 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-posix-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 36586 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-chktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 3580871 | macros/latex/contrib/lwarp.zip -2021/07/17 | 35731 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-patgen-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 35058 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mspack-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 34681 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-axohelp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 345984 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-xetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 3407656 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/changes.doc.r59950.tar.xz -2021/07/17 | 3392572 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/changes__doc.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 33625 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-uriparser-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 33550 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-upmendex-bin.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 33123 | macros/latex/contrib/lwarp/lwarp.ins -2021/07/17 | 330462 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-cairo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 32576 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-chktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 324712 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 319237 | graphics/pgf/contrib/easing.zip -2021/07/17 | 31499 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-makeindex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 31478 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-posix-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 313369 | graphics/pgf/contrib/easing/easing.pdf -2021/07/17 | 31306 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-autosp-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 31189 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mspack-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 3118198 | macros/latex/contrib/lwarp/lwarp.pdf -2021/07/17 | 311743 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-xetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 31109 | graphics/pgf/contrib/easing/easing.dtx -2021/07/17 | 30769 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-bzip2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 30100 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/nicematrix.r59952.tar.xz -2021/07/17 | 3005 | macros/latex/contrib/longdivision/README.md -2021/07/17 | 3002 | graphics/mcf2graph/mcf_exa_soc.mf -2021/07/17 | 30023 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-lacheck-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 29799 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-axohelp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 29559 | macros/latex/contrib/lwarp/lwarpmk.lua -2021/07/17 | 295413 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-freetype2-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 2947 | macros/latex/contrib/lwarp/lwarp_tutorial.txt -2021/07/17 | 28922 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-autosp-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 284820 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-dvipdfmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 283894 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-metapost-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 28357 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-lacheck-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 28135 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-findtexmf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 2796870 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-texworks-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 27768 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/expkv.source.r59949.tar.xz -2021/07/17 | 27714 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-uriparser-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 2737489 | macros/latex/contrib/lwarp/lwarp.dtx -2021/07/17 | 27259 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-teckit-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 27172 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-bzip2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 27106 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-makeindex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 2673269 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-texworks-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 264081 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-console-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 2597201 | systems/win32/miktex/setup/windows-x64/miktexsetup-4.2-x64.zip -2021/07/17 | 258946 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-freetype2-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 25277 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-teckit-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 250244 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-metapost-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 24998 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-findtexmf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 24972 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 243428 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-pmx-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 23869 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-popt-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 238651 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-console-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 23300 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-devnag-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 2306461 | info/latex-via-exemplos.zip -2021/07/17 | 2260822 | systems/win32/miktex/setup/windows-x86/miktexsetup-4.2.zip -2021/07/17 | 22006 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-fribidixetex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 215065 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-metafont-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 21174 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-devnag-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 207861 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-pmx-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 207014 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-omegaware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 202925 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-pixman-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 20107 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-popt-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 2006278 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-luatex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 199489 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mpfr-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 198379 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-pixman-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 196839 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-metafont-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 196722 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mo-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 195611 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-curl-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 194178 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-omegaware-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 19416 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/changes.source.r59950.tar.xz -2021/07/17 | 18134 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 179907 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mpfr-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 179763 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-curl-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 17957 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-kpathsea-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 178399 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mo-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1767384 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/nicematrix.doc.r59952.tar.xz -2021/07/17 | 1721853 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-luatex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 169258 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-tex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 16381 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-tex2xindy-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 16349 | graphics/mcf2graph/mcf_mplib_exa.tex -2021/07/17 | 16310 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-kpathsea-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1624 | macros/latex/contrib/lwarp/README.txt -2021/07/17 | 1615 | graphics/pgf/contrib/easing/easing.ins -2021/07/17 | 159392 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-hunspell-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 154763 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-tex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 154597 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-fontconfig-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 154154 | macros/latex/contrib/longdivision.zip -2021/07/17 | 152721 | macros/latex/contrib/longdivision/longdivision_manual.pdf -2021/07/17 | 147489 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-hunspell-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1464450 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-runtime-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1437964 | fonts/twemoji-colr/TwemojiMozilla.ttf -2021/07/17 | 14316 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzip-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1424025 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 14063 | macros/luatex/latex/emoji/emoji-doc.tex -2021/07/17 | 136615 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-fontconfig-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 136410 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mktex-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 13442 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-zzip-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1340575 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-runtime-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 133963 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-dvips-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1302290 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-poppler-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1282591 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-dvisvgm-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 124389 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mktex-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1205 | macros/luatex/latex/emoji/README.md -2021/07/17 | 119902 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-dvips-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1183440 | install/macros/luatex/latex/emoji.tds.zip -2021/07/17 | 1183104 | macros/luatex/latex/emoji.zip -2021/07/17 | 1169942 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-poppler-bin-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1165104 | macros/luatex/latex/emoji/emoji-doc.pdf -2021/07/17 | 115204 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-gregorio-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 112806 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-epstopdf-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 112213 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-gd-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 1118 | info/latex-via-exemplos/changelog.txt -2021/07/17 | 1099977 | info/latex-via-exemplos/latex-via-exemplos-oneside.pdf -2021/07/17 | 1099381 | info/latex-via-exemplos/latex-via-exemplos.pdf -2021/07/17 | 109019 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-jpeg-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 10810 | macros/latex/contrib/longdivision/longdivision_manual.tex -2021/07/17 | 1074471 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-asymptote-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 104866 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-texware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 103586 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-mfware-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 103316 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-lua53-bin-x64-2.9.tar.lzma -2021/07/17 | 100864 | systems/texlive/tlnet/archive/nicematrix.source.r59952.tar.xz -2021/07/17 | 100398 | systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/miktex-epstopdf-bin-2.9.tar.lzma diff --git a/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/README.txt b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/README.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..265780b230 --- /dev/null +++ b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/README.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# The pfdicons package + +Copyright 2021 Aaron Drews. + +Contact: + +Current version: 1.0, 2021/07/23 + + +## Abstract + +The `pfdicons` package provides TikZ shapes to represent commonly encountered unit operations for depiction in process flow diagrams (PFDs) and, to a lesser extent, process and instrumentation diagrams (PIDs). The package was designed with undergraduate chemical engineering students and faculty in mind, and the number of units provided should cover--in Turton's estimate--about 90 percent of all fluid processing operations. + + +## Licensing + +The `pfdicons` package is covered by the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL), version 1.3c or later. The latest version can be found at . + + +## Documentation + +The documentation of the package can be found in `pfdicons-doc.pdf`, provided together with its source code `pfdicons-doc.tex`. A log of changes to the package is provided in `pfdicons-changelog.pdf`, which is provided together with its source code `pfdicons-changelog.tex`. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.pdf b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..92cbc1ae0c Binary files /dev/null and b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.pdf differ diff --git a/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.tex b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2c13233671 --- /dev/null +++ b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.tex @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage[margin=1in]{geometry} + +\title{Changelog for \texttt{pfdicons} package} +\author{Aaron Drews\\\texttt{adrews at ucsd dot edu}} +\date{\today} + +\begin{document} + \maketitle + + \begin{description} + \item[Version 1.0, 2021/07/23:] Initial release + + \begin{itemize} + \item Package file: pfdicons.sty + \item Primary files: README.md, pfdicons-doc.tex, pfdicons-changelog.tex + \item Derived files: pfdicons-doc.pdf, pfdicons-changelog.pdf. + \end{itemize} + + \end{description} +\end{document} diff --git a/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.pdf b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bbcfdcc577 Binary files /dev/null and b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.pdf differ diff --git a/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.tex b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c2ce6bd2fe --- /dev/null +++ b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.tex @@ -0,0 +1,3809 @@ +\documentclass[11pt]{article} +\usepackage[margin=1in]{geometry} +\usepackage{tikz, stix2, inconsolata, ifthen, lipsum, array, xspace, listings, booktabs, adjustbox, longtable, enumitem, amsmath} +\usepackage[hidelinks, colorlinks=true, linkcolor=red]{hyperref} +\usetikzlibrary{positioning, shapes, arrows.meta, matrix, calc, intersections, spath3, plotmarks, fit, decorations.pathmorphing} +\usepackage{pfdicons} + +\definecolor{LightGray}{gray}{0.93} +\lstset{ + language=[LaTeX]TeX, + texcsstyle=*\bfseries, + commentstyle=\color{gray}\ttfamily, + emph={draw, node, path, coordinate}, emphstyle=\bfseries, + tabsize=3, + numbers=left, + breaklines=true, + backgroundcolor=\color{LightGray}, + basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily, + xleftmargin=5ex, + xrightmargin=4ex} +\lstMakeShortInline| + +%\input{pfdicons.sty} + +\newcommand\Tikz{Ti\textit{k}Z\xspace} +\newcommand\redtt[1]{{\color{red}\texttt{#1}}} +\newcommand\boldtt[1]{\textbf{\texttt{#1}}} + + +\title{The \boldtt{pfdicons} Package: Documentation} +\author{\Large Aaron Drews\\ \texttt{adrews@ucsd.edu}} +\date{v1.0 from \today} +\setcounter{tocdepth}{2} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + + +\section{Introduction} +This package provides \Tikz shapes and a few supporting functions to draw icons and streams for process flow diagrams (PFDs) in chemical engineering, and to a lesser extent process and instrumentation diagrams (PIDs) in the same field. Unit operations provided by this package are expected to cover--in Turton's estimate--about 90\% of fluid processing systems. + +This package was developed to support students and faculty in undergraduate chemical engineering courses where excessive detail and customization are not necessary to convey meaning, as opposed to professionals who may require more customization than this package currently provides. Examples from several standard textbooks in undergraduate chemical engineering have been reproduced in the Examples section to illustrate the applicability of this package. A visual summary of all process units is provided at the end of this document as a quick reference. + +\section{Usage} +To use this package simply provide +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\usepackage{tikz} +\usepackage{pfdicons} +\end{lstlisting} +in your preamble. The |tikz| package must be loaded first. The |pfdicons| package automatically loads the |ifthen| package as well as the following \Tikz libraries: |positioning|, |shapes|, |arrows.meta|, and |spath3|. Most shapes provided by the package are drawn within a |tikzpicture| +environment using the basic syntax +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\begin{tikzpicture} + \node[] {}; +\end{tikzpicture} +\end{lstlisting} +where || is the desired process unit. Like most \Tikz shapes the icons provided by |pfdicons| can be scaled, rotated, and colored in the usual ways: +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \node[basic hx] at (0,0) {}; + \node[basic hx, draw=blue] at (1,0) {}; + \node[basic hx, draw=red, fill=yellow] at (0,-1) {}; + \node[basic hx, scale=0.75, rotate=90, anchor=center] at (1,-1) {}; +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[basic hx] at (0,0) {}; + \node[basic hx, draw=blue] at (1,0) {}; + \node[basic hx, draw=red, fill=yellow] at (0,-1) {}; + \node[basic hx, scale=0.75, rotate=90, thick] at (1,-1) {}; + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} +Two additional PGF keys are available for some process units: |unit int| which modifies the interior contents of the process unit, and |unit ext| which modifies the exterior of the process unit.\footnote{A few other keys are available for drawing streams which are introduced later.} These keys can be used as +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[, unit int=, unit ext=] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +where || and || are interior and exterior options specific to the process unit. For most process units both keys can be used to combine effects. For example, the |basic hx| shape drawn above has keys |U tube| and |stems| which can be combined as follows: +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \node[basic hx] at (0,0) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util] at (1,0) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit fill=U tube] at (0,-1) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit fill=U tube, unit ext=util] at (1,-1) {}; +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[basic hx] at (0,0) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util] at (1,0) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit int=U tube] at (0,-1) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit int=U tube, unit ext=util] at (1,-1) {}; + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} +However, unlike ``standard'' nodes \textit{the curly braces should always be empty}; that is, text cannot be directly included as part of the node (this prohibition includes keys like |label|). Annotations and labels of shapes from |pfdicons| must be included as separate nodes: +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + % No: + % \node[basic hx] {H-101}; + + % Yes: + \node[basic hx] (g) {}; + \node[right] at (g.east) {H-101}; +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + % No: + % \node[basic hx] {H-101}; + + % Yes: + \node[basic hx] (g) {}; + \node[right] at (g.east) {H-101}; + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} + +All process units have the standard cardinal and off-cardinal anchors which can be accessed using the standard \Tikz anchor notation such as |f.north| or |mycolumn.south east|. Some units have additional anchors on half-cardinal points (\textit{e.g.}, |north north east| or |east south east|) or special process unit features (\textit{e.g.}, |east jacket| or |actuator|). All compass anchors of custom shapes provided by the |pfdicons| package are \textbf{aliased with abbreviated versions} (\textit{e.g.}, |n| for |north|, |ene| for |east north east|) to allow for shortened code. Full anchor names can always be used to provide syntax consistency with core \Tikz. + +\section{Process units} +\subsection{Reactors} +\subsubsection{Tank reactor} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[tank reactor] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[tank reactor] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[tank reactor] {}; + & + \node[tank reactor, scale=1.5] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/left, + se/right, + sw/left, + nne/above right, + nnw/above left, + sse/below right, + ssw/below left, + ese/right, + wsw/left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |tank reactor| shape provides a cylindrical tank reactor, also referred to as a stirred-tank reactor, continuous stirred-tank reactor (CSTRs), or autoclave. The |center| anchor is offset slightly to accommodate fill and interior options as described below. Several key modifiers are available: + +\begin{center} + \begin{longtable}{p{1.2in}p{2.5in}c} + \caption{Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{tank reactor} shape.}\\ + \toprule + \texttt{key=value} & Description & Example \\ + \midrule + \endfirsthead + + \multicolumn{3}{c}{\tablename\ \thetable: Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{tank reactor} shape \textit{(cont'd)}} \\ + \midrule + \endhead + + \bottomrule + \endfoot + + \bottomrule + \endlastfoot + + \texttt{unit int=stirred} & Adds a rounded stirrer with motor and + mixing blade. Three additional anchors are specific to this option: + \redtt{west motor}, \redtt{north motor}, and \redtt{east motor}. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred] (f) {}; + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred, above=of f.north] {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + west motor/left, + north motor/above, + east motor/right} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit int=liquid} & Adds wavy lines from |west| to |east| to + indicate a liquid surface. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[tank reactor, unit int=liquid] {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit int=stirred} \texttt{liquid} & A combination of |unit int=stirred| and |unit int=liquid|. + & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred liquid] {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit ext=lower} \texttt{jacket} & Adds a jacket around the lower portion of the reactor. Two additional anchors are specific to this option: \redtt{west jacket} and \redtt{east jacket}. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[tank reactor, unit ext=lower jacket] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + west jacket/left, + east jacket/right} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {};} + + \node[align=left, anchor=west] at (f.east jacket) {\footnotesize\texttt{east}\\ \footnotesize\texttt{jacket}}; + \node[align=right, anchor=east] at (f.west jacket) {\footnotesize\texttt{west}\\ \footnotesize\texttt{jacket}}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit ext=side} \texttt{jacket} & Adds a jacket around the side of the reactor. Several additional anchors available: \redtt{west jacket}, \redtt{north west jacket}, \redtt{south west jacket}, \redtt{east jacket}, \redtt{north east jacket}, and \redtt{south east jacket}. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} [font=\footnotesize\ttfamily] + \node[tank reactor, unit ext=side jacket] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor in { + west jacket, + east jacket, + north west jacket, + north east jacket, + south west jacket, + south east jacket} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {};} + + \node[align=left, anchor=west] at (f.east jacket) {east jacket}; + \node[align=left, anchor=south west] at (f.north east jacket) {north east\\[-3pt]jacket}; + \node[align=left, anchor=north west] at (f.south east jacket) {south east\\[-3pt]jacket}; + \node[align=right, anchor=east] at (f.west jacket) {west jacket}; + \node[align=right, anchor=south east] at (f.north west jacket) {north west\\[-3pt]jacket}; + \node[align=right, anchor=north east] at (f.south west jacket) {south west\\[-3pt]jacket}; + + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + \end{longtable} +\end{center} + + + + +\subsubsection{Tube reactor} +\begin{lstlisting}{numbers=none} +\node[tube reactor] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[tube reactor] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[tube reactor] {}; + & + \node[tube reactor, scale=1.8] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left, + nne/above, + nnw/above, + sse/below, + ssw/below, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |tube reactor| shape provides a horizontal cylinder with curved sides to be used for such reactors as plug flow reactors, packed bed reactors, fixed bed reactors, tubular reactors, and so forth. Several key-value pairs can be provided to indicate common fills and utility features: +\begin{center} + \begin{longtable}{p{1.5in}p{3in}c} + \caption{Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{tube reactor} shape.}\\ + \toprule + \texttt{key=value} & Description & Example \\ + \midrule + \endfirsthead + + \multicolumn{3}{c}{\tablename\ \thetable: Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{tube reactor} shape \textit{(cont'd)}} \\ + \midrule + \endhead + + \bottomrule + \endfoot + + \bottomrule + \endlastfoot + + \texttt{unit int=packed} & Adds a cross representing a packed, dumped, or random fill within the reactor. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[tube reactor, unit int=packed] {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + \texttt{unit int=fixed} & Adds angled lines representing a fixed bed.& + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[tube reactor, unit int=fixed] {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + \texttt{unit int=tubular} & Adds horizontal lines representing tubes for (\textit{e.g.}) shell-and-tube reactors, double-pipe reactors, and so forth.& + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[tube reactor, unit int=tubular] {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + \texttt{unit ext=cis shell} & Adds two shell-side stems, both on the north side with anchors \redtt{west shell} and \redtt{east shell}. Stems can be moved to the south side by rotating (|rotate=180|) or scaling (|yscale=-1|) the node. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize\ttfamily] + \node[tube reactor, unit ext=cis shell] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor in {west shell, east shell} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {};} + \node[align=right, anchor=south east] at (f.west shell) {west\\[-3pt]shell}; + \node[align=left, anchor=south west] at (f.east shell) {east\\[-3pt]shell}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + \texttt{unit ext=trans shell} & Adds two shell-side stems, one on the north side and one on the south side, with anchors \redtt{north shell} and \redtt{south shell}. Stem locations can be swapped by scaling the node (|yscale=-1| or |xscale=-1|). & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize\ttfamily] + \node[tube reactor, unit ext=trans shell] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor in {north shell, south shell} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {};} + \node[align=right, anchor=south east] at (f.north shell) {north\\[-3pt]shell}; + \node[align=left, anchor=north west] at (f.south shell) {south\\[-3pt]shell}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + \end{longtable} +\end{center} + + + + + + +\subsection{Heat exchangers} +\subsubsection{Basic heat exchanger} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[basic hx] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[basic hx] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[basic hx] {}; + & + \node[basic hx, scale=1.5] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |basic hx| shape provides a circle with a jagged interior line and represents a generic heat exchange unit. Only the four cardinal and intercardinal anchors are used; the half-cardinals |nnw|, |nne|, |ssw|, and |sse| anchors are not used. Protrusions from the inner ``tube'' line can be added to provide additional indication of tube-side fluids, typically to indicate utility fluids (hence the |util| value). Additional anchors can be used to place labels at ends of the protrusions. +\begin{center} + \begin{longtable}{p{1.5in}p{3in}c} + \caption{Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{basic hx} shape.}\\ + \toprule + \texttt{key=value} & Description & Example \\ + \midrule + \endfirsthead + + \multicolumn{3}{c}{\tablename\ \thetable: Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{basic hx} shape \textit{(cont'd)}} \\ + \midrule + \endhead + + \bottomrule + \endfoot + + \bottomrule + \endlastfoot + + \texttt{unit ext=util} & Adds protrusions from the inner tube, typically to indicate utility fluids. Additional anchors \redtt{south util} and \redtt{north util} are available at the terminals. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north util/above, + south util/below} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + \texttt{unit int=U tube} & Modifies interior to a generic U-tube orientation with both tube points on the same shell side. The |south west| and |south east| anchors are located at these tube points. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[basic hx, unit int=U tube] {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + \texttt{unit int=U tube,}\newline \texttt{unit ext=util} & Modifies interior to U-tube orientation and adds protrusions, typically to indicate utility fluids. Additional anchors \redtt{west util} and \redtt{east util} are available at the terminals. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[basic hx, unit int=U tube, unit ext=util] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + west util/below left, + east util/below right} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + \end{longtable} +\end{center} + + +\subsubsection{Shell and tube heat exchanger} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[shell and tube hx] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[shell and tube hx] (g) {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[shell and tube hx] {}; + & + \node[shell and tube hx, scale=1.5] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left, + nne/above, + nnw/above, + sse/below, + ssw/below, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |shell and tube hx| shape provides a rectangle with an inner set of horizontal lines representing a shell and tube heat exchanger. Keys can modify the appearance to provide shell-side stems or modify the tube ends to represent two-pass or four-pass arrangements. +\begin{center} + \begin{longtable}{p{1.5in}p{3in}c} + \caption{Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{shell and tube hx} shape.}\\ + \toprule + \texttt{key=value} & Description & Example \\ + \midrule + \endfirsthead + + \multicolumn{3}{c}{\tablename\ \thetable: Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{shell and tube hx} shape \textit{(cont'd)}} \\ + \midrule + \endhead + + \bottomrule + \endfoot + + \bottomrule + \endlastfoot + + \texttt{unit int=two pass} & Adds a horizontal line on the west shell side to indicate a two-pass heat exchanger.& + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[shell and tube hx, unit int=two pass] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + \texttt{unit int=four pass} & Adds two horizontal line on the west shell side and one on the east to indicate a four-pass heat exchanger.& + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[shell and tube hx, unit int=four pass] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit ext=cis shell} & Adds two shell-side stems, both on the north side with anchors \redtt{west shell} and \redtt{east shell}. Stems can be moved to the south side by rotating (|rotate=180|) or scaling (|yscale=-1|) the node. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize\ttfamily] + \node[shell and tube hx, unit ext=cis shell] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor in {west shell, east shell} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {};} + \node[align=right, anchor=south east] at (f.west shell) {west\\[-3pt]shell}; + \node[align=left, anchor=south west] at (f.east shell) {east\\[-3pt]shell}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + \texttt{unit ext=trans shell} & Adds two shell-side stems, one on the north side and one on the south side, with anchors \redtt{north shell} and \redtt{south shell}. Stem locations can be swapped by scaling the node (|yscale=-1| or |xscale=-1|). & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize\ttfamily] + \node[shell and tube hx, unit ext=trans shell] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor in {north shell, south shell} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {};} + \node[align=right, anchor=south east] at (f.north shell) {north\\[-3pt]shell}; + \node[align=left, anchor=north west] at (f.south shell) {south\\[-3pt]shell}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + \end{longtable} +\end{center} + + + +\subsubsection{Plate heat exchanger} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[plate hx] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[plate hx] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[plate hx] {}; + & + \node[plate hx, scale=1.8] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left, + nne/above, + nnw/above, + sse/below, + ssw/below, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |plate hx| shape provides a rectangle with an inner set of vertical lines representing a plate-and-frame heat exchanger. This unit has no |key=value| pairs for additional modification. + + +\subsubsection{Fired exchanger} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[fired hx] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[fired hx] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[fired hx] {}; + & + \node[fired hx, scale=1] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/right, + sw/left, + nne/right, + nnw/left, + sse/below right, + ssw/below left, + ese/below right, + wsw/below left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |fired hx| shape provides a square unit with tapered chimney representing a fired heat exchanger. A horizontal through-line represents the process tube; a small circular icon at the bottom indicates the combustion region of the heat exchanger. The default number of process tubes is one (|unit int=single| or omitted) but additional process tubes can be added using the |unit int| key. Inlets and outlets will shift to correspond to half-cardinal anchors as shown below. +\begin{center} + \begin{longtable}{p{1.5in}p{3in}c} + \caption{Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{fired hx} shape.}\\ + \toprule + \texttt{key=value} & Description & Example \\ + \midrule + \endfirsthead + + \multicolumn{3}{c}{\tablename\ \thetable: Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{fired hx} shape \textit{(cont'd)}} \\ + \midrule + \endhead + + \bottomrule + \endfoot + + \bottomrule + \endlastfoot + + \texttt{unit int=double} & Provides two tubes roughly corresponding to + the radiative and convective zones. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[fired hx, unit int=double] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=2pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + \texttt{unit int=triple} & Provides three tubes roughly corresponding to a radiative zone and two convective zones. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[fired hx, unit int=triple] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + nne/right, + nnw/left, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=2pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + \end{longtable} +\end{center} + + +\subsection{Separation units} +\subsubsection{Column} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[column] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[column] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -15mm) grid (10mm, 15mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -15mm) to (0mm, 15mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,15mm) {\color{blue!20}$+15$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-15mm){\color{blue!20}$-15$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-15mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[column] {}; + & + \node[column] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/left, + se/right, + sw/left, + nne/above right, + nnw/above left, + sse/below right, + ssw/below left, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |column| shape provides a vertical, elongated cylinder as a generic separation column. The default fill is empty but several |key=value| pairs are provided to represent the most common separation units. Several additional anchors and keys are available based on these settings. + +\begin{center} + \begin{longtable}{p{1.75in}p{3in}c} + \caption{Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{column} shape.}\\ + \toprule + \texttt{key=value} & Description & Example \\ + \midrule + \endfirsthead + + \multicolumn{3}{c}{\tablename\ \thetable: Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{column} shape \textit{(cont'd)}} \\ + \midrule + \endhead + + \bottomrule + \endfoot + + \bottomrule + \endlastfoot + + \texttt{unit ext=simple hx} & Provides stylized representation of condenser and reboiler along with anchors \redtt{distillate} and \redtt{bottoms} for stream connections. These anchors always exist but coincide with |north east| and |south east| when the |simple hx| key is omitted.& + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[column, unit ext=simple hx] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + distillate/right, + bottoms/right} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + \texttt{unit int=tray}\newline \texttt{unit int=dashed tray} & Dashed, horizontal lines. Dashes will always have three segments and two openings.& + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[column, unit int=tray] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit int=weir tray} & Solid, horizontal lines with small risers to + represent tray weirs.& + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[column, unit int=weir tray] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit int=numbered tray}\newline\newline\hspace*{1em}\textit{associated keys:}\newline\hspace*{2em}\texttt{top tray=99}\newline\hspace*{2em}\texttt{feed tray=00}\newline\hspace*{2em}\texttt{bottom tray=22} & Dashed, horizontal lines at top, feed, and bottom trays. Associated keys |top tray|, |feed tray|, and |bottom tray| can be used to indicate tray numbers \textbf{if column is not transformed}. If column is transformed then associated keys can be omitted and anchors \redtt{feed tray}, \redtt{top tray}, and \redtt{bottom tray} used for placement of additional text nodes.& + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[column, unit int=numbered tray, top tray=99, feed tray=00, + bottom tray=22] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + top tray/below, + feed tray/below, + bottom tray/below} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit int=packed} & Large cross symbol indicating random or dumped fill (packing).& + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[column, unit int=packed] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit int=double packed} & Two sections of random or dumped fill (packing) separated by a small, central gap.& + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[column, unit int=double packed] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ +\end{longtable} +\end{center} + + + + + + +\subsubsection{Vessel} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[vessel] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[vessel] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[vessel] {}; + & + \node[vessel, scale=1.5] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/left, + se/right, + sw/left, + nne/above right, + nnw/above left, + sse/below right, + ssw/below left, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |vessel| shape provides a vertical cylinder as a generic vessel. Such a vessel can be, for example, down-scaled and rotated 90${^\circ}$ can represent a product tank or a phase separator after a condenser. The default fill is empty but several |key=value| pairs are provided to represent two common vapor-liquid units as well as liquid accumulation tanks. Several additional anchors are available based on these settings. + +\begin{center} + \begin{longtable}{p{1.75in}p{3in}c} + \caption{Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{vessel} shape.}\\ + \toprule + \texttt{key=value} & Description & Example \\ + \midrule + \endfirsthead + + \multicolumn{3}{c}{\tablename\ \thetable: Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{vessel} shape \textit{(cont'd)}} \\ + \midrule + \endhead + + \bottomrule + \endfoot + + \bottomrule + \endlastfoot + + + \texttt{unit int=liquid} & Adds wavy lines across the middle of the vessel to indicate a liquid level. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[vessel, unit int=liquid] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit int = liquid rotated} & Adds wavy lines down the center of the vessel to indicate a liquid level. This key is intended to be used with a rotated node such as + \begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[vessel, rotate=90, unit int=liquid rotated] {}; + \end{lstlisting} + & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[vessel, rotate=90, unit int=liquid rotated] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit int=phase sep} & Adds a knock-down element near the |west| anchor and a dashed, horizontal line near the top of the vessel to indicate a demister pad. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[vessel, unit int=phase sep] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit ext=simple hx} & Adds a simplified heat transfer element to the bottom portion of the vessel. Two additional anchors, \redtt{north hx} and \redtt{south hx}, are located at the exterior points of the heat exchanger tubes. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[vessel, unit ext=simple hx] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north hx/right, + south hx/right} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + \end{longtable} +\end{center} + + + + +\subsection{Fluid transport} +\subsubsection{Centrifugal pump} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[centrifugal pump] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[centrifugal pump] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[centrifugal pump] {}; + & + \node[centrifugal pump, scale=1.5] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/left, + se/right, + sw/left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |centrifugal pump| shape provides a circular element with a triangular base to represent a centrifugal pump. An additional half-circle can be added using the |unit int| key to indicate the pump inlet and a rectangular outlet direction can be added using the |unit ext| key. + +\begin{center} + \begin{longtable}{p{1.75in}p{3in}c} + \caption{Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{centrifugal pump} shape.}\\ + \toprule + \texttt{key=value} & Description & Example \\ + \midrule + \endfirsthead + + \multicolumn{3}{c}{\tablename\ \thetable: Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{centrifugal pump} shape \textit{(cont'd)}} \\ + \midrule + \endhead + + \bottomrule + \endfoot + + \bottomrule + \endlastfoot + + \texttt{unit int=inlet west} & Adds a half-circle around the |center| anchor to accept an inlet stream to enter from the west. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[centrifugal pump, unit int=inlet west] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit int=inlet east} & Adds a half-circle around the |center| anchor to accept an inlet stream to enter from the east. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[centrifugal pump, unit int=inlet east] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit int=inlet north} & Adds a half-circle around the |center| anchor to accept an inlet stream to enter from the north. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[centrifugal pump, unit int=inlet north] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit int=inlet south} & Adds a half-circle around the |center| anchor to accept an inlet stream to enter from the south. Note that there is no means of removing the triangular base; such an inlet stream should be drawn as going through the base. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[centrifugal pump, unit int=inlet south] (f) {}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \texttt{unit ext=outlet east} & Adds a rectangular protrusion facing east to represent an outlet. Also adds the \redtt{outlet} anchor in the center of the outlet box. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[centrifugal pump, unit ext=outlet east] (f) {}; + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.outlet) {}; + \node[right] at (f.outlet) {\footnotesize\texttt{outlet}}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + \texttt{unit ext=outlet west} & Adds a rectangular protrusion facing west to represent an outlet. Also adds the \redtt{outlet} anchor in the center of the outlet box. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[centrifugal pump, unit ext=outlet west] (f) {}; + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.outlet) {}; + \node[left] at (f.outlet) {\footnotesize\texttt{outlet}}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + \texttt{unit ext=outlet north east} & Adds a rectangular protrusion facing north on the east side of the pump to represent an outlet. Also adds the \redtt{outlet} anchor in the center of the outlet box. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[centrifugal pump, unit ext=outlet north east] (f) {}; + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.outlet) {}; + \node[above] at (f.outlet) {\footnotesize\texttt{outlet}}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + \texttt{unit ext=outlet north west} & Adds a rectangular protrusion facing north on the west side of the pump to represent an outlet. Also adds the \redtt{outlet} anchor in the center of the outlet box. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[centrifugal pump, unit ext=outlet north west] (f) {}; + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.outlet) {}; + \node[above] at (f.outlet) {\footnotesize\texttt{outlet}}; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + & & \\ + + \end{longtable} +\end{center} + + + + +\subsubsection{Reciprocating pump} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[reciprocating pump] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[reciprocating pump] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[reciprocating pump] {}; + & + \node[reciprocating pump, scale=1] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/left, + se/right, + sw/left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |reciprocating pump| shape provides two square elements--a pump head and motor--connected by a simple shaft. Most anchors are placed relative to the pump head. This unit has no |key=value| pairs for additional modification. + + +\subsubsection{Compressor} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[compressor] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[compressor] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[compressor] {}; + & + \node[compressor, scale=2.5] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/left, + se/below right, + sw/left, + nne/above, + nnw/above, + sse/below, + ssw/below, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |compressor| shape provides a quadrilateral to represent a gas-phase compressor. This unit has no |key=value| pairs for additional modification. If mirrored along the $x$-axis (\textit{e.g.}, by using something like |xscale=-1| or |rotate=90|) then the |compressor| shape is identical to the |turbine| shape but with different anchor points. + + + +\subsubsection{Turbine} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[turbine] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[turbine] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[turbine] {}; + & + \node[turbine, scale=2.5] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/above left, + se/right, + sw/below left, + nne/above, + nnw/above, + sse/below, + ssw/below, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |turbine| shape provides a quadrilateral to represent a gas-phase turbine. This unit has no |key=value| pairs for additional modification. If mirrored along the $x$-axis (\textit{e.g.}, by using something like |xscale=-1| or |rotate=90|) then the |turbine| shape is identical to the |compressor| shape but with different anchor points. + + + + + +\section{Streams} + + +\subsection{Feed terminal} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[feed] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[feed] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[feed] {}; + & + \node[feed, scale=2] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.stream) {}; + \node[right] at (f.stream) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{e}} \textit{or} \redtt{stream}}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |feed| shape provides a half-filled circle representing a process feed point. The special anchor \redtt{stream} corresponds to the |east| anchor and is provided as an optional method to define stream starting points. This unit has no |key=value| pairs for additional modification. + + + + +\subsection{Product terminal} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[product] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[product] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[product] {}; + & + \node[product, scale=2] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.stream) {}; + \node[left] at (f.stream) {\footnotesize \redtt{stream} \textit{or} \boldtt{w}}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |product| shape provides a half-filled circle representing a process product point. The special anchor \redtt{stream} corresponds to the |west| anchor and is provided as an optional method to define stream ending points. This unit has no |key=value| pairs for additional modification. + + + +\subsection{Stream numbers} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[sid] {99}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[sid] {99}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[sid] {99}; + & + \node[sid, scale=2] (f) {99}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north/above, + east/right, + west/left, + south/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north east/above right, + north west/above left, + south east/below right, + south west/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |sid| (read ``ess eye dee'' for ``stream identification'') shape provides a modified |diamond| shape from the |shapes| library for the purpose of labeling streams. The anchors \textbf{are not aliased} with their abbreviations because \textit{(a)} this is not a custom shape of the |pfdicons| package and \textit{(b)} the |sid| shape is typically used within a line (stream) without accessing its anchors. The fill of |sid| is white which allows it to be conveniently placed within a stream-drawing command such as +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[sid] {00} (2,0); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[sid] {00} (2,0); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} +The |sid| shape has no |key=value| pairs to modify its appearance but you can modify the appearance by redefining its |tikzstyle|, which by default is +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\tikzstyle{sid} = [diamond, draw, solid, fill=white, text badly centered, inner sep=1pt, font=\footnotesize] +\end{lstlisting} +Modifications to this definition can occur either in the preamble (to affect all drawings) or within the document (to affect individual drawings or lines). For example, if you'd like to use circular identifiers with a blue fill and more space around bigger numbers then you could do something like this: +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[sid] {1} (2,0); + + \tikzstyle{sid} = [circle, draw, solid, fill=blue!15, text badly centered, inner sep=3pt, font=\tiny] + + \draw[->] (0,-1) -- node[sid] {2} (2,-1); + + \draw[->] (0,-2) -- node[sid] {3} (2,-2); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[sid] {1} (2,0); + + \tikzstyle{sid} = [circle, draw, solid, + fill=blue!15, text badly centered, + inner sep=3pt, font=\tiny] + + \draw[->] (0,-1) -- node[sid] {2} (2,-1); + + \draw[->] (0,-2) -- node[sid] {3} (2,-2); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} +You can also modify individual parameters while retaining others by passing additional modifiers within the |sid| node usage, like this: +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[sid] {1} (2,0); + + \draw[->] (0,-1) -- node[sid, rectangle, fill=red!20] {2} (2,-1); + + \draw[->] (0,-2) -- node[sid] {3} (2,-2); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[sid] {1} (2,0); + + \draw[->] (0,-1) -- node[sid, rectangle, fill=red!20] {2} (2,-1); + + \draw[->] (0,-2) -- node[sid] {3} (2,-2); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} + + +\subsection{Stream arrow tips} +The arrow tip is set using the standard TikZ syntax +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\tikzset{>=} +\end{lstlisting} +When loaded the |pfdicons| package sets || to |Triangle| as +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\tikzset{>=Triangle} +\end{lstlisting} +You can change this setting in the preamble or within the document itself to whatever arrow tip you prefer (see \S16.5 in the PGF manual for a summary of arrow tips). For example, +\begin{center} +\begin{minipage}{5in} +\begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- (1,0); + + \tikzset{>=Latex[open]} + \draw[->] (0,-0.5) -- (1,-0.5); + \draw[->] (0,-1) -- (1,-1); +\end{tikzpicture} +\end{lstlisting} +\end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} +\begin{minipage}{1in} +\begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- (1,0); + \tikzset{>=Latex[open]} % Latex-style arrow tip + \draw[->] (0,-0.5) -- (1,-0.5); + \draw[->] (0,-1) -- (1,-1); + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{center} +\end{minipage} +\end{center} +You can also make modifications to individual arrow tips simply by using a different tip for that particular arrow: +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- (1,0); + \draw[-{Stealth[red]}] (0,-0.5) -- (1,-0.5); + \draw[->] (0,-1) -- (1,-1); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- (1,0); + \draw[-{Stealth[red]}] (0,-0.5) -- (1,-0.5); + \draw[->] (0,-1) -- (1,-1); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} + + +\subsection{Stream crossings} +When two streams cross it's desirable to indicate their status as distinct streams to avoid confusion with junctions or mixing points. Consider the following example: +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0.5) -- node[sid, pos=0.25]{1} (2,0.5); + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[sid]{2} (1.5,0) -- (1.5,1) -- (2,1); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0.5) -- node[sid, pos=0.25]{1} (2,0.5); + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[sid]{2} (1.3,0) -- (1.3,1) -- (2,1); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} +It may not be immediately obvious that the intersection between streams 1 and 2 is not a four-way pipe junction with two inlets and two outlets. To make such distinction a \textit{bridge} can be used, most commonly in the form of a break in one stream, an arc of one stream, or a combination of a break and an arc. The |pfdicons| package provides a |bridge| style which uses the |spath3| package to detect crossings and create bridges. The workflow to use the |bridge| style is as follows: +\begin{enumerate} + \item Identify that a crossing has occurred (\textit{e.g.}, by completing a drawing as done above). Determine which stream is to be drawn continuously (the |over| stream) and which stream is to be broken (the |under| stream). + \item Re-define the original streams using the |path| operation, removing all decorations. + \item Use the |bridge| key with |tikzset| to set the |over| and |under| paths as |\tikzset{bridge={over}{under}}|. + \item Re-draw the streams with a |draw| operation, replacing any previously removed decorations. +\end{enumerate} +To demonstrate this process on the previous example we select stream 1 as the |over| stream (Turton recommends horizontal streams be continuous and vertical streams be broken). The remaining steps are completed as follows: +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + % \draw[->] (0,0.5) -- node[sid, pos=0.25]{1} (2,0.5); + % \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[sid]{2} (1.5,0) -- (1.5,1) -- (2,1); + \path[spath/save=over] (0,0.5) -- (2,0.5); + \path[spath/save=under] (0,0) -- (1.3,0) -- (1.3,1) -- (2,1); + \tikzset{bridge={over}{under}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over] node[sid, pos=0.15]{1}; + \draw[->, spath/use=under] node[sid, pos=0.1]{2}; +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \path[spath/save=over] (0,0.5) -- (2,0.5); + \path[spath/save=under] (0,0) -- (1.3,0) -- (1.3,1) -- (2,1); + \tikzset{bridge={over}{under}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over] node[sid, pos=0.2]{1}; + \draw[->, spath/use=under] node[sid, pos=0.1]{2}; + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} +Lines 4 and 5 define the original streams using the |path| operation. Line 6 sets the |bridge| key to identify the |over| and |under| stream (the names here could be anything as long as the first input is the ``over'' path and the second input is the ``under'' path). Lines 7 and 8 re-draw the streams with an appropriate \texttt{draw} operation, adding the stream labels as well. Notice that the positioning of the stream labels must be modified slightly from the original syntax; getting the labels \textit{precisely} where they were before the bridging operation can be challenging (but is usually not necessary). + +The bridge style can be modified by using |\tikzset| to set the value of two keys, |bridge gap| and |bridge radius|, as summarized below. +\begin{center} + \begin{longtable}{p{1in}p{3in}c} + \caption{Key-value pairs for use with stream crossings}\\ + \toprule + \texttt{key} & Description & Example \\ + \midrule + \endfirsthead + + \multicolumn{3}{c}{\tablename\ \thetable: Key-value pairs for the use with stream crossings \textit{(cont'd)}} \\ + \midrule + \endhead + + \bottomrule + \endfoot + + \bottomrule + \endlastfoot + + \texttt{bridge gap} & Adjusts the amount of space around a stream break. The default value is |4pt|. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[above] at (1,1) {\footnotesize\verb|\tikzset{bridge gap=0pt}|}; + \tikzset{bridge gap=0pt} + \path[spath/save=over] (0,0.5) -- (2,0.5); + \path[spath/save=under] (0,0) -- (1,0) -- (1,1) -- (2,1); + \tikzset{bridge={over}{under}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over] ; + \draw[->, spath/use=under] ; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + + & & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[above] at (1,1) {\footnotesize\verb|\tikzset{bridge gap=15pt}|}; + \tikzset{bridge gap=15pt} + \path[spath/save=over] (0,0.5) -- (2,0.5); + \path[spath/save=under] (0,0) -- (1,0) -- (1,1) -- (2,1); + \tikzset{bridge={over}{under}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over] ; + \draw[->, spath/use=under] ; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + + \texttt{bridge radius} & Adjusts the radius of an arc bridge. The default value is |0pt| which produces a straight line. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[above] at (1,1) {\footnotesize\verb|\tikzset{bridge radius=8pt}|}; + \tikzset{bridge gap=4pt} + \tikzset{bridge radius=8pt} + \path[spath/save=over] (0,0.5) -- (2,0.5); + \path[spath/save=under] (0,0) -- (1,0) -- (1,1) -- (2,1); + \tikzset{bridge={over}{under}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over] ; + \draw[->, spath/use=under] ; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + + & & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[above] at (1,1) {\footnotesize\verb|\tikzset{bridge radius=20pt}|}; + \tikzset{bridge radius=16pt} + \path[spath/save=over] (0,0.5) -- (2,0.5); + \path[spath/save=under] (0,0) -- (1,0) -- (1,1) -- (2,1); + \tikzset{bridge={over}{under}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over] ; + \draw[->, spath/use=under] ; + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + + & & \\ + + \end{longtable} +\end{center} + +\section{Control elements} + +\subsection{Valve} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[valve] {}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[valve] {}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[valve] {}; + & + \node[valve, scale=2] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |valve| shape provides two opposing triangles as a generic valve shape. Unlike most other shapes the fill color of a |valve| shape is white which allows it to be conveniently placed within a line-drawing operation such as +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{4in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[valve] {} (2,0); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[valve] {} (2,0); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} +Placement of the valve on the stream can be modified using the standard placement keys (\textit{e.g.}, |middle| or |near start|) or by the |pos=number| key. The valve can also be rotated to an arbitrary angle using the |rotate=degree| key. For example: +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[valve, near start] {} (2,0); + \draw[->] (0,-0.5) -- node[valve, near end] {} (2,-0.5); + \draw[->] (0,-1) -- node[valve, pos=0.4] {} (2,-1); + \draw[->] (0,-1.5) -- (1,-1.5) -- node[valve, rotate=90] {} (1,-2.5) -- ++(1,0); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[valve, near start] {} (2,0); + \draw[->] (0,-0.5) -- node[valve, near end] {} (2,-0.5); + \draw[->] (0,-1) -- node[valve, pos=0.4] {} (2,-1); + \draw[->] (0,-1.5) -- (1,-1.5) --node[valve, rotate=90] {} + (1,-2.5) -- ++(1,0); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} + + +A generic actuator can be added to the |valve| shape by using the |unit ext| key as summarized below. +\begin{center} + \begin{longtable}{p{1.5in}p{3in}c} + \caption{Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{valve} shape.}\\ + \toprule + \texttt{key=value} & Description & Example \\ + \midrule + \endfirsthead + + \multicolumn{3}{c}{\tablename\ \thetable: Key-value pairs for the \boldtt{valve} shape \textit{(cont'd)}} \\ + \midrule + \endhead + + \bottomrule + \endfoot + + \bottomrule + \endlastfoot + + \texttt{unit ext=actuator} & Adds a hemisphere-capped protrusion as an indicator of a generic actuation device. The \redtt{actuator} anchor is placed at the top of the hemisphere for electrical connections. & + \adjustbox{valign=t}{ + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[valve, unit ext=actuator, scale=1.5] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + actuator/above} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \end{tikzpicture}} \\ + \end{longtable} +\end{center} + + +\subsection{Electrical instruments} +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\node[elec] {XX}; +\end{lstlisting} +\begin{figure}[h!] + \centering + \begin{tikzpicture}[line width=0.6pt] + \matrix[column sep=1cm, row sep=1cm, nodes={font=\footnotesize}]{% + \node[elec] {XX}; + & + \draw[help lines, blue!5, step=1mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[help lines, blue!10, step=5mm, ultra thin] (-10mm, -10mm) grid (10mm, 10mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (-10mm,0mm) to (10mm, 0mm); + \draw[red!20, thin] (0mm, -10mm) to (0mm, 10mm); + \node[left] at (-10mm,0mm) {\color{blue!20}0}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,5mm) {\color{blue!20}$+5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-5mm) {\color{blue!20}$-5$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,10mm) {\color{blue!20}$+10$}; + \node[left] at (-10mm,-10mm){\color{blue!20}$-10$}; + \node[anchor=north east] at (12mm,-10mm) {\color{blue!20}mm}; + \node[elec] {XX}; + & + \node[elec, scale=2] (f) {XX}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north/above, + east/right, + west/left, + south/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north east/above right, + north west/above left, + south east/below right, + south west/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{figure} +The |elec| shape provides a modified |circle| shape from the |shapes| library for the purpose of labeling streams. The anchors \textbf{are not aliased} with their abbreviations because this is not a custom shape of the |pfdicons| package. Like the |valve| and |sid| shapes the fill of |elec| is white which allows it to be conveniently placed within a stream-drawing command such as +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[dashed] (0,0) -- node[elec] {XX} (2,0); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[dashed] (0,0) -- node[elec] {XX} (2,0); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} +The |elec| shape has no |key=value| pairs to modify its appearance but you can modify the appearance by redefining its |tikzstyle|, which by default is +\begin{lstlisting}[numbers=none] +\tikzstyle{elec} = [circle, draw, solid, fill=white, text badly centered, inner sep=1pt, font=\footnotesize] +\end{lstlisting} +Modifications to this definition can occur either in the preamble (to affect all drawings) or within the document (to subsequent drawings or lines). For example, if you'd like to use circular identifiers with a blue fill and more space around bigger numbers then you could do something like this: +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[dashed] (0,0) -- node[elec] {TT} (2,0); + + \tikzstyle{elec} = [circle, draw, solid, fill=blue!15, text badly centered, inner sep=3pt, font=\tiny] + + \draw[dashed] (0,-1) -- node[elec] {LT} (2,-1); + + \draw[dashed] (0,-2) -- node[elec] {PT} (2,-2); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[dashed] (0,0) -- node[elec] {TT} (2,0); + + \tikzstyle{elec} = [circle, draw, solid, fill=blue!15, text badly centered, inner sep=3pt, font=\tiny] + + \draw[dashed] (0,-1) -- node[elec] {LT} (2,-1); + + \draw[dashed] (0,-2) -- node[elec] {PT} (2,-2); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} +You can also modify individual parameters while retaining others by passing additional modifiers within the |sid| node usage, like this: +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[dashed] (0,0) -- node[elec] {TT} (2,0); + + \draw[dashed] (0,-1) -- node[elec, rectangle, fill=red!20] {LT} (2,-1); + + \draw[dashed] (0,-2) -- node[elec] {PT} (2,-2); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[dashed] (0,0) -- node[elec] {TT} (2,0); + + \draw[dashed] (0,-1) -- node[elec, rectangle, fill=red!20] {LT} (2,-1); + + \draw[dashed] (0,-2) -- node[elec] {PT} (2,-2); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} + + +\section{Examples} +The following examples use the |pfdicons| package to replicate process flow diagrams and other diagrams found in several standard undergraduate textbooks. The examples are generally grouped according to the (approximate) course in which they occur: material and energy balances, thermodynamics, reaction engineering, separations, process controls, and capstone design. +\subsection{Material and Energy Balances} +\begin{enumerate}[itemindent=0.75in, leftmargin=0.25in, label=\textsc{\textbf{Example \arabic*:}}] + + \item A basic separation process consisting of a pump, flash unit, and valve. Source: Himmelblau, D.; Riggs, J. \textit{Basic Principles and Calculations in Chemical Engineering}, 8th ed.; Prentice Hall, 2012. + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[centrifugal pump, unit ext=outlet east] (c) {}; + \node[vessel, right=2cm of c.outlet] (s) {}; + \draw[<-] (c.west) -- ++(-2,0); + \draw[->] (c.outlet) -- (s.west); + \draw[->] (s.north) -- ++(0,0.5) -- node[valve] {} ++(2,0); + \draw[->] (s.south) |- ++(2,-0.5); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \node[centrifugal pump, unit ext=outlet east] (c) {}; + \node[vessel, right=2cm of c.outlet] (s) {}; + \draw[<-] (c.west) -- ++(-2,0); + \draw[->] (c.outlet) -- (s.west); + \draw[->] (s.north) -- ++(0,0.5) -- node[valve] {} ++(2,0); + \draw[->] (s.south) |- ++(2,-0.5); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + + \item A simplified ethylene dichloride synthesis process illustrating the reactor-separator-recycle-purge (RSRP) arrangement. Source: Himmelblau, D.; Riggs, J. \textit{Basic Principles and Calculations in Chemical Engineering}, 8th ed.; Prentice Hall, 2012. + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \node[tube reactor, unit int=packed] (r) {}; + \node[column, right=of r] (s) {}; + \coordinate [left=of r] (m); % helps set recycle merge point + + \draw[<-] (r.west) -- ++(-2,0); + \draw[->] (r.east) -- (s.west); + \draw[->] (s.south) |- ++(1,-0.5); + \draw[->] (s.north) -- ++(0,1); + \draw[->] (s.north) -- ++(0,0.5) -| (m); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \node[tube reactor, unit int=packed] (r) {}; + \node[column, right=of r] (s) {}; + \coordinate [left=of r] (m); + + \draw[<-] (r.west) -- ++(-2,0); + \draw[->] (r.east) -- (s.west); + \draw[->] (s.south) |- ++(1,-0.5); + \draw[->] (s.north) -- ++(0,1); + \draw[->] (s.north) -- ++(0,0.5) -| (m); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} +\end{enumerate} + + +\subsection{Thermodynamics} +\begin{enumerate}[resume*] + \item A simple steam power plant. Source: Figure 8.1 on pg. 270 in Smith, J.M.; Van Ness, H.C.; Abbot, M.M. \textit{Introduction to Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics}, 6th ed.; McGraw-Hill, 2001. + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Nodes + \node [basic hx, rotate=90] (boiler) {}; + \node [turbine, below right=1cm and 2cm of boiler] (turbine) {}; + \node [basic hx, rotate=90, below left=of turbine] (cond) {}; + \node [centrifugal pump, below left=of boiler, unit int=inlet south, + unit ext=outlet north west] (pump) {}; + + % Streams + \draw[->] (boiler.south) -| (turbine.nnw); + \draw[->] (turbine.sse) |- (cond.south); + \draw[->] (cond.north) -| (pump.center); + \draw[->] (pump.outlet) |- (boiler.north); + + % Labels + \node[below] at (boiler.west) {Boiler}; + \node[above] at (cond.east) {Condenser}; + \node[left] at (turbine.west) {Turbine}; + \draw[<-] (boiler.east) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\dot{Q}_H$} ++(0,5mm); + \draw[->] (cond.west) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\dot{Q}_C$} ++(0,-5mm); + \draw[->] (turbine.east) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\dot{W}_s$} ++(5mm,0); + \draw[<-] (pump.west) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\dot{W}_s$} ++(-5mm,0); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Units + \node [basic hx, rotate=90] (boiler) {}; + \node [turbine, below right=1cm and 2cm of boiler] (turbine) {}; + \node [basic hx, rotate=90, below left=of turbine] (cond) {}; + \node [centrifugal pump, below left=of boiler, unit int=inlet south, unit + ext=outlet north west] (pump) {}; + + % Streams + \draw[->] (boiler.south) -| (turbine.nnw); + \draw[->] (turbine.sse) |- (cond.south); + \draw[->] (cond.north) -| (pump.center); + \draw[->] (pump.outlet) |- (boiler.north); + + % Labels + \node[below] at (boiler.west) {Boiler}; + \node[above] at (cond.east) {Condenser}; + \node[left] at (turbine.west) {Turbine}; + \draw[<-] (boiler.east) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\dot{Q}_H$} ++(0,5mm); + \draw[->] (cond.west) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\dot{Q}_C$} ++(0,-5mm); + \draw[->] (turbine.east) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\dot{W}_s$} ++(5mm,0); + \draw[<-] (pump.west) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\dot{W}_s$} ++(-5mm,0); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + + + \item A two-stage cascade refrigeration system. Here a |matrix| structure is used for node placement but one could equally use positioning keys (\textit{i.e.}, |above|, |below|, and so forth) to achieve similar placement. Source: Figure 9.3 on pg. 301 in Smith, J.M.; Van Ness, H.C.; Abbot, M.M. \textit{Introduction to Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics}, 6th ed.; McGraw-Hill, 2001. + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Nodes + \matrix [column sep=1.5cm, row sep=0.75 cm] { + % Row 1 + & \node[basic hx, rotate=90] (cond) {}; + & \\ + % Row 2 + \node[valve, rotate=90] (v2) {}; & + \node{\normalsize Cycle 2}; & + \node[turbine] (c2) {}; \\ + % Row 3 + & \node[shell and tube hx] (intx) {}; + & \\ + % Row 4 + \node[valve, rotate=90] (v1) {}; & + \node{\normalsize Cycle 1}; & + \node[turbine] (c1) {}; \\ + % Row 5 + & \node[basic hx, rotate=90] (evap) {}; & \\ + }; + + % Streams + \tikzset{>=Stealth} + % Upper loop + \draw[->] (cond.n) -| (v2.e); + \draw[->] (v2.w) |- (intx.wnw); + \draw[->] (intx.ene) -| (c2.sse); + \draw[->] (c2.nnw) |- (cond.s); + % Lower loop + \draw[->] (intx.wsw) -| (v1.e); + \draw[->] (v1.w) |- (evap.n); + \draw[->] (evap.s) -| (c1.sse); + \draw[->] (c1.nnw) |- (intx.ese); + + % Labels + \node[above] at (intx.north) {Interchanger}; + \node[below] at (cond.w) {Condenser at $T_H$}; + \node[above] at (evap.e) {Evaporator at $T_C$}; + \node[above left=1pt and 7mm of intx.wnw] {$T^{\prime}_C$}; + \node[below left=1pt and 7mm of intx.wsw] {$T^{\prime}_H$}; + + \draw[<-] (c2.e) -- node[pos=2] {$W_s(2)$} ++(5mm,0); + \draw[<-] (c1.e) -- node[pos=2] {$W_s(1)$} ++(5mm,0); + \draw[->] (cond.e) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\lvert Q_H \rvert$} ++(0,5mm); + \draw[<-] (evap.w) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\lvert Q_C \rvert$} ++(0,-5mm); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % \usetikzlibrary{matrix} + % Units + \matrix [column sep=1.5cm, row sep=0.75 cm] { + % Row 1 + & \node[basic hx, rotate=90] (cond) {}; + & \\ + % Row 2 + \node[valve, rotate=90] (v2) {}; & + \node{\normalsize Cycle 2}; & + \node[turbine] (c2) {}; \\ + % Row 3 + & \node[shell and tube hx] (intx) {}; + & \\ + % Row 4 + \node[valve, rotate=90] (v1) {}; & + \node{\normalsize Cycle 1}; & + \node[turbine] (c1) {}; \\ + % Row 5 + & \node[basic hx, rotate=90] (evap) {}; & \\ + }; + + % Streams + \tikzset{>=Stealth} + % Upper loop + \draw[->] (cond.n) -| (v2.e); + \draw[->] (v2.w) |- (intx.wnw); + \draw[->] (intx.ene) -| (c2.sse); + \draw[->] (c2.nnw) |- (cond.s); + % Lower loop + \draw[->] (intx.wsw) -| (v1.e); + \draw[->] (v1.w) |- (evap.n); + \draw[->] (evap.s) -| (c1.sse); + \draw[->] (c1.nnw) |- (intx.ese); + + % Labels + \node[above] at (intx.north) {Interchanger}; + \node[below] at (cond.w) {Condenser at $T_H$}; + \node[above] at (evap.e) {Evaporator at $T_C$}; + \node[above left=1pt and 7mm of intx.wnw] {$T^{\prime}_C$}; + \node[below left=1pt and 7mm of intx.wsw] {$T^{\prime}_H$}; + + \draw[<-] (c2.e) -- node[pos=2] {$W_s(2)$} ++(5mm,0); + \draw[<-] (c1.e) -- node[pos=2] {$W_s(1)$} ++(5mm,0); + \draw[->] (cond.e) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\lvert Q_H \rvert$} ++(0,5mm); + \draw[<-] (evap.w) -- node[pos=1.5] {$\lvert Q_C \rvert$} ++(0,-5mm); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} +\end{enumerate} + + + +\subsection{Reaction Engineering} +\begin{enumerate}[resume*] + \item A series of two CSTRs followed by a PFR as part of a discussion regarding Levenspiel plots. Source: Figure 2-10 on pg. 61 in Fogler, H.S. \textit{Elements of Chemical Reaction Engineering}, 4th ed.; Pearson, 2006. + + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Custom point marker + \tikzstyle{dot} = [circle, draw, fill=black, inner sep=1.5pt] + + % Units + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred liquid] (R1) {}; + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred liquid, below right=of R1] + (R2) {}; + \node[tube reactor, unit int=tubular, right=2cm of R2.ese] (R3) {}; + + % Streams + \draw[<-] (R1.nnw) |- coordinate[at end] (p0) ++(-1.5,0.5); + \draw[->] (R1.ese) -| node[dot, pos=0.3] (p1) {} (R2.nnw); + \draw[->] (R2.ese) -- node[dot, pos=0.3] (p2) {} (R3.w); + \draw[->] (R3.e) -- node[dot] (p3) {} coordinate[at end] (p4) ++(1.5,0); + + % Labels + \node[left, align=right] at (p0) {$F_{A0}$\\$X=0$}; + \node[above] at (p1) {(1)}; + \node[right=5mm of p1, align=left] {$F_{A1}$\\$X_1$}; + \node[above] at (p2) {(2)}; + \node[above left, align=left] at (R3.w) {$F_{A2}$\\$X_2$}; + \node[above] at (p3) {(3)}; + \node[right, align=left] at (p4) {$F_{A3}$\\$X_3$}; + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Custom point marker + \tikzstyle{dot} = [circle, draw, fill=black, inner sep=1.5pt] + + % Units + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred liquid] (R1) {}; + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred liquid, below right=of R1] (R2) {}; + \node[tube reactor, unit int=tubular, right=2cm of R2.ese] (R3) {}; + + % Streams + \draw[<-] (R1.nnw) |- coordinate[at end] (p0) ++(-1.5,0.5); + \draw[->] (R1.ese) -| node[dot, pos=0.3] (p1) {} (R2.nnw); + \draw[->] (R2.ese) -- node[dot, pos=0.3] (p2) {} (R3.w); + \draw[->] (R3.e) -- node[dot] (p3) {} coordinate[at end] (p4) ++(1.5,0); + + % Labels + \node[left, align=right] at (p0) {$F_{A0}$\\$X=0$}; + \node[above] at (p1) {(1)}; + \node[right=5mm of p1, align=left] {$F_{A1}$\\$X_1$}; + \node[above] at (p2) {(2)}; + \node[above left, align=left] at (R3.w) {$F_{A2}$\\$X_2$}; + \node[above] at (p3) {(3)}; + \node[right, align=left] at (p4) {$F_{A3}$\\$X_3$}; +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + + \item Two adiabatic reactors separated by a heat exchanger as part of a discussion regarding interstage heating and cooling. Source: Figure 11.2 on pg. 300 in Drews, A. \textit{An Introduction to Chemical Reaction Engineering with MATLAB}; \texttt{ceng113.eng.ucsd.edu} (2019). + + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Units + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred liquid] (R1) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, right=2cm of R1] (HX1) {}; + \node[tube reactor, unit int=tubular, right=2cm of HX1] (R2) {}; + + % Streams + \draw[<-] (R1.w) -- node[above, near end] {0} ++(-2,0); + \draw[->] (R1.e) -- node[above] {1} (HX1.w); + \draw[->] (HX1.e) -- node[above] {2} (R2.w); + \draw[->] (R2.e) -- node[above] {3} ++(2,0); + + % Control volumes + \coordinate[above left=7mm and 5mm of R1.nw] (a); + \coordinate[below right=7mm and 5mm of R1.se] (b); + \coordinate[above left=9mm and 8mm of R1.nw] (c); + \coordinate[below right=11mm and 5mm of R2.se] (d); + \draw[dashed] (a) rectangle (b); + \draw[dashed] (c) rectangle (d); + + % Labels + \node[below] at (R1.s) {R-1}; + \node[below] at (HX1.south util) {HX-1}; + \node[below] at (R2.s) {R-2}; + \node[anchor=base west] at (b) {\textbf{CV1}}; + \node[anchor=base west] at (d) {\textbf{CV2}}; + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Units + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred liquid] (R1) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, right=2cm of R1] (HX1) {}; + \node[tube reactor, unit int=tubular, right=2cm of HX1] (R2) {}; + + % Streams + \draw[<-] (R1.w) -- node[above, near end] {0} ++(-2,0); + \draw[->] (R1.e) -- node[above] {1} (HX1.w); + \draw[->] (HX1.e) -- node[above] {2} (R2.w); + \draw[->] (R2.e) -- node[above] {3} ++(2,0); + + % Control volumes + \coordinate[above left=7mm and 5mm of R1.nw] (a); + \coordinate[below right=7mm and 5mm of R1.se] (b); + \coordinate[above left=9mm and 8mm of R1.nw] (c); + \coordinate[below right=11mm and 5mm of R2.se] (d); + \draw[dashed] (a) rectangle (b); + \draw[dashed] (c) rectangle (d); + + % Labels + \node[below] at (R1.s) {R-1}; + \node[below] at (HX1.south util) {HX-1}; + \node[below] at (R2.s) {R-2}; + \node[anchor=base west] at (b) {\textbf{CV1}}; + \node[anchor=base west] at (d) {\textbf{CV2}}; +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} +\end{enumerate} + + + + +\subsection{Separations} +\begin{enumerate}[resume*] + \item A general distillation system using a total condenser and partial reboiler. Some annotations have been excluded for clarity (clarity of this document, not the figure: if so desired it would only be a matter of additional |node| elements to replace the excluded annotations). Source: Figure 7.2 on pg. 261 in Seader, J.D.; Henley, E.J.; Roper, D.K. \textit{Separation Process Principles}, 3rd ed.; John Wiley and Sons, 2011. + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + %\usetikzlibrary{decorations.pathmorphing} + % Units + \node[column, unit int=numbered tray, scale=1.5] (c) {}; + \node[vessel, rotate=90, unit int=liquid rotated, above right=8mm + and 15mm of c, anchor=north] (drum) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, above left=8mm and 5mm of drum.north] (cond) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit int=U tube, unit ext=util, rotate=90, below + right=5mm and 5mm of c, anchor=east] (reboil) {}; + + % Helpful points + \coordinate[left=3cm of c.west] (F); + \coordinate[right=4cm of c.north east] (D); + \coordinate[below right=2cm and 2.5cm of c.south east] (B); + + % Streams + \draw[->] (c.north) |- (cond.west); + \draw[->] (cond.east) -| (drum.east); + \draw[->] (drum.west) |- (c.north east); + \draw[->] (drum.west) |- (D); + \draw[->] (c.south) |- (reboil.north); + \draw[->] (reboil.east) |- (c.south east); + \draw[->] (reboil.west) |- (B); + \draw[->] (F) -- node[valve, near end] {} (c.west); + + % Distillate labels + \node[above=0.5pt of c.top tray] {1}; + \node[left=5mm of c.top tray, anchor=east] {Top stage}; + \node[anchor=south west] at (c.ne) {Reflux}; + \node[above] at (D) {Distillate}; + \node[above right] at (cond.ne) {Total condenser}; + \node[above right] at (drum.south east) {Reflux drum}; + + % Feed labels + \node[above=0.5pt of c.feed tray] {$f$}; + \node[anchor=south west] at (F) {Feed}; + \node[right=5mm of c.feed tray, anchor=west] {Feed stage}; + \node[align=left, anchor=north west] at (F) {Light-key\\mole frac, $z_F$}; + + % Bottoms labels + \node[above=0.5pt of c.bottom tray] {$N$}; + \node[above] at (B) {Bottoms}; + \node[right] at (reboil.south) {Partial reboiler}; + \node[left=5mm of c.bottom tray, anchor=east, align=center] {Bottom\\stage}; + \node[below, align=center] at (D) {Light-key\\mole frac, $x_D$}; + \node[below, align=center] at (B) {Light-key\\mole frac, $x_B$}; + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + %\usetikzlibrary{decorations.pathmorphing} + % Units + \node[column, unit int=numbered tray, scale=1.5] (c) {}; + \node[vessel, rotate=90, unit int=liquid rotated, above right=8mm and 15mm + of c, anchor=north] (drum) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, above left=8mm and 5mm of drum.north] (cond) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit int=U tube, unit ext=util, rotate=90, below + right=5mm + and 5mm of c, anchor=east] (reboil) {}; + + % Helpful points + \coordinate[left=3cm of c.west] (F); + \coordinate[right=4cm of c.north east] (D); + \coordinate[below right=2cm and 2.5cm of c.south east] (B); + + % Streams + \draw[->] (c.north) |- (cond.west); + \draw[->] (cond.east) -| (drum.east); + \draw[->] (drum.west) |- (c.north east); + \draw[->] (drum.west) |- (D); + \draw[->] (c.south) |- (reboil.north); + \draw[->] (reboil.east) |- (c.south east); + \draw[->] (reboil.west) |- (B); + \draw[->] (F) -- node[valve, near end] {} (c.west); + + % Distillate labels + \node[above=0.5pt of c.top tray] {1}; + \node[left=5mm of c.top tray, anchor=east] {Top stage}; + \node[anchor=south west] at (c.ne) {Reflux}; + \node[above] at (D) {Distillate}; + \node[above right] at (cond.ne) {Total condenser}; + \node[above right] at (drum.south east) {Reflux drum}; + + % Feed labels + \node[above=0.5pt of c.feed tray] {$f$}; + \node[anchor=south west] at (F) {Feed}; + \node[right=5mm of c.feed tray, anchor=west] {Feed stage}; + \node[align=left, anchor=north west] at (F) {Light-key\\mole frac, $z_F$}; + + % Bottoms labels + \node[above=0.5pt of c.bottom tray] {$N$}; + \node[above] at (B) {Bottoms}; + \node[right] at (reboil.south) {Partial reboiler}; + \node[left=5mm of c.bottom tray, anchor=east, align=center] {Bottom\\stage}; + \node[below, align=center] at (D) {Light-key\\mole frac, $x_D$}; + \node[below, align=center] at (B) {Light-key\\mole frac, $x_B$}; +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + +\item A schematic of pressure-swing adsorption for the dehydration of air. In this diagram the original authors used approximately the same symbol for a filter as the adsorber, a similarity retained here. A matrix was again used to help with alignment and several |tikzstyle| definitions were used to create ``shortcut'' shapes for the |filter|, |ads|, and |pump| units. Source: Figure 15.2 on pg. 570 in Seader, J.D.; Henley, E.J.; Roper, D.K. \textit{Separation Process Principles}, 3rd ed.; John Wiley and Sons, 2011. + +\begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % \usetikzlibrary{matrix} + + % Definitions + \tikzstyle{filter} = [tube reactor, unit int=packed, rotate=90, + scale=0.75]; + \tikzstyle{ads} = [tube reactor, unit int=packed, rotate=90]; + \tikzstyle{pump} = [reciprocating pump, yscale=-1]; + + % Nodes + \matrix [column sep=1.5cm, row sep=0.5 cm] { + % 4 columns: & & & \\ + & & \node[filter] (f1) {}; & \\ + & & & \\ + & & & \\ + & \node[ads] (ads1) {}; & & \node[ads] (ads2) {};\\ + & & & \\ + & & \node[filter] (f2) {}; & \\ % f2 + \node[pump] (p) {}; & \node[basic hx, unit ext=util] (hx) {};& & \\ % pump+cooler + }; + + % Helper points + \coordinate[above=5mm of f2.e] (v2); % for valves near f2 + \coordinate[below=11mm of f1.w] (v1); % for valves near f1 + + % Streams + \draw[<-] (p.w) -- node[pos=1.7] {Moist air} ++(-1,0); + \draw[->] (p.e) -- (hx.w); + \draw[->] (hx.e) -| (f2.w); + \draw[->] (f2.e) -- (v2); + \draw (v2) -| node[valve, near start] {} (ads1.w); + \draw[->] (ads1.w |- v2) -- node[valve] {} node[anchor=north, at end] {Purge} ++(-2,0); + \draw (v2) -| node[valve, near start] {} (ads2.w); + \draw[->] (ads2.w |- v2) -- node[valve] {} node[anchor=north, at end] {Purge} ++(2,0); + \draw (ads1.e) |- node[valve, near end] {} (v1) -| node[valve, near start] {} (ads2.e); + \draw (v1) -- node[valve, rotate=90] {} (f1.w); + \draw (ads1.e) -- ++(0,1.3) -| (ads2.e); + \draw[->] (f1.e) -- ++(0,5mm); + + % Labels + \node[right, align=center] at (f1.s) {Particulate\\filter}; + \node[right, align=center] at (ads2.s) {Adsorber\\no. 2}; + \node[left, align=center] at (ads1.n) {Adsorber\\no. 1}; + \node[right, align=center] at (f2.s) {Coalescing\\filter}; + \node[below, align=center] at (p.n) {Gas\\compressor}; + \node[below] at (hx.south util) {Aftercooler}; + \node[above] at (hx.north util) {cw}; + + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{center} + + +\begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % \usetikzlibrary{matrix} + + % Definitions + \tikzstyle{filter} = [tube reactor, unit int=packed, rotate=90, + scale=0.75]; + \tikzstyle{ads} = [tube reactor, unit int=packed, rotate=90]; + \tikzstyle{pump} = [reciprocating pump, yscale=-1]; + + % Nodes + \matrix [column sep=1.5cm, row sep=0.5 cm] { + % 4 columns: & & & \\ + & & \node[filter] (f1) {}; & \\ + & & & \\ + & & & \\ + & \node[ads] (ads1) {}; & & \node[ads] (ads2) {};\\ + & & & \\ + & & \node[filter] (f2) {}; & \\ % f2 + \node[pump] (p) {}; & \node[basic hx, unit ext=util] (hx) {};& & \\ % pump+cooler + }; + + % Helper points + \coordinate[above=5mm of f2.e] (v2); % for valves near f2 + \coordinate[below=11mm of f1.w] (v1); % for valves near f1 + + % Streams + \draw[<-] (p.w) -- node[pos=1.7] {Moist air} ++(-1,0); + \draw[->] (p.e) -- (hx.w); + \draw[->] (hx.e) -| (f2.w); + \draw[->] (f2.e) -- (v2); + \draw (v2) -| node[valve, near start] {} (ads1.w); + \draw[->] (ads1.w |- v2) -- node[valve] {} node[anchor=north, at end] {Purge} ++(-2,0); + \draw (v2) -| node[valve, near start] {} (ads2.w); + \draw[->] (ads2.w |- v2) -- node[valve] {} node[anchor=north, at end] {Purge} ++(2,0); + \draw (ads1.e) |- node[valve, near end] {} (v1) -| node[valve, near start] {} (ads2.e); + \draw (v1) -- node[valve, rotate=90] {} (f1.w); + \draw (ads1.e) -- ++(0,1.3) -| (ads2.e); + \draw[->] (f1.e) -- ++(0,5mm); + + % Labels + \node[right, align=center] at (f1.s) {Particulate\\filter}; + \node[right, align=center] at (ads2.s) {Adsorber\\no. 2}; + \node[left, align=center] at (ads1.n) {Adsorber\\no. 1}; + \node[right, align=center] at (f2.s) {Coalescing\\filter}; + \node[below, align=center] at (p.n) {Gas\\compressor}; + \node[below] at (hx.south util) {Aftercooler}; + \node[above] at (hx.north util) {cw}; + +\end{tikzpicture} +\end{lstlisting} +\end{enumerate} + + +\subsection{Process Controls} +\begin{enumerate}[resume*] + \item A comparison of feedforward and feedback control systems. This example illustrates the use of absolute positioning (only for variety, not because it's necessary). Source: Figure E1.9 on pg. 13 in Seborg, D.E.; Edgar, T.F.; Mellichamp, D.A.; Doyle III, F.J. \textit{Process Dynamics and Control}, 4th ed.; John Wiley and Sons, 2016. + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Feedforward system + \draw[->] (0,0) -- ++(4,0); + \node[elec] at (1, 0.5) (ft1) {FT}; + \node[elec] at (2, 1.2) (fc1) {FC}; + \node[valve, unit ext=actuator, scale=1.5] at (3,0) (v1) {}; + \node[left] at (0,0) {Liquid}; + \node[below] at (2,-0.1) {System A}; + \draw (1,0) -- (ft1.south); + \draw[->, dashed] (ft1.north) |- (fc1.west); + \draw[->, dashed] (fc1.east) -| (v1.actuator); + + % Feedback system + \draw[->] (0,-2.5) -- ++(4,0); + \node[valve, unit ext=actuator, scale=1.5] at (1,-2.5) (v2) {}; + \node[elec] at (2, -1.2) (fc2) {FC}; + \node[elec] at (3, -2) (ft2) {FT}; + + \node[left] at (0,-2.5) {Liquid}; + \node[below] at (2,-2.6) {System B}; + \draw (3,-2.5) -- (ft2.south); + \draw[->, dashed] (ft2.north) |- (fc2.east); + \draw[->, dashed] (fc2.west) -| (v2.actuator); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Feedforward system + \draw[->] (0,0) -- ++(4,0); + \node[elec] at (1, 0.5) (ft1) {FT}; + \node[elec] at (2, 1.2) (fc1) {FC}; + \node[valve, unit ext=actuator, scale=1.5] at (3,0) (v1) {}; + \node[left] at (0,0) {Liquid}; + \node[below] at (2,-0.1) {System A}; + \draw (1,0) -- (ft1.south); + \draw[->, dashed] (ft1.north) |- (fc1.west); + \draw[->, dashed] (fc1.east) -| (v1.actuator); + + % Feedback system + \draw[->] (0,-2.5) -- ++(4,0); + \node[valve, unit ext=actuator, scale=1.5] at (1,-2.5) (v2) {}; + \node[elec] at (2, -1.2) (fc2) {FC}; + \node[elec] at (3, -2) (ft2) {FT}; + + \node[left] at (0,-2.5) {Liquid}; + \node[below] at (2,-2.6) {System B}; + \draw (3,-2.5) -- (ft2.south); + \draw[->, dashed] (ft2.north) |- (fc2.east); + \draw[->, dashed] (fc2.west) -| (v2.actuator); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + + + + \item A blending system controlled by measuring the composition of the stream 1 and adjusting a control valve on stream two. Source: Figure 1.5 on pg. 5 in Seborg, D.E.; Edgar, T.F.; Mellichamp, D.A.; Doyle III, F.J. \textit{Process Dynamics and Control}, 4th ed.; John Wiley and Sons, 2016. + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Units + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred liquid, scale=2] (r) {}; + \node[elec, above=of r] (ac) {AC}; + + % Helpful points + \coordinate[left=2cm of r.nw] (f1); + \coordinate[right=2cm of r.ne] (f2); + \coordinate[right=2cm of r.se] (p); + + % Streams and stream labels + \draw[->] (f1) -- coordinate[pos=0.7] (s) (r.nw); + \draw[->] (f2) -- node[valve, unit ext=actuator, pos=0.6] (v) {} (r.ne); + \draw[->] (r.e) -- ++(3mm,0) |- (p); + \node[left, align=right] at (f1) {$x_1$\\$w_1$}; + \node[right, align=left] at (f2) {$x_2=1$\\$w_2$}; + \node[right, align=left] at (p) {$x$\\$w$}; + + % Control elements + \node[elec, above=5mm of s] (at) {AT}; + \draw (s) -- (at.south); + \draw[->, dashed] (at.north) |- (ac.west); + \draw[->, dashed] (ac.east) -| (v.actuator); + + % Labels + \node[align=center, anchor=south east] at (at.west) {Composition\\analyzer/transmitter}; + \node[align=left, anchor=south west] at (v.ne) {Control\\valve}; + \node[align=center, above] at (ac.north) {Composition\\controller}; + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Units + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred liquid, scale=2] (r) {}; + \node[elec, above=of r] (ac) {AC}; + + % Helpful points + \coordinate[left=2cm of r.nw] (f1); + \coordinate[right=2cm of r.ne] (f2); + \coordinate[right=2cm of r.se] (p); + + % Streams and stream labels + \draw[->] (f1) -- coordinate[pos=0.7] (s) (r.nw); + \draw[->] (f2) -- node[valve, unit ext=actuator, pos=0.6] (v) {} (r.ne); + \draw[->] (r.e) -- ++(3mm,0) |- (p); + \node[left, align=right] at (f1) {$x_1$\\$w_1$}; + \node[right, align=left] at (f2) {$x_2=1$\\$w_2$}; + \node[right, align=left] at (p) {$x$\\$w$}; + + % Control elements + \node[elec, above=5mm of s] (at) {AT}; + \draw (s) -- (at.south); + \draw[->, dashed] (at.north) |- (ac.west); + \draw[->, dashed] (ac.east) -| (v.actuator); + + % Labels + \node[align=center, anchor=south east] at (at.west) {Composition\\analyzer/transmitter}; + \node[align=center, anchor=south west] at (v.ne) {Control\\valve}; + \node[align=center, above] at (ac.north) {Composition\\controller}; +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + +\end{enumerate} + +\newpage +\subsection{Capstone processes} +\begin{enumerate}[resume*] + \item Hydrodealkylation of toluene to produce benzene. Source: Figure 1.3 in Turton, R.; Bailie, R.C.; Whiting, W.B.; Shaeiwitz, J.A. \textit{Analysis, Synthesis, and Design of Chemical Processes}, 3rd ed.; Pearson, 2009. +\end{enumerate} + + +\begin{center} + \makebox[\textwidth][c]{% + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Reduce stream label sizes + \tikzstyle{sid} = [diamond, draw, solid, fill=white, text badly centered, inner sep=1pt, font=\tiny] + + % Units + \node[vessel, rotate=90] (V101) {}; + \node[reciprocating pump, below right=0.75cm and 0.5cm of V101] (P101) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, above right=0.25cm and 2.75cm of V101] (E101) {}; + \node[fired hx, below right=1cm and 0.6cm of E101, anchor=west] (H101) {}; + \node[tube reactor, unit int=packed, right=of H101, anchor=center, rotate=90] (R101) {}; + \node[turbine, right=1.5cm of R101.se] (C101) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, below=of C101] (E102) {}; + \node[vessel, unit int=phase sep, right=0.5cm of E102] (V102) {}; + \node[vessel, unit int=phase sep, below=of V102.se, anchor=west] (V103) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, right=2.75cm of C101] (E103) {}; + \node[column, unit int=tray, right=1cm of E103] (T101) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, below left=0.5cm and 0.7cm of T101.s] (E106) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, above right=0.5cm and 1cm of T101.n] (E104) {}; + \node[vessel, rotate=90, below right=1cm and 0.5cm of E104] (V104) {}; + \node[centrifugal pump, below=1cm of V104.nw] (P102) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, below=0.5cm of P102] (E105) {}; + \node[product, right=1.3cm of E105] (bz) {}; + \node[product, above=4.5cm of bz] (fuel) {}; + \node[feed, above left=0.75cm and 1cm of V101.ne] (tol) {}; + \node[feed, below=3.5cm of tol] (h2) {}; + + % Streams + \draw[->] (tol.e) -| node[sid, near start]{1} node[valve, near end, rotate=90]{} (V101.ne); + \draw[->] (V101.sw) |- (P101.w); + \draw[->] (P101.n) |- (E101.w); + \draw[<-] (V101.se) |- node[valve, pos=0.6]{} node[sid, pos=0.83]{2} (E101.w) node[pos=0.92](n1){} ; + \draw[->] (E101.e) -- ++(0.2,0) |- node[sid, near start]{4} (H101.w); + \draw[->] (H101.e) -| node[sid,near end]{6} ++(0.3,1) -| (R101.e); + \draw[->] (E102.e) -- (V102.w); + \draw[->] (V102.s) |- node[valve, rotate=90, near start]{} (V103.w); + \draw[->] (V103.s) |- node[valve, rotate=90, near start]{} ++(0.5,-0.6) |- node[sid, near start]{18} (E103.w); + \draw[->] (E103.e) -- node[sid, pos=0.4]{10} (T101.w); + \draw[->] (T101.ssw) |- (E106.e); + \draw[->] (E106.w) -- ++(-0.2,0) |- (T101.sw); + \draw[->] (T101.n) |- node[sid,near end]{13} (E104.w); + \draw[->] (E104.e) -| (V104.ne); + \draw[->] (V104.sw) |- (P102.e); + \draw[->] (P102.w) -- ++(-0.75,0) |- node[sid,pos=0.15]{12} node[valve,rotate=90,pos=0.4]{} (T101.ne); + \draw[->] (P102.w) -- node[sid]{14} ++(-0.75,0) |- node[valve,rotate=90,near start]{} (E105.w); + \draw[->] (E105.e) -- (bz.w); + \draw[->] (V103.n) |- node[sid, pos=0.2]{17} node[valve,rotate=90, pos=0.3]{} (fuel.w); + \draw[->] (V102.n) |- node[sid, pos=0.2]{8} node[valve,rotate=90, pos=0.3]{} node[sid, pos=0.96]{16} (fuel.w); + \draw[->] (V104.e) -- node[sid,pos=0.3]{19} node[valve,rotate=90,pos=0.6]{} (V104 |- fuel); + \draw[->] (V102.n) |- (C101.e); + \draw[->] (C101.w) -- node[valve, near start]{} node[sid,near end]{7} (R101.se) node[pos=0.5](n2){}; + + + % Cross stream 9 over 5 + \path[spath/save=over1] (R101.w) |- (E102.w); + \path[spath/save=under1] (n2 |- C101) |- (n1 |- V103) -| (n1 |- E101); + \tikzset{bridge={over1}{under1}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over1] node[sid, pos=0.5]{9}; + \draw[->, spath/use=under1] node[sid, pos=0.5]{5}; + + + % Cross stream 3 over 11 + \path[spath/save=over2] (h2.e) -- (n1 |- h2); + \path[spath/save=under2] (T101.s) -- ++(0,-3.5) -| (V101.w); + \tikzset{bridge={over2}{under2}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over2] node[sid, pos=0.2]{3}; + \draw[->, spath/use=under2] node[sid, pos=0.4]{11}; + + + % Unit labels + \node at (V101.center) {V-101}; + \node[below] at (P101.s) {P-101}; + \node[above] at (E101.north util) {E-101}; + \node[left] at (H101.sw) {H-101}; + \node[above=4mm of R101.e] {R-101}; + \node[above=1mm of C101.n] {C-101}; + \node[below] at (E102.south util) {E-102}; + \node[left, anchor=south east] at (V102.n) {V-102}; + \node[below left, anchor=north east] at (V103.sw) {V-103}; + \node[above] at (E103.north util) {E-103}; + \node[above left] at (T101.nw) {T-101}; + \node[above] at (E104.north util) {E-104}; + \node at (V104.center) {V-104}; + \node[above] at (P102.n) {P-102}; + \node[below] at (E105.south util) {E-105}; + \node[below] at (E106.south util) {E-106}; + + % Stream labels + \node[above] at (tol.n) {toluene}; + \node[above] at (h2.n) {hydrogen}; + \node[below] at (bz.s) {benzene}; + \node[above] at (fuel.n) {fuel gas}; + + % Utility labels + \tikzset{font=\scriptsize} + \node[right] at (E105.north util) {cw}; + \node[below] at (E104.south util) {cw}; + \node[above] at (E102.north util) {cw}; + \node[right] at (E106.north util) {mps}; + \node[below] at (E101.south util) {hps}; + + \draw[->] (H101.n) -- node[at end, right, align=center] {combustion\\products} ++(0,0.8); + \draw[<-] (H101.sse) -- node[right, align=left] {fuel\\gas} ++(0,-0.8); + \draw[<-] (H101.ssw) -- node[left] {air} ++(0,-0.8); + \end{tikzpicture} + } +\end{center} + +\begin{lstlisting} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize] + % Reduce stream label sizes + \tikzstyle{sid} = [diamond, draw, solid, fill=white, text badly centered, inner sep=1pt, font=\tiny] + + % Units + \node[vessel, rotate=90] (V101) {}; + \node[reciprocating pump, below right=0.75cm and 0.5cm of V101] (P101) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, above right=0.25cm and 2.75cm of V101] (E101) {}; + \node[fired hx, below right=1cm and 0.6cm of E101, anchor=west] (H101) {}; + \node[tube reactor, unit int=packed, right=of H101, anchor=center, rotate=90] (R101) {}; + \node[turbine, right=1.5cm of R101.se] (C101) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, below=of C101] (E102) {}; + \node[vessel, unit int=phase sep, right=0.5cm of E102] (V102) {}; + \node[vessel, unit int=phase sep, below=of V102.se, anchor=west] (V103) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, right=2.75cm of C101] (E103) {}; + \node[column, unit int=tray, right=1cm of E103] (T101) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, below left=0.5cm and 0.7cm of T101.s] (E106) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, above right=0.5cm and 1cm of T101.n] (E104) {}; + \node[vessel, rotate=90, below right=1cm and 0.5cm of E104] (V104) {}; + \node[centrifugal pump, below=1cm of V104.nw] (P102) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, below=0.5cm of P102] (E105) {}; + \node[product, right=1.3cm of E105] (bz) {}; + \node[product, above=4.5cm of bz] (fuel) {}; + \node[feed, above left=0.75cm and 1cm of V101.ne] (tol) {}; + \node[feed, below=3.5cm of tol] (h2) {}; + + % Streams + \draw[->] (tol.e) -| node[sid, near start]{1} node[valve, near end, rotate=90]{} (V101.ne); + \draw[->] (V101.sw) |- (P101.w); + \draw[->] (P101.n) |- (E101.w); + \draw[<-] (V101.se) |- node[valve, pos=0.6]{} node[sid, pos=0.83]{2} (E101.w) node[pos=0.92](n1){} ; + \draw[->] (E101.e) -- ++(0.2,0) |- node[sid, near start]{4} (H101.w); + \draw[->] (H101.e) -| node[sid,near end]{6} ++(0.3,1) -| (R101.e); + \draw[->] (E102.e) -- (V102.w); + \draw[->] (V102.s) |- node[valve, rotate=90, near start]{} (V103.w); + \draw[->] (V103.s) |- node[valve, rotate=90, near start]{} ++(0.5,-0.6) |- node[sid, near start]{18} (E103.w); + \draw[->] (E103.e) -- node[sid, pos=0.4]{10} (T101.w); + \draw[->] (T101.ssw) |- (E106.e); + \draw[->] (E106.w) -- ++(-0.2,0) |- (T101.sw); + \draw[->] (T101.n) |- node[sid,near end]{13} (E104.w); + \draw[->] (E104.e) -| (V104.ne); + \draw[->] (V104.sw) |- (P102.e); + \draw[->] (P102.w) -- ++(-0.75,0) |- node[sid,pos=0.15]{12} node[valve,rotate=90,pos=0.4]{} (T101.ne); + \draw[->] (P102.w) -- node[sid]{14} ++(-0.75,0) |- node[valve,rotate=90,near start]{} (E105.w); + \draw[->] (E105.e) -- (bz.w); + \draw[->] (V103.n) |- node[sid, pos=0.2]{17} node[valve,rotate=90, pos=0.3]{} (fuel.w); + \draw[->] (V102.n) |- node[sid, pos=0.2]{8} node[valve,rotate=90, pos=0.3]{} node[sid, pos=0.96]{16} (fuel.w); + \draw[->] (V104.e) -- node[sid,pos=0.3]{19} node[valve,rotate=90,pos=0.6]{} (V104 |- fuel); + \draw[->] (V102.n) |- (C101.e); + \draw[->] (C101.w) -- node[valve, near start]{} node[sid,near end]{7} (R101.se) node[pos=0.5](n2){}; + + + % Cross stream 9 over 5 + \path[spath/save=over1] (R101.w) |- (E102.w); + \path[spath/save=under1] (n2 |- C101) |- (n1 |- V103) -| (n1 |- E101); + \tikzset{bridge={over1}{under1}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over1] node[sid, pos=0.5]{9}; + \draw[->, spath/use=under1] node[sid, pos=0.5]{5}; + + + % Cross stream 3 over 11 + \path[spath/save=over2] (h2.e) -- (n1 |- h2); + \path[spath/save=under2] (T101.s) -- ++(0,-3.5) -| (V101.w); + \tikzset{bridge={over2}{under2}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over2] node[sid, pos=0.2]{3}; + \draw[->, spath/use=under2] node[sid, pos=0.4]{11}; + + + % Unit labels + \node at (V101.center) {V-101}; + \node[below] at (P101.s) {P-101}; + \node[above] at (E101.north util) {E-101}; + \node[left] at (H101.sw) {H-101}; + \node[above=4mm of R101.e] {R-101}; + \node[above=1mm of C101.n] {C-101}; + \node[below] at (E102.south util) {E-102}; + \node[left, anchor=south east] at (V102.n) {V-102}; + \node[below left, anchor=north east] at (V103.sw) {V-103}; + \node[above] at (E103.north util) {E-103}; + \node[above left] at (T101.nw) {T-101}; + \node[above] at (E104.north util) {E-104}; + \node at (V104.center) {V-104}; + \node[above] at (P102.n) {P-102}; + \node[below] at (E105.south util) {E-105}; + \node[below] at (E106.south util) {E-106}; + + % Stream labels + \node[above] at (tol.n) {toluene}; + \node[above] at (h2.n) {hydrogen}; + \node[below] at (bz.s) {benzene}; + \node[above] at (fuel.n) {fuel gas}; + + % Utility labels + \tikzset{font=\scriptsize} + \node[right] at (E105.north util) {cw}; + \node[below] at (E104.south util) {cw}; + \node[above] at (E102.north util) {cw}; + \node[right] at (E106.north util) {mps}; + \node[below] at (E101.south util) {hps}; + + \draw[->] (H101.n) -- node[at end, right, align=center] {combustion\\products} ++(0,0.8); + \draw[<-] (H101.sse) -- node[right, align=left] {fuel\\gas} ++(0,-0.8); + \draw[<-] (H101.ssw) -- node[left] {air} ++(0,-0.8); +\end{tikzpicture} +\end{lstlisting} + + +\newgeometry{margin=0.5in} +\pagenumbering{gobble} + +\section{Quick reference} +\begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize\ttfamily] + \matrix[ + column sep=0.5cm, + row sep=0.5cm, + column1/.style={nodes={anchor=center}}, + column2/.style={nodes={anchor=center}}, + column2/.style={nodes={anchor=center}}]{ + % ========================== + % Header + % ========================== + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{shape name}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{default}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{anchors}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{unit int}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{unit ext}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + \\ + + % ========================== + % Tank reactor + % ========================== + \node {tank reactor}; + & + \node[tank reactor] {}; + & + \node[tank reactor] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/left, + se/right, + sw/left, + nne/above right, + nnw/above left, + sse/below right, + ssw/below left, + ese/right, + wsw/left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred] at (0,-3mm) (f) {}; + \node[left] at (f.west) {stirred}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in {west motor/left, north motor/above} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\color{red}\anchor}; + } + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.east motor) {}; + \node[rotate=-90, above] at (f.east) {\color{red}east motor}; + + \node[tank reactor, unit int=liquid, below=3mm of f] (g) {}; + \node[left] at (g.west) {liquid}; + \node[tank reactor, unit int=stirred liquid, below=5mm of g] (h) + {}; + \node[left, align=right] at (h.west) {stirred\\liquid}; + & + \node[tank reactor, unit ext=lower jacket] (f) {}; + \node[align=center, below] at (f.s) {lower\\[-3pt]jacket}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + west jacket/left, + east jacket/right} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {};} + + \node[align=left, anchor=west] at (f.east jacket) {\color{red}east\\[-3pt]\color{red}jacket}; + \node[align=right, anchor=east] at (f.west jacket) {\color{red}west\\[-3pt]\color{red}jacket}; + + + \node[tank reactor, unit ext=side jacket, below=1.3cm of f] (g) {}; + \node[align=center, below] at (g.south) {side\\[-3pt]jacket}; + \foreach \anchor in { + west jacket, + east jacket, + north west jacket, + north east jacket, + south west jacket, + south east jacket} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (g.\anchor) {};} + + \node[align=left, anchor=west] at (g.east jacket) {\color{red}east jacket}; + \node[align=left, anchor=south west] at (g.north east jacket) {\color{red}north east\\[-3pt]\color{red}jacket}; + \node[align=left, anchor=north west] at (g.south east jacket) {\color{red}south east\\[-3pt]\color{red}jacket}; + \node[align=right, anchor=east] at (g.west jacket) {\color{red}west jacket}; + \node[align=right, anchor=south east] at (g.north west jacket) {\color{red}north west\\[-3pt]\color{red}jacket}; + \node[align=right, anchor=north east] at (g.south west jacket) {\color{red}south west\\[-3pt]\color{red}jacket}; + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Tube reactor + % ========================== + \node {tube reactor}; + & + \node[tube reactor] {}; + & + \node[tube reactor, scale=1.8] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left, + nne/above, + nnw/above, + sse/below, + ssw/below, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + \node[tube reactor, unit int=packed] (g) {}; + \node[left] at (g.west) {packed}; + \node[tube reactor, unit int=fixed, below=0.5cm of g] (h) {}; + \node[left] at (h.west) {fixed}; + \node[tube reactor, unit int=tubular, below=0.5cm of h] (j) {}; + \node[left] at (j.west) {tubular}; + & + \node[tube reactor, unit ext=cis shell] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in {west shell/above left, east shell/above right} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\color{red}\anchor};} + \node[left] at (f.west) {cis shell}; + + \node[tube reactor, unit ext=trans shell, below=7mm of f] (g) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in {north shell/above, south shell/below} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (g.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (g.\anchor) {\color{red}\anchor};} + \node[left] at (g.west) {trans shell}; + + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Basic hx + % ========================== + \node {basic hx}; + & + \node [basic hx] {}; + & + \node[basic hx] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util, draw=white] (f) {}; + \node[basic hx, unit int=U tube, below=of f] (g) {}; + \node[left] at (g.west) {U tube}; + & + \node[basic hx, unit ext=util] (f) {}; + \node[left] at (f.west) {util}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north util/right, + south util/left} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\color{red}\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \node[basic hx, unit int=U tube, unit ext=util, below=of f] (g) + {}; + \node[left] at (g.west) {util}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + west util/left, + east util/right} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (g.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (g.\anchor) {\color{red}\anchor}; + } + + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Shell and tube hx + % ========================== + \node {shell and tube hx}; + & + \node[shell and tube hx] {}; + & + \node[shell and tube hx, scale=1.5] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left, + nne/above, + nnw/above, + sse/below, + ssw/below, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + \node[shell and tube hx, unit int=two pass] (f) {}; + \node[left] at (f.west) {two pass}; + \node[shell and tube hx, unit int=four pass, below=0.5cm of f] (g) + {}; + \node[left] at (g.west) {four pass}; + & + \node[shell and tube hx, unit ext=cis shell] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in {west shell/above left, east shell/above right} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\color{red}\anchor};} + \node[left] at (f.west) {cis shell}; + + \node[shell and tube hx, unit ext=trans shell, below=7mm of f] (g) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in {north shell/above, south shell/below} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (g.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (g.\anchor) {\color{red}\anchor};} + \node[left] at (g.west) {trans shell}; + + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Plate hx + % ========================== + \node {plate hx}; + & + \node[plate hx] {}; + & + \node[plate hx, scale=1.8] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left, + nne/above, + nnw/above, + sse/below, + ssw/below, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + % no unit int + & + % no unit ext + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Fired hx + % ========================== + \node {fired hx}; + & + \node[fired hx] {}; + & + \node[fired hx] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/right, + sw/left, + nne/right, + nnw/left, + sse/below right, + ssw/below left, + ese/below right, + wsw/below left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + \node[fired hx, unit int=double] at (0,3mm) (f) {}; + \node[left=0.7cm of f.west] {double}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=2pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\color{gray}\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \node[fired hx, unit int=triple, below=3mm of f] (g) {}; + \node[left=0.7cm of g.west] {triple}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + nne/right, + nnw/left, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=2pt] at (g.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (g.\anchor) {\color{gray}\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + & + % no unit ext + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{center} + + + +\begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize\ttfamily] + \matrix[ + column sep=0.5cm, + row sep=0.5cm, + column1/.style={nodes={anchor=center}}, + column2/.style={nodes={anchor=center}}, + column2/.style={nodes={anchor=center}}]{ + % ========================== + % Header + % ========================== + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{shape name}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{default}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{anchors}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{unit int}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{unit ext}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + \\ + + % ========================== + % Column + % ========================== + \node{column}; + & + \node [column] {}; + & + \node[column] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/left, + se/right, + sw/left, + nne/above right, + nnw/above left, + sse/below right, + ssw/below left, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + \node[column, unit int=tray] at (-4mm,0mm) (c1) {}; + \node[left, align=right] at (c1.west) {tray \textit{or}\\dashed tray}; + \node[column, unit int=weir tray, right=0.25cm of c1] (c2) {}; + \node[right] at (c2.east) {weir tray}; + \node[column, unit int=double packed, below=0.5cm of c1] (c3) {}; + \node[left] at (c3.west) {double packed}; + \node[column, unit int=packed, right=0.25cm of c3] (c4) {}; + \node[right] at (c4.east) {packed}; + \node[column, unit int=numbered tray, feed tray=00, top tray=99, + bottom tray=22, below=0.5cm of c3] (c5) {}; + \node[left, align=right] at (c5.west) {numbered tray,\\top tray=99,\\feed tray=00,\\bottom tray=22}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + top tray/right, + feed tray/right, + bottom tray/right} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (c5.\anchor) {}; + \node[right=3mm of c5.\anchor] {\color{red}\anchor};} + + & + \node[column, unit ext=simple hx] (f) {}; + \node[left] at (f.west) {simple hx}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + distillate/below, + bottoms/below} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos, rotate=90] at (f.\anchor) {\color{red}\anchor};} + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Vessel + % ========================== + \node {vessel}; + & + \node[vessel] {}; + & + \node[vessel, scale=1.5] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/left, + se/right, + sw/left, + nne/above right, + nnw/above left, + sse/below right, + ssw/below left, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + \node[vessel, unit int=phase sep] (f) {}; + \node[left] at (f.west) {phase sep}; + \node[vessel, unit int=liquid, below=5mm of f] (g) {}; + \node[left] at (g.west) {liquid}; + \node[vessel, unit int=liquid rotated, below=5mm of g] (h) {}; + \node[left, align=right] at (h.west) {liquid\\rotated}; + & + \node[vessel, unit ext=simple hx] (f) {}; + \node[left] at (f.west) {simple hx}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north hx/right, + south hx/right} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\color{red}\anchor};} + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Centrifugal pump + % ========================== + \node[align=center] {centrifugal\\pump}; + & + \node[centrifugal pump] {}; + & + \node[centrifugal pump, scale=1.5] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/left, + se/right, + sw/left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + \node[centrifugal pump, unit int=inlet west] (p1) {}; + \node[left] at (p1.west) {inlet west}; + \node[centrifugal pump, unit int=inlet east, below=0.25cm of p1] + (p2) {}; + \node[left] at (p2.west) {inlet east}; + \node[centrifugal pump, unit int=inlet north, below=0.25cm of p2] + (p3) {}; + \node[left] at (p3.west) {inlet north}; + \node[centrifugal pump, unit int=inlet south, below=0.25cm of p3] + (p4) {}; + \node[left] at (p4.west) {inlet south}; + & + \node[centrifugal pump, unit ext=outlet north west] (p1) {}; + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (p1.outlet) {}; + \node[left] at (p1.outlet) {\color{red}outlet}; + \node[align=right, anchor=east] at (p1.west) {outlet\\[-5pt]north west}; + + \node[centrifugal pump, unit ext=outlet north east, below=0.25cm of p1] (p2) {}; + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (p2.outlet) {}; + \node[below, rotate=90] at (p2.outlet) {\color{red}outlet}; + \node[align=right, anchor=east] at (p2.west) {outlet\\[-5pt]north east}; + + \node[centrifugal pump, unit ext=outlet west, below=0.25cm of p2] (p3) {}; + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (p3.outlet) {}; + \node[left] at (p3.outlet) {\color{red}outlet}; + \node[left] at (p3.west) {outlet west}; + + \node[centrifugal pump, unit ext=outlet east, below=0.25cm of p3] (p4) {}; + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (p4.outlet) {}; + \node[below, rotate=90] at (p4.outlet) {\color{red}outlet}; + \node[left] at (p4.west) {outlet east}; + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Reciprocating pump + % ========================== + \node[align=center]{reciprocating\\pump}; + & + \node[reciprocating pump] {}; + & + \node[reciprocating pump] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/left, + se/right, + sw/left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + % no unit int + & + % no unit ext + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{center} + + +\begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture}[font=\footnotesize\ttfamily] + \matrix[ + column sep=0.5cm, + row sep=0.5cm, + column1/.style={nodes={anchor=center}}, + column2/.style={nodes={anchor=center}}, + column2/.style={nodes={anchor=center}}]{ + % ========================== + % Header + % ========================== + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{shape name}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{default}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{anchors}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{unit int}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + & + \node (s) {\normalsize\textbf{unit ext}}; + \draw (s.south west) -- (s.south east); + \\ + + % ========================== + % Compressor + % ========================== + \node{compressor}; + & + \node[compressor] {}; + & + \node[compressor, scale=2.5] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/left, + se/below right, + sw/left, + nne/above, + nnw/above, + sse/below, + ssw/below, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + % no unit int + & + % no unit ext + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Turbine + % ========================== + \node{turbine}; + & + \node[turbine] {}; + & + \node[turbine, scale=2.5] (f) {}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/right, + nw/above left, + se/right, + sw/below left, + nne/above, + nnw/above, + sse/below, + ssw/below, + ese/right, + wsw/left, + wnw/left, + ene/right} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + % no unit int + & + % no unit ext + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Feed + % ========================== + \node{feed}; + & + \node[feed] {}; + & + \node[feed, scale=2] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.stream) {}; + \node[right] at (f.stream) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{e}} \textit{or} \redtt{stream}}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + % no unit int + & + % no unit ext + \\ \hline + + + % ========================== + % Product + % ========================== + \node{product}; + & + \node[product] {}; + & + \node[product, scale=2] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.stream) {}; + \node[left] at (f.stream) {\footnotesize \redtt{stream} \textit{or} \boldtt{w}}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + % no unit int + & + % no unit ext + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Valve + % ========================== + \node{valve}; + & + \node[valve] {}; + & + \node[valve, scale=2] (f) {}; + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + n/above, + e/right, + w/left, + s/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + ne/above right, + nw/above left, + se/below right, + sw/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + % no unit int + & + \node[valve, unit ext=actuator, scale=1.5] (f) {}; + \node[left] at (f.west) {actuator}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + actuator/above} + {\node[circle, draw, red, fill=red!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\color{red}\anchor};} + \\ \hline + + + % ========================== + % Stream numbers + % ========================== + \node{\verb|\node[sid] {99};|}; + & + \node[sid] (f) {99}; + & + \node[sid, scale=2] (f) {99}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north/above, + east/right, + west/left, + south/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north east/above right, + north west/above left, + south east/below right, + south west/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + % no unit int + & + % no unit ext + \\ \hline + + % ========================== + % Electrical components + % ========================== + \node{\verb|\node[elec] {XX};|}; + & + \node[elec] {XX}; + & + \node[elec, scale=2] (f) {XX}; + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north/above, + east/right, + west/left, + south/below} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\textbf{\anchor}}};} + + \foreach \anchor/\pos in { + north east/above right, + north west/above left, + south east/below right, + south west/below left} + {\node[circle, draw, blue, fill=blue!25, inner sep=0pt, minimum size=3pt] at (f.\anchor) {}; + \node[\pos] at (f.\anchor) {\footnotesize\texttt{\anchor}};} + + \draw[shift=(f.center),red] plot[mark=x] coordinates{(0,0)}; + & + % no unit int + & + % no unit ext + \\ + }; + \end{tikzpicture} +\end{center} + +%\textbf{Drawing streams} +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0.5) -- node[sid] {99} (2,0.5); + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[valve] {} (2,0); + \draw[dashed] (0,-0.5) -- node[elec] {XX} (2,-0.5); +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \draw[->] (0,0.5) -- node[sid] {99} (2,0.5); + \draw[->] (0,0) -- node[valve] {} (2,0); + \draw[dashed] (0,-0.5) -- node[elec] {XX} (2,-0.5); + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} + +\vspace*{-1em} +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{5in} + \begin{lstlisting} +\begin{tikzpicture} + \tikzset{bridge radius=8pt} % default 0pt=straight line + \path[->, spath/save=over] (0,1) -- (1,1); + \path[->, spath/save=under] (0.5,-0.5) -- (0.5,0.5); + \tikzset{bridge={over}{under}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over] node[sid, pos=0.1]{1}; + \draw[->, spath/use=under] node[sid, pos=0.1]{2}; +\end{tikzpicture} + \end{lstlisting} + \end{minipage}\hspace{0.25in} + \begin{minipage}{1in} + \begin{center} + \begin{tikzpicture} + \tikzset{bridge radius=8pt} % default 0pt=straight line + \path[->, spath/save=over] (0,0) -- (2,0); + \path[->, spath/save=under] (1,-1) -- (1,1); + \tikzset{bridge={over}{under}} + \draw[->, spath/use=over] node[sid, pos=0.1]{1}; + \draw[->, spath/use=under] node[sid, pos=0.2]{2}; + \end{tikzpicture} + \end{center} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} + + +\end{document} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons.sty b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons.sty new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7afe7d8a22 --- /dev/null +++ b/graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons/pfdicons.sty @@ -0,0 +1,1713 @@ +% ============================================================== +% pfdicons.sty +% Copyright 2021 Aaron Drews +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status “maintained”. +% +% The Current Maintainer of this work is Aaron Drews. +% +% This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins +% and the derived file pig.sty. + + + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} +\ProvidesPackage{pfdicons}[2021/07/23 PFD Icons package, v1.0] + +\RequirePackage{tikz} +\RequirePackage{ifthen} + +\usetikzlibrary{positioning} +\usetikzlibrary{spath3} +\usetikzlibrary{arrows.meta} +\usetikzlibrary{shapes} +\usetikzlibrary{intersections} + + +% ========= CUSTOM KEYS ========== +\pgfkeys{/tikz/unit int/.initial = empty} +\pgfkeys{/tikz/unit ext/.initial = none} + + +% ========= CUSTOM SHAPES ========== +\makeatletter + +% ============================================================== +% tube reactor +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{tube reactor}{ + % A horizontal rectangle with curved endcaps + % Shape approved by kiwi + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\bottomleft}{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{-3mm}} + \savedanchor{\topright}{\pgfpoint{4mm}{3mm}} + \savedanchor{\farleft}{\pgfpoint{-6mm}{0mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \anchor{north}{\topright \pgf@x=0mm} + \anchor{south}{\bottomleft \pgf@x=0mm} + \anchor{east}{\farleft \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{west}{\farleft} + \anchor{south west}{\bottomleft} + \anchor{north east}{\topright} + \anchor{north west}{\topright \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{south east}{\topright \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{north north east}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{3mm}} + \anchor{north north west}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{3mm}} + \anchor{south south east}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-3mm}} + \anchor{south south west}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-3mm}} + \anchor{east north east}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{4mm}{0mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{45}{2mm and 3mm}}} + \anchor{east south east}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{4mm}{0mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{-45}{2mm and 3mm}}} + \anchor{west north west}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{0mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{135}{2mm and 3mm}}} + \anchor{west south west}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{0mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{225}{2mm and 3mm}}} + + % Special anchors (only useful for certain key=value pairs) + \anchor{west shell}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{4mm}} + \anchor{east shell}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{4mm}} + \anchor{north shell}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{4mm}} + \anchor{south shell}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-4mm}} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main rectangle + \pgfpathmoveto{\topright} + \pgfpatharc{90}{-90}{2mm and 3mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\bottomleft} + \pgfpatharc{270}{90}{2mm and 3mm} + \pgfpathclose + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + } + \foregroundpath{ + % Fills based on unit int variable + + % unit int=packed (yields "X" symbol) + \ifthenelse{\equal{packed}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + {\pgfpathmoveto{\topright} + \pgfpathlineto{\bottomleft} + \pgfpathlineto{\bottomleft \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathlineto{\topright \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathclose + }{} + + % unit int=fixed (yields diagonal lines) + \ifthenelse{\equal{fixed}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\topright} + \pgfpathlineto{\topright \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathmoveto{\bottomleft} + \pgfpathlineto{\bottomleft \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + + \foreach \xOne/\yOne/\xTwo/\yTwo in + { -4mm/1mm/-2mm/3mm, + -4mm/-1mm/0mm/3mm, + -4mm/-3mm/2mm/3mm, + -2mm/-3mm/4mm/3mm, + 0mm/-3mm/4mm/1mm, + 2mm/-3mm/4mm/-1mm + } + {\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{\xOne}{\yOne}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{\xTwo}{\yTwo}}} + }{} + + % unit int=tubular (yields horizontal lines) + \ifthenelse{\equal{tubular}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\topright} + \pgfpathlineto{\topright \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathmoveto{\bottomleft} + \pgfpathlineto{\bottomleft \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + + \foreach \y in + {2mm, 1mm, 0mm, -1mm, -2mm} % also west/left + {\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{4mm}{\y}}} + }{} + + % unit ext=cis shell (yields utility stems, both on north side) + \ifthenelse{\equal{cis shell}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{-3.5mm}{3mm}}{\pgfpoint{-2.5mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{2.5mm}{4mm}}{\pgfpoint{3.5mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3.8mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-2.2mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{2.2mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3.8mm}{4mm}} + }{} + + % unit ext=trans shell (yields utility stems, one on north and one on south) + \ifthenelse{\equal{trans shell}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{-3.5mm}{3mm}}{\pgfpoint{-2.5mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{2.5mm}{-4mm}}{\pgfpoint{3.5mm}{-3mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3.8mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-2.2mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{2.2mm}{-4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3.8mm}{-4mm}} + }{} + } +} + + +% ============================================================== +% tank reactor +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{tank reactor}{ + % A squat tank with a mixer and jacket + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\bottomleft}{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{-5mm}} + \savedanchor{\topright}{\pgfpoint{4mm}{2mm}} + \savedanchor{\bottom}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-7mm}} + \savedanchor{\top}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{4mm}} + +% \ifthenelse{\equal{lower jacket}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}\OR +% \equal{none}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}} } +% {% default (none) or unit ext=lower jacket +% \savedanchor{\westjacket}{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{-4mm}} +% } +% {% unit ext=side jacket (or anything else) +% \savedanchor{\westjacket}{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{-1.5mm}} +% } + + \savedanchor{\westjacket}{ + \pgf@x=-5mm + \ifthenelse{\equal{lower jacket}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}\OR + \equal{none}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}} } + {\pgf@y=-4mm} % lower jacket or default + {\pgf@y=-1.5mm} % side jacket or anything else + } + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \anchor{north}{\top} + \anchor{south}{\bottom} + \anchor{east}{\topright \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{west}{\bottomleft \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{south west}{\bottomleft} + \anchor{north east}{\topright} + \anchor{north west}{\topright \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{south east}{\bottomleft \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{north north east}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{2mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{45}{4mm and 2mm}}} + \anchor{north north west}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{2mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{135}{4mm and 2mm}}} + \anchor{west south west}{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{-3mm}} + \anchor{south south west}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-5mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{225}{4mm and 2mm}}} + \anchor{south south east}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-5mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{315}{4mm and 2mm}}} + \anchor{east south east}{\pgfpoint{4mm}{-3mm}} + + % Special anchors + % east/west jacket points move but north/south do not (they're essentially undefined for lower jacket but the definitions are retained to avoid errors) + \anchor{west jacket}{\westjacket} + \anchor{east jacket}{\westjacket \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{north west jacket}{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{1mm}} + \anchor{south west jacket}{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{-4mm}} + \anchor{north east jacket}{\pgfpoint{5mm}{1mm}} + \anchor{south east jacket}{\pgfpoint{5mm}{-4mm}} + \anchor{north motor}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{6.8mm}} + \anchor{west motor}{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{6.15mm}} + \anchor{east motor}{\pgfpoint{1mm}{6.15mm}} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main rectangle + \pgfpathmoveto{\topright} + \pgfpatharc{0}{180}{4mm and 2mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\bottomleft} + \pgfpatharc{180}{360}{4mm and 2mm} + \pgfpathclose + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + + } + \foregroundpath{ + % Fills based on unit int variable + + % unit int=stirred (yields stirrer with motor) + \ifthenelse{\equal{stirred}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { % Motor: + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{5.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{6.8mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{6.8mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{5.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0.6mm}{5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-0.6mm}{5mm}} + \pgfpathclose + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{5.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{5.5mm}} + + % Shaft and mixer: squared + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-4mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-1.5mm}{-4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1.5mm}{-4mm}} + \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{-1.5mm}{-4.8mm}}{\pgfpoint{-2mm}{-3.2mm}} + \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{1.5mm}{-4.8mm}}{\pgfpoint{2mm}{-3.2mm}} + + % Shaft and mixer: rounded (removed because I thought squared looked better) +% \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{5mm}} +% \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-4mm}} +% \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1.5mm}{-3.25mm}} +% \pgfpatharc{90}{-90}{0.75mm} +% \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1.5mm}{-3.25mm}} +% \pgfpatharc{90}{270}{0.75mm} +% \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-4mm}} + }{} + + + % unit int=liquid (liquid indicator from west to east) + \ifthenelse{\equal{liquid}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { % Use arcs because they scale more easily (see note in VESSEL shape) + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{0mm}} + \foreach \x in {-2.4mm,-0.8mm,...,4mm}{ + \pgfpatharcto{1.6mm}{5mm}{0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{\x}{0mm}} + } + }{} + + + % unit int=stirred liquid (yields stirrer with motor and liquid level) + \ifthenelse{\equal{stirred liquid}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { % Motor: + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{5.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{6.8mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{6.8mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{5.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0.6mm}{5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-0.6mm}{5mm}} + \pgfpathclose + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{5.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{5.5mm}} + + % Shaft and mixer: + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-4mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-1.5mm}{-4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1.5mm}{-4mm}} + \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{-1.5mm}{-4.8mm}}{\pgfpoint{-2mm}{-3.2mm}} + \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{1.5mm}{-4.8mm}}{\pgfpoint{2mm}{-3.2mm}} + + % Use arcs because they scale more easily (see note in VESSEL shape) + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{0mm}} + \foreach \x in {-2.4mm,-0.8mm,...,4mm}{ + \pgfpatharcto{1.6mm}{5mm}{0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{\x}{0mm}} + } + }{} + + + % unit ext=lower jacket (yields jacket on lower portion) + \ifthenelse{\equal{lower jacket}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{-2mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{-2.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{-5mm}} + \pgfpatharc{180}{360}{5mm and 3mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{5mm}{-2.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{4mm}{-2mm}} + + \pgfpathlineto{\bottomleft \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \pgfpatharc{0}{-180}{4mm and 2mm} + \pgfpathclose + }{} + + % unit ext=side jacket (yields jacket sides) + \ifthenelse{\equal{side jacket}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{-5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{-4.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{1.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{2mm}} + \pgfpathclose + + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{4mm}{-5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{5mm}{-4.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{5mm}{1.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{4mm}{2mm}} + \pgfpathclose + }{} + + } +} + + +% ============================================================== +% Column +% ============================================================== +\pgfkeys{/tikz/top tray/.initial = none} +\pgfkeys{/tikz/feed tray/.initial = none} +\pgfkeys{/tikz/bottom tray/.initial = none} +\pgfdeclareshape{column}{ + % A vertical rectangle with curved endcaps + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\bottomleft}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-12mm}} + \savedanchor{\topright}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{12mm}} + \savedanchor{\farnorth}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{14mm}} + + % The distillate and bottoms anchors move based on whether the column has simple heat exchangers or not. They're stored as saved anchors so that they don't move when subsequent columns are placed. + \savedanchor{\distillate}{ + \pgf@y=12mm + \ifthenelse{\equal{simple hx}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + {\pgf@x=6mm} % simple hx + {\pgf@x=3mm} % anything else (same as north east) + } + \savedanchor{\bottoms}{ + \ifthenelse{\equal{simple hx}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + {\pgf@x=6mm % simple hx + \pgf@y=-18mm} + {\pgf@x=3mm % anything else (same as south east) + \pgf@y=-12mm} + } + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \anchor{north}{\farnorth} + \anchor{south}{\farnorth \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{east}{\topright \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{west}{\bottomleft \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{south west}{\bottomleft} + \anchor{north east}{\topright} + \anchor{north west}{\topright \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{south east}{\topright \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{west north west}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{7mm}} + \anchor{east north east}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{7mm}} + \anchor{west south west}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-7mm}} + \anchor{east south east}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-7mm}} + \anchor{south south east}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-12mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{315}{3mm and 2mm}}} + \anchor{south south west}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-12mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{225}{3mm and 2mm}}} + \anchor{north north east}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{12mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{45}{3mm and 2mm}}} + \anchor{north north west}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{12mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{135}{3mm and 2mm}}} + + + % Special anchors + \anchor{distillate}{\distillate} % distillate product + \anchor{bottoms}{\bottoms} % bottoms product + \anchor{feed tray}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{0mm}} % feed tray label anchor + \anchor{top tray}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{10mm}} % top tray label anchor + \anchor{bottom tray}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-10mm}} % bottom tray label anchor + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main rectangle + \pgfpathmoveto{\bottomleft \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \pgfpatharc{0}{-180}{3mm and 2mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\bottomleft \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpatharc{180}{0}{3mm and 2mm} + \pgfpathclose + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + + } + \foregroundpath{ + % Fills based on unit int variable + + % unit int=tray OR dashed tray (yields horizontal, dashed lines) + % I didn't like how \pgfsetdash changed when drawings were scaled so I drew the lines manually to always have two openings + \ifthenelse{\equal{tray}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}\OR + \equal{dashed tray}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { %\pgfsetdash{{1.333mm}{1mm}}{0mm} + \foreach \y in {10mm,8mm,...,-12mm} % also west/left + {\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1.6mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-0.6mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0.6mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{1.6mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{\y}}} + \pgfsetroundjoin + }{} + + % unit int=weir tray (yields trays which alternate sides with small + %weirs) + \ifthenelse{\equal{weir tray}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + {\foreach \y in {8mm,4mm,...,-12mm} + {\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1.5mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{1.5mm}{\y}}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{0.6mm}}} + } + \foreach \y in {10mm,6mm,...,-12mm} + {\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1.5mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{-1.5mm}{\y}}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{0.6mm}}} + } + \pgfsetroundjoin + }{} + + + % unit int=numbered tray (yields horizontal, dashed lines at bottom, + %middle, top only) + \ifthenelse{\equal{numbered tray}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { \foreach \y in {10mm,0mm,-10mm} % also west/left + {\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1.6mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-0.6mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0.6mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{1.6mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{\y}}} + \pgfsetroundjoin + + }{} + % Add text if unit int=numbered tray and numbers given + \ifthenelse{ % top tray + \equal{numbered tray}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}\AND + \NOT\equal{none}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/top tray}} + }{\pgftext[bottom, at={\pgfpoint{0mm}{10mm}}, y=1pt] {\footnotesize \pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/top tray}}} + {} + \ifthenelse{ % feed tray + \equal{numbered tray}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}\AND + \NOT\equal{none}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/feed tray}} + }{\pgftext[bottom, y=1pt] {\footnotesize \pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/feed tray}}} + {} + \ifthenelse{ % bottom tray + \equal{numbered tray}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}\AND + \NOT\equal{none}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/bottom tray}} + }{\pgftext[bottom, at={\pgfpoint{0mm}{-10mm}}, y=1pt] {\footnotesize \pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/bottom tray}}} + {} + + + % unit int=packed (yields X) + \ifthenelse{\equal{packed}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-10mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{10mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{10mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-10mm}} + \pgfpathclose + \pgfsetroundjoin + }{} + + + % unit int= double packed (yields two X segments) + \ifthenelse{\equal{double packed}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{10mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{10mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpathclose + + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-10mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-10mm}} + \pgfpathclose + \pgfsetroundjoin + }{} + + % Exterior add-ons based on unit ext variable + % unit ext=simple hx (gives simple circles for condenser, reboiler) + % To prevent the interiors from being filled the "pen" has to be moved after *each* straight line segment, which is why there are seeming duplicates of \pgfpathmoveto for this key. + \ifthenelse{\equal{simple hx}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\farnorth} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{18mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{18mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{18mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{18mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{16mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{14mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{12mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{12mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{12mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{12mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathcircle{\pgfpoint{6mm}{15mm}}{1mm} + + \pgfpathmoveto{\farnorth \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-18mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-18mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{-18mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{-18mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{-16mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{-14mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{-12mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{-12mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-12mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-12mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathcircle{\pgfpoint{6mm}{-15mm}}{1mm} + \pgfsetroundjoin + }{} + } +} + +% ============================================================== +% Basic Heat Exchanger +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{basic hx}{ + % Circular hx with straight or U-tube pipes, stems optional + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \savedanchor{\north}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{3mm}} + \savedanchor{\east}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{0mm}} + \savedanchor{\northeast}{\pgfpointpolar{45}{3mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\center} + \anchor{east}{\east} + \anchor{north east}{\northeast} + \anchor{north}{\north} + \anchor{north west}{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{west}{\east \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{south west}{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{south}{\north \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{south east}{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + + % Special anchors (only useful for certain key=value pairs) + \anchor{north util}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{5mm}} + \anchor{south util}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-5mm}} + \anchor{east util}{\pgfpointadd + {\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + {\pgfpoint{0mm}{-2mm}} + } + \anchor{west util}{ + \pgfpointadd + {\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + {\pgfpoint{0mm}{-2mm}} + } + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main circle = 3mm + \pgfpathcircle{\pgfpointorigin}{3mm} + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + } + \foregroundpath{ + % Fills based on unit int variable + % Straight-thru + \ifthenelse{\equal{straight}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}\OR + \equal{empty}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-2mm}{-1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{2mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{3mm}} + }{} + + % U-tube + \ifthenelse{\equal{U tube}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x \pgf@y=1mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@y=1mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + }{} + + % Stems based on both unit int and unit ext + % Straight util + \ifthenelse{{\equal{straight}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}}\OR + {\equal{empty}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + \AND + \equal{util}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-3mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{5mm}} + }{} + + % U-tube util + \ifthenelse{\equal{U tube}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}\AND + \equal{util}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpointadd + {\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + {\pgfpoint{0mm}{-2mm}} + } + \pgfpathmoveto{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} % 2.236 = sqrt(5) + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpointadd + {\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + {\pgfpoint{0mm}{-2mm}} + } + }{} + } +} + + +% ============================================================== +% Fired heat exchanger +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{fired hx}{ + % Box with chimney, flame, and through tube + % Three unit int keys--single, double, or triple--for process tubes + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\chimneynorth}{\pgfpoint{1mm}{11mm}} + \savedanchor{\chimneysouth}{\pgfpoint{1mm}{7mm}} + \savedanchor{\northeast}{\pgfpoint{5mm}{4mm}} + \savedanchor{\southwest}{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{-6mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \anchor{east}{\northeast \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{north east}{\northeast} + \anchor{north}{\chimneynorth \pgf@x=0mm} + \anchor{north west}{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{west}{\southwest \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{south west}{\southwest} + \anchor{south}{\southwest \pgf@x=0mm} + \anchor{south east}{\southwest \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + + % Half-cardinals which align with double/triple tubes: + \anchor{north north east}{\pgfpoint{1mm}{9mm}} + \anchor{north north west}{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{9mm}} + \anchor{east north east}{\pgfpoint{5mm}{3mm}} + \anchor{west north west}{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{3mm}} + \anchor{east south east}{\pgfpoint{5mm}{-1mm}} + \anchor{west south west}{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{-1mm}} + + % Remaining half-cardinals distributed across base + \anchor{south south east}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-6mm}} + \anchor{south south west}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-6mm}} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main outline + \pgfpathmoveto{\chimneynorth} + \pgfpathlineto{\chimneysouth} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast} + \pgfpathlineto{\southwest \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \pgfpathlineto{\southwest} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \pgfpathlineto{\chimneysouth \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \pgfpathlineto{\chimneynorth \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + } + \foregroundpath{ + % Thru-tubes and burner based on unit int keys + % Single or empty (default) + \ifthenelse{{\equal{single}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}}\OR + {\equal{empty}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + }{ + \pgfpathmoveto{\southwest \pgf@y=0mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-2mm}{0mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{2mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{-2mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{2mm}{0mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@y=0mm} + + % Burner + \pgfpathmoveto{\southwest \pgf@x=0mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-4mm}} + \pgfpathcircle{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-3.5mm}}{0.5mm} + }{} + + % Double (two process tubes) + \ifthenelse{\equal{double}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}} + }{ + % Lower line + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{-1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-2mm}{-1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{-3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{2mm}{-1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{5mm}{-1mm}} + % Upper line + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-2mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{2mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{5mm}{3mm}} + + % Burner + \pgfpathmoveto{\southwest \pgf@x=0mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-5mm}} + \pgfpathcircle{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-4.5mm}}{0.5mm} + }{} + + % Triple (three process tubes) + \ifthenelse{\equal{triple}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}} + }{ + % Lower line + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{-1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-2mm}{-1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{-3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{2mm}{-1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{5mm}{-1mm}} + % Middle line + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-2mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{2mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{5mm}{3mm}} + % Upper line + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{9mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-0.5mm}{10mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0.5mm}{8mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{9mm}} + + % Burner + \pgfpathmoveto{\southwest \pgf@x=0mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-5mm}} + \pgfpathcircle{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-4.5mm}}{0.5mm} + }{} + } +} + +% ============================================================== +% Shell and tube heat exchanger +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{shell and tube hx}{ + % Box with horizontal lines for tubes + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\northeast}{\pgfpoint{6mm}{3mm}} + \savedanchor{\southwest}{\pgfpoint{-6mm}{-3mm}} + \savedanchor{\shellnortheast}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{3mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \anchor{north}{\northeast \pgf@x=0mm} + \anchor{south}{\northeast \pgf@x=0mm \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{east}{\northeast \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{west}{\southwest \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{north east}{\pgfpoint{5mm}{3mm}} + \anchor{south east}{\pgfpoint{5mm}{-3mm}} + \anchor{north west}{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{3mm}} + \anchor{south west}{\pgfpoint{-5mm}{-3mm}} + + \anchor{north north east}{\shellnortheast} + \anchor{north north west}{\shellnortheast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{south south east}{\shellnortheast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{south south west}{\shellnortheast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{east north east}{\pgfpoint{6mm}{2mm}} + \anchor{east south east}{\pgfpoint{6mm}{-2mm}} + \anchor{west north west}{\pgfpoint{-6mm}{2mm}} + \anchor{west south west}{\pgfpoint{-6mm}{-2mm}} + + % Special anchors + \anchor{west shell}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{4mm}} + \anchor{east shell}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{4mm}} + \anchor{north shell}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{4mm}} + \anchor{south shell}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-4mm}} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main outline + \pgfpathmoveto{\northeast} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \pgfpathlineto{\southwest} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathclose + + % Vertical lines for tube sheets + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{-3mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{4mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{4mm}{-3mm}} + + % Horizontal lines for pipes + \foreach \y in {3mm,2mm,...,-3mm} + {\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{\y}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{4mm}{\y}}} + + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + + } + \foregroundpath{ + % Two pass: adds a horizontal line on shell side + \ifthenelse{\equal{two pass}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}} + }{ + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-6mm}{0mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{0mm}} + }{} + + % Four pass: adds three horizontal line on shell sides + \ifthenelse{\equal{four pass}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}} + }{ % east-side line + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{4mm}{0mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{6mm}{0mm}} + % west-side line, top + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-6mm}{1.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{1.5mm}} + % west-side line, bottom + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-6mm}{-1.5mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{-1.5mm}} + }{} + + % unit ext=cis shell (yields utility stems, both on north side) + \ifthenelse{\equal{cis shell}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{-3.5mm}{3mm}}{\pgfpoint{-2.5mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{2.5mm}{4mm}}{\pgfpoint{3.5mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3.8mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-2.2mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{2.2mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3.8mm}{4mm}} + }{} + + % unit ext=trans shell (yields utility stems, one on north and one on south) + \ifthenelse{\equal{trans shell}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{-3.5mm}{3mm}}{\pgfpoint{-2.5mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{2.5mm}{-4mm}}{\pgfpoint{3.5mm}{-3mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3.8mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-2.2mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{2.2mm}{-4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3.8mm}{-4mm}} + }{} + } +} + +% ============================================================== +% Plate heat exchanger +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{plate hx}{ + % Box with vertical lines for plates + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\northeast}{\pgfpoint{4mm}{3mm}} + \savedanchor{\southwest}{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{-3mm}} + \savedanchor{\northeastanchor}{\pgfpoint{4mm}{3mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \anchor{north}{\northeast \pgf@x=0mm} + \anchor{south}{\southwest \pgf@x=0mm} + \anchor{east}{\northeast \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{west}{\southwest \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{north east}{\northeastanchor} + \anchor{north west}{\northeastanchor \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{south east}{\northeastanchor \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{south west}{\northeastanchor \pgf@x=-\pgf@x \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + + \anchor{north north east}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{3mm}} + \anchor{north north west}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{3mm}} + \anchor{south south east}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-3mm}} + \anchor{south south west}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-3mm}} + \anchor{east north east}{\pgfpoint{4mm}{2mm}} + \anchor{east south east}{\pgfpoint{4mm}{-2mm}} + \anchor{west north west}{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{2mm}} + \anchor{west south west}{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{-2mm}} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main outline + \pgfpathmoveto{\northeast} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \pgfpathlineto{\southwest} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathclose + + % Vertical lines for tube sheets + \foreach \x in {3mm,2mm,...,-4mm} + {\pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{\x}{-3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{\x}{3mm}}} + + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + } +} + +% ============================================================== +% Vessel +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{vessel}{ + % A small cylinder for storage, flash, phase separation, etc + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\bottomleft}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-5mm}} + \savedanchor{\topright}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{5mm}} + \savedanchor{\top}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{7mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \anchor{north}{\top} + \anchor{south}{\top \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{east}{\topright \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{west}{\bottomleft \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{south west}{\bottomleft} + \anchor{north east}{\topright} + \anchor{north west}{\topright \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{south east}{\bottomleft \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + + \anchor{east north east}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{3mm}} + \anchor{east south east}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-3mm}} + \anchor{west north west}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{3mm}} + \anchor{west south west}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-3mm}} + \anchor{south south east}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-5mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{315}{3mm and 2mm}}} + \anchor{south south west}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{-5mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{225}{3mm and 2mm}}} + \anchor{north north east}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{5mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{45}{3mm and 2mm}}} + \anchor{north north west}{\pgfpointadd{\pgfpoint{0mm}{5mm}}{\pgfpointpolar{135}{3mm and 2mm}}} + + % Special anchors (only useful for unit ext=hx) + \anchor{north hx}{\pgfpoint{5mm}{-2mm}} + \anchor{south hx}{\pgfpoint{5mm}{-5mm}} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main tank + \pgfpathmoveto{\topright} + \pgfpatharc{0}{180}{3mm and 2mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\bottomleft} + \pgfpatharc{180}{360}{3mm and 2mm} + \pgfpathclose + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + } + \foregroundpath{ + % Fills based on unit int variable + + % unit int=liquid (liquid indicator from west to east) + \ifthenelse{\equal{liquid}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { % Use arcs because they scale more easily (see note below) + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{0mm}} + \foreach \x in {-1.5mm,0mm,...,3mm}{ + \pgfpatharcto{1.5mm}{5mm}{0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{\x}{0mm}} + } + % Previously this drawing was attempted with decorations but it was hard to get the decorations to scale correctly when the shape was scaled (read: I couldn't get it to work). Thus the various arc operations above were used instead, which had the ancillary benefit of being easier to get to start and stop at specific locations. + }{} + + + % unit int=liquid rotated (liquid indicator from north to south) + % To be used with \node[vessel, rotate=90, unit int=liquid rot] {} + \ifthenelse{\equal{liquid rotated}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { % Use arcs because they scale more easily (see note below) + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{7mm}} + \foreach \y in {5mm,3mm,...,-9mm}{ + \pgfpatharcto{5mm}{2mm}{0}{0}{1}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{\y}} + } + }{} + + % unit int=phase sep (demister and knock-down) + \ifthenelse{\equal{phase sep}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { % knock-down + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-2mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{-1mm}} + + % demister (avoid "dashed") + \pgfpathmoveto{\topright} + \pgfpathlineto{\topright \pgf@x=2.1mm} + \pgfpathmoveto{\topright \pgf@x=1.3mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\topright \pgf@x=0.4mm} + \pgfpathmoveto{\topright \pgf@x=-0.4mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\topright \pgf@x=-1.3mm} + \pgfpathmoveto{\topright \pgf@x=-2.1mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\topright \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + + }{} + + % unit ext=simple hx (yields hx on lower portion) + \ifthenelse{\equal{simple hx}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { % An additional \pgfpathmoveto is used after each stroke to "raise the pen" and prevent fill inside the hx stems + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{5mm}{-2mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{-2mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{-2mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{-3.5mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{-3.5mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{-5mm}} + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{-5mm}} % pen up + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{5mm}{-5mm}} + }{} + + } +} + + +% ============================================================== +% Centrifugal pump +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{centrifugal pump}{ + % Plain or with stylized inlets, outlets + + \savedanchor{\center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \savedanchor{\north}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{3mm}} + \savedanchor{\east}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{0mm}} + \savedanchor{\northeast}{\pgfpointpolar{45}{3mm}} + + % The outlet anchor defaults to north but is otherwise selected based on unit ext + \savedanchor{\outlet}{ + \ifthenelse{\equal{none}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} % default to north + {\pgf@x=0mm \pgf@y=3mm}{} + \ifthenelse{\equal{outlet east}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + {\pgf@x=4mm \pgf@y=2mm}{} + \ifthenelse{\equal{outlet west}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + {\pgf@x=-4mm \pgf@y=2mm}{} + \ifthenelse{\equal{outlet north east}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + {\pgf@x=2mm \pgf@y=4mm}{} + \ifthenelse{\equal{outlet north west}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + {\pgf@x=-2mm \pgf@y=4mm}{} + } + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\center} + \anchor{east}{\east} + \anchor{north east}{\northeast} + \anchor{north}{\north} + \anchor{north west}{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{west}{\east \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{south west}{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{south}{\pgf@x=0mm \pgf@y=-4mm} + \anchor{south east}{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + + % Special anchors (only useful for certain key=value pairs) + \anchor{outlet}{\outlet} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + % Draw plain circle if UNITEXTERIOR is not set + \ifthenelse{\equal{none}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathcircle{\pgfpointorigin}{3mm} % Main circle = 3mm + }{} + + % Outlets based on unit ext variable + % Outlet to east + \ifthenelse{\equal{outlet east}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\north} + \pgfpatharc{-270}{19.4712}{3mm} % 19.4712 = asin(1/3) + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{4mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{4mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathclose + }{} + + % Outlet to west + \ifthenelse{\equal{outlet west}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\north} + \pgfpatharc{90}{-199.4712}{3mm} % -199.4712 = rad2deg(asin(1/3))-180 + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-4mm}{3mm}} + \pgfpathclose + }{} + % Outlet to north west + \ifthenelse{\equal{outlet north west}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\east \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} % west point + \pgfpatharc{-180}{109.4712}{3mm} % 109.4712 = 180-rad2deg(acos(1/3)) + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathclose + }{} + % Outlet to north east + \ifthenelse{\equal{outlet north east}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\east} + \pgfpatharc{0}{-289.4712}{3mm} % -289.4712 = rad2deg(acos(1/3))-360 + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{4mm}} + \pgfpathclose + }{} + + + } + \foregroundpath{ + % Inlets are in FOREGROUNDPATH so that when a fill color is used they don't produce an unfilled region. + + % Fills based on unit int variable + + % Inlet from north + \ifthenelse{\equal{inlet north}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{0mm}} + \pgfpatharc{180}{360}{1mm} + }{} + + % Inlet from west + \ifthenelse{\equal{inlet west}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpatharc{90}{-90}{1mm} + }{} + + % Inlet from east + \ifthenelse{\equal{inlet east}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{1mm}} + \pgfpatharc{90}{270}{1mm} + }{} + + % Inlet from south + \ifthenelse{\equal{inlet south}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit int}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpoint{1mm}{0mm}} + \pgfpatharc{0}{180}{1mm} + }{} + + } + + \behindbackgroundpath{ + % The base goes here so that when a fill color is used it doesn't produce an unfilled region. It's always drawn. + \pgfpathmoveto{\pgfpointpolar{225}{3mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{3mm}{-4mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpointpolar{315}{3mm}} + \pgfpatharc{315}{225}{3mm} + \pgfpathclose + } + +} + + +% ============================================================== +% Reciprocating pump +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{reciprocating pump}{ + % Two squares connected by a shaft + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\bottomleft}{\pgfpoint{-2mm}{-8mm}} + \savedanchor{\topright}{\pgfpoint{2mm}{2mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \anchor{north}{\topright \pgf@x=0mm} + \anchor{south}{\bottomleft \pgf@x=0mm} + \anchor{east}{\topright \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{west}{\bottomleft \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{south west}{\bottomleft} + \anchor{north east}{\topright} + \anchor{north west}{\topright \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{south east}{\bottomleft \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + + % Special anchors + % OUTLET defined only so that switching between centrifugal and reciprocating doesn't break + \anchor{outlet}{\topright \pgf@x=0mm} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Pump head + \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\topright}{\topright \pgf@x=-\pgf@x \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + % Shaft + \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\pgfpoint{-0.3mm}{-2mm}}{\pgfpoint{0.3mm}{-4mm}} + % Motor + \pgfpathrectanglecorners{\bottomleft}{\pgfpoint{2mm}{-4mm}} + + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + } +} + + + + +% ============================================================== +% Compressor +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{compressor}{ + % Squashed quadrilateral + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \savedanchor{\north}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{2mm}} + \savedanchor{\northeast}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{1mm}} + \savedanchor{\southwest}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-3mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\center} + \anchor{east}{\northeast \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{north east}{\northeast} + \anchor{north}{\north} + \anchor{north west}{\southwest \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{west}{\southwest \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{south west}{\southwest} + \anchor{south}{\north \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{south east}{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + + \anchor{north north west}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\southwest \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}{\north}} + \anchor{north north east}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\northeast}{\north}} + \anchor{south south west}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\southwest}{\north \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}} + \anchor{south south east}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}{\north \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}} + \anchor{west north west}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\southwest \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}{\southwest}} + \anchor{west south west}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\southwest}{\southwest \pgf@y=0mm}} + + % Spacing is tight on the outlet side so these anchors placed partway between cardinals and off-cardinals + \anchor{east north east}{\pgfpointlineattime{0.5}{\northeast}{\northeast \pgf@y=0mm}} + \anchor{east south east}{\pgfpointlineattime{0.5}{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}{\northeast \pgf@y=0mm}} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main circle + \pgfpathmoveto{\northeast} + \pgfpathlineto{\southwest \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathlineto{\southwest} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathclose + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + } +} + + +% ============================================================== +% Turbine +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{turbine}{ + % Squashed quadrilateral (simple mirror of compressor) + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \savedanchor{\north}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{2mm}} + \savedanchor{\northeast}{\pgfpoint{3mm}{3mm}} + \savedanchor{\southwest}{\pgfpoint{-3mm}{-1mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\center} + \anchor{east}{\northeast \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{north east}{\northeast} + \anchor{north}{\north} + \anchor{north west}{\southwest \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{west}{\southwest \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{south west}{\southwest} + \anchor{south}{\north \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{south east}{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + + \anchor{north north west}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\southwest \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}{\north}} + \anchor{north north east}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\northeast}{\north}} + \anchor{south south west}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\southwest}{\north \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}} + \anchor{south south east}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}{\north \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}} + \anchor{east north east}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\northeast}{\northeast \pgf@y=0mm}} + \anchor{east south east}{\pgfpointlineatdistance{1mm}{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}{\northeast \pgf@y=0mm}} + + % Spacing is tight on the inlet side so these anchors placed partway between cardinals and off-cardinals + \anchor{west north west}{\pgfpointlineattime{0.5}{\southwest \pgf@y=-\pgf@y}{\southwest \pgf@y=0mm}} + \anchor{west south west}{\pgfpointlineattime{0.5}{\southwest}{\southwest \pgf@y=0mm}} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main circle + \pgfpathmoveto{\northeast} + \pgfpathlineto{\southwest \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathlineto{\southwest} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathclose + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + } +} + + +% ============================================================== +% Valve +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{valve}{ + % General valve with or without unspecified actuator + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \savedanchor{\northeast}{\pgfpoint{1.5mm}{1mm}} + \savedanchor{\southwest}{\pgfpoint{-1.5mm}{-1mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\center} + \anchor{east}{\northeast \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{north east}{\northeast} + \anchor{north}{\northeast \pgf@x=0mm} + \anchor{north west}{\southwest \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{west}{\southwest \pgf@y=0mm} + \anchor{south west}{\southwest} + \anchor{south}{\southwest \pgf@x=0mm} + \anchor{south east}{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + + % Special anchors + \anchor{actuator}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{3mm}} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + \pgfpathmoveto{\northeast} + \pgfpathlineto{\southwest} + \pgfpathlineto{\southwest \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathlineto{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \pgfpathclose + \pgfsetroundjoin + \pgfsetroundcap + } + \foregroundpath{ + % Actuator based on unit ext key + % Unspecified actuator + \ifthenelse{\equal{actuator}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/unit ext}}} + { \pgfpathmoveto{\center} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{2mm}} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{-1mm}{2mm}} + \pgfpatharc{180}{0}{1mm} + \pgfpathlineto{\pgfpoint{0mm}{2mm}} + \pgfpathclose % unnecessary for stroke purposes but removes + %arrowheads since used inside paths + }{} + } +} + + + + +% ============================================================== +% Feed +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{feed}{ + % Half-filled circle, radius = 1.5 mm + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \savedanchor{\north}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{1.5mm}} + \savedanchor{\east}{\pgfpoint{1.5mm}{0mm}} + \savedanchor{\northeast}{\pgfpointpolar{45}{1.5mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\center} + \anchor{east}{\east} + \anchor{north east}{\northeast} + \anchor{north}{\north} + \anchor{north west}{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{west}{\east \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{south west}{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{south}{\north \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{south east}{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + + % Special anchors (only useful for certain key=value pairs) + \anchor{stream}{\east} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main circle + \pgfpathcircle{\pgfpointorigin}{1.5mm} + } + \beforebackgroundpath{ + % Filled half uses stroke color as fill + % Procedure for this derived from tex.stackexchange.com/questions/218968 + \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\pgfmysavedstrokecolor\csname\string\color@pgfstrokecolor\endcsname% + \expandafter\pgf@setfillcolor\pgfmysavedstrokecolor + \pgfpathmoveto{\north} + \pgfpatharc{90}{270}{1.5mm} + \pgfusepath{stroke, fill} + } +} + + +% ============================================================== +% Product +% ============================================================== +\pgfdeclareshape{product}{ + % Half-filled circle, radius = 1.5 mm + + % Saved anchors + \savedanchor{\center}{\pgfpointorigin} + \savedanchor{\north}{\pgfpoint{0mm}{1.5mm}} + \savedanchor{\east}{\pgfpoint{1.5mm}{0mm}} + \savedanchor{\northeast}{\pgfpointpolar{45}{1.5mm}} + + % Normal anchors + \anchor{center}{\center} + \anchor{east}{\east} + \anchor{north east}{\northeast} + \anchor{north}{\north} + \anchor{north west}{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{west}{\east \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + \anchor{south west}{\northeast \pgf@x=-\pgf@x \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{south}{\north \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + \anchor{south east}{\northeast \pgf@y=-\pgf@y} + + % Special anchors (only useful for certain key=value pairs) + \anchor{stream}{\east \pgf@x=-\pgf@x} + + % Draw it + \backgroundpath{ + % Main circle + \pgfpathcircle{\pgfpointorigin}{1.5mm} + } + \beforebackgroundpath{ + % Filled half uses stroke color as fill + % Procedure for this derived from tex.stackexchange.com/questions/218968 + \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\pgfmysavedstrokecolor\csname\string\color@pgfstrokecolor\endcsname% + \expandafter\pgf@setfillcolor\pgfmysavedstrokecolor + % Filled half + \pgfpathmoveto{\north} + \pgfpatharc{90}{-90}{1.5mm} + \pgfusepath{stroke, fill} + } +} + + + +\makeatother + + + +% ========= ADDITIONAL SHAPES ========== +% These shapes do not require custom PGF shapes; they're modifications of +%existing shapes. +\tikzset{>=Triangle} % see section 16.5 for other arrowheads (arrow tips) +\tikzstyle{sid} = [diamond, draw, solid, fill=white, text badly centered,inner +sep=1pt, font=\footnotesize] +\tikzstyle{elec} = [circle, draw, solid, fill=white, text badly centered,inner +sep=1pt, font=\footnotesize] + + + +% ========= DEFAULT TIKZSTYLES ========== +% The following TIKZSTYLES set all custom shapes to, by default, be drawn with a stroke in black and no fill. +\tikzset{tube reactor/.style={shape=tube reactor, draw=black}} +\tikzset{tank reactor/.style={shape=tank reactor, draw=black}} +\tikzset{column/.style={shape=column, draw=black}} +\tikzset{vessel/.style={shape=vessel, draw=black}} +\tikzset{basic hx/.style={shape=basic hx, draw=black}} +\tikzset{fired hx/.style={shape=fired hx, draw=black}} +\tikzset{shell and tube hx/.style={shape=shell and tube hx, draw=black}} +\tikzset{plate hx/.style={shape=plate hx, draw=black}} +\tikzset{centrifugal pump/.style={shape=centrifugal pump, draw=black}} +\tikzset{reciprocating pump/.style={shape=reciprocating pump, draw=black}} +\tikzset{compressor/.style={shape=compressor, draw=black}} +\tikzset{turbine/.style={shape=turbine, draw=black}} +\tikzset{feed/.style={shape=feed, draw=black}} +\tikzset{product/.style={shape=product, draw=black}} +\tikzset{valve/.style={shape=valve, draw=black, fill=white}} % fill=white since usually placed on paths + + + +% ========= ANCHOR ALIASING ========== +% Command for aliasing anchors (tex.stackexchange.com/questions/145134) +%\pgfdeclareanchoralias{}{}{} +\newcommand*\pgfdeclareanchoralias[3]{% + \expandafter\def\csname pgf@anchor@#1@#3\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter{\csname pgf@anchor@#1@#2\endcsname}} + +% In general, all compass directions are aliased with their abbreviations: north=n, south east = se, etc. +% Sure would be nice if this could be done in a for loop :/ but some are different. + +% Tank reactor +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{south west}{sw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{north north east}{nne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{north north west}{nnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{south south west}{ssw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{south south east}{sse} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{east south east}{ese} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tank reactor}{west south west}{wsw} + +% Tube reactor +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{south west}{sw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{north north east}{nne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{north north west}{nnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{south south west}{ssw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{south south east}{sse} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{east south east}{ese} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{west south west}{wsw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{west north west}{wnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{tube reactor}{east north east}{ene} + +% Basic hx +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{basic hx}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{basic hx}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{basic hx}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{basic hx}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{basic hx}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{basic hx}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{basic hx}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{basic hx}{south west}{sw} + +% Shell and tube hx +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{south west}{sw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{north north east}{nne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{north north west}{nnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{south south west}{ssw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{south south east}{sse} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{east south east}{ese} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{west south west}{wsw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{west north west}{wnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{shell and tube hx}{east north east}{ene} + +% Plate hx +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{south west}{sw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{north north east}{nne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{north north west}{nnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{south south west}{ssw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{south south east}{sse} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{east south east}{ese} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{west south west}{wsw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{west north west}{wnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{plate hx}{east north east}{ene} + +% Fired hx +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{south west}{sw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{north north east}{nne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{north north west}{nnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{south south west}{ssw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{south south east}{sse} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{east south east}{ese} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{west south west}{wsw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{west north west}{wnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{fired hx}{east north east}{ene} + +% Column +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{south west}{sw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{north north east}{nne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{north north west}{nnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{south south west}{ssw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{south south east}{sse} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{east south east}{ese} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{west south west}{wsw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{west north west}{wnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{column}{east north east}{ene} + +% Vessel +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{south west}{sw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{north north east}{nne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{north north west}{nnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{south south west}{ssw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{south south east}{sse} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{east south east}{ese} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{west south west}{wsw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{west north west}{wnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{vessel}{east north east}{ene} + +% Centrifugal pump +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{centrifugal pump}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{centrifugal pump}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{centrifugal pump}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{centrifugal pump}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{centrifugal pump}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{centrifugal pump}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{centrifugal pump}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{centrifugal pump}{south west}{sw} + +% Reciprocating pump +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{reciprocating pump}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{reciprocating pump}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{reciprocating pump}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{reciprocating pump}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{reciprocating pump}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{reciprocating pump}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{reciprocating pump}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{reciprocating pump}{south west}{sw} + +% Compressor +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{south west}{sw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{north north east}{nne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{north north west}{nnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{south south west}{ssw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{south south east}{sse} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{east south east}{ese} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{west south west}{wsw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{west north west}{wnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{compressor}{east north east}{ene} + +% Turbine +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{south west}{sw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{north north east}{nne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{north north west}{nnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{south south west}{ssw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{south south east}{sse} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{east south east}{ese} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{west south west}{wsw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{west north west}{wnw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{turbine}{east north east}{ene} + +% Valve +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{valve}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{valve}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{valve}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{valve}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{valve}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{valve}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{valve}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{valve}{south west}{sw} + +% Feed +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{feed}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{feed}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{feed}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{feed}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{feed}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{feed}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{feed}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{feed}{south west}{sw} + +% Product +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{product}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{product}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{product}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{product}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{product}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{product}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{product}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{product}{south west}{sw} + +% SID (Stream identification) +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{sid}{north}{n} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{sid}{south}{s} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{sid}{east}{e} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{sid}{west}{w} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{sid}{north east}{ne} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{sid}{north west}{nw} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{sid}{south east}{se} +\pgfdeclareanchoralias{sid}{south west}{sw} + + +% ====================================== +% Code from SPATH3 documentation for creating line breaks + +%\AtBeginDocument{\tikz[overlay] \path[spath/save=arc] (0,0) arc[radius=1cm, start angle=180, delta angle=-180];} + +% Updated to eliminate occasional whitespace per tex.stackexchange.com/questions/605800 +\AtBeginDocument{\sbox0{\tikz[overlay] \path[spath/save global=myarc] (0,0) arc[radius=1cm, start angle=180, delta angle=-180];}} + +\tikzset{ + bridge path/.initial=myarc, + bridge radius/.initial=0pt, + bridge gap/.initial=4pt, + bridge/.style 2 args={ + spath/split at intersections with={#1}{#2}, + spath/insert gaps after + components={#1}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/bridge radius}}, + spath/join components upright + with={#1}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/bridge path}}, + spath/split at intersections with={#2}{#1}, + spath/insert gaps after + components={#2}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/tikz/bridge gap}}, + } +} diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog index ea8730ed19..e4dadad58c 100644 --- a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog +++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog @@ -1,3 +1,1206 @@ +2021-07-24 Jim Hefferon + New release for CTAN, version of July 2021. + +2021-07-21 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (intro): wording. + (Indexes): mention CTAN topic. + (makeindex): mention xindex. + * GNUmakefile (easyurls): use name testdist instead of test. + * src/easyurls.py (INDEX_FILE_NOTE): intro wording. + +2021-07-21 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi: Added comment at end of top page header, + to easily split the page to insert material in easyurls.py. + + * easyurls.py: Edit note added to top page header discussing + mor memorable urls. + + * Makefile: edit dist target to make .zip of tree of html files, + add easyurls target. + +2021-07-05 Karl Berry + + * CTAN, + * Makefile: release procedure update. + * TODO: it was empty, so remove. + +2021-07-04 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\@dottedtocline): Tiny tweaks. + +2021-07-04 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\stretch): Added section. + +2021-06-27 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\@dottedtocline): Add section. Move some + material up to Table of Contents to avoid duplication. + +2021-06-21 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Jobname): updates; consistently use "jobname" + instead of "job name". + Change @cindex entries to start with lowercase. + + * writing.html: mention index entries. + +2021-06-18 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: (minipage): avoid overfull boxes from comment lines. + (Expressions): use \textasciitilde; other wording. + Fix typos. + +2021-06-12 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\numberline): Add section on \numberline. + +2021-06-11 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\contentsline): Add section on \contentsline. + +2021-06-09 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Expressions): Add section on \numexpr, etc. + +2021-06-04 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\baselineskip & \baselinestretch): Add section. Remove + redundant material from low level font command section. + +2021-05-29 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\mathstrut): Add section for \mathstrut; adjust section + for \vphantom to use an example not best done with \mathstrut. + +2021-05-29 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (HTML head): Adopt HTML head from easyurls for .texi. + +2021-05-28 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): add \textfiguredash, + \texthorizontalbar, \textnonbreakinghyphen, from upcoming + June 2021 LaTeX release. + +2021-05-27 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (xspace package): Add section on \xspace. + +2021-05-26 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (inputenc package): tweak utf-8 discussion. + +2021-05-25 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (xr package): Add section. + +2021-05-24 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (inputenc package): Add section. + +2021-05-15 Karl Berry + + * Makefile: website process doc + + * latex2e.texi (About this document): urls were confused, with no + no link to the actual dev page with all the output formats. + Report from Paul A Norman, 15 May 2021 18:27:10. + + * Makefile: first draft at minor doc for updating website. + + * index.html, + * README: update for current urls, etc. + +2021-04-29 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Accents): babel supports Unicode engines now. + Report from Javier Bezos, 29 Apr 2021 14:35:39. + +2021-04-22 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Using BibTeX, Output files): https://mirror.ctan.org. + +2021-04-16 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\parindent & \parskip): horizontal and vertical + were reversed. Report from Chandrasekhar, 15 Apr 2021 17:04:17. + +2021-02-14 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\spacefactor): Translate node from English. + +2021-02-14 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\spacefactor, \accent, fontenc package): Copy + these nodes from the English version. + (\frenchspacing): Move it as a subnode of \spacefactor. + +2020-12-30 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Few typoes. + + * NEWS-fr: Delivery note December 2020 French delivery to CTAN. + +2020-12-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (Page layout parameters): Add Texinfo TODO comment + that margin description has to be fixed, point as the French + version for reference. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Page layout parameters): Add anchors, and fixe + the margin parameters description. + +2020-12-26 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (\twocolumn): Minor rewording and fixes. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\twocolumn): Align on English, propagates Jim's + r368. + +2020-12-26 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi: twiddle some lines, so anchor is *after* + corresponding item. + + * latex2e-fr.texi: add some anchor, partial propagation of Jim's + r671. + +2020-12-25 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Boxes): Align on English. + +2020-12-25 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (lrbox, \usebox): ``storage bin'' -> ``box register''. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (lrbox, \usebox): Align on English. + +2020-12-24 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\mbox & \makebox, \sbox & \savebox): Align on English. + + * latex2e.texi (\mbox & \makebox): Replace example with table + reference by soviet tank T-34, reference should be made with \ref + & \label. Fix redundant ``space after points'' text. Avoid + negative sentences describing what \\ or \par do, and remind this + is LR mode. + (\sbox & \savebox): ``storage bin'' -> ``box register'' + +2020-12-24 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (Using BibTeX): Forward reference to CTAN node. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Using BibTeX): Align on English. + +2020-12-24 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\raisebox): Align on English. + + * latex2e.texi (\raisebox): Minor improvement of examples & + description. + +2020-12-24 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (verbatim): Explain why it cannot be used within a + macro argument. Forward reference to CTAN node. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\verb): Typoes. + (verbatim): Align on English. + +2020-12-24 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (titlepage): Align on English. + +2020-12-24 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (theorem): Align on English. + +2020-12-24 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (\cite): Add crossref to node Jobname + ``cited'' + -> ``explicitely cited''. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\nocite): Align on English. + +2020-12-24 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (\cite): Clarify bibliography style are only when + BibTeX is used, and add crossref to node Jobname. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\cite): Align on English. + +2020-12-24 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\bibitem): Align on English. + + * latex2e.texi (\bibitem): Minor rewordings. Add forward reference to Jobname node. + +2020-12-23 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (thebibliography): Add reference to node list for + layout. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (thebibliography): Align on English. + +2020-12-23 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (tabular): Propagate r626, r676. + + * latex2e.texi (tabular): Clarify ``row'' -> ``tabular row''. + +2020-12-23 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (table): Align on English. + + * latex2e.texi (table): Improve conciseness / precision. + +2020-12-23 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (tabbing): Catch-up changes in the English + version, and improve a few things, notably description of \= and + comparison with tabular. + + * latex2e.texi (tabbing): Minor fixes, mark as needing catch-up French version. + + +2020-12-22 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (list): Remove spurious space in redlabel example. + (minipage): Align neighbourhood population example on the French + version / ie use siunitx. In French this is a must for the decimal + separator, but for English it also make the column alignment + easier. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (list): Complete translation + fix typoes. + (minipage): Fix translation, do not use inches (French people + don't understand what it means). Fix the neighbourhood population + example. + +2020-12-22 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (picture): Insert \qbezier & \graphpaper menu entries. + (\qbezier, \graphpaper): Translate nodes. + + * latex2e.texi (picture): Accent for B\'ezier. + (\qbezier): Fix figure bouding box. + (\graphpaper): Index graphpap package. + +2020-12-22 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (picture): Re-order sub-nodes to match the + English version. + +2020-12-22 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\circle): Align on English. + (quotation & quote, verse): Align on English --- example indentation. + + * latex2e.texi (\circle): Minor fix --- missing \. + +2020-12-22 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\parbox): Fix options ``t'' and ``c'' description. + +2020-12-22 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (itemize): ``itemized'' -> ``unordered'' + + @dfn{...}. Mention ``default'' means no locale through + e.g. babel. Nesting on a separate paragraph. ``note'' first and + ``also use'' second for the roman numerals convention. Make it + clear that reference to list node concerns parameters related to + itemize. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (itemize): Align on English. + +2020-12-22 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (flushright): Add ``interword'' concerning + shrinking/stretching space. + (flushright, \raggedleft): Mark references to flushleft examples + as ``mutatis mutandis''. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (flushleft): Improve translation. + (\raggedright, \raggedleft): Aligne on English version. + + * latex2e-fr.texi + +2020-12-21 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (equation, figure, flushleft): Align on English version --- + propagate Jim's r626. + + * latex2e.texi (flushleft): Add ``interword'' concerning + shrinking/stretching space. + +2020-12-21 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (eqnarray): Align on English version --- + propagate Jim's r626. + +2020-12-20 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (array, center, picture): Align on English + version. + +2020-12-18 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (\verb): Clarify where visible spaces are produced + by starred version, and explain why \verb cannot be used within an + argument of macro. Package url, clarify word ``option''. + (Text symbols): Indexify eurosym. + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Propagate Karl's r852, r854, r855, r856, and + r857. + +2020-12-18 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Command line input): More examples, move jobname + stuff to a node of its own. + (Jobname): New node, material taken from + "Command line input" with improvements & additions. + + * latex2e.texi: (Command line input, Jobname): Align document + structure on the French, and put markers for translation needed. + +2020-12-15 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.tex (Text symbols): mention that textcomp is + (effectively) loaded by default as of the Feb 2020 release. + From ltnews 31, February 2020; suggestion from + Pablo Gonzalez L, 28 Nov 2020 21:27:43. + +2020-12-10 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (@TeX{} engines): mention -dev formats. + From ltnews 30, October 2019; suggestion from + Pablo Gonzalez L, 28 Nov 2020 21:27:43. + +2020-12-09 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: no spaces around em-dashes; this is American English. + Other dash-related tweaks. + +2020-12-08 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): \bigwedge and \bigvee were reversed; + similar mistake in \lor. + Report and fix from Henning Iseke, 7 Dec 2020 11:48:10. + +2020-12-08 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (description): Typo ``definition'' -> + ``description'', reported by Rose Davidson. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\ref): typo, ``item'' duplicate word + removal. Reported by Denis Bitouz\'e. + (figure): Typoes. + +2020-12-08 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Overview): mention UTF-8 as default input encoding; + simplify. From ltnews 28, April 2018; suggestion from + Pablo Gonzalez L, 28 Nov 2020 21:27:43. + +2020-11-30 Karl Berry + + * Makefile (texi2{pdf,dvi}): use texfot. + (htmlsplit): remove commented-out zip commands. + + * Makefile (t2html_top): https://tug.org. + +2020-11-30 Pablo Gonz\'alez L" + + * latex2e.texi: update urls to https, etc. + +2020-11-29 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\write18): mention the shellesc package. + Suggestion from Pablo Gonzalez L, 28 Nov 2020 20:31:49. + + (Command line interface): rename node from "Command line"; + leave anchor behind. Reword extension description. + (Command line options): mention that option values can be + given either as separate arguments or with =. + Suggestion from Pablo Gonzalez L, 28 Nov 2020 20:49:00. + +2020-11-26 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\/): commands like \emph and \textit auto-insert + italic corrections, declarations like \em and \itshape don't. + + * latex2e.texi (Spacing in math mode), + (\thinspace & \negthinspace): all math spacing commands + can be used in text as of 2020-10-01 release, or with amsmath. + Following ltnews32. + Suggestion from Pablo Gonzalez L, 24 Nov 2020. + +2020-11-25 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (@LaTeX{} command syntax): mention xparse and expl3. + Suggestion from Pablo Gonzalez L, 23 Oct 2020 00:54:51. + + (Overview): mention first-packages document. + (\@@startsection) : use @raggedright since the text + does not format well, and no rewrite is plausible. + +2020-11-24 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: omit mention of textcomp, since it has become a no-op. + (picture): mention use of arithmetic expressions; + move qbezier example to qbezier node. + (\DeclareGraphicsExtensions): pdf before png; mention grfext. + These suggestions from Pablo Gonzalez L, 23 Oct 2020 22:02:33. + +2020-09-17 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (@TeX{} engines): Propagate K's r840 + some + rewording. + +2020-09-15 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (@TeX{} engines): Propagate K's r838. + + * latex2e.texi (@TeX{} engines): \og @LaTeX{} format\fg -> \og @LaTeX{} @TeX{} format\fg. + (@TeX{} engines): Restore reference to Overview node. + +2020-09-14 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (@TeX{} engines): mention formats. + +2020-09-13 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Propagate Karl's r833. + (Font styles): Typos. + (\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter): Add missing cindex entries. + (Larger book template): Add commented-out arguments to + \includeonly for not included chunks. + + * latex2e.texi (Font styles): \og in any forms\fg -> \og in any of the three forms\fg. + (Font sizes): Restore r832 cindex for \og declaration form of font size commands\fg. + \og.\fg -> \og,\fg, as not followed by a capital. + (\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter): Add missing cindex entries. + (Larger book template): Add commented-out arguments to + \includeonly for not included chunks. + +2020-09-12 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (@LaTeX{} command syntax): Some rephrasing, make + it better aligned on English version. + (@LaTeX{} command syntax, Declaration): Remove Declaration node. + (Environment): Realagin on English --- mention that a document + environment is mandatory. + (Font sizes): Type. + (Sectioning): \og @xref\fg -> \og @pxref\fg. + (\obeycr & \restorecr): Realign on English. + (\makeatletter & \makeatother): Re-align on English. Unify wording + --- only \og arobe\fg, \og arobase\fg is slang. + (\@@ifstar): Reconcile with English. + + * latex2e.texi (@LaTeX{} command syntax): \og commands\fg -> \og command names\fg. + (\part): Add comma after @pxref. + (\@@startsection): Fix my poor English \og @code{\section} whith + keeping\fi -> \og @code{\section} while keeping\fi. + (\obeycr & \restorecr): Use @pxref correctly. + (\@@ifstar): Reconcile with French version. + +2020-09-10 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (@LaTeX{} command syntax): omit declaration form + here, as it's not exactly syntax. + (Environment): @var{environment-name} instead of with space. + (Font styles, Font sizes): reword declaration-related info. + (\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter): not declarations. + (\@@startsection): fewer words in list of defaults. + +2020-09-06 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * NEWS-fr: September 2020 version delivery note. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Starting and ending): Minor typo. + +2020-09-06 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Finalize propagating Jim's r649, notably + include article template. Fix lots of typoes. + + * latex2e.texi: Insert a comma after @xref{...} wherever + applicable. + (Sectioning): @findex \subsubsection. Typo \og a something\fg -> + \og something\fg. + \og appearance of sectioning commands\fg -> \og + appearance of headings made by sectioning commands\fg. + \og Layout of sectional units\fg -> \og Typesetting + sectional unit headings\fg. + (\@@startsection): \og redefines @code{\section} to have the + form\fg -> \og redefines @code{\section} with keeping its standard + calling form\fg. Typo. + (\@@startsection): \og top of a fresh page\fg -> \og beginning of + a page\fg. It is not really the *top* of the page, but that of the + text content area. + Itemize list of default arguments. + +2020-09-04 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Larger book template): Propagate Karl's r828. + + * latex2e.texi (beamer template): {...}-fiy @PkgIndex argument. + (book template, Larger book template): Revert r828 for \og see + next\fg becoming again \og @xref\fg. + +2020-08-25 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Document classes) : reword. + (\newcommand & \renewcommand): try to be clearer about + when arguments can be multiple paragraphs; mention \long. + (tugboat template): remove node, is stale. + thoughout: behaviour -> behavior. + +2020-08-07 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Propagate Karl's r810 changes. + + * latex2e.texi (Document templates), + * latex2e-fr.texi (Document templates): \og not reference + material\fg now replaced by \og illustrative\og. Actually the + templates and example *are* reference material, as one may use + them for reference. + +2020-08-06 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Propagate Karl's r811 changes. + (Font sizes): Refresh translation. + + * latex2e.texi: @dfn{...}-ify phases \og declaration form\fg and + \og environment form\fg. + +2020-08-06 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Propagate Karl's r812 changes. + +2020-08-06 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (minipage): Fix example using siunitx. + +2020-08-06 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Lengths): Refresh translation. + +2020-08-05 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter): Translate node. + +2020-08-05 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (minipage): Re-align on English translation. + + * latex2e.texi (minipage): Typoes + insert a few TODO comments. + +2020-07-13 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (\appendix): Fix \og\appendixname\fg description. + (\includegraphics): \og@ci\fg \rightarrow \og@cindex\fg. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (About this document): Typo. + (\appendix): Translate this node. + (\includegraphics): \og@ci\fg \rightarrow \og@cindex\fg. + +2020-07-01 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Upper and lower case): avoid "American" + characters, and mention expl3's implementation of the Unicode + algorithm. + +2020-06-10 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: consistently use "plain" not "Plain". + + * latex2e.texi (displaymath): reword details about not using $$. + More index entries. + +2020-06-07 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Font sizes): words of warning about the env form + of font size commands. Suggestion from Denis B. + https://tug.org/pipermail/latexrefman/2020q2/000579.html + + * latex2e.texi (CTAN): reword. + +2020-05-10 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: use @kbd{RETURN}, etc., throughout, + not . + (Sectioning) : reword to avoid bad line breaks. + +2020-05-07 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph): + Translate this node. + (throught the source): Replace \og@tie{}\fg by a non breakable space + character. + +2020-05-03 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\chapter): Typo. + (\section): Translate leftover English text. Typo. + (\subsection): Translate node. + + * latex2e.texi (Recovering from errors): Fix typo, reported by + Werner Lemberg. + (\subsection): \og section\fg \rightarrow \og subsection\fg. + +2020-05-02 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\section): Translate this node. + +2020-04-30 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Larger book template): Translate this node. + +2020-04-30 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (Recovering from errors): A few @code{\ldots} or + @samp{\ldots} replaced by @kbd{\ldots}. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Recovering from errors): Translate node. + (Document templates): Typos. + +2020-04-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (TODO comment): Remove Patrick Bidault's + suggestion about @value{UPDATED}, agreed with Patrick. + (Top): Typo. + (Command line input): Translate this node. + + * latex2e.texi (Command line input): Insert \og bouding box\fg before + \og size\fg. + +2020-04-26 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (TODO comment): add --shell-escape & + --file-line-no wrt MiKTeX, etc. + (external reference comment): Add French version of \og TeX for the + Impatient\fg. + (Low-level font commands): \fontshape, @var{\ldots}-ify \og allure\fg. + (Low-level font commands): \fontsize, revise translation. + (Sectioning): Translate menu description. + (\chapter): Translate node. + + * latex2e.texi (\chapter): Typo in examplicifation of toc title + w/o line skip. + (\write18): as per Karl's comment, \og expands in\fg \rightarrow \og expands to\fg. + +2020-04-22 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Typos. + +2020-04-22 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (Command line options): @code{\ldots} \rightarrow @kbd{\ldots} where applicable. + \og@code{jobname}\fg \rightarrow \og@dfn{jobname}\fg. Typo. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Command line): Typos. + (Command line options): Translate the node. + +2020-04-22 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\accent, \openin & \openout): Insert space before + @var{number}. + (\write): Undo misalignment of %1 %2 %3 comments in + example. + (\write and security): Remove leftover English text. + (Command line): Remove leftover @ignore'd text. + + * latex2e.texi (\accent, \openin & \openout): Insert space before + @var{number}. + (\write): Undo misalignment of %1 %2 %3 comments in + example. + +2020-04-20 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (\read): Insert space before @var{number} + (\write): Align vertically the %1, %2, %3 comments in example. + (\write): Typo \og19\fg \rightarrow \og18\fg in stream number cindex entry. + (\write): Fix Security menu entry. + + * latex2e-fr.texi: See Karl's r798 in previous revision. + +2020-04-19 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\write): edits throughout; more index entries. + (\write and security): new node. + +2020-04-17 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (picture): Refresh outdated node translation, + triggered by Karl's r795.. + (\write18): Take Karl's r795. + +2020-04-17 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter & \makeatother): Insert + \og typically\fg concerning using the commands in the preamble. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\makeatletter & \makeatother): Insert + \og typiquement\fg concerning using the commands in the preamble. + +2020-04-16 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\write18): omit sagetex example, as often not + needed directly. Vincent, 16 Apr 2020 13:11:19 +0200. + Don't use typewriter for the big graphics packages' names. + More index entries. + +2020-04-16 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (Command line): Fix menu descriptions, as per + Karl's suggestion --- email of 2020-04-16T14:12:15-07. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Command line): Propagate the change in + latex2e.texi. + +2020-04-16 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\write18): Fix texinfo compile error. + (\write18): Typo. + (Command line): Translate node. + + * latex2e.texi (Command line): \og file extension\fg \rightarrow \og file name extension\fg. + (Command line): @code{\ldots} \rightarrow @kdb{\ldots}, for -D. + +2020-04-16 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package construction): Typoes. + (\write): Clarify example comment, \og courant\fg \rightarrow \og racine\fg. + (\wlog): Suppress spurious space in example. + (\write18): Translate node with fixing statement on \jobname. + + * latex2e.texi (\write): Clarify example comment, \og main\fg \rightarrow \og root\fg. + (\write18): Fix statement on \og\jobname\fg. + +2020-04-15 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter & \makeatother): Suppress confusing + and redundant text. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\makeatletter & \makeatother): Refurbish translation. + +2020-04-14 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\message): Get refinements from Karl's r788. + + * latex2e.texi (\message): Fix indentation after example. + (\wlog): @code{\ldots} \rightarrow @var{\ldots}. + +2020-04-14 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\message): Translation. + (\wlog): Translation. + +2020-04-12 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\message): remove "interaction lines", + other wording. + +2020-04-12 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\include & \includeonly): Complete translation. + + * latex2e.texi (\include & \includeonly): Typoes. + +2020-04-06 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Sectioning): Typoes. + + * latex2e.texi (Sectioning): Fix \og secnumdepth\fg \rightarrow \og tocdepth\fg + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\newpage): Refresh translation. + +2020-04-05 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\write): Align menu description on Karl's r782. + (\write18, Command line options): Recopy nodes from English --- they still need translation. + +2020-04-05 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\includegraphics): Recopy latest version. + +2020-04-04 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Top, Front/back matter): Change \og Front/back + matter\fg translation to \og Parties pr\'e/post-liminaires\fg. + (CTAN): Typoes. + (Document classes): Refresh translation. + (\part): Translate node. + (\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph): Typo. + +2020-04-03 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.tex (\write): tweak menu descriptions. + (\write18): mention /bin/sh and cmd.exe; --enable-write18 + supported by all distributions. + (Command line options): similarly; remove some duplication. + (throughout): @xref must be followed by punctuation. + +2020-04-03 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (Sectioning): in \og*-form of sectioning commands\fg, + rephrase \og is not numbered\fg \rightarrow \og does not number it\fg. + (Sectioning): \og in a book\fg \rightarrow \og in the @code{book} class document\fg + (Sectioning): for item \og secnumdepth\fg, insert \og with\fg before + inlined example. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Sectioning): Complete translation. + (\write): Align menu entry description on karl's r779 update. + +2020-03-31 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (CTAN): Translate node. + (\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph): Progress translation. + +2020-03-30 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\write): menu item descriptions + for \message and \write18. + +2020-03-30 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (Table of contents etc.): Fix description of \og\contentsline\fg. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Table of contents etc.): Fix description of \og\contentsline\fg. + +2020-03-30 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\write): \og master\fg \rightarrow \og root\fg for consistency. + + * latex2e.texi (\endinput): clarify \og during mailing\fg. + (Table of contents etc.): Move package index reference to the + concerned paragaph. + (\openin & \openout): Typoes. + (\read): \og\file\fg \rightarrow \og\recipient file\fg + (\write): \og@code{\ldots}\fg \rightarrow \og@var{\ldots}\fg. + (\write): typo. + (\write): \og command\fg \rightarrow \og macro\fg, well when talking about + expansion, it is certainly better to use the word \og macro\fg than + the word \og command\fg. + (\write): \og master\fg \rightarrow \og root\fg for consistency. + (\message): \og@code{\ldots}\fg \rightarrow \og@var{\ldots}\fg. + +2020-03-30 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\makeatletter & \makeatother): Update translation. + +2020-03-30 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (filecontents, \write18): update translation along r758 + (Low-level font commands): Leftover from r754. + (): + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Sectioning): Progress translation alignment on [en]. + (\part, \chapter, \section, \subsection) + (\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph, \appendix) + (\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter): Insert nodes w/o translation. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\@@startsection): Move node to the same place as in [en]. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Table of contents etc.): Finish translation of + this node. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Table of contents etc.): Make some work to + align translation on [en], still some translation work to be + completed. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Splitting the input): Align on English. + (\include & \includeonly): Merges nodes \og\include\fg and + \og\includeonly\fg aligning partially on English --- still some work + to be done. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Larger book template): Insert w/o translation. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Command line): Update translation --- not yet + complete though. + (Command line options, Command line input) + (Recovering from errors): Inserted w/o translation. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Insert & translates nodes \og\openin & + \openout\fg, \og\read\fg & \og\write\fg Subnodes of \og\write\fg, i.e. + \og\message\fg, \og\wlog\fg, and \og\write18\fg, are just inserted w/o + translation for the time being. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Insert & translate node \nofiles. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Insert & translate node \endinput. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Merge nodes \og\clearpage\fg & + \og\cleardoublepage\fg to align structure on English. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Fix bad translation of \og cross reference\fg + + align \og Table of contents etc.\fg node name on English. The French + for \og cross reference\fg is \og renvoi\fg. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi: Move nodes \og\makeatletter & \makeatother\fg and + \og\@ifstar\fg to the same place as in English version. + +2020-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (CTAN): Insert node w/o translation. + (Environment): node is moved up in the hierarchy to align on the + English version. + +2020-03-15 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\include & \includeonly): \includeonly can + appear before the preamble, too. From Vincent. + +2020-03-14 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\read): exception for non-interactive jobs. + (interaction modes): new anchor. + Some "file name" -> "filename". + Todo: non-ASCII \write; \nonstopmode etc. From Vincent. + +2020-03-11 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (output directory): new anchor, for the + the --output-directory option. More fully describe it, + and reference it where needed. Mentioned by Vincent. + (\write18): mention the texosquery package. + +2020-03-02 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (filecontents): update for the new filecontents + built into LaTeX. Report from John Lienhard, 1 Mar 2020 23:19:39. + +2020-02-04 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (\@@startsection): \og scenumdepth\fg \rightarrow \og tocdepth\fg where applicable. + (Class and package commands): Translate index entries. + (figure): \og figure\fg \rightarrow \og figure*\fg. + (list): Typoes. + (quotation & quote): Typo. + (Color): Translate menu entry. + (Commands for color): Translate node. + (Define colors): Translate node. + (Colored text): Translate node. + (Colored boxes): Translate node. + (Colored pages): Translate node. + (Graphics package options): Translate node. + (Graphics package configuration): Translate node. + (\graphicspath): Translate node. + (\DeclareGraphicsExtensions): Translate node. + (\DeclareGraphicsRule): Translate node. + (Text symbols): Typo. + + * latex2e.texi (Colored text): Remove spurious space in example. + (\DeclareGraphicsRule): \og blank\fg \rightarrow \og empty\fg, concerning argument + \og command\fg. + +2019-06-17 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Color models): Translate to French. + +2019-06-06 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Fix menu entries Color & Graphics. + (Color package options): Translate this node. + +2019-06-04 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Units of length): failed to divide for cm. + Report from Felipe Maia, 29 May 2019 19:51:54. + + (Math symbols) <\vert, \Vert>: refer to Delimiters + instead of repeating text. + Also fix a couple overfull lines. + +2019-05-30 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\indexspace): a command inserting glue, + not glue itself. + +2019-02-10 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: comma outside macro invocations like @BES and @samp. + +2019-01-22 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (trivlist): Typo. + (\parbox): @dfn{\ldots}-ize word \og parbox\fg, and de-@code{\ldots}-ize + it. \og adjacent line\fg \rightarrow \og adjacent text line\fg. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (trivlist): typo. + (\linethickness): typo + (tabular): typoes. + (\newcommand & \renewcommand): use @var{\ldots}. + (\parbox): Re-align French on English version. + (Color package options): progress translation. + +2018-11-26 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\left & \right): spurious space inside @ref. + +2018-11-30 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (list): Translate \topsep description as well as + figure description. + (trivlist): Translate this node. + +2018-11-25 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\DeclareTextAccentDefault): Added. + (\DeclareTextSymbolDefault): Added. + (\UseTextAccent & \UseTextSymbol): Added. + +2018-11-24 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault): Added. + +2018-11-24 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\DeclareFontEncoding): Added. + (\DeclareTextCompositeCommand): Added. + (\LastDeclaredEncoding): Added. + +2018-11-23 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\DeclareTextComposite): Added. + +2018-11-22 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\DeclareTextAccent): Added. + +2018-11-21 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\DeclareTextSymbol): Added. + +2018-11-21 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Delimiters): Add section. Put in list of + common delimiters. + (\left & \right) Move to below Delimiters, add material on grouping. + (\bigl & \bigr etc) Add below Delimiters. + +2018-11-19 Vincent Bela\"iche + + * latex2e.texi (itemize): Add @PkgIndex{enumitem}. + (list): \og...\fg \rightarrow \og@dots{}\fg. + (list): @code{\ldots}-ify word \og list\fg in \og When making an instance of + a @code{list}\fg. + (list): \og items\fg \rightarrow \og labels\fg + (list): Typo --- add a \og\\fg. + (list): Cleanup leftover redundant words. + + * latex2e-fr.texi (itemize): Add anchors. + (itemize): Align translation on English version. + (list): Align translation on English version. + (trivlist): New node, in English, needs translation. + (quotation & quote): Node renamed from \og quotation and quote\fg to + align on English. + (\footnotemark): Typo. + +2018-11-13 Karl Berry + + * src/easyurls.py: wording, link to pdf and writing.html. + * common.texi: define lasy math symbols + (from Jim and wasyfont.tex and latexsym.dtx). + * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): use them, in the long list. + +2018-11-11 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Arrows): Add \to, omit \leadsto. + +2018-11-09 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Arrows): Add subsection + +2018-11-03 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (fontenc package): Add \DeclareTextCommand & + \ProvideTextCommand. + * Makefile (htmlsplit) Add latex2e-figures subdir so list's figure + shows up. + * easyurls.py Omit traversal of subdirectories to make soft links + because no .html files go in subdirs. + +2018-11-02 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (fontenc package): Move subsection to under Fonts. + Adjust wording, add kernel defaults. Remove lmodern from the + sample example. + (Fonts) Expand introductory text, pointing to NFSS commands and to + online docs on available fonts. + +2018-10-27 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (fontenc package): Added this subsection. + +2018-10-26 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Greek letters): Added this subsection, just as + a convenience over the large symbol list. + +2018-10-23 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\openin & \openout): Add Phi to symbols. + * keeptrack.csv Change Cyrillic to notdoing. + +2018-10-22 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\openin & \openout): Change description of \openin + to say it handles number allocation. + +2018-10-22 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (\write, etc.): small changes to text and examples. + +2018-10-22 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi Add \read. + +2018-10-21 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi Add \openin & \openout. Adjust wording of \write, + \write18, and others. + +2018-10-21 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi Add \write, \message, \wlog, and \write18. + Change title from Terminal input/output to just Input/output. + Also adjust wording of command line options. + +2018-10-6 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi Add \accent. Also adjust wording of + sectional unit introduction. + 2018-10-15 Jim Hefferon * NEWS Version for CTAN @@ -429,9 +1632,9 @@ (\endinput) Added. (\input) Adjust wording to fit changes. -2018-05-04 Vincent Belaïche +2018-05-04 Vincent Bela\"iche - * latex2e-fr.texi (Color): Translate node Color from Jim's r609 — + * latex2e-fr.texi (Color): Translate node Color from Jim's r609 --- subnodes need further translation work. 2018-04-30 Jim Hefferon @@ -440,21 +1643,21 @@ * latex2e.texi (list) Add h0 description accidentally omitted. (picture) Add additional synopsis, adjust wording. -2018-03-22 Vincent Belaïche +2018-03-22 Vincent Bela\"iche - * latex2e-fr.texi (All document): Use « tapuscrit » instead or as - an alternartive to « machine à écrire » for tt font family. + * latex2e-fr.texi (All document): Use \og tapuscrit\fg instead or as + an alternartive to \og machine \`a \'ecrire\fg for tt font family. (Top, Color, Graphics): Add Color and Graphics nodes and sub-nodes thereof, without translation. (description): Translate edits from Jim r609 2018-03-04 - * latex2e.texi (description): @var{}-ify « text of first item » - and « text of second item » - (description): « labeled list of items » -> « list of labeled items » - (Color package options): @code{}-ify « color » in title, as it is + * latex2e.texi (description): @var{}-ify \og text of first item\fg + and \og text of second item\fg + (description): \og labeled list of items\fg -> \og list of labeled items\fg + (Color package options): @code{}-ify \og color\fg in title, as it is the package name. (Graphics package options, Graphics package configuration): - @code{}-ify « graphics » in title, as it is the package name. + @code{}-ify \og graphics\fg in title, as it is the package name. 2018-03-21 Jim Hefferon @@ -518,7 +1721,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (list environment): Move list parameters to this entry. -2018-01-02 Vincent Belaïche +2018-01-02 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (thebibliography, Upper and lower case): Align on Karl's r598 edits of 2017-10-29. @@ -529,7 +1732,7 @@ * latex2e.texi: typos, wording. * aspell.en.pws: more exceptions. -2017-10-17 Vincent Belaïche +2017-10-17 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (document header): Uppercase title 1st letter. Make PlainTeX a flag, not sure what the best translation @@ -540,15 +1743,15 @@ (\providecommand): Add Jim's edits of r348 2015-05-29. (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Typo. (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): typo. - (\newsavebox): Use « baquet » rather than « bac » to translate - « bin ». + (\newsavebox): Use \og baquet\fg rather than \og bac\fg to translate + \og bin\fg. (Special insertions, Non-English characters): Rename node - « Non-English characters » to « Additional Latin letters ». Add an + \og Non-English characters\fg to \og Additional Latin letters\fg. Add an anchor for backward compatibility. * latex2e.texi (Document class options): Add @PkgIndex{geometry}. -2017-10-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi: Mark tabbing node translation from French as TODO. (thebibliography): Fix description about \refname, as sometimes it @@ -559,7 +1762,7 @@ (thebibliography): Fix description about \refname, as sometimes it is also \bibname. -2017-10-06 Vincent Belaïche +2017-10-06 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi: Make EnvIndex and PkgIndex macro usable on the same line as text. @@ -573,7 +1776,7 @@ algorithm2e and listings packages. (Upper and lower case): Mention textcase package. -2017-10-04 Vincent Belaïche +2017-10-04 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (tabbing): Partial translation of tabbing node rewrite, and add examples. @@ -587,7 +1790,7 @@ (table): Typo. -2017-10-03 Vincent Belaïche +2017-10-03 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): Typo. (quotation and quote): Typoes. @@ -597,7 +1800,7 @@ * latex2e.texi, * latex2e-fr.texi (Low-level font commands): remove width percentages. -2017-08-22 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi: push iftexthenelse macro and HAS-MATH flag to common.texi (Low-level font commands): Restore cmss & cmtt. `@dmn{}%' -> `%'. @@ -607,7 +1810,7 @@ * common.texi: push iftexthenelse macro and HAS-MATH flag to common.texi -2017-08-22 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-22 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Low-level font commands): Refer to https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide. Use multitables to achieve Jim's @@ -621,7 +1824,7 @@ Jim's r363 edits of 2015-06-16, as well as my edits on top of them to latex2e.texi made in this revision. -2017-08-09 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-09 Vincent Bela\"iche * NEWS-fr: Typoes. @@ -633,12 +1836,12 @@ * latex2e.texi: (\@startsection) Added defaults for book, article, and report classes. -2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * README-fr: Convert from latin-9 to utf-8 to comply with CTAN requirements. -2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * Makefile.1: rename README-fr to README in the zipped archive. @@ -648,13 +1851,13 @@ * README-fr: Typoes. Extend the leading English part fo the French readme to comply with CTAN requirements. -2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * README-fr: Port GNA! -> Puszcza. `non officiel' -> `officieux' for consistency with manual. Mention other people translate `moving argument' by `argument mouvant'. -2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * NEWS-fr: Add delivery note --- translated from Jim's, thank you Jim! @@ -669,7 +1872,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.{dbk,.dvi,.html,.info,.pdf,.texi,.txt,.xml}: Compilation for August 2017 delivery to CTAN. -2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi: Update version & copyright notice for August 2017 delivery to CTAN. @@ -687,7 +1890,7 @@ * latex2e.texi: copyright 2017. -2017-08-01 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-01 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Environment, Declaration, \makeatletter and \makeatother) (\@@ifstar, \@@startsection): put a sectionning title to node. @@ -722,7 +1925,7 @@ (Sectioning): Add anchor to secnumdepth counter for reference from \@@startsection node. -2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche +2017-07-31 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): Add \CheckCommand and \DeclareRobustCommand as per Jim's r568 2017-07-30 edits + my @@ -733,7 +1936,7 @@ (Class and package commands/\DeclareRobustCommand): Improve existing description. Add mention to etoolbox macros. -2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche +2017-07-31 Vincent Bela\"iche * Makefile.1: Extend check-dw to handle other languages. Add target help. @@ -746,7 +1949,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (document header): update version. -2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche +2017-07-31 Vincent Bela\"iche * Makefile.1: Add targets , like enpdf, frpdf, eninfo, etc... @@ -758,8 +1961,8 @@ `http://ctan.org/...'. Reword `non officiel' -> `officieux'. (Overview): Take edits from Jim's r412+413 of 2015-08-21. (Starting and ending): Typo. rewording `sections' -> `rubriques'. - (Output files): English quotes `` '' to French quotes - « ». Concerning .log, add @dfn{fichier journal} (the French for + (Output files): English quotes ``~'' to French quotes + \og~\fg. Concerning .log, add @dfn{fichier journal} (the French for ``log file''). Typo. Translate leftover English in .lot/.lof/.toc cindex. (@TeX{} engines): @TeX{} -> @TeX{} de base --- ie Plain-@TeX{}. Typo. @@ -776,7 +1979,7 @@ (displaymath): Take edits from Jim's r412 2015-08-21, plus my modifications to latex2e.texi. (picture): `sections' -> `rubriques'. - (\oval): English quotes `` '' to French quotes « ». + (\oval): English quotes ``~'' to French quotes \og~\fg. (table): Exchange order of \caption and \label in example to align on the English version. (Units of length): Translate to French leftover English @cindex @@ -833,14 +2036,14 @@ * latex2e.texi: (\@ifstar): Translate from the French version. (\@startsection): Move to Sectioning. -2017-07-27 Vincent Belaïche +2017-07-27 Vincent Bela\"iche * Makefile.1 (compare-nodes, compare-nodes-fr, compare-nodes-es): new targets to compare node lists between languages. compare-nodes is made a synonym of compare-nodes-fr because the Spanish translation does not reuse the same node names. -2017-07-26 Vincent Belaïche +2017-07-26 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (
): Add reference to https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/lc2fr-apb.pdf, as far as @@ -925,7 +2128,7 @@ * latex2e.texi: added class and package commands from clsguide.pdf. -2017-06-09 Vincent Belaïche +2017-06-09 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (abstract): typo. (\raggedleft): typo. @@ -953,7 +2156,7 @@ (tugboat template): update. -2016-11-24 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-24 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-es.texi: Place the English license in the @copying section, and push the translation to an annex. @@ -970,7 +2173,7 @@ * Makefile (txt_files): Remove license.texi from the list of files to zip into the distributed archive. -2016-11-23 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-23 Vincent Bela\"iche * license.texi: dos2unix + svn propset svn:eol-style to LF. @@ -993,7 +2196,7 @@ * Makefile.1: Add check-license- targets to check that the license is same as in license.texi -2016-11-21 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-21 Vincent Bela\"iche * ltx-help.el (latex-help-file): Make this variable a defcustom for selecting the manuel translation. @@ -1013,11 +2216,11 @@ license.texi, make it delimited by @comment's. (\cc): Add `, as in:' before example. -2016-11-19 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-19 Vincent Bela\"iche * license.texi: Ooops... add this file. -2016-11-19 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-19 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.{xml,dvi,html,info,pdf,txt}: Make these files again for the license. @@ -1035,7 +2238,7 @@ * Makefile (txt_files): Add license.texi file. -2016-11-18 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-18 Vincent Bela\"iche * Makefile.1: Make variable txt_tiles a macro, so that NEWS-fr and README-fr be delivered instead of NEWS and README for target @@ -1043,7 +2246,7 @@ * NEWS-fr: add news for November 2016 CTAN delivery. -2016-11-18 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-18 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.{xml,dvi,html,info,pdf,txt}: Make these files. @@ -1061,7 +2264,7 @@ * Makefile.1 (spell-$(1)): Take in edit by Karl (rev 546) on Makefile -2016-11-15 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-15 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Math miscellany): Use `math' instead of `text' for the @var{...} name. @@ -1076,24 +2279,24 @@ * Makefile (spell): A-Z intended in range. -2016-09-14 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-14 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml,pdf}: Update French manuals. -2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-13 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (\@@ifstar): New node. * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Comment that documenting \@ifstar is TODO. -2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-13 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand, Spaces) (\(SPACE) and \@@, \(SPACE) after control sequence): Complete taking on Karl's rev497 edits. -2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-13 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (\discretionary, Footnotes in section headings) (\newcommand & \renewcommand, Math miscellany, \(SPACE) and \@@) @@ -1101,7 +2304,7 @@ (\(SPACE) after control sequence): Rename node --- old name was ``\(SPACE) after CS'' --- as per Karl's rev497 edits. -2016-09-12 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-12 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Document class options): Remove @dmn{...} for ``inches''. @@ -1112,7 +2315,7 @@ (Floats): Indicate that ``Here'' means ``Ici'', and fix left-over non translated word ``For''. -2016-09-09 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-09 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Document class options): @dmn{...}-ize the units in the text from Jim's rev383 changes. @@ -1131,14 +2334,14 @@ @dmn{...}-ize the units. (Math symbols): Fix typo in \uplus entry. -2016-09-07 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-07 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi: Same changes as in latex2e.texi (Document class options): Minor editorial change. (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Align on Karl's rev538 - change, ie clarify that @var{débutdéf} and @var{findéf} are - executed within a group. Rename @var{débutdéf} and @var{findéf} to - @var{défdébut} and @var{déffin} + change, ie clarify that @var{d\'ebutd\'ef} and @var{find\'ef} are + executed within a group. Rename @var{d\'ebutd\'ef} and @var{find\'ef} to + @var{d\'efd\'ebut} and @var{d\'effin} * latex2e.texi: new iftexthenelse macro. (Footnotes in a table): Minor editorial change to avoid overfull hbox. @@ -1151,7 +2354,7 @@ by ``processed'' because not only execution but also expansion prior to it happens within a group. -2016-09-05 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-05 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Add an @findex for ``group''. @@ -1167,11 +2370,11 @@ https://mail.gna.org/listinfo/latexrefman-discuss is for archives and subsription. -2016-09-04 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-04 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi: Whole file, suppress any trailing blanks. -2016-09-04 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-04 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Fix translation of sub node menu entry text. (Overview): Fix spelling. Fix leftover English. ``paquetage de @@ -1212,7 +2415,7 @@ \mathsection \mathsterling \mathunderscore \mathunderscore. (Text symbols): add \textsection, \textquotesingle. -2016-04-12 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-12 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Document class options): Improve wording by reusing package variable @var{pkg} in the synopsis description. @@ -1231,11 +2434,11 @@ `\@var{cmd}'. Fix typoes. (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): nargs starting from 0 rather than from 1. Fix typoes. `argument positionnel' -> - `paramètre positionnel'. + `param\`etre positionnel'. (Reserved characters): `\backslash' -> `\textbackslash' in the @findex in accordance with description. Fix typoes. -2016-04-12 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-12 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment, Top): Make version under quotes to avoid incorrect French ``de Avril 2016'' or ``du Avril 2016'' @@ -1246,24 +2449,24 @@ notice up to 2016. * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment): `Copyright' -> `Tous droits - réservés ©' + add ``Vincent Belaïche'' as translator. + r\'eserv\'es \textcopyright' + add ``Vincent Bela\"iche'' as translator. -2016-04-11 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-11 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-es.texi (top comment, Using BibTeX): Replace CTAN central server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment by Petra - Rübe-Pugliese. + R\"ube-Pugliese. * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment, Output files, Using BibTeX): Replace CTAN central server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment - by Petra Rübe-Pugliese. + by Petra R\"ube-Pugliese. (Output files, Using BibTeX): Typoes. * latex2e.texi (top comment, Output files): Replace CTAN central server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment by Petra - Rübe-Pugliese. + R\"ube-Pugliese. -2016-04-08 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * NEWS: Add NEWS entry for the Apr 2016 release --- assuming English will be released also. @@ -1271,12 +2474,12 @@ * Makefile.1 (dist-xx, dist): Fix pior check that there aren't any uncommited changes before making the zip. -2016-04-07 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-07 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml,pdf}: Update French manuals for distribution 2016-04-08 to CTAN. -2016-04-07 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-07 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi: Updated @set UPDATED. @@ -1327,7 +2530,7 @@ make tag TAG=foo "MESSAGE=Some message" -2016-04-04 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-04 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi: Add EnvIndex macro to make indexing environments consistent and throughout the manual. Replace any @findex of an @@ -1343,10 +2546,10 @@ * latex2e-es.texi: Same as latex2e.texi. (filecontents): Align to latest text in latex2e{,-fr}.texi. -2016-04-02 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-02 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-es.texi: Add @BES and @BESU macro definitions. - (Símbolos de Texto): Use @BES macro rather than @math for + (S\'\imbolos de Texto): Use @BES macro rather than @math for \textperiodcentered so that the other-than-PDF is clean. `$' -> `\$' for \textdollar. @@ -1357,21 +2560,21 @@ \@startsection example for solving the overfull hbox in the PDF output. * latex2e-fr.texi (Text symbols): \textquestiondown - Typo. \textexclamdown `haut en bas' -> `culbuté'. Use @BES macro + Typo. \textexclamdown `haut en bas' -> `culbut\'e'. Use @BES macro rather than @math for \textperiodcentered and \trademark so that the other-than-PDF is clean. `$' -> `\$' for \textdollar. `marque de fabrique' -> `marque de commerce' for \texttrademark. (\@@startsection): re-indent \@startsection example for solving the overfull hbox in the PDF output, and fix some wrong reference. -2016-03-31 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-31 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.{dbk,dvi,html,info,pdf,texi,txt,xml}: make fr. -2016-03-29 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-29 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Improve translation of - break/breaking, use `saut/sauter à' rather than `rupture/rompre'. + break/breaking, use `saut/sauter \`a' rather than `rupture/rompre'. (Spaces): Typo. (Special insertions): Typo. (Text symbols): Fix typo adding `comp' into @@ -1387,7 +2590,7 @@ `\textcapitalcompwordmark' and `\textascendercompwordmark' -2016-03-17 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-17 Vincent Bela\"iche Reword descrition of \epsilon and \varepsilon. @@ -1397,15 +2600,15 @@ ``script small letter''. * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): About \varepsilon ``en forme de - 3 retourné'' -> ``minuscule de ronde''. + 3 retourn\'e'' -> ``minuscule de ronde''. -2016-03-15 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-15 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Fix compilation errors. * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Fix compilation errors. -2016-03-14 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-14 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi Define flags NotInPlainTeX, NeedsAMSSymb and NeedsSTIX, in order to factorize text of `Math symbols' node. @@ -1418,7 +2621,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node and make same changes as for latex2e.texi. -2016-03-08 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Typoe in `Modes' menu entry. (eqnarray): `or' -> `ou'. @@ -1439,41 +2642,41 @@ (\ensuremath): new node. (Text symbols): Add pilcrow character for \P, similar change for \S. -2016-03-06 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-06 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node. -2016-02-29 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-29 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (\circle): Use term ``disque'', in addition to ``cercle plein'' (solid circle). @dmn{...}-ify unit. (\makebox (picture)): Typo. (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node. -2016-02-22 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-22 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): Fix @code{'}->@code{''} for \textquotedblright (Splitting the input): @dfn{...}-ify `root file' and add it to concept index (\include): Replace `See next section' -> `See @ref{\includeonly}'. (\includeonly): `@var{file}s' -> `@var{file1}, @var{file2}, @dots{}' - * latex2e-fr.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): `croix-mortuaire' -> `obèle' + * latex2e-fr.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): `croix-mortuaire' -> `ob\`ele' (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node. (Text symbols): Start translation of this node. - (\thinspace): `imbriqué' -> `emboîté', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary + (\thinspace): `imbriqu\'e' -> `embo\^\it\'e', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary (Text symbols): Fix @code{'}->@code{''} for \textquotedblright (Splitting the input, \include, \includeonly, \input): Translate these nodes. (Splitting the input): @dfn{...}-ify `root file' and add it to concept index (\include): Replace `See next section' -> `See @ref{\includeonly}'. (\includeonly): `@var{file}s' -> `@var{file1}, @var{file2}, @dots{}' -2016-02-15 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-15 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\noindent): `..' -> `...'. * latex2e-fr.texi (About this document, @LaTeX{} command syntax) (Document class options, Document class options) - (Page layout parameters, Sectioning, enumerate, \item, \line) + (Page~layout~parameters, Sectioning, enumerate, \item, \line) (\thicklines, \thinlines, \cite, \newtheorem, \newtheorem, \newtheorem) (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, \signature): @tie{} -> UTF-8 unbreakable space. @@ -1484,7 +2687,7 @@ (Math symbols): Progress translation + @tie{} -> UTF-8 unbreakable space. -2016-02-11 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-11 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (abstract): @code{...}-ify words `article' & `report' when they refer to classes. @@ -1498,10 +2701,10 @@ (\@@startsection): `@var{indent}' -> `@var{retrait}', indent(ation) -> retrait or renfoncement. (Document class options): Added flegn concerns display mode formula only. (Environments): `mise en vedette' -> `en hors texte' - (abstract): `abtracts' -> `résumé', and update translating this + (abstract): `abtracts' -> `r\'esum\'e', and update translating this node as per Jim's rev 486 of 2015-12-05T13:22:45+01 edit. (Environment): Ellipsis `..' -> `...', and add - `Voir @ref{Environments} pour une liste des environnements.' as + `Voir~@ref{Environments} pour une liste des environnements.' as per Jim's rev 486 of 2015-12-05T13:22:45+01 edit. (array): Update translation ad per Jim's edits rev 391 of 2015-08-02T22:57:00+02 and with fixes from rev 469 by Karl of @@ -1528,7 +2731,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (array): the directive is just p{...}, not @p{...}. Noted by Vincent. -2016-02-08 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (lrbox): Use Synopsis instead of in-line @code{...}. `cmd' -> `\@var{cmd}'. @ref{...}-ify @code{\sbox}. @@ -1557,12 +2760,12 @@ (lrbox): Translate this node. (\raisebox): Complete translation of this node. (Front/back matter): Typo. - (Tables of contents): `article' -> `entrée', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary. + (Tables of contents): `article' -> `entr\'ee', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary. (\addcontentsline): Translate this node, with same edits as in latex2e.texi. (\addtocontents): Translate this node. (Glossaries): Translate this node. (Indexes): Translate this node, with same edits as in latex2e.texi. - (Letters): Typoes. `clôture' -> `salutation'. Typo. Complete + (Letters): Typoes. `cl\^oture' -> `salutation'. Typo. Complete translation with same edits as in latex2e.texi. (\address): Translate this node. (\cc): Translate this node. @@ -1572,7 +2775,7 @@ (\makelabels): Typo. (\opening): Typo. -2016-02-05 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-05 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Line breaking, \discretionary): Add node \discreionary, need completion. @@ -1586,7 +2789,7 @@ (Page breaking): Translate this node. (\protect): Translate this node, with same changes as in latex2e.texi. -2016-02-04 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-04 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Spacing in math mode): Add @xref{\thinspace} to the \thinspace entry. @@ -1603,7 +2806,7 @@ example. Make TeX output only when compilation is with TeX and fix some of the examples. -2016-02-02 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-02 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi: Reword copyright notice from Automatic-translation French to real French. @@ -1644,7 +2847,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): mention "\ " after control sequences, as noted by Vincent. -2016-01-27 Vincent Belaïche +2016-01-27 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Marginal notes): Typoes. (Subscripts & superscripts): Typo. @@ -1686,7 +2889,7 @@ * aspell.en.pws: add more exceptions. * latex2e.texi: fix typos, refilling. -2016-01-15 Vincent Belaïche +2016-01-15 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\setlength, \addtolength, \settodepth) (\settoheight, \settowidth): Place synopsis in a Synopsis @@ -1706,7 +2909,7 @@ (Symbols by font position): Add this node, after update made to latex2e.texi -2015-12-14 Vincent Belaïche +2015-12-14 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): section->rubrique, sectionement->rubricage (@LaTeX{} command syntax): Add node ``\makeatletter and \makeatother''. @@ -1779,7 +2982,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Adjust wording. -2015-11-26 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-26 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (\newsavebox, \newtheorem, \newfont): Complete translation of this node, and align on latest English version. @@ -1799,7 +3002,7 @@ position. Distinguish between output in text body font and output in typewriter font. -2015-11-09 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-09 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Introduce the concept of positional parameter. @@ -1810,7 +3013,7 @@ letters and character `*'. Use the term positional parameter, and tell that expansion is within begdefn, not within environment, which was misleading. @samp{...}-ify `Shakespear' outside of - @example...@end example. + @example...@end~example. * latex2e-fr.texi (Output files): Typo. (tabular): Typoes. @@ -1818,14 +3021,14 @@ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Complete the translation and make the same text improvements as in latex2e.texi. -2015-11-06 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-06 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (\parbox): Tell that `position=m' equates the default behaviour. * latex2e.texi (\parbox): Same as latex2e-fr.texi. -2015-11-05 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-05 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\fussy): Typo. @@ -1833,16 +3036,16 @@ (\verb): Clean-up left over English words. (\obeycr & \restorecr, \fussy, \sloppy): Translate this node. -2015-11-04 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-04 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (tabular): wording `@code{*-expression}' -> `@code{*}-expression'. * latex2e-fr.texi (tabular): Complete translation of this node. -2015-11-03 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-03 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\parbox): Correct description of \parbox vertical - alignment after comment from Denis Bitouzé. + alignment after comment from Denis Bitouz\'e. * latex2e-fr.texi (\parbox): Same as for latex2e.texi. @@ -1853,11 +3056,11 @@ * latex2e.texi (throughout): consistently use ... instead of .. for code ellipses. -2015-10-27 Vincent Belaïche +2015-10-27 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (enumerate): Typo. (itemize): Restore missing example. - (thebibliography): `label' -> `étiquette', `cite_key' -> + (thebibliography): `label' -> `\'etiquette', `cite_key' -> `clef_de_cite'. Change wording concerning `\refname' in standard classes. (\bibitem, \cite, \nocite, Using BibTeX, theorem): Translate this node. (\cleardoublepage, \newpage): Improve wording `page actuelle' -> @@ -1902,7 +3105,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Footnotes): Add remark that getting biblio references in footnotes depends on the bibliographic style. -2015-10-11 Vincent Belaïche +2015-10-11 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Page breaking): Translate menu entries (\cleardoublepage, \clearpage, \newpage, \enlargethispage) @@ -1915,7 +3118,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\cleardoublepage, \clearpage): Clarify that only pending floating tables & figures are cleared. (\newpage): `see @code{\clearpage} above' -> `@pxref{\clearpage}' - (Footnotes): Make the exact quotation of Noël Coward, and correct + (Footnotes): Make the exact quotation of No\"el Coward, and correct his first name spelling. 2015-10-11 Jim Hefferon @@ -1932,7 +3135,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\makelabels): Add more on how to customize label sizes, etc. -2015-10-09 Vincent Belaïche +2015-10-09 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Environments): Merge menu entries for nodes quote & quotations after Jim's edits of 2015-09-28 @@ -1945,7 +3148,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Footnotes in a section heading): Add node, provide examples. -2015-10-08 Vincent Belaïche +2015-10-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\makelabels): @var{...}-ify argument 'to addess', and @code{...}-ify class name. @@ -2008,7 +3211,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Letters): Add synopsis, examples. -2015-09-22 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-22 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (filecontents): Add Jim's 2015-09-18 (r439) edits. (\addvspace): Add Jim's 2015-09-13 (r432) edits. @@ -2024,7 +3227,7 @@ * latex2e-{es,fr}.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml}: Compile these files again, because of eol problem. -2015-09-21 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-21 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-{es,fr}.{dbk,dvi,html,info,pdf,txt,xml}: Compile these files @@ -2034,7 +3237,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (filecontents): Corrections suggested by JB. -2015-09-17 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-17 Vincent Bela\"iche * ChangeLog: Correct typo on Jim's surname Hefferson->Hefferon. @@ -2053,7 +3256,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Subscripts & superscripts): Add examples. -2015-09-15 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-15 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Starting and ending): Add @cindex environment (Spaces, \(SPACE) and \@@, \(SPACE) after CS): Move text how to @@ -2066,7 +3269,7 @@ changes as for latex2e.texi. (Overview): add @: after some abbrev ending periods. (Font styles): Follow Karl's changes of - 2015-04-26, "deux choses très différentes"->"deux constructions + 2015-04-26, "deux choses tr\`es diff\'erentes"->"deux constructions sans relation l'une avec l'autre" (Starting and ending): Follows Karl's change of 2015-04-26 (\- (hyphenation)): Translate this node. @@ -2090,7 +3293,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\noindent): Add example. -2015-09-14 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-14 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Spacing in math mode): Add missing @findex entries for \thickspace, \medspace & \thinspace. Typo tht->that. @@ -2153,7 +3356,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Spacing in math mode): Move math mode lengths to here and add whether they work also in text mode. -2015-09-04 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-04 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi: Add macroes BES & BESU to support compilation of math symbols with texi2pdf. (Symbolic footnotes): Complete translation of this node @@ -2178,7 +3381,7 @@ (\makebox): reword is specified->can be overriden, because width is optional. (\makebox): @code{...}-ify environment name picture. -2015-08-29 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-29 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (\linethickness): Typo. (\thicklines, \thinlines, \shortstack, \/, \hrulefill) @@ -2191,7 +3394,7 @@ (\addvspace): @var{...}-ify word `length'. -2015-08-27 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-27 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (Units of length): Use `@dmn{...}' rather than `@tie{}...' in new node added by Jim. @@ -2200,11 +3403,11 @@ * latex2e.texi (Units of length): Add new node in Lengths. -2015-08-25 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-25 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (tabular): typo : horozontal->horizontal. -2015-08-24 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-24 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (picture): (width,height)(x offset,y offset)->(@var{width},@var{height})(@var{xoffset},@var{yoffset}) (picture): make position a concept index entry, and @dfn{...}-ize it. @@ -2214,7 +3417,7 @@ (picture): Translate this node. (\framebox (picture)): @var{width}->@var{largeur} -2015-08-23 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-23 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (file preamble): Add comment about glossary resources useful for French translation @@ -2225,7 +3428,7 @@ (\centering): typo (flushleft, \raggedright): Improve wording. (flushright, \raggedleft): Translate these nodes. - (quotation, Making paragraphs): ligne blanche->ligne à blanc + (quotation, Making paragraphs): ligne blanche->ligne \`a blanc * latex2e.texi (Floats): typo insert comma. (Floats): figure->float @@ -2254,7 +3457,7 @@ with issues. Shrink the figure and table nodes by the common material. -2015-08-20 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-20 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Output files, @TeX{} engines, \line) (Glossaries): Remove @acronym on Karl's request @@ -2271,7 +3474,7 @@ * Makefile (xref_suffixes): no auxs or tocs. -2015-08-19 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-19 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (flushleft): string->control sequence. @@ -2362,7 +3565,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (center, \centering): Add detail, including distinguishing the two and examples. -2015-08-05 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-05 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\indent): remove "width of" concering concerning \parindent length. @@ -2399,7 +3602,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (vline, cline, hline): Add examples. Also describe how columns are counted. -2015-07-30 Vincent Belaïche +2015-07-30 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Correct menu item French translation for "Making paragraphs" (itemize): typo, remove left-over English word "dash" @@ -2408,7 +3611,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): Correct -- for --- for en-dash -2015-07-29 Vincent Belaïche +2015-07-29 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-es.texi (Acentos): Make references between \underbar and \b. @@ -2451,7 +3654,7 @@ the unicode glyph to the start of each entry to make easier scanning for the desired symbol. -2015-07-08 Vincent Belaïche +2015-07-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking, \savebox): Translation to French. (Sectioning): Typo. @@ -2758,7 +3961,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): \Roman for second @item. Typo reported by Jose Atria. -2014-11-19 Vincent Belaïche +2014-11-19 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French @@ -2768,12 +3971,12 @@ (node filecontents): Make it clear that it is about files not documents. -2014-10-20 Vincent Belaïche +2014-10-20 Vincent Bela\"iche * Makefile: Add target `check' to compile each manual once with tex and once with makeinfo. This is faster than using target `all'. -2014-10-19 Vincent Belaïche +2014-10-19 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\setcounter): replace @var{\counter} by @var{counter} @@ -2782,7 +3985,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi (\setcounter): Same change as latex2e.texi. Progress Translation to French. -2014-10-17 Vincent Belaïche +2014-10-17 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-es.texi (\pagenumbering): use @backslashchar{} within @vincentb in order to compile with tex. @@ -2800,7 +4003,7 @@ * latex2e-es.texi (\put): @vincentb, not @vincenb. -2014-09-25 Vincent Belaïche +2014-09-25 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\put): Make coordinates within @var{...} and add explicit reference to them in the text. @@ -2812,7 +4015,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi (nodes \put, \usebox): Same as latex2e.texi. Progress translation to French. -2014-09-19 Vincent Belaïche +2014-09-19 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (document header): Set @documentencoding and @documentlanguage. @@ -2838,7 +4041,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi: Similar changes as latex2e.texi. Progress translation to French. -2014-09-10 Vincent Belaïche +2014-09-10 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\thinspace): em -> @dmn{em}. @@ -2846,7 +4049,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French. -2014-09-08 Vincent Belaïche +2014-09-08 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French. @@ -2854,14 +4057,14 @@ make by' by `The box made by'. (node Math miscellany): correct typo `for examp*l*e'. -2014-08-30 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-30 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-es.texi (\vector): correct bug involved by renaming y-slop/x-slop to declivex/declivey --- as I used @vincentb macro encapsulation to mark my change, it made \ of \vector no longer a "other" character. -2014-08-29 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-29 Vincent Bela\"iche * Makefile: add definition of variable all, for clean to work. Add squeaky as a synonym of realclean. Add in comment generic line for @@ -2872,12 +4075,12 @@ * latex2e.texi (node Page layout parameters): correct typo clase -> classes (node array): `in that row' -> `in each row of that column - * latex2e-es.texi (node array): `el número de elementos y deben + * latex2e-es.texi (node array): `el n\'umero de elementos y deben tener el formato' -> `cual formato debe tener cada linea en esta columna' -2014-08-24 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-24 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (node Boxes): add @code{...} encapsulation. (\dashbox): replace @code{...} by @var{...} for \dashbox @@ -2890,7 +4093,7 @@ * latex2e-es.texi (node Cajas): same as latex2e.texi. (\dashbox): same as latex2e.texi. Rename parameter - @var{dlargo} to @var{glargo}, with 'g' for guión (aka + @var{dlargo} to @var{glargo}, with 'g' for gui\'on (aka dash). (nodes \line & Glossarios): same as latex2e.texi. (\makebox of picture): same as latex2e.texi. @@ -2903,7 +4106,7 @@ (\vector): same as latex2e.texi. Progress further translation to French. -2014-08-17 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-17 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi: (node Layout) Add @code{...} around \headheight and \footskip in `Page layout parameters' menu entry @@ -2913,7 +4116,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi: Same change as in latex2e.texi. Continue progressing translation to French. -2014-08-11 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-11 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi: Add @code{...} encapsulation in some places to class names letter, slides, book, report, article, and to @@ -2926,23 +4129,23 @@ translation to French. -2014-08-10 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-10 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi: (Overview) change wording about case sensitivity. - * latex2e-es.texi: (Descripción) same change change as for latex2e.texi about case sensitivity. + * latex2e-es.texi: (Descripci\'on) same change change as for latex2e.texi about case sensitivity. * latex2e-fr.texi: (Overview) same change change as for latex2e.texi about case sensitivity. (Whole document) Put in place same structure as for original and progress translation. -2014-08-01 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-01 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-fr.texi: Creation --- still very approximate & preliminary... * Makefile: Make it generic -2014-07-20 Vincent Belaïche +2014-07-20 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (\LaTeXe), * latex2e-es.texi (\LaTeXe): document LaTeX2e log. @@ -2957,7 +4160,7 @@ (Font styles): mention my disagreement with the oft-stated notion that \tt, et al., are "obsolete". -2014-02-27 Vincent Belaïche +2014-02-27 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi (filecontents): Clarify that LaTeX2e default filecontents environment DOES NOT overwrite existing files, you @@ -2965,12 +4168,12 @@ * latex2e-es.texi (filecontents): Align on the English version. -2014-02-26 Vincent Belaïche +2014-02-26 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e-es.texi: Align Spanish translation with changes made by Karl on 2014-02-23, and also some changes done before that. -2014-02-25 Vincent Belaïche +2014-02-25 Vincent Bela\"iche * latex2e.texi: Correct typo, rm duplicate 2014 in copyright notice. @@ -3363,3 +4566,6 @@ of searching. (This ChangeLog file is in the public domain.) +% Local Variables: +% coding: us-ascii +% End: diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile index e50c84652e..390dc1040d 100644 --- a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile +++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -# $Id: Makefile 706 2018-10-13 15:35:22Z jimhefferon $ +# $Id: Makefile 935 2021-07-23 17:48:15Z jimhefferon $ # Public domain. Originally written 2006, Karl Berry. # Makefile for latexrefman. @@ -19,8 +19,8 @@ all_suffixes = dvi pdf $(mi_suffixes) # how to build. # -texi2dvi = texi2dvi --batch --tidy --build-dir=$*.t2dvi -texi2pdf = texi2pdf --batch --tidy --build-dir=$*.t2pdf +texi2dvi = texfot texi2dvi --batch --tidy --build-dir=$*.t2dvi +texi2pdf = texfot texi2pdf --batch --tidy --build-dir=$*.t2pdf # makeinfo = makeinfo texi2docbook = $(makeinfo) --docbook @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ texi2xml = $(makeinfo) --xml htmlopts = --html --css-include=latex2e.css $(t2html_top) $(t2html_home) -c WORDS_IN_PAGE=10000 # # Go somewhere useful from Top: -t2html_top = -c TOP_NODE_UP_URL=http://tug.org/texinfohtml/ +t2html_top = -c TOP_NODE_UP_URL=https://tug.org/texinfohtml/ # # Put a link in the footer: t2html_home = -c PRE_BODY_CLOSE="
\ @@ -85,7 +85,8 @@ realclean maintainer-clean: distclean rm -f $(addprefix latex2e*., pdf dvi $(mi_suffixes) $(xref_suffixes)) -# dist for CTAN. Update NEWS before uploading! +# Basic dist target for CTAN, but please see ./README +# for all the necessary steps. # txt_files = ChangeLog Makefile NEWS README \ aspell.en.pws latex2e.css ltx-help.el @@ -109,25 +110,51 @@ $(addprefix $(distname)/, $(txt_files) \ $(addprefix $(distname)/spanish/, $(es_mi_output) latex2e-es.pdf) \ $(addprefix $(distname)/latex2e-figures/, $(figure_files)) \ $(addprefix $(distname)/graphics/, README $(figure_source_files)) - rm -rf $(distname) + rm -f $(htmlsplitzip) + cd $(htmlsplit) && zip -qr ../$(htmlsplitzip) latex2e + zip -q $(distzip) $(distname) @ls -l $(distzip); unzip -l $(distzip) -# Get many small .html files +easyurls: htmlsplit dist + cd src \ + && rm -rf testdist && mkdir -p testdist \ + && cp ../latex2e-help-texinfo-tree.zip testdist \ + && rm -rf latex2e && unzip -q testdist/latex2e-help-texinfo-tree \ + && ./easyurls.py --directory latex2e --action softlink --lower_case --rewrite_index --debug \ + && zip -rq ../latex2e-help-texinfo-tree-easyurls.zip latex2e + +# To update web site, after basic build is ok (check-dw, spelling, etc.), +# first undo temporary build results: +# make svr # revert generated single files +# make svrsplit # revert generated split html +# then update ChangeLog, etc., +# then svn commit the modified source files, +# then: +# make +# make htmlsplit +# make dist +# make commitready +# svn commit # to commit regenerated files +# then: +# svn update # to restore easy url stubs +# + +# Get many small .html files. htmlsplit: en rm -rf $(htmlsplit) mkdir $(htmlsplit) && cd $(htmlsplit) && ln -s ../* . - rm -f $(htmlsplitzip) cd $(htmlsplit) && $(makeinfo) $(htmlopts) latex2e.texi - cd $(htmlsplit) && zip -q ../$(htmlsplitzip) -r latex2e - src/easyurls.py --directory $(htmlsplit)/latex2e --action softlink --lower_case --rewrite_index -# rm -rf $(htmlsplit) -# @ls -l $(htmlsplitzip); unzip -l $(htmlsplitzip) + cd $(htmlsplit)/latex2e && ln -s ../../latex2e-figures . -# Right before a commit, delete html files that are gone and and add new ones +# Right before a commit, delete html files that are gone and add new ones. htmlsplitstatus = cd $(htmlsplit)/latex2e && svn status *.html commitready: htmlsplit $(htmlsplitstatus) | sed -n 's/^\!//p' | xargs -r svn rm $(htmlsplitstatus) | sed -n 's/^\?//p' | xargs -r svn add +# we linked everything above, remove the unused upper-level links. + cd $(htmlsplit) && svn status | sed -n 's/^\?//p' | xargs rm -f + rm -rf latex2e.t2dvi # fix requires rebuilding svn repo, it seems + svn status # A hacky spell check target. # Remove \commandnames to reduce exception list, but not {args} or @@ -142,8 +169,8 @@ spell spell-en: # The first sed expression elides a few @-command lines which cause # duplicates; the second expr some text in the middle of lines. check-dw: - sed -e 's/^@\(item\|anchor\|.index\) .*//' \ - -e 's/ da da\|{test test}\|[iI][jJ]//g' \ + sed -e 's/^@\(node\|item\|anchor\|.index\|.*section\) .*//' \ + -e 's/ da da\|xxx\|overwrite\|{test test}\|[iI][jJ]//g' \ latex2e.texi | dw # Convenience targets to svn revert the generated files, @@ -151,5 +178,7 @@ check-dw: svr: svn revert $(addprefix latex2e*., $(all_suffixes)) svn status +svrsplit: + svn revert --depth infinity $(htmlsplit) svd: svn diff $(txt_files) *.texi diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS index 1db1926a59..c0ea88815a 100644 --- a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS +++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS @@ -4,6 +4,19 @@ Public domain. Originally written 1995, Torsten Martinsen. Spanish translation originally from Nacho Pacheco (currently unmaintained). French translation originally from Vincent Belaiche. + +Changes in July 2020 release: + +Among the changes since the last release: + * Entries for \openin, \openout, \message, \write, \write18. + * Section on fontenc. + * Section on math delimiters. + * Describe -output-directory option. + * Section on xr. + * Section on expressions. + * Entry on \contentsline. + + Changes in October 2018 release: The main change is that we now offer the manual in a version that diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README index 71c25461d3..3b5ad109bf 100644 --- a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README +++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README @@ -1,23 +1,28 @@ -$Id: README 712 2018-10-15 23:08:38Z jimhefferon $ +$Id: README 905 2021-05-15 22:41:07Z karl $ README for latex2e.texi, aka the latex2e-help-texinfo package. -Public domain. This README file originally written 2008, Karl Berry. +This README file originally written 2008, Karl Berry. This project is an attempt to write a reference manual for core LaTeX. It is unofficial and the LaTeX Project members have not reviewed it. -https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/ (the project home page) -has more information, including links to the current output in various -formats, sources, mailing lists, and other infrastructure. - -We offer two web versions of the manual. A version that is split -into separate web pages for each section or subsection is here. - https://latexref.xyz +We offer two web versions of this manual. We have a version that is +split into separate web pages for each section or subsection. + https://latexref.xyz/ We also have a single-page version. http://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html -Help is most definitely wanted. (Search for "xx" in the source for just -a few of the known deficiencies.) Please email any bug reports, new -material, general discussion, whatever, to latexrefman@tug.org (see -http://lists.tug.org/latexrefman for archives and subscription via the web). +More informaion is at https://latexref.xyz/dev/, including links to the +current output in various formats, sources, mailing lists, and other +infrastructure. The project page for repository access, etc., is +https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/projects/latexrefman/. +Help is most definitely wanted. (Search for "xx" in the source for just +a few deficiencies. More ideas at https://latexref.xyz/dev/writing.html.) +Please email any bug reports, new material, general discussion, whatever, +to latexrefman@tug.org (see https://lists.tug.org/latexrefman for archives +and subscription via the web). +License: the manual is released under the old-style GNU documentation +license, because that is what the original authors used. (It was the +recommended license at the time.) This README file and other +supplementary files are public domain. diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws index bb004ce1fc..16e81b799b 100644 --- a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws +++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ BleedBox Botway CTAN's CropBox +Dietze EE EF EnvIndex @@ -31,11 +32,13 @@ Supremum TrimBox ae afterskip +amscd arabic aring arrayrulewidth arraystrech ary +auxout baselinestretch bb bbllx @@ -52,6 +55,7 @@ bm bowtie bp builtin +cd cdots cmd columnsep @@ -88,6 +92,7 @@ eth evensidemargin executivepaper f's +fallbacks fbox fboxrule fd @@ -104,6 +109,8 @@ footnoterule footnotesep footskip greek +guillemet +guillemets hacek headheight headsep @@ -130,6 +137,7 @@ labelitemiii labelitemiv labelsep labelwidth +latexsym ldots leadsto leftmargin @@ -149,6 +157,7 @@ listparindent lr lrbox lunate +mainaux makeidx makelabel marginparpush @@ -190,6 +199,7 @@ paperheight paperwidth parsep partopsep +pasteable pict pixelation printindex @@ -218,6 +228,7 @@ teck tecks texi texinfo +texosquery textcase textheight textstyle @@ -252,4 +263,21 @@ xelatex xindy xyz zet -Dietze +scrollmode +grfext +shellesc +CLI +adjustbox +graphpap +xr +Bananensis +Francorum +Respublica +muglue +cicero +didot +texput +xstring +qed +dottedtocline +xindex diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi index e27678fcd9..04824f1c7a 100644 --- a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi +++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -@c $Id: common.texi 701 2018-10-08 14:32:37Z jimhefferon $ +@c $Id: common.texi 729 2018-11-13 23:22:27Z karl $ @c Public domain. -@set LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman +@set LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE https://latexref.xyz @set LTXREFMAN_BUGS latexrefman@@tug.org @clear HAS-MATH @iftex @@ -14,5 +14,46 @@ \else\@c @end macro @end ifnottex - +@tex +\globaldefs=1 +% lasyfont characters for Texinfo (latexsym package in LaTeX). +% JH 2018-Nov-12, ideas from wasyfont.tex. Public domain. +% not going to try to make fonts +\font\tenlasy = lasy10 +% \font\ninelasy = lasy9 +% \font\eightlasy = lasy8 +\font\sevenlasy = lasy7 +\font\fivelasy = lasy5 +\newfam\lasyfam +\newcount\lasyfamcount +% family number is third-least-significant hex digit of mathchar +\lasyfamcount=\lasyfam \multiply\lasyfamcount by 256 +% +\textfont\lasyfam=\tenlasy + \scriptfont\lasyfam=\sevenlasy + \scriptscriptfont\lasyfam=\fivelasy +% +\def\lasymathchardef#1#2{% + \count255=\lasyfamcount + \advance\count255 by"#1 + \mathchardef#2\count255 } +% char 1 (math class): 0=ord, 2=bin, 3=rel (taken from latexsym.dtx). +% char 2: family number, added in by \lasymathchardef. +% chars 3-4: character code in font. All in hex. +\lasymathchardef{0030}{\mho} +\lasymathchardef{3031}{\Join} +\lasymathchardef{0032}{\Box} +\lasymathchardef{0033}{\Diamond} +\lasymathchardef{303B}{\leadsto} +\lasymathchardef{303C}{\sqsubset} +\lasymathchardef{303D}{\sqsupset} +\lasymathchardef{2001}{\lhd} +\lasymathchardef{2003}{\rhd} +\lasymathchardef{2002}{\unlhd} +\lasymathchardef{2004}{\unrhd} +% +% must explicitly reset before the (at)end tex, not let the (at)end group +% reset it; else internal Texinfo variables get messed up. +\globaldefs=0 +@end tex diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css index 7e784f2dbd..8efed0a6bd 100644 --- a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css +++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css @@ -1,11 +1,7 @@ -/* $Id: latex2e.css 690 2018-09-15 15:20:19Z jimhefferon $ +/* $Id: latex2e.css 935 2021-07-23 17:48:15Z jimhefferon $ Minor css for latexrefman. Public domain. Originally written by Jim Hefferon and Karl Berry, 2018. */ -/* So you can style for yourself */ -@import url("/css/latexreflocal.css"); - - BODY { margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1em; /* auto results in two-digit
    lost off left */ @@ -22,3 +18,6 @@ code {font-style:normal; font-family:monospace; } /* We put a link to our own home page at the bottom. */ div.referenceinfo {font-size:small;} + +/* So you can style for yourself */ +@import url("/css/latexreflocal.css"); diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk index 5c203240fa..b1a75624cb 100644 --- a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk +++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk @@ -4,44 +4,41 @@ ]> - + - -&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (October 2018) +&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (July 2021) + - - + + + + - - - - - - - - + + + This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version of October 2018. +document preparation system, version of July 2021. This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by @@ -58,7 +55,7 @@ latex2e-reference by Martin Herbert Dietze. (From these references no text was directly copied.) Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, -2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 Karl Berry. +2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2020, 2021 Karl Berry. Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore. @@ -83,8 +80,9 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. + This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version of October 2018. +document preparation system, version of July 2021. This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by @@ -101,7 +99,7 @@ latex2e-reference by Martin Herbert Dietze. (From these references no text was directly copied.) Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, -2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 Karl Berry. +2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2020, 2021 Karl Berry. Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore. @@ -123,7 +121,6 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. - @@ -131,10 +128,9 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. &latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of -October 2018) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system. +July 2021) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system. - About this document @@ -144,15 +140,11 @@ October 2018) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system. preparation system, which is a macro package for the &tex; typesetting program (see Overview). -This document’s home page is https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman. There -you can get the sources, subscribe to the mailing list or read its -archives, see other infrastructure, and get the current output in -various formats. In particular, the output comes in two web formats. -Probably the most convenient one, shown at http://latexref.xyz/, -has pages for each topic and so is good for a quick lookup; see also the -note there about easy-to-remember links. The other, shown at -http://svn.gnu.org.ua/viewvc/latexrefman/trunk/latex2e.html?view=co, -has all the information on single page. +This document’s home page is https://latexref.xyz; it has +separate web pages for each topic. Alternatively. +https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html has the entire document on +a single page. For other output formats, the sources, and plenty more +information, see https://latexref.xyz/dev/. &latex; vs. &latex;2e In this document, we will mostly just use ‘&latex;’ rather than @@ -162,39 +154,33 @@ frozen decades ago. unofficial nature of this manual &latex; Project team latexrefman@tug.org email address -&latex; is currently maintained by a group of volunteers -(http://latex-project.org). The official documentation written by -the &latex; project is available from their web site. This document is -completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the &latex; -maintainers. +&latex; is maintained by a group of volunteers +(https://latex-project.org). The official documentation written +by the &latex; project is available from their web site. The present +document is completely unofficial and has not been written or reviewed +by the &latex; maintainers. bug reporting reporting bugs Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them. Instead, please send all comments to latexrefman@tug.org. -This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources -of information about &latex;, at all levels. Here are a few -introductions. +This document is a reference, not a tutorial. There is a vast array +of other information available about &latex;, at all levels. Here +are a few introductions. -http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr +https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr latex-doc-ptr document Two pages of recommended references to &latex; documentation. -http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc +https://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc first-latex-doc document Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math. -http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide -usrguide official documentation -The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of &latex;. -Many other guides by many other people are also available, independent -of &latex; itself; one such is the next item: - -http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort +https://ctan.org/pkg/lshort lshort document -A short introduction to &latex;, translated to many languages. +A longer introduction to &latex;, translated to many languages. -http://tug.org/begin.html +https://tug.org/begin.html Introduction to the &tex; system, including &latex;, with further references. @@ -211,21 +197,25 @@ references. &latex; overview &latex; is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally -created by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers -(http://latex-project.org). It is widely used, particularly for -complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics. - -macro package, &latex; as -A &latex; user writes an input file containing text along with -interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text -should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands -that interface with Donald E. Knuth’s &tex; typesetting program -(the technical term is that &latex; is a macro package for the -&tex; engine). The user produces the output document by giving that -input file to the &tex; engine. +created by Leslie Lamport in 1984, but has been maintained by a group +of volunteers for many years now (https://latex-project.org). +It is widely used, particularly but not exclusively for mathematical +and technical documents. + +UTF-8, default &latex; input encoding +A &latex; user writes an input file containing text to be typeset +along with interspersed commands. The default encoding for the text is +UTF-8 (as of 2018). The commands specify, for example, how the text +should be formatted. + +&latex; is implemented as a set of related so-called “macros” which +use Donald E. Knuth’s &tex; typesetting program or one of its +derivatives, collectively known as “engines”. Thus, the user +produces output, typically PDF, by giving the input file to a &tex; +engine. (The following sections describe all this in more detail.) The term &latex; is also sometimes used to mean the language in which -the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands +the input document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands available to a &latex; user. Lamport &tex; @@ -300,7 +290,7 @@ it to a PostScript .ps file with dvips or Portable Document Format .pdf file with dvipdfmx. The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with dvitype. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are -available (http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware). +available (https://mirror.ctan.org/dviware). .pdf .pdf file @@ -312,7 +302,7 @@ a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a self-contained file, with all fonts and images included. -&latex; also produces at least two additional files. +&latex; always produces at least two additional files. .log transcript file @@ -361,28 +351,36 @@ open-ended. engines, &tex; implementations of &tex; -UTF-8 +UTF-8, engine support for Unicode input, native TrueType fonts OpenType fonts -&latex; is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a &tex; -implementation (see Overview). This section gives a terse -overview of the main programs (see also Command line). - -latex -pdflatex -pdf&tex; engine -etex command +&tex; format (.fmt) files +&latex; format (.fmt) files +format files, &tex; +.fmt file +&latex; is a large set of commands that is executed by a &tex; +program (see Overview). Such a set of commands is called a +format, and is embodied in a binary .fmt file, which can +be read much more quickly than the corresponding &tex; source. + +This section gives a terse overview of the &tex; programs that are +commonly available (see also Command line interface). + +latexlatex +pdflatexpdflatex +etex command +pdf&tex; engine e-&tex; -In &tex; Live (http://tug.org/texlive), if &latex; is invoked +In &tex; Live (https://tug.org/texlive), if &latex; is invoked via either the system command latex or pdflatex, -then the pdf&tex; engine is run (http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex). +then the pdf&tex; engine is run (https://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex). When invoked as latex, the main output is a .dvi file; as pdflatex, the main output is a .pdf file. pdf&tex; incorporates the e-&tex; extensions to Knuth’s original -program (http://ctan.org/pkg/etex), including additional +program (https://ctan.org/pkg/etex), including additional programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty of extensions of its own. e-&tex; is available on its own as the system command etex, but this is plain &tex; (and produces @@ -392,25 +390,22 @@ command etex, but this is plain &tex; (and produces rather than pdf&tex;. In any case, the e-&tex; extensions can be assumed to be available in &latex;. -lualatex -lualatex command -Lua&tex; +lualatexlualatex +Lua&tex; If &latex; is invoked via the system command lualatex, the -Lua&tex; engine is run (http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex). This +Lua&tex; engine is run (https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex). This program allows code written in the scripting language Lua (http://luatex.org) to interact with &tex;’s typesetting. Lua&tex; handles UTF-8 Unicode input natively, can handle OpenType and TrueType fonts, and produces a .pdf file by default. -There is also dvilualatex to produce a .dvi file, -but this is rarely used. +There is also dvilualatex to produce a .dvi file. -xelatex -xelatex command -Xe&tex; +xelatexxelatex +Xe&tex; .xdv file xdvipdfmx If &latex; is invoked with the system command xelatex, the -Xe&tex; engine is run (http://tug.org/xetex). Like Lua&tex;, +Xe&tex; engine is run (https://tug.org/xetex). Like Lua&tex;, Xe&tex; natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType fonts, though the implementation is completely different, mainly using external libraries instead of internal code. Xe&tex; produces a @@ -421,12 +416,44 @@ and translates that to PDF using the (x)dvipdfmx.xdv file is only useful for debugging. - -Other variants of &latex; and &tex; exist, e.g., to provide -additional support for Japanese and other languages ([u]p&tex;, -http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex, http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex). +platexplatex +uplatexuplatex +These commands provide significant additional support for Japanese and +other languages; the u variant supports Unicode. See +https://ctan.org/pkg/ptex and https://ctan.org/pkg/uptex. + +As of 2019, there is a companion -dev command and format for +all of the above: + +dvilualatex-devdvilualatex-dev +latex-devlatex-dev +lualatex-devlualatex-dev +pdflatex-devpdflatex-dev +platex-devplatex-dev +uplatex-devuplatex-dev +xelatex-devxelatex-dev +release candidates +prerelease testing +These are candidates for an upcoming &latex; release. The main +purpose is to find and address compatibility problems before an +official release. + +These -dev formats make it easy for anyone to help test +documents and code: you can run, say, pdflatex-dev instead of +pdflatex, without changing anything else in your environment. +Indeed, it is easiest and most helpful to always run the -dev +versions instead of bothering to switch back and forth. During quiet +times after a release, the commands will be equivalent. + +These are not daily snapshots or untested development code. They +undergo the same extensive regression testing by the &latex; team +before being released. + +For more information, see “The &latex; release workflow and the +&latex; dev formats” by Frank Mittelbach, TUGboat 40:2, +https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb40-2/tb125mitt-dev.pdf. - + &latex; command syntax @@ -441,7 +468,7 @@ character, \. The name itself then consists of either &latex; commands names are case sensitive so that \pagebreak differs from \Pagebreak (the latter is not a standard command). -Most commands are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all +Most command names are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all commands in the same case as they are defined. A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These @@ -458,12 +485,6 @@ argument comes last, with no required argument after it, then to make the first character of the following text be an open square bracket, hide it inside curly braces. -Some of &latex;’s commands are a declaration. Such a command -changes the value the meaning of some other command or parameter. For -instance, the \mainmatter declaration changes the typesetting of -page numbers from roman numerals to arabic (see \frontmatter & -\mainmatter & \backmatter). - &latex; has the convention that some commands have a * form that is related to the form without a *, such as \chapter and \chapter*. The exact difference in behavior varies from command @@ -472,32 +493,44 @@ to command. This manual describes all accepted options and *-forms for the commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs). +package, expl3 +expl3 package +package, xparse +xparse package + +&latex;3 syntax +As of the 2020-10-01 release of &latex;, the expl3 and +xparse packages are part of the &latex;2e format. They +provide a completely different underlying programming language +syntax. We won’t try to cover them in this document; see the related +package documentation and other &latex; manuals. + Environment Synopsis: -\begin{environment name} +\begin{environment-name} ... -\end{environment name} +\end{environment-name} -An area of &latex; source, inside of which there is a distinct -behavior. For instance, for poetry in &latex; put the lines between -\begin{verse} and \end{verse}. +An environment is an area of &latex; source, inside of which +there is a distinct behavior. For instance, for poetry in &latex; +put the lines between \begin{verse} and \end{verse}. \begin{verse} There once was a man from Nantucket \\ ... \end{verse} -See Environments for a list of environments. Particularly notable is +See Environments, for a list of environments. Particularly notable is that every &latex; document must have a document environment, a \begin{document} ... \end{document} pair. -The environment name at the beginning must exactly match that at -the end. This includes the case where environment name ends in a +The environment-name at the beginning must exactly match that at +the end. This includes the case where environment-name ends in a star (*); both the \begin and \end texts must include the star. @@ -513,7 +546,7 @@ required (it specifies the formatting of columns). -CTAN: the Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network +CTAN: The Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network CTAN @@ -528,20 +561,22 @@ person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher’s specifications. -In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features such -as search by name or by functionality. +In addition to the massive holdings, the ctan.org web site +offers features such as search by name or by functionality. DANTE e.V. +CTAN is not a single host, but instead is a set of hosts, one of which +is the so-called “master”. The master host actively manages the +material, for instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated +packages. For many years, it has been hosted by the German &tex; +group, DANTE e.V. + mirrors of CTAN -CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the -sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for -instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is -hosted by the German &tex; group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the -world help out by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their -collections with the core site and then in turn making their copies -publicly available. This gives users close to their location better -access and relieves the load on the core site. The list of mirrors is -at https://ctan.org/mirrors. +Other sites around the world help out by mirroring, that is, +automatically syncing their collections with the master site and then +in turn making their copies publicly available. This gives users close +to their location better access and relieves the load on the master +site. The list of mirrors is at https://ctan.org/mirrors. @@ -584,9 +619,10 @@ matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters. slides -For slide presentations—rarely used today. In its place the -beamer package is perhaps the most prevalent (see beamer -template). +For slide presentations—rarely used nowadays. The +beamer package is perhaps the most prevalent +(https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer). See beamer template, for a +small template for a beamer document. Standard options are described in the next section. @@ -721,6 +757,7 @@ for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the twoside \evensidemargin \oddsidemargin + Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except that in the book class the default is twoside. @@ -832,9 +869,9 @@ name}, to modify the behavior of the class. An example declare \documentclass[11pt]{article} to set the default document font size. -Finally, in the more declarations part the class or package usually does -most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and fonts, and -loading other files. +Finally, in the more declarations part the class or package +usually does most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and +fonts, and loading other files. Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as stub.cls where &latex; can find it, for example in the same directory as the @@ -853,7 +890,7 @@ passing them all to the article class, and then loads the For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the Class Guide, at -http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf (much +https://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf (much of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf. @@ -957,10 +994,10 @@ must contain \DeclareOption{logo}{code}\ProcessOptions). If you request an option that has not been declared, by default this -will produce a warning like Unused global option(s): [badoption]. -Change this behaviour with the starred version -\DeclareOption*{code}. For example, many classes extend -an existing class, using a declaration such as +will produce a warning like Unused global option(s): +[badoption]. Change this behavior with the starred version +\DeclareOption*{code}. For example, many classes +extend an existing class, using a command such as \LoadClass{article}, and for passing extra options to the underlying class use code such as this. @@ -1015,8 +1052,8 @@ commands, so they do not just make a log message when you redefine \renew… or \provide… or you get an error. -\IfFileExists{file name}{true code}{false code} -\InputIfFileExists{file name}{true code}{false code} +\IfFileExists{filename}{true code}{false code} +\InputIfFileExists{filename}{true code}{false code} \IfFileExists \InputIfFileExists Execute true code if &latex; finds the file file @@ -1223,12 +1260,12 @@ with certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.) -\ProvidesFile{file name}[additional information] +\ProvidesFile{filename}[additional information] \ProvidesFile Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in that file and you get in the log a string like File: test.config -2017/10/12 config file for test.cls for file name equal to +2017/10/12 config file for test.cls for filename equal to ‘test.config’ and additional information equal to ‘2017/10/12 config file for test.cls’. @@ -1273,12 +1310,530 @@ causes &latex; to give error like \usepackage before typefaces fonts -Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size -and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. +&latex; comes with powerful font capacities. For one thing, its New +Font Selection Scheme allows you to work easily with the font families +in your document (for instance, see Font styles). And, +&latex; documents can use most fonts that are available today, +including versions of Times Roman, Helvetica, Courier, etc. (Note, +though, that many fonts do not have support for mathematics.) + +The first typeface in the &tex; world was the Computer Modern family, +developed by Donald Knuth. It is the default for &latex; documents and +is still the most widely used. But changing to another font often only +involves a few commands. For instance, putting the following in your +preamble gives you a Palatino-like font, which is handsome and more +readable online than many other fonts, while still allowing you to +typeset mathematics. (This example is from Michael Sharpe, +https://math.ucsd.edu/~msharpe/RcntFnts.pdf.) + +\usepackage[osf]{newpxtext} % osf for text, not math +\usepackage{cabin} % sans serif +\usepackage[varqu,varl]{inconsolata} % sans serif typewriter +\usepackage[bigdelims,vvarbb]{newpxmath} % bb from STIX +\usepackage[cal=boondoxo]{mathalfa} % mathcal + +In addition, the xelatex or lualatex engines allow +you to use any fonts on your system that are in OpenType or TrueType +format (see &tex; engines). + +The &latex; Font Catalogue (https://tug.org/FontCatalogue) shows +font sample graphics and copy-and-pasteable source to use many fonts, +including many with support for mathematics. It aims to cover all Latin +alphabet free fonts available for easy use with &latex;. + +More information is also available from the &tex; Users Group, at +https://www.tug.org/fonts/. + + + + +<literal>fontenc</literal> package + +font encoding +UTF-8, font support for +T1 +OT1 +fontenc + +Synopsis: + +\usepackage[font_encoding]{fontenc} + +or + +\usepackage[font_encoding1, font_encoding2, ...]{fontenc} + +Specify the font encodings. A font encoding is a mapping of the +character codes to the font glyphs that are used to typeset your output. + +This package only applies if you use the pdflatex engine +(see &tex; engines). If you use the xelatex or +lualatex engine then instead use the fontspec package. + +&tex;’s original font family, Computer Modern, has a limited character +set. For instance, to make common accented characters you must use +\accent (see \accent) but this disables hyphenation. &tex; +users have agreed on a number of standards to access the larger sets of +characters provided by modern fonts. If you are using +pdflatex then this in the preamble + +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +gives you support for the most widespread European languages, including +French, German, Italian, Polish, and others. In particular, if you have +words with accented letters then &latex; will hyphenate them and your +output can be copied and pasted. (The optional second line allows you +to directly enter accented characters into your source file.) + +package, lmodern +lmodern package +package, cm-super +cm-super package + +If you are using an encoding such as T1 and the characters appear +blurry or do not magnify well then your fonts may be bitmapped, +sometimes called raster or Type 3. You want vector fonts. Use a +package such as lmodern or cm-super to get a font that +extends &latex;’s default using vector fonts. + +For each font_encoding given as an option but not already +declared, this package loads the encoding definition files, named +font_encodingenc.def. It also sets \encodingdefault +to be the last encoding in the option list. + +These are the common values for font_encoding. + +OT1 +The original encoding for &tex;. Limited to mostly English characters. + +OMS, OML +Math symbols and math letters encoding. + +T1 +&tex; text extended. Sometimes called the Cork encoding for the Users +Group meeting where it was developed. Gives access to most European +accented characters. The most common option for this package. + +TS1 +Text Companion encoding. + +&latex;’s default is to load OML, T1, OT1, and +then OMS, and set the default to OT1. + +Even if you do not use accented letters, you may need to specify a font +encoding if your font requires it. + +If you use T1 encoded fonts other than the default Computer +Modern family then you may need to load the package that selects your +fonts before loading fontenc, to prevent the system from loading +any T1 encoded fonts from the default. + +The &latex; team reserve encoding names starting with: ‘T’ for the +standard text encodings with 256 characters, ‘TS’ for symbols that +extend the corresponding T encodings, ‘X’ for test encodings, +‘M’ for standard math encodings with 256 characters, ‘A’ for +special applications, ‘OT’ for standard text encodings with 128 +characters, and ‘OM’ for standard math encodings with 128 +characters (‘O’ stands for ‘obsolete’). + +This package provides a number of commands, detailed below. Many of +them are encoding-specific, so if you have defined a command that works +for one encoding but the current encoding is different then the command +is not in effect. + + + + +<literal>\DeclareFontEncoding</literal> + +font encoding, declaring +encoding, font +accents, defining +\DeclareFontEncoding + +Synopsis: + +\DeclareFontEncoding{encoding}{text-settings}{math-settings} + +Declare the font encoding encoding. It also saves the value of +encoding in \LastDeclaredEncoding +(see \LastDeclaredEncoding). + +The file t1enc.def contains this line (followed by many others). + +\DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{} + +The text-settings are the commands that &latex; will run every +time it switches from one encoding to another with the +\selectfont or \fontencoding command. The +math-settings are the commands that &latex; will use whenever the +font is accessed as a math alphabet. + +&latex; ignores any space characters inside text-settings and +math-settings, to prevent unintended spaces in the output. + +If you invent an encoding you should pick a two or three letter name +starting with ‘L’ for ‘local’, or ‘E’ for +‘experimental’. + +Note that output encoding files may be read several times by &latex; so +using, e.g., \newcommand may cause an error. In addition, such +files should contain \ProvidesFile line (see Class and package +commands). + +Note also that you should use the \...Default commands only in a +package, not in the encoding definition files, since those files +should only contain declarations specific to that encoding. + + + + +<literal>\DeclareTextAccent</literal> + +font encoding +accents, defining +\DeclareTextAccent + +Synopsis: + +\DeclareTextAccent{cmd}{encoding}{slot} + +Define an accent, to be put on top of other glyphs, in the encoding +encoding at the location slot. + +This line from t1enc.def declares that to make a circumflex +accent as in \^A, the system will put the accent in slot 2 +over the ‘A’ character, which is represented in ASCII as 65. +(This holds unless there is a relevant DeclareTextComposite or +\DeclareTextCompositeCommand declaration; +see \DeclareTextComposite.) + +\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2} + +If cmd has already been defined then \DeclareTextAccent +does not give an error but it does log the redefinition in the +transcript file. + + + + +<literal>\DeclareTextAccentDefault</literal> + +accents, defining +\DeclareTextAccent +\DeclareTextAccentDefault + +Synopsis: + +\DeclareTextAccentDefault{cmd}{encoding} + +If there is an encoding-specific accent command cmd but there is +no associated \DeclareTextAccent for that encoding then this +command will pick up the slack, by saying to use it as described for +encoding. + +For example, to make the encoding OT1 be the default encoding for +the accent \", declare this. + +\DeclareTextAccentDefault{\"}{OT1} + +If you issue a \" when the current encoding does not have a +definition for that accent then &latex; will use the definition from +OT1 + +That is, this command is equivalent to this call (see \UseTextSymbol +& \UseTextAccent). + +\DeclareTextCommandDefault[1]{cmd} + {\UseTextAccent{encoding}{cmd}{#1}} + +Note that \DeclareTextAccentDefault works for any one-argument +fontenc command, not just the accent command. + + + + +<literal>\DeclareTextCommand</literal> & <literal>\ProvideTextCommand</literal> + +\DeclareTextCommand +\DeclareTextCommandDefault +\ProvideTextCommand + +Synopsis, one of: + +\DeclareTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}{defn} +\DeclareTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}[nargs]{defn} +\DeclareTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} + +or one of: + +\ProvideTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}{defn} +\ProvideTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}[nargs]{defn} +\ProvideTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} + +Define the command cmd, which will be specific to one encoding. +The command name cmd must begin with a backslash, \. These +commands can only appear in the preamble. Redefining cmd does +not cause an error. The defined command will be robust even if the code +in defn is fragile (see \protect). + +For example, the file t1enc.def contains this line. + +\DeclareTextCommand{\textperthousand}{T1}{\%\char 24 } + +With that, you can express parts per thousand. + +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} % in preamble + ... +Legal limit is \( 0.8 \)\textperthousand. + +If you change the font encoding to OT1 then you get an error like +‘LaTeX Error: Command \textperthousand unavailable in encoding +OT1’. + +The \ProvideTextCommand variant does the same, except that it +does nothing if cmd is already defined. The +\DeclareTextSymbol command is faster than this one for simple +slot-to-glyph association (see \DeclareTextSymbol) + +The optional nargs and optargsdefault arguments play the +same role here as in \newcommand (see \newcommand & +\renewcommand). Briefly, nargs is an integer from 0 to 9 +specifying the number of arguments that the defined command cmd +takes. This number includes any optional argument. Omitting this +argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that cmd will have +no arguments. And, if optargsdefault is present then the first +argument of \cmd is optional, with default value +optargdefault (which may be the empty string). If +optargsdefault is not present then \cmd does not take +an optional argument. + + + + +<literal>\DeclareTextCommandDefault</literal> & <literal>\ProvideTextCommandDefault </literal> + +\DeclareTextCommand +\DeclareTextCommandDefault +\ProvideTextCommand +\ProvideTextCommandDefault + +Synopsis: + +\DeclareTextCommandDefault{cmd}{defn} + +or: + +\ProvideTextCommandDefault{cmd}{defn} + +Give a default definition for cmd, for when that command is not +defined in the encoding currently in force. This default should only use +encodings known to be available. + +This makes \copyright available. + +\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\copyright}{\textcircled{c}} + +It uses only an encoding (OMS) that is always available. + +The \DeclareTextCommandDefault should not occur in the encoding +definition files since those files should declare only commands for use +when you select that encoding. It should instead be in a package. + +As with the related non-default commands, the +\ProvideTextCommandDefault has exactly the same behavior as +\DeclareTextCommandDefault except that it does nothing if +cmd is already defined (see \DeclareTextCommand & +\ProvideTextCommand). So, packages can use it to provide fallbacks +that other packages can improve upon. + + + + +<literal>\DeclareTextComposite</literal> + +accents, defining +\DeclareTextComposite + +Synopsis: + +\DeclareTextComposite{cmd}{encoding}{simple_object}{slot} + +Access an accented glyph directly, that is, without having to put an +accent over a separate character. + +This line from t1enc.def means that \^o will cause +&latex; to typeset lowercase ‘o’ by taking the character +directly from location 224 in the font. + +\DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{o}{244} + +See fontenc package, for a list of common encodings. The +simple_object should be a single character or a single command. +The slot argument is usually a positive integer represented in +decimal (although octal or hexadecimal are possible). Normally +cmd has already been declared for this encoding, either with +\DeclareTextAccent or with a one-argument +\DeclareTextCommand. In t1enc.def, the above line follows +the \DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2} command. + + + + +<literal>\DeclareTextCompositeCommand</literal> + +accents, defining +\DeclareTextCompositeCommand + +Synopsis: + +\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{cmd}{encoding}{arg}{code} + +A more general version of \DeclareTextComposite that runs +arbitrary code with cmd. + +This allows accents on ‘i’ to act like accents on dotless i, +\i. + +\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i} + +See fontenc package, for a list of common encodings. Normally +cmd will have already been declared with \DeclareTextAccent +or as a one argument \DeclareTextCommand. + + + + +<literal>\DeclareTextSymbol</literal> + +symbol, defining +\DeclareTextSymbol + +Synopsis: + +\DeclareTextSymbol{cmd}{encoding}{slot} + +Define a symbol in the encoding encoding at the location +slot. Symbols defined in this way are for use in text, not +mathematics. + +For example, this line from t1enc.def declares the number of the +glyph to use for «, the left guillemet. + +\DeclareTextSymbol{\guillemotleft}{T1}{19} + +The command \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{T1}{\char +19} has the same effect but is slower (see \DeclareTextCommand & +\ProvideTextCommand). + +See fontenc package, for a list of common encodings. The slot +can be specified in decimal, or octal (as in '023), or +hexadecimal (as in "13), although decimal has the advantage that +single quote or double quote could be redefined by another package. + +If cmd has already been defined then \DeclareTextSymbol +does not give an error but it does log the redefinition in the +transcript file. + + + + +<literal>\DeclareTextSymbolDefault</literal> + +accents, defining +\DeclareTextSymbol +\DeclareTextSymbolDefault + +Synopsis: + +\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{cmd}{encoding} + +If there is an encoding-specific symbol command cmd but there is no +associated \DeclareTextSymbol for that encoding, then this command +will pick up the slack, by saying to get the symbol as described for +encoding. + +For example, to declare that if the current encoding has no meaning for +\textdollar then use the one from OT1, declare this. + +\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdollar}{OT1} + +That is, this command is equivalent to this call (see \UseTextSymbol +& \UseTextAccent). + +\DeclareTextCommandDefault{cmd} + {\UseTextSymbol{encoding}{cmd}} + +Note that \DeclareTextSymbolDefault can be used to define a +default for any zero-argument fontenc command. + + + + +<literal>\LastDeclaredEncoding</literal> + +\LastDeclaredEncoding + +Synopsis: + +\LastDeclaredEncoding + +Get the name of the most recently declared encoding. The +\DeclareFontEncoding command stores the name so that it can be +retrieved with this command (see \DeclareFontEncoding). + +This relies on \LastDeclaredEncoding rather than give the +name of the encoding explicitly. +\DeclareFontEncoding{JH1}{}{} +\DeclareTextAccent{\'}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{0} + + + + +<literal>\UseTextSymbol</literal> & <literal>\UseTextAccent</literal> + +\UseTextSymbol +\UseTextAccent +Synopsis: + +\UseTextSymbol{encoding}{cmd} + +or: + +\UseTextAccent{encoding}{cmd}{text} + +Use a symbol or accent not from the current encoding. + +In general, to use a fontenc command in an encoding where it is +not defined, and if the command has no arguments, then you can use it +like this: + +\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\ss} + +which is equivalent to this (note the outer braces form a group, so &latex; +reverts back to the prior encoding after the \ss): + +{\fontencoding{OT1}\selectfont\ss} + +Similarly, to use a fontenc command in an encoding where it is +not defined, and if the command has one argument, you can use it like this: + +\UseTextAccent{OT1}{\'}{a} + +which is equivalent to this (again note the outer braces forming a group): + +{fontencoding{OT1}\selectfont\'{\fontencoding{enc_in_use}\selectfont a}} + +Here, enc_in_use is the encoding in force before this sequence +of commands, so that ‘a’ is typeset using the current encoding +and only the accent is taken from OT1. + - + + + Font styles font styles @@ -1287,17 +1842,19 @@ and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. The following type style commands are supported by &latex;. +declaration form of font style commands In the table below the listed commands, the \text... commands, -is used with an argument, as in \textit{text}. This is -the preferred form. But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the -corresponding declaration form, which is sometimes useful. This form -takes no arguments, as in {\itshape text}. The scope of -the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end -of the current group. In addition, each has an environment form such as -\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}. - -These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, are -cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of +are used with an argument as in \textit{text}. This is +the preferred form. But shown after it in parenthesis is the +corresponding declaration form, which is often useful. This +form takes no arguments, as in {\itshape text}. The +scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command +or the end of the current group. In addition, each has an environment +form such as \begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}, which we’ll +describe further at the end of the section. + +These commands, in any of the three forms, are cumulative; for instance +you can get bold sans serif by saying either of \sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily. \nocorrlist @@ -1305,7 +1862,7 @@ cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic corrections if needed (see \/). Specifically, they insert the italic correction unless the following character is in the list -\nocorrlist, which by default consists of a period and a comma. +\nocorrlist, which by default consists of period and comma. To suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use \nocorr at the start or end of the command argument, such as \textit{\nocorr text} or \textsc{text \nocorr}. @@ -1377,8 +1934,8 @@ used as declarations: {\cmd...} in (The unconditional commands below are an older version of font switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most -circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely -what you want.) +circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is what is +needed.) \bf\bf bold font @@ -1465,23 +2022,19 @@ formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. numerals, old-style old-style numerals lining numerals -package, textcomp -textcomp package - -Finally, the command \oldstylenums{numerals} will typeset -so-called “old-style” numerals, which have differing heights and -depths (and sometimes widths) from the standard “lining” numerals, -which all have the same height as uppercase letters. &latex;’s -default fonts support this, and will respect \textbf (but not -other styles; there are no italic old-style numerals in Computer -Modern). Many other fonts have old-style numerals also; sometimes the -textcomp package must be loaded, and sometimes package options -are provided to make them the default. FAQ entry: -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf. +Finally, the command \oldstylenums{numerals} will +typeset so-called “old-style” numerals, which have differing heights +and depths (and sometimes widths) from the standard “lining” +numerals, which all have the same height as uppercase letters. +&latex;’s default fonts support this, and will respect \textbf +(but not other styles; there are no italic old-style numerals in +Computer Modern). Many other fonts have old-style numerals also; +sometimes package options are provided to make them the default. FAQ +entry: https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-osf. - + Font sizes font sizes @@ -1527,23 +2080,36 @@ options). \Huge 24.88 24.88 24.88 -The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by -declaring them, as with this example. +declaration form of font size commands +The commands are listed here in declaration (not environment) form, +since that is how they are typically used. For example. \begin{quotation} \small The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao. \end{quotation} -The scope of the \small lasts until the end of the -quotation environment. It would also end at the next type style -command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it in -extra curly braces {\small We are here, we are here, we are -here!}. You can instead use the environment form of these commands; -for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. +Here, the scope of the \small lasts until the end of the +quotation environment. It would also end at the next type +style command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it +in curly braces {\small This text is typeset in the small font.}. + +environment form of font size commands +An environment form of each of these commands is also defined; for +instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. However, in practice +this form can easily lead to unwanted spaces at the beginning and/or +end of the environment without careful consideration, so it’s +generally less error-prone to stick to the declaration form. + +(Aside: Technically, due to the way &latex; defines \begin and +\end, nearly every command that does not take an argument +technically has an environment form. But in almost all cases, it would +only cause confusion to use it. The reason for mentioning the +environment form of the font size declarations specifically is that +this particular use is not rare.) - + Low-level font commands low-level font commands @@ -1571,7 +2137,7 @@ hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see families, of fonts font catalogue Select the font family. The web page -http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/ provides one way to browse +https://tug.org/FontCatalogue/ provides one way to browse through many of the fonts easily used with &latex;. Here are examples of some common families. @@ -1716,26 +2282,8 @@ vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is stored in the parameter \baselineskip. The default \baselineskip for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the \fontsize. Changing \baselineskip directly is inadvisable since its value is -reset every time a size change happens; see \baselinestretch, next. - -\baselinestretch -\baselinestretch -&latex; multiplies the line spacing by the value of the -\baselinestretch parameter; the default factor is 1. A change -takes effect when \selectfont (see below) is called. You can -make a line skip change happen for the entire document, for instance -doubling it, by doing \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0} in -the preamble. - -package, setspace -setspace package - -double spacing -However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the -setspace package. In addition to offering a number of spacing -options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in places -where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure -captions. See the package documentation. +reset every time a size change happens; instead use +\baselinestretch. (see \baselineskip & \baselinestretch). \linespread{factor} \linespread @@ -1819,22 +2367,22 @@ typesetting starts. \columnsep\columnsep The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with a -command such as \setlength{\columnsep}{40pt} You must change -it before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good +command such as \setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}. You must change +it before the two column mode starts; in the preamble is a good place. \columnseprule\columnseprule -The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between -the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is no rule. -Change it with a command such as +The width of the rule between columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that +there is no rule. Otherwise, the rule appears halfway between the two +columns. Change it with a command such as \setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}, before the two-column -environment starts. +mode starts. \columnwidth\columnwidth The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to \textwidth. In two-column mode by default &latex; sets the -width of each of the two columns to be half of \textwidth minus -\columnsep. +width of each of the two columns, \columnwidth, to be half of +\textwidth minus \columnsep. In a two-column document, the starred environments table* and @@ -1847,11 +2395,11 @@ The following parameters control float behavior of two-column output. The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that the height of a table* or figure* environment must not -exceed 0.7\textheight . If the height of your starred float +exceed 0.7\textheight. If the height of your starred float environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following actions to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the document: -Use the [tp] location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put +Use the [tp] location specifier to tell &latex; to try to put the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of a page. Use the [t!] location specifier to override the effect of @@ -1863,25 +2411,25 @@ to avoid going to float pages so soon. You can redefine it, as with \renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}. -\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction -For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction +\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction +For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of blank space. &latex;’s default is 0.5. Change it with \renewcommand. -\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep -On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance +\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep +On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page. The default is 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for a document set at 10pt or 11pt, and 14pt plus2pt minus4pt for a document set at 12pt. -\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep -This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or +\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep +This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page and the main text. The default is 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. -\dbltopnumber\dbltopnumber -On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the +\dbltopnumber\dbltopnumber +On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The &latex; default is 2. @@ -1983,7 +2531,7 @@ at all type sizes. Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of the main text. The default in the article and report classes is ‘25pt’. In the book class the default is: if the -document is set at 10pt then it is ‘0.25in’, and at 11pt and 12pt +document is set at 10pt then it is ‘0.25in’, and at 11pt or 12pt it is ‘0.275in’. \footskip\footskip @@ -2039,12 +2587,13 @@ distance. \evensidemargin\evensidemargin \oddsidemargin \evensidemargin -The \oddsidemargin is the extra distance between the left side of + +The \oddsidemargin length is the extra distance between the left side of the page and the text’s left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the document class option twoside is chosen and on all pages when oneside is in effect. When twoside is in effect, on even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is -evensidemargin. +\evensidemargin. &latex;’s default is that \oddsidemargin is 40% of the difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth, and @@ -2094,15 +2643,16 @@ column), while \linewidth may decrease for nested lists. specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the minipage or \parbox. -\hsize -\hsize\hsize -This entry is included for completeness: \hsize is the &tex; +\hsize\hsize +\hsize +This entry is included for completeness: \hsize is the &tex; primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal &latex; documents. \topmargin\topmargin topmargin -Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the + +Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is computed based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in − \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip, @@ -2117,7 +2667,119 @@ same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at a type siz - + +<literal>\baselineskip</literal> & <literal>\baselinestretch</literal> + +\baselineskip +\baselinestretch +\linespread +space between lines +interline space +leading +double spacing + +The \baselineskip is a rubber length (see Lengths). It gives +the leading, the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from +baseline to baseline. + +Ordinarily document authors do not directly change \baselineskip +while writing. Instead, it is set by the low level font selection +command \fontsize (see low level font commands fontsize). +The \baselineskip’s value is reset every time a font change +happens and so any direct change to \baselineskip would vanish +the next time there was a font switch. For how to influence line +spacing, see the discussion of \baselinestretch below. + +Usually, a font’s size and baseline skip is assigned by the font +designer. These numbers are nominal in the sense that if, for instance, +a font’s style file has the command \fontsize{10pt}{12pt} +then that does not mean that the characters in the font are 10pt tall; +for instance, parentheses and accented capitals may be taller. Nor does +it mean that if the lines are spaced less than 12pt apart then they risk +touching. Rather these numbers are typographic judgements. (Often, the +\baselineskip is about twenty percent larger than the font size.) + + +The \baselineskip is not a property of each line but of the +entire paragraph. As a result, large text in the middle of a paragraph, +such as a single {\Huge Q}, will be squashed into its line. +&tex; will make sure it doesn’t scrape up against the line above but +won’t change the \baselineskip for that one line to make extra +room above. For the fix, use a \strut (see \strut). + +The value of \baselineskip that &tex; uses for the paragraph is +the value in effect at the blank line or command that ends the paragraph +unit. So if a document contains this paragraph then its lines will be +scrunched together, compared to lines in surrounding paragraphs. + + +Many people see a page break between text and a displayed equation as +bad style, so in effect the display is part of the paragraph. +Because this display is in footnotesize, the entire paragraph has the +baseline spacing matching that size. +{\footnotesize $$a+b = c$$} + +\lineskip +\lineskiplimit +\prevdepth +The process for making paragraphs is that when a new line is added, if +the depth of the previous line plus the height of the new line is less +than \baselineskip then &tex; inserts vertical glue to make up +the difference. There are two fine points. The first is that if the +lines would be too close together, closer than \lineskiplimit, +then &tex; instead uses \lineskip as the interline glue. The +second is that &tex; doesn’t actually use the depth of the previous +line. Instead it uses \prevdepth, which usually contains that +depth. But at the beginning of the paragraph (or any vertical list) +or just after a rule, \prevdepth has the value -1000pt and this +special value tells &tex; not to insert any interline glue at the +paragraph start. + +In the standard classes \lineskiplimit is 0pt and +\lineskip is 1pt. By the prior paragraph then, the distance +between lines can approach zero but if it becomes zero (or less than +zero) then the lines jump to 1pt apart. + +Sometimes authors must, for editing purposes, put the document in double +space or one-and-a-half space. The right way to influence the interline +distance is via \baselinestretch. It scales +\baselineskip, and has a default value of 1.0. It is a command, +not a length, so change the scale factor as in +\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.5}\selectfont. + +The most straightforward way to change the line spacing for an entire +document is to put \linespread{factor} in the preamble. +For double spacing, take factor to be 1.6 and for one-and-a-half +spacing use 1.3. These number are rough: for instance, since the +\baselineskip is about 1.2 times the font size, multiplying by +1.6 gives a font size to baseline ratio of about 2. (The +\linespread command is defined as +\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor} so it won’t +take effect until a font setting happens. But that always takes place at +the start of a document, so there you don’t need to follow it with +\selectfont.) + +package, setspace +setspace package + +A simpler approach is the setspace package. The basic example: + +\usepackage{setspace} +\doublespacing % or \onehalfspacing for 1.5 + +In the preamble these will start the document off with that sizing. +But you can also use these declarations in the document body to change +the spacing from that point forward, and consequently there is +\singlespacing to return the spacing to normal. In the +document body, a better practice than using the declarations is to use +environments, such as \begin{doublespace} +... \end{doublespace}. The package also has commands to do +arbitrary spacing: \setstretch{factor} and +\begin{spacing}{factor} ... \end{spacing}. + + + + Floats Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken @@ -2161,7 +2823,7 @@ both article and book classes, is figure*) with double-column output. To ameliorate this, use the stfloats or dblfloatfix package, but see the discussion at caveats in the -FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. +FAQ: https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-2colfloat. h (Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment @@ -2175,7 +2837,7 @@ automatically added. To absolutely force a float to appear “here”, you can \usepackage{float} and use the H specifier which it defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere. +https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-figurehere. p float page @@ -2287,13 +2949,13 @@ default 2. Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. The principal &tex; FAQ entry relating to floats -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats contains +https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-floats contains suggestions for relaxing &latex;’s default parameters to reduce the problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach’s article “How to influence the position of float environments like figure and table in &latex;?” -(http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf). +(https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2014-FMi-TUB-tb111mitt-float-placement.pdf). @@ -2306,12 +2968,14 @@ influence the position of float environments like figure and table in chapter section subsection +subsubsection paragraph subparagraph \part \chapter \section \subsection +\subsubsection \paragraph \subparagraph @@ -2348,8 +3012,8 @@ not available in article. *-form of sectioning commands All these commands have a *-form that prints title as usual -but is not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents. -An example of using this is for an appendix in an article . The +but does not number it and does not make an entry in the table of contents. +An example of using this is for an appendix in an article. The input \appendix\section{Appendix} gives the output ‘A Appendix’ (see \appendix). You can lose the numbering ‘A’ by instead entering \section*{Appendix} (articles often omit a @@ -2372,25 +3036,35 @@ of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit (see Sectioning/tocdepth). &latex; expects that before you have a \subsection you will have -a \section and, in a book, that before a \section you will -have a \chapter. Otherwise you can get a something like a -subsection numbered ‘3.0.1’. +a \section and, in a book class document, that before a +\section you will have a \chapter. Otherwise you can get +something like a subsection numbered ‘3.0.1’. + +package, titlesec +titlesec package + +&latex; lets you change the appearance of the sectional units. As a +simple example, you can change the section numbering to upper-case +letters with \renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}} in the +preamble (see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). CTAN +has many packages that make this adjustment easier, notably +titlesec. -Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands. +Two counters relate to the appearance of headings made by sectioning commands. secnumdepthsecnumdepth secnumdepth counter section numbers, printing -Controls which sectioning commands are -numbered. Suppress numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than -level \setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} -(see \setcounter). See the above table for the level numbers. For -instance, if the secnumdepth is 1 in an article then a -\section{Introduction} command will produce output like ‘1 -Introduction’ while \subsection{Discussion} will produce output -like ‘Discussion’, without the number. &latex;’s default -secnumdepth is 3 in article class and  2 in the -book and report classes. +Controls which sectioning unit are numbered. Setting the counter with +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} will suppress +numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than level +(see \setcounter). See the above table for the level numbers. +For instance, if the secnumdepth is 1 in an article then +a \section{Introduction} command will produce output like +‘1 Introduction’ while \subsection{Discussion} will +produce output like ‘Discussion’, without the number. &latex;’s +default secnumdepth is 3 in article class and + 2 in the book and report classes. tocdepthtocdepth tocdepth counter @@ -2401,7 +3075,7 @@ sectioning units at level be the smallest ones listed (see \setcounter). See the above table for the level numbers. For instance, if tocdepth is 1 then the table of contents will list sections but not subsections. &latex;’s default -secnumdepth is 3 in article class and  2 in the +tocdepth is 3 in article class and  2 in the book and report classes. @@ -2456,7 +3130,7 @@ out the break in the table of contents. For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in the table of contents, the level number of a part is -1 -(see Sectioning/secnumdepth and see Sectioning/tocdepth). +(see Sectioning/secnumdepth, and Sectioning/tocdepth). package, indentfirst indentfirst package @@ -2527,7 +3201,7 @@ title, the title but that doesn’t work well with running headers so it omits the break in the contents -\chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story} +\chapter[Given it all; my story]{Given it all\\ my story} For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is 0 @@ -2707,13 +3381,13 @@ holds in article except that there are no chapters in that cl so it looks like ‘2.3 title’. The * form shows title. -But it does not show the section number, does not increment the -section counter, and produces no table of contents entry. +But it does not show the subsection number, does not increment the +subsection counter, and produces no table of contents entry. -The optional argument toc-title will appear as the section title +The optional argument toc-title will appear as the subsection title in the table of contents (see Table of contents etc.). If it is -not present then title will be there. This shows the full name in -the title of the section, +not present then title will be there. This shows the full text in +the title of the subsection, \subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow} @@ -2865,38 +3539,45 @@ book or report, and in an article resets the section and the first two will generate output numbered ‘Chapter 1’ and ‘Chapter 2’. After the \appendix the numbering will be -‘Appendix A’ and ‘Appendix B’. See Larger book template +‘Appendix A’ and ‘Appendix B’. See Larger book template, for another example. package, appendix appendix package + The appendix package adds the command \appendixpage to put a separate ‘Appendices’ in the document body before the first appendix, and the command \addappheadtotoc to do the same in the table of contents. You can reset the name -‘Appendix’ with a command like +‘Appendices’ with a command like \renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}, as well as a number of other features. See the documentation on CTAN. - <literal>\frontmatter</literal>, <literal>\mainmatter</literal>, <literal>\backmatter</literal> \frontmatter book, front matter +front matter of a book \mainmatter book, main matter +main matter of a book \backmatter book, back matter book, end matter +back matter of a book +end matter of a book -Synopsis, one of: +Synopsis, one or more of: \frontmatter +... \mainmatter +... \backmatter +... Format a book class document differently according to which part of the document is being produced. All three commands are optional. @@ -2908,19 +3589,23 @@ pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not numbered.) The back matter may contain such things as a glossary, notes, a bibliography, and an index. -The \frontmatter declaration makes the pages numbered in -lowercase roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each -chapter’s title appears in the table of contents; if you use other -sectioning commands here, use the *-version (see Sectioning). -The \mainmatter changes the behavior back to the expected -version, and resets the page number. The \backmatter leaves the -page numbering alone but switches the chapters back to being not -numbered. See Larger book template for an example using the three. +The \frontmatter command makes the pages numbered in lowercase +roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each chapter’s title +appears in the table of contents; if you use other sectioning commands +here, use the *-version (see Sectioning). + +The \mainmatter command changes the behavior back to the expected +version, and resets the page number. + +The \backmatter command leaves the page numbering alone but +switches the chapters back to being not numbered. + +See Larger book template, for an example using these three commands. -<literal>\@startsection</literal> +<literal>\@startsection</literal>, typesetting sectional unit headings \@startsection section, redefining @@ -2958,12 +3643,13 @@ make such a command you may want to use the \secdef command. {afterskip} {style}} -redefines \section to have the form -\section*[toctitle]{title} (here too, the -star * is optional). See Sectioning. This implies that -when you write a command like \renewcommand{section}{...}, -the \@startsection{...} must come last in the definition. See -the examples below. +redefines \section while keeping its standard calling form +\section*[toctitle]{title} (in which, for reminder, +the star * is optional). See Sectioning. This implies +that when you write a command like +\renewcommand{\section}{...}, the +\@startsection{...} must come last in the definition. See the +examples below. name @@ -2979,7 +3665,7 @@ example below. level An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command. -See Sectioning for the list of standard level numbers. +See Sectioning, for the list of standard level numbers. If level is less than or equal to the value of the counter secnumdepth then titles for this sectioning command will be @@ -3004,7 +3690,7 @@ the title into the left margin. beforeskip The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that is inserted before this sectioning unit’s title. This space will be -discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the top of a fresh +discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the beginning of a page. If this number is negative then the first paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the negative of 1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt @@ -3062,20 +3748,24 @@ produce titles that are bold and uppercase. These are &latex;’s defaults for the first three sectioning units that are defined with \@startsection, for the article, -book, and report classes. For section, the level is -1, the indent is 0pt, the beforeskip is -3.5ex -plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the afterskip is 2.3ex plus 0.2ex, -and the style is \normalfont\Large\bfseries. For -subsection, the level is 2, the indent is 0pt, the -beforeskip is -3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the -afterskip is 1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and the style is -\normalfont\large\bfseries. For subsubsection, the level -is 3, the indent is 0pt, the beforeskip is --3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the afterskip is -1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and the style is -\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries. +book, and report classes. + +For section: level is 1, indent is 0pt, +beforeskip is -3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, +afterskip is 2.3ex plus 0.2ex, and style is +\normalfont\Large\bfseries. + +For subsection: level is 2, indent is 0pt, +beforeskip is -3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, +afterskip is 1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and style is +\normalfont\large\bfseries. -Here are examples. They go either in a package or class file or in the +For subsubsection: level is 3, indent is 0pt, +beforeskip is -3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, +afterskip is 1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and style is +\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries. + +Some examples follow. These go either in a package or class file or in the preamble of a &latex; document. If you put them in the preamble they must go between a \makeatletter command and a \makeatother. (Probably the error message You can't use @@ -3319,13 +4009,75 @@ reference. See the documentation on CTAN. - - -Environments + +<literal>xr</literal> package -environments -\begin -\end +xr package +xr-hyper package +\externaldocument +cross referencing, across documents + +Synopsis: + +\usepackage{xr} + \externaldocument{document-basename} + +or + +\usepackage{xr} + \externaldocument[reference-prefix]{document-basename} + +Make cross references to the external document +document-basename.tex. + +Here is an example. If lectures.tex has this in the preamble + +\usepackage{xr} + \externaldocument{exercises} + \externaldocument[H-]{hints} + \externaldocument{answers} + +then it can use cross reference labels from the other three documents. +Suppose that exercises.tex has an enumerated list containing +this, + +\item \label{exer:EulersThm} What if every vertex has odd degree? + +and hints.tex has an enumerated list with this, + +\item \label{exer:EulersThm} Distinguish the case of two vertices. + +and answers.tex has an enumerated list with this. + +\item \label{ans:EulersThm} There is no Euler path, except if there + are exactly two vertices. + +After compiling the exercises, hints, and answers documents, entering +this in the body of lectures.tex will result in the lectures +getting the reference numbers used in the other documents. + +See Exercise~\ref{exer:EulersThm}, with Hint~\ref{H-exer:EulersThm}. +The solution is Answer~\ref{ans:EulersThm}. + +The prefix H- for the reference from the hints file is needed +because the label in the hints file is the same as the label in the +exercises file. Without that prefix, both references would get the +number from the later file. + +Note: if the document uses the hyperref package then in place of +xr, put \usepackage{xr-hyper} before the +\usepackage{hyperref}. Also, if any of the multiple documents +uses hyperref then they all must use it. + + + + + +Environments + +environments +\begin +\end &latex; provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior. An environment begins with \begin and ends with \end, @@ -3375,6 +4127,9 @@ default only in the report class. in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused. \end{abstract} +package, abstract +abstract package + The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column document (for a more flexible solution, use the package abstract). @@ -3546,7 +4301,7 @@ ending. \begin{center} My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\ - I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton + I grew up in that belief. ---Richard Burton \end{center} A double backslash after the final line is optional. If present it @@ -3632,10 +4387,10 @@ missing \item’. This example shows the environment used for a sequence of definitions. -\begin{definition} +\begin{description} \item[lama] A priest. \item[llama] A beast. -\end{definition} +\end{description} The labels ‘lama’ and ‘llama’ are output in boldface, with the left edge on the left margin. @@ -3688,9 +4443,9 @@ lists. mathematical text \end{displaymath} -Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display style -and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global option -fleqn; see Document class options. +Environment to typeset the mathematical text on its own line, in +display style and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the +global option fleqn; see Document class options. In the displaymath environment no equation number is added to the math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the @@ -3705,18 +4460,20 @@ math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of ways in that package for having math text broken across lines. -The construct \[math text\] is essentially a synonym for -\begin{displaymath}math text\end{displaymath} but the -latter is easier to work with in the source file; for instance, +\[...\] display math +The construct \[math\] is a synonym for the environment +\begin{displaymath} math \end{displaymath} but the +latter is easier to work with in the source; for instance, searching for a square bracket may get false positives but the word -displaymath will likely be unique. (The construct -$$math text$$ from Plain &tex; is sometimes -mistakenly used as a synonym for displaymath. It is not a -synonym, because the displaymath environment checks that it isn’t -started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching -environment start, because the displaymath environment has -different vertical spacing, and because the displaymath -environment honors the fleqn option.) +displaymath will likely be unique. + +$$...$$ plain &tex; display math +(Aside: The construct $$math$$ from Plain &tex; is +sometimes mistakenly used as a synonym for displaymath. It is +not a synonym, and is not officially supported in &latex; at all; +$$ doesn’t support the fleqn option (see Document +class options), has different vertical spacing, and doesn’t perform +consistency checks.) The output from this example is centered and alone on its line. @@ -3887,7 +4644,7 @@ period. The eqnarray environment is obsolete. It has infelicities, including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements. (See “Avoid eqnarray!” by Lars Madsen -http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf). New documents +https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf). New documents should include the amsmath package and use the displayed mathematics environments provided there, such as the align environment. We include a description only for completeness and for @@ -4042,7 +4799,7 @@ end of the document, on a page of floats. -<literal>filecontents</literal>: Write an external file +<literal>filecontents</literal> environment, filecontents filecontents environment @@ -4055,34 +4812,55 @@ end of the document, on a page of floats. Synopsis: -\begin{filecontents}{filename} +\begin{filecontents}[option]{filename} text \end{filecontents} or -\begin{filecontents*}{filename} +\begin{filecontents*}[option]{filename} text \end{filecontents*} -Create a file named filename and fill it with text. The -unstarred version of the environment filecontents prefixes the -content of the created file with a header; see the example below. The -starred version filecontents* does not include the header. +Create a file named filename in the current directory (or the +output directory, if specified; see output directory) and write +text to it. By default, an existing file is not overwritten. + +The unstarred version of the environment +filecontents prefixes the content of the created file with a +header of &tex; comments; see the example below. The starred +version filecontents* does not include the header. + +The possible options are: + +force +overwrite +force option for filecontents +overwrite option for filecontents +Overwrite an existing file. -This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it often -appears before the \documentclass command. It is typically used -when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The -environment will write that file to the directory containing the source -and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include -bib references in the file, again to make it self-contained. +noheader +noheader option for filecontents +Omit the header. Equivalent to using filecontents*. -The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and if -so, does not do anything. There is a filecontents package that -redefines the filecontents environment so that instead of doing -nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file. +nosearch +nosearch option for filecontents +Only check the current directory (and the output directory, if +specified) for an existing file, not the entire search path. -For example, this document + +These options were added in a 2019 release of &latex;. + +self-contained sources +source files, making self-contained +This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it +often appears before the \documentclass command. It is +commonly used to create a .bib or other such data file from the +main document source, to make the source file self-contained. +Similarly, it can be used to create a custom style or class file, +again making the source self-contained. + +For example, this document: \documentclass{article} \begin{filecontents}{JH.sty} @@ -4093,7 +4871,7 @@ nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file. Article by \myname. \end{document} -produces this file JH.sty. +produces this file JH.sty: %% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty' %% generated by the `filecontents' environment @@ -4124,7 +4902,7 @@ Article by \myname. An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and -stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use a double +stretching or shrinking interword spaces. To force a new line use a double backslash, \\. For the declaration form see \raggedright. @@ -4161,7 +4939,7 @@ flush left and ragged right. \end{environment} A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and -ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as quote +ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. For the environment form see flushleft. @@ -4204,11 +4982,13 @@ delimit its effect. An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long to fit the margins then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that -avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new +avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking inter-word spaces. To force a new line use a double backslash, \\. For the declaration form see \raggedleft. -For an example related to this environment, see flushleft. +For an example related to this environment, see flushleft, +where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace flushleft by +flushright. @@ -4231,7 +5011,7 @@ see \raggedleft. \end{environment} A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and -ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as quote +ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. For the environment form see flushright. @@ -4241,7 +5021,9 @@ formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit. -For an example related to this environment, see \raggedright. +For an example related to this environment, see \raggedright, +where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace \raggedright by +\raggedleft. @@ -4266,8 +5048,8 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit. ... \end{itemize} -Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list. The -environment must have at least one \item; having none causes the +Produce an unordered list, sometimes called a bullet list. There +must be at least one \item within the environment; having none causes the &latex; error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item’. This gives a two-item list. @@ -4277,34 +5059,38 @@ environment must have at least one \item; having none causes \item Rice portrait \end{itemize} -As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, •. -The format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below. +With the default locale—without loading e.g. babel package +with another language than USenglish—as a top-level list each label +would come out as a bullet, •. The format of the labeling +depends on the nesting level; see below. \item Start list items with the \item command (see \item). If you give \item an optional argument by following it with square -brackets, as in \item[Optional label], then by default it will -appear in bold and be flush right, so it could extend into the left -margin. For labels that are flush left see the description -environment. Following the \item is optional text, which may -contain multiple paragraphs. +brackets, as in \item[Optional label], then by default +Optional label will appear in bold and be flush right, so it could +extend into the left margin. For labels that are flush left see the +description environment. Following the \item is the text of +the item, which may be empty or contain multiple paragraphs. + +Unordered lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. +They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such +as enumerate (see enumerate). \labelitemi \labelitemii \labelitemiii \labelitemiv -Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. -They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such -as enumerate (see enumerate). The itemize environment -uses the commands \labelitemi through \labelitemiv to -produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase -roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting -level). These are the default marks at each level. +The itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi +through \labelitemiv to produce the default label (note the +convention of lowercase roman numerals at the end of the command names +that signify the nesting level). These are the default marks at each +level. • (bullet, from \textbullet) -- (bold en-dash, from \normalfont\bfseries\textendash) * (asterisk, from \textasteriskcentered) -. (centered dot, rendered here as a period, from \textperiodcentered) +. (vertically centered dot, rendered here as a period, from \textperiodcentered) Change the labels with \renewcommand. For instance, this makes the first level use diamonds. @@ -4320,18 +5106,22 @@ the first level use diamonds. \leftmarginvi The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the left margin of the itemize list is determined by the -parameters \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi. (Note the -convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command -name to denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: 2.5em in -level 1 (2em in two-column mode), 2.2em in level 2, -1.87em in level 3, and 1.7em in level 4, with smaller -values for more deeply nested levels. +parameters \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi. (This also +uses the convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the +command name to denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: +2.5em in level 1 (2em in two-column mode), 2.2em in +level 2, 1.87em in level 3, and 1.7em in level 4, with +smaller values for more deeply nested levels. +package, enumitem +enumitem package + For other major &latex; labeled list environments, see -description and enumerate. For information about list -layout parameters, including the default values, and for information -about customizing list layout, see list. The package -enumitem is useful for customizing lists. +description and enumerate. The itemize, +enumerate and description environment use the same list +layout parameters. For a description, including the default values, and +for information about customizing list layout, see list. The +package enumitem is useful for customizing lists. This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized lists. @@ -4414,11 +5204,11 @@ environment. The mandatory first argument labeling specifies the default labeling of list items. It can contain text and &latex; commands, as -above where it contains both ‘Item’ and ‘\Roman{...}’. +above where it contains both ‘Item’ and ‘\Roman{…}’. &latex; forms the label by putting the labeling argument in a box of width \labelwidth. If the label is wider than that, the additional material extends to the right. When making an instance of a -list you can override the default labeling by giving \item an +list you can override the default labeling by giving \item an optional argument by including square braces and the text, as in the above \item[Special label.]; see \item. @@ -4440,7 +5230,7 @@ definition of the environment add \newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}, and between the \setlength command and the parenthesis that closes the spacing argument also add \let\makelabel\namedmakelabel. -Then the items will be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the +Then the labels will be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the second code line to \let\makelabel\fbox puts the labels inside a framed box. Another example of the \makelabel command is below, in the definition of the redlabel environment. @@ -4466,7 +5256,7 @@ and ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: , \parsep (that is, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt), and \topsep (that is, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt). The defaults at 11 point are: 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt, \parsep (that is, -2pt plus1pt minus1pt), and topsep (that is, 2pt +2pt plus1pt minus1pt), and \topsep (that is, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt). The defaults at 12 point are: 5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt, \parsep (that is, 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt), and \topsep (that is, 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt). @@ -4521,14 +5311,14 @@ item. A negative value makes this an “outdent”. Its default value is 0pt. \parsep\parsep -Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the ‘book’ -and ‘article’ classes The defaults for the first three levels in -&latex;’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at 10 -point size are: 4pt plus2pt minus1pt, 2pt plus1pt -minus1pt, and 0pt. The defaults at 11 point size are: -4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt, and -0pt. The defaults at 12 point size are: 5pt plus2.5pt -minus1pt, 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt, and 0pt. +Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. +The defaults for the first three levels in &latex;’s ‘article’, +‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: 4pt +plus2pt minus1pt, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt, and 0pt. The +defaults at 11 point size are: 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt, +2pt plus1pt minus1pt, and 0pt. The defaults at 12 point +size are: 5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt, 2.5pt plus1pt +minus1pt, and 0pt. \partopsep\partopsep Vertical space added, beyond \topsep+\parskip, to the top @@ -4672,7 +5462,7 @@ See \usecounter. \let\makelabel=\makeredlabel } } -{\end{list} } +{\end{list}} @@ -4691,7 +5481,7 @@ See \usecounter. depends on the list type. Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets -‘[...]’, if you have an item whose text starts with ‘[’, you +‘[...]’, if you have an item whose text starts with [, you have to hide the bracket inside curly braces, as in: \item {[} is an open square bracket; otherwise, &latex; will think it marks the start of an optional label. @@ -4729,7 +5519,7 @@ labelled ‘3.’. A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are not indented and an \item without an optional argument produces no text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where -the \item command as part of the environment’s definition. For +the \item command is part of the environment’s definition. For instance, the center environment is defined essentially like this: @@ -4766,7 +5556,7 @@ default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated. environment, math math environment -in-line formulas +inline formulas Synopsis: @@ -4774,6 +5564,8 @@ default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated. math \end{math} +$ inline math +\(...\) inline math The math environment inserts given math material within the running text. \(...\) and $...$ are synonyms. See Math formulas. @@ -4826,24 +5618,30 @@ It gives the width of the box into which contents are There are three optional arguments, position, height, and inner-pos. You need not include all three. For example, get the default position and set the height with -\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] contents \end{minipage}. -(Get the natural height with an empty argument, [].) +\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm]{\columnwidth} contents +\end{minipage}. (Get the natural height with an empty argument, +[].) The optional argument position governs how the minipage vertically aligns with the surrounding material. c -(synonym m) Default. Positions the minipage so its -vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what -Plain &tex; calls \vcenter). + + +(synonym m) Default. Positions the minipage so its +vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line. t -Match the top line in the minipage with the baseline of the -surrounding text (Plain &tex;’s \vtop. +\vtop plain &tex; + + +Match the top line in the minipage with the baseline of the +surrounding text (plain &tex;’s \vtop). b -Match the bottom line in the minipage with the baseline of the -surrounding text (Plain &tex;’s \vbox. +\vbox plain &tex; +Match the bottom line in the minipage with the baseline of the +surrounding text (plain &tex;’s \vbox). To see the effects of these, contrast running this @@ -4853,6 +5651,8 @@ surrounding text (Plain &tex;’s \vbox. with the results of changing c to b or t. + + The optional argument height is a rigid length (see Lengths). It sets the height of the minipage. You can enter any value larger than, or equal to, or smaller than the minipage’s natural @@ -4860,11 +5660,11 @@ height and &latex; will not give an error or warning. You can also set it to a height of zero or a negative value. The final optional argument inner-pos controls the placement of -content inside the box. These are the possible values are (the +contents inside the box. These are the possible values are (the default is the value of position). t -Place content at the top of the box. +Place contents at the top of the box. c Place it in the vertical center. @@ -4929,19 +5729,29 @@ Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic. They are vertically centered. -\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}} +package, siunitx +siunitx package + +% siunitx to have the S column specifier, +% which aligns numbers on their decimal point. +\usepackage{siunitx} +\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}} ... \begin{center} \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}} \hspace{0.1\textwidth} \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth} - \begin{tabular}{r|l} - \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &Pop (million) \\ \hline - The Bronx &$1.5$ \\ - Brooklyn &$2.6$ \\ - Manhattan &$1.6$ \\ - Queens &$2.3$ \\ - Staten Island &$0.5$ + \begin{tabular}{r|S} + % \multicolumn to remove vertical bar between column headers + \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} & + % braces to prevent siunitx from misinterpreting the + % period as a decimal separator + {Pop. (million)} \\ \hline + The Bronx &1.5 \\ + Brooklyn &2.6 \\ + Manhattan &1.6 \\ + Queens &2.3 \\ + Staten Island &0.5 \end{tabular} \end{minipage} \end{center} @@ -4959,22 +5769,24 @@ are vertically centered. Synopses: \begin{picture}(width,height) - picture commands + picture command \end{picture} or \begin{picture}(width,height)(xoffset,yoffset) - picture commands + picture command \end{picture} +Where there may be any number of picture command’s. + An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows, -boxes, circles, and text. Note that while this environment is not -obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics -creation systems, such as TikZ, PSTricks, MetaPost, -or Asymptote. These are not covered in this document; see CTAN. +boxes, circles, and text. This environment is not obsolete, but new +documents typically use much more powerful graphics creation systems, +such as TikZ, PSTricks, MetaPost, or Asymptote. None of these are +covered in this document; see CTAN. -This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors. +To start, here’s an example showing the parallelogram law for adding vectors. \unitlength \setlength{\unitlength}{1cm} @@ -4983,41 +5795,24 @@ or Asymptote. These are not covered in this document; see CT \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}} \put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}} \put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}} - \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}} + \put(0,0){\vector(1,1){6}} \put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }} \end{picture} -You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an -exact location. - -\usepackage{color,graphicx} % in preamble - ... -\begin{center} -\setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth} -\begin{picture}(1,1) % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall - \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}} - \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}} -\end{picture} -\end{center} - -The red X will be precisely a quarter of the \linewidth from -the left margin, and 0.35\linewidth up from the bottom. Another -example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get -repeat material on each of a document’s pages. - The picture environment has one required argument, a pair of -numbers (width,height). Multiply these by the value -\unitlength to get the nominal size of the output, the space that -&latex; reserves on the output page. This nominal size need not be how -large the picture really is; &latex; will draw things from the picture -outside the picture’s box. +positive real numbers (width,height). Multiply these by the +value \unitlength to get the nominal size of the output, i.e. +the space that &latex; reserves on the output page. This nominal size +need not be how large the picture really is; &latex; will draw things +from the picture outside the picture’s box. This environment also has an optional argument (xoffset,yoffset). It is used to shift the origin. Unlike most optional arguments, this one is not contained in square brackets. -As with the required argument, it consists of two real numbers. -Multiply these by \unitlength to get the point at the lower-left -corner of the picture. +As with the required argument, it consists of a pair of two real +numbers, but these may also be negative or null. Multiply these +by \unitlength to get the coordinates of the point at the +lower-left corner of the picture. For example, if \unitlength has been set to 1mm, the command @@ -5034,24 +5829,27 @@ optional argument. position, in picture Each picture command tells &latex; where to put something by -naming its position. A position is a pair such as (2.4,-5) +providing its position. A position is a pair such as (2.4,-5) giving the x- and y-coordinates. A coordinate is a not a length, it is a real number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It specifies a length in multiples of the unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate -2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters. +2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters. -&latex;’s default for \unitlength is 1pt. it is a rigid +&latex;’s default for \unitlength is 1pt. It is a rigid length (see Lengths). Change it with the \setlength command (see \setlength). Make this change only outside of a picture environment. -Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at +The picture environment supports using standard arithmetic +expressions as well as numbers. + +Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is by default at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, as with \put(1,2){...}, it is not enclosed in braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also, unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are -further up the page. +further up the page, for example, y = 1 is above y = 0. There are four ways to put things in a picture: \put, \multiput, \qbezier, and \graphpaper. The most @@ -5082,21 +5880,24 @@ line of length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of The \multiput, qbezier, and graphpaper commands are described below. -This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using \qbezier for -that curve. +You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an +exact location. For example: -\begin{picture}(3,1.5) - \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}} % x axis - \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}} % y axis - \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}} % left side rectangle - \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}} % right side - \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25) - \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5) - \thicklines % below here, lines are twice as thick - \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}} - \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}} +\usepackage{color,graphicx} % in preamble + ... +\begin{center} +\setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth} +\begin{picture}(1,1) % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall + \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}} + \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}} \end{picture} +\end{center} +The red X will be precisely a quarter of the \textwidth from +the left margin, and 0.35\textwidth up from the bottom of the +picture. Another example of this usage is to put similar code in the +page header to get repeat material on each of a document’s pages. + @@ -5178,7 +5979,21 @@ intermediate points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose maximum number of points is \qbeziermax (change this value with \renewcommand). - +This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using \qbezier for +that curve. + +\begin{picture}(8,4) + \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}} % x axis + \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}} % y axis + \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}} % left side + \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}} % right side + \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25) + \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5) + \thicklines % below here, lines are twice as thick + \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}} + \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}} +\end{picture} + <literal>\graphpaper</literal> @@ -5189,7 +6004,10 @@ maximum number of points is \qbeziermax (change this value wi \graphpaper(x_init,y_init)(x_dimen,y_dimen) \graphpaper[spacing](x_init,y_init)(x_dimen,y_dimen) -Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the graphpap package. +package, graphpap +graphpap package + +Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the graphpap package. The grid’s origin is (x_init,y_init). Grid lines come every spacing units (the default is 10). The grid extends x_dimen units to the right and y_dimen units up. @@ -5218,7 +6036,7 @@ All arguments must be positive integers. Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises y_rise for every horizontal x_run. The travel is the total horizontal -change — it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in +change—it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special case of vertical lines, where (x_run,y_rise)=(0,1), the travel gives the change in y. @@ -5270,9 +6088,10 @@ relatively prime, so that (x_run,y_rise) can be (2,1) (4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former). To get lines of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like -picture, see the package pict2e on CTAN. Another solution -is to use a full-featured graphics system such as TikZ, or -PSTricks, or MetaPost, or Asymptote +picture, see the package pict2e +(https://ctan.org/pkg/pict2e). Another solution +is to use a full-featured graphics system such as TikZ, PSTricks, +MetaPost, or Asymptote. @@ -5334,8 +6153,8 @@ one. The * form produces a filled-in circle. \put(5,7){\circle{6}} -The available radii for circle are, in points, the even -numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive. For circle* they are all the +The available radii for \circle are, in points, the even +numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive. For \circle* they are all the integers from 1 to 15. @@ -5438,7 +6257,7 @@ argument \shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}. Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it vertically rises y_rise for every horizontal x_run. The -travel is the total horizontal change — it is not the +travel is the total horizontal change—it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special case of vertical vectors, if (x_run,y_rise)=(0,1), then travel gives the change in y. @@ -5640,6 +6459,8 @@ between paragraphs (it is the rubber length \parsep). <literal>tabbing</literal> + + environment, tabbing tabbing environment @@ -5665,12 +6486,12 @@ known in advance. widths, ended by a \kill command (which is described below): \begin{tabbing} -\hspace{0.75in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \kill -Ship \> Guns \> Year \\ -\textit{Sophie} \> 14 \> 1800 \\ -\textit{Polychrest} \> 24 \> 1803 \\ -\textit{Lively} \> 38 \> 1804 \\ -\textit{Surprise} \> 28 \> 1805 \\ +\hspace{1.2in}\=\hspace{1in}\=\kill +Ship \>Guns \>Year \\ +\textit{Sophie} \>14 \>1800 \\ +\textit{Polychrest} \>24 \>1803 \\ +\textit{Lively} \>38 \>1804 \\ +\textit{Surprise} \>28 \>1805 \\ \end{tabbing} Both the tabbing environment and the more widely-used @@ -5680,10 +6501,10 @@ determined automatically by &latex;, while in tabbing the use sets the tab stops. Another distinction is that tabular generates a box, but tabbing can be broken across pages. Finally, while tabular can be used in any mode, tabbing -can be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph. +can be used only in paragraph mode and it always starts a new paragraph, +without indentation. -A tabbing environment always starts a new paragraph, without -indentation. Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need +Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need to use the starred form of the \hspace command at the beginning of a tabbed row. The right margin of the tabbing environment is the end of line, so that the width of the environment is @@ -5696,8 +6517,9 @@ rows. The first tabbed row begins immediately after \kill. The last row may omit the \\ and end with just \end{tabbing}. -At any point the tabbing environment has a current tab stop -pattern, a sequence of n > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, +pattern, current tab stops, tabbing +At any point the tabbing environment has a current tab stop +pattern, a sequence of n > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, etc. These create n corresponding columns. Tab stop 0 is always the left margin, defined by the enclosing environment. Tab stop number i is set if it is assigned a horizontal @@ -5854,20 +6676,18 @@ are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a following page. \label{tab:cello} \end{table} -but you can put many different kinds of content in a table, -including text, &latex; commands, etc. +but you can put many different kinds of content in a table: +the table body may contain text, &latex; commands, graphics, etc. It is +typeset in a parbox of width \textwidth. For the possible values of placement and their effect on the float placement algorithm, see Floats. -The table body is typeset in a parbox of width \textwidth. -It can contain text, commands, graphics, etc. - The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see Cross references). \caption The \caption command is also optional. It specifies caption text -for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional +title for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional lottitle is present then that text is used in the list of tables instead of title (see Table of contents etc.). @@ -5924,7 +6744,7 @@ illustrates many of the features. The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar between them. This is specified in tabular’s argument {l|l}. -& +& for table cells Put the entries into different columns by separating them with an ampersand, &. The end of each row is marked with a double backslash, \\. Put a horizontal rule below a row, after a double @@ -6032,7 +6852,7 @@ a \centering, \raggedright, or \r declaration (when used in a p-column element these declarations must appear inside braces, as with {\centering .. \\ ..}). Otherwise &latex; will misinterpret the double backslash as -ending the row. Instead, to get a line break in there use +ending the tabular row. Instead, to get a line break in there use \newline (see \newline). *{num}{cols} @@ -6268,7 +7088,7 @@ is required. Produce a bibliography or reference list. There are two ways to produce bibliographic lists. This environment is suitable when you have only a -few references and can maintain the list by hand. See Using BibTeX +few references and can maintain the list by hand. See Using BibTeX, for a more sophisticated approach. This shows the environment with two entries. @@ -6288,15 +7108,17 @@ Together they are \cite{latexdps, texbook}. \end{thebibliography} This styles the first reference as ‘[1] Leslie ...’, and so that -\cite{latexdps} produces the matching ‘... based on [1]’. -The second \cite produces ‘[1, 2]’. You must compile the -document twice to resolve these references. +... based on \cite{latexdps} produces the matching +‘... based on [1]’. The second \cite produces ‘[1, +2]’. You must compile the document twice to resolve these references. The mandatory argument widest-label is text that, when typeset, is as wide as the widest item label produced by the \bibitem commands. The tradition is to use 9 for bibliographies with less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. +\bibname +\refname The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as ‘Bibliography’. To change it there are two cases. In the book and report classes, where the top level sectioning is \chapter and the @@ -6304,7 +7126,7 @@ default title is ‘Bibliography’, that title is in \bibname. For article, where the class’s top level sectioning is \section and the default is ‘References’, the title is in macro \refname. Change it by redefining the command, -as with \renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references} after +as with \renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}, after \begin{document}. package, babel @@ -6314,6 +7136,8 @@ as with \renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references} after redefine \refname or \bibname to fit the selected language. +See list, for the list layout control parameters. + @@ -6329,16 +7153,16 @@ language. \bibitem[label]{cite_key} -Generate an entry labeled by label. The default is for &latex; to -generates a number using the enumi counter. The citation key +Generate an entry labeled by default by a number generated using the +enumi counter. The citation key citation key -cite_key is a string of +cite_key can be any string of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma). -See thebibliography for an example. +See thebibliography, for an example. -The optional label changes the default label from an integer to the -given string. With this +When provided, the optional label becomes the entry label and the +enumi counter is not incremented. With this \begin{thebibliography} \bibitem[Lamport 1993]{latexdps} @@ -6367,8 +7191,8 @@ Warning: There were multiply-defined labels’. Under the hood, &latex; remembers the cite_key and label information because \bibitem writes it to the auxiliary file -filename.aux. For instance, the above example causes -\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993} and +jobname.aux (see Jobname). For instance, the above +example causes the two \bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993} and \bibcite{texbook}{1} to appear in that file. The .aux file is read by the \begin{document} command and then the information is available for \cite commands. This explains why @@ -6410,20 +7234,21 @@ comma-separated list of citation keys (see \bibitem Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983. \end{thebibliography} -produces output like ‘... source is [1]’. (You can change the -appearance of the citation with bibliography styles. More is in -Using BibTeX.) +produces output like ‘... source is [1]’. You can change the +appearance of the citation and of the reference by using bibliography +styles if you generate automatically the thebibliography +environment. More information in Using BibTeX. The optional argument subcite is appended to the citation. For example, See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook} might produce ‘See 14.3 in [1, p. 314]’. In addition to what appears in the output, \cite writes -information to the auxiliary file filename.aux. For -instance, \cite{latexdps} writes ‘\citation{latexdps}’ -to that file. This information is used by Bib&tex; to include in your -reference list only those works that you have actually cited; see -\nocite also. +information to the auxiliary file jobname.aux +(see Jobname). For instance, \cite{latexdps} writes +‘\citation{latexdps}’ to that file. This information is used by +Bib&tex; to include in your reference list only those works that you +have actually cited; see \nocite also. If keys is not in your bibliography information then you get ‘LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references’, and in the output @@ -6446,12 +7271,12 @@ the fix may be to run &latex; again. \nocite{keys} Produces no output but writes keys to the auxiliary file -doc-filename.aux. +jobname.aux (see Jobname). The mandatory argument keys is a comma-separated list of one or more citation keys (see \bibitem). This information is used by Bib&tex; to include these works in your reference list even though you -have not cited them (see \cite). +have not explicitly cited them (see \cite). @@ -6467,7 +7292,7 @@ have not cited them (see \cite). As described in thebibliography (see thebibliography), a sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the Bib&tex; program. This is only an introduction; see the full -documentation on CTAN. +documentation on CTAN (see CTAN). With Bib&tex;, you don’t use thebibliography (see thebibliography). Instead, include these lines. @@ -6492,7 +7317,7 @@ Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically. Many, many other Bib&tex; style files exist, tailored to the demands of various publications. See CTAN’s listing -http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib. +https://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib. The \bibliography command is what actually produces the bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to @@ -6651,8 +7476,13 @@ the string \end{verbatim}. You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros, for instance in the argument to a \section. This is not the same as -commands being fragile (see \protect), instead it just cannot appear -there. (But the cprotect package can help with this.) +commands being fragile (see \protect), instead it just cannot work, +as the verbatim environment changes the catcode regime before +processing its contents, and restore it immediately afterward, +nevertheless with a macro argument the content of the argument has +already be converted to a token list along the catcode regime in effect +when the macro was called. However, the cprotect package can +help with this. package, listings listings package @@ -6675,7 +7505,7 @@ and minted. A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments is fancyvrb. Another is verbatimbox. -For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN. +For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN (see CTAN). @@ -6703,27 +7533,28 @@ exclamation point, !. The second instead uses plus, literal-text. The single-character delimiter char surrounds -literal-text — it must be the same character before and -after. No spaces come between \verb or \verb* and -char, or between char and literal-text, or between -literal-text and the second occurrence of char (the synopsis -shows a space only to distinguish one component from the other). The -delimiter must not appear in literal-text. The literal-text -cannot include a line break. +literal-text—it must be the same character before and after. +No spaces come between \verb or \verb* and char, +or between char and literal-text, or between +literal-text and the second occurrence of char (the +synopsis shows a space only to distinguish one component from the +other). The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. The +literal-text cannot include a line break. visible space The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible space character. -The output from this will include a character showing the spaces. +The output from this will include a visible space on both side of word +‘with’: -The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ... +The command's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ... package, url url package For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package url -provides an option that is better than the \verb command, since +is a better option than the \verb command, since it allows line breaks. package, listings @@ -6740,8 +7571,12 @@ it allows line breaks. You cannot use \verb in the argument to a macro, for instance in the argument to a \section. It is not a question of \verb -being fragile (see \protect), instead it just cannot appear there. -(But the cprotect package can help with this.) +being fragile (see \protect), instead it just cannot work, as the +\verb command changes the catcode regime before reading its +argument, and restore it immediately afterward, nevertheless with a +macro argument the content of the argument has already be converted to a +token list along the catcode regime in effect when the macro was called. +However, the cprotect package can help with this. @@ -6899,8 +7734,8 @@ internally) the same as \\, followed by \relax\restorecr command restores normal line-breaking behavior. -This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. -See verbatim instead. +This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. Use +verbatim (see verbatim) instead. With &latex;’s usual defaults, this @@ -7143,7 +7978,7 @@ underrepresented groups. When you issue \linebreak, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right margin. See \\ -and \newline to have the spaces not stretched out. +and \newline, to have the spaces not stretched out. @@ -7183,7 +8018,7 @@ second one is lousy; to break the current page &latex; doesn’t look as far ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to influence page breaks while preparing a final version of a document. -See Layout for more material that is relevant to page breaking. +See Layout, for more material that is relevant to page breaking. @@ -7272,7 +8107,7 @@ continent, \noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition that all men are created equal. -makes a new page start after ‘continent,’ and the cut-off line is +makes a new page start after ‘continent’, and the cut-off line is not right justified. In addition, \newpage does not vertically stretch out the page, as \pagebreak does. @@ -7347,13 +8182,13 @@ continent, a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition that all men are created equal. -does not give a page break at ‘continent,’ but instead at -‘nation,’ since that is where &latex; breaks that line. In +does not give a page break at ‘continent’, but instead at +‘nation’, since that is where &latex; breaks that line. In addition, with \pagebreak the vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. This can look strange, and if \flushbottom is in effect this can cause you to get ‘Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has -occurred while \output is active’. See \newpage for a command that +occurred while \output is active’. See \newpage, for a command that does not have these effects. @@ -7452,7 +8287,7 @@ sectioning command such as \chapter (it can only be used in o paragraph mode; see Modes). There are some workarounds; see following sections. -Footnotes, in a minipage +footnotes, in a minipage mpfootnote counter In a minipage environment the \footnote command uses the mpfootnote counter instead of the footnote counter, so @@ -7549,7 +8384,7 @@ that command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (see number changes the number of the footnote mark. -See \footnotemark and Footnotes in a table for usage +See \footnotemark and Footnotes in a table, for usage examples. @@ -7712,13 +8547,16 @@ second.\footnotefrom{% \renewcommand*{\cmd}[nargs]{defn} \renewcommand*{\cmd}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} -Define or redefine a command. See also the discussion of -\DeclareRobustCommand in Class and package commands. +Define or redefine a command (see also the discussion of +\DeclareRobustCommand in Class and package commands). + starred form, defining new commands *-form, defining new commands -The starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain -multiple paragraphs of text (in plain &tex; terms that it not be -\long). +\long +The starred form of these two forbids the arguments from containing +multiple paragraphs of text (in plain &tex; terms, the commands +are not \long). With the default form, arguments can be +multiple paragraphs. These are the parameters: @@ -7739,8 +8577,8 @@ different number of arguments than the old version. optargdefault Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of \cmd is optional, with default value optargdefault -(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then -\cmd does not take an optional argument. +(which may be the empty string). If optargsdefault is not present +then \cmd does not take an optional argument. positional parameter That is, if \cmd is used with square brackets, as in @@ -7849,13 +8687,13 @@ If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect as \newcommand. If a command of this name already exists then this definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file that may be loaded more than once, such as a style file. -See \newcommand & \renewcommand for the description of the arguments. +See \newcommand & \renewcommand, for the description of the arguments. This example \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College} \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College} -From \myaffiliation. +>From \myaffiliation. outputs ‘From Saint Michael's College’. Unlike \newcommand, the repeated use of \providecommand does not give an error. @@ -7894,19 +8732,19 @@ or class writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a package or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of their own, because by default the at-sign has catcode 12. -The pair \makeatletter and \makeatother changes the -default code and then changes it back. Use them inside a .tex -file, in the preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands -named with @, by having them surround your definition. Don’t -use these inside .sty or .cls files since the -\usepackage and \documentclass commands already arrange -that the at-sign has the character code of a letter, catcode 11. +Use the pair \makeatletter and \makeatother inside a +.tex file, typically in the preamble, when you are defining or +redefining commands named with @, by having them surround your +definition. Don’t use these inside .sty or .cls files +since the \usepackage and \documentclass commands already +arrange that the at-sign has the character code of a letter, +catcode 11. package, macros2e macros2e package For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see -http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. +https://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. In this example the class file has a command \thesis@universityname that the user wants to change. These @@ -7939,27 +8777,33 @@ Examples are the table and table* environm When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward because \newenvironment and \renewenvironment allow the -environment name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more -complex. As in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command, -given above as \mycmd, which peeks ahead to see if it is followed -by a star. For instance, &latex; does not really have a -\section* command; instead, the \section command peeks -ahead. This command does not accept arguments but instead expands to -one of two commands that do accept arguments. In the synopsis these two -are \mycmd@nostar and \mycmd@star. They could take the -same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all. -As always, in a &latex; document a command using at-sign @ -must be enclosed inside a \makeatletter ... \makeatother block +environment name to contain a star. So you just have to write +\newenvironment{myenv} or +\newenvironment{myenv*} and continue the definition as +usual. For commands the situation is more complex as the star not being +a letter cannot be part of the command name. As in the synopsis above, +there will be a user-called command, given above as \mycmd, which +peeks ahead to see if it is followed by a star. For instance, &latex; +does not really have a \section* command; instead, the +\section command peeks ahead. This command does not accept +arguments but instead expands to one of two commands that do accept +arguments. In the synopsis these two are \mycmd@nostar and +\mycmd@star. They could take the same number of arguments or a +different number, or no arguments at all. As always, in a &latex; +document a command using an at-sign @ in its name must be +enclosed inside a \makeatletter ... \makeatother block (see \makeatletter & \makeatother). This example of \@ifstar defines the command \ciel and a variant \ciel*. Both have one required argument. A call to -\ciel{night} will return "starry night sky" while -\ciel*{blue} will return "starry not blue sky". +\ciel{blue} will return "not starry blue sky" while +\ciel*{night} will return "starry night sky". -\newcommand*{\ciel@unstarred}[1]{starry #1 sky} -\newcommand*{\ciel@starred}[1]{starry not #1 sky} +\makeatletter +\newcommand*{\ciel@unstarred}[1]{not starry #1 sky} +\newcommand*{\ciel@starred}[1]{starry #1 sky} \newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel@starred}{\ciel@unstarred}} +\makeatother In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007’s @@ -7972,15 +8816,31 @@ arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007’s \newcommand*{\agentsecret}{% \@ifstar{\agentsecret@starred}{\agentsecret@unstarred}} -There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of -\@ifstar. The suffix package allows the construct -\newcommand\mycommand{unstarred version} followed by -\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{starred version}. And -&latex;3 has the xparse package that allows this code. +After a command name, a star is handled similarly to an optional +argument. (This differs from environment names in which the star is +part of the name itself and as such could be in any position.) Thus, +it is technically possible to put any number of spaces between the +command and the star. Thus \agentsecret*{Bond} and +\agentsecret *{Bond} are equivalent. However, the +standard practice is not to insert any such spaces. + +package, suffix +suffix package + +package, xparse +xparse package + +There are two alternative ways to accomplish the work of +\@ifstar. (1) The suffix package allows the +construct \newcommand\mycommand{unstarred-variant} +followed by +\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{starred-variant}. +(2) &latex; provides the xparse package, which allows +this code: \NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1 - {starred version}% - {unstarred version}% + {starred-variant}% + {unstarred-variant}% } @@ -8493,7 +9353,7 @@ to \protect\(..\protect\). Both commands cause &latex; to ignore spaces after the end of the command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command -from Plain &tex;, and the second is &latex;-specific. +from plain &tex;, and the second is &latex;-specific. The ignorespaces is often used when defining commands via \newcommand, or \newenvironment, or \def. The @@ -8518,21 +9378,20 @@ commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names. But, as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then \fullname will reproduce that. -\makeatletter -\newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\@honorific{#1}} % remember title -\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1} % put title before name -\makeatother +\newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\honorific{#1}} % remember title +\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\honorific~#1} % put title before name + \begin{tabular}{|l|} \honorific{Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} \\ % no extra space here \honorific{ Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} % extra space before title \end{tabular} To fix this, change to -\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\@honorific~#1}. +\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\honorific~#1}. The \ignorespaces is also often used in a \newenvironment -at the end of the begin clause, that is, as part of the second -argument, as in \begin{newenvironment}{env +at the end of the begin clause, as in +\begin{newenvironment}{env name}{... \ignorespaces}{...}. To strip spaces off the end of an environment use @@ -8557,6 +9416,61 @@ inconvenient. The solution is to change to \newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}\ignorespacesafterend}. + + +xspace package + +\xspace +spaces, ignore around commands +commands, ignore spaces + +Synopsis: + +\usepackage{xspace} + ... +\newcommand{...}{...\xspace} + +The \xspace macro, when used at the end of a command, adds a +space unless the command is followed by certain punctuation characters. + +After a command name that uses letters (as opposed to single character +command names using non-letters such as \$), &tex; gobbles white +space. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output has ‘Vermont’ +placed snugly against the period, without any intervening space. + +\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont} +Our college is in \VT . +The \VT{} summers are nice. + +But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the dummy curly +braces or else there would be no space separating ‘Vermont’ from +‘summers’. (Many authors instead instead use a backslash-space +\ for this. See \(SPACE).) + +The xspace package provides \xspace. It is for writing +commands which are designed to be used mainly in text. It inserts a +space after that command unless what immediately follows is in a list of +exceptions. In this example, the dummy braces are not needed. + +\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont\xspace} +Our college is in \VT . +\VT summers are nice. + +The default exception list contains the characters ,.'/?;:!~-), +the open curly brace and the backslash-space command discussed above, +and the commands \footnote or \footnotemark. Add to that +list as with \xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii} and remove +from that list as with \xspaceremoveexception{!}. + + +A comment: many experts prefer not to use \xspace. Putting it in +a definition means that the command will usually get the spacing right. +But it isn’t easy to predict when to enter dummy braces because +\xspace will get it wrong, such as when it is followed by another +command, and so \xspace can make editing material harder and more +error-prone than instead always remembering the dummy braces. + + @@ -8756,7 +9670,8 @@ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}. Synopsis: -\addtocounter{counter}{value  +\addtocounter{counter}{value} + Globally increment counter by the amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. @@ -8804,7 +9719,7 @@ within it. (For the definition of “counters numbered within”, see \newcounter.) This command differs from \refstepcounter in that this one does -not influence references — it does not define the current +not influence references; that is, it does not define the current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter (see \refstepcounter). @@ -8844,14 +9759,20 @@ bogus month value produces no output). A length is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a length as an argument. +rigid lengths +rubber lengths +dimen plain &tex; +skip plain &tex; +glue plain &tex; Lengths come in two types. A rigid length such as 10pt -does not contain a plus or minus component. (Plain &tex; -calls this a dimen.) A rubber length (what Plain &tex; -calls a skip) such as as with 1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm -can contain either or both of those components. In that rubber length, -the 1cm is the natural length while the other two, the -plus and minus components, allow &tex; to stretch or -shrink the length to optimize placement. +does not contain a plus or minus component. (Plain +&tex; calls this a dimen.) A rubber length (what plain +&tex; calls a skip or glue) such as with 1cm +plus0.05cm minus0.01cm can contain either or both of those +components. In that rubber length, the 1cm is the natural +length while the other two, the plus and minus +components, allow &tex; to stretch or shrink the length to optimize +placement. The illustrations below use these two commands. @@ -8951,9 +9872,9 @@ math mode. pt pt -Point -Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two decimal -places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm. +point +Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units +is 1point = 2.845mm = .2845cm. pc pica @@ -8967,32 +9888,32 @@ places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm. bp bp -Big point +big point Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in PostScript and many desktop publishing systems. cm -Centimeter +centimeter cm Centimeter mm -Millimeter +millimeter mm Millimeter dd -Didot point +didot point dd Didot point, 1.07 pt cc -Cicero +cicero cc Cicero, 12 dd sp -Scaled point +scaled point sp Scaled point, 1/65536 pt @@ -9176,6 +10097,153 @@ then you get something like ‘Undefined control sequence. <argu ‘Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox’. + + +<literal>\stretch</literal> + +\stretch + +Synopsis: + +\stretch{number} + +Produces a rubber length with zero natural length and number times +\fill units of stretchability (see Lengths). The +number can be positive or negative. This command is robust +(see \protect). + +It works for both vertical and horizontal spacing. In this horizontal +example, &latex; produces three tick marks, and the distance between +the first and second is half again as long as the distance between the +second and third. + +\rule{0.4pt}{1ex}\hspace{\stretch{1.5}}% + \rule{0.4pt}{1ex}\hspace{\stretch{1}}% + \rule{0.4pt}{1ex} + +In this vertical example, the ‘We dedicate …’ will have three +times as much space under it as above it. + +\newenvironment{dedication}{% in document preamble + \clearpage\thispagestyle{empty}% + \vspace*{\stretch{1}} % stretchable space at top + \it +}{% + \vspace{\stretch{3}} % space at bot is 3x as at top + \clearpage +} + ... +\begin{dedication} % in document body +We dedicate this book to our wives. +\end{dedication} + + + + +Expressions + +expressions + + +Synopsis, one of: + +\numexpr expression +\dimexpr expression +\glueexpr expression +\muglue expression + +Any place where you may write an integer, or a &tex; dimen, or &tex; +glue, or muglue, you can instead write an expression to compute that +type of quantity. + +An example is that \the\dimexpr\linewidth-4pt\relax will +produce as output the length that is four points less than width of a +line (the only purpose of \the is to show the result in the +document). Analogously, \romannumeral\numexpr6+3\relax will +produce ‘ix’, and \the\glueexpr 5pt plus 1pt * 2 \relax +will produce ‘10.0pt plus 2.0pt’. + +A convenience here over doing calculations by allocating registers and +then using \advance, etc., is that the evaluation of expressions +does not involve assignments and can therefore be performed in places +where assignments are not allowed. The next example computes the width +of the \parbox. + +\newlength{\offset}\setlength{\offset}{2em} +\begin{center} +\parbox{\dimexpr\linewidth-\offset*3}{With malice toward none +with charity for all with firmness in the right as God gives us to see +the right let us strive on to finish the work we are in to bind up the +nation's wounds, to care for him who shall have borne the battle and +for his widow and his orphan \textasciitilde\ to do all which may +achieve and cherish a just and lasting peace among ourselves and with +all nations. ---Abraham Lincoln, Second Inaugural Address, from the +memorial} +\end{center} + +The expression consists of one or more terms of the same type +(integer, dimension, etc.) that are added or subtracted. A term that is +a type of number, dimension, etc., consists of a factor of that type, +optionally multiplied or divided by factors. A factor of a type is +either a quantity of that type or a parenthesized subexpression. The +expression produces a result of the given type, so that \numexpr +produces an integer, \dimexpr produces a dimension, etc. + +In the quotation example above, changing to +\dimexpr\linewidth-3*\offset gives the error Illegal unit +of measure (pt inserted). This is because for \dimexpr and +\glueexpr, the input consists of a dimension or glue value +followed by an optional multiplication factor, and not the other way +around. Thus \the\dimexpr 1pt*10\relax is valid and produces +‘10.0pt’, but \the\dimexpr 10*1pt\relax gives the +Illegal unit error. + +The expressions absorb tokens and carry out appropriate mathematics up +to a \relax (which will be absorbed), or up to the first +non-valid token. Thus, \the\numexpr2+3px will print +‘5px’, because &latex; reads the \numexpr2+3, which is +made up of numbers, and then finds the letter p, which cannot +be part of a number. It therefore terminates the expression and +produces the ‘5’, followed by the regular text ‘px’. + +This termination behavior is useful in comparisons. In +\ifnum\numexpr\parindent*2 < 10pt Yes\else No\fi, the less than +sign terminates the expression and the result is ‘No’ (in a +standard &latex; article). + +Expressions may use the operators +, -, * and +/ along with parentheses for subexpressions, (...). In +glue expressions the plus and minus parts do not need +parentheses to be affected by a factor. So \the\glueexpr 5pt plus +1pt * 2 \relax results in ‘10pt plus 2pt’. + +&tex; will coerce other numerical types in the same way as it does when +doing register assignment. Thus \the\numexpr\dimexpr +1pt\relax\relax will result in ‘65536’, which is 1pt +converted to scaled points (&tex;’s internal unit) and then coerced +into an integer. With a \glueexpr here, the stretch and shrink +would be dropped. Going the other way, a \numexpr inside a +\dimexpr or \glueexpr will need appropriate units, as in +\the\dimexpr\numexpr 1 + 2\relax pt\relax, which produces +‘3.0pt’. + +The details of the arithmetic: each factor is checked to be in the +allowed range, numbers must be less than 2^{31} in absolute +value, and dimensions or glue components must be less than +2^{14} points, or mu, or fil, etc. The +arithmetic operations are performed individually, except for a scaling +operation (a multiplication immediately followed by a division) which +is done as one combined operation with a 64-bit product as +intermediate value. The result of each operation is again checked to +be in the allowed range. + +Finally, division and scaling take place with rounding (unlike &tex;’s +\divide, which truncates). Thus +\the\dimexpr 5pt*(3/2)\relax puts ‘10.0pt’ in the document, +because it rounds 3/2 to 2, while +\the\dimexpr 5pt*(4/3)\relax produces ‘5.0pt’. + + @@ -9307,7 +10375,7 @@ first outputs an empty box whose width is \parindent. These commands are robust (see \protect). Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line. -See \par for the difference between this command and \par. To +See \par, for the difference between this command and \par. To start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted paragraph, use \noindent. @@ -9351,32 +10419,38 @@ look on CTAN for the package indentfirst. \parindent \parskip paragraph indentation +horizontal paragraph indentation vertical space before paragraphs Synopsis: -\setlength{\parskip}{horizontal len} -\setlength{\parinden}{vertical len} +\setlength{\parindent}{horizontal len} +\setlength{\parskip}{vertical len} -Both are a rubber lengths (see Lengths). They give the indentation -of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages -(see minipage), and the vertical space between paragraphs. +Both are rubber lengths (see Lengths). They affect the +indentation of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside +minipages (see minipage), and the vertical space between +paragraphs, respectively. -This, put in the preamble, +For example, if this is put in the preamble: \setlength{\parindent}{0em} \setlength{\parskip}{1ex} -arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented, -but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase -‘x’. +The document will have paragraphs that are not indented, but instead +are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase ‘x’. In standard &latex; documents, the default value for \parindent in one-column documents is 15pt when the default text size is -10pt , 17pt for 11pt, and 1.5em for -12pt. In two-column documents it is 1em. The default -value for \parskip in &latex;’s standard document styles is -0pt plus1pt. +10pt, 17pt for 11pt, and 1.5em for +12pt. In two-column documents it is 1em. (These values +are set before &latex; calls \normalfont so em is derived +from the default font, Computer Modern. If you use a different font +then to set \parindent in units matching that font, do +\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}.) + +The default value for \parskip in &latex;’s standard document +styles is 0pt plus1pt. @@ -9423,8 +10497,9 @@ hyphenation there by beginning left or r These parameters affect the formatting of the note: \marginparpush\marginparpush -Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for -‘12pt’ documents, ‘5pt’ else. +Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for ‘12pt’ +documents, ‘5pt’ else. See also page layout parameters +marginparpush. \marginparsep\marginparsep Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default @@ -9568,9 +10643,9 @@ see their documentation on CTAN. superscript subscript +^ superscript +_ subscript exponent -_ -^ Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of: @@ -9625,7 +10700,7 @@ subscript. subscript something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally attaching to a prior symbols. -Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or +Using the subscript or superscript character outside of math mode or display math mode, as in the expression x^2, will get you the error ‘Missing $ inserted’. @@ -9633,7 +10708,7 @@ the error ‘Missing $ inserted’. mhchem package A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to -typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as +typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that, such as mhchem; see CTAN. @@ -9645,15 +10720,15 @@ typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as symbols, math greek letters -package, symbols -symbols package +package, comprehensive +comprehensive package &latex; provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that -anyone uses. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, -you will get the pi symbol π. See the Comprehensive -&latex; Symbol List at -https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/. +anyone uses. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, +you will get the pi symbol π. See the “Comprehensive +&latex; Symbol List” package at +https://ctan.org/pkg/comprehensive. Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means exhaustive. Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its symbol class, @@ -9738,13 +10813,13 @@ union \cup. (operator). (Note that the name has only one p.) \bigvee\bigvee -⋁ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator). +⋁ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator). \bigwedge\bigwedge -⋀ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator). +⋀ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator). \bot\bot -⊥ Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered +⊥, Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered set, or a contradiction (ordinary). See also \top. \bowtie\bowtie @@ -9779,7 +10854,7 @@ variable-sized operator \bigcirc. ♣ Club card suit (ordinary). \complement\complement -∁ Set complement, used as a superscript as in +∁, Set complement, used as a superscript as in $S^\complement$ (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. Also used: $S^{\mathsf{c}}$ or $\bar{S}$. @@ -9947,8 +11022,8 @@ accents). λ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \land\land -∧ Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for \wedge. -See also logical or \lor. +∧ Logical and (binary). Synonym: \wedge. +See also logical or \lor. \langle\langle ⟨ Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar: @@ -9971,7 +11046,7 @@ shaved off (opening). Matches \rceil. for \leq. \leadsto\leadsto -⇝ Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. +⇝ Squiggly right arrow (relation). To get this symbol outside of math mode you can put \newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}} in the preamble and then use \Leadsto instead. @@ -10009,7 +11084,7 @@ for \le. \lhd\lhd ◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). -Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load +For the normal subgroup symbol you should load amssymb and use \vartriangleleft (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). @@ -10037,15 +11112,16 @@ double-line double-headed arrow \Longleftrightarrow. double-line right arrow \Longrightarrow. \lor\lor -∨ Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge \wedge. +∨ Logical or (binary). Synonym: \vee. +See also logical and \land. \mapsto\mapsto -↦ Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation). +↦ Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar +(relation). Similar: longer version \longmapsto. \mho\mho ℧ Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary). -Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. \mid\mid ∣ Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of @@ -10155,6 +11231,9 @@ of \in. same glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class ordinary. +\Phi\Phi +Φ Uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). + \phi\phi ϕ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varphi φ. @@ -10219,11 +11298,11 @@ double-line, or blackboard bold, R \mathbb{R}; to access this, load the amsfonts package. \restriction\restriction -↾ Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym: +↾, Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym: \upharpoonright. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. \revemptyset\revemptyset -⦰ Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related: +⦰, Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related: \varnothing. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the stix package. \rfloor\rfloor @@ -10232,7 +11311,7 @@ off (closing). Matches \lfloor. \rhd\rhd ◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). -Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead +For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load amssymb and use \vartriangleright (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). @@ -10305,7 +11384,7 @@ union cup. Related: variable-sized operator \bigsqcup. \sqsubset\sqsubset -⊏ Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: +⊏, Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset \subset. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. \sqsubseteq\sqsubseteq @@ -10313,7 +11392,7 @@ subset \subset. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; equal to \subseteq. \sqsupset\sqsupset -⊐ Square superset symbol (relation). Similar: +⊐, Square superset symbol (relation). Similar: superset \supset. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. \sqsupseteq\sqsupseteq @@ -10395,14 +11474,14 @@ relation and so gives better spacing). \unlhd\unlhd ⊴ Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is, -triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For the +triangle, with a line under (binary). For the normal subgroup symbol load amssymb and use \vartrianglelefteq (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). \unrhd\unrhd ⊵ Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is, -triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For the +triangle, with a line under (binary). For the normal subgroup symbol load amssymb and use \vartrianglerighteq (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). @@ -10428,7 +11507,7 @@ arrow \updownarrow. arrow \Updownarrow. \upharpoonright\upharpoonright -↾ Up harpoon, with barb on right side +↾, Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation). Synonym: \restriction. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. @@ -10450,7 +11529,7 @@ more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form membership \in. \vanothing\vanothing -∅ Empty set symbol. Similar: \emptyset. Related: +∅, Empty set symbol. Similar: \emptyset. Related: \revemptyset. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. \varphi\varphi @@ -10486,38 +11565,15 @@ logical and \wedge. Similar: variable-sized operator \bigvee. \Vert\Vert -‖ Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single -bar \vert. - -For a norm symbol, you can use the mathtools package and put in -your preamble -\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}. This gives you -three command variants for double-line vertical bars that are correctly -horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred -version $\norm*{M^\perp}$ then the height of the vertical bars -will match the height of the argument, whereas with -\norm{M^\perp} the bars do not grow with the height of the -argument but instead are the default height, and \norm[size -command]{M^\perp} also gives bars that do not grow but are set to -the size given in the size command, e.g., \Bigg. +‖ Vertical double bar (ordinary). See Delimiters, +for how to use the mathtools package to create flexibly-sized +norm symbols. \vert\vert -| Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line -vertical bar \Vert. For such that, as in the definition of a -set, use \mid because it is a relation. - -For absolute value you can use the mathtools package and in your -preamble put -\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}. This gives you -three command variants for single-line vertical bars that are correctly -horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred -version $\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$ then the height of the -vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with -\abs{\frac{22}{7}} the bars do not grow with the height of -the argument but instead are the default height, and -\abs[size command]{\frac{22}{7}} also gives bars that -do not grow but are set to the size given in the size command, -e.g., \Bigg. +| Single line vertical bar (ordinary). For “such +that”, as in the definition of a set, use \mid because it +is a relation. See Delimiters, for how to use the mathtools +package to create flexibly-sized absolute-value symbols. \wedge\wedge ∧ Logical and (binary). Synonym: \land. See also @@ -10561,62 +11617,38 @@ provides versions to use in mathematical text. - -Blackboard bold - -blackboard bold -doublestruck + +Arrows -Synopsis: - -\usepackage{amssymb} % in preamble - ... -\mathbb{uppercase-letter} - -Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck -letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the -integers, etc. - -Here - -\( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \) - -the \mathbb{N} gives blackboard bold symbol ℕ -representing the natural numbers. - -If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error -but you get strange results, including unexpected characters. - -There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the -capital letters; look on CTAN. - +arrows +symbols, arrows +math, arrows - - -Calligraphic +package, amsfonts +amsfonts package -calligraphic fonts -script fonts -fonts, script +package, latexsym +latexsym package -Synopsis: - -\mathcal{uppercase-letters} - -Use a script-like font. +These are the arrows that come with standard &latex;. The +latexsym and amsfonts packages contain many more. -In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font. +SymbolCommand\Downarrow \downarrow \hookleftarrow \hookrightarrow \leftarrow \Leftarrow \Leftrightarrow \leftrightarrow \longleftarrow \Longleftarrow \longleftrightarrow \Longleftrightarrow \longmapsto \Longrightarrow \longrightarrow \mapsto \nearrow \nwarrow \Rightarrow \rightarrow, or \to \searrow \swarrow \uparrow \Uparrow \updownarrow \Updownarrow +An example of the difference between \to and \mapsto +is: \( f\colon D\to C \) given by \( n\mapsto n^2 \). -Let the graph be \( \mathcal{G} \). - -If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not get -an error. Instead you get unexpected output. For instance, -\mathcal{g} outputs a close curly brace symbol, while -\mathcal{+} outputs a plus sign. +package, amscd +amscd package + +package, tikz-cd +tikz-cd package + +For commutative diagrams there are a number of packages, including +tikz-cd and amscd. - + <literal>\boldmath</literal> & <literal>\unboldmath</literal> boldface mathematics @@ -10671,47 +11703,384 @@ we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$ - -Dots, horizontal or vertical + +Blackboard bold -ellipses -dots +blackboard bold +doublestruck -Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern -continues. +Synopsis: -\begin{array}{cccc} - a_{0,0} &a_{0,1} &a_{0,2} &\ldots \\ - a_{1,0} &\ddots \\ - \vdots -\end{array} +\usepackage{amssymb} % in preamble + ... +\mathbb{uppercase-letter} -&latex; provides these. - -\cdots\cdots -Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line, as -in ⋯. Used as: \( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} -\). +Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck +letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the +integers, etc. -\ddots\ddots -Diagonal ellipsis, ⋱. See the above array example for a -usage. +Here -\ldots\ldots -Ellipsis on the baseline, …. Used as: \( -x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \). Another example is the above array example. A -synonym is \mathellipsis. A synonym from the amsmath -package is \hdots. +\( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \) + +the \mathbb{N} gives blackboard bold symbol ℕ, +representing the natural numbers. -You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in -The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken. (In a paragraph -mode or LR mode a synonym for \ldots is \dots.) +If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error +but you get strange results, including unexpected characters. -\vdots\vdots -Vertical ellipsis, ⋮. See the above array example for a -usage. +There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the +capital letters; look on CTAN. - + + + +Calligraphic + +calligraphic fonts +script fonts +fonts, script + +Synopsis: + +\mathcal{uppercase-letters} + +Use a script-like font. + +In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font. + +Let the graph be \( \mathcal{G} \). + +If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not get +an error but you also do not get math calligraphic output. For instance, +\mathcal{g} outputs a close curly brace symbol. + + + + +Delimiters + +delimiters +parentheses +braces +curly braces +brackets + +Delimiters are parentheses, braces, or other characters used to mark +the start and end of subformulas. This formula has three sets of +parentheses delimiting the three subformulas. + +(z-z_0)^2 = (x-x_0)^2 + (y-y_0)^2 + +The delimiters do not need to match, so you can enter \( [0,1) \). + +Here are the common delimiters: + +DelimiterCommandName +( ( Left parenthesis +) ) Right parenthesis +\} { or \lbrace Left brace +\{ } or \rbrace Right brace +[ [ or \lbrack Left bracket +] ] or \rbrack Right bracket +\lfloor Left floor bracket +\rfloor Right floor bracket +\lceil Left ceiling bracket +\rceil Right ceiling bracket +\langle Left angle bracket +\rangle Right angle bracket +/ / Slash, or forward slash +\ \backslash Reverse slash, or backslash +| | or \vert Vertical bar +\| or \Vert Double vertical bar + +package, mathtools +mathtools package + +The mathtools package allows you to create commands for paired +delimiters. For instance, if you put +\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert} in your preamble +then you get two commands for single-line vertical bars (they only work +in math mode). The starred version, such as +\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}, has the height of the vertical bars +match the height of the argument. The unstarred version, such as +\abs{\frac{22}{7}}, has the bars fixed at a default height. +This version accepts an optional argument, as in \abs[size +command]{\frac{22}{7}}, where the height of the bars is given in +size command, such as \Bigg. Using \lVert and +\rVert as the symbols will give you a norm symbol with the same +behavior. + + + + +<literal>\left</literal> & <literal>\right</literal> + +delimiters, paired +paired delimiters +matching parentheses +matching brackets +null delimiter +\left +\right + + + +Synopsis: + +\left delimiter1 ... \right delimiter2 + +Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. &latex; makes +the delimiters tall enough to just cover the size of the formula that +they enclose. + +This makes a unit vector surrounded by parentheses tall enough to cover +the entries. + +\begin{equation} + \left(\begin{array}{c} + 1 \\ + 0 \\ + \end{array}\right) +\end{equation} + +See Delimiters, for a list of the common delimiters. + +Every \left must have a matching \right. In the above +example, leaving out the \left( gets the error message +‘Extra \right’. Leaving out the \right) gets ‘You +can't use `\eqno' in math mode’. + +package, amsmath +amsmath package + +package, mathtools +mathtools package + +However, delimiter1 and delimiter2 need not match. A common +case is that you want an unmatched brace, as below. Use a period, +‘.’, as a null delimiter. + +\begin{equation} + f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll} + 1 &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\ + f(n-1)+3n^2 &\mbox{--else} + \end{array}\right. +\end{equation} + +Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a +backslash, \{. (The packages amsmath and +mathtools allow you to get the above construct through in a +cases environment.) + +The \left ... \right pair make a group. One consequence is that +the formula enclosed in the \left ... \right pair cannot have +line breaks in the output. This includes both manual line breaks and +&latex;-generated automatic ones. In this example, &latex; breaks the +equation to make the formula fit the margins. + +Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet +\( (a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q+r+s+t+u+v+w+x+y+z) \) + +But with \left and \right + +Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet +\( \left(a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q+r+s+t+u+v+w+x+y+z\right) \) + +&latex; won’t break the line, causing the formula to extend into the +margin. + +Because \left ... \right make a group, all the usual grouping +rules hold. Here, the value of \testlength set inside the +equation will be forgotten, and the output is ‘1.2pt’. + +\newlength{\testlength} \setlength{\testlength}{1.2pt} +\begin{equation} + \left( a+b=c \setlength{\testlength}{3.4pt} \right) + \the\testlength +\end{equation} + +The \left ... \right pair affect the horizontal spacing of the +enclosed formula, in two ways. The first is that in \( \sin(x) = +\sin\left(x\right) \) the one after the equals sign has more space +around the x. That’s because \left( ... \right) inserts +an inner node while ( ... ) inserts an opening node. The second +way that the pair affect the horizontal spacing is that because they +form a group, the enclosed subformula will be typeset at its natural +width, with no stretching or shrinking to make the line fit better. + +&tex; scales the delimiters according to the height and depth of the +contained formula. Here &latex; grows the brackets to extend the full +height of the integral. + +\begin{equation} + \left[ \int_{x=r_0}^{\infty} -G\frac{Mm}{r^2}\, dr \right] +\end{equation} + +Manual sizing is often better. For instance, although below the rule +has no depth, &tex; will create delimiters that extend far below the +rule. + +\begin{equation} + \left( \rule{1pt}{1cm} \right) +\end{equation} + +&tex; can choose delimiters that are too small, as in \( \left| +|x|+|y| \right| \). It can also choose delimiters that are too large, +as here. + +\begin{equation} + \left( \sum_{0\leq i<n} i^k \right) +\end{equation} + +A third awkward case is when a long displayed formula is on more than +one line and you must match the sizes of the opening and closing +delimiter; you can’t use \left on the first line and +\right on the last because they must be paired. + +To size the delimiters manually, see \bigl & \bigr etc.. + + + + +<literal>\bigl</literal>, <literal>\bigr</literal>, etc. + +Synopsis, one of: + +\bigldelimiter1 ... \bigrdelimiter2 +\Bigldelimiter1 ... \bigrdelimiter2 +\biggldelimiter1 ... \biggrdelimiter2 +\Biggldelimiter1 ... \Biggrdelimiter2 + +(as with \bigl[...\bigr]; strictly speaking they need not be +paired, see below), or one of: + +\bigmdelimiter +\Bigmdelimiter +\biggmdelimiter +\Biggmdelimiter + +(as with \bigm|), or one of: + +\bigdelimiter +\Bigdelimiter +\biggdelimiter +\Biggdelimiter + +(as with \big[). + +Produce manually-sized delimiters. For delimiters that are +automatically sized see \left & \right). + +This produces slightly larger outer vertical bars. + + \bigl| |x|+|y| \bigr| + +The commands above are listed in order of increasing size. You can use +the smallest size such as \bigl...\bigr in a paragraph without +causing &latex; to spread the lines apart. The larger sizes are meant +for displayed equations. + +See Delimiters, for a list of the common delimiters. In the family of +commands with ‘l’ and ‘r’, delimiter1 and +delimiter2 need not be the same. + +The ‘l’ and ‘r’ commands produce open and close delimiters +that insert no horizontal space between a preceding atom and the +delimiter, while the commands without ‘l’ and ‘r’ insert some +space (because each delimiter is set as an ordinary variable). Compare +these two. + + +\begin{tabular}{l} + \(\displaystyle \sin\biggl(\frac{1}{2}\biggr) \) \\ % good + \(\displaystyle \sin\bigg(\frac{1}{2}\bigg) \) \\ % bad +\end{tabular} + +The traditional typographic treatment is on the first line. On the +second line the output will have some extra space between the +\sin and the open parenthesis. + +Commands without ‘l’ or ‘r’ do give correct spacing in +some circumstances, as with this large vertical line + +\begin{equation} + \int_{x=a}^b x^2\,dx = \frac{1}{3} x^3 \Big|_{x=a}^b +\end{equation} + +package, amsmath +amsmath package + +(many authors would replace \frac with the \tfrac command +from the amsmath package), and as with this larger slash. + +\begin{equation} + \lim_{n\to\infty}\pi(n) \big/ (n/\log n) = 1 +\end{equation} + +Unlike the \left...\right pair (see \left & \right), the +commands here with ‘l’ and ‘r’ do not make a group. +Strictly speaking they need not be matched so you can write something +like this. + +\begin{equation} + \Biggl[ \pi/6 ] +\end{equation} + +The commands with ‘m’ are for relations, which are in the middle of +formulas, as here. + +\begin{equation} + \biggl\{ a\in B \biggm| a=\sum_{0\leq i<n}3i^2+4 \biggr\} +\end{equation} + + + + + + + + +Dots, horizontal or vertical + +ellipses +dots + +Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern +continues. + +\begin{array}{cccc} + a_{0,0} &a_{0,1} &a_{0,2} &\ldots \\ + a_{1,0} &\ddots \\ + \vdots +\end{array} + +&latex; provides these. + +\cdots\cdots +Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line, as +in ⋯. Used as: \( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} +\). + +\ddots\ddots +Diagonal ellipsis, ⋱. See the above array example for a +usage. + +\ldots\ldots +Ellipsis on the baseline, …. Used as: \( +x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \). Another example is the above array example. A +synonym is \mathellipsis. A synonym from the amsmath +package is \hdots. + +You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in +The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken. (In a paragraph +mode or LR mode a synonym for \ldots is \dots.) + +\vdots\vdots +Vertical ellipsis, ⋮. See the above array example for a +usage. + + package, amsmath amsmath package @@ -10738,6 +12107,52 @@ or relation symbol, \dotsi for dots with integrals, or \dotso for others. + + +Greek letters + +Greek letters + +The upper case versions of these Greek letters are only shown when they +differ from Roman upper case letters. + +SymbolCommandNameα\alphaAlpha +β\betaBeta +γ, Γ\gamma, \GammaGamma +δ, Δ\delta, \DeltaDelta +ε, ϵ\varepsilon, \epsilonEpsilon +ζ\zetaZeta +η\etaEta +θ, ϑ\theta, \varthetaTheta +ι\iotaIota +κ\kappaKappa +λ, Λ\lambda, \LambdaLambda +μ\muMu +ν\nuNu +ξ, Ξ\xi, \XiXi +π, Π\pi, \PiPi +ρ, ϱ\rho, \varrhoRho +σ, Σ\sigma, \SigmaSigma +τ\tauTau +ϕ, φ, Φ\phi, \varphi, \PhiPhi +χ\chichi +ψ, Ψ\psi, \PsiPsi +ω, Ω\omega, \OmegaOmega + +package, unicode-math +unicode-math package + +For omicron, if you are using &latex;’s default Computer Modern font +then enter omicron just as ‘o’ or ‘O’. If you like having the +name or if your font shows a difference then you can use something like +\newcommand\omicron{o}. The package unicode-math has +\upomicron for upright omicron and \mitomicron for math +italic. + +While the set membership relation symbol ∈ generated by +\in is related to epsilon, it is never used for a variable. + + @@ -11009,9 +12424,9 @@ normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter y=m x then &latex; ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x, as y=mx. -But &latex;’s rules sometimes need tweaking. For example, in an +But &latex;’s rules occasionally need tweaking. For example, in an integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the -f(x) and the dx, here done with the \, command. +f(x) and the dx, here done with the \, command: \int_0^1 f(x)\,dx @@ -11025,8 +12440,15 @@ a ‘M’. \; \; \thickspace -Synonym: \thickspace. Normally 5.0mu plus 5.0mu. Math -mode only. +Synonym: \thickspace. Normally 5.0mu plus 5.0mu. +With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be +used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only. + +\negthickspace +\negthickspace +Normally -5.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu. +With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be +used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only. \: \> @@ -11034,7 +12456,14 @@ mode only. \> \medspace Synonym: \medspace. Normally 4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu. -Math mode only. +With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be +used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only. + +\negmedspace +\negmedspace +Normally -4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu. +With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be +used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only. \, \, @@ -11057,9 +12486,11 @@ this, before punctuation in a displayed equation. \! \negthinspace thin space, negative -A negative thin space. Normally -3mu. The \! command is -math mode only but the \negthinspace command is available for -text mode (see \thinspace & \negthinspace). +A negative thin space. Normally -3mu. +With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be +used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, +The \! command is math mode only but the \negthinspace +command has always worked in text mode (see \thinspace & \negthinspace). \quad quad @@ -11169,23 +12600,31 @@ control over smashing a subformula box. The \phantom command creates a box with the same height, depth, and width as subformula, but empty. That is, this command causes -&latex; to typeset the box but not its ink. The \vphantom -variant also produces an invisible box with the same height and depth as -subformula, but it has width zero. And \hphantom makes a -box with the same width as subformula but with height and depth -zero. - -Without the \vphantom in this example, the top bars of the two -square roots would be at different heights. +&latex; to typeset the space but not fill it with the material. Here +&latex; will put a box of the right size for the quotation, but empty. -\( \sqrt{\vphantom{a^3}a}\cdot\sqrt{a^3} \) +\fbox{\phantom{Conservatism is the fear-filled worship of dead radicals. + --- Mark Twain}} -The \vphantom{a^3} causes the first \sqrt to have inside -it a box of the same height as the second \sqrt, so &latex; -makes the bars align. +The \vphantom variant produces an invisible box with the same +vertical size as subformula, the same height and depth, but having +zero width. And \hphantom makes a box with the same width as +subformula but with zero height and depth. -These commands often are combined with \smash. See \smash -for another example of the use of \vphantom. +In this example, the tower of exponents in the second summand expression +is so tall that &tex; places this expression further down than its +default. Without adjustment, the two summand expressions would be at +different levels. The \vphantom in the first expression tells +&tex; to leave as much vertical room as it does for the tower, so the +two expressions come out at the same level. + +\begin{displaymath} + \sum_{j\in\{0,\ldots\, 10\}\vphantom{3^{3^{3^j}}}} + \sum_{i\in\{0,\ldots\, 3^{3^{3^j}}\}} i\cdot j +\end{displaymath} + +These commands are often used in conjunction with \smash. +See \smash, which includes another example of \vphantom. package, mathtools mathtools package @@ -11212,6 +12651,37 @@ mode. So if one of these starts a paragraph then you should prefix it with \leavevmode. + + +<literal>\mathstrut</literal> + +\mathstrut +spacing, math mode +vertical spacing +math mode, spacing +invisible character +character, invisible + +Synopsis: + +\mathstrut + +The analogue of \strut for mathematics. See \strut. + +The input $\sqrt{x} + \sqrt{x^i}$ gives output where the +second radical is taller than the first. To add extra vertical space +without any horizontal space, so that the two have the same height, use +$\sqrt{x\mathstrut} + \sqrt{x^i\mathstrut}$. + +The \mathstrut command adds the vertical height of an open +parenthesis, (, but no horizontal space. It is defined as +\vphantom{(}, so see \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom for +more. An advantage over \strut is that \mathstrut adds no +depth, which is often the right thing for formulas. Using the height of +an open parenthesis is just a convention; for complete control over the +amount of space, use \rule with a width of zero. See \rule. + + @@ -11227,9 +12697,8 @@ some that don’t fit into other categories. Colon character <literal>:</literal> & <literal>\colon</literal> -: colon character -: +: for math \colon Synopsis, one of: @@ -11299,52 +12768,7 @@ mode it comes out small; see the discussion of \displaystyle - -<literal>\left</literal> & <literal>\right</literal> - -delimiters, paired -paired delimiters -matching parentheses -matching brackets -null delimiter -\left -\right - -Synopsis: - -\left delimiter1 ... \right delimiter2 - -Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. The delimiters -are sized according to the math they enclose. This makes a unit vector -surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses. - -\begin{equation} - \left(\begin{array}{c} - 1 \\ - 0 \\ - \end{array}\right) - -Every \left must have a matching \right. Leaving out the -\left( in the above gets ‘Extra \right’. Leaving off the -\right) gets ‘You can't use `\eqno' in math mode’. - -However, the two delimiters delimiter1 and delimiter2 need -not match. A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as -below. Use a period, ‘.’, as a null delimiter. - -\begin{equation} - f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll} - 1 &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\ - f(n-1)+3n^2 &\mbox{--else} - \end{array}\right. -\end{equation} - -Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a -backslash, \{. - - - - + <literal>\sqrt</literal> square root @@ -11368,7 +12792,7 @@ a large enough arg, it is vertical). - + <literal>\stackrel</literal> stack math @@ -11509,7 +12933,7 @@ styles. See its documentation on CTAN. Generate a title. In the standard classes the title appears on a separate page, except in the article class where it is at the top -of the first page. (See Document class options for information about +of the first page. (See Document class options, for information about the titlepage document class option.) This example shows \maketitle appearing in its usual place, @@ -11823,7 +13247,7 @@ measurement such as points (see Lengths/em \qquad\includegraphics{mensmile.png} \end{center} -See Spacing in math mode for \quad and \qquad. These +See Spacing in math mode, for \quad and \qquad. These are lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice in many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with \hspace. @@ -12095,7 +13519,7 @@ The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring \frenchspacing -(the command is from Plain &tex;) switches to the tradition that all +(the command is from plain &tex;) switches to the tradition that all spaces are treated equally. @@ -12121,7 +13545,9 @@ spaces are treated equally. \NEWLINE \SPACE +\ (backslash-space) \TAB +\SPACE This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a backslash followed by a space. Synopsis: @@ -12156,7 +13582,7 @@ in \TeX\ is nice. (But using curly parentheses, as in \TeX{} is best, has the advantage of still working if the next character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in So -says Prof.\ Smith (see \@). +says Prof.\ Smith or Jones et al.\ (1993) (see \@). Under normal circumstances, \tab and \newline are equivalent to backslash-space, \ . @@ -12172,8 +13598,9 @@ are equivalent to backslash-space, \ . ~ tie -space, hard space, unbreakable +hard space +unbreakable space NBSP Synopsis: @@ -12192,16 +13619,21 @@ space has length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus In addition, despite the period, &latex; does not use the end-of-sentence spacing (see \@). -Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could cause -confusion. But they also reduce &latex;’s options when it breaks lines -into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters of -taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers. Nevertheless, -here are some usage models, many of them from the &tex;book. +Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could +cause confusion. They also still allow hyphenation (of either of the +tied words), so they are generally preferable to putting consecutive +words in an \mbox (see \mbox & \makebox). + +They are also matters of taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, +among readers. Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them +from The &tex;book. Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references: Chapter~12, or Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}, or -Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}. When cases are enumerated inline: -(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded. +Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}. + +When cases are enumerated inline: (b)~Show that $f(x)$ is +(1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded. package, siunitx siunitx package @@ -12209,10 +13641,12 @@ here are some usage models, many of them from the &tex;book. Between a number and its unit: $745.7.8$~watts (the siunitx package has a special facility for this) or 144~eggs. This includes between a month and a date: -October~12 or 12~Oct. In general, in any expressions where -numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space: +October~12 or 12~Oct. In general, in any expressions +where numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space: AD~565, or 2:50~pm, or Boeing~747, or -268~Plains Road, or \$$1.4$~billion. +268~Plains Road, or \$$1.4$~billion. Other common +choices here are a thin space (see \thinspace & \negthinspace) and +no space at all. When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: equals~$n$, or less than~$\epsilon$, or given~$X$, or modulo~$p^e$ @@ -12226,13 +13660,11 @@ common with~$m$. Between symbols in series: $1$,~$2$, or~$3$ or $1$,~$2$, \ldots,~$n$. -Between a person’s forenames and between multiple surnames: +Between a person’s given names and between multiple surnames: Donald~E. Knuth, or Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo, or -Charles~XII (but you must give TeX places to break the line so -you may do Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin). - -Before a dash: pages 12~--14 or it is~--- it must be -said~--- plausible. +Charles~XII—but you must give &tex; places to break the line +so you might do Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la +Vall\'ee~Poussin. @@ -12252,23 +13684,29 @@ said~--- plausible. \thinspace \negthinspace -Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6em and --1/6em. These are the text mode equivalents of \, and -\! (see Spacing in math mode/\thinspace). You can use -\, as a synonym for \thinspace in text mode. +These produce unbreakable and unstretchable spaces of 1/6em and +-1/6em, respectively. These are the text mode equivalents of +\, and \! (see Spacing in math mode/\thinspace). -The \negthinspace command is used in text mode mostly for -fiddling with spaces. One common use of \thinspace is as the -space between nested quotes. +You can use \, as a synonym for \thinspace in text mode. + +One common use of \thinspace is as the space between nested +quotes: Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace'' Another use is that some style guides call for a \thinspace between an ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides, -though, think the three dots are quite enough already). Still another -use is between initials, as in D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth. +think the three dots and/or four dots are plenty). Another +style-specific use is between initials, as in D.\thinspace E.\ +Knuth. + +&latex; provides a variety of similar spacing commands +(see Spacing in math mode). With amsmath, or as of the +2020-10-01 &latex; release, they can be used in text mode as well as +math mode, including \! for \negthinspace; before that, +they were available only in math mode. - <literal>\/</literal> @@ -12281,32 +13719,45 @@ use is between initials, as in D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth. before-character\/after-character Insert an italic correction, a small space defined by the font -designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with -whatever follows. When you use \/, &latex; takes the correction -from the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been -applied to the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space. +designer for each character (possibly zero), to avoid the character +colliding with whatever follows. When you use \/, &latex; +takes the correction from the font metric file, scales it by any +scaling that has been applied to the font, and then inserts that much +horizontal space. Here, were it not for the \/, the before-character italic f would hit the after-character roman H \newcommand{\companylogo}{{\it f}\/H} -because the italic letter leans far to the right. +because the italic letter f leans far to the right. If after-character is a period or comma then don’t insert an -italic correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small -height. However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal -letters, the italic correction can help. +italic correction since those punctuation symbols are so low to the +baseline already. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as with +normal letters, the italic correction can help. It is typically used +between a switch from italic or slanted fonts to an upright font. + +When you use commands such as \emph and \textit and +\textsl to change fonts, &latex; automatically inserts the +italic correction when needed (see Font styles). However, +declarations such as \em and \itshape and +\slshape do not automatically insert italic corrections. -When you use commands such as \textit or \itshape to -change fonts, &latex; will automatically insert any needed italic -correction (see Font styles). +Upright characters can also have an italic correction. An example +where this is needed is the name pdf\/\TeX. However, most +upright characters have a zero italic correction. Some font creators +do not include italic correction values even for italic fonts. -Roman characters can also have an italic correction. An example is in -the name pdf\/\TeX. +\fontdimen1 +font dimension, slant +Technically, &latex; uses another font-specific value, the so-called +slant parameter (namely \fontdimen1), to determine whether to +possibly insert an italic correction, rather than tying the action to +particular font commands. -There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done -in a different way. +There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; math spacing is +done in a different way. @@ -12566,7 +14017,7 @@ or minus component (see Lengths -(See \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip for common inter-paragraph +(See \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, for common inter-paragraph spaces.) The *-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More @@ -12676,7 +14127,7 @@ The two rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the Now uncomment the second \addvspace. It does not make the gap 20pt longer; instead the gap is the sum of \baselineskip and 20pt. So \addvspace in a sense does the opposite of -its name — it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not +its name—it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not accumulate, but instead that only the largest one is used. &latex; uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below @@ -12702,6 +14153,9 @@ with a \par command (see \par At its core, &latex; puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a page. So these commands are central. +package, adjustbox +adjustbox package + There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating boxes. One useful adjunct to the commands here is adjustbox. @@ -12730,11 +14184,11 @@ LR mode (see Modes) so it is not broken into lines. Because text is not broken into lines, you can use \mbox to prevent hyphenation. In this example, &latex; will not hyphenate -the table name, ‘T-4’. +the tank name, ‘T-34’. -See Table~\mbox{T-4} +The soviet tank \mbox{T-34} is a symbol of victory against nazism. -The first two command versions, \mbox and \makebox, are +The first two command synopsis versions, \mbox and \makebox, are roughly equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the text. (They are like plain &tex;’s \hbox.) @@ -12757,7 +14211,7 @@ size you can say this. \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher} -For the fourth command version the optional argument position +For the fourth command synopsis version the optional argument position gives position of the text within the box. It may take the following values: @@ -12791,12 +14245,11 @@ puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions. package, Asymptote Asymptote package -The right edge of the output ‘10 points ’ (note the ending space) -will be just before the ‘What’ (note the space after -‘points’). You can use \makebox similarly when making -graphics, such as in TikZ or Asymptote, where you put the -edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the length of that -text. +The right edge of the output ‘10 points ’ (note the ending space +after ‘points’) will be just before the ‘What’. You can use +\makebox similarly when making graphics, such as in TikZ +or Asymptote, where you put the edge of the text at a known +location, regardless of the length of that text. For boxes with frames see \fbox & \framebox. For colors see Colored boxes. @@ -12805,11 +14258,12 @@ see Colored boxes. picture environment, where the length is given in terms of \unitlength (see \makebox (picture)). -If you put a double-backslash into text then &latex; will not -give you a new line; for instance \makebox{abc def \\ ghi} -outputs ‘abc defghi’ while \makebox{abc def \par ghi} -outputs ‘abc def ghi’, but neither go to a second line. To get -multiple lines see \parbox and minipage. +As text is typeset in LR mode, neither a double backslash +\\ nor \par will give you a new line; for instance +\makebox{abc def \\ ghi} outputs ‘abc defghi’ while +\makebox{abc def \par ghi} outputs ‘abc def ghi’, both on +a single line. To get multiple lines see \parbox +and minipage. @@ -12841,7 +14295,7 @@ a frame. \framebox{...}, are roughly the same. As to the third and fourth invocations, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as width and the position of the text inside that box as -position. See \mbox & \makebox for the full description but +position. See \mbox & \makebox, for the full description but here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4in wide. \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}} @@ -12884,7 +14338,7 @@ paragraph, and then frame the result. And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that. \end{minipage}} -See Colored boxes for colors other than black and white. +See Colored boxes, for colors other than black and white. The picture environment has a version of this command where the units depend on picture’s \unitlength (see \framebox @@ -12933,10 +14387,10 @@ in that box. It should not have any paragraph-making components. There are three optional arguments, position, height, and inner-pos. The position gives the vertical alignment of the -parbox with respect to the surrounding material. The possible +parbox with respect to the surrounding material. The supported values are c or m to make the vertical center of the -parbox lines up with the center of the adjacent line (this is the -default), or t to match the top line of the parbox with +parbox lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (this is the +default), or t to match the top line of the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding material, or b to match the bottom line. @@ -12965,11 +14419,11 @@ stretchable space). Raise or lower text. This command is fragile (see \protect). -This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by -lowering the vertical bar symbol. +This example makes a command for denoting the restriction of a function +by lowering the vertical bar symbol. -\newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}} +\newcommand*\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}} $f\restricted{A}$ The first mandatory argument distance specifies how far to raise @@ -12991,7 +14445,7 @@ depth). This will align two graphics on their top (see Graphics). -\usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc} % in preamble +\usepackage{graphicx,calc} % in preamble ... \begin{center} \raisebox{1ex-\height}{% @@ -13022,44 +14476,44 @@ second is the height of meta.png. Typeset text just as with \makebox (see \mbox & \makebox) except that &latex; does not output it but instead saves it -in a storage bin named box-cmd. The bin name box-cmd begins -with a backslash, \. You must have previously allocated the bin -box-cmd with \newsavebox (see \newsavebox).The -\sbox command is robust while \savebox is fragile -(see \protect). +in a box register referred to by a variable named box-cmd. The +variable name box-cmd begins with a backslash, \. You must +have previously allocated the box register box-cmd with \newsavebox +(see \newsavebox). The \sbox command is robust while +\savebox is fragile (see \protect). -This creates and uses a bin. +This creates and uses a box register. \newsavebox{\fullname} \sbox{\fullname}{John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt} ... \usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too! Whenever we go out, the people always shout! -There goes \\usebox{\fullname}! Ya da da da da da da. +There goes \usebox{\fullname}! Ya da da da da da da. -One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a \newcommand is -efficiency, that &latex; need not repeatedly retypeset the contents. -See the example below. +One advantage of using and reusing a box register over a +\newcommand macro variable is efficiency, that &latex; need not +repeatedly retypeset the contents. See the example below. The first two command invocations, \sbox{box-cmd}{text} and \savebox{box-cmd}{text}, are roughly equivalent. As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as width, and the position of the text inside that -box as position. See \mbox & \makebox for the full +box as position. See \mbox & \makebox, for the full description. In the \sbox and \savebox commands the text is typeset in LR mode so it does not have line breaks (see Modes). If you use these then &latex; doesn’t give you an error but it ignores -what you want: if you enter \sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test} and -\usebox{\newbin} then you get ‘testtest’, while if you -enter \sbox{\newbin}{test \par test} and -\usebox{\newbin} then you get ‘test test’, but no error or +what you want: if you enter \sbox{\newreg}{test \\ test} and +\usebox{\newreg} then you get ‘testtest’, while if you +enter \sbox{\newreg}{test \par test} and +\usebox{\newreg} then you get ‘test test’, but no error or warning. To fix this use a \parbox or minipage as here. -\savebox{\abin}{% +\savebox{\areg}{% \begin{minipage}{\linewidth} \begin{enumerate} \item First item @@ -13067,15 +14521,15 @@ warning. To fix this use a \parbox or minipage -As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin’s contents, this puts +As an example of the efficiency of reusing a register’s contents, this puts the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the header. &latex; only typesets it once. \usepackage{graphicx} % all this in the preamble -\newsavebox{\sealbin} -\savebox{\sealbin}{% +\newsavebox{\sealreg} +\savebox{\sealreg}{% \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}% \begin{picture}(0,0)% \put(1.5,-2.5){% @@ -13085,13 +14539,13 @@ header. &latex; only typesets it once. \end{tabular}} \end{picture}% } -\markright{\usebox{\sealbin}} +\markright{\usebox{\sealreg}} \pagestyle{headings} The picture environment is good for fine-tuning the placement. -If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like -‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \nobin’. +If the register \noreg has not already been defined then you get something like +‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \noreg’. @@ -13106,25 +14560,26 @@ header. &latex; only typesets it once. text \end{lrbox} -The text inside the environment is saved in the bin -box-cmd. The box-cmd must begin with a -backslash. You must create this bin in advance with \newsavebox -(see \newsavebox). This is the environment form of the \sbox -and \savebox commands, and is equivalent to them. See \sbox & -\savebox for the full information. +This is the environment form of the \sbox and \savebox +commands, and is equivalent to them. for the full description, +See \sbox & \savebox. -In this example the environment is convenient for entering the -tabular. +The text inside the environment is saved in the box register +referred to by variable box-cmd. The variable name +box-cmd must begin with a backslash, \. You must allocate +this box register in advance with \newsavebox +(see \newsavebox). In this example the environment is convenient +for entering the tabular. -\newsavebox{\jhbin} -\begin{lrbox}{\jhbin} +\newsavebox{\jhreg} +\begin{lrbox}{\jhreg} \begin{tabular}{c} \includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\ Jim Hef{}feron \end{tabular} \end{lrbox} ... -\usebox{\jhbin} +\usebox{\jhreg} @@ -13138,11 +14593,11 @@ and \savebox commands, and is equivalent to them. See \usebox{box-cmd} -Produce the box most recently saved in the bin box-cmd by the -commands \sbox or \savebox, or the lrbox -environment. See \sbox & \savebox for more information and examples. -(Note that box-cmd starts with a backslash.) This command is -robust (see \protect). +Produce the box most recently saved in the box register box-cmd by +the commands \sbox or \savebox, or the lrbox +environment. For more information and examples, See \sbox & +\savebox. (Note that the variable name box-cmd starts with a +backslash, \.) This command is robust (see \protect). @@ -13365,9 +14820,9 @@ but sometimes you want a one-off. Those are the second forms in the synopses. Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and -{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team. +{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37}Gold} for the team. -The format of color specification depends on the color model +The format of color specification depends on the color model (see Color models). For instance, while rgb takes three numbers, gray takes only one. @@ -13545,7 +15000,7 @@ rectangle (unless another size is specified in the \includegraphics command). draft -For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead the file name is +For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead its file name is printed in a box of the correct size. In order to determine the size, the file must be present. @@ -13580,11 +15035,6 @@ option has &latex; to read the size from the latter. graphics graphics package configuration, graphics package -EPS files -JPEG files -JPG files -PDF graphic files -PNG files These commands configure the way &latex; searches the file system for the graphic. @@ -13604,15 +15054,16 @@ the documentation in grfguide.pdf, or the &latex; source, o Synopsis: -\graphicspath{list of dir names inside curly brackets} +\graphicspath{list of directories inside curly braces} Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files. This allows you to later say something like \includegraphics{lion.png} instead of having to give its path. -&latex; always looks for graphic files first in the current directory. -The declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory -pix, and then ../pix. +&latex; always looks for graphic files first in the current directory +(and the output directory, if specified; see output directory). +The declaration below tells the system to then look in the +subdirectory pix, and then ../pix. \usepackage{graphicx} % or graphics; put in preamble ... @@ -13642,7 +15093,7 @@ current directory, \usepackage{lion.png} for each of the listed directories, &latex; concatenates it with the -file name and searches for the result, checking for pix/lion.png +filename and searches for the result, checking for pix/lion.png and then ../pix/lion.png. This algorithm means that the \graphicspath command does not recursively search subdirectories: if you issue \graphicspath{{a/}} and the graphic is in @@ -13688,7 +15139,7 @@ files. ... \includegraphics{lion} % will find lion.png before lion.pdf -Because the file name lion does not have a period, &latex; uses +Because the filename lion does not have a period, &latex; uses the extension list. For each directory in the graphics path (see \graphicspath), &latex; will try the extensions in the order given. If it does not find such a file after trying all the directories @@ -13704,8 +15155,13 @@ platform is not case sensitive. your document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example, the most recent pdftex.def has this extension list. -.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2 +.pdf,.png,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PDF,.PNG,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2 +package, grfext +grfext package + +To change the order, use the grfext package. + You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it more than once. Show its value with \makeatletter\typeout{\Gin@extensions}\makeatother. @@ -13743,7 +15199,7 @@ extension not covered by another rule, so it covers filename.1extension The file extension to which this rule applies. The extension is anything after and including the first dot in the filename. Use the Kleene star, -*, to denote the default behaviour for all undeclared extensions. +*, to denote the default behavior for all undeclared extensions. type The type of file involved. This type is a string that must be defined @@ -13773,7 +15229,7 @@ other format is available.) command A command that will be applied to the -file. This is very often left blank. This command must start with a +file. This is very often left empty. This command must start with a single backward quote. Thus, \DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c #1} specifies that any file with the extension .eps.gz should @@ -13853,10 +15309,10 @@ is \includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}. The \includegraphics{filename} command decides on the type of graphic by splitting filename on the first dot. You can -use filename with no dot, as in \includegraphics{turing} -and then &latex; tries a sequence of extensions such as .png and -.pdf until it finds a file with that extension -(see \DeclareGraphicsExtensions). +instead use filename with no dot, as in +\includegraphics{turing}, and then &latex; tries a sequence of +extensions such as .png and .pdf until it finds a file +with that extension (see \DeclareGraphicsExtensions). If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can hide them with curly braces, as in @@ -13865,7 +15321,7 @@ the graphicx package then you can use the options ext; see below. This and other filename issues are also handled with the package grffile. -This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so &latex; can +This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so &latex; can move it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward (see figure). @@ -13931,8 +15387,10 @@ two will end with different widths and heights. There are many options. The primary ones are listed first. +bounding box +box, bounding Note that a graphic is placed by &latex; into a box, which is -traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the +traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic’s printed area may go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when &latex; makes up a page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the @@ -13944,7 +15402,7 @@ is \includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}. You can use the standa &tex; dimensions (see Units of length) and also convenient is \linewidth, or in a two-column document, \columnwidth (see Page layout parameters). An example is that by using the -calc package you can make the graphic be 1 cm narrow than +calc package you can make the graphic be 1 cm narrower than the width of the text with \includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}. @@ -13957,7 +15415,7 @@ layout parameters). For instance, the command graphic a quarter of the height of the text area. totalheight -The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus +The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus depth. This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated. For instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero height but a large depth. @@ -13976,7 +15434,7 @@ is the graphic wider than width nor taller than heig scale Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its nominal size, enter \includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}. This -number may be any value; a number between 1 and 0 will shrink the +number may be any value; a number between 0 and 1 will shrink the graphic and a negative number will reflect it. angle @@ -14005,10 +15463,10 @@ vertical center in lc or rc.) The default viewport Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments, separated by spaces and given in &tex; dimensions, as with -\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}. The -dimensions default to big points, bp. They are taken -relative to the origin specified by the bounding box. See also the -trim option. +\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}. When +the unit is omitted, the dimensions default to big +points, bp. They are taken relative to the origin specified +by the bounding box. See also the trim option. trim Gives parts of the graphic to not show. Takes four arguments, separated @@ -14055,7 +15513,7 @@ set with interpolate=true or just specified as here. quiet Do not write information to the log. You can set it with quiet=true or just specified it with -\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}, +\includegraphics[...,quiet,...]{...}, draft If you set it with draft=true or just specify it with @@ -14127,7 +15585,7 @@ Only use this in conjunction with the option type. command Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in -conjunction with the option type. See Command line options +conjunction with the option type. See Command line options, for a discussion of enabling the \write18 functionality to run external commands. @@ -14154,7 +15612,7 @@ external commands. Put material in a box and rotate it angle degrees counterclockwise. -This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees. +This example rotates the table column heads forty-five degrees. \begin{tabular}{ll} \rotatebox{45}{Character} &\rotatebox{45}{NATO phonetic} \\ @@ -14316,7 +15774,8 @@ special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. characters, special &latex; sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For example, the percent sign % is for comments. They are -called reserved characters or special characters. +called reserved characters or special characters. They are +all discussed elsewhere in this manual. # $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \ @@ -14337,13 +15796,13 @@ typing \$1.23 will produce $1.23 in y \textbackslash As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font use \~{} (omitting the curly braces would result in the next -character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text -body font circumflex use \^{}. To get a backslash in the font -of the text body, enter \textbackslash{}. +character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a text body +font circumflex use \^{}. To get a backslash in the font of +the text body, enter \textbackslash{}. To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use \verb!! as below (the double backslash \\ is only -there to split the lines). +there to split the lines in the output). \begin{center} \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\ @@ -14358,6 +15817,7 @@ there to split the lines). uppercase lowercase characters, case of +changing case of characters Synopsis: @@ -14366,13 +15826,13 @@ there to split the lines). \MakeUppercase{text} \MakeLowercase{text} -Change the case of characters. The &tex; primitives commands -\uppercase and \lowercase only work for American -characters. The &latex; commands \MakeUppercase and -\MakeLowercase commands also change characters accessed by -commands such as \ae or \aa. The commands -\MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase are robust but they have -moving arguments (see \protect). +Change the case of characters. The &tex; primitive commands +\uppercase and \lowercase are set up by default to work +only with the 26 letters a–z and A–Z. The &latex; commands +\MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase commands also change +characters accessed by commands such as \ae or \aa. The +commands \MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase are robust +but they have moving arguments (see \protect). These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of a command within text. But they do change the case of every other @@ -14405,10 +15865,23 @@ standard &latex; commands \MakeUppercase and package, mfirstuc mfirstuc package - + To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package mfirstuc. +package, expl3 +expl3 package + +Wright, Joseph +Handling all the casing rules specified by Unicode, e.g., for +non-Latin scripts, is a much bigger job than anything envisioned in +the original &tex; and &latex;. It has been implemented in the +expl3 package as of 2020. The article “Case changing: From +&tex; primitives to the Unicode algorithm”, (Joseph Wright, +TUGboat 41:1, +https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb41-1/tb127wright-case.pdf), gives a +good overview of the topic, past and present. + @@ -14420,13 +15893,14 @@ standard &latex; commands \MakeUppercase and You can access any character of the current font using its number with the \symbol command. For example, the visible space character -used in the \verb* command has the code decimal 32, so it can be -typed as \symbol{32}. +used in the \verb* command has the code decimal 32 in the +standard Computer Modern typewriter font, so it can be typed as +\symbol{32}. You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a ' -prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a " prefix, so the previous -example could also be written as \symbol{'40} or -\symbol{"20}. +prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a " prefix, so the +visible space at 32 decimal could also be written as +\symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}. @@ -14437,10 +15911,13 @@ example could also be written as \symbol{'40} or symbols, text textcomp package -&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in -running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not -available in OT1. Unless you are using Xe&latex; or Lua&latex; then -you may need to load the textcomp package. +TS1 encoding +&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols +in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are +not available in OT1. As of the &latex; February 2020 release, all +symbols are available by default; before that, it was necessary to use +the textcomp package for some (technically, those in the +TS1 font encoding). \copyright\copyright \textcopyright\textcopyright @@ -14560,7 +16037,7 @@ Double and single quotation marks on the baseline. \textbigcircle\textbigcircle big circle symbols, in text circle symbol, big, in text -◯ Big circle symbol. +◯, Big circle symbol. \textbraceleft\textbraceleft left brace, in text @@ -14578,7 +16055,7 @@ Double and single quotation marks on the baseline. \textcircled{letter}\textcircled{letter} circled letter, in text -Ⓐ Circle around letter. +Ⓐ, Circle around letter. \textcompwordmark\textcompwordmark \textcapitalcompwordmark\textcapitalcompwordmark @@ -14608,13 +16085,14 @@ while the \textascendercompwordmark form has the ascender hei \textemdash (or ---)\textemdash (or ---) em-dash -— Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in -The playoffs --- if you are fortunate enough to make the playoffs --- -is more like a sprint.). +— Em-dash. Used for punctuation, usually similar to commas or +parentheses, as in ‘The playoffs---if you're lucky +enough to make the playoffs---are more like a sprint.’ Conventions +for spacing around em-dashes vary widely. \textendash (or --)\textendash (or --) e-dash -– En-dash (used for ranges, as in See pages 12--14). +– En-dash. Used for ranges, as in ‘see pages 12--14’. \texteuro\texteuro euro symbol @@ -14622,7 +16100,11 @@ is more like a sprint.). package, eurosym eurosym package -The Euro symbol: €. For an alternative glyph design, try the +The Euro currency symbol: €. +package, eurosym +eurosym package + +For an alternative glyph design, try the eurosym package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC). @@ -14630,10 +16112,24 @@ Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC). exclamation point, upside-down ¡ Upside down exclamation point. +\textfiguredash\textfiguredash +figure dash character +Dash used between numerals, Unicode U+2012. Defined in the June 2021 +release of &latex;. When used in pdf&tex;, approximated by an +en-dash; with a Unicode engine, either typesets the glyph if available +in the current font, or writes the usual “Missing character” warning +to the log file. + \textgreater\textgreater greater than symbol, in text > Greater than symbol. +\texthorizontalbar\texthorizontalbar +horizontal bar character +Horizontal bar character, Unicode U+2015. Defined in the June 2021 +release of &latex;. Behavior as with \textfiguredash above; +the pdf&tex; approximation is an em-dash. + \textless\textless less than symbol, in text < Less than symbol. @@ -14641,7 +16137,15 @@ Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC). \textleftarrow\textleftarrow arrow, left, in text left arrow, in text -← Left arrow. +←, Left arrow. + +\textnonbreakinghyphen\textnonbreakinghyphen +non-breaking hyphen character +hyphen character, non-breaking +Non-breaking hyphen character, Unicode U+2011. Defined in the June +2021 release of &latex;. Behavior as with \textfiguredash +above; the pdf&tex; approximation is a regular ASCII hyphen (with +breaks disallowed after). \textordfeminine\textordfeminine \textordmasculine\textordmasculine @@ -14684,7 +16188,7 @@ Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC). quote, single straight straight single quote single quote, straight -' Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.) +', Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.) \textquotestraightbase\textquotestraightbase \textquotestraightdblbase\textquotestraightdblbase @@ -14702,12 +16206,12 @@ Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC). \textrightarrow\textrightarrow arrow, right, in text right arrow, in text -→ Right arrow. +→, Right arrow. \textthreequartersemdash\textthreequartersemdash three-quarters em-dash em-dash, three-quarters -﹘ “Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. +﹘, “Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. \texttrademark\texttrademark trademark symbol @@ -14717,7 +16221,7 @@ Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC). \texttwelveudash\texttwelveudash two-thirds em-dash em-dash, two-thirds -﹘ “Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. +﹘, “Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. \textunderscore\textunderscore underscore, in text @@ -14725,7 +16229,7 @@ Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC). \textvisiblespace\textvisiblespace visible space symbol, in text -␣ Visible space symbol. +␣, Visible space symbol. @@ -14744,13 +16248,16 @@ Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC). polyglossia package multilingual support -&latex; has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and languages, -through the babel package and related support if you are using -pdf&latex;, or polyglossia if you are using Xe&latex; or -Lua&latex;. This section does not cover that support. It only lists -the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. The -\capital... commands shown here produce alternative forms for use -with capital letters. These are not available with OT1. +&latex; has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and +languages, provided through the core babel package, which +supports pdf&latex;, Xe&latex; and Lua&latex;. The +polyglossia package provides similar support with the latter +two engines. + +This section does not cover that support. It only lists the core +&latex; commands for creating accented characters. The +\capital... commands shown here produce alternative forms for +use with capital letters. These are not available with OT1. Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated with lowercase ‘o’. @@ -14896,6 +16403,54 @@ its box. + + +<literal>\accent</literal> +\accent + +Synopsis: + +\accent number character + +A &tex; primitive command used to generate accented characters from +accent marks and letters. The accent mark is selected by number, +a numeric argument, followed by a space and then a character argument +constructs the accented character in the current font. + +These are accented ‘e’ characters. + +\accent18 e +\accent20 e +\accent21 e +\accent22 e +\accent23 e + +The first is a grave, the second is breve, etc. + +The position of the accent is determined by the font designer and so the +outcome of \accent use may differ between fonts. In &latex; it is +desirable to have glyphs for accented characters rather than building +them using \accent. Using glyphs that already contain the +accented characters (as in T1 encoding) allows correct hyphenation +whereas \accent disables hyphenation (specifically with OT1 font +encoding where accented glyphs are absent). + +There can be an optional font change between number and +character. Note also that this command sets the +\spacefactor to 1000 (see \spacefactor). + +An unavoidable characteristic of some Cyrillic letters and +the majority of accented Cyrillic letters is that they must be +assembled from multiple elements (accents, modifiers, etc.) while +\accent provides for a single accent mark and a single letter +combination. There are also cases where accents must appear between +letters that \accent does not support. Still other cases exist where +the letters I and J have dots above their lowercase counterparts that +conflict with dotted accent marks. The use of \accent in these +cases will not work as it cannot analyze upper/lower case. + + + Additional Latin letters @@ -14998,7 +16553,70 @@ font encoding, such as T1. - + +<literal>inputenc</literal> package + +inputenc + +Synopsis: + +\usepackage[encoding-name]{inputenc} + +Declare the input file’s text encoding to be encoding-name. The +default, if this package is not loaded, is UTF-8. Technically, +specifying the encoding name is optional, but in practice it is not +useful to omit it. + +encoding, of input files +character encoding +Unicode +In a computer file, the characters are stored according to a scheme +called the encoding. There are many different encodings. The +simplest is ASCII, which supports 95 printable characters, not enough +for most of the world’s languages. For instance, to typeset the +a-umlaut character ä in an ASCII-encoded &latex; source file, the +sequence \"a is used. This would make source files for anything +but English hard to read; even for English, often a more extensive +encoding is more convenient. + +The modern encoding standard, in some ways a union of the others, is +UTF-8, one of the representations of Unicode. This is the default for +&latex; since 2018. + +The inputenc package is how &latex; knows what encoding is +used. For instance, the following command explicitly says that the +input file is UTF-8 (note the lack of a dash). + +\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} + +Caution: use inputenc only with the pdf&tex; engine +(see &tex; engines). (The Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; engines assume +that the input file is UTF-8 encoded.) If you invoke &latex; with +either the xelatex command or the lualatex +command, and try to declare a non-UTF-8 encoding with inputenc, +such as latin1, then you will get the error inputenc is +not designed for xetex or luatex. + +An inputenc package error such as Invalid UTF-8 byte "96 +means that some of the material in the input file does not follow the +encoding scheme. Often these errors come from copying material from a +document that uses a different encoding than the input file; this one +is a left single quote from a web page using latin1 inside a +&latex; input file that uses UTF-8. The simplest solution is to +replace the non-UTF-8 character with its UTF-8 equivalent, or use a +&latex; equivalent command or character. + +In some documents, such as a collection of journal articles from a +variety of authors, changing the encoding in mid-document may be +necessary. Use the command +\inputencoding{encoding-name}. The most common values +for encoding-name are: ascii, latin1, +latin2, latin3, latin4, latin5, +latin9, latin10, and utf8. + + + + <literal>\rule</literal> \rule @@ -15012,8 +16630,8 @@ font encoding, such as T1. Halmos symbol tombstone -This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol, -often used to mark the end of a proof. +This example produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol, +or just “qed”, often used to mark the end of a proof: \newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}} @@ -15038,11 +16656,11 @@ thickness is common in &latex;. A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in the output, but can cause &latex; to change the output around it. -See \strut for examples. +See \strut, for examples. - + <literal>\today</literal> \today @@ -15128,7 +16746,7 @@ a file with five included files. This will bring in material from pref.tex, chap1.tex, chap2.tex, append.tex, and bib.tex. If you compile this file, and then comment out all of the lines inside -\includeonly{...} except for chap1, and compile again, +\includeonly{...} except for chap1, and compile again, then &latex; will only process the material in the first chapter. Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to print. However, the advantage of the \includeonly command is that @@ -15136,7 +16754,7 @@ However, the advantage of the \includeonly command is that information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in your output correctly. -See Larger book template for another example of \includeonly. +See Larger book template, for another example of \includeonly. @@ -15164,12 +16782,13 @@ This material will appear in the document. This will not appear. This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end of a -file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during mailing. -It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to -put \endinput halfway through the included file and see if the -error disappears. Now, knowing which half contains the error, moving -\endinput to halfway through that area further narrows down the -location. This process rapidly finds the offending line. +file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added if the file is +transmitted in the body of an email. It is also useful for debugging: +one strategy to localize errors is to put \endinput halfway +through the included file and see if the error disappears. Now, knowing +which half contains the error, moving \endinput to halfway +through that area further narrows down the location. This process +rapidly finds the offending line. After reading \endinput, &latex; continues to read to the end of the line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless. @@ -15201,10 +16820,12 @@ This allows you, for instance, to close an \if... with a \clearpage (see \clearpage & \cleardoublepage), then it inputs the material from filename.tex into the document, and then it does another \clearpage. This command can only -appear in the document body. The \includeonly command controls -which files will be read by &latex; under subsequent \include -commands. Its list of filenames is comma-separated, and it can only -appear in the preamble. +appear in the document body. + +The \includeonly command controls which files will be read by +&latex; under subsequent \include commands. Its list of +filenames is comma-separated. It must appear in the preamble or even +earlier, e.g., the command line; it can’t appear in the document body. This example root document, constitution.tex, brings in three files, preamble.tex, articles.tex, and @@ -15233,7 +16854,7 @@ in Order to form a more perfect Union, ... Running &latex; on constitution.tex makes the material from the three files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary files preamble.aux, articles.aux, and -amendments.tex. These contain information such as page numbers +amendments.aux. These contain information such as page numbers and cross-references (see Cross references). If you now comment out \includeonly’s lines with preamble and amendments and run &latex; again then the resulting document shows only the @@ -15250,7 +16871,7 @@ commands. \input (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary information). -See Larger book template for another example using \include +See Larger book template, for another example using \include and \includeonly. That example also uses \input for some material that will not necessarily start on a new page. @@ -15301,8 +16922,8 @@ athiesm.tex.’ (It will also create athiesm.auxIf you \include the root file in itself then you first get ‘LaTeX Error: Can be used only in preamble.’ Later runs get ‘TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]’. To fix -this, you must remove the inclusion \include{root} but also -delete the file root.aux and rerun &latex;. +this, you must remove the inclusion \include{root} but +also delete the file root.aux and rerun &latex;. @@ -15395,7 +17016,7 @@ commands \chapter, etc. Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter and section listings but not subsection listings, because the -\section command has level 1. See Sectioning for level +\section command has level 1. See Sectioning, for level numbers of the sectioning units. For more on the tocdepth see Sectioning/tocdepth. @@ -15406,7 +17027,7 @@ book template. \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command, as above. -To make the table of contents &latex; stores the information in an +To make the table of contents, &latex; stores the information in an auxiliary file named root-file.toc (see Splitting the input). For example, this &latex; file test.tex @@ -15417,45 +17038,64 @@ input). For example, this &latex; file test.tex \subsection{First subsection} ... -writes the following line to test.toc. +writes these lines to test.toc. \contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2} \contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2} -The section or subsection is the sectioning unit. The -hook \numberline lets you to change how the information appears -in the table of contents. Of its two arguments, 1 or 1.1 -is the sectioning unit number and First section or First -subsection is the title. Finally, 2 is the page number on which -the sectioning units start. - -One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to get the -contents page correct you must run &latex; twice, once to store the -information and once to get it. In particular, the first time that you -run &latex; on a new document, the table of contents page will be empty -except for its ‘Contents’ header. Just run it again. +\contentsline +Each line contains a single command, \contentsline +(see \contentsline). The first argument, the section or +subsection, is the sectioning unit. The second argument has two +components. The hook \numberline determines how the sectioning +number, 1 or 1.1, appears in the table of contents +(see \numberline). The remainder of the second argument of +\contentsline, ‘First section’ or ‘First subsection’, +is the sectioning title text. Finally, the third argument, ‘2’, is +the page number on which this sectioning unit starts. + +To typeset these lines, the document class provides +\l@section-unit commands such as +\l@section{text}{pagenumber} and +\l@subsection{text}{pagenumber}. These commands +often use the \@dottedtocline command +(see \@dottedtocline). + +A consequence of &latex;’s strategy of using auxiliary files is that to +get the correct information in the document you must run &latex; twice, +once to store the information and the second time to retrieve it. In +the ordinary course of writing a document authors run &latex; a number +of times, but you may notice that the first time that you compile a new +document, the table of contents page will be empty except for its +‘Contents’ header. Just run &latex; again. The commands \listoffigures and \listoftables produce a -list of figures and a list of tables. They work the same way as the -contents commands; for instance, these work with information stored in -.lof and .lot files. - -package, babel -babel package - -package, polyglossia -polyglossia package - -To change the header for the table of contents page do something like -the first line here. - -\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents} -\renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots} -\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables} - -Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two. -Internationalization packages such as babel or polyglossia -will change the headers depending on the chosen base language. +list of figures and a list of tables. Their information is stored in +files with extension .lof and .lot. They work the same way +as \tableofcontents but the latter is more common, so we use it +for most examples. + +You can manually add material to the table of contents, the list of +figures, and the list of tables. For instance, add a line about a +section to the table of contents with +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{text}. +(see \addcontentsline). Add arbitrary material, that is, non-line +material, with \addtocontents, as with the command +\addtocontents{lof}{\protect\vspace{2ex}}, which adds +vertical space to the list of figures (see \addtocontents). + +Lines in the table of contents, the list of figures, and the list of +tables, have four parts. First is an indent. Next is a box into which +sectioning numbers are placed, and then the third box holds the title +text, such as ‘First section’. Finally there is a box up against +the right margin, inside of which &latex; puts the page number box. +For the indent and the width of the number box, +see \@dottedtocline. The right margin box has width +\@tocrmarg and the page number is flush right in that space, +inside a box of width \@pnumwidth. By default +\@tocrmarg is 2.55em and \@pnumwidth is +1.55em. Change these as with +\renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{3.5em}. package, tocloft tocloft package @@ -15464,14 +17104,71 @@ will change the headers depending on the chosen base language. tocbibbind package CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures -and tables. One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the -default, such as spacing, is tocloft. And, tocbibbind -will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of -contents. +and tables (see CTAN). The package tocloft is convenient for +adjusting some aspects of the default such as spacing. And, +tocbibbind will automatically add the bibliography, index, +etc. to the table of contents. + +To change the header for the table of contents page, do something like +these commands before you call \tableofcontents, etc. +\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of Contents} +\renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots} +\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Specifications} + +package, babel +babel package + +package, polyglossia +polyglossia package +Internationalization packages such as babel or polyglossia +will change these headers depending on the chosen base language. + - + + +<literal>\@dottedtocline</literal> + +\@dottedtocline +table of contents entry, create dotted line + +Synopsis: + +\@dottedtocline{section-level-num}{indent}{numwidth}{text}{pagenumber} + +Used internally by &latex; to format an entry line in the table of +contents, list of figures, or list of tables. Authors do not directly +enter \@dottedtocline commands. + +This command is typically used by \l@section, \l@subsection, +etc., to format the content lines. For example, the article.cls +file contains these definitions: + +\newcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}} +\newcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}} +\newcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}} + +In this example, \@dottedcline appears to have been given only +three arguments. But tracing the internal code shows that it picks up +the final text and pagenumber arguments in the synopsis +from a call to \contentsline. + +leaders, dots in table of contents +Between the box for the title text of a section and the right margin +box, these \@dottedtocline commands insert leaders, that +is, evenly-spaced dots. The dot-to-dot space is given by the command +\@dotsep. By default it is 4.5 (it is in math units, which +are 1/18 em. Change it using \renewcommand, as +in \renewcommand{\@dotsep}{3.5}. + +In the default book class, &latex; does not use dotted leaders for +the Part and Chapter table entries, and in the default article class +it does not use dotted leaders for Section entries. + + + + <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> \addcontentsline @@ -15482,9 +17179,7 @@ contents. \addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} \contentsline -Add an entry to the file specified by ext. Usually ext is -one of toc for the table of contents, lof for the list of -figures, or lot for the list of tables. +Add an entry to the auxiliary file with extension ext. The following will result in an ‘Appendices’ line in the table of contents. @@ -15499,26 +17194,24 @@ where it appears in the input file. root-name.ext. It writes that information as the text of the command \contentsline{unit}{text}{num}, where -num is the current value of counter unit. The -most common case is the table of contents and there num is the -page number of the first page of unit. +num is the current value of counter unit +(see \contentsline). The most common case is the table of contents +and there num is the page number of the first page of unit. This command is invoked by the sectioning commands \chapter, etc., and also by \caption inside a float environment. But it is -also used by authors. For example, in a book to have the preface -unnumbered, you may use the starred \chapter*. But that does not -put in table of contents information, so you can enter it manually, as -here. +also used by authors. For example, an author writing a book whose style +is to have an unnumbered preface may use the starred \chapter*. +But that command leaves out table of contents information, which can be +entered manually, as here. \chapter*{Preface} \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface} In the .toc file &latex; will put the line \contentsline -{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}; note the page number -‘3’. +{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}; note that the page number +‘3’ is automatically generated by the system, not entered manually. - - All of the arguments for \addcontentsline are required. ext @@ -15559,7 +17252,7 @@ will not make sense. - + <literal>\addtocontents</literal> \addtocontents{ext}{text} @@ -15570,7 +17263,7 @@ will not make sense. Add text, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to the auxiliary file with extension ext. This is most commonly used -for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also +for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but it also applies to the list of figures and list of tables. This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the @@ -15579,6 +17272,24 @@ applies to the list of figures and list of tables. \tableofcontents\newpage \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}} +This puts the word ‘Page’, in boldface, above the column of page +numbers and after the header. + +\tableofcontents +\addtocontents{toc}{~\hfill\textbf{Page}\par} +\chapter{...} + +This adds a line announcing work by a new author. + +\addtocontents{toc}{% + \protect\vspace{2ex} + \textbf{Chapters by N. Other Author}\par} + +The difference between \addtocontents and \addcontentsline +is that the latter is strictly for lines, such as with a line giving the +page number for the start of a new subset of the chapters. As the above +examples show, \addtocontents is for material such as spacing. + The \addtocontents command has two arguments. Both are required. @@ -15605,7 +17316,63 @@ move \addtocontents into the file being included. - + +<literal>\contentsline</literal> + +table of contents +\contentsline +\tableofcontents +.toc file +\listoffigures +\listoftables +.lof file +.lot file +\l@chapter +\l@section +\l@subsection + +Synopsis: + +\contentsline{unit}{text}{pagenumber} + +Used internally by &latex; to typeset an entry of the table of +contents, list of figures, or list of tables (see Table of contents +etc.). Authors do not directly enter \contentsline commands. + +Usually adding material to these lists is done automatically by the +commands \chapter, \section, etc. for the table of +contents, or by the \caption command inside of a \figure +or \table environment (see figure and see table). Thus, +where the base file is thesis.tex, and contains the declaration +\tableofcontents, the command \chapter{Chapter One} +produces something like this in the file thesis.toc. + +\contentsline {chapter}{\numberline {1}Chapter One}{3} + +If the file contains the declaration \listoffigures then a figure +environment involving \caption{Test} will produce +something like this in thesis.lof. + +\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {1.1}{\ignorespaces Test}}{6} + +To manually add material, use +\addcontentsline{filetype}{unit}{text}, +where filetype is toc, lof, or lot +(see \addcontentsline). + +For manipulating how the \contentline material is typeset, see +the tocloft package. + +Note that the hyperref package changes the definition of +\contentsline (and \addcontentsline) to add more +arguments, to make hyperlinks. This is the source of the error +Argument of \contentsline has an extra }. Fix this error by +deleting the .toc or .lof or .lot file, and running +&latex; again. + + + + <literal>\nofiles</literal> \nofiles @@ -15634,6 +17401,41 @@ a .toc then the table of contents page will continue to sho the old information. + + +<literal>\numberline</literal> + +\numberline + +Synopsis: + +\numberline{number} + +Typeset its argument flush left in a box. This is used in a +\contentsline command to typeset the section number +(see \contentsline). + +For example, this line in a .toc file causes the 1 to be +typeset flush left. + +\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}Motivation}{2} + +By default, &latex; typesets the section numbers in a box of length +\@tempdima. That length is set by the commands +\l@section, \l@subsection, etc. Put section numbers +inside a natural-width box with +\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{#1~}. + +This command is fragile, so you may need to precede it with +\protect (see \protect). An example is the use of +\protect in the command +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}Summary} +to get the \numberline into this command in the .toc file: +\contentsline {section}{\numberline {}Summary}{6} (the +page number ‘6’ is automatically added by &latex;; +see \addcontentsline). + + @@ -15678,12 +17480,15 @@ information back into your document and typeset it with the package, multind multind package -There are many packages that apply to indexing commands. The -showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in the -margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing -the index. The multind package supports multiple indexes. See -also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic, -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. +index, multiple +multiple indexes +There are many packages in the area of indexing. The showidx +package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the +page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index. +The multind package, among others, supports multiple indexes. +See also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic, +https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-multind, and the CTAN topic, +https://ctan.org/topic/index-multi. @@ -15746,7 +17551,7 @@ the output is the item ‘Jones’ with no comma or p followed by two subitems, like ‘program, 50’ and ‘results, 51’. -‘see’ and ‘see also’ index entries +see and see also index entries index entries, ‘see’ and ‘see also’ \seename \alsoname @@ -15901,8 +17706,8 @@ formatted. Default: "\\begin{theindex}\n". Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group for entries starting with ‘a’, etc. This specifier gives what is inserted when a new group begins. Default: "\n\n \\indexspace\n" -(\indexspace is a rubber length with default value 10pt -plus5pt minus3pt). +(\indexspace is a command inserting a rubber length, by default +10pt plus5pt minus3pt). lethead_flaglethead_flag An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter. If @@ -15993,14 +17798,18 @@ roman R, and uppercase alphabetic A. Defa "rnaRA". -xindy -xindy program +xindy program There are a number of other programs that do the job -makeindex does. One is xindy, which does -internationalization and can process indexes for documents marked up -using &latex; and a number of other languages. It is highly -configurable, both in markup terms and in terms of the collating order -of the text, as described in its documentation. +makeindex does. One is xindy +(https://ctan.org/pkg/xindy), which does internationalization and can +process indexes for documents marked up using &latex; and a number of +other languages. It is written in Lisp, highly configurable, both in +markup terms and in terms of the collating order of the text, as +described in its documentation. + +xindex program +A more recent indexing program supporting Unicode is xindex, +written in Lua (https://ctan.org/pkg/xindex). @@ -16020,7 +17829,7 @@ of the text, as described in its documentation. To get an index you must first include \usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex in the document preamble and compile the document, then run the system command makeindex, -and then compile the document again. See Indexes for further +and then compile the document again. See Indexes, for further discussion and an example of the use of \printindex. @@ -16115,7 +17924,7 @@ CTAN. the document. The settings associated with the label are pairs: key=value. -This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers ℝ in the +This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers ℝ, in the glossary. \newglossaryentry{R} @@ -16528,24 +18337,6 @@ the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a (see Graphics). - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - <literal>\telephone</literal> @@ -16564,15 +18355,143 @@ page. - -Terminal input/output + +Input/output input/output, to terminal terminal input/output +input/output + +&latex; uses the ability to write to a file and later read it back in +to build document components such as a table of contents or index. You +can also read a file that other programs written, or write a file for +others to read. You can communicate with users through the terminal. +And, you can issue instructions for the operating system. + + +<literal>\openin</literal> & <literal>\openout</literal> - +\openin +\openout +\closein +\closeout +file, opening +file, closing +open a file + +Synopsis: + +\openin number=filename + +or: + +\openout number=filename + +Open a file for reading material, or for writing it. The number +must be between 0 and 15, as in \openin3 (in Lua&latex; +number can be between 0 and 255). + +Here &tex; opens the file presidents.tex for reading. + +\newread\presidentsfile +\openin\presidentsfile=presidents +\typeout{presidentsfile is \the\presidentsfile} +\read\presidentsfile to\presidentline +\typeout{\presidentline} + +The \newread command allocates input stream numbers from 0 +to 15 (there is also a \newwrite). The +\presidentsfile is more memorable but under the hood it is still +a number; the first \typeout gives something like +‘presidentsfile is 1’. In addition, \newread keeps track of +the allocation so that if you use too many then you get an error like +‘! No room for a new \read’. The second \typeout gives the +first line of the file, something like ‘1 Washington, George’. + +Ordinarily &tex; will not try to open the file until the next page +shipout. To change this, use +\immediate\openin number=filename or +\immediate\openout number=filename. + +Close files with \closein number and +\closeout number. + +How &latex; handles filenames varies among distributions, and even can +vary among versions of a distribution. If the file does not have an +extension then &tex; will add a .tex. This creates +presidents.tex, writes one line to it, and closes it. + +\newwrite\presidentsfile +\openout\presidentsfile=presidents +\write\presidentsfile{1 Washington, George} +\closeout\presidentsfile + +But filenames with a period can cause trouble: if &tex; finds a +filename of presidents.dat it could look first for +presidents.dat.tex and later for presidents.dat, or it +could do the opposite. Your distribution’s documentation should say +more, and if you find something that works for you then you are good, +but to ensure complete portability the best thing is to use file names +containing only the twenty six ASCII letters (not case-sensitive) and +the ten digits, along with underscore and dash, and in particular with +no dot or space. + +For \openin, if &tex; cannot find the file then it does not give +an error. It just considers that the stream is not open (test for this +with \ifeof; one recourse is the command +\InputIfFileExists, see Class and package commands). If you +try to use the same number twice, &latex; won’t give you an error. If +you try to use a bad number then you get an error message like ‘! +Bad number (16). <to be read again> = l.30 \openin16=test.jh’. + + + + +<literal>\read</literal> + +\read +file, reading +read a file + +Synopsis: + +\read number tomacro + +Make the command macro contain the next line of input from text +stream number, as in \read5 to\data. + +This opens the file email.tex for reading, puts the contents of +the first line into the command \email, and then closes the file. + +\newread\recipientfile +\openin\recipientfile=email +\read\recipientfile to\email +\typeout{Email address: \email} +\closein\recipientfile + +If number is outside the range from 0 to 15 or if no file +of that number is open, or if the file has ended, then \read +will take input from the terminal (or exit if interaction is not +allowed, e.g., \nonstopmode; see interaction modes). +(However, the natural way in &latex; to take input from the terminal +is \typein (see \typein.) + +To read an entire file as additional &latex; source, use +\input (see \input) or \include (see \include & +\includeonly). + +package, datatool +datatool package + +mail merges +A common reason to want to read from a data file is to do mail merges. +CTAN has a number of packages for that; one is datatool. + + + + <literal>\typein</literal> \typein @@ -16603,9 +18522,9 @@ the input you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the \typein command. In the second command version the optional argument cmd -argument must be a command name — it must begin with a backslash, \. -This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you -typed. For example, this +argument must be a command name, that is, it must begin with a +backslash, \. This command name is then defined or redefined to be +the input that you typed. For example, this \typein[\student]{Enter student name:} \typeout{Recommendation for \student .} @@ -16621,7 +18540,7 @@ Recommendation for John Dee. - + <literal>\typeout</literal> \typeout @@ -16657,20 +18576,374 @@ character with \csname @percentchar\endcsname. produces on the command line ‘The length is 5.0pt’. + + +<literal>\write</literal> + +\write + +Synopsis: + +\write number{string} + +Write string to the log file, to the terminal, or to a file +opened by \openout. For instance, \write6 writes to text +stream number 6. + +If the following appears in basefile.tex then it opens +basefile.jh, writes ‘Hello World!’ and a newline to +it, and closes that file. + +\newwrite\myfile +\immediate\openout\myfile=\jobname.jh % \jobname is root file basename +... +\immediate\write\myfile{Hello world!} +... +\immediate\closeout\myfile + +\newwrite +The \newwrite allocates a stream number, giving it a symbolic +name to make life easier, so that stream +\newwrite\myfile\the\myfile produces something like ‘stream 3’. +Then \openout associates the stream number with the given file +name. &tex; ultimately executed \write3 which puts the string +in the file. + +log file, writing to +terminal, writing to +-1, write stream number +Typically number is between 0 and 15, because typically +&latex; authors follow the prior example and the number is allocated +by the system. If number is outside the range from 0 to 15 or +if it is not associated with an open file then &latex; writes +string to the log file. If number is positive then in +addition &latex; writes string to the terminal. + +Thus, test \write-1{Hello World!} puts ‘Hello World!’ +followed by a newline in the log file. (This is what the \wlog +command does; see \wlog). And \write100{Hello World!} +puts the same in the log file but also puts ‘Hello World!’ +followed by a newline in the terminal output. (But 16, 17, and 18 are +special as number; see below.) + +Lua&tex;, 256 output streams in +In Lua&tex;, instead of 16 output streams there are 256 +(see &tex; engines). + +\@auxout +\@mainaux +Use \write\@auxout{string} to write to the current +.aux file, which is associated with either the root file or +with the current include file; and use +\write\@mainaux{string} to write to the main +.aux. These symbolic names are defined by &latex;. + + +By default &latex; does not write string to the file right +away. This is because, for example, you may need \write to +save the current page number, but when &tex; comes across a +\write it typically does not know what the page number is, +since it has not yet done the page breaking. So, you use \write +in one of three contexts: + +\immediate\write\@auxout{string} %1 +\write\@auxout{string} %2 +\protected@write\@auxout{}{string} %3 + +immediate \write +\immediate\write +With the first, &latex; writes string to the file immediately. +Any macros in string are fully expanded (just as in +\edef) so to prevent expansion you must use \noexpand, +toks, etc., except that you should use # instead of +##). + +delayed \write +whatsit item +\shipout and expansion +With the second, string is stored on the current list of things +(as a &tex; “whatsit” item) and kept until the page is shipped out +and likewise the macros are unexpanded until \shipout. At +\shipout, string is fully expanded. + +\protected@write +The third, \protected@write, is like the second except that +you can use \protect to avoid expansion. The extra first +argument allows you to locally insert extra definitions to make more +macros protected or to have some other special definition for the +write. + +As a simple example of expansion with \write, string here +contains a control sequence \triplex which we’ve defined to be +the text ‘XYZ’: + +\newwrite\jhfile +\openout\jhfile=test.jh +\newcommand{\triplex}{XYZ} +\write\jhfile{test \triplex test} + +This results in the file test.jh containing the text +‘test XYZtest’ followed by a newline. + +\write streams 16, 17, 18 +The cases where number is 16, 17, or 18 are special. Because of +\write’s behavior when number is outside the range from 0 +to 15 described above, in Plain &tex; \write16 and +\write17 were sometimes used to write to the log file and the +terminal; however, in &latex;, the natural way to do that is with +\typeout (see \typeout). The \write18 command is +even more special; modern &tex; systems use it for giving commands to +the operating system (see \write18). + +newline, in \write +^^J, in \write +Ordinarily \write outputs a single line. You can include a +newline with ^^J. Thus, this produces two lines in the log +file: + +\wlog{Parallel lines have a lot in common.^^JBut they never meet.} + +package, answers +answers package + +A common case where authors need to write their own file is for +answers to exercises, or another situation where you want to write +out verbatim, without expanding the macros. CTAN has a number of +packages for this; one is answers. + + + + +<literal>\write</literal> and security + +security and \write +\write and security + +The ability to write files raises security issues. If you compiled a +downloaded &latex; file and it overwrote your password file then you +would be justifiably troubled. + +Thus, by default &tex; systems only allow you to open files for +writing that are in the current directory or output directory, if +specified (see output directory), or in a subdirectory of +those. So, this code + +\newwrite\jhfile +\openout\jhfile=../test.jh + +gives an error like: +Not writing to ../test.jh (openout_any = p). +! I can't write on file `../test.jh' + +parent directories, cannot write to +You can get just such an error when using commands such as +\include{../filename} because &latex; will try to open +../filename.aux. The simplest solution is to put the included +files in the same directory as the root file, or in subdirectories. + + + + +<literal>\message</literal> + +\message + +Synopsis: + +\message{string} + +Write string to the log file and the terminal. + +Typically, &latex; authors use \typeout (see \typeout). It +allows you to use \protect on any fragile commands in +string (see \protect). But \typeout always inserts a +newline at the end of string while \message does not, so +the latter can be useful. + +With this example document body. + +before\message{One Two}\message{Three}\message{Four^^JI} +\message{declare a thumb war.}After + +under some circumstances (see below) &latex; writes the following to +both the terminal and the log file. + +One Two Three Four +I declare a thumb war. + +The ^^J produces a newline. Also, in the output document, +between ‘before’ and ‘After’ will be a single space (from +the end of line following ‘I}’). + +While \message allows you more control over formatting, a +gotcha is that &latex; may mess up that formatting because it inserts +line breaks depending on what it has already written. Contrast this +document body, where the ‘Two’ has moved, to the one given above. + +before\message{One}\message{Two Three}\message{Four^^JI} +\message{declare a thumb war.}After + +This can happen: when &latex; is outputting the messages to the +terminal, now the message with ‘One’ is shorter and it fits at the +end of the output terminal line, and so &latex; breaks the line between +it and the ‘Two Three’. That line break appears also in the log +file. This line break insertion can depend on, for instance, the length +of the full path names of included files. So producing finely-formatted +lines in a way that is portable is hard, likely requiring +starting your message at the beginning of a line. + + + + +<literal>\wlog</literal> + +\wlog + +Synopsis: + +\wlog{string} + +Write string to the log file. + +\wlog{Did you hear about the mathematician who hates negatives?} +\wlog{He'll stop at nothing to avoid them.} + +Ordinarily string appears in a single separate line. Use +^^J to insert a newline. + +\wlog{Helvetica and Times Roman walk into a bar.} +\wlog{The barman says,^^JWe don't serve your type.} + + + + +<literal>\write18</literal> + +\write18 +external commands +commands, run from &latex; +system commands, run from &latex; +shell access + + +Synopsis: + +\write18{shell_command} + +Issue a command to the operating system shell. The operating system +runs the command and &latex;’s execution is blocked until that +finishes. + +package, Asymptote +Asymptote package + +This sequence (on Unix) + +\usepackage{graphicx} % in preamble + ... +\newcommand{\fignum}{1} +\immediate\write18{cd pix && asy figure\fignum} +\includegraphics{pix\figure\fignum.pdf} + +will run Asymptote (the asy program) on pix/figure1.asy, +so that the document can later read in the resulting graphic +(see \includegraphics). Like any \write, here &latex; +expands macros in shell_command so that \fignum is +replaced by ‘1’. + +Another example is that you can automatically run Bib&tex; at the start +of each &latex; run (see Using BibTeX) by including +\immediate\write18{bibtex8 \jobname} as the first line of the +file. Note that \jobname expands to the basename of the root +file unless the --jobname option is passed on the command line, +in which case this is the option argument. + +You sometimes need to do a multi-step process to get the information +that you want. This will insert into the input a list of all PDF files +in the current directory (but see texosquery below): + +\immediate\write18{ls *.pdf > tmp.dat} +\input{tmp.dat} + +The standard behavior of any \write is to wait until a page is +being shipped out before expanding the macros or writing to the stream +(see \write). But sometimes you want it done now. For this, use +\immediate\write18{shell_command}. + +There are obvious security issues with allowing system commands inside +a &latex; file. If you download a file off the net and it contains +commands to delete all your files then you would be unhappy. The +standard settings in modern distributions turn off full shell +access. You can turn it on, if you are sure the shell commands are +safe, by compiling with latex --enable-write18 filename +(see Command line options). (The --shell-escape option is +a synonym, in &tex; Live.) + +restricted shell access +In the place of full shell access, modern distributions by default use +a restricted version that allows some commands to work, such as those +that run Metafont to generate missing fonts, even if you do not use +the enable-write18 option. By default this list of allowed +commands is short and features only commands that are under the +control of the distribution maintainers (see Command line +options). + +/bin/sh, used by \write18 +sh, used by \write18 +cmd.exe, used by \write18 +SHELL, environment variables +The shell_command text is always passed to /bin/sh on +Unix-like operating systems, and the DOS command interpreter +cmd.exe on Windows. Any different shell set by the user, and +the SHELL environment variable, is ignored. + +package, texosquery +texosquery package + +system information +operating system information +locale information, from system +directory listings, from system +If what you need is system information, such as the operating system +name, locale information, or directory contents, take a look at the +texosquery package, which provides a convenient and secure +interface for this, unlike the above examples using the raw +\write18: https://ctan.org/pkg/texosquery. + +package, shellesc +shellesc package + +\ShellEscape +\DelayedShellEscape +&latex; provides a package shellesc on top of the primitive +\write18 command. Its primary purpose is to provide a command +\ShellEscape which works identically on all &tex; engines; +Lua&tex; intentionally did not retain \write18 as a way to +invoke a shell command, so some engine-specific code is needed. The +shellesc package also provides a command +\DelayedShellEscape, executed at \output time, for the +same reason. + + + - -Command line + +Command line interface -command line + +command line interface +interface, command line +CLI Synopsis (from a terminal command line): pdflatex options argument -Run &latex; on argument. In place of pdflatex you can -also use xelatex, or lualatex, or dviluatex, or -latex. +Run &latex; on argument. In place of pdflatex you +can also use (for PDF output) xelatex or lualatex, or +(for DVI output) latex or dvilualatex, among others +(see &tex; engines). For example, this will run &latex; on the file thesis.tex, creating the output thesis.pdf. @@ -16678,19 +18951,20 @@ creating the output thesis.pdf. pdflatex thesis .tex, default extension -Note that .tex is the default file extension. - -pdf&tex; is a development of the original &tex; program, as are -Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; (see &tex; engines). They are completely -backward compatible. But the original program had a custom output -format, DVI, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF. This -allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as -hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and -ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run pdflatex or -xelatex or lualatex then you will by default get PDF -and have access to all its modern features. If you run latex, -or dvilualatex, then you will get DVI. The description here -assumes pdf&latex;. +Note that .tex is the default file name extension. + +pdf&tex; is an extension of the original &tex; program, as are +Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; (see &tex; engines). The first two are +completely backward compatible and the latter, almost so. Perhaps the +most fundamental new feature for all three is that the original &tex; +output its own DVI format, while the newer ones can output directly to +PDF. This allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF +such as hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and +PNG, and ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run +pdflatex or xelatex or lualatex then you +will by default get PDF and have access to all its modern features. +If you run latex, or dvilualatex, then you will get +DVI. The description here assumes pdf&latex;. See Command line options, for a selection of the most useful command line options. As to argument, the usual case is that it @@ -16702,10 +18976,10 @@ input). If you gave no arguments or options then pdflatex prompts for input from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering -<control>-D. +CTRL-D. If &latex; finds an error in your document then by default it stops and -asks you about it. See Recovering from errors for an outline of what +asks you about it. See Recovering from errors, for an outline of what to do. @@ -16720,9 +18994,12 @@ authoring. For a full list, try running ‘latex --help&# command line. With many implementations you can specify command line options by -prefixing them with ‘-’ or ‘--’. This is the case for -both &tex; Live (and Mac&tex;) and MiK&tex;. We will use both -conventions interchangeably. +prefixing them with ‘-’ or ‘--’. This is the case for both +&tex; Live (including Mac&tex;) and MiK&tex;. We will use both +conventions interchangeably. If an option takes a value, it can be +specified either as a separate argument (‘--foo val’), or as one +argument with an ‘=’ sign (‘--foo=val’), but there can be no +spaces around the ‘=’. We will generally use the ‘=’ syntax. --version command-line option -version @@ -16734,18 +19011,22 @@ and exit. -help Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit. ---interaction command-line option +--interaction command-line option -interaction=mode -&tex; compiles a document in one of four interaction modes: +batchmode +scrollmode +errorstopmode +nonstopmode +&tex; compiles a document in one of four interaction modes: batchmode, nonstopmode, scrollmode, -errorstopmode. In errorstop mode (the default), &tex; -stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In batch -mode it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the -user hit <return> at every error, and missing files cause the -job to abort. In nonstop mode, diagnostic message appear on the -terminal but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In -scroll mode, &tex; only stops for missing files or keyboard -input. +errorstopmode. In errorstopmode (the default), &tex; +stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In batchmode +it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the user +hit RETURN at every error, and missing files cause the job to +abort. In nonstopmode, diagnostic message appear on the terminal +but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In +scrollmode, &tex; stops for missing files or keyboard +input, but nothing else. For instance, starting &latex; with this command line @@ -16753,54 +19034,54 @@ input. eliminates most terminal output. +jobname +filename for current job --jobname command-line option -jobname=string -Set the value of &tex;’s jobname to the string. The log file +Set the value of &tex;’s jobname to the string. The log file and output file will then be named string.log and -string.pdf. - -When you run pdflatex options argument, if -argument does not start with a backslash then &tex; considers it -the name of a file to input. Otherwise it waits for the first -\input instruction and the name of the input file will be the job -name. This is used to name the log file the output file. The -jobname option overrides that process and directly specifies the -name. See Command line input for an example of its use. +string.pdf. see Jobname. +output directory for all external files --output-directory command-line option -output-directory=directory Write files in the directory directory. It must already exist. - ---shell-escape command-line option ---no-shell-escape command-line option +This applies to all external files created by &tex; or &latex;, such +as the .log file for the run, the .aux, .toc, +etc., files created by &latex;, as well as the main .pdf or +.dvi output file itself. + +When specified, the output directory directory is also +automatically checked first for any file that it is input, so that the +external files can be read back in, if desired. The true current +directory (in which &latex; was run) remains unchanged, and is also +checked for input files. + +shell escape +\write18, enabling --enable-write18 command-line option --disable-write18 command-line option ---shell-escape ---no-shell-escape ---enable-write18 +--shell-escape command-line option +--no-shell-escape command-line option +--enable-write18 --disable-write18 -Enable or disable \write18{shell command}. The first two -options are for with &tex; Live or Mac&tex; while the second two are -for MiK&tex;. - -package, sagetex -sagetex package - -Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a -&latex; file. For instance the package sagetex allows you to -have the mathematics software system Sage do calculations or draw -graphs and then incorporate that output in your document. For this -&tex; provides the \write18 command. - -But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen if you -compiled a &latex; file from the Internet. By default \write18 -is disabled. (More precisely, by default &tex; Live, Mac&tex;, and -MiK&tex; only allow the execution of a limited number of &tex;-related -programs, which they distribute.) - -If you invoke &latex; with the option no-shell-escape, and in -your document you call \write18{ls -l}, then you do not get an -error but the log file says ‘runsystem(ls -l)...disabled’. +--shell-escape +--no-shell-escape +Enable or disable \write18{shell_command} +(see \write18). The first two options are supported by both +&tex; Live and MiK&tex;, while the second two are synonyms supported +by &tex; Live. + +Enabling this functionality has major security implications, since it +allows a &latex; file to run any command whatsoever. Thus, by +default, unrestricted \write18 is not allowed. (The default +for &tex; Live, Mac&tex;, and MiK&tex; is to allow the execution of +a limited number of &tex;-related programs, which they distribute.) + +For example, if you invoke &latex; with the option +no-shell-escape, and in your document you call +\write18{ls -l}, then you do not get an error but the log +file says ‘runsystem(ls -l)...disabled’. --halt-on-error command-line option -halt-on-error @@ -16820,17 +19101,19 @@ error messages. These are only available with &tex; Live or Mac&tex;. input, on command line -As part of the command line invocation pdflatex options -argument you can specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting -argument with a backslash. This allows you to do some special -effects. +As part of the command line invocation + +latex-engine options argument + +you can specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting +argument with a backslash. (All the engines support this.) This +allows you to do some special effects. package, hyperref hyperref package - -For example, this file (which uses the hyperref package for -hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a -PDF. +For example, this file (which uses the +hyperref package for hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of +output, one to be read on physical paper and one to be read online. \ifdefined\paperversion % in preamble \newcommand{\urlcolor}{black} @@ -16844,10 +19127,15 @@ PDF. Compiling this document book.tex with the command line pdflatex book will give the ‘CTAN’ link in blue. But -compiling it with pdflatex "\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex" -has the link in black. (Note the use of double quotes to prevent -interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell; your system may -do this differently.) +compiling it with + +pdflatex "\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex" + +has the link in black. We use double quotes to prevent +interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell. (This +usually works on both Unix and Windows systems, but there are many +peculiarities to shell quoting, so read your system documentation if +need be.) In a similar way, from the single file main.tex you can compile two different versions. @@ -16857,22 +19145,107 @@ two different versions. pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}" The jobname option is there because otherwise both files would be -called main.pdf and the second would overwrite the first. +called main.pdf and the second would overwrite the first. (See +the next section.) + +In this example, we pass the draft option to the +graphicx package: -A final example. This loads the package graphicx with the option -draft +pdflatex "\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}" + +so the graphic files are read for their bounding box size information +but replaced in the PDF by a box with same size and that contains only +the file name, which speeds up compilation time and saves printer ink. + + + + +Jobname + +\jobname +jobname +document root name +name of document root + +Running &latex; creates a number of files, including the main PDF (or +DVI) output but also including others. These files are named with the +so-called jobname. The most common case is also the simplest, +where for instance the command pdflatex thesis creates +thesis.pdf and also thesis.log and thesis.aux. +Here the job name is thesis. + +In general, &latex; is invoked as latex-engine +options argument, where latex-engine is +pdflatex, lualatex, etc. (see &tex; engines). +If argument does not start with a backslash, as is the case +above with thesis, then &tex; considers it to be the name of +the file to input as the main document. The name of that root file, +without the .tex extension, is the jobname. If argument +does start with a backslash, or if &tex; is in interactive mode, then +it waits for the first \input command, and the jobname is the +argument to \input. + +There are two more possibilities for the jobname. It can be directly +specified with the -jobname option, as in pdflatex +-jobname=myname (see Command line input for a real example). + +texput, jobname default +fallback jobname +The final possibility is texput, which is the final fallback +default if no other name is available to &tex;. For example, if no +-jobname option was specified, and the compilation stops before +there is any output, then the log file will be named +texput.log. + +\documentclass, and texput jobname +\RequirePackage, and texput jobname +A special case of this is that in &latex; versions of (approximately) +2020 or later, the jobname is also texput if the first +\input occurs as a result of being called by either +\documentclass or \RequirePackage. So this will produce +a file named texput.pdf: + +pdflatex "\documentclass{minimal}\begin{document}Hello!\end{document}" + +However, this special case only applies to those two commands. Thus, with -pdflatex -jobname=aa "\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}" +pdflatex "\documentclass{article}\usepackage{lipsum}\input{thesis}" -so the graphic files are read for their size information but not -incorporated into the PDF. (The jobname option is there because -otherwise the output file would be graphicx.pdf, as -\RequirePackage does an \input of its own.) +the output file is lipsum.pdf, as \usepackage calls +\input. + +\jobname +Within the document, the macro \jobname expands to the jobname. +(When you run &latex; on a file whose name contains spaces, the string +returned by \jobname contains matching start and end quotes.) +In the expansion of that macro, all characters are of +catcode 12 (other) except that spaces are category 10, +including letters that are normally catcode 11. + +\IfBeginWith* macro from xstring +package, xstring +xstring package + +Because of this catcode situation, using the jobname in a conditional +can become complicated. One solution is to use the macro +\IfBeginWith from the xstring package in its star +variant, which is insensitive to catcode. For example, in the +following text the footnote “Including Respublica Bananensis +Francorum.” is only present if the task name starts with +my-doc. + +If a democracy is just a regime where citizens vote then +all banana republics \IfBeginWith*{\jobname}{my-doc}% +{\footnote{Including Respublica Bananensis Francorum.}}{} are +democracies. + +Manipulating the value of \jobname inside of a document does not +change the name of the output file or the log file. - + Recovering from errors If &latex; finds an error in your document then it gives you an error @@ -16889,8 +19262,8 @@ l.5 The \PN {} problem is a million dollar one. ? -The simplest thing is to enter ‘x’ and <return> and fix the -typo. You could instead enter ‘?’ and <return> to see other +The simplest thing is to enter x and RETURN and fix the +typo. You could instead enter ? and RETURN to see other options. *’ prompt @@ -16899,9 +19272,10 @@ options. There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to include the \end{document} or misspelled it. In this case &latex; gives you a ‘*’ prompt. You can get back to the command -line by typing \stop and <return>. +line by typing \stop and RETURN; this command does its +best to exit &latex; immediately, whatever state it may be in. -The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name. For instance, +The last scenario is that you mistyped the filename. For instance, instead of pdflatex test you might type pdflatex tste. ! I can't find file `tste'. @@ -16910,8 +19284,8 @@ instead of pdflatex test you might type pdflatex tst (Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit) Please type another input file name: -The simplest thing is to enter <Control> and ‘d’ (holding -them down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line. +The simplest thing is to enter CTRL d (holding the Control and d +keys down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line. @@ -16922,9 +19296,9 @@ them down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line. document templates templates, document -Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will +Although illustrative material, perhaps these document templates will be useful. Additional template resources are listed at -http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates. +https://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates. @@ -16933,6 +19307,9 @@ be useful. Additional template resources are listed at beamer template and class template, beamer +package, beamer +beamer package + The beamer class creates presentation slides. It has a vast array of features, but here is a basic template: @@ -16941,7 +19318,7 @@ array of features, but here is a basic template: \title{Beamer Class template} \author{Alex Author} -\date{July 31, 2007} +\date{July 31, 2020} \begin{document} @@ -16959,16 +19336,17 @@ array of features, but here is a basic template: \end{document} -One web resource for this: -http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/. +The Beamer package on CTAN: https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer. <literal>article</literal> template -template, article +template (simple), article +A simple template for an article. + \documentclass{article} \title{Article Class Template} \author{Alex Author} @@ -16984,6 +19362,7 @@ Additional text. \section{Second section} Some more text. + \end{document} @@ -16993,8 +19372,8 @@ Some more text. template, book -This is a straightforward template for a book. See See Larger book -template for a more elaborate one. +This is a straightforward template for a book. See Larger book +template, for a more elaborate one. \documentclass{book} \title{Book Class Template} @@ -17011,6 +19390,7 @@ Some other text. \section{A subtopic} The end. + \end{document} @@ -17020,19 +19400,22 @@ The end. template, book -This is a more elaborate template for a book. It has -\frontmatter, \mainmatter, and \backmatter to -control the typography of the three main areas of a book -(see \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter). The book has a -bibliography and an index. +This is a somewhat elaborate template for a book. See book template, +for a simpler one. + +This template uses \frontmatter, \mainmatter, and +\backmatter to control the typography of the three main areas +of a book (see \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter). The +book has a bibliography and an index. -Notable is that it uses \include and \includeonly +Also notable is that it uses \include and \includeonly (see Splitting the input). While you are working on a chapter you can comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to -\includeonly. That will speed up compilation without losing any -information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to -come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of -\include. You don’t get the cross-reference benefit this way.) +\includeonly. That will speed up compilation without losing +any information such as cross-references. (Material that does not +need to come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of +\include. You don’t get the cross-reference benefit with +\input.) \documentclass[titlepage]{book} \usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex @@ -17041,11 +19424,12 @@ come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of \author{Alex Author} \includeonly{% - frontcover, +% frontcover, preface, chap1, - ... +% appenA, } + \begin{document} \frontmatter \include{frontcover} @@ -17053,111 +19437,22 @@ come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of \maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright} \tableofcontents \include{preface} + \mainmatter \include{chap1} ... \appendix -\include{appena} +\include{appenA} ... + \backmatter \bibliographystyle{apalike} \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography} \bibliography \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index} \printindex -\include{backcover} -\end{document} - - - - -<literal>tugboat</literal> template - -template, TUGboat -TUGboat template -ltugboat class - -TUGboat is the journal of the &tex; Users Group, -http://tug.org/TUGboat. - -\documentclass{ltugboat} - -\usepackage{graphicx} -\usepackage{ifpdf} -\ifpdf -\usepackage[breaklinks,hidelinks]{hyperref} -\else -\usepackage{url} -\fi -%%% Start of metadata %%% - -\title{Example \TUB\ article} - -% repeat info for each author. -\author{First Last} -\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country} -\netaddress{user (at) example dot org} -\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/} - -%%% End of metadata %%% - -\begin{document} - -\maketitle - -\begin{abstract} -This is an example article for \TUB{}. -Please write an abstract. -\end{abstract} - -\section{Introduction} - -This is an example article for \TUB, linked from -\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}. - -We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the -\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF} -output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. - -The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more): -% verbatim blocks are often better in \small -\begin{verbatim}[\small] -\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW -\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML -\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe -\mf \MFB -\plain \POBox \PS -\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP -\TUB \TUG \tug -\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE - -\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph - -\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use! -\cs{fred} -> \fred -\meta{fred} -> <fred> -\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ... -\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4 -\booktitle{Book of Fred} -\end{verbatim} - -For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format -\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue. - -This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the -\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For -\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using -\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location, -\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.) - -Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. - -\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style -\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty -\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX - -\makesignature +\include{backcover} \end{document} diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html index a1cd59daf2..f778eee8c2 100644 --- a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html +++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ - + -LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (October 2018) +LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (July 2021) - - + + - + @@ -108,8 +98,7 @@ div.referenceinfo {font-size:small;} -

    LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (October 2018)

    - +

    LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (July 2021)

    @@ -117,580 +106,630 @@ div.referenceinfo {font-size:small;} +

    This is an unofficial reference manual for +LaTeX. See below for the Table of Contents. +If you want a tutorial then please instead visit learnlatex.org or this list.

    - +

    This manual has two versions. One has separate web pages for each section or +subsection. It's also available as a single web page and +as a pdf.

    + +

    This document is not official. It has not been reviewed by the +LaTeX maintainers. Our goal is to cover all (non-private) LaTeX +commands. Your comments and contributions, including bug reports, are +very welcome. See our project +page for more, including license information and +information on how you can +contribute to this manual +as well as +mirror it.

    + + + +

    Short Table of Contents

    - +

    Table of Contents

    - -
    + - -

    LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual

    +

    LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual

    This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of -October 2018) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system. +July 2021) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.

    - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    1 About this document

    +

    1 About this document

    - +

    This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX typesetting program (see Overview).

    -

    This document’s home page is https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman. There -you can get the sources, subscribe to the mailing list or read its -archives, see other infrastructure, and get the current output in -various formats. In particular, the output comes in two web formats. -Probably the most convenient one, shown at http://latexref.xyz/, -has pages for each topic and so is good for a quick lookup; see also the -note there about easy-to-remember links. The other, shown at -http://svn.gnu.org.ua/viewvc/latexrefman/trunk/latex2e.html?view=co, -has all the information on single page. -

    - +

    This document’s home page is https://latexref.xyz; it has +separate web pages for each topic. Alternatively. +https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html has the entire document on +a single page. For other output formats, the sources, and plenty more +information, see https://latexref.xyz/dev/. +

    +

    In this document, we will mostly just use ‘LaTeX’ rather than ‘LaTeX2e’, since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was frozen decades ago.

    - - - -

    LaTeX is currently maintained by a group of volunteers -(http://latex-project.org). The official documentation written by -the LaTeX project is available from their web site. This document is -completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX -maintainers. - - + + + +

    LaTeX is maintained by a group of volunteers +(https://latex-project.org). The official documentation written +by the LaTeX project is available from their web site. The present +document is completely unofficial and has not been written or reviewed +by the LaTeX maintainers. + + Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them. Instead, please send all comments to latexrefman@tug.org.

    -

    This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources -of information about LaTeX, at all levels. Here are a few -introductions. +

    This document is a reference, not a tutorial. There is a vast array +of other information available about LaTeX, at all levels. Here +are a few introductions.

    -
    http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr
    -
    +
    https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr
    +

    Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation.

    -
    http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc
    -
    +
    https://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc
    +

    Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.

    -
    http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide
    -
    -

    The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of LaTeX. -Many other guides by many other people are also available, independent -of LaTeX itself; one such is the next item: -

    -
    -
    http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort
    -
    -

    A short introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages. +

    https://ctan.org/pkg/lshort
    +
    +

    A longer introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.

    -
    http://tug.org/begin.html
    +
    https://tug.org/begin.html

    Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX, with further references.

    @@ -699,73 +738,73 @@ references.
    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    2 Overview of LaTeX

    +

    2 Overview of LaTeX

    - - - - - + + + + +

    LaTeX is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally -created by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers -(http://latex-project.org). It is widely used, particularly for -complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics. -

    - -

    A LaTeX user writes an input file containing text along with -interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text -should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands -that interface with Donald E. Knuth’s TeX typesetting program -(the technical term is that LaTeX is a macro package for the -TeX engine). The user produces the output document by giving that -input file to the TeX engine. +created by Leslie Lamport in 1984, but has been maintained by a group +of volunteers for many years now (https://latex-project.org). +It is widely used, particularly but not exclusively for mathematical +and technical documents. +

    + +

    A LaTeX user writes an input file containing text to be typeset +along with interspersed commands. The default encoding for the text is +UTF-8 (as of 2018). The commands specify, for example, how the text +should be formatted. +

    +

    LaTeX is implemented as a set of related so-called “macros” which +use Donald E. Knuth’s TeX typesetting program or one of its +derivatives, collectively known as “engines”. Thus, the user +produces output, typically PDF, by giving the input file to a TeX +engine. (The following sections describe all this in more detail.)

    The term LaTeX is also sometimes used to mean the language in which -the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands +the input document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands available to a LaTeX user.

    - - + +

    The name LaTeX is short for “Lamport TeX”. It is pronounced LAH-teck or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document, produce the logo with \LaTeX. Where use of the logo is not sensible, such as in plain text, write it as ‘LaTeX’.

    - - - - - -
    - -
    +

    Next: , Up: Overview   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    2.1 Starting and ending

    +

    2.1 Starting and ending

    - - - + + +

    LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning and ending. This is a small example. @@ -780,19 +819,19 @@ Hello, \LaTeX\ world.

    Every LaTeX document has a \begin{document} line and an \end{document} line.

    - +

    Here, the ‘article’ is the document class. It is implemented in a file article.cls. You can use any document class on your system. A few document classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and vast array of others are widely available. See Document classes.

    - +

    You can include other LaTeX commands between the \documentclass and the \begin{document} commands. This area is called the preamble.

    The \begin{document}, \end{document} pair defines an - + environment; the ‘document’ environment (and no others) is required in all LaTeX documents (see document). LaTeX make available to you many environments that are documented here @@ -804,40 +843,38 @@ a LaTeX input file.


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Overview   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    2.2 Output files

    +

    2.2 Output files

    LaTeX produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files. The main output file’s name ends in either .dvi or .pdf.

    .dvi
    -
    - - - - - -

    If LaTeX is invoked with the system command latex then it +

    + + + + + +

    If LaTeX is invoked with the system command latex then it produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension .dvi. You can view this file with a command such as xdvi, or convert it to a PostScript .ps file with dvips or to a Portable Document Format .pdf file with dvipdfmx. The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with dvitype. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are -available (http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware). +available (https://mirror.ctan.org/dviware).

    .pdf
    -
    - - -

    If LaTeX is invoked via the system command pdflatex, +

    + + +

    If LaTeX is invoked via the system command pdflatex, among other commands (see TeX engines), then the main output is a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a self-contained file, with all fonts and images included. @@ -845,25 +882,25 @@ self-contained file, with all fonts and images included.

    -

    LaTeX also produces at least two additional files. +

    LaTeX always produces at least two additional files.

    .log
    -
    - - -

    This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of +

    + + +

    This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps additional information for any errors.

    .aux
    -
    - - - - -

    Auxiliary information is used by LaTeX for things such as +

    + + + + +

    Auxiliary information is used by LaTeX for things such as cross references. For example, the first time that LaTeX finds a forward reference—a cross reference to something that has not yet appeared in the source—it will appear in the output as a doubled @@ -877,13 +914,13 @@ location.

    - - - - - - - + + + + + + +

    LaTeX may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename ending. These include a .lof file that is used to make a list of figures, a .lot file used to make a list of tables, and a @@ -892,39 +929,49 @@ open-ended.


    - -
    + - -

    2.3 TeX engines

    +

    2.3 TeX engines

    - - - - - - + + + + + + -

    LaTeX is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a TeX -implementation (see Overview). This section gives a terse -overview of the main programs (see also Command line). + + + + +

    LaTeX is a large set of commands that is executed by a TeX +program (see Overview). Such a set of commands is called a +format, and is embodied in a binary .fmt file, which can +be read much more quickly than the corresponding TeX source. +

    +

    This section gives a terse overview of the TeX programs that are +commonly available (see also Command line interface).

    -
    latex
    -
    pdflatex
    -
    - - -

    In TeX Live (http://tug.org/texlive), if LaTeX is invoked +

    latex + +
    +
    pdflatex + +
    +
    + + +

    In TeX Live (https://tug.org/texlive), if LaTeX is invoked via either the system command latex or pdflatex, -then the pdfTeX engine is run (http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex). +then the pdfTeX engine is run (https://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex). When invoked as latex, the main output is a .dvi file; as pdflatex, the main output is a .pdf file.

    pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth’s original -program (http://ctan.org/pkg/etex), including additional +program (https://ctan.org/pkg/etex), including additional programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty of extensions of its own. e-TeX is available on its own as the system command etex, but this is plain TeX (and produces @@ -935,26 +982,27 @@ rather than pdfTeX. In any case, the e-TeX extensions can be assumed to be available in LaTeX.

    -
    lualatex
    -
    - -

    If LaTeX is invoked via the system command lualatex, the -LuaTeX engine is run (http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex). This +

    lualatex + +
    +
    +

    If LaTeX is invoked via the system command lualatex, the +LuaTeX engine is run (https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex). This program allows code written in the scripting language Lua (http://luatex.org) to interact with TeX’s typesetting. LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode input natively, can handle OpenType and TrueType fonts, and produces a .pdf file by default. -There is also dvilualatex to produce a .dvi file, -but this is rarely used. +There is also dvilualatex to produce a .dvi file.

    -
    xelatex
    -
    - - - -

    If LaTeX is invoked with the system command xelatex, the -XeTeX engine is run (http://tug.org/xetex). Like LuaTeX, +

    xelatex + +
    +
    + + +

    If LaTeX is invoked with the system command xelatex, the +XeTeX engine is run (https://tug.org/xetex). Like LuaTeX, XeTeX natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType fonts, though the implementation is completely different, mainly using external libraries instead of internal code. XeTeX produces a @@ -966,33 +1014,85 @@ program, but this process is automatic. The .xdv file is only useful for debugging.

    +
    platex + +
    +
    uplatex + +
    +

    These commands provide significant additional support for Japanese and +other languages; the u variant supports Unicode. See +https://ctan.org/pkg/ptex and https://ctan.org/pkg/uptex. +

    -

    Other variants of LaTeX and TeX exist, e.g., to provide -additional support for Japanese and other languages ([u]pTeX, -http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex, http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex). +

    As of 2019, there is a companion -dev command and format for +all of the above: +

    +
    +
    dvilualatex-dev + +
    +
    latex-dev + +
    +
    lualatex-dev + +
    +
    pdflatex-dev + +
    +
    platex-dev + +
    +
    uplatex-dev + +
    +
    xelatex-dev + +
    +
    + +

    These are candidates for an upcoming LaTeX release. The main +purpose is to find and address compatibility problems before an +official release. +

    +

    These -dev formats make it easy for anyone to help test +documents and code: you can run, say, pdflatex-dev instead of +pdflatex, without changing anything else in your environment. +Indeed, it is easiest and most helpful to always run the -dev +versions instead of bothering to switch back and forth. During quiet +times after a release, the commands will be equivalent. +

    +

    These are not daily snapshots or untested development code. They +undergo the same extensive regression testing by the LaTeX team +before being released.

    +

    For more information, see “The LaTeX release workflow and the +LaTeX dev formats” by Frank Mittelbach, TUGboat 40:2, +https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb40-2/tb125mitt-dev.pdf. +

    +
    +

    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Overview   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    2.4 LaTeX command syntax

    +

    2.4 LaTeX command syntax

    - - - - + + + +

    In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a backslash character, \. The name itself then consists of either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter.

    LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that \pagebreak differs from \Pagebreak (the latter is not a standard command). -Most commands are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all +Most command names are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all commands in the same case as they are defined.

    A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These @@ -1009,11 +1109,6 @@ argument comes last, with no required argument after it, then to make the first character of the following text be an open square bracket, hide it inside curly braces.

    -

    Some of LaTeX’s commands are a declaration. Such a command -changes the value the meaning of some other command or parameter. For -instance, the \mainmatter declaration changes the typesetting of -page numbers from roman numerals to arabic (see \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter). -

    LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a * form that is related to the form without a *, such as \chapter and \chapter*. The exact difference in behavior varies from command @@ -1022,27 +1117,37 @@ to command.

    This manual describes all accepted options and *-forms for the commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).

    + + + + + + +

    As of the 2020-10-01 release of LaTeX, the expl3 and +xparse packages are part of the LaTeX2e format. They +provide a completely different underlying programming language +syntax. We won’t try to cover them in this document; see the related +package documentation and other LaTeX manuals. +


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Overview   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    2.5 Environment

    +

    2.5 Environment

    Synopsis:

    -
    \begin{environment name}
    +
    \begin{environment-name}
       ...
    -\end{environment name}
    +\end{environment-name}
     
    -

    An area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is a distinct -behavior. For instance, for poetry in LaTeX put the lines between -\begin{verse} and \end{verse}. +

    An environment is an area of LaTeX source, inside of which +there is a distinct behavior. For instance, for poetry in LaTeX +put the lines between \begin{verse} and \end{verse}.

    \begin{verse}
    @@ -1051,12 +1156,12 @@ behavior.  For instance, for poetry in LaTeX put the lines between
     \end{verse}
     
    -

    See Environments for a list of environments. Particularly notable is +

    See Environments, for a list of environments. Particularly notable is that every LaTeX document must have a document environment, a \begin{document} ... \end{document} pair.

    -

    The environment name at the beginning must exactly match that at -the end. This includes the case where environment name ends in a +

    The environment-name at the beginning must exactly match that at +the end. This includes the case where environment-name ends in a star (*); both the \begin and \end texts must include the star.

    @@ -1073,15 +1178,13 @@ required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
    - -
    +

    Previous: , Up: Overview   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    2.6 CTAN: the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network

    +

    2.6 CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network

    - +

    The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network, CTAN, is the TeX and LaTeX community’s repository of free material. It is a set of @@ -1094,34 +1197,34 @@ person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher’s specifications.

    -

    In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features such -as search by name or by functionality. +

    In addition to the massive holdings, the ctan.org web site +offers features such as search by name or by functionality. +

    + +

    CTAN is not a single host, but instead is a set of hosts, one of which +is the so-called “master”. The master host actively manages the +material, for instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated +packages. For many years, it has been hosted by the German TeX +group, DANTE e.V.

    - - -

    CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the -sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for -instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is -hosted by the German TeX group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the -world help out by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their -collections with the core site and then in turn making their copies -publicly available. This gives users close to their location better -access and relieves the load on the core site. The list of mirrors is -at https://ctan.org/mirrors. + +

    Other sites around the world help out by mirroring, that is, +automatically syncing their collections with the master site and then +in turn making their copies publicly available. This gives users close +to their location better access and relieves the load on the master +site. The list of mirrors is at https://ctan.org/mirrors.


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    3 Document classes

    +

    3 Document classes

    - - - + + +

    The document’s overall class is defined with this command, which is normally the first command in a LaTeX source file. @@ -1130,39 +1233,41 @@ normally the first command in a LaTeX source file.

    \documentclass[options]{class}
     
    - - - - - + + + + +

    The following document class names are built into LaTeX. (Many other document classes are available as separate packages; see Overview.)

    article
    -

    For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use. +

    For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.

    book
    -

    Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front +

    Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix (see Front/back matter).

    letter
    -

    Mail, optionally including mailing labels +

    Mail, optionally including mailing labels (see Letters).

    report
    -

    For documents of length between an article and a book, +

    For documents of length between an article and a book, such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.

    slides
    -

    For slide presentations—rarely used today. In its place the -beamer package is perhaps the most prevalent (see beamer template). +

    For slide presentations—rarely used nowadays. The +beamer package is perhaps the most prevalent +(https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer). See beamer template, for a +small template for a beamer document.

    @@ -1170,28 +1275,26 @@ such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.

    Standard options are described in the next section.

    - - -
    - -
    + - -

    3.1 Document class options

    +

    3.1 Document class options

    - - - - + + + +

    You can specify global options or class options to the \documentclass command by enclosing them in square brackets. To @@ -1203,9 +1306,9 @@ specify more than one option, separate them with a comma.

    Here is the list of the standard class options.

    - - - + + +

    All of the standard classes except slides accept the following options for selecting the typeface size (default is 10pt):

    @@ -1213,12 +1316,12 @@ options for selecting the typeface size (default is 10pt):
    10pt  11pt  12pt
     
    - - - - - - + + + + + +

    All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper size (these show height by width):

    @@ -1248,68 +1351,68 @@ size (these show height by width):

    - - - - + + + +

    When using one of the engines pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX, or XeLaTeX (see TeX engines), options other than letterpaper set the print area but you must also set the physical paper size. One way to do that is to put \pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth and \pdfpageheight=\paperheight in your document’s preamble. - - + +

    The geometry package provides flexible ways of setting the print area and physical page size.

    - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + +

    Miscellaneous other options:

    draft
    final
    -
    +

    Mark (draft) or do not mark (final) overfull boxes with a black box in the margin; default is final.

    fleqn
    -
    - - +
    + +

    Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.

    landscape
    -
    - +
    +

    Selects landscape format; default is portrait.

    leqno
    -
    - - +
    + +

    Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side.

    openbib
    -
    +

    Use “open” bibliography format.

    titlepage
    notitlepage
    -
    +

    Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the report class is titlepage, for the other classes it is @@ -1319,12 +1422,12 @@ for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the

    The following options are not available with the slides class.

    - - - - - - + + + + + +
    onecolumn
    twocolumn
    @@ -1333,8 +1436,8 @@ for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the
    oneside
    twoside
    -
    - +
    +

    Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside, except that in the book class the default is twoside.

    @@ -1353,24 +1456,22 @@ being 40% of the difference between \paperwidth and

    - +

    The slides class offers the option clock for printing the time at the bottom of each note.


    - -
    + - -

    3.2 Additional packages

    +

    3.2 Additional packages

    - - - - + + + +

    Load a package pkg, with the package options given in the comma-separated list options, as here.

    @@ -1382,25 +1483,23 @@ list options, as here. as in \usepackage{pkg1,pkg2,...}, or use multiple \usepackage commands.

    - - + +

    Any options given in the \documentclass command that are unknown to the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with \usepackage.


    - -
    + - -

    3.3 Class and package construction

    +

    3.3 Class and package construction

    - - - + + +

    You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a @@ -1413,8 +1512,8 @@ package are useful across classes while those in a document class are specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for a package while a command to make the page headers say Memo from the SMC Math Department is for a class. - - + +

    Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign @ as a character in command names without having to surround the code @@ -1428,29 +1527,27 @@ others. For instance, the class smcmemo might have commands

    - -
    - -
    + - -

    3.3.1 Class and package structure

    +

    3.3.1 Class and package structure

    - - - - - - - + + + + + + +

    A class file or package file typically has four parts.

      @@ -1474,9 +1571,9 @@ name}, to modify the behavior of the class. An example is when you declare \documentclass[11pt]{article} to set the default document font size. -
    1. Finally, in the more declarations part the class or package usually does -most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and fonts, and -loading other files. +
    2. Finally, in the more declarations part the class or package +usually does most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and +fonts, and loading other files.

    Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as stub.cls @@ -1490,7 +1587,7 @@ where LaTeX can find it, for example in the same directory as the \ProcessOptions\relax \LoadClass{article}

    - +

    It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of passing them all to the article class, and then loads the @@ -1498,35 +1595,33 @@ passing them all to the article class, and then loads the

    For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the Class Guide, at -http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf (much +https://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf (much of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf.


    - -
    + - -

    3.3.2 Class and package commands

    - - +

    3.3.2 Class and package commands

    + +

    These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.

    \AtBeginDvi{specials}
    -
    +

    Save in a box register things that are written to the .dvi file at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.

    \AtEndOfClass{code}
    \AtEndOfPackage{code}
    -
    - +
    +

    Hook to insert code to be executed when LaTeX finishes processing the current class or package. You can use these hooks multiple times; the code will be executed in the order that you @@ -1535,13 +1630,13 @@ called it. See also \AtBeginDocument.

    \CheckCommand{cmd}[num][default]{definition}
    \CheckCommand*{cmd}[num][default]{definition}
    -
    - - +
    + +

    Like \newcommand (see \newcommand & \renewcommand) but does not define cmd; instead it checks that the current definition of cmd is exactly as given by definition and is or is not - + long as expected. A long command is a command that accepts \par within an argument. The cmd command is expected to be long with the unstarred version of \CheckCommand. Raises an @@ -1560,16 +1655,16 @@ redefined this command.

    \PackageInfo{package name}{info text}
    \ClassInfoNoLine{class name}{info text}
    \PackageInfoNoLine{package name}{info text}
    -
    - - - - - - - - - +
    + + + + + + + + +

    Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.

    For \ClassError and \PackageError the message is @@ -1591,7 +1686,7 @@ appends a period to the messages.

    \CurrentOption
    -
    +

    Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can only be used within the code argument of either \DeclareOption or \DeclareOption*. @@ -1599,12 +1694,12 @@ or \DeclareOption*.

    \DeclareOption{option}{code}
    \DeclareOption*{code}
    -
    - - - - - +
    + + + + +

    Make an option available to a user to invoke in their \documentclass command. For example, the smcmemo class could have an option \documentclass[logo]{smcmemo} allowing @@ -1613,10 +1708,10 @@ must contain \DeclareOption{logo}{code} (and later, \ProcessOptions).

    If you request an option that has not been declared, by default this -will produce a warning like Unused global option(s): [badoption]. -Change this behaviour with the starred version -\DeclareOption*{code}. For example, many classes extend -an existing class, using a declaration such as +will produce a warning like Unused global option(s): +[badoption]. Change this behavior with the starred version +\DeclareOption*{code}. For example, many classes +extend an existing class, using a command such as \LoadClass{article}, and for passing extra options to the underlying class use code such as this.

    @@ -1640,9 +1735,9 @@ passes the option to the article class.
    \DeclareRobustCommand{cmd}[num][default]{definition}
    \DeclareRobustCommand*{cmd}[num][default]{definition}
    -
    - - +
    + +

    Like \newcommand and \newcommand* (see \newcommand & \renewcommand) but these declare a robust command, even if some code within the definition is fragile. (For a discussion of robust and fragile commands see \protect.) Use this command to define new @@ -1655,8 +1750,8 @@ transcript file if a command is redefined. using \newcommand so unless the command’s data is fragile and the command is used within a moving argument, use \newcommand.

    - - + +

    The etoolbox package offers the commands \newrobustcmd, \newrobustcmd*, as well as the commands \renewrobustcmd, \renewrobustcmd*, and the commands @@ -1678,10 +1773,10 @@ commands, so they do not just make a log message when you redefine

    -
    \IfFileExists{file name}{true code}{false code}
    -
    \InputIfFileExists{file name}{true code}{false code}
    -
    - +
    \IfFileExists{filename}{true code}{false code}
    +
    \InputIfFileExists{filename}{true code}{false code}
    +
    +

    Execute true code if LaTeX finds the file file name or false code otherwise. In the first case it executing true code and then inputs the file. Thus the command @@ -1705,8 +1800,8 @@ extensions see \input.

    \LoadClass[options list]{class name}[release date]
    \LoadClassWithOptions{class name}[release date]
    -
    - +
    +

    Load a class, as with \documentclass[options list]{class name}[release info]. An example is \LoadClass[twoside]{article}. @@ -1733,7 +1828,7 @@ that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the standard

    \ExecuteOptions{options-list}
    -
    +

    For each option option in the options-list, in order, this command executes the command \ds@option. If this command is not defined then that option is silently ignored. @@ -1745,7 +1840,7 @@ default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify

    \NeedsTeXFormat{format}[format date]
    -
    +

    Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often issued as the first line of a class file, and most often used as: \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}. When a document using that class is @@ -1767,7 +1862,7 @@ release `2016/02/01' is available.

    \OptionNotUsed
    -
    +

    Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used within the code argument of either \DeclareOption or \DeclareOption*. @@ -1776,8 +1871,8 @@ within the code argument of either \DeclareOption or

    \PassOptionsToClass{option list}{class name}
    \PassOptionsToPackage{option list}{package name}
    -
    - +
    +

    Adds the options in the comma-separated list option list to the options used by any future \RequirePackage or \usepackage command for package package name or the class class name. @@ -1818,8 +1913,8 @@ option. The user could start their LaTeX file with

    \ProcessOptions
    \ProcessOptions*\@options
    -
    - +
    +

    Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked. Include it in the class file as \ProcessOptions\relax (because of the existence of the starred command). @@ -1862,8 +1957,8 @@ means that the global options are processed first.

    \ProvidesClass{class name}[release date]
    \ProvidesPackage{package name}[release date brief additional information]
    \ProvidesPackage{package name}[release date]
    -
    - +
    +

    Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and the log file.

    @@ -1896,20 +1991,20 @@ than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)

    -
    \ProvidesFile{file name}[additional information]
    -
    +
    \ProvidesFile{filename}[additional information]
    +

    Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in that file and you get in the log a string like File: test.config -2017/10/12 config file for test.cls for file name equal to +2017/10/12 config file for test.cls for filename equal to ‘test.config’ and additional information equal to ‘2017/10/12 config file for test.cls’.

    \RequirePackage[option list]{package name}[release date]
    \RequirePackageWithOptions{package name}[release date]
    -
    - +
    +

    Load a package, like the command \usepackage (see Additional packages). The LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of these commands over Plain TeX’s \input; see the Class Guide. An example is @@ -1939,365 +2034,1018 @@ causes LaTeX to give error like \usepackage before


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    4 Fonts

    - - - +

    4 Fonts

    + + + + +

    LaTeX comes with powerful font capacities. For one thing, its New +Font Selection Scheme allows you to work easily with the font families +in your document (for instance, see Font styles). And, +LaTeX documents can use most fonts that are available today, +including versions of Times Roman, Helvetica, Courier, etc. (Note, +though, that many fonts do not have support for mathematics.) +

    +

    The first typeface in the TeX world was the Computer Modern family, +developed by Donald Knuth. It is the default for LaTeX documents and +is still the most widely used. But changing to another font often only +involves a few commands. For instance, putting the following in your +preamble gives you a Palatino-like font, which is handsome and more +readable online than many other fonts, while still allowing you to +typeset mathematics. (This example is from Michael Sharpe, +https://math.ucsd.edu/~msharpe/RcntFnts.pdf.) +

    +
    +
    \usepackage[osf]{newpxtext} % osf for text, not math
    +\usepackage{cabin} % sans serif
    +\usepackage[varqu,varl]{inconsolata} % sans serif typewriter
    +\usepackage[bigdelims,vvarbb]{newpxmath} % bb from STIX
    +\usepackage[cal=boondoxo]{mathalfa} % mathcal
    +
    -

    Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size -and a style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here. +

    In addition, the xelatex or lualatex engines allow +you to use any fonts on your system that are in OpenType or TrueType +format (see TeX engines). +

    +

    The LaTeX Font Catalogue (https://tug.org/FontCatalogue) shows +font sample graphics and copy-and-pasteable source to use many fonts, +including many with support for mathematics. It aims to cover all Latin +alphabet free fonts available for easy use with LaTeX. +

    +

    More information is also available from the TeX Users Group, at +https://www.tug.org/fonts/.

    - + - -
    - -
    +

    -Next: , Up: Fonts   [Contents][Index]

    +Next: , Up: Fonts   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    4.1 Font styles

    +

    4.1 fontenc package

    - - - + + + + + -

    The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. -

    -

    In the table below the listed commands, the \text... commands, -is used with an argument, as in \textit{text}. This is -the preferred form. But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the -corresponding declaration form, which is sometimes useful. This form -takes no arguments, as in {\itshape text}. The scope of -the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end -of the current group. In addition, each has an environment form such as -\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}. -

    -

    These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, are -cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of -\sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily. -

    - - -

    One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic -corrections if needed (see \/). Specifically, they insert the -italic correction unless the following character is in the list -\nocorrlist, which by default consists of a period and a comma. -To suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use -\nocorr at the start or end of the command argument, such as -\textit{\nocorr text} or \textsc{text \nocorr}. -

    -
    -
    \textrm (\rmfamily)
    -
    - -

    Roman. -

    -
    -
    \textit (\itshape)
    -
    - -

    Italics. -

    -
    -
    \textmd (\mdseries)
    -
    - -

    Medium weight (default). -

    -
    -
    \textbf (\bfseries)
    -
    - -

    Boldface. -

    -
    -
    \textup (\upshape)
    -
    - -

    Upright (default). +

    Synopsis:

    -
    -
    \textsl (\slshape)
    -
    - -

    Slanted. +

    +
    \usepackage[font_encoding]{fontenc}
    +
    + +

    or

    -
    -
    \textsf (\sffamily)
    -
    - -

    Sans serif. +

    +
    \usepackage[font_encoding1, font_encoding2, ...]{fontenc}
    +
    + +

    Specify the font encodings. A font encoding is a mapping of the +character codes to the font glyphs that are used to typeset your output.

    -
    -
    \textsc (\scshape)
    -
    - -

    Small caps. +

    This package only applies if you use the pdflatex engine +(see TeX engines). If you use the xelatex or +lualatex engine then instead use the fontspec package.

    -
    -
    \texttt (\ttfamily)
    -
    - -

    Typewriter. +

    TeX’s original font family, Computer Modern, has a limited character +set. For instance, to make common accented characters you must use +\accent (see \accent) but this disables hyphenation. TeX +users have agreed on a number of standards to access the larger sets of +characters provided by modern fonts. If you are using +pdflatex then this in the preamble

    -
    -
    \textnormal (\normalfont)
    -
    - -

    Main document font. +

    +
    \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
    +
    + +

    gives you support for the most widespread European languages, including +French, German, Italian, Polish, and others. In particular, if you have +words with accented letters then LaTeX will hyphenate them and your +output can be copied and pasted. (The optional second line allows you +to directly enter accented characters into your source file.)

    -
    -
    + + + + - - -

    Although it also changes fonts, the \emph{text} command -is semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a -substitute for \textit. For example, \emph{start -text \emph{middle text} end text} will result in the -start text and end text in italics, but middle text -will be in roman. +

    If you are using an encoding such as T1 and the characters appear +blurry or do not magnify well then your fonts may be bitmapped, +sometimes called raster or Type 3. You want vector fonts. Use a +package such as lmodern or cm-super to get a font that +extends LaTeX’s default using vector fonts.

    -

    LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally -switch to the given style, that is, are not cumulative. They are -used as declarations: {\cmd...} instead of -\cmd{...}. +

    For each font_encoding given as an option but not already +declared, this package loads the encoding definition files, named +font_encodingenc.def. It also sets \encodingdefault +to be the last encoding in the option list.

    -

    (The unconditional commands below are an older version of font -switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most -circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely -what you want.) +

    These are the common values for font_encoding.

    -
    \bf - -
    -
    -

    Switch to bold face. +

    OT1
    +

    The original encoding for TeX. Limited to mostly English characters.

    -
    \cal - -
    -
    - -

    Switch to calligraphic letters for math. +

    OMS, OML
    +

    Math symbols and math letters encoding.

    -
    \it - -
    -
    -

    Italics. +

    T1
    +

    TeX text extended. Sometimes called the Cork encoding for the Users +Group meeting where it was developed. Gives access to most European +accented characters. The most common option for this package.

    -
    \rm - -
    -
    -

    Roman. +

    TS1
    +

    Text Companion encoding. +

    +
    + +

    LaTeX’s default is to load OML, T1, OT1, and +then OMS, and set the default to OT1.

    -
    -
    \sc - -
    -
    -

    Small caps. +

    Even if you do not use accented letters, you may need to specify a font +encoding if your font requires it.

    -
    -
    \sf - -
    -
    -

    Sans serif. +

    If you use T1 encoded fonts other than the default Computer +Modern family then you may need to load the package that selects your +fonts before loading fontenc, to prevent the system from loading +any T1 encoded fonts from the default.

    -
    -
    \sl - -
    -
    - -

    Slanted (oblique). +

    The LaTeX team reserve encoding names starting with: ‘T’ for the +standard text encodings with 256 characters, ‘TS’ for symbols that +extend the corresponding T encodings, ‘X’ for test encodings, +‘M’ for standard math encodings with 256 characters, ‘A’ for +special applications, ‘OT’ for standard text encodings with 128 +characters, and ‘OM’ for standard math encodings with 128 +characters (‘O’ stands for ‘obsolete’).

    -
    -
    \tt - -
    -
    - - -

    Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width). +

    This package provides a number of commands, detailed below. Many of +them are encoding-specific, so if you have defined a command that works +for one encoding but the current encoding is different then the command +is not in effect.

    -
    -
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + -

    The \em command is the unconditional version of \emph. -

    -

    The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not -cumulative, so \mathbf{\mathit{symbol}} does not -create a boldface and italic symbol; instead, it will just be in -italics. This is because typically math symbols need consistent -typographic treatment, regardless of the surrounding environment. -

    -
    -
    \mathrm
    -
    -

    Roman, for use in math mode. -

    -
    -
    \mathbf
    -
    -

    Boldface, for use in math mode. + +


    + +

    4.1.1 \DeclareFontEncoding

    + + + + + + +

    Synopsis:

    -
    -
    \mathsf
    -
    -

    Sans serif, for use in math mode. +

    +
    \DeclareFontEncoding{encoding}{text-settings}{math-settings}
    +
    + +

    Declare the font encoding encoding. It also saves the value of +encoding in \LastDeclaredEncoding +(see \LastDeclaredEncoding).

    -
    -
    \mathtt
    -
    -

    Typewriter, for use in math mode. +

    The file t1enc.def contains this line (followed by many others).

    -
    -
    \mathit
    -
    (\mit)
    -

    Italics, for use in math mode. +

    +
    \DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{}
    +
    + +

    The text-settings are the commands that LaTeX will run every +time it switches from one encoding to another with the +\selectfont or \fontencoding command. The +math-settings are the commands that LaTeX will use whenever the +font is accessed as a math alphabet.

    -
    -
    \mathnormal
    -
    -

    For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration. +

    LaTeX ignores any space characters inside text-settings and +math-settings, to prevent unintended spaces in the output.

    -
    -
    \mathcal
    -
    -

    Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode. +

    If you invent an encoding you should pick a two or three letter name +starting with ‘L’ for ‘local’, or ‘E’ for +‘experimental’.

    -
    -
    - - - - -

    In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} can be used for -switching to bold letters and symbols in -formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. +

    Note that output encoding files may be read several times by LaTeX so +using, e.g., \newcommand may cause an error. In addition, such +files should contain \ProvidesFile line (see Class and package commands).

    - - - - - - - -

    Finally, the command \oldstylenums{numerals} will typeset -so-called “old-style” numerals, which have differing heights and -depths (and sometimes widths) from the standard “lining” numerals, -which all have the same height as uppercase letters. LaTeX’s -default fonts support this, and will respect \textbf (but not -other styles; there are no italic old-style numerals in Computer -Modern). Many other fonts have old-style numerals also; sometimes the -textcomp package must be loaded, and sometimes package options -are provided to make them the default. FAQ entry: -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf. +

    Note also that you should use the \...Default commands only in a +package, not in the encoding definition files, since those files +should only contain declarations specific to that encoding.


    - -
    + - -

    4.2 Font sizes

    +

    4.1.2 \DeclareTextAccent

    - - - + + + -

    The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. -The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font -size used (in points) with the ‘10pt’, ‘11pt’, and -‘12pt’ document size options, respectively (see Document class options). +

    Synopsis:

    - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
    Command10pt11pt12pt
    \tiny566
    \scriptsize788
    \footnotesize8910
    \small91010.95
    \normalsize (default)1010.9512
    \large121214.4
    \Large14.414.417.28
    \LARGE17.2817.2820.74
    \huge20.7420.7424.88
    \Huge24.8824.8824.88
    +
    +
    \DeclareTextAccent{cmd}{encoding}{slot}
    +
    -

    The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by -declaring them, as with this example. +

    Define an accent, to be put on top of other glyphs, in the encoding +encoding at the location slot. +

    +

    This line from t1enc.def declares that to make a circumflex +accent as in \^A, the system will put the accent in slot 2 +over the ‘A’ character, which is represented in ASCII as 65. +(This holds unless there is a relevant DeclareTextComposite or +\DeclareTextCompositeCommand declaration; +see \DeclareTextComposite.)

    -
    \begin{quotation} \small
    -  The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
    -\end{quotation}
    +
    \DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2}
     
    -

    The scope of the \small lasts until the end of the -quotation environment. It would also end at the next type style -command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it in -extra curly braces {\small We are here, we are here, we are -here!}. You can instead use the environment form of these commands; -for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. +

    If cmd has already been defined then \DeclareTextAccent +does not give an error but it does log the redefinition in the +transcript file.


    - -
    + - -

    4.3 Low-level font commands

    +

    4.1.3 \DeclareTextAccentDefault

    - - + + + -

    These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and -packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available -ones. +

    Synopsis: +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextAccentDefault{cmd}{encoding}
    +
    + +

    If there is an encoding-specific accent command cmd but there is +no associated \DeclareTextAccent for that encoding then this +command will pick up the slack, by saying to use it as described for +encoding. +

    +

    For example, to make the encoding OT1 be the default encoding for +the accent \", declare this. +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextAccentDefault{\"}{OT1}
    +
    + +

    If you issue a \" when the current encoding does not have a +definition for that accent then LaTeX will use the definition from +OT1 +

    +

    That is, this command is equivalent to this call (see \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent). +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextCommandDefault[1]{cmd}
    +   {\UseTextAccent{encoding}{cmd}{#1}}
    +
    + +

    Note that \DeclareTextAccentDefault works for any one-argument +fontenc command, not just the accent command. +

    + +
    + +

    4.1.4 \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand

    + + + + + +

    Synopsis, one of: +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}{defn}
    +\DeclareTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}[nargs]{defn}
    +\DeclareTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn}
    +
    + +

    or one of: +

    +
    +
    \ProvideTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}{defn}
    +\ProvideTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}[nargs]{defn}
    +\ProvideTextCommand{cmd}{encoding}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn}
    +
    + +

    Define the command cmd, which will be specific to one encoding. +The command name cmd must begin with a backslash, \. These +commands can only appear in the preamble. Redefining cmd does +not cause an error. The defined command will be robust even if the code +in defn is fragile (see \protect). +

    +

    For example, the file t1enc.def contains this line. +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextCommand{\textperthousand}{T1}{\%\char 24 }
    +
    + +

    With that, you can express parts per thousand. +

    +
    +
    \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}  % in preamble
    +  ...
    +Legal limit is \( 0.8 \)\textperthousand.
    +
    + +

    If you change the font encoding to OT1 then you get an error like +‘LaTeX Error: Command \textperthousand unavailable in encoding +OT1’. +

    +

    The \ProvideTextCommand variant does the same, except that it +does nothing if cmd is already defined. The +\DeclareTextSymbol command is faster than this one for simple +slot-to-glyph association (see \DeclareTextSymbol) +

    +

    The optional nargs and optargsdefault arguments play the +same role here as in \newcommand (see \newcommand & \renewcommand). Briefly, nargs is an integer from 0 to 9 +specifying the number of arguments that the defined command cmd +takes. This number includes any optional argument. Omitting this +argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that cmd will have +no arguments. And, if optargsdefault is present then the first +argument of \cmd is optional, with default value +optargdefault (which may be the empty string). If +optargsdefault is not present then \cmd does not take +an optional argument. +

    + +
    + +

    4.1.5 \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault

    + + + + + + +

    Synopsis: +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextCommandDefault{cmd}{defn}
    +
    + +

    or: +

    +
    +
    \ProvideTextCommandDefault{cmd}{defn}
    +
    + +

    Give a default definition for cmd, for when that command is not +defined in the encoding currently in force. This default should only use +encodings known to be available. +

    +

    This makes \copyright available. +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\copyright}{\textcircled{c}}
    +
    + +

    It uses only an encoding (OMS) that is always available. +

    +

    The \DeclareTextCommandDefault should not occur in the encoding +definition files since those files should declare only commands for use +when you select that encoding. It should instead be in a package. +

    +

    As with the related non-default commands, the +\ProvideTextCommandDefault has exactly the same behavior as +\DeclareTextCommandDefault except that it does nothing if +cmd is already defined (see \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand). So, packages can use it to provide fallbacks +that other packages can improve upon. +

    + +
    + +

    4.1.6 \DeclareTextComposite

    + + + + +

    Synopsis: +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextComposite{cmd}{encoding}{simple_object}{slot}
    +
    + +

    Access an accented glyph directly, that is, without having to put an +accent over a separate character. +

    +

    This line from t1enc.def means that \^o will cause +LaTeX to typeset lowercase ‘o’ by taking the character +directly from location 224 in the font. +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{o}{244}
    +
    + +

    See fontenc package, for a list of common encodings. The +simple_object should be a single character or a single command. +The slot argument is usually a positive integer represented in +decimal (although octal or hexadecimal are possible). Normally +cmd has already been declared for this encoding, either with +\DeclareTextAccent or with a one-argument +\DeclareTextCommand. In t1enc.def, the above line follows +the \DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2} command. +

    + +
    + +

    4.1.7 \DeclareTextCompositeCommand

    + + + + +

    Synopsis: +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{cmd}{encoding}{arg}{code}
    +
    + +

    A more general version of \DeclareTextComposite that runs +arbitrary code with cmd. +

    +

    This allows accents on ‘i’ to act like accents on dotless i, +\i. +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i}
    +
    + +

    See fontenc package, for a list of common encodings. Normally +cmd will have already been declared with \DeclareTextAccent +or as a one argument \DeclareTextCommand. +

    + +
    + +

    4.1.8 \DeclareTextSymbol

    + + + + +

    Synopsis: +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextSymbol{cmd}{encoding}{slot}
    +
    + +

    Define a symbol in the encoding encoding at the location +slot. Symbols defined in this way are for use in text, not +mathematics. +

    +

    For example, this line from t1enc.def declares the number of the +glyph to use for «, the left guillemet. +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextSymbol{\guillemotleft}{T1}{19}
    +
    + +

    The command \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{T1}{\char +19} has the same effect but is slower (see \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand). +

    +

    See fontenc package, for a list of common encodings. The slot +can be specified in decimal, or octal (as in '023), or +hexadecimal (as in "13), although decimal has the advantage that +single quote or double quote could be redefined by another package. +

    +

    If cmd has already been defined then \DeclareTextSymbol +does not give an error but it does log the redefinition in the +transcript file. +

    + +
    + +

    4.1.9 \DeclareTextSymbolDefault

    + + + + + +

    Synopsis: +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{cmd}{encoding}
    +
    + +

    If there is an encoding-specific symbol command cmd but there is no +associated \DeclareTextSymbol for that encoding, then this command +will pick up the slack, by saying to get the symbol as described for +encoding. +

    +

    For example, to declare that if the current encoding has no meaning for +\textdollar then use the one from OT1, declare this. +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdollar}{OT1}
    +
    + +

    That is, this command is equivalent to this call (see \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent). +

    +
    +
    \DeclareTextCommandDefault{cmd}
    +   {\UseTextSymbol{encoding}{cmd}}
    +
    + +

    Note that \DeclareTextSymbolDefault can be used to define a +default for any zero-argument fontenc command. +

    + +
    + +

    4.1.10 \LastDeclaredEncoding

    + + + +

    Synopsis: +

    +
    +
    \LastDeclaredEncoding
    +
    + +

    Get the name of the most recently declared encoding. The +\DeclareFontEncoding command stores the name so that it can be +retrieved with this command (see \DeclareFontEncoding). +

    +

    This relies on \LastDeclaredEncoding rather than give the +name of the encoding explicitly. +

    +
    +
    \DeclareFontEncoding{JH1}{}{}
    +\DeclareTextAccent{\'}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{0}
    +
    + + +
    + +

    4.1.11 \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent

    + + + + +

    Synopsis: +

    +
    +
    \UseTextSymbol{encoding}{cmd}
    +
    + +

    or: +

    +
    +
    \UseTextAccent{encoding}{cmd}{text}
    +
    + +

    Use a symbol or accent not from the current encoding. +

    +

    In general, to use a fontenc command in an encoding where it is +not defined, and if the command has no arguments, then you can use it +like this: +

    +
    +
    \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\ss}
    +
    + +

    which is equivalent to this (note the outer braces form a group, so LaTeX +reverts back to the prior encoding after the \ss): +

    +
    +
    {\fontencoding{OT1}\selectfont\ss}
    +
    + +

    Similarly, to use a fontenc command in an encoding where it is +not defined, and if the command has one argument, you can use it like this: +

    +
    +
    \UseTextAccent{OT1}{\'}{a}
    +
    + +

    which is equivalent to this (again note the outer braces forming a group): +

    +
    +
    {fontencoding{OT1}\selectfont\'{\fontencoding{enc_in_use}\selectfont a}}
    +
    + +

    Here, enc_in_use is the encoding in force before this sequence +of commands, so that ‘a’ is typeset using the current encoding +and only the accent is taken from OT1. +

    + +
    +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: Fonts   [Contents][Index]

    +
    +

    4.2 Font styles

    + + + + + +

    The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. +

    + +

    In the table below the listed commands, the \text... commands, +are used with an argument as in \textit{text}. This is +the preferred form. But shown after it in parenthesis is the +corresponding declaration form, which is often useful. This +form takes no arguments, as in {\itshape text}. The +scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command +or the end of the current group. In addition, each has an environment +form such as \begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}, which we’ll +describe further at the end of the section. +

    +

    These commands, in any of the three forms, are cumulative; for instance +you can get bold sans serif by saying either of +\sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily. +

    + + +

    One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic +corrections if needed (see \/). Specifically, they insert the +italic correction unless the following character is in the list +\nocorrlist, which by default consists of period and comma. +To suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use +\nocorr at the start or end of the command argument, such as +\textit{\nocorr text} or \textsc{text \nocorr}. +

    +
    +
    \textrm (\rmfamily)
    +
    + +

    Roman. +

    +
    +
    \textit (\itshape)
    +
    + +

    Italics. +

    +
    +
    \textmd (\mdseries)
    +
    + +

    Medium weight (default). +

    +
    +
    \textbf (\bfseries)
    +
    + +

    Boldface. +

    +
    +
    \textup (\upshape)
    +
    + +

    Upright (default). +

    +
    +
    \textsl (\slshape)
    +
    + +

    Slanted. +

    +
    +
    \textsf (\sffamily)
    +
    + +

    Sans serif. +

    +
    +
    \textsc (\scshape)
    +
    + +

    Small caps. +

    +
    +
    \texttt (\ttfamily)
    +
    + +

    Typewriter. +

    +
    +
    \textnormal (\normalfont)
    +
    + +

    Main document font. +

    +
    +
    + + + +

    Although it also changes fonts, the \emph{text} command +is semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a +substitute for \textit. For example, \emph{start +text \emph{middle text} end text} will result in the +start text and end text in italics, but middle text +will be in roman. +

    +

    LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally +switch to the given style, that is, are not cumulative. They are +used as declarations: {\cmd...} instead of +\cmd{...}. +

    +

    (The unconditional commands below are an older version of font +switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most +circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is what is +needed.) +

    +
    +
    \bf + +
    +
    +

    Switch to bold face. +

    +
    +
    \cal + +
    +
    + +

    Switch to calligraphic letters for math. +

    +
    +
    \it + +
    +
    +

    Italics. +

    +
    +
    \rm + +
    +
    +

    Roman. +

    +
    +
    \sc + +
    +
    +

    Small caps. +

    +
    +
    \sf + +
    +
    +

    Sans serif. +

    +
    +
    \sl + +
    +
    + +

    Slanted (oblique). +

    +
    +
    \tt + +
    +
    + + +

    Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width). +

    +
    +
    + +

    The \em command is the unconditional version of \emph. +

    +

    The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not +cumulative, so \mathbf{\mathit{symbol}} does not +create a boldface and italic symbol; instead, it will just be in +italics. This is because typically math symbols need consistent +typographic treatment, regardless of the surrounding environment. +

    +
    +
    \mathrm
    +
    +

    Roman, for use in math mode. +

    +
    +
    \mathbf
    +
    +

    Boldface, for use in math mode. +

    +
    +
    \mathsf
    +
    +

    Sans serif, for use in math mode. +

    +
    +
    \mathtt
    +
    +

    Typewriter, for use in math mode. +

    +
    +
    \mathit
    +
    (\mit)
    +

    Italics, for use in math mode. +

    +
    +
    \mathnormal
    +
    +

    For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration. +

    +
    +
    \mathcal
    +
    +

    Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode. +

    +
    +
    + + + + +

    In addition, the command \mathversion{bold} can be used for +switching to bold letters and symbols in +formulas. \mathversion{normal} restores the default. +

    + + + + +

    Finally, the command \oldstylenums{numerals} will +typeset so-called “old-style” numerals, which have differing heights +and depths (and sometimes widths) from the standard “lining” +numerals, which all have the same height as uppercase letters. +LaTeX’s default fonts support this, and will respect \textbf +(but not other styles; there are no italic old-style numerals in +Computer Modern). Many other fonts have old-style numerals also; +sometimes package options are provided to make them the default. FAQ +entry: https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-osf. +

    + +
    +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: Fonts   [Contents][Index]

    +
    +

    4.3 Font sizes

    + + + + + +

    The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. +The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font +size used (in points) with the ‘10pt’, ‘11pt’, and +‘12pt’ document size options, respectively (see Document class options). +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Command10pt11pt12pt
    \tiny566
    \scriptsize788
    \footnotesize8910
    \small91010.95
    \normalsize (default)1010.9512
    \large121214.4
    \Large14.414.417.28
    \LARGE17.2817.2820.74
    \huge20.7420.7424.88
    \Huge24.8824.8824.88
    + + +

    The commands are listed here in declaration (not environment) form, +since that is how they are typically used. For example. +

    +
    +
    \begin{quotation} \small
    +  The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
    +\end{quotation}
    +
    + +

    Here, the scope of the \small lasts until the end of the +quotation environment. It would also end at the next type +style command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it +in curly braces {\small This text is typeset in the small font.}. +

    + +

    An environment form of each of these commands is also defined; for +instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. However, in practice +this form can easily lead to unwanted spaces at the beginning and/or +end of the environment without careful consideration, so it’s +generally less error-prone to stick to the declaration form. +

    +

    (Aside: Technically, due to the way LaTeX defines \begin and +\end, nearly every command that does not take an argument +technically has an environment form. But in almost all cases, it would +only cause confusion to use it. The reason for mentioning the +environment form of the font size declarations specifically is that +this particular use is not rare.) +

    + +
    +
    +

    +Previous: , Up: Fonts   [Contents][Index]

    +
    +

    4.4 Low-level font commands

    + + + + +

    These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and +packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available +ones.

    -
    +
    \fontencoding{encoding}
    -
    +

    Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There are a large number of valid encodings. The most common are OT1, Knuth’s original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and @@ -2307,13 +3055,13 @@ accented characters used by the most widespread European languages hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide.

    -
    +
    \fontfamily{family}
    -
    - - +
    + +

    Select the font family. The web page -http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/ provides one way to browse +https://tug.org/FontCatalogue/ provides one way to browse through many of the fonts easily used with LaTeX. Here are examples of some common families.

    @@ -2341,10 +3089,10 @@ examples of some common families. -
    +
    \fontseries{series}
    -
    - +
    +

    Select the font series. A series combines a weight and a width. Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible combinations. Some common combined series values include: @@ -2357,7 +3105,7 @@ combinations. Some common combined series values include: bxBold extended - +

    The possible values for weight, individually, are:

    @@ -2372,7 +3120,7 @@ combinations. Some common combined series values include:
    ubUltra bold
    - +

    The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces):

    @@ -2395,9 +3143,9 @@ weight and width are m, in which case use just one

    \fontshape{shape}
    -
    - -

    Select font shape. Valid shapes are: +

    + +

    Select font shape. Valid shapes are:

    @@ -2411,51 +3159,32 @@ weight and width are m, in which case use just one

    The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and small caps are often missing as well.

    - +
    \fontsize{size}{skip}
    -
    - - +
    + +

    Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both parameters defaults to points (pt). The line spacing is the nominal vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is stored in the parameter \baselineskip. The default \baselineskip for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the \fontsize. Changing \baselineskip directly is inadvisable since its value is -reset every time a size change happens; see \baselinestretch, next. -

    -
    -
    \baselinestretch
    -
    -

    LaTeX multiplies the line spacing by the value of the -\baselinestretch parameter; the default factor is 1. A change -takes effect when \selectfont (see below) is called. You can -make a line skip change happen for the entire document, for instance -doubling it, by doing \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0} in -the preamble. -

    - - - - -

    However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the -setspace package. In addition to offering a number of spacing -options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in places -where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure -captions. See the package documentation. -

    -
    +reset every time a size change happens; instead use +\baselinestretch. (see \baselineskip & \baselinestretch). +

    +
    \linespread{factor}
    -
    +

    Equivalent to \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and therefore must be followed by \selectfont to have any effect. Best specified in the preamble, or use the setspace package, as just described.

    -
    +
    \selectfont
    -
    +

    The effects of the font commands described above do not happen until \selectfont is called, as in \fontfamily{familyname}\selectfont. It is often useful @@ -2463,9 +3192,9 @@ to put this in a macro:
    \newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{familyname}\selectfont}
    (see \newcommand & \renewcommand).

    -
    +
    \usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}
    -
    +

    The same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape with the given parameters, followed by \selectfont. For example: @@ -2479,45 +3208,43 @@ followed by \selectfont. For example:


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    5 Layout

    +

    5 Layout

    - +

    Commands for controlling the general page layout.

    nUpright (normal)
    - + - - - - -
    - -
    +

    Next: , Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    5.1 \onecolumn

    +

    5.1 \onecolumn

    - - + +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -2532,17 +3259,15 @@ behavior (see Document class options). Th


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    5.2 \twocolumn

    +

    5.2 \twocolumn

    - - - + + +

    Synopses:

    @@ -2564,31 +3289,31 @@ typesetting starts.

    \columnsep - +
    -

    The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with a -command such as \setlength{\columnsep}{40pt} You must change -it before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good +

    The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with a +command such as \setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}. You must change +it before the two column mode starts; in the preamble is a good place.

    \columnseprule - +
    -

    The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between -the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is no rule. -Change it with a command such as +

    The width of the rule between columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that +there is no rule. Otherwise, the rule appears halfway between the two +columns. Change it with a command such as \setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}, before the two-column -environment starts. +mode starts.

    \columnwidth - +
    -

    The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to +

    The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to \textwidth. In two-column mode by default LaTeX sets the -width of each of the two columns to be half of \textwidth minus -\columnsep. +width of each of the two columns, \columnwidth, to be half of +\textwidth minus \columnsep.

    @@ -2600,14 +3325,14 @@ and see table). LaTeX places starred floats at the top of a The following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.

    -
    +
    \dbltopfraction - +

    The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that the height of a table* or figure* environment must not -exceed 0.7\textheight . If the height of your starred float +exceed 0.7\textheight. If the height of your starred float environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following actions to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the document:

    @@ -2625,37 +3350,37 @@ to avoid going to float pages so soon.

    You can redefine it, as with \renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}.

    -
    +
    \dblfloatpagefraction - +
    -

    For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction +

    For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of blank space. LaTeX’s default is 0.5. Change it with \renewcommand.

    -
    +
    \dblfloatsep - +
    -

    On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance +

    On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page. The default is 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for a document set at 10pt or 11pt, and 14pt plus2pt minus4pt for a document set at 12pt.

    -
    +
    \dbltextfloatsep - +
    -

    This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or +

    This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page and the main text. The default is 20pt plus2pt minus4pt.

    -
    +
    \dbltopnumber - +
    -

    On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the +

    On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The LaTeX default is 2.

    @@ -2687,15 +3412,13 @@ Two column text here.
    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    5.3 \flushbottom

    +

    5.3 \flushbottom

    - +

    Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the @@ -2717,16 +3440,14 @@ is to, in a final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages


    - -
    + - -

    5.4 \raggedbottom

    +

    5.4 \raggedbottom

    - - + +

    Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided @@ -2738,65 +3459,63 @@ option (see Document class options).


    - -
    +

    -Next: , Previous: , Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    5.5 Page layout parameters

    +

    5.5 Page layout parameters

    - - - - - - + + + + + +
    \columnsep - +
    \columnseprule - +
    \columnwidth - +
    -
    - - -

    The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the +

    + + +

    The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class option twocolumn is in effect (see Document class options). See \twocolumn.

    \headheight - +
    -
    -

    Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in the +

    +

    Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in the article, report, and book classes is ‘12pt’, at all type sizes.

    \headsep - +
    -
    -

    Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of +

    +

    Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of the main text. The default in the article and report classes is ‘25pt’. In the book class the default is: if the -document is set at 10pt then it is ‘0.25in’, and at 11pt and 12pt +document is set at 10pt then it is ‘0.25in’, and at 11pt or 12pt it is ‘0.275in’.

    \footskip - +
    -
    -

    Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of +

    +

    Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of the page footer. The default in the article and report classes is ‘30pt’. In the book class the default is: when the type size is 10pt the default is ‘0.35in’, while at 11pt it is @@ -2804,10 +3523,10 @@ the type size is 10pt the default is ‘0.35in’, while at

    \linewidth - +
    -
    -

    Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list +

    +

    Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list (see list). That is, the nominal value for \linewidth is to equal \textwidth but for each nested list the \linewidth is decreased by the sum of that list’s \leftmargin and @@ -2815,18 +3534,18 @@ is decreased by the sum of that list’s \leftmargin and

    \marginparpush - +
    \marginsep - +
    \marginparwidth - +
    -
    - - -

    The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the horizontal +

    + + +

    The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the horizontal space between the text body and the marginal notes, and the horizontal width of the notes.

    @@ -2852,19 +3571,19 @@ distance.

    \oddsidemargin - +
    \evensidemargin - +
    -
    - -

    The \oddsidemargin is the extra distance between the left side of +

    + +

    The \oddsidemargin length is the extra distance between the left side of the page and the text’s left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the document class option twoside is chosen and on all pages when oneside is in effect. When twoside is in effect, on even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is -evensidemargin. +\evensidemargin.

    LaTeX’s default is that \oddsidemargin is 40% of the difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth, and @@ -2872,28 +3591,28 @@ difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth, and

    \paperheight - +
    -
    -

    The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area. +

    +

    The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area. Normally set with a document class option, as in \documentclass[a4paper]{article} (see Document class options).

    \paperwidth - +
    -
    -

    The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area. +

    +

    The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area. Normally set with a document class option, as in \documentclass[a4paper]{article} (see Document class options).

    \textheight - +
    -
    -

    The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is set at +

    +

    The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is set at a nominal type size of 10pt then for an article or report the default is ‘43\baselineskip’, while for a book it is ‘41\baselineskip’. At a type size of 11pt the default is @@ -2902,10 +3621,10 @@ the default is ‘43\baselineskip’, while for a boo

    \textwidth - +
    -
    -

    The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an +

    +

    The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an article or report document, the default is ‘345pt’ when the chosen type size is 10pt, the default is ‘360pt’ at 11pt, and it is ‘390pt’ at 12pt. For a book document, the default @@ -2924,21 +3643,21 @@ column), while \linewidth may decrease for nested lists. specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the minipage or \parbox.

    - -
    +
    \hsize - +
    -

    This entry is included for completeness: \hsize is the TeX +

    +

    This entry is included for completeness: \hsize is the TeX primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal LaTeX documents.

    \topmargin - +
    -
    -

    Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the +

    +

    Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is computed based on many other parameters: \paperheight - 2in - \headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip, @@ -2946,10 +3665,10 @@ and then divided by two.

    \topskip - +
    -
    -

    Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of +

    +

    Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default is the same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at a type size of 10pt.

    @@ -2958,13 +3677,128 @@ same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at a type size of 1
    - -
    -

    -Previous: , Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

    -
    - -

    5.6 Floats

    +
    +

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: Layout   [Contents][Index]

    +
    +

    5.6 \baselineskip & \baselinestretch

    + + + + + + + + + +

    The \baselineskip is a rubber length (see Lengths). It gives +the leading, the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from +baseline to baseline. +

    +

    Ordinarily document authors do not directly change \baselineskip +while writing. Instead, it is set by the low level font selection +command \fontsize (see low level font commands fontsize). +The \baselineskip’s value is reset every time a font change +happens and so any direct change to \baselineskip would vanish +the next time there was a font switch. For how to influence line +spacing, see the discussion of \baselinestretch below. +

    +

    Usually, a font’s size and baseline skip is assigned by the font +designer. These numbers are nominal in the sense that if, for instance, +a font’s style file has the command \fontsize{10pt}{12pt} +then that does not mean that the characters in the font are 10pt tall; +for instance, parentheses and accented capitals may be taller. Nor does +it mean that if the lines are spaced less than 12pt apart then they risk +touching. Rather these numbers are typographic judgements. (Often, the +\baselineskip is about twenty percent larger than the font size.) +

    +

    The \baselineskip is not a property of each line but of the +entire paragraph. As a result, large text in the middle of a paragraph, +such as a single {\Huge Q}, will be squashed into its line. +TeX will make sure it doesn’t scrape up against the line above but +won’t change the \baselineskip for that one line to make extra +room above. For the fix, use a \strut (see \strut). +

    +

    The value of \baselineskip that TeX uses for the paragraph is +the value in effect at the blank line or command that ends the paragraph +unit. So if a document contains this paragraph then its lines will be +scrunched together, compared to lines in surrounding paragraphs. +

    +
    +
    Many people see a page break between text and a displayed equation as 
    +bad style, so in effect the display is part of the paragraph.
    +Because this display is in footnotesize, the entire paragraph has the
    +baseline spacing matching that size.
    +{\footnotesize $$a+b = c$$}
    +
    + + + + +

    The process for making paragraphs is that when a new line is added, if +the depth of the previous line plus the height of the new line is less +than \baselineskip then TeX inserts vertical glue to make up +the difference. There are two fine points. The first is that if the +lines would be too close together, closer than \lineskiplimit, +then TeX instead uses \lineskip as the interline glue. The +second is that TeX doesn’t actually use the depth of the previous +line. Instead it uses \prevdepth, which usually contains that +depth. But at the beginning of the paragraph (or any vertical list) +or just after a rule, \prevdepth has the value -1000pt and this +special value tells TeX not to insert any interline glue at the +paragraph start. +

    +

    In the standard classes \lineskiplimit is 0pt and +\lineskip is 1pt. By the prior paragraph then, the distance +between lines can approach zero but if it becomes zero (or less than +zero) then the lines jump to 1pt apart. +

    +

    Sometimes authors must, for editing purposes, put the document in double +space or one-and-a-half space. The right way to influence the interline +distance is via \baselinestretch. It scales +\baselineskip, and has a default value of 1.0. It is a command, +not a length, so change the scale factor as in +\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.5}\selectfont. +

    +

    The most straightforward way to change the line spacing for an entire +document is to put \linespread{factor} in the preamble. +For double spacing, take factor to be 1.6 and for one-and-a-half +spacing use 1.3. These number are rough: for instance, since the +\baselineskip is about 1.2 times the font size, multiplying by +1.6 gives a font size to baseline ratio of about 2. (The +\linespread command is defined as +\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor} so it won’t +take effect until a font setting happens. But that always takes place at +the start of a document, so there you don’t need to follow it with +\selectfont.) +

    + + + +

    A simpler approach is the setspace package. The basic example: +

    +
    +
    \usepackage{setspace}
    +\doublespacing  % or \onehalfspacing for 1.5
    +
    + +

    In the preamble these will start the document off with that sizing. +But you can also use these declarations in the document body to change +the spacing from that point forward, and consequently there is +\singlespacing to return the spacing to normal. In the +document body, a better practice than using the declarations is to use +environments, such as \begin{doublespace} +... \end{doublespace}. The package also has commands to do +arbitrary spacing: \setstretch{factor} and +\begin{spacing}{factor} ... \end{spacing}. +

    + +
    + +

    5.7 Floats

    Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken across pages. They must be typeset outside of the normal flow of text, @@ -2991,8 +3825,8 @@ float that is big may migrate to the end of the document. In which event, because all floats in a class must appear in sequential order, every following float in that class also appears at the end.

    - - + +

    In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its placement argument. The possible values are a sequence of the @@ -3009,7 +3843,7 @@ both article and book classes, is tbp. allowed for full-width floats (figure*) with double-column output. To ameliorate this, use the stfloats or dblfloatfix package, but see the discussion at caveats in the -FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. +FAQ: https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-2colfloat.

    h
    @@ -3017,18 +3851,18 @@ FAQ: http://w appears. However, h is not allowed by itself; t is automatically added.

    -
    - - + + +

    To absolutely force a float to appear “here”, you can \usepackage{float} and use the H specifier which it defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere. +https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-figurehere.

    p
    -
    +

    (Page of floats)—on a separate float page, which is a page containing no text, only floats.

    @@ -3058,8 +3892,8 @@ use the afterpage package and issue \afterpage{\clearpage}. This will wait until the current page is finished and then flush all outstanding floats.

    - - + +

    LaTeX can typeset a float before where it appears in the source (although on the same output page) if there is a t specifier in @@ -3067,7 +3901,7 @@ the placement parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting the t is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using the flafter package or using the command - + \suppressfloats[t], which causes floats for the top position on this page to moved to the next page.

    @@ -3077,35 +3911,35 @@ non-float text (change them with

    \bottomfraction - +
    -
    -

    The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at +

    +

    The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at the bottom; default ‘.3’.

    \floatpagefraction - +
    -
    -

    The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; +

    +

    The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; default ‘.5’.

    \textfraction - +
    -
    -

    Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too +

    +

    Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a different page. The default is ‘.2’.

    \topfraction - +
    -
    -

    Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before +

    +

    Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before floats; default ‘.7’.

    @@ -3116,27 +3950,27 @@ expression}
    ):

    \floatsep - +
    -
    -

    Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default +

    +

    Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’.

    \intextsep - +
    -
    -

    Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default +

    +

    Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for 10 point and 11 point documents, and ‘14pt plus4pt minus4pt’ for 12 point documents.

    \textfloatsep - +
    -
    -

    Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; +

    +

    Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’.

    @@ -3147,69 +3981,69 @@ number}
    ):

    bottomnumber - +
    -
    -

    Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; +

    +

    Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; default 1.

    dbltopnumber - +
    -
    -

    Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a +

    +

    Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a two-column page; default 2.

    topnumber - +
    -
    -

    Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; +

    +

    Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; default 2.

    totalnumber - +
    -
    -

    Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. +

    +

    Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.

    The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats contains +https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-floats contains suggestions for relaxing LaTeX’s default parameters to reduce the problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach’s article “How to influence the position of float environments like figure and table in LaTeX?” -(http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf). +(https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2014-FMi-TUB-tb111mitt-float-placement.pdf).


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    6 Sectioning

    - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +

    6 Sectioning

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

    Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc. All sectioning commands have the same form, one of: @@ -3239,10 +4073,10 @@ not available in article. Subparagraph\subparagraph5 - +

    All these commands have a *-form that prints title as usual -but is not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents. -An example of using this is for an appendix in an article . The +but does not number it and does not make an entry in the table of contents. +An example of using this is for an appendix in an article. The input \appendix\section{Appendix} gives the output ‘A Appendix’ (see \appendix). You can lose the numbering ‘A’ by instead entering \section*{Appendix} (articles often omit a @@ -3265,79 +4099,87 @@ of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit (see Sectioning/tocdepth).

    LaTeX expects that before you have a \subsection you will have -a \section and, in a book, that before a \section you will -have a \chapter. Otherwise you can get a something like a -subsection numbered ‘3.0.1’. +a \section and, in a book class document, that before a +\section you will have a \chapter. Otherwise you can get +something like a subsection numbered ‘3.0.1’. +

    + + + +

    LaTeX lets you change the appearance of the sectional units. As a +simple example, you can change the section numbering to upper-case +letters with \renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}} in the +preamble (see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). CTAN +has many packages that make this adjustment easier, notably +titlesec.

    -

    Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands. +

    Two counters relate to the appearance of headings made by sectioning commands.

    secnumdepth - -
    -
    - -

    Controls which sectioning commands are -numbered. Suppress numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than -level \setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} -(see \setcounter). See the above table for the level numbers. For -instance, if the secnumdepth is 1 in an article then a -\section{Introduction} command will produce output like ‘1 -Introduction’ while \subsection{Discussion} will produce output -like ‘Discussion’, without the number. LaTeX’s default -secnumdepth is 3 in article class and  2 in the -book and report classes. + + +

    + +

    Controls which sectioning unit are numbered. Setting the counter with +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} will suppress +numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than level +(see \setcounter). See the above table for the level numbers. +For instance, if the secnumdepth is 1 in an article then +a \section{Introduction} command will produce output like +‘1 Introduction’ while \subsection{Discussion} will +produce output like ‘Discussion’, without the number. LaTeX’s +default secnumdepth is 3 in article class and + 2 in the book and report classes.

    tocdepth - +
    -
    - -

    Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of contents. +

    + +

    Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of contents. The setting \setcounter{tocdepth}{level} makes the sectioning units at level be the smallest ones listed (see \setcounter). See the above table for the level numbers. For instance, if tocdepth is 1 then the table of contents will list sections but not subsections. LaTeX’s default -secnumdepth is 3 in article class and  2 in the +tocdepth is 3 in article class and  2 in the book and report classes.

    - - - - - - - -
    - -
    +

    Next: , Up: Sectioning   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    6.1 \part

    +

    6.1 \part

    - - - + + +

    Synopsis, one of:

    @@ -3387,33 +4229,31 @@ out the break in the table of contents.

    For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in the table of contents, the level number of a part is -1 -(see Sectioning/secnumdepth and see Sectioning/tocdepth). +(see Sectioning/secnumdepth, and Sectioning/tocdepth).

    - - + +

    In the class article, if a paragraph immediately follows the part title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package indentfirst.

    - - + +

    One package to change the behavior of \part is titlesec. See its documentation on CTAN.


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Sectioning   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    6.2 \chapter

    +

    6.2 \chapter

    - - + +

    Synopsis, one of:

    @@ -3472,15 +4312,15 @@ the title but that doesn’t work well with running headers so it omits the break in the contents

    -
    \chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
    +
    \chapter[Given it all; my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
     

    For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is 0 (see Sectioning/secnumdepth and see Sectioning/tocdepth).

    - - + +

    The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package @@ -3497,8 +4337,8 @@ something like ‘Lecture 1’, put in the preamble either \makeatother

    - - + +

    To make this change because of the primary language for the document, see the package babel. @@ -3508,8 +4348,8 @@ necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any running headers. To make that page completely blank, see \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.

    - - + +

    To change the behavior of the \chapter command, you can copy its definition from the LaTeX format file and make adjustments. But @@ -3532,16 +4372,14 @@ running headers.


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Sectioning   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    6.3 \section

    +

    6.3 \section

    - - + +

    Synopsis, one of:

    @@ -3608,15 +4446,15 @@ so it is omitted from the contents and headers. the table of contents, the level number of a section is 1 (see Sectioning/secnumdepth and see Sectioning/tocdepth).

    - - + +

    The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the package indentfirst.

    - - + +

    In general, to change the behavior of the \section command, there are a number of options. One is the \@startsection command @@ -3639,16 +4477,14 @@ example below gives a sense of what they can do.


    - -
    + - -

    6.4 \subsection

    +

    6.4 \subsection

    - - + +

    Synopsis, one of:

    @@ -3680,13 +4516,13 @@ holds in article except that there are no chapters in that class so it looks like ‘2.3 title’.

    The * form shows title. -But it does not show the section number, does not increment the -section counter, and produces no table of contents entry. +But it does not show the subsection number, does not increment the +subsection counter, and produces no table of contents entry.

    -

    The optional argument toc-title will appear as the section title +

    The optional argument toc-title will appear as the subsection title in the table of contents (see Table of contents etc.). If it is -not present then title will be there. This shows the full name in -the title of the section, +not present then title will be there. This shows the full text in +the title of the subsection,

    \subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
    @@ -3700,15 +4536,15 @@ paper’ on the contents page.
     the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is 2
     (see Sectioning/secnumdepth and see Sectioning/tocdepth).
     

    - - + +

    The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as is a standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the package indentfirst.

    - - + +

    There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the \subsection command. One is the \@startsection command @@ -3730,21 +4566,19 @@ text.


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Sectioning   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    6.5 \subsubsection, \paragraph, \subparagraph

    +

    6.5 \subsubsection, \paragraph, \subparagraph

    - - - - - - + + + + + +

    Synopsis, one of:

    @@ -3808,15 +4642,15 @@ the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is 3, of a paragraph is 4, and of a subparagraph is 5 (see Sectioning/secnumdepth and see Sectioning/tocdepth).

    - - + +

    The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented, as is a standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the package indentfirst.

    - - + +

    There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these commands. One is the \@startsection command (see \@startsection). @@ -3825,18 +4659,16 @@ There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including


    - -
    + - -

    6.6 \appendix

    +

    6.6 \appendix

    - - - + + +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -3864,44 +4696,49 @@ book or report, and in an article resets the section and

    the first two will generate output numbered ‘Chapter 1’ and ‘Chapter 2’. After the \appendix the numbering will be -‘Appendix A’ and ‘Appendix B’. See Larger book template +‘Appendix A’ and ‘Appendix B’. See Larger book template, for another example.

    - - + + +

    The appendix package adds the command \appendixpage to put a separate ‘Appendices’ in the document body before the first appendix, and the command \addappheadtotoc to do the same in the table of contents. You can reset the name -‘Appendix’ with a command like +‘Appendices’ with a command like \renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}, as well as a number of other features. See the documentation on CTAN.


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Sectioning   [Contents][Index]

    +

    6.7 \frontmatter, \mainmatter, \backmatter

    - -

    6.7 \frontmatter, \mainmatter, \backmatter

    - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + -

    Synopsis, one of: +

    Synopsis, one or more of:

    \frontmatter
    +...
     \mainmatter
    +...
     \backmatter
    +...
     

    Format a book class document differently according to which part @@ -3914,27 +4751,29 @@ pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not numbered.) The back matter may contain such things as a glossary, notes, a bibliography, and an index.

    -

    The \frontmatter declaration makes the pages numbered in -lowercase roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each -chapter’s title appears in the table of contents; if you use other -sectioning commands here, use the *-version (see Sectioning). -The \mainmatter changes the behavior back to the expected -version, and resets the page number. The \backmatter leaves the -page numbering alone but switches the chapters back to being not -numbered. See Larger book template for an example using the three. +

    The \frontmatter command makes the pages numbered in lowercase +roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each chapter’s title +appears in the table of contents; if you use other sectioning commands +here, use the *-version (see Sectioning). +

    +

    The \mainmatter command changes the behavior back to the expected +version, and resets the page number. +

    +

    The \backmatter command leaves the page numbering alone but +switches the chapters back to being not numbered. +

    +

    See Larger book template, for an example using these three commands.


    - -
    + - -

    6.8 \@startsection

    +

    6.8 \@startsection, typesetting sectional unit headings

    - - + +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -3974,16 +4813,17 @@ make such a command you may want to use the \secdef command. {style}}
    -

    redefines \section to have the form -\section*[toctitle]{title} (here too, the -star * is optional). See Sectioning. This implies that -when you write a command like \renewcommand{section}{...}, -the \@startsection{...} must come last in the definition. See -the examples below. +

    redefines \section while keeping its standard calling form +\section*[toctitle]{title} (in which, for reminder, +the star * is optional). See Sectioning. This implies +that when you write a command like +\renewcommand{\section}{...}, the +\@startsection{...} must come last in the definition. See the +examples below.

    name
    -

    Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This counter +

    Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This counter must be defined separately. Most commonly this is either section, subsection, or paragraph. Although in those cases the counter name is the same as the sectioning command @@ -3995,8 +4835,8 @@ example below.

    level
    -

    An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command. -See Sectioning for the list of standard level numbers. +

    An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command. +See Sectioning, for the list of standard level numbers.

    If level is less than or equal to the value of the counter secnumdepth then titles for this sectioning command will be @@ -4014,16 +4854,16 @@ list sections but not subsections.

    indent
    -

    A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with respect +

    A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with respect to the left margin. To have the title flush with the margin use 0pt. A negative indentation such as -\parindent will move the title into the left margin.

    beforeskip
    -

    The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that +

    The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that is inserted before this sectioning unit’s title. This space will be -discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the top of a fresh +discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the beginning of a page. If this number is negative then the first paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the negative of 1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt @@ -4048,7 +4888,7 @@ page.)

    afterskip
    -

    This is a length. If afterskip is non-negative then this is the +

    This is a length. If afterskip is non-negative then this is the vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit’s title header. If it is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so that it becomes part of the next paragraph. In this case the absolute value of @@ -4072,7 +4912,7 @@ header’s from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative

    style
    -

    Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below. Typical +

    Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below. Typical commands to use here are \centering, \raggedright, \normalfont, \hrule, or \newpage. The last command in style may be one that takes one argument, such as @@ -4085,20 +4925,26 @@ produce titles that are bold and uppercase.

    These are LaTeX’s defaults for the first three sectioning units that are defined with \@startsection, for the article, -book, and report classes. For section, the level is -1, the indent is 0pt, the beforeskip is -3.5ex -plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the afterskip is 2.3ex plus 0.2ex, -and the style is \normalfont\Large\bfseries. For -subsection, the level is 2, the indent is 0pt, the -beforeskip is -3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the -afterskip is 1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and the style is -\normalfont\large\bfseries. For subsubsection, the level -is 3, the indent is 0pt, the beforeskip is --3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the afterskip is -1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and the style is -\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries. +book, and report classes.

    -

    Here are examples. They go either in a package or class file or in the +

      +
    • For section: level is 1, indent is 0pt, +beforeskip is -3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, +afterskip is 2.3ex plus 0.2ex, and style is +\normalfont\Large\bfseries. + +
    • For subsection: level is 2, indent is 0pt, +beforeskip is -3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, +afterskip is 1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and style is +\normalfont\large\bfseries. + +
    • For subsubsection: level is 3, indent is 0pt, +beforeskip is -3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, +afterskip is 1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and style is +\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries. +

    + +

    Some examples follow. These go either in a package or class file or in the preamble of a LaTeX document. If you put them in the preamble they must go between a \makeatletter command and a \makeatother. (Probably the error message You can't use @@ -4157,17 +5003,15 @@ display that counter.


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    7 Cross references

    +

    7 Cross references

    - + - +

    We often want something like ‘See Theorem~31’. But by-hand typing the 31 is poor practice. Instead you should write a label such as \label{eq:GreensThm} and then reference it, as with @@ -4191,8 +5035,8 @@ the \label. So if \label is in calculus.texcalculus.aux. LaTeX puts the information in that file every time it runs across a \label.

    - - + +

    The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that happens when your document has a forward reference, a \ref that appears before the associated \label. If this is the first @@ -4204,8 +5048,8 @@ change some things so the references changes; you get the same warning and the output contains the old reference information. In both cases, resolve this by compiling the document a second time.

    - - + +

    The cleveref package enhances LaTeX’s cross referencing features. You can arrange that if you enter \begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm} then @@ -4213,25 +5057,25 @@ cross referencing features. You can arrange that if you enter having to enter the “Theorem.”

    - - - +
    - -
    + - -

    7.1 \label

    +

    7.1 \label

    - +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -4305,17 +5149,15 @@ See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Cross references   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    7.2 \pageref

    +

    7.2 \pageref

    - - - + + +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -4345,68 +5187,143 @@ those.)
    - -
    +

    -Previous: , Up: Cross references   [Contents][Index]

    +Next: , Previous: , Up: Cross references   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    7.3 \ref

    +

    7.3 \ref

    - - - - - - + + + + + +

    Synopsis:

    -
    \ref{key}
    +
    \ref{key}
    +
    + +

    Produces the number of the sectional unit, +equation, footnote, figure, …, of the corresponding +\label command (see \label). It does not produce any text, +such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just the bare number itself. +

    +

    If there is no \label{key} then you get something like +‘LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on +input line 11.’ +

    +

    In this example the \ref{popular} produces ‘2’. Note that +it is a forward reference since it comes before \label{popular} +so this document would have to be compiled twice. +

    +
    +
    The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
    +\begin{enumerate}
    +\item Plain \TeX
    +\item \label{popular} \LaTeX
    +\item Con\TeX t
    +\end{enumerate}
    +
    + + + + +

    The cleveref package includes text such as ‘Theorem’ in the +reference. See the documentation on CTAN. +

    + +
    +
    +

    +Previous: , Up: Cross references   [Contents][Index]

    +
    +

    7.4 xr package

    + + + + + + +

    Synopsis: +

    +
    +
    \usepackage{xr}
    +  \externaldocument{document-basename}
    +
    + +

    or +

    +
    +
    \usepackage{xr}
    +  \externaldocument[reference-prefix]{document-basename}
    +
    + +

    Make cross references to the external document +document-basename.tex. +

    +

    Here is an example. If lectures.tex has this in the preamble +

    +
    +
    \usepackage{xr}
    +  \externaldocument{exercises}
    +  \externaldocument[H-]{hints} 
    +  \externaldocument{answers}
    +
    + +

    then it can use cross reference labels from the other three documents. +Suppose that exercises.tex has an enumerated list containing +this, +

    +
    +
    \item \label{exer:EulersThm} What if every vertex has odd degree?
     
    -

    Produces the number of the sectional unit, -equation, footnote, figure, …, of the corresponding -\label command (see \label). It does not produce any text, -such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just the bare number itself. -

    -

    If there is no \label{key} then you get something like -‘LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on -input line 11.’ +

    and hints.tex has an enumerated list with this,

    -

    In this example the \ref{popular} produces ‘2’. Note that -it is a forward reference since it comes before \label{popular} -so this document would have to be compiled twice. +

    +
    \item \label{exer:EulersThm} Distinguish the case of two vertices.
    +
    + +

    and answers.tex has an enumerated list with this.

    -
    The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
    -\begin{enumerate}
    -\item Plain \TeX
    -\item \label{popular} \LaTeX
    -\item Con\TeX t
    -\end{enumerate}
    +
    \item \label{ans:EulersThm} There is no Euler path, except if there
    +  are exactly two vertices.
     
    - - +

    After compiling the exercises, hints, and answers documents, entering +this in the body of lectures.tex will result in the lectures +getting the reference numbers used in the other documents. +

    +
    +
    See Exercise~\ref{exer:EulersThm}, with Hint~\ref{H-exer:EulersThm}.
    +The solution is Answer~\ref{ans:EulersThm}.
    +
    -

    The cleveref package includes text such as ‘Theorem’ in the -reference. See the documentation on CTAN. +

    The prefix H- for the reference from the hints file is needed +because the label in the hints file is the same as the label in the +exercises file. Without that prefix, both references would get the +number from the later file. +

    +

    Note: if the document uses the hyperref package then in place of +xr, put \usepackage{xr-hyper} before the +\usepackage{hyperref}. Also, if any of the multiple documents +uses hyperref then they all must use it.


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    8 Environments

    +

    8 Environments

    - - - + + +

    LaTeX provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior. An environment begins with \begin and ends with \end, @@ -4424,82 +5341,80 @@ the end. For instance, the input ‘! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by \end{table}.

    - +

    Environments are executed within a group.

    - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
    - -
    +

    Next: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    8.1 abstract

    +

    8.1 abstract

    - - + + - +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -4526,6 +5441,9 @@ default only in the report class. \end{abstract}
    + + +

    The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column document (for a more flexible solution, use the package abstract).

    @@ -4552,18 +5470,16 @@ a more flexible solution, use the package abstract).
    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    8.2 array

    +

    8.2 array

    - - + + - +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -4619,13 +5535,13 @@ the column with p{...}, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode. The second is that, instead of tabular’s parameter \tabcolsep, LaTeX’s intercolumn space in an array is governed by - + \arraycolsep, which gives half the width between columns. The default for this is ‘5pt’ so that between two columns comes 10pt of space.

    - - + +

    To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the amsmath package. It comes with environments pmatrix for an array @@ -4636,8 +5552,8 @@ an array surrounded by vertical bars |...|, and Vmatrix for an array surrounded by double vertical bars ||...||, along with a number of other array constructs.

    - - + +

    The next example uses the amsmath package.

    @@ -4652,11 +5568,11 @@ bars ||...||, along with a number of other array constructs. \end{equation}
    - - + + - - + +

    There are many packages concerning arrays. The array package has many useful extensions, including more column types. The dcolumn @@ -4665,18 +5581,16 @@ the documentation on CTAN.


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    8.3 center

    +

    8.3 center

    - - + + - +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -4691,7 +5605,7 @@ Next: , Previous:

    Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are centered within the left and right margins. Use double-backslash, \\, to get a line break (see \\). - + If some text is too long to fit on a line then LaTeX will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any interword space. @@ -4721,7 +5635,7 @@ ending.

    \begin{center}
       My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink 
       alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\ 
    -  I grew up in that belief.  --Richard Burton 
    +  I grew up in that belief.  ---Richard Burton 
     \end{center}
     
    @@ -4732,22 +5646,20 @@ doesn’t add any vertical space. entire page.

    -
    - -
    +

    Up: center   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    8.3.1 \centering

    +

    8.3.1 \centering

    - - + +

    Synopsis: @@ -4798,19 +5710,17 @@ centered lines ‘xx’ and ‘yy’,


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    8.4 description

    +

    8.4 description

    - - + + - - + +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -4831,23 +5741,23 @@ missing \item’.

    This example shows the environment used for a sequence of definitions.

    -
    \begin{definition}
    +
    \begin{description}
       \item[lama] A priest.
       \item[llama] A beast.
    -\end{definition}
    +\end{description}
     

    The labels ‘lama’ and ‘llama’ are output in boldface, with the left edge on the left margin.

    - +

    Start list items with the \item command (see \item). Use the optional labels, as in \item[Main point], because there is no sensible default. Following the \item is optional text, which may contain multiple paragraphs.

    - - + +

    Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a font change given in argument style (see Font styles) then it will come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with @@ -4876,16 +5786,14 @@ lists.


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    8.5 displaymath

    +

    8.5 displaymath

    - - + +

    Synopsis: @@ -4896,9 +5804,9 @@ Next: , Previous:

    -

    Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display style -and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global option -fleqn; see Document class options. +

    Environment to typeset the mathematical text on its own line, in +display style and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the +global option fleqn; see Document class options.

    In the displaymath environment no equation number is added to the math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the @@ -4906,25 +5814,26 @@ math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the

    LaTeX will not break the math text across lines.

    - - + +

    Note that the amsmath package has significantly more extensive displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of ways in that package for having math text broken across lines.

    -

    The construct \[math text\] is essentially a synonym for -\begin{displaymath}math text\end{displaymath} but the -latter is easier to work with in the source file; for instance, + +

    The construct \[math\] is a synonym for the environment +\begin{displaymath} math \end{displaymath} but the +latter is easier to work with in the source; for instance, searching for a square bracket may get false positives but the word -displaymath will likely be unique. (The construct -$$math text$$ from Plain TeX is sometimes -mistakenly used as a synonym for displaymath. It is not a -synonym, because the displaymath environment checks that it isn’t -started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching -environment start, because the displaymath environment has -different vertical spacing, and because the displaymath -environment honors the fleqn option.) +displaymath will likely be unique. +

    + +

    (Aside: The construct $$math$$ from Plain TeX is +sometimes mistakenly used as a synonym for displaymath. It is +not a synonym, and is not officially supported in LaTeX at all; +$$ doesn’t support the fleqn option (see Document class options), has different vertical spacing, and doesn’t perform +consistency checks.)

    The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.

    @@ -4939,40 +5848,36 @@ environment honors the fleqn option.)


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    8.6 document

    +

    8.6 document

    - - + +

    The document environment encloses the entire body of a document. It is required in every LaTeX document. See Starting and ending.

    - -
    - -
    + - -

    8.6.1 \AtBeginDocument

    +

    8.6.1 \AtBeginDocument

    - - + +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -4991,16 +5896,14 @@ will be executed in the order that you gave them.


    - -
    +

    Previous: , Up: document   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    8.6.2 \AtEndDocument

    +

    8.6.2 \AtEndDocument

    - - + +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -5020,18 +5923,16 @@ will be executed in the order that you gave them.


    - -
    +

    Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

    - -

    8.7 enumerate

    +

    8.7 enumerate

    - - + + - +

    Synopsis:

    @@ -5061,7 +5962,7 @@ As a top-level list the labels would come out as ‘1.’ a \end{enumerate}
    - +

    Start list items with the \item command (see \item). If you give \item an optional argument by following it with square brackets, as in \item[Interstitial label], then the next item @@ -5083,11 +5984,11 @@ the outermost level.

  1. uppercase letter followed by a period: ‘A.’, ‘B.’, …
- - - - -

The enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi through + + + + +

The enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi through \enumiv (see Counters).

For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see @@ -5096,17 +5997,17 @@ parameters, including the default values, and for information about customizing list layout, see list. The package enumitem is useful for customizing lists.

- - - - -

To change the format of the label use \renewcommand + + + + +

To change the format of the label use \renewcommand (see \newcommand & \renewcommand) on the commands \labelenumi through \labelenumiv. For instance, this first level list will be labelled with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing period.

- +
\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\textbf{\Alph{enumi}}}
 \begin{enumerate}
@@ -5119,27 +6020,25 @@ period.
 


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.8 eqnarray

+

8.8 eqnarray

- - + + - - + + - - - + + +

The eqnarray environment is obsolete. It has infelicities, including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements. (See “Avoid eqnarray!” by Lars Madsen -http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf). New documents +https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf). New documents should include the amsmath package and use the displayed mathematics environments provided there, such as the align environment. We include a description only for completeness and for @@ -5163,7 +6062,7 @@ working with old documents. \end{eqnarray*}

- +

Display a sequence of equations or inequalities. The left and right sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text mode. @@ -5171,18 +6070,18 @@ mode.

It is similar to a three-column array environment, with items within a row separated by an ampersand (&), and with rows separated by double backslash  \\). - + The starred form of line break (\\*) can also be used to separate equations, and will disallow a page break there (see \\).

- - + +

The unstarred form eqnarray places an equation number on every line (using the equation counter), unless that line contains a \nonumber command. The starred form eqnarray* omits equation numbering, while otherwise being the same.

- +

The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of zero width. @@ -5200,19 +6099,17 @@ while the third line has not entry on the left side.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.9 equation

+

8.9 equation

- - + + - - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -5230,27 +6127,25 @@ The equation number is generated using the equation counter. \begin{equation}, or LaTeX will tell you that there is a missing dollar sign.

- - + +

The package amsmath package has extensive displayed equation facilities. New documents should include this package.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.10 figure

+

8.10 figure

- - + + - - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -5294,7 +6189,7 @@ placing at a page bottom see the discussion of placement bFloats.

The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see Cross references). - + The optional \caption command specifies caption text for the figure. By default it is numbered. If loftitle is present, it is used in the list of figures instead of title (see Table of contents etc.). @@ -5315,27 +6210,25 @@ end of the document, on a page of floats.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.11 filecontents: Write an external file

+

8.11 filecontents

- - + + - - + + - - + +

Synopsis:

-
\begin{filecontents}{filename}
+
\begin{filecontents}[option]{filename}
   text
 \end{filecontents}
 
@@ -5343,29 +6236,55 @@ Next: , Previous: or

-
\begin{filecontents*}{filename}
+
\begin{filecontents*}[option]{filename}
   text
 \end{filecontents*}
 
-

Create a file named filename and fill it with text. The -unstarred version of the environment filecontents prefixes the -content of the created file with a header; see the example below. The -starred version filecontents* does not include the header. +

Create a file named filename in the current directory (or the +output directory, if specified; see output directory) and write +text to it. By default, an existing file is not overwritten. +

+

The unstarred version of the environment +filecontents prefixes the content of the created file with a +header of TeX comments; see the example below. The starred +version filecontents* does not include the header.

-

This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it often -appears before the \documentclass command. It is typically used -when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The -environment will write that file to the directory containing the source -and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include -bib references in the file, again to make it self-contained. +

The possible options are:

-

The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and if -so, does not do anything. There is a filecontents package that -redefines the filecontents environment so that instead of doing -nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file. +

+
force
+
overwrite
+
+ +

Overwrite an existing file. +

+
+
noheader
+
+

Omit the header. Equivalent to using filecontents*. +

+
+
nosearch
+
+

Only check the current directory (and the output directory, if +specified) for an existing file, not the entire search path. +

+
+
+ +

These options were added in a 2019 release of LaTeX. +

+ + +

This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it +often appears before the \documentclass command. It is +commonly used to create a .bib or other such data file from the +main document source, to make the source file self-contained. +Similarly, it can be used to create a custom style or class file, +again making the source self-contained.

-

For example, this document +

For example, this document:

\documentclass{article}
@@ -5378,7 +6297,7 @@ Article by \myname.
 \end{document}
 
-

produces this file JH.sty. +

produces this file JH.sty:

%% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
@@ -5390,19 +6309,17 @@ Article by \myname.
 
 
 
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.12 flushleft

+

8.12 flushleft

- - + + - - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -5414,11 +6331,11 @@ Next: , Previous: < \end{flushleft}
- +

An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and -stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use a double +stretching or shrinking interword spaces. To force a new line use a double backslash, \\. For the declaration form see \raggedright.

@@ -5437,24 +6354,22 @@ flush left and ragged right. -
- -
+ - -

8.12.1 \raggedright

+

8.12.1 \raggedright

- - - - + + + +

Synopses:

@@ -5471,7 +6386,7 @@ Up: flushleft   [flushleft.

@@ -5496,19 +6411,17 @@ delimit its effect.
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.13 flushright

+

8.13 flushright

- - + + - - + +
\begin{flushright}
@@ -5518,35 +6431,35 @@ Next: , Previous: 
- +

An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long to fit the margins then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that -avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new +avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking inter-word spaces. To force a new line use a double backslash, \\. For the declaration form see \raggedleft.

-

For an example related to this environment, see flushleft. +

For an example related to this environment, see flushleft, +where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace flushleft by +flushright.

-
- -
+ - -

8.13.1 \raggedleft

+

8.13.1 \raggedleft

- - - - + + + +

Synopses:

@@ -5563,7 +6476,7 @@ Up: flushright   [

A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and -ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as quote +ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. For the environment form see flushright.

@@ -5573,26 +6486,26 @@ formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit.

-

For an example related to this environment, see \raggedright. +

For an example related to this environment, see \raggedright, +where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace \raggedright by +\raggedleft.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.14 itemize

+

8.14 itemize

- - + + - - - - - + + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -5604,8 +6517,8 @@ Next: , Previous: +

Start list items with the \item command (see \item). If you give \item an optional argument by following it with square -brackets, as in \item[Optional label], then by default it will -appear in bold and be flush right, so it could extend into the left -margin. For labels that are flush left see the description -environment. Following the \item is optional text, which may -contain multiple paragraphs. +brackets, as in \item[Optional label], then by default +Optional label will appear in bold and be flush right, so it could +extend into the left margin. For labels that are flush left see the +description environment. Following the \item is the text of +the item, which may be empty or contain multiple paragraphs.

- - - - -

Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. +

Unordered lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such -as enumerate (see enumerate). The itemize environment -uses the commands \labelitemi through \labelitemiv to -produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase -roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting -level). These are the default marks at each level. +as enumerate (see enumerate). +

+ + + + +

The itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi +through \labelitemiv to produce the default label (note the +convention of lowercase roman numerals at the end of the command names +that signify the nesting level). These are the default marks at each +level.

  1. • (bullet, from \textbullet)
  2. -- (bold en-dash, from \normalfont\bfseries\textendash)
  3. * (asterisk, from \textasteriskcentered) -
  4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period, from \textperiodcentered) +
  5. . (vertically centered dot, rendered here as a period, from \textperiodcentered)

Change the labels with \renewcommand. For instance, this makes @@ -5655,27 +6572,31 @@ the first level use diamonds.

\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
 
- - - - - - - -

The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and + + + + + + + +

The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the left margin of the itemize list is determined by the -parameters \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi. (Note the -convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command -name to denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: 2.5em in -level 1 (2em in two-column mode), 2.2em in level 2, -1.87em in level 3, and 1.7em in level 4, with smaller -values for more deeply nested levels. +parameters \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi. (This also +uses the convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the +command name to denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: +2.5em in level 1 (2em in two-column mode), 2.2em in +level 2, 1.87em in level 3, and 1.7em in level 4, with +smaller values for more deeply nested levels.

+ + +

For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see -description and enumerate. For information about list -layout parameters, including the default values, and for information -about customizing list layout, see list. The package -enumitem is useful for customizing lists. +description and enumerate. The itemize, +enumerate and description environment use the same list +layout parameters. For a description, including the default values, and +for information about customizing list layout, see list. The +package enumitem is useful for customizing lists.

This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized lists. @@ -5684,7 +6605,7 @@ lists.

\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
 
- +

Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize* environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs @@ -5702,34 +6623,30 @@ see \parindent & \parskip - -

+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.15 letter environment: writing letters

+

8.15 letter environment: writing letters

- - + +

This environment is used for creating letters. See Letters.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.16 list

+

8.16 list

- - + + - +

Synopsis:

@@ -5775,11 +6692,11 @@ environment.

The mandatory first argument labeling specifies the default labeling of list items. It can contain text and LaTeX commands, as -above where it contains both ‘Item’ and ‘\Roman{...}’. +above where it contains both ‘Item’ and ‘\Roman{…}’. LaTeX forms the label by putting the labeling argument in a box of width \labelwidth. If the label is wider than that, the additional material extends to the right. When making an instance of a -list you can override the default labeling by giving \item an +list you can override the default labeling by giving \item an optional argument by including square braces and the text, as in the above \item[Special label.]; see \item.

@@ -5791,8 +6708,8 @@ counter will be reset to zero each time LaTeX enters the environment, and the counter is incremented by one each time LaTeX encounters an \item that does not have an optional argument.

- -

Another command that can go in spacing is + +

Another command that can go in spacing is \makelabel, which constructs the label box. By default it puts the contents flush right. Its only argument is the label, which it typesets in LR mode (see Modes). One example of changing its @@ -5801,7 +6718,7 @@ definition of the environment add \newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}, and between the \setlength command and the parenthesis that closes the spacing argument also add \let\makelabel\namedmakelabel. -Then the items will be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the +Then the labels will be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the second code line to \let\makelabel\fbox puts the labels inside a framed box. Another example of the \makelabel command is below, in the definition of the redlabel environment. @@ -5818,39 +6735,39 @@ For some effects these lengths should be zero or negative.

\itemindent - +
-

Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond leftmargin, of the +

Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond leftmargin, of the first line each item. Its default value is 0pt.

\itemsep - +
-

Vertical space between items, beyond the \parsep. The defaults +

Vertical space between items, beyond the \parsep. The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: 4pt plus2pt minus1pt, \parsep (that is, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt), and \topsep (that is, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt). The defaults at 11 point are: 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt, \parsep (that is, -2pt plus1pt minus1pt), and topsep (that is, 2pt +2pt plus1pt minus1pt), and \topsep (that is, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt). The defaults at 12 point are: 5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt, \parsep (that is, 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt), and \topsep (that is, 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt).

\labelsep - +
-

Horizontal space between the label and text of an item. +

Horizontal space between the label and text of an item. The default for LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes is 0.5em.

\labelwidth - +
-

Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this wide. +

Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this wide. If \makelabel returns text that is wider than this then the first line of the item will be indented to make room for this extra material. If \makelabel returns text of width less than or equal to @@ -5872,9 +6789,9 @@ environment.

\leftmargin - +
-

Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment +

Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment (or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level list), and the left margin of this list. It must be non-negative.

@@ -5892,31 +6809,31 @@ error message ‘Too deeply nested’.)

\listparindent - +
-

Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond +

Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond \leftmargin, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list item. A negative value makes this an “outdent”. Its default value is 0pt.

\parsep - +
-

Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the ‘book’ -and ‘article’ classes The defaults for the first three levels in -LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at 10 -point size are: 4pt plus2pt minus1pt, 2pt plus1pt -minus1pt, and 0pt. The defaults at 11 point size are: -4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt, and -0pt. The defaults at 12 point size are: 5pt plus2.5pt -minus1pt, 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt, and 0pt. +

Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. +The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’, +‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: 4pt +plus2pt minus1pt, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt, and 0pt. The +defaults at 11 point size are: 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt, +2pt plus1pt minus1pt, and 0pt. The defaults at 12 point +size are: 5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt, 2.5pt plus1pt +minus1pt, and 0pt.

\partopsep - +
-

Vertical space added, beyond \topsep+\parskip, to the top +

Vertical space added, beyond \topsep+\parskip, to the top and bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded by a blank line. (A blank line in the LaTeX source before the list changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the line @@ -5932,17 +6849,17 @@ minus2pt, and 1pt plus0pt minus1pt.

\rightmargin - +
-

Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right +

Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is 0pt. It must be non-negative.

\topsep - +
-

Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition +

Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition to \parskip (see \parindent & \parskip). The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: 8pt plus2pt minus4pt, @@ -6029,27 +6946,27 @@ page break.

\@beginparpenalty - +
-

The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default -51). +

The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default -51).

\@itempenalty - +
-

The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default -51). +

The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default -51).

\@endparpenalty - +
-

The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default -51). +

The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default -51).

- - + +

The package enumitem is useful for customizing lists.

@@ -6072,25 +6989,23 @@ See \usecounter. \let\makelabel=\makeredlabel } } -{\end{list} } +{\end{list}}
- -
- -
+

Next: , Up: list   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.16.1 \item: An entry in a list

+

8.16.1 \item: An entry in a list

Synopsis:

@@ -6108,7 +7023,7 @@ Next: , Up: -
+

Previous: , Up: list   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.16.2 trivlist: A restricted form of list

+

8.16.2 trivlist: A restricted form of list

Synopsis:

@@ -6154,7 +7067,7 @@ Previous: , Up: A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are not indented and an \item without an optional argument produces no text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where -the \item command as part of the environment’s definition. For +the \item command is part of the environment’s definition. For instance, the center environment is defined essentially like this:

@@ -6188,18 +7101,16 @@ default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated.
-
-
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.17 math

+

8.17 math

- - + + - +

Synopsis:

@@ -6209,24 +7120,24 @@ Next: , Previous:
+ +

The math environment inserts given math material within the running text. \(...\) and $...$ are synonyms. See Math formulas.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.18 minipage

+

8.18 minipage

- - + + - +

Synopses:

@@ -6272,8 +7183,9 @@ It gives the width of the box into which contents are typeset.

There are three optional arguments, position, height, and inner-pos. You need not include all three. For example, get the default position and set the height with -\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] contents \end{minipage}. -(Get the natural height with an empty argument, [].) +\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm]{\columnwidth} contents +\end{minipage}. (Get the natural height with an empty argument, +[].)

The optional argument position governs how the minipage vertically aligns with the surrounding material. @@ -6281,18 +7193,19 @@ vertically aligns with the surrounding material.

c

(synonym m) Default. Positions the minipage so its -vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what -Plain TeX calls \vcenter). +vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line.

t
-

Match the top line in the minipage with the baseline of the -surrounding text (Plain TeX’s \vtop. +

+

Match the top line in the minipage with the baseline of the +surrounding text (plain TeX’s \vtop).

b
-

Match the bottom line in the minipage with the baseline of the -surrounding text (Plain TeX’s \vbox. +

+

Match the bottom line in the minipage with the baseline of the +surrounding text (plain TeX’s \vbox).

@@ -6313,12 +7226,12 @@ height and LaTeX will not give an error or warning. You can also set it to a height of zero or a negative value.

The final optional argument inner-pos controls the placement of -content inside the box. These are the possible values are (the +contents inside the box. These are the possible values are (the default is the value of position).

t
-

Place content at the top of the box. +

Place contents at the top of the box.

c
@@ -6351,15 +7264,15 @@ in place of b. Text after
- - - + + +

By default paragraphs are not indented in a minipage. Change that with a command such as \setlength{\parindent}{1pc} at the start of contents.

- - + +

Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext command puts the footnote at @@ -6392,20 +7305,30 @@ Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next

This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic. They are vertically centered.

+ + +
-
\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+
% siunitx to have the S column specifier,
+% which aligns numbers on their decimal point.
+\usepackage{siunitx}
+\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
   ...
 \begin{center}
   \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}}
   \hspace{0.1\textwidth}
   \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
-    \begin{tabular}{r|l}
-      \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &Pop (million)  \\ \hline
-      The Bronx      &$1.5$  \\
-      Brooklyn       &$2.6$  \\
-      Manhattan      &$1.6$  \\
-      Queens         &$2.3$  \\
-      Staten Island  &$0.5$  
+    \begin{tabular}{r|S}
+      % \multicolumn to remove vertical bar between column headers
+      \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &
+      % braces to prevent siunitx from misinterpreting the
+      % period as a decimal separator
+      {Pop. (million)}  \\ \hline
+      The Bronx      &1.5  \\
+      Brooklyn       &2.6  \\
+      Manhattan      &1.6  \\
+      Queens         &2.3  \\
+      Staten Island  &0.5  
     \end{tabular}
   \end{minipage}              
 \end{center}
@@ -6413,24 +7336,22 @@ are vertically centered.
 
 
 
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19 picture

+

8.19 picture

- - + + - - + +

Synopses:

\begin{picture}(width,height)
-   picture commands 
+   picture command
 \end{picture}
 
@@ -6438,19 +7359,21 @@ Next: +
\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
 \begin{picture}(6,6)      % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
@@ -6458,44 +7381,25 @@ or Asymptote.  These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
     \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}}
   \put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}}
     \put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}}  
-  \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}}
+  \put(0,0){\vector(1,1){6}}
     \put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }}  
 \end{picture}
 
-

You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an -exact location. -

-
-
\usepackage{color,graphicx}  % in preamble
-  ...
-\begin{center}
-\setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth} 
-\begin{picture}(1,1)      % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
-  \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
-  \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
-\end{picture}
-\end{center}
-
- -

The red X will be precisely a quarter of the \linewidth from -the left margin, and 0.35\linewidth up from the bottom. Another -example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get -repeat material on each of a document’s pages. -

The picture environment has one required argument, a pair of -numbers (width,height). Multiply these by the value -\unitlength to get the nominal size of the output, the space that -LaTeX reserves on the output page. This nominal size need not be how -large the picture really is; LaTeX will draw things from the picture -outside the picture’s box. +positive real numbers (width,height). Multiply these by the +value \unitlength to get the nominal size of the output, i.e. +the space that LaTeX reserves on the output page. This nominal size +need not be how large the picture really is; LaTeX will draw things +from the picture outside the picture’s box.

This environment also has an optional argument (xoffset,yoffset). It is used to shift the origin. Unlike most optional arguments, this one is not contained in square brackets. -As with the required argument, it consists of two real numbers. -Multiply these by \unitlength to get the point at the lower-left -corner of the picture. +As with the required argument, it consists of a pair of two real +numbers, but these may also be negative or null. Multiply these +by \unitlength to get the coordinates of the point at the +lower-left corner of the picture.

For example, if \unitlength has been set to 1mm, the command @@ -6512,26 +7416,29 @@ the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate optional argument.

- +

Each picture command tells LaTeX where to put something by -naming its position. A position is a pair such as (2.4,-5) +providing its position. A position is a pair such as (2.4,-5) giving the x- and y-coordinates. A coordinate is a not a length, it is a real number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It specifies a length in multiples of the unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate -2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters. +2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters.

-

LaTeX’s default for \unitlength is 1pt. it is a rigid +

LaTeX’s default for \unitlength is 1pt. It is a rigid length (see Lengths). Change it with the \setlength command (see \setlength). Make this change only outside of a picture environment.

-

Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at +

The picture environment supports using standard arithmetic +expressions as well as numbers. +

+

Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is by default at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, as with \put(1,2){...}, it is not enclosed in braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also, unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are -further up the page. +further up the page, for example, y = 1 is above y = 0.

There are four ways to put things in a picture: \put, \multiput, \qbezier, and \graphpaper. The most @@ -6544,7 +7451,7 @@ often used is \put. This

places the object with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-0.3). The reference points for various objects will be described below. - + The \put command creates an LR box (see Modes). Anything that can go in an \mbox (see \mbox & \makebox) can go in the text argument of the \put command. The reference point @@ -6566,69 +7473,70 @@ line of length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of

The \multiput, qbezier, and graphpaper commands are described below.

-

This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using \qbezier for -that curve. +

You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an +exact location. For example:

-
\begin{picture}(3,1.5)
-  \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}}  % x axis
-  \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}}  % y axis
-  \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}}       % left side rectangle
-  \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}}     % right side
-  \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
-    \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
-  \thicklines                 % below here, lines are twice as thick
-  \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
-  \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+
\usepackage{color,graphicx}  % in preamble
+  ...
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth} 
+\begin{picture}(1,1)      % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+  \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
+  \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
 \end{picture}
+\end{center}
 
+

The red X will be precisely a quarter of the \textwidth from +the left margin, and 0.35\textwidth up from the bottom of the +picture. Another example of this usage is to put similar code in the +page header to get repeat material on each of a document’s pages. +

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- -
+

Next: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.1 \put

+

8.19.1 \put

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -6652,15 +7560,13 @@ text, at the bottom left of the ‘A’.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.2 \multiput

+

8.19.2 \multiput

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -6688,15 +7594,13 @@ Next: , Previous
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.3 \qbezier

+

8.19.3 \qbezier

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -6726,17 +7630,31 @@ intermediate points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose maximum number of points is \qbeziermax (change this value with \renewcommand).

+

This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using \qbezier for +that curve. +

+
+
\begin{picture}(8,4)
+  \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}}  % x axis
+  \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}}  % y axis
+  \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}}       % left side
+  \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}}     % right side
+  \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+    \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+  \thicklines                 % below here, lines are twice as thick
+  \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
+  \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+\end{picture}
+

- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.4 \graphpaper

+

8.19.4 \graphpaper

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -6744,7 +7662,10 @@ Next: , Previous: spacing](x_init,y_init)(x_dimen,y_dimen)
-

Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the graphpap package. + + + +

Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the graphpap package. The grid’s origin is (x_init,y_init). Grid lines come every spacing units (the default is 10). The grid extends x_dimen units to the right and y_dimen units up. @@ -6764,15 +7685,13 @@ All arguments must be positive integers.


-
-
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.5 \line

+

8.19.5 \line

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -6782,7 +7701,7 @@ Next: - - - + + + + - - + + - - + + - - + + - - + +

Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes because these lines are made by putting together line segments from @@ -6836,21 +7755,20 @@ relatively prime, so that (x_run,y_rise) can be (2,1) but not (4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former). To get lines of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like -picture, see the package pict2e on CTAN. Another solution -is to use a full-featured graphics system such as TikZ, or -PSTricks, or MetaPost, or Asymptote +picture, see the package pict2e +(https://ctan.org/pkg/pict2e). Another solution +is to use a full-featured graphics system such as TikZ, PSTricks, +MetaPost, or Asymptote.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.6 \linethickness

+

8.19.6 \linethickness

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -6866,15 +7784,13 @@ lines, circles, or ovals.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.7 \thinlines

+

8.19.7 \thinlines

- +

Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals in a picture environment to be 0.4pt. This is the default @@ -6883,15 +7799,13 @@ changed with either \linethickness or


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.8 \thicklines

+

8.19.8 \thicklines

- +

Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals in a picture environment to be 0.8pt. See also @@ -6900,15 +7814,13 @@ in the Trapezoidal Rule example of picture.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.9 \circle

+

8.19.9 \circle

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -6926,21 +7838,19 @@ one. The * form produces a filled-in circle.
\put(5,7){\circle{6}}
 
-

The available radii for circle are, in points, the even -numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive. For circle* they are all the +

The available radii for \circle are, in points, the even +numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive. For \circle* they are all the integers from 1 to 15.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.10 \oval

+

8.19.10 \oval

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -6987,15 +7897,13 @@ boxes with a small amount of corner rounding.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.11 \shortstack

+

8.19.11 \shortstack

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -7032,7 +7940,7 @@ the left of the y axis.

- +

Separate objects into lines with \\. These stacks are short in that, unlike in a tabular or array environment, here the rows are not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in @@ -7048,15 +7956,13 @@ argument \shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.12 \vector

+

8.19.12 \vector

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -7066,7 +7972,7 @@ Next: -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.13 \makebox (picture)

+

8.19.13 \makebox (picture)

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -7139,15 +8043,13 @@ two of these letters.
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.14 \framebox (picture)

+

8.19.14 \framebox (picture)

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -7179,8 +8081,8 @@ the text in the center. text; see \makebox (picture) for the values that it can take.

- - + +

The rule has thickness \fboxrule and there is a blank space \fboxsep between the frame and the contents of the box.

@@ -7190,15 +8092,13 @@ determined in some other way then either use \fbox (see -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.15 \frame

+

8.19.15 \frame

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -7213,15 +8113,13 @@ between the frame and the object. It is fragile (see
-
-
+

Previous: , Up: picture   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.19.16 \dashbox

+

8.19.16 \dashbox

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -7257,26 +8155,24 @@ take.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.20 quotation & quote

+

8.20 quotation & quote

- - + + - - - - - + + + + + - - - + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -7313,20 +8209,19 @@ between paragraphs (it is the rubber length \parsep).
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.21 tabbing

+

8.21 tabbing

- - + + + - - - + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -7349,12 +8244,12 @@ widths, ended by a \kill command (which is described below):

\begin{tabbing}
-\hspace{0.75in}     \= \hspace{0.40in}  \= \hspace{0.40in}    \kill
-Ship                \> Guns             \> Year    \\ 
-\textit{Sophie}     \> 14               \> 1800    \\
-\textit{Polychrest} \> 24               \> 1803    \\
-\textit{Lively}     \> 38               \> 1804    \\
-\textit{Surprise}   \> 28               \> 1805    \\
+\hspace{1.2in}\=\hspace{1in}\=\kill
+Ship                \>Guns             \>Year    \\ 
+\textit{Sophie}     \>14               \>1800    \\
+\textit{Polychrest} \>24               \>1803    \\
+\textit{Lively}     \>38               \>1804    \\
+\textit{Surprise}   \>28               \>1805    \\
 \end{tabbing}
 
@@ -7365,24 +8260,25 @@ determined automatically by LaTeX, while in tabbing the user sets the tab stops. Another distinction is that tabular generates a box, but tabbing can be broken across pages. Finally, while tabular can be used in any mode, tabbing -can be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph. +can be used only in paragraph mode and it always starts a new paragraph, +without indentation.

-

A tabbing environment always starts a new paragraph, without -indentation. Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need +

Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need to use the starred form of the \hspace command at the beginning of a tabbed row. The right margin of the tabbing environment is the end of line, so that the width of the environment is \linewidth.

- +

The tabbing environment contains a sequence of tabbed rows. The first tabbed row begins immediately after \begin{tabbing} and each row ends with \\ or \kill. The last row may omit the \\ and end with just \end{tabbing}.

-

At any point the tabbing environment has a current tab stop -pattern, a sequence of n > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, + +

At any point the tabbing environment has a current tab stop +pattern, a sequence of n > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, etc. These create n corresponding columns. Tab stop 0 is always the left margin, defined by the enclosing environment. Tab stop number i is set if it is assigned a horizontal @@ -7399,33 +8295,33 @@ They are all fragile (see \protect).

\\ (tabbing) - +

End a tabbed line and typeset it.

\= (tabbing) - +

Sets a tab stop at the current position.

\> (tabbing) - +
-
+

Advances to the next tab stop.

\< - +

Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.

\+ - +

Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if @@ -7433,7 +8329,7 @@ necessary.

\- - +

Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if @@ -7441,7 +8337,7 @@ necessary.

\' (tabbing) - +

Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e., everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', @@ -7450,7 +8346,7 @@ to the right, flush against the current column’s tab stop.

\` (tabbing) - +

Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab stop 0. However, it can’t move text to the right of the last @@ -7463,18 +8359,18 @@ of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or

\a (tabbing) - +
-
- - +
+ +

In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and \` do not produce accents as usual (see Accents). Instead, use the commands \a=, \a' and \a`.

\kill - +

Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ except that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it. @@ -7483,21 +8379,21 @@ effect.

\poptabs - +
-
+

Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs.

\pushtabs - +

Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing environment.

\tabbingsep - +

Distance of the text moved by \' to left of current tab stop.

@@ -7530,15 +8426,15 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ end;
- - - - - - + + + + + + - - + +

This example is just for illustration of the environment. To actually typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment @@ -7548,19 +8444,17 @@ there are quite a few packages, including algorithm2e,


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.22 table

+

8.22 table

- - + + - - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -7593,19 +8487,17 @@ are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a following page. \end{table}
-

but you can put many different kinds of content in a table, -including text, LaTeX commands, etc. +

but you can put many different kinds of content in a table: +the table body may contain text, LaTeX commands, graphics, etc. It is +typeset in a parbox of width \textwidth.

For the possible values of placement and their effect on the float placement algorithm, see Floats.

-

The table body is typeset in a parbox of width \textwidth. -It can contain text, commands, graphics, etc. -

The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see Cross references). - + The \caption command is also optional. It specifies caption text -for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional +title for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional lottitle is present then that text is used in the list of tables instead of title (see Table of contents etc.).

@@ -7627,19 +8519,17 @@ unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.23 tabular

+

8.23 tabular

- - + + - - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -7675,12 +8565,12 @@ illustrates many of the features.

The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar between them. This is specified in tabular’s argument {l|l}. - + Put the entries into different columns by separating them with an ampersand, &. The end of each row is marked with a double backslash, \\. Put a horizontal rule below a row, after a double backslash, with \hline. - + After the last row the \\ is optional, unless an \hline command follows to put a rule below the table.

@@ -7763,7 +8653,7 @@ arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on it. \end{tabular}
- +

An \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression causes an extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep. Unlike @@ -7796,7 +8686,7 @@ a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleftp-column element these declarations must appear inside braces, as with {\centering .. \\ ..}). Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double backslash as -ending the row. Instead, to get a line break in there use +ending the tabular row. Instead, to get a line break in there use \newline (see \newline).

@@ -7826,33 +8716,33 @@ are likely to get the Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment

\arrayrulewidth - +
-

A length that is the thickness of the rule created by |, +

A length that is the thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and \vline in the tabular and array environments. The default is ‘.4pt’. Change it as in \setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}.

\arraystretch - +
-

A factor by which the spacing between rows in the tabular and +

A factor by which the spacing between rows in the tabular and array environments is multiplied. The default is ‘1’, for no scaling. Change it as \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}.

\doublerulesep - +
-

A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the +

A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the || specifier. The default is ‘2pt’.

\tabcolsep - +
-

A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is +

A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is ‘6pt’. Change it with \setlength.

@@ -7863,27 +8753,25 @@ environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between lines:

- - - -
- -
+

Next: , Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.23.1 \multicolumn

+

8.23.1 \multicolumn

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -7978,15 +8866,13 @@ in the first row here. That’s because there is no vertical bar in the


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.23.2 \vline

+

8.23.2 \vline

- +

Draw a vertical line in a tabular or array environment extending the full height and depth of an entry’s row. Can also be used in an @-expression, although its synonym vertical @@ -8016,15 +8902,13 @@ the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next to the


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.23.3 \cline

+

8.23.3 \cline

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -8051,15 +8935,13 @@ height.
- -
+

Previous: , Up: tabular   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.23.4 \hline

+

8.23.4 \hline

- +

Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing tabular or array environment. It’s most commonly used to draw a line at the @@ -8080,18 +8962,16 @@ is required.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.24 thebibliography

+

8.24 thebibliography

- - + + - +

Synopsis:

@@ -8104,7 +8984,7 @@ Next: , Previous: Produce a bibliography or reference list. There are two ways to produce bibliographic lists. This environment is suitable when you have only a -few references and can maintain the list by hand. See Using BibTeX +few references and can maintain the list by hand. See Using BibTeX, for a more sophisticated approach.

This shows the environment with two entries. @@ -8126,15 +9006,17 @@ Together they are \cite{latexdps, texbook}.

This styles the first reference as ‘[1] Leslie ...’, and so that -\cite{latexdps} produces the matching ‘... based on [1]’. -The second \cite produces ‘[1, 2]’. You must compile the -document twice to resolve these references. +... based on \cite{latexdps} produces the matching +‘... based on [1]’. The second \cite produces ‘[1, +2]’. You must compile the document twice to resolve these references.

The mandatory argument widest-label is text that, when typeset, is as wide as the widest item label produced by the \bibitem commands. The tradition is to use 9 for bibliographies with less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc.

+ +

The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as ‘Bibliography’. To change it there are two cases. In the book and report classes, where the top level sectioning is \chapter and the @@ -8142,38 +9024,38 @@ default title is ‘Bibliography’, that title is in the m \bibname. For article, where the class’s top level sectioning is \section and the default is ‘References’, the title is in macro \refname. Change it by redefining the command, -as with \renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references} after +as with \renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}, after \begin{document}.

- - + +

Language support packages such as babel will automatically redefine \refname or \bibname to fit the selected language.

+

See list, for the list layout control parameters. +

- - - -
- -
+

Next: , Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.24.1 \bibitem

+

8.24.1 \bibitem

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -8187,16 +9069,16 @@ Next: , Up: \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
-

Generate an entry labeled by label. The default is for LaTeX to -generates a number using the enumi counter. The citation key - -cite_key is a string of +

Generate an entry labeled by default by a number generated using the +enumi counter. The citation key + +cite_key can be any string of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma).

-

See thebibliography for an example. +

See thebibliography, for an example.

-

The optional label changes the default label from an integer to the -given string. With this +

When provided, the optional label becomes the entry label and the +enumi counter is not incremented. With this

\begin{thebibliography}
@@ -8227,8 +9109,8 @@ Warning: There were multiply-defined labels’.
 

Under the hood, LaTeX remembers the cite_key and label information because \bibitem writes it to the auxiliary file -filename.aux. For instance, the above example causes -\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993} and +jobname.aux (see Jobname). For instance, the above +example causes the two \bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993} and \bibcite{texbook}{1} to appear in that file. The .aux file is read by the \begin{document} command and then the information is available for \cite commands. This explains why @@ -8242,15 +9124,13 @@ recompiling.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.24.2 \cite

+

8.24.2 \cite

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -8281,20 +9161,21 @@ comma-separated list of citation keys (see \bibitem
-

produces output like ‘... source is [1]’. (You can change the -appearance of the citation with bibliography styles. More is in -Using BibTeX.) +

produces output like ‘... source is [1]’. You can change the +appearance of the citation and of the reference by using bibliography +styles if you generate automatically the thebibliography +environment. More information in Using BibTeX.

The optional argument subcite is appended to the citation. For example, See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook} might produce ‘See 14.3 in [1, p. 314]’.

In addition to what appears in the output, \cite writes -information to the auxiliary file filename.aux. For -instance, \cite{latexdps} writes ‘\citation{latexdps}’ -to that file. This information is used by BibTeX to include in your -reference list only those works that you have actually cited; see -\nocite also. +information to the auxiliary file jobname.aux +(see Jobname). For instance, \cite{latexdps} writes +‘\citation{latexdps}’ to that file. This information is used by +BibTeX to include in your reference list only those works that you +have actually cited; see \nocite also.

If keys is not in your bibliography information then you get ‘LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references’, and in the output @@ -8307,15 +9188,13 @@ the fix may be to run LaTeX again.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.24.3 \nocite

+

8.24.3 \nocite

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -8324,33 +9203,31 @@ Next: , Previou

Produces no output but writes keys to the auxiliary file -doc-filename.aux. +jobname.aux (see Jobname).

The mandatory argument keys is a comma-separated list of one or more citation keys (see \bibitem). This information is used by BibTeX to include these works in your reference list even though you -have not cited them (see \cite). +have not explicitly cited them (see \cite).


- -
+

Previous: , Up: thebibliography   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.24.4 Using BibTeX

+

8.24.4 Using BibTeX

- - - - - + + + + +

As described in thebibliography (see thebibliography), a sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the BibTeX program. This is only an introduction; see the full -documentation on CTAN. +documentation on CTAN (see CTAN).

With BibTeX, you don’t use thebibliography (see thebibliography). Instead, include these lines. @@ -8383,7 +9260,7 @@ Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically.

Many, many other BibTeX style files exist, tailored to the demands of various publications. See CTAN’s listing -http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib. +https://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib.

The \bibliography command is what actually produces the bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to @@ -8416,18 +9293,16 @@ you used.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.25 theorem

+

8.25 theorem

- - + + - +

Synopsis:

@@ -8455,11 +9330,11 @@ The next result follows immediately. \end{thm}
- - + + - - + +

Most new documents use the packages amsthm and amsmath from the American Mathematical Society. Among other things these @@ -8468,19 +9343,17 @@ such as styling options.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.26 titlepage

+

8.26 titlepage

- - + + - - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -8524,22 +9397,20 @@ environment, use \maketitle (see \make


-
-
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.27 verbatim

+

8.27 verbatim

- - + + - - - - - + + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -8565,19 +9436,24 @@ Symbol swearing: %&$#?!.

The only restriction on literal-text is that it cannot include the string \end{verbatim}.

- - + +

You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros, for instance in the argument to a \section. This is not the same as -commands being fragile (see \protect), instead it just cannot appear -there. (But the cprotect package can help with this.) +commands being fragile (see \protect), instead it just cannot work, +as the verbatim environment changes the catcode regime before +processing its contents, and restore it immediately afterward, +nevertheless with a macro argument the content of the argument has +already be converted to a token list along the catcode regime in effect +when the macro was called. However, the cprotect package can +help with this.

- - + + - - + +

One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There are packages that are an improvement the verbatim environment. For @@ -8585,34 +9461,32 @@ instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external files, or parts of those files. Such packages include listings, and minted.

- - + + - - + +

A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments is fancyvrb. Another is verbatimbox.

-

For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN. +

For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN (see CTAN).

-
- -
+

Up: verbatim   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.27.1 \verb

+

8.27.1 \verb

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -8636,62 +9510,65 @@ exclamation point, !. The second instead uses plus, + because the exclamation point is part of literal-text.

The single-character delimiter char surrounds -literal-text — it must be the same character before and -after. No spaces come between \verb or \verb* and -char, or between char and literal-text, or between -literal-text and the second occurrence of char (the synopsis -shows a space only to distinguish one component from the other). The -delimiter must not appear in literal-text. The literal-text -cannot include a line break. -

- +literal-text—it must be the same character before and after. +No spaces come between \verb or \verb* and char, +or between char and literal-text, or between +literal-text and the second occurrence of char (the +synopsis shows a space only to distinguish one component from the +other). The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. The +literal-text cannot include a line break. +

+

The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible space character.

-

The output from this will include a character showing the spaces. +

The output from this will include a visible space on both side of word +‘with’:

-
The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+
The command's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
 
- - + +

For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package url -provides an option that is better than the \verb command, since +is a better option than the \verb command, since it allows line breaks.

- - + + - - + +

For computer code there are many packages with advantages over \verb. One is listings, another is minted.

- - + +

You cannot use \verb in the argument to a macro, for instance in the argument to a \section. It is not a question of \verb -being fragile (see \protect), instead it just cannot appear there. -(But the cprotect package can help with this.) +being fragile (see \protect), instead it just cannot work, as the +\verb command changes the catcode regime before reading its +argument, and restore it immediately afterward, nevertheless with a +macro argument the content of the argument has already be converted to a +token list along the catcode regime in effect when the macro was called. +However, the cprotect package can help with this.


- -
+

Previous: , Up: Environments   [Contents][Index]

- -

8.28 verse

+

8.28 verse

- - + + - +

Synopsis:

@@ -8712,7 +9589,7 @@ Previous: , Up:
- +

Separate the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas.

@@ -8735,16 +9612,14 @@ are not indented, and the text is not right-justified.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

9 Line breaking

+

9 Line breaking

- - + +

The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To @@ -8761,37 +9636,35 @@ text as you input it. Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.

- - - - - - - -
- -
+ - -

9.1 \\

+

9.1 \\

- - - + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -8867,25 +9740,23 @@ something like this.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

- -

9.2 \obeycr & \restorecr

+

9.2 \obeycr & \restorecr

- - - + + +

The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file (‘^^M’, internally) the same as \\, followed by \relax. So each new line in the input will also be a new line in the output. The \restorecr command restores normal line-breaking behavior.

-

This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. -See verbatim instead. +

This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. Use +verbatim (see verbatim) instead.

With LaTeX’s usual defaults, this

@@ -8922,16 +9793,14 @@ fff ggg


- -
+ - -

9.3 \newline

+

9.3 \newline

- - + +

In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph mode @@ -8959,16 +9828,14 @@ single cell of the table.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

- -

9.4 \- (discretionary hyphen)

+

9.4 \- (discretionary hyphen)

- - + +

Tell LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you insert \- commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at @@ -9006,15 +9873,13 @@ care.


- -
+ - -

9.5 \discretionary (generalized hyphenation point)

- - +

9.5 \discretionary (generalized hyphenation point)

+ +

Synopsis:

@@ -9042,17 +9907,15 @@ automatically by TeX’s hyphenation algorithm.


- -
+ - -

9.6 \fussy & \sloppy

+

9.6 \fussy & \sloppy

- - - + + +

Declarations to make TeX more picky or less picky about line breaking. Declaring \fussy usually avoids too much space between @@ -9067,22 +9930,20 @@ the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of the command.

-
- -
+ - -

9.6.1 sloppypar

+

9.6.1 sloppypar

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -9114,16 +9975,14 @@ Up: \fussy &am
-
-
+ - -

9.7 \hyphenation

+

9.7 \hyphenation

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -9146,18 +10005,16 @@ exactly. Multiple \hyphenation commands accumulate.


- -
+

Previous: , Up: Line breaking   [Contents][Index]

- -

9.8 \linebreak & \nolinebreak

+

9.8 \linebreak & \nolinebreak

- - - - + + + +

Synopses, one of:

@@ -9192,21 +10049,19 @@ underrepresented groups.

When you issue \linebreak, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right margin. See \\ -and \newline to have the spaces not stretched out. +and \newline, to have the spaces not stretched out.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

10 Page breaking

+

10 Page breaking

- - + +

Ordinarily LaTeX automatically takes care of breaking output into pages with its usual aplomb. But if you are writing commands, or @@ -9235,34 +10090,32 @@ second one is lousy; to break the current page LaTeX doesn’t look as far ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to influence page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.

-

See Layout for more material that is relevant to page breaking. +

See Layout, for more material that is relevant to page breaking.

- - - -
- -
+ - -

10.1 \clearpage & \cleardoublepage

+

10.1 \clearpage & \cleardoublepage

- - - - - + + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -9311,17 +10164,15 @@ two-column mode then \newpage ends the current column while
- -
+ - -

10.2 \newpage

+

10.2 \newpage

- - - + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -9354,22 +10205,20 @@ continent, proposition that all men are created equal.
-

makes a new page start after ‘continent,’ and the cut-off line is +

makes a new page start after ‘continent’, and the cut-off line is not right justified. In addition, \newpage does not vertically stretch out the page, as \pagebreak does.


- -
+ - -

10.3 \enlargethispage

+

10.3 \enlargethispage

- - + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -9399,18 +10248,16 @@ explicit \pagebreak.


- -
+ - -

10.4 \pagebreak & \nopagebreak

+

10.4 \pagebreak & \nopagebreak

- - - - + + + +

Synopses:

@@ -9449,26 +10296,24 @@ a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition that all men are created equal.
-

does not give a page break at ‘continent,’ but instead at -‘nation,’ since that is where LaTeX breaks that line. In +

does not give a page break at ‘continent’, but instead at +‘nation’, since that is where LaTeX breaks that line. In addition, with \pagebreak the vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. This can look strange, and if \flushbottom is in effect this can cause you to get ‘Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has -occurred while \output is active’. See \newpage for a command that +occurred while \output is active’. See \newpage, for a command that does not have these effects.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

11 Footnotes

+

11 Footnotes

- +

Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.

@@ -9490,31 +10335,29 @@ circumstances. include a bibliographic style with that behavior (see Using BibTeX).

- - - - - -
- -
+ - -

11.1 \footnote

+

11.1 \footnote

- +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -9538,9 +10381,9 @@ Next: the footnote. If you use this then LaTeX does not increment the footnote counter.

- - - + + +

By default, LaTeX uses arabic numbers as footnote markers. Change this with something like \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}, which @@ -9550,14 +10393,14 @@ you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with

LaTeX determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters.

- - + +
\footnoterule - +
-

Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page’s +

Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page’s footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document classes (except slides, where it does not appear) is: vertical thickness of 0.4pt, and horizontal size of 0.4\columnwidth long. @@ -9572,9 +10415,9 @@ Change the rule with something like this.

\footnotesep - +
-

The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote +

The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote (see \strut). By default, this is set to the normal strut for \footnotesize fonts (see Font sizes), therefore there is no extra space between footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10pt’, @@ -9592,8 +10435,8 @@ sectioning command such as \chapter (it can only be used in outer paragraph mode; see Modes). There are some workarounds; see following sections.

- - + +

In a minipage environment the \footnote command uses the mpfootnote counter instead of the footnote counter, so they are numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the @@ -9602,15 +10445,13 @@ shown alphabetically. See minipage and -

+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Footnotes   [Contents][Index]

- -

11.2 \footnotemark

+

11.2 \footnotemark

- +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -9663,11 +10504,11 @@ Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}] Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
- - + + - - + +

This example accomplishes the same by using the package cleveref.

@@ -9680,22 +10521,20 @@ The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers, Chance, 1990.} But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
- - + +

It will work with the package hyperref.


- -
+ - -

11.3 \footnotetext

+

11.3 \footnotetext

- +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -9710,21 +10549,19 @@ that command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (see Mode The optional argument number changes the number of the footnote mark.

-

See \footnotemark and Footnotes in a table for usage +

See \footnotemark and Footnotes in a table, for usage examples.


- -
+ - -

11.4 Footnotes in section headings

+

11.4 Footnotes in section headings

- - + +

Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:

@@ -9748,15 +10585,13 @@ what gets moved to the table of contents is the optional argument.


- -
+ - -

11.5 Footnotes in a table

+

11.5 Footnotes in a table

- +

Inside a tabular or array environment the \footnote command does not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but @@ -9833,18 +10668,16 @@ other footnotes.


- -
+ - -

11.6 Footnotes of footnotes

+

11.6 Footnotes of footnotes

- + - - + +

Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package @@ -9863,60 +10696,58 @@ second.\footnotefrom{%


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

12 Definitions

+

12 Definitions

- +

LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.

- - - - - - - - - - - - +
- -
+ - -

12.1 \newcommand & \renewcommand

+

12.1 \newcommand & \renewcommand

- - - - - + + + + +

Synopses, one of:

@@ -9940,13 +10771,16 @@ Next:

Class and package commands. - - -The starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain -multiple paragraphs of text (in plain TeX terms that it not be -\long). +

Define or redefine a command (see also the discussion of +\DeclareRobustCommand in Class and package commands). +

+ + + +

The starred form of these two forbids the arguments from containing +multiple paragraphs of text (in plain TeX terms, the commands +are not \long). With the default form, arguments can be +multiple paragraphs.

These are the parameters:

@@ -9970,10 +10804,10 @@ different number of arguments than the old version.
optargdefault

Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of \cmd is optional, with default value optargdefault -(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then -\cmd does not take an optional argument. +(which may be the empty string). If optargsdefault is not present +then \cmd does not take an optional argument.

- +

That is, if \cmd is used with square brackets, as in \cmd[optval]{...}..., then within defn the parameter #1 is set to the value of optval. On the @@ -10069,18 +10903,16 @@ is to put another pair of braces inside the definition:


- -
+ - -

12.2 \providecommand

+

12.2 \providecommand

- - - - + + + +

Synopses, one of:

@@ -10098,14 +10930,14 @@ If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect as \newcommand. If a command of this name already exists then this definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file that may be loaded more than once, such as a style file. -See \newcommand & \renewcommand for the description of the arguments. +See \newcommand & \renewcommand, for the description of the arguments.

This example

\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
 \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
-From \myaffiliation.
+>From \myaffiliation.
 

outputs ‘From Saint Michael's College’. Unlike \newcommand, @@ -10113,13 +10945,11 @@ the repeated use of \providecommand does not give an error.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

- -

12.3 \makeatletter & \makeatother

+

12.3 \makeatletter & \makeatother

Synopsis:

@@ -10136,9 +10966,9 @@ letter, code 11. The \makeatother declaration sets the category code of the at-sign to code 12, its default value.

As TeX reads characters, it assigns each one a category code, or - - - + + + catcode. For instance, it assigns the backslash character ‘\’ the catcode 0. Command names consist of a category 0 character, ordinarily backslash, followed @@ -10152,19 +10982,19 @@ or class writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a package or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of their own, because by default the at-sign has catcode 12.

-

The pair \makeatletter and \makeatother changes the -default code and then changes it back. Use them inside a .tex -file, in the preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands -named with @, by having them surround your definition. Don’t -use these inside .sty or .cls files since the -\usepackage and \documentclass commands already arrange -that the at-sign has the character code of a letter, catcode 11. +

Use the pair \makeatletter and \makeatother inside a +.tex file, typically in the preamble, when you are defining or +redefining commands named with @, by having them surround your +definition. Don’t use these inside .sty or .cls files +since the \usepackage and \documentclass commands already +arrange that the at-sign has the character code of a letter, +catcode 11.

- - + +

For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see -http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. +https://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e.

In this example the class file has a command \thesis@universityname that the user wants to change. These @@ -10179,17 +11009,15 @@ three lines should go in the preamble, before the


- -
+ - -

12.4 \@ifstar

+

12.4 \@ifstar

- - - + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -10206,28 +11034,34 @@ Examples are the table and table* environments and the

When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward because \newenvironment and \renewenvironment allow the -environment name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more -complex. As in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command, -given above as \mycmd, which peeks ahead to see if it is followed -by a star. For instance, LaTeX does not really have a -\section* command; instead, the \section command peeks -ahead. This command does not accept arguments but instead expands to -one of two commands that do accept arguments. In the synopsis these two -are \mycmd@nostar and \mycmd@star. They could take the -same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all. -As always, in a LaTeX document a command using at-sign @ -must be enclosed inside a \makeatletter ... \makeatother block +environment name to contain a star. So you just have to write +\newenvironment{myenv} or +\newenvironment{myenv*} and continue the definition as +usual. For commands the situation is more complex as the star not being +a letter cannot be part of the command name. As in the synopsis above, +there will be a user-called command, given above as \mycmd, which +peeks ahead to see if it is followed by a star. For instance, LaTeX +does not really have a \section* command; instead, the +\section command peeks ahead. This command does not accept +arguments but instead expands to one of two commands that do accept +arguments. In the synopsis these two are \mycmd@nostar and +\mycmd@star. They could take the same number of arguments or a +different number, or no arguments at all. As always, in a LaTeX +document a command using an at-sign @ in its name must be +enclosed inside a \makeatletter ... \makeatother block (see \makeatletter & \makeatother).

This example of \@ifstar defines the command \ciel and a variant \ciel*. Both have one required argument. A call to -\ciel{night} will return "starry night sky" while -\ciel*{blue} will return "starry not blue sky". +\ciel{blue} will return "not starry blue sky" while +\ciel*{night} will return "starry night sky".

-
\newcommand*{\ciel@unstarred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
-\newcommand*{\ciel@starred}[1]{starry not #1 sky}
+
\makeatletter
+\newcommand*{\ciel@unstarred}[1]{not starry #1 sky}
+\newcommand*{\ciel@starred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
 \newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel@starred}{\ciel@unstarred}}
+\makeatother
 

In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of @@ -10243,31 +11077,45 @@ arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007’s \@ifstar{\agentsecret@starred}{\agentsecret@unstarred}}

-

There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of -\@ifstar. The suffix package allows the construct -\newcommand\mycommand{unstarred version} followed by -\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{starred version}. And -LaTeX3 has the xparse package that allows this code. +

After a command name, a star is handled similarly to an optional +argument. (This differs from environment names in which the star is +part of the name itself and as such could be in any position.) Thus, +it is technically possible to put any number of spaces between the +command and the star. Thus \agentsecret*{Bond} and +\agentsecret *{Bond} are equivalent. However, the +standard practice is not to insert any such spaces. +

+ + + + + + +

There are two alternative ways to accomplish the work of +\@ifstar. (1) The suffix package allows the +construct \newcommand\mycommand{unstarred-variant} +followed by +\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{starred-variant}. +(2) LaTeX provides the xparse package, which allows +this code:

\NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
-  {starred version}%
-  {unstarred version}% 
+  {starred-variant}%
+  {unstarred-variant}% 
   }
 

- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

- -

12.5 \newcounter: Allocating a counter

+

12.5 \newcounter: Allocating a counter

- - + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -10316,19 +11164,17 @@ defined.’


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

- -

12.6 \newlength

+

12.6 \newlength

- - - - - + + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -10356,16 +11202,14 @@ Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual’.


- -
+ - -

12.7 \newsavebox

+

12.7 \newsavebox

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -10398,19 +11242,17 @@ Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

- -

12.8 \newenvironment & \renewenvironment

+

12.8 \newenvironment & \renewenvironment

- - - - - + + + + +

Synopses, one of:

@@ -10437,7 +11279,7 @@ Next: , Pr

Define or redefine the environment env, that is, create the construct \begin{env} ... body ... \end{env}.

- +

The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not contain multiple paragraphs of text. However, the body of these environments can contain multiple paragraphs. @@ -10570,20 +11412,18 @@ the document, use the environment like this.


- -
+ - -

12.9 \newtheorem

+

12.9 \newtheorem

- - - + + + - - + +

Synopses:

@@ -10714,17 +11554,15 @@ by ‘Theorem 2.1’ and ‘Definition 
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

- -

12.10 \newfont

+

12.10 \newfont

- - - + + +

This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with old documents. New documents should define fonts in families through the @@ -10741,8 +11579,8 @@ boldface with a roman (see Fonts). The control sequence must not already be defined. It must begin with a backslash, \.

- - + +

The font description consists of a fontname and an optional at clause. LaTeX will look on your system for a file named fontname.tfm. The at clause can have the form either @@ -10763,17 +11601,15 @@ relative to the font’s design size, which is a value defined in the


- -
+ - -

12.11 \protect

+

12.11 \protect

- - - + + +

All LaTeX commands are either fragile or robust. A fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to certain @@ -10791,7 +11627,7 @@ name} command it writes the section name text to the document such as in the table of contents. Any argument that is internally expanded by LaTeX without typesetting it directly is referred to as a - + moving argument. A command is fragile if it can expand during this process into invalid TeX code. Some examples of moving arguments are those that appear in the \caption{...} @@ -10834,18 +11670,16 @@ to \protect\(..\protect\).


- -
+

-Previous: , Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Definitions   [Contents][Index]

- -

12.12 \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend

+

12.12 \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend

- - - - + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -10861,7 +11695,7 @@ Previous: , Up:

Both commands cause LaTeX to ignore spaces after the end of the command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command -from Plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific. +from plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.

The ignorespaces is often used when defining commands via \newcommand, or \newenvironment, or \def. The @@ -10891,10 +11725,9 @@ as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then \fullname will reproduce that.

-
\makeatletter
-\newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\@honorific{#1}} % remember title
-\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1}       % put title before name
-\makeatother
+
\newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\honorific{#1}} % remember title
+\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\honorific~#1}       % put title before name
+
 \begin{tabular}{|l|}
 \honorific{Mr/Ms}  \fullname{Jones} \\  % no extra space here
 \honorific{ Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones}     % extra space before title
@@ -10902,11 +11735,11 @@ as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
 

To fix this, change to -\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\@honorific~#1}. +\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\honorific~#1}.

The \ignorespaces is also often used in a \newenvironment -at the end of the begin clause, that is, as part of the second -argument, as in \begin{newenvironment}{env +at the end of the begin clause, as in +\begin{newenvironment}{env name}{... \ignorespaces}{...}.

To strip spaces off the end of an environment use @@ -10934,16 +11767,77 @@ inconvenient. The solution is to change to


- -
+ +

12.13 xspace package

+ + + + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\usepackage{xspace}
+  ...
+\newcommand{...}{...\xspace}
+
+ +

The \xspace macro, when used at the end of a command, adds a +space unless the command is followed by certain punctuation characters. +

+

After a command name that uses letters (as opposed to single character +command names using non-letters such as \$), TeX gobbles white +space. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output has ‘Vermont’ +placed snugly against the period, without any intervening space. +

+
+
\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont}
+Our college is in \VT .
+The \VT{} summers are nice.
+
+ +

But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the dummy curly +braces or else there would be no space separating ‘Vermont’ from +‘summers’. (Many authors instead instead use a backslash-space +\ for this. See \(SPACE).) +

+

The xspace package provides \xspace. It is for writing +commands which are designed to be used mainly in text. It inserts a +space after that command unless what immediately follows is in a list of +exceptions. In this example, the dummy braces are not needed. +

+
+
\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont\xspace}
+Our college is in \VT .
+\VT summers are nice.
+
+ +

The default exception list contains the characters ,.'/?;:!~-), +the open curly brace and the backslash-space command discussed above, +and the commands \footnote or \footnotemark. Add to that +list as with \xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii} and remove +from that list as with \xspaceremoveexception{!}. +

+

A comment: many experts prefer not to use \xspace. Putting it in +a definition means that the command will usually get the spacing right. +But it isn’t easy to predict when to enter dummy braces because +\xspace will get it wrong, such as when it is followed by another +command, and so \xspace can make editing material harder and more +error-prone than instead always remembering the dummy braces. +

+ +
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

13 Counters

+

13 Counters

- - + +

Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The name of the counter is often the same as the name of the @@ -10974,35 +11868,33 @@ up to four levels of nesting (see enumerate).

- - - - - - - -
- -
+

Next: , Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

- -

13.1 \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol: Printing counters

+

13.1 \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol: Printing counters

- +

Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if the counter counter has the value 1 then a @@ -11015,7 +11907,7 @@ start with a backslash.

\alph{counter} - +

Print the value of counter in lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, ... If the counter’s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then @@ -11023,7 +11915,7 @@ you get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter too large.

\Alph{counter} - +

Print in uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, ... If the counter’s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter @@ -11031,13 +11923,13 @@ too large.

\arabic{counter} - +

Print in Arabic numbers such as ‘5’ or ‘-2’.

\roman{counter} - +

Print in lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ... If the counter’s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but @@ -11045,7 +11937,7 @@ LaTeX does not print anything in the output.

\Roman{counter} - +

Print in uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ... If the counter’s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but @@ -11053,7 +11945,7 @@ LaTeX does not print anything in the output.

\fnsymbol{counter} - +

Prints the value of counter using a sequence of nine symbols that are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of @@ -11082,17 +11974,15 @@ warning but LaTeX does not output anything.


- -
+ - -

13.2 \usecounter

+

13.2 \usecounter

- - - + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -11124,16 +12014,14 @@ enumerated with testcounter:
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

- -

13.3 \value

+

13.3 \value

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -11173,17 +12061,15 @@ preceded by \protect (see \protect).
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

- -

13.4 \setcounter

+

13.4 \setcounter

- - - + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -11206,20 +12092,19 @@ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}.
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

- -

13.5 \addtocounter

+

13.5 \addtocounter

- +

Synopsis:

-
\addtocounter{counter}{value 
+
\addtocounter{counter}{value}
+

Globally increment counter by the amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. @@ -11234,15 +12119,13 @@ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

- -

13.6 \refstepcounter

+

13.6 \refstepcounter

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -11263,15 +12146,13 @@ locally, i.e., inside the current group.


- -
+ - -

13.7 \stepcounter

+

13.7 \stepcounter

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -11284,23 +12165,21 @@ within it. (For the definition of “counters numbered within”, see \newcounter.)

This command differs from \refstepcounter in that this one does -not influence references — it does not define the current +not influence references; that is, it does not define the current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter (see \refstepcounter).


- -
+

Previous: , Up: Counters   [Contents][Index]

- -

13.8 \day & \month & \year

+

13.8 \day & \month & \year

- - - + + +

LaTeX defines the counter \day for the day of the month (nominally with value between 1 and 31), \month for the month of @@ -11322,27 +12201,31 @@ bogus month value produces no output).


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

14 Lengths

+

14 Lengths

- +

A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length as an argument.

+ + + + +

Lengths come in two types. A rigid length such as 10pt -does not contain a plus or minus component. (Plain TeX -calls this a dimen.) A rubber length (what Plain TeX -calls a skip) such as as with 1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm -can contain either or both of those components. In that rubber length, -the 1cm is the natural length while the other two, the -plus and minus components, allow TeX to stretch or -shrink the length to optimize placement. +does not contain a plus or minus component. (Plain +TeX calls this a dimen.) A rubber length (what plain +TeX calls a skip or glue) such as with 1cm +plus0.05cm minus0.01cm can contain either or both of those +components. In that rubber length, the 1cm is the natural +length while the other two, the plus and minus +components, allow TeX to stretch or shrink the length to optimize +placement.

The illustrations below use these two commands.

@@ -11443,101 +12326,103 @@ that after \setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in} and \zlength is 3in.

- + - - - - - +
- -
+

Next: , Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

- -

14.1 Units of length

+

14.1 Units of length

- +

TeX and LaTeX know about these units both inside and outside of math mode.

pt
-
- -

Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two decimal -places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm. +

+ +

Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units +is 1point = 2.845mm = .2845cm.

pc
-
- -

Pica, 12 pt +

+ +

Pica, 12 pt

in
-
- -

Inch, 72.27 pt +

+ +

Inch, 72.27 pt

bp
-
- -

Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in +

+ +

Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.

cm
-
- -

Centimeter +

+ +

Centimeter

mm
-
- -

Millimeter +

+ +

Millimeter

dd
-
- -

Didot point, 1.07 pt +

+ +

Didot point, 1.07 pt

cc
-
- -

Cicero, 12 dd +

+ +

Cicero, 12 dd

sp
-
- -

Scaled point, 1/65536 pt +

+ +

Scaled point, 1/65536 pt

- - - - - - -

Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of + + + + + + +

Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of the font. The x-height of the current font ex, traditionally the height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical lengths. Similarly em, traditionally the width of the capital @@ -11549,24 +12434,22 @@ of the vertical space between list items given as likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a definition given in points.

- - + +

In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit mu given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current math symbols family. See Spacing in math mode.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

- -

14.2 \setlength

+

14.2 \setlength

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -11599,16 +12482,14 @@ read again> \relax l.19 \setlength{specparindent}{0.6\parindent}&rsquo


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

- -

14.3 \addtolength

+

14.3 \addtolength

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -11642,15 +12523,13 @@ If you leave off the backslash at the start of len, as in


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

- -

14.4 \settodepth

+

14.4 \settodepth

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -11679,15 +12558,13 @@ then you get something like ‘Undefined control sequence. <argumen


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

- -

14.5 \settoheight

+

14.5 \settoheight

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -11717,15 +12594,13 @@ you leave the backslash out of len, as in


- -
+

-Previous: , Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

- -

14.6 \settowidth

+

14.6 \settowidth

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -11754,16 +12629,176 @@ then you get something like ‘Undefined control sequence. <argumen


- -
+
+

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

+
+

14.7 \stretch

+ + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\stretch{number}
+
+ +

Produces a rubber length with zero natural length and number times +\fill units of stretchability (see Lengths). The +number can be positive or negative. This command is robust +(see \protect). +

+

It works for both vertical and horizontal spacing. In this horizontal +example, LaTeX produces three tick marks, and the distance between +the first and second is half again as long as the distance between the +second and third. +

+
+
\rule{0.4pt}{1ex}\hspace{\stretch{1.5}}%
+  \rule{0.4pt}{1ex}\hspace{\stretch{1}}%
+  \rule{0.4pt}{1ex} 
+
+ +

In this vertical example, the ‘We dedicate …’ will have three +times as much space under it as above it. +

+
+
\newenvironment{dedication}{% in document preamble
+  \clearpage\thispagestyle{empty}% 
+  \vspace*{\stretch{1}} % stretchable space at top 
+  \it
+}{%
+  \vspace{\stretch{3}}  % space at bot is 3x as at top
+  \clearpage
+}
+  ...
+\begin{dedication}  % in document body
+We dedicate this book to our wives.
+\end{dedication}
+
+ + +
+
+

+Previous: , Up: Lengths   [Contents][Index]

+
+

14.8 Expressions

+ + + +

Synopsis, one of: +

+
+
\numexpr expression 
+\dimexpr expression
+\glueexpr expression
+\muglue expression
+
+ +

Any place where you may write an integer, or a TeX dimen, or TeX +glue, or muglue, you can instead write an expression to compute that +type of quantity. +

+

An example is that \the\dimexpr\linewidth-4pt\relax will +produce as output the length that is four points less than width of a +line (the only purpose of \the is to show the result in the +document). Analogously, \romannumeral\numexpr6+3\relax will +produce ‘ix’, and \the\glueexpr 5pt plus 1pt * 2 \relax +will produce ‘10.0pt plus 2.0pt’. +

+

A convenience here over doing calculations by allocating registers and +then using \advance, etc., is that the evaluation of expressions +does not involve assignments and can therefore be performed in places +where assignments are not allowed. The next example computes the width +of the \parbox. +

+
+
\newlength{\offset}\setlength{\offset}{2em}
+\begin{center}
+\parbox{\dimexpr\linewidth-\offset*3}{With malice toward none
+with charity for all with firmness in the right as God gives us to see
+the right let us strive on to finish the work we are in to bind up the
+nation's wounds, to care for him who shall have borne the battle and
+for his widow and his orphan \textasciitilde\ to do all which may
+achieve and cherish a just and lasting peace among ourselves and with
+all nations.  ---Abraham Lincoln, Second Inaugural Address, from the
+memorial}
+\end{center}
+
+ +

The expression consists of one or more terms of the same type +(integer, dimension, etc.) that are added or subtracted. A term that is +a type of number, dimension, etc., consists of a factor of that type, +optionally multiplied or divided by factors. A factor of a type is +either a quantity of that type or a parenthesized subexpression. The +expression produces a result of the given type, so that \numexpr +produces an integer, \dimexpr produces a dimension, etc. +

+

In the quotation example above, changing to +\dimexpr\linewidth-3*\offset gives the error Illegal unit +of measure (pt inserted). This is because for \dimexpr and +\glueexpr, the input consists of a dimension or glue value +followed by an optional multiplication factor, and not the other way +around. Thus \the\dimexpr 1pt*10\relax is valid and produces +‘10.0pt’, but \the\dimexpr 10*1pt\relax gives the +Illegal unit error. +

+

The expressions absorb tokens and carry out appropriate mathematics up +to a \relax (which will be absorbed), or up to the first +non-valid token. Thus, \the\numexpr2+3px will print +‘5px’, because LaTeX reads the \numexpr2+3, which is +made up of numbers, and then finds the letter p, which cannot +be part of a number. It therefore terminates the expression and +produces the ‘5’, followed by the regular text ‘px’. +

+

This termination behavior is useful in comparisons. In +\ifnum\numexpr\parindent*2 < 10pt Yes\else No\fi, the less than +sign terminates the expression and the result is ‘No’ (in a +standard LaTeX article). +

+

Expressions may use the operators +, -, * and +/ along with parentheses for subexpressions, (...). In +glue expressions the plus and minus parts do not need +parentheses to be affected by a factor. So \the\glueexpr 5pt plus +1pt * 2 \relax results in ‘10pt plus 2pt’. +

+

TeX will coerce other numerical types in the same way as it does when +doing register assignment. Thus \the\numexpr\dimexpr +1pt\relax\relax will result in ‘65536’, which is 1pt +converted to scaled points (TeX’s internal unit) and then coerced +into an integer. With a \glueexpr here, the stretch and shrink +would be dropped. Going the other way, a \numexpr inside a +\dimexpr or \glueexpr will need appropriate units, as in +\the\dimexpr\numexpr 1 + 2\relax pt\relax, which produces +‘3.0pt’. +

+

The details of the arithmetic: each factor is checked to be in the +allowed range, numbers must be less than 2^{31} in absolute +value, and dimensions or glue components must be less than +2^{14} points, or mu, or fil, etc. The +arithmetic operations are performed individually, except for a scaling +operation (a multiplication immediately followed by a division) which +is done as one combined operation with a 64-bit product as +intermediate value. The result of each operation is again checked to +be in the allowed range. +

+

Finally, division and scaling take place with rounding (unlike TeX’s +\divide, which truncates). Thus +\the\dimexpr 5pt*(3/2)\relax puts ‘10.0pt’ in the document, +because it rounds 3/2 to 2, while +\the\dimexpr 5pt*(4/3)\relax produces ‘5.0pt’. +

+ +
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

15 Making paragraphs

+

15 Making paragraphs

- - + +

To start a paragraph, just type some text. To end the current paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, separated by @@ -11814,28 +12849,26 @@ complete’.

- - - -
- -
+ - -

15.1 \par

+

15.1 \par

- - + +

Synopsis (note that while reading the input TeX converts two consecutive newlines to a \par): @@ -11893,18 +12926,16 @@ there is an empty horizontal space of 3 inches and then


- -
+ - -

15.2 \indent & \noindent

+

15.2 \indent & \noindent

- - - - + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -11923,7 +12954,7 @@ first outputs an empty box whose width is \parindent. These commands are robust (see \protect).

Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line. -See \par for the difference between this command and \par. To +See \par, for the difference between this command and \par. To start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted paragraph, use \noindent.

@@ -11956,8 +12987,8 @@ because LaTeX is already in horizontal mode there. The you may want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs, \parskip (see \parindent & \parskip).

- - + +

Default LaTeX styles have the first paragraph after a section that is not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English. To change that, @@ -11965,62 +12996,64 @@ look on CTAN for the package indentfirst.


- -
+ - -

15.3 \parindent & \parskip

+

15.3 \parindent & \parskip

- - - - + + + + +

Synopsis:

-
\setlength{\parskip}{horizontal len}
-\setlength{\parinden}{vertical len}
+
\setlength{\parindent}{horizontal len}
+\setlength{\parskip}{vertical len}
 
-

Both are a rubber lengths (see Lengths). They give the indentation -of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages -(see minipage), and the vertical space between paragraphs. +

Both are rubber lengths (see Lengths). They affect the +indentation of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside +minipages (see minipage), and the vertical space between +paragraphs, respectively.

-

This, put in the preamble, +

For example, if this is put in the preamble:

\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
 \setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
 
-

arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented, -but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase -‘x’. +

The document will have paragraphs that are not indented, but instead +are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase ‘x’.

In standard LaTeX documents, the default value for \parindent in one-column documents is 15pt when the default text size is -10pt , 17pt for 11pt, and 1.5em for -12pt. In two-column documents it is 1em. The default -value for \parskip in LaTeX’s standard document styles is -0pt plus1pt. +10pt, 17pt for 11pt, and 1.5em for +12pt. In two-column documents it is 1em. (These values +are set before LaTeX calls \normalfont so em is derived +from the default font, Computer Modern. If you use a different font +then to set \parindent in units matching that font, do +\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}.) +

+

The default value for \parskip in LaTeX’s standard document +styles is 0pt plus1pt.


- -
+ - -

15.4 Marginal notes

+

15.4 Marginal notes

- - - - + + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -12041,8 +13074,8 @@ two-sided layout (document option twoside) then it goes in the outside margin. If you are in two-column layout (document option twocolumn) then it goes in the nearest margin.

- - + +

If you declare \reversemarginpar then LaTeX will place subsequent marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the prior paragraph. Revert that to the default position with @@ -12060,23 +13093,23 @@ hyphenation there by beginning left or right with

\marginparpush - +
-

Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for -‘12pt’ documents, ‘5pt’ else. +

Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for ‘12pt’ +documents, ‘5pt’ else. See also page layout parameters marginparpush.

\marginparsep - +
-

Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default +

Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default ‘11pt’ for ‘10pt’ documents, ‘10pt’ else.

\marginparwidth - +
-

Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document +

Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document is ‘90pt’, ‘83pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘68pt’ for ‘12pt’; ‘17pt’ more in each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the default is ‘48pt’. @@ -12089,25 +13122,23 @@ notes from falling off the bottom of the page.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

16 Math formulas

+

16 Math formulas

- - - - - + + + + + - - + + - - + +

Produce mathematical text by putting LaTeX into math mode or display @@ -12176,7 +13207,7 @@ equivalent to \begin{displaymath} math \end{displaymath}. These environments can only be used in paragraph mode (see Modes).

- +

The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some differences. One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts; in display math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they are closer @@ -12204,14 +13235,14 @@ fraction will be scrunched. But, because of its \displaystyle, the ‘Geometric’ line’s fraction will be easy to read, with characters the same size as in the rest of the line.

- - + + - - + + - - + +

The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics, @@ -12222,37 +13253,35 @@ Descriptions of these packages is outside the scope of this document; see their documentation on CTAN.

- - - - - - -
- -
+ - -

16.1 Subscripts & superscripts

+

16.1 Subscripts & superscripts

- - - - - + + + + +

Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of:

@@ -12317,40 +13346,38 @@ subscript. subscript something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally attaching to a prior symbols.

-

Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or +

Using the subscript or superscript character outside of math mode or display math mode, as in the expression x^2, will get you the error ‘Missing $ inserted’.

- - + +

A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to -typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as +typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that, such as mhchem; see CTAN.


- -
+ - -

16.2 Math symbols

+

16.2 Math symbols

- - - + + + - - + +

LaTeX provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that -anyone uses. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, -you will get the pi symbol π. See the Comprehensive -LaTeX Symbol List at -https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/. +anyone uses. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, +you will get the pi symbol π. See the “Comprehensive +LaTeX Symbol List” package at +https://ctan.org/pkg/comprehensive.

Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means exhaustive. Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its symbol class, @@ -12362,44 +13389,44 @@ mode, see \ensuremath.

\| - +

∥ Parallel (relation). Synonym: \parallel.

\aleph - +

ℵ Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).

\alpha - +

α Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).

\amalg - +

⨿ Disjoint union (binary)

\angle - +

∠ Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than sign < and angle bracket \langle.

\approx - +

≈ Almost equal to (relation).

\ast - +

∗ Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed (binary). Synonym: *, which is often a superscript or @@ -12409,281 +13436,281 @@ sometimes reserved for cross-correlation.

\asymp - +

≍ Asymptotically equivalent (relation).

\backslash - +

\ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus \setminus, and \textbackslash for backslash outside of math mode.

\beta - +

β Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).

\bigcap - +

⋂ Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar: binary intersection \cap.

\bigcirc - +

⚪ Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function composition \circ.

\bigcup - +

⋃ Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary union \cup.

\bigodot - +

⨀ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).

\bigoplus - +

⨁ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).

\bigotimes - +

⨂ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).

\bigtriangledown - +

▽ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down (operator).

\bigtriangleup - +

△ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up (operator).

\bigsqcup - +

⨆ Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).

\biguplus - +

⨄ Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus (operator). (Note that the name has only one p.)

\bigvee - +
-

⋁ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator). +

⋁ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).

\bigwedge - +
-

⋀ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator). +

⋀ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).

\bot - +
-

⊥ Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered +

⊥, Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered set, or a contradiction (ordinary). See also \top.

\bowtie - +

⋈ Natural join of two relations (relation).

\Box - +

□ Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package.

\bullet - +
-
+

• Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication dot \cdot.

\cap - +

∩ Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigcap.

\cdot - +

⋅ Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet dot \bullet.

\chi - +

χ Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).

\circ - +

∘ Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigcirc.

\clubsuit - +

♣ Club card suit (ordinary).

\complement - +
-

∁ Set complement, used as a superscript as in +

∁, Set complement, used as a superscript as in $S^\complement$ (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package. Also used: $S^{\mathsf{c}}$ or $\bar{S}$.

\cong - +

≅ Congruent (relation).

\coprod - +

∐ Coproduct (operator).

\cup - +

∪ Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigcup.

\dagger - +

† Dagger relation (binary).

\dashv - +

⊣ Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar: turnstile \vdash.

\ddagger - +

‡ Double dagger relation (binary).

\Delta - +

Δ Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).

\delta - +

δ Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).

\Diamond - +

◇ Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package.

\diamond - +

⋄ Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large diamond \Diamond, circle bullet \bullet.

\diamondsuit - +

♢ Diamond card suit (ordinary).

\div - +

÷ Division sign (binary).

\doteq - +

≐ Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically equal to \Doteq.

\downarrow - +

↓ Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: \Downarrow double line down arrow.

\Downarrow - +

⇓ Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: \downarrow single line down arrow.

\ell - +

ℓ Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).

\emptyset - +

∅ Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is \varnothing.

\epsilon - +

ϵ Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small @@ -12692,127 +13719,127 @@ the set membership relation \in ∈.

\equiv - +

≡ Equivalence (relation).

\eta - +

η Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\exists - +

∃ Existential quantifier (ordinary).

\flat - +

♭ Musical flat (ordinary).

\forall - +

∀ Universal quantifier (ordinary).

\frown - +

⌢ Downward curving arc (ordinary).

\Gamma - +

Γ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\gamma - +

γ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\ge - +

≥ Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for \geq.

\geq - +

≥ Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for \ge.

\gets - +

← Is assigned the value (relation). Synonym: \leftarrow.

\gg - +

≫ Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less than \ll.

\hbar - +

ℏ Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).

\heartsuit - +

♡ Heart card suit (ordinary).

\hookleftarrow - +

↩ Hooked left arrow (relation).

\hookrightarrow - +

↪ Hooked right arrow (relation).

\iff - +

⟷ If and only if (relation). It is \Longleftrightarrow with a \thickmuskip on either side.

\Im - +

ℑ Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part \Re.

\imath - +
-
+

Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (see Math accents).

\in - +

∈ Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate epsilon \epsilonϵ and small letter script @@ -12820,115 +13847,115 @@ epsilon \varepsilon.

\infty - +

∞ Infinity (ordinary).

\int - +

∫ Integral (operator).

\iota - +

ι Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\Join - +

⨝ Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain TeX.

\jmath - +
-
+

Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (see Math accents).

\kappa - +

κ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\Lambda - +

Λ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\lambda - +

λ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\land - +
-

∧ Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for \wedge. -See also logical or \lor. +

∧ Logical and (binary). Synonym: \wedge. +See also logical or \lor.

\langle - +

⟨ Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar: less-than <. Matches \rangle.

\lbrace - +

{ Left curly brace (opening). Synonym: \{. Matches \rbrace.

\lbrack - +

[ Left square bracket (opening). Synonym: [. Matches \rbrack.

\lceil - +

⌈ Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the bottom shaved off (opening). Matches \rceil.

\le - +

≤ Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for \leq.

\leadsto - +
-

⇝ Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package. +

⇝ Squiggly right arrow (relation). To get this symbol outside of math mode you can put \newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}} in the preamble and then use \Leadsto instead.

\Leftarrow - +

⇐ Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar: single-line left arrow \leftarrow.

\leftarrow - +

← Single-line left arrow (relation). Synonym: \gets. Similar: double-line left @@ -12936,116 +13963,117 @@ arrow \Leftarrow.

\leftharpoondown - +

↽ Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).

\leftharpoonup - +

↼ Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).

\Leftrightarrow - +

⇔ Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: single-line double headed arrow \leftrightarrow.

\leftrightarrow - +

↔ Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: double-line double headed arrow \Leftrightarrow.

\leq - +

≤ Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for \le.

\lfloor - +

⌊ Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: \floor.

\lhd - +

◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). -Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load +For the normal subgroup symbol you should load amssymb and use \vartriangleleft (which is a relation and so gives better spacing).

\ll - +

≪ Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater than \gg.

\lnot - +

¬ Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: \neg.

\longleftarrow - +

⟵ Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long double-line left arrow \Longleftarrow.

\longleftrightarrow - +

⟷ Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: long double-line double-headed arrow \Longleftrightarrow.

\longmapsto - +

⟼ Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation). Similar: shorter version \mapsto.

\longrightarrow - +

⟶ Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long double-line right arrow \Longrightarrow.

\lor - +
-

∨ Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge \wedge. +

∨ Logical or (binary). Synonym: \vee. +See also logical and \land.

\mapsto - +
-

↦ Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation). +

↦ Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar +(relation). Similar: longer version \longmapsto.

\mho - +

℧ Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary). -Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package.

\mid - +

∣ Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of \mid is for a set \{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}. @@ -13058,50 +14086,50 @@ for \vert and for norm see the entry for \Vert

\models - +

⊨ Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash (relation). Similar: long double dash \vDash.

\mp - +

∓ Minus or plus (relation).

\mu - +

μ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\nabla - +

∇ Hamilton’s del, or differential, operator (ordinary).

\natural - +

♮ Musical natural notation (ordinary).

\ne - +

≠ Not equal (relation). Synonym: \neq.

\nearrow - +

↗ North-east arrow (relation).

\neg - +

¬ Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: \lnot. Sometimes instead used for @@ -13109,13 +14137,13 @@ negation: \sim.

\neq - +

≠ Not equal (relation). Synonym: \ne.

\ni - +

∋ Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation). Synonym: \owns. Similar: is a member @@ -13123,7 +14151,7 @@ of \in.

\not - +

    Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a following operator (relation). @@ -13134,78 +14162,78 @@ is typographically preferable to \not\in.

\notin - +

∉ Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset of \nsubseteq.

\nu - +

ν Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\nwarrow - +

↖ North-west arrow (relation).

\odot - +

⊙ Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigodot.

\oint - +

∮ Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle (operator).

\Omega - +

Ω uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\omega - +

ω Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\ominus - +

⊖ Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).

\oplus - +

⊕ Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigoplus.

\oslash - +

⊘ Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).

\otimes - +

⊗ Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigotimes.

\owns - +

∋ Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation). Synonym: \ni. Similar: is a member @@ -13213,66 +14241,72 @@ of \in.

\parallel - +

∥ Parallel (relation). Synonym: \|.

\partial - +

∂ Partial differential (ordinary).

\perp - +

⟂ Perpendicular (relation). Similar: \bot uses the same glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class ordinary.

+
\Phi + +
+

Φ Uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). +

+
\phi - +

ϕ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varphi φ.

\Pi - +

Π uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\pi - +

π Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varpi ϖ.

\pm - +

± Plus or minus (binary).

\prec - +

≺ Precedes (relation). Similar: less than <.

\preceq - +

⪯ Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or equals \leq.

\prime - +

′ Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically used as a superscript: $f^\prime$; $f^\prime$ @@ -13285,58 +14319,58 @@ single quote ' in text mode produces a different character

\prod - +

∏ Product (operator).

\propto - +

∝ Is proportional to (relation)

\Psi - +

Ψ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\psi - +

ψ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\rangle - +

⟩ Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater than >. Matches:\langle.

\rbrace - +

} Right curly brace (closing). Synonym: \}. Matches \lbrace.

\rbrack - +

] Right square bracket (closing). Synonym: ]. Matches \lbrack.

\rceil - +

⌉ Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches \lceil.

\Re - +

ℜ Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary). Related: double-line, or blackboard bold, R \mathbb{R}; to access @@ -13344,51 +14378,51 @@ this, load the amsfonts package.

\restriction - +
-

↾ Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym: +

↾, Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym: \upharpoonright. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package.

\revemptyset - +
-

⦰ Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related: +

⦰, Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related: \varnothing. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the stix package.

\rfloor - +

⌋ Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut off (closing). Matches \lfloor.

\rhd - +

◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). -Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead +For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load amssymb and use \vartriangleright (which is a relation and so gives better spacing).

\rho - +

ρ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varrho ϱ.

\Rightarrow - +

⇒ Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation). Similar: right single-line arrow \rightarrow.

\rightarrow - +

→ Right-pointing single line arrow (relation). Synonym: \to. Similar: right double line @@ -13396,34 +14430,34 @@ arrow \Rightarrow.

\rightharpoondown - +

⇁ Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation).

\rightharpoonup - +

⇀ Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation).

\rightleftharpoons - +

⇌ Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation).

\searrow - +

↘ Arrow pointing southeast (relation).

\setminus - +

⧵ Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash, like \ (binary). Similar: backslash \backslash and also @@ -13431,64 +14465,64 @@ like \ (binary). Similar: backslash \backslash and also

\sharp - +

♯ Musical sharp (ordinary).

\Sigma - +

Σ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\sigma - +

σ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varsigma ς.

\sim - +

∼ Similar, in a relation (relation).

\simeq - +

≃ Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).

\smallint - +

∫ Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a display (operator).

\smile - +

⌣ Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).

\spadesuit - +

♠ Spade card suit (ordinary).

\sqcap - +

⊓ Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar: intersection cap.

\sqcup - +

⊔ Square union symbol (binary). Similar: union cup. Related: variable-sized @@ -13496,35 +14530,35 @@ operator \bigsqcup.

\sqsubset - +
-

⊏ Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: +

⊏, Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset \subset. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package.

\sqsubseteq - +

⊑ Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or equal to \subseteq.

\sqsupset - +
-

⊐ Square superset symbol (relation). Similar: +

⊐, Square superset symbol (relation). Similar: superset \supset. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package.

\sqsupseteq - +

⊒ Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset or equal \supseteq.

\star - +

⋆ Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary). @@ -13534,52 +14568,52 @@ as with the Kleene star.

\subset - +

⊂ Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).

\subseteq - +

⊆ Subset or equal to (relation).

\succ - +

≻ Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less than >.

\succeq - +

⪰ Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less than or equal to \leq.

\sum - +

∑ Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital sigma \Sigma.

\supset - +

⊃ Superset (relation).

\supseteq - +

⊇ Superset or equal to (relation).

\surd - +

√ Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command \sqrt{...} typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar @@ -13587,53 +14621,53 @@ that extends to cover the argument.

\swarrow - +

↙ Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).

\tau - +

τ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\theta - +

θ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \vartheta ϑ.

\times - +

× Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See also \cdot.

\to - +

→ Right-pointing single line arrow (relation). Synonym: \rightarrow.

\top - +

⊤ Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set (ordinary). See also \bot.

\triangle - +

△ Triangle (ordinary).

\triangleleft - +

◁ Not-filled triangle pointing left (binary). Similar: \lhd. For the normal subgroup symbol you @@ -13642,7 +14676,7 @@ is a relation and so gives better spacing).

\triangleright - +

▷ Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load @@ -13651,27 +14685,27 @@ relation and so gives better spacing).

\unlhd - +

⊴ Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is, -triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package. For the +triangle, with a line under (binary). For the normal subgroup symbol load amssymb and use \vartrianglelefteq (which is a relation and so gives better spacing).

\unrhd - +

⊵ Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is, -triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package. For the +triangle, with a line under (binary). For the normal subgroup symbol load amssymb and use \vartrianglerighteq (which is a relation and so gives better spacing).

\Uparrow - +

⇑ Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar: single-line up-pointing @@ -13679,7 +14713,7 @@ arrow \uparrow.

\uparrow - +

↑ Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation). Similar: double-line up-pointing @@ -13687,7 +14721,7 @@ arrow \Uparrow.

\Updownarrow - +

⇕ Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing @@ -13695,7 +14729,7 @@ arrow \updownarrow.

\updownarrow - +

↕ Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing @@ -13703,15 +14737,15 @@ arrow \Updownarrow.

\upharpoonright - +
-

↾ Up harpoon, with barb on right side +

↾, Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation). Synonym: \restriction. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package.

\uplus - +

⊎ Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the middle (binary). Similar: union \cup. Related: @@ -13719,19 +14753,19 @@ variable-sized operator \biguplus.

\Upsilon - +

Υ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\upsilon - +

υ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\varepsilon - +

ε Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form @@ -13740,35 +14774,35 @@ membership \in.

\vanothing - +
-

∅ Empty set symbol. Similar: \emptyset. Related: +

∅, Empty set symbol. Similar: \emptyset. Related: \revemptyset. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the amssymb package.

\varphi - +

φ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \phi ϕ.

\varpi - +

ϖ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \pi π.

\varrho - +

ϱ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \rho ρ.

\varsigma - +

ς Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is @@ -13776,7 +14810,7 @@ The non-variant form is \rho ρ.

\vartheta - +

ϑ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is @@ -13784,7 +14818,7 @@ The non-variant form is \rho ρ.

\vdash - +

⊢ Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation). Similar: turnstile rotated a @@ -13792,7 +14826,7 @@ half-circle \dashv.

\vee - +

∨ Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical and \wedge. Similar: variable-sized @@ -13800,47 +14834,24 @@ operator \bigvee.

\Vert - +
-

‖ Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single -bar \vert. -

-

For a norm symbol, you can use the mathtools package and put in -your preamble -\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}. This gives you -three command variants for double-line vertical bars that are correctly -horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred -version $\norm*{M^\perp}$ then the height of the vertical bars -will match the height of the argument, whereas with -\norm{M^\perp} the bars do not grow with the height of the -argument but instead are the default height, and \norm[size -command]{M^\perp} also gives bars that do not grow but are set to -the size given in the size command, e.g., \Bigg. +

‖ Vertical double bar (ordinary). See Delimiters, +for how to use the mathtools package to create flexibly-sized +norm symbols.

\vert - -
-

| Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line -vertical bar \Vert. For such that, as in the definition of a -set, use \mid because it is a relation. -

-

For absolute value you can use the mathtools package and in your -preamble put -\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}. This gives you -three command variants for single-line vertical bars that are correctly -horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred -version $\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$ then the height of the -vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with -\abs{\frac{22}{7}} the bars do not grow with the height of -the argument but instead are the default height, and -\abs[size command]{\frac{22}{7}} also gives bars that -do not grow but are set to the size given in the size command, -e.g., \Bigg. + + +

| Single line vertical bar (ordinary). For “such +that”, as in the definition of a set, use \mid because it +is a relation. See Delimiters, for how to use the mathtools +package to create flexibly-sized absolute-value symbols.

\wedge - +

∧ Logical and (binary). Synonym: \land. See also logical or \vee. Similar: variable-sized @@ -13848,31 +14859,31 @@ operator \bigwedge.

\wp - +

℘ Weierstrass p (ordinary).

\wr - +

≀ Wreath product (binary).

\Xi - +

Ξ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\xi - +

ξ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

\zeta - +

ζ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).

@@ -13884,60 +14895,193 @@ provides versions to use in mathematical text.

\mathdollar - +

Dollar sign in math mode: $.

\mathparagraph - +

Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, ¶.

\mathsection - +

Section sign in math mode §.

\mathsterling - +

Sterling sign in math mode: £.

\mathunderscore - +

Underscore in math mode: _.

- - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ +

16.2.1 Arrows

+ + + + + + + + + + + +

These are the arrows that come with standard LaTeX. The +latexsym and amsfonts packages contain many more. +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
SymbolCommand
\Downarrow
\downarrow
\hookleftarrow
\hookrightarrow
\leftarrow
\Leftarrow
\Leftrightarrow
\leftrightarrow
\longleftarrow
\Longleftarrow
\longleftrightarrow
\Longleftrightarrow
\longmapsto
\Longrightarrow
\longrightarrow
\mapsto
\nearrow
\nwarrow
\Rightarrow
\rightarrow, or \to
\searrow
\swarrow
\uparrow
\Uparrow
\updownarrow
\Updownarrow
+ +

An example of the difference between \to and \mapsto +is: \( f\colon D\to C \) given by \( n\mapsto n^2 \). +

+ + + + + + +

For commutative diagrams there are a number of packages, including +tikz-cd and amscd. +

+ +
+
+

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Math symbols   [Contents][Index]

+
+

16.2.2 \boldmath & \unboldmath

+ + + + + + +

Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode): +

+
+
\boldmath \( math \)
+
+ +

or +

+
+
\unboldmath \( math \)
+
+ + + +

Declarations to change the letters and symbols in math to be in +a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular +(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display +math mode (see Modes). Both commands are fragile +(see \protect). +

+

In this example each \boldmath command takes place inside an +\mbox, +

+
+
we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+
+ +

which means \boldmath is only called in a text mode, here LR +mode, and explains why LaTeX must switch to math mode to set v +and u. +

+

If you use either command inside math mode, as with Trouble: \( +\boldmath x \), then you get something like ‘LaTeX Font Warning: +Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11’ and ‘LaTeX +Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line +11’. +

+ + + +

There are many issues with \boldmath. New documents should use +the bm package provided by the LaTeX Project team. A complete +description is outside the scope of this document (see the full +documentation on CTAN) but even this small example +

+
+
\usepackage{bm}   % in preamble
+...
+we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+
+

shows that it is an improvement over \boldmath. +


- -
+ - -

16.2.1 Blackboard bold

+

16.2.3 Blackboard bold

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -13957,7 +15101,7 @@ integers, etc.
\( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \)
 
-

the \mathbb{N} gives blackboard bold symbol ℕ +

the \mathbb{N} gives blackboard bold symbol ℕ, representing the natural numbers.

If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error @@ -13968,17 +15112,15 @@ capital letters; look on CTAN.


- -
+ - -

16.2.2 Calligraphic

+

16.2.4 Calligraphic

- - - + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -13995,90 +15137,353 @@ Next:
-
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Math symbols   [Contents][Index]

- -

16.2.3 \boldmath & \unboldmath

+

16.2.5 Delimiters

- - - - + + + + + -

Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode): +

Delimiters are parentheses, braces, or other characters used to mark +the start and end of subformulas. This formula has three sets of +parentheses delimiting the three subformulas.

-
\boldmath \( math \)
+
(z-z_0)^2 = (x-x_0)^2 + (y-y_0)^2
 
-

or +

The delimiters do not need to match, so you can enter \( [0,1) \). +

+

Here are the common delimiters: +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
DelimiterCommandName
((Left parenthesis
))Right parenthesis
\}{ or \lbraceLeft brace
\{} or \rbraceRight brace
[[ or \lbrackLeft bracket
]] or \rbrackRight bracket
\lfloorLeft floor bracket
\rfloorRight floor bracket
\lceilLeft ceiling bracket
\rceilRight ceiling bracket
\langleLeft angle bracket
\rangleRight angle bracket
//Slash, or forward slash
\\backslashReverse slash, or backslash
|| or \vertVertical bar
\| or \VertDouble vertical bar
+ + + + +

The mathtools package allows you to create commands for paired +delimiters. For instance, if you put +\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert} in your preamble +then you get two commands for single-line vertical bars (they only work +in math mode). The starred version, such as +\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}, has the height of the vertical bars +match the height of the argument. The unstarred version, such as +\abs{\frac{22}{7}}, has the bars fixed at a default height. +This version accepts an optional argument, as in \abs[size +command]{\frac{22}{7}}, where the height of the bars is given in +size command, such as \Bigg. Using \lVert and +\rVert as the symbols will give you a norm symbol with the same +behavior. +

+ + + + + + +
+ +

16.2.5.1 \left & \right

+ + + + + + + + + + +

Synopsis:

-
\unboldmath \( math \)
+
\left delimiter1 ... \right delimiter2
 
- - -

Declarations to change the letters and symbols in math to be in -a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular -(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display -math mode (see Modes). Both commands are fragile -(see \protect). +

Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. LaTeX makes +the delimiters tall enough to just cover the size of the formula that +they enclose.

-

In this example each \boldmath command takes place inside an -\mbox, +

This makes a unit vector surrounded by parentheses tall enough to cover +the entries.

-
we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+
\begin{equation}
+  \left(\begin{array}{c}
+    1   \\
+    0   \\
+  \end{array}\right)
+\end{equation}
 
-

which means \boldmath is only called in a text mode, here LR -mode, and explains why LaTeX must switch to math mode to set v -and u. +

See Delimiters, for a list of the common delimiters.

-

If you use either command inside math mode, as with Trouble: \( -\boldmath x \), then you get something like ‘LaTeX Font Warning: -Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11’ and ‘LaTeX -Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line -11’. +

Every \left must have a matching \right. In the above +example, leaving out the \left( gets the error message +‘Extra \right’. Leaving out the \right) gets ‘You +can't use `\eqno' in math mode’.

- - + + -

There are many issues with \boldmath. New documents should use -the bm package provided by the LaTeX Project team. A complete -description is outside the scope of this document (see the full -documentation on CTAN) but even this small example + + + +

However, delimiter1 and delimiter2 need not match. A common +case is that you want an unmatched brace, as below. Use a period, +‘.’, as a null delimiter.

-
\usepackage{bm}   % in preamble
-...
-we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+
\begin{equation}
+  f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
+                1             &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
+                f(n-1)+3n^2   &\mbox{--else}       
+       \end{array}\right.
+\end{equation}
 
-

shows that it is an improvement over \boldmath. +

Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a +backslash, \{. (The packages amsmath and +mathtools allow you to get the above construct through in a +cases environment.) +

+

The \left ... \right pair make a group. One consequence is that +the formula enclosed in the \left ... \right pair cannot have +line breaks in the output. This includes both manual line breaks and +LaTeX-generated automatic ones. In this example, LaTeX breaks the +equation to make the formula fit the margins. +

+
+
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
+\( (a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q+r+s+t+u+v+w+x+y+z) \)
+
+ +

But with \left and \right +

+
+
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
+\( \left(a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q+r+s+t+u+v+w+x+y+z\right) \)
+
+ +

LaTeX won’t break the line, causing the formula to extend into the +margin. +

+

Because \left ... \right make a group, all the usual grouping +rules hold. Here, the value of \testlength set inside the +equation will be forgotten, and the output is ‘1.2pt’. +

+
+
\newlength{\testlength} \setlength{\testlength}{1.2pt}
+\begin{equation}
+  \left( a+b=c \setlength{\testlength}{3.4pt} \right)
+  \the\testlength
+\end{equation}
+
+ +

The \left ... \right pair affect the horizontal spacing of the +enclosed formula, in two ways. The first is that in \( \sin(x) = +\sin\left(x\right) \) the one after the equals sign has more space +around the x. That’s because \left( ... \right) inserts +an inner node while ( ... ) inserts an opening node. The second +way that the pair affect the horizontal spacing is that because they +form a group, the enclosed subformula will be typeset at its natural +width, with no stretching or shrinking to make the line fit better. +

+

TeX scales the delimiters according to the height and depth of the +contained formula. Here LaTeX grows the brackets to extend the full +height of the integral. +

+
+
\begin{equation}
+  \left[ \int_{x=r_0}^{\infty} -G\frac{Mm}{r^2}\, dr \right] 
+\end{equation}
+
+ +

Manual sizing is often better. For instance, although below the rule +has no depth, TeX will create delimiters that extend far below the +rule. +

+
+
\begin{equation}
+  \left( \rule{1pt}{1cm} \right)
+\end{equation}
+
+ +

TeX can choose delimiters that are too small, as in \( \left| +|x|+|y| \right| \). It can also choose delimiters that are too large, +as here. +

+
+
\begin{equation}
+  \left( \sum_{0\leq i<n} i^k \right)
+\end{equation}
+
+ +

A third awkward case is when a long displayed formula is on more than +one line and you must match the sizes of the opening and closing +delimiter; you can’t use \left on the first line and +\right on the last because they must be paired. +

+

To size the delimiters manually, see \bigl & \bigr etc.. +

+ +
+
+

+Previous: , Up: Delimiters   [Contents][Index]

+
+

16.2.5.2 \bigl, \bigr, etc.

+ +

Synopsis, one of: +

+
+
\bigldelimiter1 ... \bigrdelimiter2
+\Bigldelimiter1 ... \bigrdelimiter2
+\biggldelimiter1 ... \biggrdelimiter2
+\Biggldelimiter1 ... \Biggrdelimiter2  
+
+ +

(as with \bigl[...\bigr]; strictly speaking they need not be +paired, see below), or one of:

+
+
\bigmdelimiter
+\Bigmdelimiter
+\biggmdelimiter
+\Biggmdelimiter
+
+ +

(as with \bigm|), or one of: +

+
+
\bigdelimiter
+\Bigdelimiter
+\biggdelimiter
+\Biggdelimiter
+
+ +

(as with \big[). +

+

Produce manually-sized delimiters. For delimiters that are +automatically sized see \left & \right). +

+

This produces slightly larger outer vertical bars. +

+
+
  \bigl| |x|+|y| \bigr|
+
+ +

The commands above are listed in order of increasing size. You can use +the smallest size such as \bigl...\bigr in a paragraph without +causing LaTeX to spread the lines apart. The larger sizes are meant +for displayed equations. +

+

See Delimiters, for a list of the common delimiters. In the family of +commands with ‘l’ and ‘r’, delimiter1 and +delimiter2 need not be the same. +

+

The ‘l’ and ‘r’ commands produce open and close delimiters +that insert no horizontal space between a preceding atom and the +delimiter, while the commands without ‘l’ and ‘r’ insert some +space (because each delimiter is set as an ordinary variable). Compare +these two. +

+
+
\begin{tabular}{l}
+  \(\displaystyle \sin\biggl(\frac{1}{2}\biggr) \)  \\  % good
+  \(\displaystyle \sin\bigg(\frac{1}{2}\bigg)  \)   \\  % bad
+\end{tabular}
+
+ +

The traditional typographic treatment is on the first line. On the +second line the output will have some extra space between the +\sin and the open parenthesis. +

+

Commands without ‘l’ or ‘r’ do give correct spacing in +some circumstances, as with this large vertical line +

+
+
\begin{equation}
+  \int_{x=a}^b x^2\,dx = \frac{1}{3} x^3 \Big|_{x=a}^b
+\end{equation}
+
+ + + + +

(many authors would replace \frac with the \tfrac command +from the amsmath package), and as with this larger slash. +

+
+
\begin{equation}
+  \lim_{n\to\infty}\pi(n) \big/ (n/\log n) = 1
+\end{equation}
+
+ +

Unlike the \left...\right pair (see \left & \right), the +commands here with ‘l’ and ‘r’ do not make a group. +Strictly speaking they need not be matched so you can write something +like this. +

+
+
\begin{equation}
+  \Biggl[ \pi/6 ] 
+\end{equation}
+
+ +

The commands with ‘m’ are for relations, which are in the middle of +formulas, as here. +

+
+
\begin{equation}
+  \biggl\{ a\in B \biggm| a=\sum_{0\leq i<n}3i^2+4 \biggr\}
+\end{equation}  
+
+ +
- -
+ - -

16.2.4 Dots, horizontal or vertical

+

16.2.6 Dots, horizontal or vertical

- - + +

Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern continues. @@ -14094,24 +15499,24 @@ continues.

LaTeX provides these.

-
+
\cdots - +

Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line, as in ⋯. Used as: \( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} \).

-
+
\ddots - +

Diagonal ellipsis, ⋱. See the above array example for a usage.

-
+
\ldots - +

Ellipsis on the baseline, …. Used as: \( x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \). Another example is the above array example. A @@ -14122,9 +15527,9 @@ package is \hdots. The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken. (In a paragraph mode or LR mode a synonym for \ldots is \dots.)

-
+
\vdots - +

Vertical ellipsis, ⋮. See the above array example for a usage. @@ -14132,8 +15537,8 @@ usage.

- - + +

The amsmath package has the command \dots to semantically mark up ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs @@ -14161,229 +15566,279 @@ or relation symbol, \dotsi for dots with integrals, or


- -
+
+

+Previous: , Up: Math symbols   [Contents][Index]

+
+

16.2.7 Greek letters

+ + + +

The upper case versions of these Greek letters are only shown when they +differ from Roman upper case letters. +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
SymbolCommandName
α\alphaAlpha
β\betaBeta
γ, Γ\gamma, \GammaGamma
δ, Δ\delta, \DeltaDelta
ε, ϵ\varepsilon, \epsilonEpsilon
ζ\zetaZeta
η\etaEta
θ, ϑ\theta, \varthetaTheta
ι\iotaIota
κ\kappaKappa
λ, Λ\lambda, \LambdaLambda
μ\muMu
ν\nuNu
ξ, Ξ\xi, \XiXi
π, Π\pi, \PiPi
ρ, ϱ\rho, \varrhoRho
σ, Σ\sigma, \SigmaSigma
τ\tauTau
ϕ, φ, Φ\phi, \varphi, \PhiPhi
χ\chichi
ψ, Ψ\psi, \PsiPsi
ω, Ω\omega, \OmegaOmega
+ + + + +

For omicron, if you are using LaTeX’s default Computer Modern font +then enter omicron just as ‘o’ or ‘O’. If you like having the +name or if your font shows a difference then you can use something like +\newcommand\omicron{o}. The package unicode-math has +\upomicron for upright omicron and \mitomicron for math +italic. +

+

While the set membership relation symbol ∈ generated by +\in is related to epsilon, it is never used for a variable. +

+ +
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Math formulas   [Contents][Index]

- -

16.3 Math functions

+

16.3 Math functions

- - + +

These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper spacing.

\arccos - +

Inverse cosine

\arcsin - +

Inverse sine

\arctan - +

Inverse tangent

\arg - +

Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane

\bmod - +

Binary modulo operator, used as in \( 5\bmod 3=2 \)

\cos - +

Cosine

\cosh - +

Hyperbolic cosine

\cot - +

Cotangent

\coth - +

Hyperbolic cotangent

\csc - +

Cosecant

\deg - +

Degrees

\det - +

Determinant

\dim - +

Dimension

\exp - +

Exponential

\gcd - +

Greatest common divisor

\hom - +

Homomorphism

\inf - +

Infinum

\ker - +

Kernel

\lg - +

Base 2 logarithm

\lim - +

Limit

\liminf - +

Limit inferior

\limsup - +

Limit superior

\ln - +

Natural logarithm

\log - +

Logarithm

\max - +

Maximum

\min - +

Minimum

\pmod - +

Parenthesized modulus, as used in \( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)

\Pr - +

Probability

\sec - +

Secant

\sin - +

Sine

\sinh - +

Hyperbolic sine

\sup - +

sup

\tan - +

Tangent

\tanh - +

Hyperbolic tangent

- - + +

The amsmath package adds improvements on some of these, and also allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but @@ -14395,16 +15850,14 @@ below, as is traditional with \lim, \sup, or \ma


- -
+ - -

16.4 Math accents

+

16.4 Math accents

- - + +

LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in math. These are different from accents in normal text @@ -14412,96 +15865,96 @@ in math. These are different from accents in normal text

\acute - +
-
+

Math acute accent

\bar - +
-
- +
+

Math bar-over accent

\breve - +
-
+

Math breve accent

\check - +
-
- +
+

Math háček (check) accent

\ddot - +
-
+

Math dieresis accent

\dot - +
-
- +
+

Math dot accent

\grave - +
-
+

Math grave accent

\hat - +
-
- +
+

Math hat (circumflex) accent

\mathring - +
-
+

Math ring accent

\tilde - +
-
+

Math tilde accent

\vec - +
-
+

Math vector symbol

\widehat - +
-
+

Math wide hat accent

\widetilde - +
-
+

Math wide tilde accent

@@ -14512,31 +15965,29 @@ one without a dot, \imath or jmath (see -
+ - -

16.5 Over- and Underlining

+

16.5 Over- and Underlining

- - + +

LaTeX provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or putting braces over or under some material.

\underline{text} - +

Underline text. Works inside math mode, and outside. The line is always completely below the text, taking account of descenders, so in \(\underline{y}\) the line is lower than in \(\underline{x}\). This command is fragile (see \protect).

- - + +

Note that the package ulem does text mode underlining and allows line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the @@ -14545,7 +15996,7 @@ producing a line, for such things as a signature.

\overline{text} - +

Put a horizontal line over text. Works inside math mode, and outside. For example, \overline{x+y}. @@ -14553,7 +16004,7 @@ Note that this differs from the command \bar (see +

Put a brace under math. For example, this (1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3) emphasizes the telescoping part. @@ -14572,7 +16023,7 @@ unconnected to the underbrace.

\overbrace{math} - +

Put a brace over math, as with \overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}. See also @@ -14581,33 +16032,31 @@ unconnected to the underbrace.

- - + +

The package mathtools adds an over- and underbrace, as well as some improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN.


- -
+ - -

16.6 Spacing in math mode

+

16.6 Spacing in math mode

- - + +

When typesetting mathematics, LaTeX puts in spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter y=m x then LaTeX ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x, as y=mx.

-

But LaTeX’s rules sometimes need tweaking. For example, in an +

But LaTeX’s rules occasionally need tweaking. For example, in an integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the -f(x) and the dx, here done with the \, command. +f(x) and the dx, here done with the \, command:

\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
@@ -14622,26 +16071,42 @@ a ‘M’.
 

\;
-
- -

Synonym: \thickspace. Normally 5.0mu plus 5.0mu. Math -mode only. +

+ +

Synonym: \thickspace. Normally 5.0mu plus 5.0mu. +With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be +used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only. +

+
+
\negthickspace
+
+

Normally -5.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu. +With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be +used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.

\:
\>
-
- - -

Synonym: \medspace. Normally 4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu. -Math mode only. +

+ + +

Synonym: \medspace. Normally 4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu. +With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be +used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only. +

+
+
\negmedspace
+
+

Normally -4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu. +With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be +used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.

\,
-
- - -

Synonym: \thinspace. Normally 3mu, which is 1/6em. +

+ + +

Synonym: \thinspace. Normally 3mu, which is 1/6em. Can be used in both math mode and text mode (see \thinspace & \negthinspace).

This space is widely used, for instance between the function and the @@ -14657,49 +16122,51 @@ this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.

\!
-
- - -

A negative thin space. Normally -3mu. The \! command is -math mode only but the \negthinspace command is available for -text mode (see \thinspace & \negthinspace). +

+ + +

A negative thin space. Normally -3mu. +With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be +used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, +The \! command is math mode only but the \negthinspace +command has always worked in text mode (see \thinspace & \negthinspace).

\quad
-
- -

This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space +

+ +

This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space between two equations inside a displaymath environment. It is available in both text and math mode.

\qquad
-
-

A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em. It is available in +

+

A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em. It is available in both text and math mode.

- - +
- -
+ - -

16.6.1 \smash

+

16.6.1 \smash

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -14765,28 +16232,26 @@ mode. So if it starts a paragraph then you should first put a \leavevmode\smash{zzz} % usual paragraph indent
- - + +

The package mathtools has operators that provide even finer control over smashing a subformula box.


- -
+

-Previous: , Up: Spacing in math mode   [Contents][Index]

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Spacing in math mode   [Contents][Index]

- -

16.6.2 \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom

+

16.6.2 \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom

- - - - - - + + + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -14808,28 +16273,38 @@ Previous: , Up: The \phantom command creates a box with the same height, depth, and width as subformula, but empty. That is, this command causes -LaTeX to typeset the box but not its ink. The \vphantom -variant also produces an invisible box with the same height and depth as -subformula, but it has width zero. And \hphantom makes a -box with the same width as subformula but with height and depth -zero. -

-

Without the \vphantom in this example, the top bars of the two -square roots would be at different heights. +LaTeX to typeset the space but not fill it with the material. Here +LaTeX will put a box of the right size for the quotation, but empty.

-
\( \sqrt{\vphantom{a^3}a}\cdot\sqrt{a^3} \)
+
\fbox{\phantom{Conservatism is the fear-filled worship of dead radicals.
+               --- Mark Twain}}
 
-

The \vphantom{a^3} causes the first \sqrt to have inside -it a box of the same height as the second \sqrt, so LaTeX -makes the bars align. +

The \vphantom variant produces an invisible box with the same +vertical size as subformula, the same height and depth, but having +zero width. And \hphantom makes a box with the same width as +subformula but with zero height and depth. +

+

In this example, the tower of exponents in the second summand expression +is so tall that TeX places this expression further down than its +default. Without adjustment, the two summand expressions would be at +different levels. The \vphantom in the first expression tells +TeX to leave as much vertical room as it does for the tower, so the +two expressions come out at the same level.

-

These commands often are combined with \smash. See \smash -for another example of the use of \vphantom. +

+
\begin{displaymath}
+    \sum_{j\in\{0,\ldots\, 10\}\vphantom{3^{3^{3^j}}}}
+      \sum_{i\in\{0,\ldots\, 3^{3^{3^j}}\}} i\cdot j
+\end{displaymath}
+
+ +

These commands are often used in conjunction with \smash. +See \smash, which includes another example of \vphantom.

- - + +

The three phantom commands appear often but note that LaTeX provides a suite of other commands to work with box sizes that may be more @@ -14839,8 +16314,8 @@ as \settodepth (see \settodepth), In addition, the mathtools package has many commands that offer fine-grained control over spacing.

- - + +

All three commands produce an ordinary box, without any special mathematics status. So to do something like attaching a superscript you @@ -14854,48 +16329,77 @@ with \leavevmode.


- -
+ +

16.6.3 \mathstrut

+ + + + + + + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\mathstrut
+
+ +

The analogue of \strut for mathematics. See \strut. +

+

The input $\sqrt{x} + \sqrt{x^i}$ gives output where the +second radical is taller than the first. To add extra vertical space +without any horizontal space, so that the two have the same height, use +$\sqrt{x\mathstrut} + \sqrt{x^i\mathstrut}$. +

+

The \mathstrut command adds the vertical height of an open +parenthesis, (, but no horizontal space. It is defined as +\vphantom{(}, so see \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom for +more. An advantage over \strut is that \mathstrut adds no +depth, which is often the right thing for formulas. Using the height of +an open parenthesis is just a convention; for complete control over the +amount of space, use \rule with a width of zero. See \rule. +

+ +
+ - -

16.7 Math miscellany

+

16.7 Math miscellany

- +

LaTeX contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are some that don’t fit into other categories.

- - - - - -
- -
+

Next: , Up: Math miscellany   [Contents][Index]

- -

16.7.1 Colon character : & \colon

+

16.7.1 Colon character : & \colon

- - - - + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -14910,15 +16414,15 @@ Next: , Up: With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
- - + +

Ordinary LaTeX defines \colon to produce the colon character with the spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation \{x\colon 0\leq x<1\}.

- - + +

But the widely-used amsmath package defines \colon for use in the definition of functions f\colon D\to C. So if you want @@ -14926,19 +16430,17 @@ the colon character as a punctuation then use \mathpunct{:}.


- -
+ - -

16.7.2 \*

+

16.7.2 \*

- - - - - + + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -14954,102 +16456,42 @@ that break. LaTeX outputs it as though it were \( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \). If a line break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then LaTeX sets it like \( A_1 A_2 \times \), followed by the -break, followed by \( A_3 A_4 \). -

- -
- -
-

-Next: , Previous: , Up: Math miscellany   [Contents][Index]

-
- -

16.7.3 \frac

- - - - -

Synopsis: -

-
-
\frac{numerator}{denominator}
-
- -

Produces the fraction. Used as: \begin{displaymath} -\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}. In inline math -mode it comes out small; see the discussion of \displaystyle -(see Math formulas). -

- -
- -
-

-Next: , Previous: , Up: Math miscellany   [Contents][Index]

-
- -

16.7.4 \left & \right

- - - - - - - - - -

Synopsis: -

-
-
\left delimiter1 ... \right delimiter2
-
- -

Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. The delimiters -are sized according to the math they enclose. This makes a unit vector -surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses. -

-
-
\begin{equation}
-  \left(\begin{array}{c}
-    1   \\
-    0   \\
-  \end{array}\right)
-
- -

Every \left must have a matching \right. Leaving out the -\left( in the above gets ‘Extra \right’. Leaving off the -\right) gets ‘You can't use `\eqno' in math mode’. +break, followed by \( A_3 A_4 \).

-

However, the two delimiters delimiter1 and delimiter2 need -not match. A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as -below. Use a period, ‘.’, as a null delimiter. + +


+
+

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Math miscellany   [Contents][Index]

+
+

16.7.3 \frac

+ + + + +

Synopsis:

-
\begin{equation}
-  f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
-                1             &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
-                f(n-1)+3n^2   &\mbox{--else}       
-       \end{array}\right.
-\end{equation}
+
\frac{numerator}{denominator}
 
-

Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a -backslash, \{. +

Produces the fraction. Used as: \begin{displaymath} +\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}. In inline math +mode it comes out small; see the discussion of \displaystyle +(see Math formulas).


- -
+

-Next: , Previous: , Up: Math miscellany   [Contents][Index]

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Math miscellany   [Contents][Index]

- -

16.7.5 \sqrt

+

16.7.4 \sqrt

- - - - + + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -15069,17 +16511,15 @@ a large enough arg, it is vertical).


- -
+

Previous: , Up: Math miscellany   [Contents][Index]

- -

16.7.6 \stackrel

+

16.7.5 \stackrel

- - - + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -15092,15 +16532,13 @@ arrow enter \stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

17 Modes

+

17 Modes

- +

As LaTeX processes your document, at any point it is in one of six modes. They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal @@ -15109,14 +16547,14 @@ in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.

    -
  • +
  • Paragraph mode is what LaTeX is in when processing ordinary text. It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. This is the mode LaTeX is in most of the time. - - -

    LR mode (for left-to-right mode; in plain TeX this is called + + +

    LR mode (for left-to-right mode; in plain TeX this is called restricted horizontal mode) is in effect when LaTeX starts making a box with an \mbox command. As in paragraph mode, LaTeX’s output is a string of words with spaces between them. Unlike @@ -15126,23 +16564,23 @@ that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to put that box into a line, it could very well complain that the finished LR box won’t fit there.)

    -
  • -Math mode is when LaTeX is generating +
  • +Math mode is when LaTeX is generating an inline mathematical formula. - +

    Display math mode is when LaTeX is generating a displayed mathematical formula. (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from inline ones. One example is that the placement of the subscript on \int differs in the two situations.)

    -
  • -Vertical mode is when LaTeX is building the list of lines and +
  • +Vertical mode is when LaTeX is building the list of lines and other material making the output page. This is the mode LaTeX is in when it starts a document. - -

    Internal vertical mode is in effect when LaTeX starts making a + +

    Internal vertical mode is in effect when LaTeX starts making a \vbox. This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.

@@ -15154,9 +16592,9 @@ mode, then the next switch happens at the ‘\(’ where La changes to math mode, and then when it leaves the formula it pops back to paragraph mode.

- - -

Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a \parbox command + + +

Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a \parbox command or a minipage then LaTeX is put into paragraph mode. But it will not put a page break here. Inside one of these boxes, called a parbox, LaTeX is in inner paragraph mode. Its more usual @@ -15164,18 +16602,16 @@ situation, where it can put page breaks, is outer paragraph mode (see Page breaking).

-
- -
+

Up: Modes   [Contents][Index]

- -

17.1 \ensuremath

+

17.1 \ensuremath

Synopsis:

@@ -15205,16 +16641,14 @@ But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

18 Page styles

+

18 Page styles

- - + +

The style of a page determines where LaTeX places the components of that page, such as headers and footers, and the text body. This @@ -15222,35 +16656,33 @@ includes pages in the main part of the document but also includes special pages such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or the first page of an article.

- - + +

The package fancyhdr is very helpful for constructing page styles. See its documentation on CTAN.

- - - -
- -
+ - -

18.1 \maketitle

+

18.1 \maketitle

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -15260,7 +16692,7 @@ Next: Document class options for information about +of the first page. (See Document class options, for information about the titlepage document class option.)

This example shows \maketitle appearing in its usual place, @@ -15294,11 +16726,11 @@ the following declarations. These must come before the

\author{name1 \and name2 \and ...} - +
-
- - +
+ +

Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is a list of authors separated by \and commands. To separate lines within a single author’s entry, for instance to give the author’s @@ -15308,9 +16740,9 @@ the \author declaration then you get ‘LaTeX Warning: No

\date{text} - +
-
+

Optional. Declare text to be the document’s date. The text doesn’t need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If you omit \date then LaTeX uses the current date (see \today). @@ -15318,10 +16750,10 @@ To have no date, instead use \date{}.

\thanks{text} - +
-
- +
+

Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author information for acknowledgements as illustrated above, but you can also use it in the title, or any place a footnote makes sense. It can be any text at @@ -15330,10 +16762,10 @@ address.

\title{text} - +
-
- +
+

Required. Declare text to be the title of the document. Get line breaks inside text with a double backslash, \\. If you omit the \title declaration then you get ‘LaTeX Error: No @@ -15350,16 +16782,14 @@ house requirements.)


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

- -

18.2 \pagenumbering

+

18.2 \pagenumbering

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -15410,8 +16840,8 @@ get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter too large’.

gobble
-
- +
+

LaTeX does not output a page number, although it does get reset. References to that page also are blank. (This does not work with the popular package hyperref so to have the page number @@ -15432,18 +16862,16 @@ number then you will manipulate the page counter


- -
+ - -

18.3 \pagestyle

+

18.3 \pagestyle

- - - - + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -15454,8 +16882,8 @@ Next: - + +

A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package fancyhdr is now the standard way to manipulate headers and @@ -15532,7 +16960,7 @@ setting \rightmark to ‘Subsection 2.1&rsquo

\markboth{left-head}{right-head} - +

Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for either a page style of headings or myheadings. A left hand page @@ -15544,7 +16972,7 @@ the last one that came before that page.

\markright{right} - +

Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.

@@ -15553,16 +16981,14 @@ the last one that came before that page.
- -
+

Previous: , Up: Page styles   [Contents][Index]

- -

18.4 \thispagestyle

+

18.4 \thispagestyle

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -15596,16 +17022,14 @@ To make the page entirely empty, the command


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

19 Spaces

+

19 Spaces

- - + +

LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. Some of these are best suited to mathematical text; see Spacing in math mode. Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text @@ -15614,56 +17038,54 @@ chapter.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- -
+

Next: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.1 \enspace & \quad & \qquad

+

19.1 \enspace & \quad & \qquad

- - - + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -15688,22 +17110,20 @@ measurement such as points (see Lengths/em). \end{center}
-

See Spacing in math mode for \quad and \qquad. These +

See Spacing in math mode, for \quad and \qquad. These are lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice in many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with \hspace.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.2 \hspace

+

19.2 \hspace

- +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -15759,18 +17179,16 @@ space won’t shrink more than 0.25cm (see Lengths).


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.3 \hfill

+

19.3 \hfill

- + - - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -15788,7 +17206,7 @@ of the page and ‘Quiz One’ on the right.
\noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
 
- +

The \hfill command is equivalent to \hspace{\fill} and so the space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use \hspace*{\fill} (see \hspace). @@ -15811,18 +17229,16 @@ so the space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.4 \hss

+

19.4 \hss

- - - - + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -15849,13 +17265,11 @@ X\hbox to 0pt{\hss Z}Y


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.5 \spacefactor

+

19.5 \spacefactor

Synopsis:

@@ -15863,7 +17277,7 @@ Next: ,
\spacefactor=integer
 
- +

Influence LaTeX’s glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level documents do not use this command.

@@ -15921,30 +17335,28 @@ See \makeatletter & \

- - -
-
-
+ - -

19.5.1 \@

+

19.5.1 \@

- - - - - - + + + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -15998,17 +17410,15 @@ Examples are Nat.\ Acad.\ Science, and Mr.~Bean, and


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: \spacefactor   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.5.2 \frenchspacing

+

19.5.2 \frenchspacing

- - - + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -16026,21 +17436,19 @@ The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring \frenchspacing -(the command is from Plain TeX) switches to the tradition that all +(the command is from plain TeX) switches to the tradition that all spaces are treated equally.


- -
+

Previous: , Up: \spacefactor   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.5.3 \normalsfcodes

+

19.5.3 \normalsfcodes

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -16053,17 +17461,17 @@ Previous: -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.6 Backslash-space, \

+

19.6 Backslash-space, \

- - - + + + + +

This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a backslash followed by a space. Synopsis: @@ -16102,7 +17510,7 @@ in \TeX\ is nice. (But using curly parentheses, as in \TeX{} is best, has the advantage of still working if the next character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in So -says Prof.\ Smith (see \@). +says Prof.\ Smith or Jones et al.\ (1993) (see \@).

Under normal circumstances, \tab and \newline are equivalent to backslash-space, \ . @@ -16110,19 +17518,18 @@ are equivalent to backslash-space, \ .


- -
+ - -

19.7 ~

+

19.7 ~

- - - - - + + + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -16144,28 +17551,35 @@ space has length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus

In addition, despite the period, LaTeX does not use the end-of-sentence spacing (see \@).

-

Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could cause -confusion. But they also reduce LaTeX’s options when it breaks lines -into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters of -taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers. Nevertheless, -here are some usage models, many of them from the TeXbook. +

Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could +cause confusion. They also still allow hyphenation (of either of the +tied words), so they are generally preferable to putting consecutive +words in an \mbox (see \mbox & \makebox). +

+

They are also matters of taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, +among readers. Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them +from The TeXbook.

  • Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references: Chapter~12, or Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}, or -Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}. When cases are enumerated inline: -(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded. +Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}. + +
  • When cases are enumerated inline: (b)~Show that $f(x)$ is +(1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded. - - + +
  • Between a number and its unit: $745.7.8$~watts (the siunitx package has a special facility for this) or 144~eggs. This includes between a month and a date: -October~12 or 12~Oct. In general, in any expressions where -numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space: +October~12 or 12~Oct. In general, in any expressions +where numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space: AD~565, or 2:50~pm, or Boeing~747, or -268~Plains Road, or \$$1.4$~billion. +268~Plains Road, or \$$1.4$~billion. Other common +choices here are a thin space (see \thinspace & \negthinspace) and +no space at all.
  • When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: equals~$n$, or less than~$\epsilon$, or given~$X$, or modulo~$p^e$ @@ -16179,32 +17593,28 @@ common with~$m$.
  • Between symbols in series: $1$,~$2$, or~$3$ or $1$,~$2$, \ldots,~$n$. -
  • Between a person’s forenames and between multiple surnames: +
  • Between a person’s given names and between multiple surnames: Donald~E. Knuth, or Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo, or -Charles~XII (but you must give TeX places to break the line so -you may do Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin). - -
  • Before a dash: pages 12~--14 or it is~--- it must be -said~--- plausible. +Charles~XII—but you must give TeX places to break the line +so you might do Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la +Vall\'ee~Poussin.

- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.8 \thinspace & \negthinspace

+

19.8 \thinspace & \negthinspace

- - - - - - + + + + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -16213,14 +17623,14 @@ Next: , Previous:
-

Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6em and --1/6em. These are the text mode equivalents of \, and -\! (see Spacing in math mode/\thinspace). You can use -\, as a synonym for \thinspace in text mode. +

These produce unbreakable and unstretchable spaces of 1/6em and +-1/6em, respectively. These are the text mode equivalents of +\, and \! (see Spacing in math mode/\thinspace). +

+

You can use \, as a synonym for \thinspace in text mode.

-

The \negthinspace command is used in text mode mostly for -fiddling with spaces. One common use of \thinspace is as the -space between nested quotes. +

One common use of \thinspace is as the space between nested +quotes:

Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
@@ -16228,21 +17638,25 @@ space between nested quotes.
 
 

Another use is that some style guides call for a \thinspace between an ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides, -though, think the three dots are quite enough already). Still another -use is between initials, as in D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth. +think the three dots and/or four dots are plenty). Another +style-specific use is between initials, as in D.\thinspace E.\ +Knuth. +

+

LaTeX provides a variety of similar spacing commands +(see Spacing in math mode). With amsmath, or as of the +2020-10-01 LaTeX release, they can be used in text mode as well as +math mode, including \! for \negthinspace; before that, +they were available only in math mode.

-
- -
+ - -

19.9 \/

+

19.9 \/

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -16251,10 +17665,11 @@ Next:

Font styles). +

When you use commands such as \emph and \textit and +\textsl to change fonts, LaTeX automatically inserts the +italic correction when needed (see Font styles). However, +declarations such as \em and \itshape and +\slshape do not automatically insert italic corrections.

-

Roman characters can also have an italic correction. An example is in -the name pdf\/\TeX. +

Upright characters can also have an italic correction. An example +where this is needed is the name pdf\/\TeX. However, most +upright characters have a zero italic correction. Some font creators +do not include italic correction values even for italic fonts.

-

There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done -in a different way. + + +

Technically, LaTeX uses another font-specific value, the so-called +slant parameter (namely \fontdimen1), to determine whether to +possibly insert an italic correction, rather than tying the action to +particular font commands. +

+

There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; math spacing is +done in a different way.


- -
+ - -

19.10 \hrulefill & \dotfill

+

19.10 \hrulefill & \dotfill

- - + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -16353,13 +17778,11 @@ Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with


- -
+ - -

19.11 \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip

+

19.11 \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -16388,29 +17811,29 @@ said Peter. file.

-
+
\bigskip - +
-
+

The same as \vspace{\bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the book and article classes is 12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt.

-
+
\medskip - +
-
+

The same as \vspace{\medskipamount}, ordinarily about half of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the book and article classes is 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt.

-
+
\smallskip - +
-
+

The same as \vspace{\smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the book and article classes is 3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt. @@ -16429,13 +17852,11 @@ put a page break (see -

+ - -

19.12 \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak

+

19.12 \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -16467,16 +17888,14 @@ with ‘def’.


- -
+ - -

19.13 \strut

+

19.13 \strut

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -16540,10 +17959,10 @@ third list’s \parbox goes only to the bottom of its second the baseline. The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra below-baseline space.

- - - - + + + +

The \strut command is often useful in graphics, such as in TikZ or Asymptote. For instance, you may have a command @@ -16575,17 +17994,15 @@ integral would still hit the line.)


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.14 \vspace

+

19.14 \vspace

- - - + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -16607,7 +18024,7 @@ or minus component (see Lengths). The new day dawned cold.
-

(See \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip for common inter-paragraph +

(See \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, for common inter-paragraph spaces.)

The *-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More @@ -16645,18 +18062,16 @@ the page, with at least one inch of space below each.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.15 \vfill

+

19.15 \vfill

- + - - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -16691,17 +18106,15 @@ Lost Dog!
- -
+

Previous: , Up: Spaces   [Contents][Index]

- -

19.16 \addvspace

+

19.16 \addvspace

- - - + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -16739,7 +18152,7 @@ The two rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the

Now uncomment the second \addvspace. It does not make the gap 20pt longer; instead the gap is the sum of \baselineskip and 20pt. So \addvspace in a sense does the opposite of -its name — it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not +its name—it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not accumulate, but instead that only the largest one is used.

LaTeX uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below @@ -16755,54 +18168,53 @@ with a \par command (see \par), as in th


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

20 Boxes

+

20 Boxes

- +

At its core, LaTeX puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a page. So these commands are central.

+ + +

There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating boxes. One useful adjunct to the commands here is adjustbox.

- - - - - - -
- -
+ - -

20.1 \mbox & \makebox

+

20.1 \mbox & \makebox

- - - - - + + + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -16820,13 +18232,13 @@ LR mode (see Modes) so it is not broken into lines. The

Because text is not broken into lines, you can use \mbox to prevent hyphenation. In this example, LaTeX will not hyphenate -the table name, ‘T-4’. +the tank name, ‘T-34’.

-
See Table~\mbox{T-4}
+
The soviet tank \mbox{T-34} is a symbol of victory against nazism.
 
-

The first two command versions, \mbox and \makebox, are +

The first two command synopsis versions, \mbox and \makebox, are roughly equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the text. (They are like plain TeX’s \hbox.)

@@ -16842,7 +18254,7 @@ this creates a full-line box

with ‘Chapter Exam’ centered. But text can also be too wide for width. See the example below of zero-width boxes.

-

In the width argument you can use the following lengths that refer +

In the width argument you can use the following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets on typesetting text: \depth, \height, \width, \totalheight (this is the box’s height plus its depth). For @@ -16853,7 +18265,7 @@ size you can say this.

\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
 
-

For the fourth command version the optional argument position +

For the fourth command synopsis version the optional argument position gives position of the text within the box. It may take the following values:

@@ -16889,18 +18301,17 @@ puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions. \pts{90}An African or European swallow?
-

- +

+

- - + + -

The right edge of the output ‘10 points ’ (note the ending space) -will be just before the ‘What’ (note the space after -‘points’). You can use \makebox similarly when making -graphics, such as in TikZ or Asymptote, where you put the -edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the length of that -text. +

The right edge of the output ‘10 points ’ (note the ending space +after ‘points’) will be just before the ‘What’. You can use +\makebox similarly when making graphics, such as in TikZ +or Asymptote, where you put the edge of the text at a known +location, regardless of the length of that text.

For boxes with frames see \fbox & \framebox. For colors see Colored boxes. @@ -16909,24 +18320,23 @@ see Colored boxes. picture environment, where the length is given in terms of \unitlength (see \makebox (picture)).

-

If you put a double-backslash into text then LaTeX will not -give you a new line; for instance \makebox{abc def \\ ghi} -outputs ‘abc defghi’ while \makebox{abc def \par ghi} -outputs ‘abc def ghi’, but neither go to a second line. To get -multiple lines see \parbox and minipage. +

As text is typeset in LR mode, neither a double backslash +\\ nor \par will give you a new line; for instance +\makebox{abc def \\ ghi} outputs ‘abc defghi’ while +\makebox{abc def \par ghi} outputs ‘abc def ghi’, both on +a single line. To get multiple lines see \parbox +and minipage.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

- -

20.2 \fbox & \framebox

+

20.2 \fbox & \framebox

- - + +

Synopses, one of:

@@ -16954,7 +18364,7 @@ a frame. \framebox{...}, are roughly the same. As to the third and fourth invocations, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as width and the position of the text inside that box as -position. See \mbox & \makebox for the full description but +position. See \mbox & \makebox, for the full description but here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4in wide.

@@ -16967,23 +18377,23 @@ here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4in wide.

These parameters determine the frame layout.

-
+
\fboxrule - +
-
- - +
+ +

The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box. The default is 0.2pt. Change it with a command such as \setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt} (see \setlength).

-
+
\fboxsep - +
-
- +
+

The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is 3pt. Change it with a command such as \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt} (see \setlength). Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes: @@ -17012,24 +18422,22 @@ paragraph, and then frame the result. \end{minipage}}

-

See Colored boxes for colors other than black and white. +

See Colored boxes, for colors other than black and white.

The picture environment has a version of this command where the units depend on picture’s \unitlength (see \framebox (picture)).


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

- -

20.3 \parbox

+

20.3 \parbox

- - - + + +

Synopses, one of:

@@ -17069,10 +18477,10 @@ in that box. It should not have any paragraph-making components.

There are three optional arguments, position, height, and inner-pos. The position gives the vertical alignment of the -parbox with respect to the surrounding material. The possible +parbox with respect to the surrounding material. The supported values are c or m to make the vertical center of the -parbox lines up with the center of the adjacent line (this is the -default), or t to match the top line of the parbox with +parbox lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (this is the +default), or t to match the top line of the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding material, or b to match the bottom line.

@@ -17088,15 +18496,13 @@ stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must contain vertically stretchable space).


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

- -

20.4 \raisebox

+

20.4 \raisebox

- +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -17108,11 +18514,11 @@ Next:

\protect).

-

This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by -lowering the vertical bar symbol. +

This example makes a command for denoting the restriction of a function +by lowering the vertical bar symbol.

-
\newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
+
\newcommand*\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
 $f\restricted{A}$
 
@@ -17126,7 +18532,7 @@ the second mandatory argument text. This is a rigid length they are specified, they override the natural height and depth of the box LaTeX gets by typesetting text.

-

In the arguments distance, height, and depth you can +

In the arguments distance, height, and depth you can use the following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets on typesetting text: \depth, \height, \width, \totalheight (this is the box’s height plus its @@ -17135,7 +18541,7 @@ depth).

This will align two graphics on their top (see Graphics).

-
\usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc}  % in preamble
+
\usepackage{graphicx,calc}  % in preamble
    ...
 \begin{center}
   \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
@@ -17151,17 +18557,15 @@ second is the height of meta.png.
 


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

- -

20.5 \sbox & \savebox

+

20.5 \sbox & \savebox

- - - + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -17173,13 +18577,13 @@ Next: , Previous: \mbox & \makebox) except that LaTeX does not output it but instead saves it -in a storage bin named box-cmd. The bin name box-cmd begins -with a backslash, \. You must have previously allocated the bin -box-cmd with \newsavebox (see \newsavebox).The -\sbox command is robust while \savebox is fragile -(see \protect). +in a box register referred to by a variable named box-cmd. The +variable name box-cmd begins with a backslash, \. You must +have previously allocated the box register box-cmd with \newsavebox +(see \newsavebox). The \sbox command is robust while +\savebox is fragile (see \protect).

-

This creates and uses a bin. +

This creates and uses a box register.

\newsavebox{\fullname}
@@ -17187,32 +18591,32 @@ with a backslash, \.  You must have previously allocated the bin
   ...
 \usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too!
 Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
-There goes \\usebox{\fullname}!  Ya da da da da da da.
+There goes \usebox{\fullname}!  Ya da da da da da da.
 
-

One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a \newcommand is -efficiency, that LaTeX need not repeatedly retypeset the contents. -See the example below. +

One advantage of using and reusing a box register over a +\newcommand macro variable is efficiency, that LaTeX need not +repeatedly retypeset the contents. See the example below.

The first two command invocations, \sbox{box-cmd}{text} and \savebox{box-cmd}{text}, are roughly equivalent. As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as width, and the position of the text inside that -box as position. See \mbox & \makebox for the full +box as position. See \mbox & \makebox, for the full description.

In the \sbox and \savebox commands the text is typeset in LR mode so it does not have line breaks (see Modes). If you use these then LaTeX doesn’t give you an error but it ignores -what you want: if you enter \sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test} and -\usebox{\newbin} then you get ‘testtest’, while if you -enter \sbox{\newbin}{test \par test} and -\usebox{\newbin} then you get ‘test test’, but no error or +what you want: if you enter \sbox{\newreg}{test \\ test} and +\usebox{\newreg} then you get ‘testtest’, while if you +enter \sbox{\newreg}{test \par test} and +\usebox{\newreg} then you get ‘test test’, but no error or warning. To fix this use a \parbox or minipage as here.

-
\savebox{\abin}{%
+
\savebox{\areg}{%
   \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
     \begin{enumerate}
       \item First item
@@ -17220,17 +18624,17 @@ warning.  To fix this use a \parbox or minipage as her
     \end{enumerate}
   \end{minipage}}
   ...
-\usebox{\abin}
+\usebox{\areg}
 
-

As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin’s contents, this puts +

As an example of the efficiency of reusing a register’s contents, this puts the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the header. LaTeX only typesets it once.

\usepackage{graphicx}  % all this in the preamble
-\newsavebox{\sealbin}
-\savebox{\sealbin}{%
+\newsavebox{\sealreg}
+\savebox{\sealreg}{%
   \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}%
   \begin{picture}(0,0)%
      \put(1.5,-2.5){%
@@ -17240,26 +18644,24 @@ header.  LaTeX only typesets it once.
        \end{tabular}}
   \end{picture}%
 }
-\markright{\usebox{\sealbin}}
+\markright{\usebox{\sealreg}}
 \pagestyle{headings}
 

The picture environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.

-

If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like -‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \nobin’. +

If the register \noreg has not already been defined then you get something like +‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \noreg’.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

- -

20.6 lrbox

+

20.6 lrbox

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -17269,39 +18671,39 @@ Next: , Previous: \end{lrbox}
-

The text inside the environment is saved in the bin -box-cmd. The box-cmd must begin with a -backslash. You must create this bin in advance with \newsavebox -(see \newsavebox). This is the environment form of the \sbox -and \savebox commands, and is equivalent to them. See \sbox & \savebox for the full information. +

This is the environment form of the \sbox and \savebox +commands, and is equivalent to them. for the full description, +See \sbox & \savebox.

-

In this example the environment is convenient for entering the -tabular. +

The text inside the environment is saved in the box register +referred to by variable box-cmd. The variable name +box-cmd must begin with a backslash, \. You must allocate +this box register in advance with \newsavebox +(see \newsavebox). In this example the environment is convenient +for entering the tabular.

-
\newsavebox{\jhbin}
-\begin{lrbox}{\jhbin}
+
\newsavebox{\jhreg}
+\begin{lrbox}{\jhreg}
   \begin{tabular}{c}
     \includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\
     Jim Hef{}feron
   \end{tabular}
 \end{lrbox}    
   ...
-\usebox{\jhbin}
+\usebox{\jhreg}
 

- -
+

Previous: , Up: Boxes   [Contents][Index]

- -

20.7 \usebox

+

20.7 \usebox

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -17309,23 +18711,20 @@ Previous: , Up: \usebox{box-cmd}
-

Produce the box most recently saved in the bin box-cmd by the -commands \sbox or \savebox, or the lrbox -environment. See \sbox & \savebox for more information and examples. -(Note that box-cmd starts with a backslash.) This command is -robust (see \protect). +

Produce the box most recently saved in the box register box-cmd by +the commands \sbox or \savebox, or the lrbox +environment. For more information and examples, See \sbox & \savebox. (Note that the variable name box-cmd starts with a +backslash, \.) This command is robust (see \protect).


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

21 Color

+

21 Color

- +

You can add color to text, rules, etc. You can also have color in a box or on an entire page and write text on top of it. @@ -17340,26 +18739,24 @@ significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding ‘HTML’ and ‘Hsb’ color models.

- - -
- -
+

Next: , Up: Color   [Contents][Index]

- -

21.1 color package options

+

21.1 color package options

- - + +

Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):

@@ -17408,15 +18805,13 @@ memory space.
- -
+ - -

21.2 Color models

+

21.2 Color models

- +

A color model is a way of representing colors. LaTeX’s capabilities depend on the printer driver. However, the pdftex, @@ -17432,7 +18827,7 @@ such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta, and yellow makes black.

-
+
cmyk

A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1, inclusive. The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second is @@ -17440,12 +18835,12 @@ magenta, and the others are yellow and black. A number value of 0 means minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity. This model is often used in color printing. It is a subtractive model.

-
+
gray

A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive. The colors are shades of grey. The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.

-
+
rgb

A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1, inclusive. The first number is the intensity of the red component, the @@ -17453,7 +18848,7 @@ second is green, and the third the blue. A number value of 0 means that none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full intensity. This is an additive model.

-
+
RGB

(pdftex, xetex, luatex drivers) A comma-separated list with three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive. This model is a @@ -17462,7 +18857,7 @@ often described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range. The values entered here are converted to the rgb model by dividing by 255.

-
+
named

Colors are accessed by name, such as ‘PrussianBlue’. The list of names depends on the driver, but all support the names ‘black’, @@ -17475,42 +18870,38 @@ names depends on the driver, but all support the names ‘black


- -
+

Previous: , Up: Color   [Contents][Index]

- -

21.3 Commands for color

+

21.3 Commands for color

- +

These are the commands available with the color package.

- - - -
- -
+ - -

21.3.1 Define colors

+

21.3.1 Define colors

- - - + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -17540,16 +18931,14 @@ or style, rather than in the document body.


- -
+ - -

21.3.2 Colored text

+

21.3.2 Colored text

- - + +

Synopses:

@@ -17620,10 +19009,10 @@ synopses.

Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
-{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team.
+{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37}Gold} for the team.
 
-

The format of color specification depends on the color model +

The format of color specification depends on the color model (see Color models). For instance, while rgb takes three numbers, gray takes only one.

@@ -17642,17 +19031,15 @@ numbers, gray takes only one.
- -
+ - -

21.3.3 Colored boxes

+

21.3.3 Colored boxes

- - - + + +

Synopses:

@@ -17701,18 +19088,16 @@ of the second line.
- -
+ - -

21.3.4 Colored pages

+

21.3.4 Colored pages

- - - - + + + +

Synopses:

@@ -17738,16 +19123,14 @@ rather than the default transparent background.)
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

22 Graphics

+

22 Graphics

- - + +

You can use graphics such as PNG or PDF files in your LaTeX document. You need an additional package, which comes standard with LaTeX. @@ -17787,26 +19170,24 @@ Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document; see their documentation on CTAN.

- - -
- -
+ - -

22.1 graphics package options

+

22.1 graphics package options

- - + +

Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):

@@ -17853,7 +19234,7 @@ rectangle (unless another size is specified in the

draft
-

For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead the file name is +

For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead its file name is printed in a box of the correct size. In order to determine the size, the file must be present.

@@ -17886,22 +19267,15 @@ option has LaTeX to read the size from the latter.
- -
+ - -

22.2 graphics package configuration

+

22.2 graphics package configuration

- - - - - - - - + + +

These commands configure the way LaTeX searches the file system for the graphic. @@ -17913,39 +19287,38 @@ the documentation in grfguide.pdf, or the LaTeX source, or your TeX distribution’s documentation.

- - -
- -
+ - -

22.2.1 \graphicspath

+

22.2.1 \graphicspath

- +

Synopsis:

-
\graphicspath{list of dir names inside curly brackets}
+
\graphicspath{list of directories inside curly braces}
 

Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files. This allows you to later say something like \includegraphics{lion.png} instead of having to give its path.

-

LaTeX always looks for graphic files first in the current directory. -The declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory -pix, and then ../pix. +

LaTeX always looks for graphic files first in the current directory +(and the output directory, if specified; see output directory). +The declaration below tells the system to then look in the +subdirectory pix, and then ../pix.

\usepackage{graphicx}   % or graphics; put in preamble
@@ -17979,7 +19352,7 @@ current directory,
 

for each of the listed directories, LaTeX concatenates it with the -file name and searches for the result, checking for pix/lion.png +filename and searches for the result, checking for pix/lion.png and then ../pix/lion.png. This algorithm means that the \graphicspath command does not recursively search subdirectories: if you issue \graphicspath{{a/}} and the graphic is in @@ -18004,15 +19377,13 @@ instead in book/plots.


- -
+ - -

22.2.2 \DeclareGraphicsExtensions

+

22.2.2 \DeclareGraphicsExtensions

- +

Synopses:

@@ -18034,7 +19405,7 @@ files. \includegraphics{lion} % will find lion.png before lion.pdf
-

Because the file name lion does not have a period, LaTeX uses +

Because the filename lion does not have a period, LaTeX uses the extension list. For each directory in the graphics path (see \graphicspath), LaTeX will try the extensions in the order given. If it does not find such a file after trying all the directories @@ -18051,24 +19422,27 @@ your document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example, the most recent pdftex.def has this extension list.

-
.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+
.pdf,.png,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PDF,.PNG,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
 
+ + + +

To change the order, use the grfext package. +

You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it more than once. Show its value with \makeatletter\typeout{\Gin@extensions}\makeatother.


- -
+ - -

22.2.3 \DeclareGraphicsRule

+

22.2.3 \DeclareGraphicsRule

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -18103,7 +19477,7 @@ extension not covered by another rule, so it covers filename.1,
extension

The file extension to which this rule applies. The extension is anything after and including the first dot in the filename. Use the Kleene star, -*, to denote the default behaviour for all undeclared extensions. +*, to denote the default behavior for all undeclared extensions.

type
@@ -18136,7 +19510,7 @@ other format is available.)
command

A command that will be applied to the -file. This is very often left blank. This command must start with a +file. This is very often left empty. This command must start with a single backward quote. Thus, \DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c #1} specifies that any file with the extension .eps.gz should @@ -18153,51 +19527,47 @@ See the documentation for your TeX distribution.


- -
+ - -

22.3 Commands for graphics

+

22.3 Commands for graphics

- - + +

These are the commands available with the graphics and graphicx packages.

- - - -
- -
+ - -

22.3.1 \includegraphics

+

22.3.1 \includegraphics

- - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + +

Synopses for graphics package:

@@ -18244,10 +19614,10 @@ is \includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}.

The \includegraphics{filename} command decides on the type of graphic by splitting filename on the first dot. You can -use filename with no dot, as in \includegraphics{turing} -and then LaTeX tries a sequence of extensions such as .png and -.pdf until it finds a file with that extension -(see \DeclareGraphicsExtensions). +instead use filename with no dot, as in +\includegraphics{turing}, and then LaTeX tries a sequence of +extensions such as .png and .pdf until it finds a file +with that extension (see \DeclareGraphicsExtensions).

If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can hide them with curly braces, as in @@ -18256,7 +19626,7 @@ the graphicx package then you can use the options type ext; see below. This and other filename issues are also handled with the package grffile.

-

This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so LaTeX can +

This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so LaTeX can move it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward (see figure).

@@ -18329,28 +19699,30 @@ two will end with different widths and heights.

There are many options. The primary ones are listed first.

+ +

Note that a graphic is placed by LaTeX into a box, which is -traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the +traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic’s printed area may go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when LaTeX makes up a page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the graphic.

-
+
width

The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width. An example is \includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}. You can use the standard TeX dimensions (see Units of length) and also convenient is \linewidth, or in a two-column document, \columnwidth (see Page layout parameters). An example is that by using the -calc package you can make the graphic be 1 cm narrow than +calc package you can make the graphic be 1 cm narrower than the width of the text with \includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}.

height
-

The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height. You can +

The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height. You can use the standard TeX dimensions (see Units of length), and also convenient are \pageheight and \textheight (see Page layout parameters). For instance, the command \includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel} will make the @@ -18358,14 +19730,14 @@ graphic a quarter of the height of the text area.

totalheight
-

The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus +

The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus depth. This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated. For instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero height but a large depth.

keepaspectratio
-

If set to true, or just specified as here +

If set to true, or just specified as here

\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}
@@ -18381,7 +19753,7 @@ is the graphic wider than width nor taller than height
 
scale

Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its nominal size, enter \includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}. This -number may be any value; a number between 1 and 0 will shrink the +number may be any value; a number between 0 and 1 will shrink the graphic and a negative number will reflect it.

@@ -18412,16 +19784,16 @@ vertical center in lc or rc.) The default is lB

These are lesser-used options.

-
+
viewport

Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments, separated by spaces and given in TeX dimensions, as with -\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}. The -dimensions default to big points, bp. They are taken -relative to the origin specified by the bounding box. See also the -trim option. +\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}. When +the unit is omitted, the dimensions default to big +points, bp. They are taken relative to the origin specified +by the bounding box. See also the trim option.

-
+
trim

Gives parts of the graphic to not show. Takes four arguments, separated by spaces, that are given in TeX dimensions, as with @@ -18431,7 +19803,7 @@ will crop the picture by 0 inches on the left, 0.1 inches on the bottom, 0.2 inches on the right, and 0.3 inches on the top. See also the viewport option.

-
+
clip

If set to true, or just specified as here

@@ -18443,12 +19815,12 @@ top. See also the viewport option. using the starred form of the command, \includegraphics*[...]{...}.

-
+
page

Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file. The default is page=1.

-
+
pagebox

Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among mediabox, cropbox, bleedbox, trimbox, or @@ -18463,7 +19835,7 @@ content. The driver will set the image size based on CropBox if present, otherwise it will not use one of the others, with a driver-defined order of preference. MediaBox is always present.

-
+
interpolate

Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer. Can be set with interpolate=true or just specified as here. @@ -18472,13 +19844,13 @@ set with interpolate=true or just specified as here.

\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}
 
- +
quiet

Do not write information to the log. You can set it with quiet=true or just specified it with -\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}, +\includegraphics[...,quiet,...]{...},

-
+
draft

If you set it with draft=true or just specify it with

@@ -18504,7 +19876,7 @@ For example, if an .eps file has the line %%BoundingBox 10 60/72 inch tall.

-
+
bb

Specify the bounding box of the displayed region. The argument is four dimensions separated by spaces, as with \includegraphics[.., bb= @@ -18513,12 +19885,12 @@ BoundingBox numbers from the EPS file automatically, so this option is only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file or if you want to change it.

-
+
bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury

Set the bounding box. These four are obsolete, but are retained for compatibility with old packages.

-
+
natwidth, natheight

An alternative for bb. Setting

@@ -18528,7 +19900,7 @@ compatibility with old packages.

is the same as setting bb=0 0 1in 0.618in.

-
+
hiresbb

If set to true, or just specified as with

@@ -18552,24 +19924,24 @@ will read the file lion.xxx as though it were lion.png. For more on these, see \DeclareGraphicsRule.

-
+
type

Specify the graphics type.

-
+
ext

Specify the graphics extension. Only use this in conjunction with the option type.

-
+
read

Specify the file extension of the read file. Only use this in conjunction with the option type.

-
+
command

Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in -conjunction with the option type. See Command line options +conjunction with the option type. See Command line options, for a discussion of enabling the \write18 functionality to run external commands.

@@ -18578,18 +19950,16 @@ external commands.
- -
+ - -

22.3.2 \rotatebox

+

22.3.2 \rotatebox

- - - - + + + +

Synopsis if you use the graphics package:

@@ -18607,7 +19977,7 @@ Next: , Previo

Put material in a box and rotate it angle degrees counterclockwise.

-

This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees. +

This example rotates the table column heads forty-five degrees.

\begin{tabular}{ll}
@@ -18676,22 +20046,20 @@ setting units=6.283185 changes to radians counterclockwise.
 
 
 
- -
+ - -

22.3.3 \scalebox

+

22.3.3 \scalebox

- - - - - - - - + + + + + + + +

Synopses:

@@ -18730,21 +20098,19 @@ immediately followed by its mirror reflection.


- -
+ - -

22.3.4 \resizebox

+

22.3.4 \resizebox

- - - - - - - + + + + + + +

Synopses:

@@ -18778,85 +20144,84 @@ text two inches wide but keep the original height with


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

23 Special insertions

+

23 Special insertions

- - + +

LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.

- - - - - - - - +
- -
+ - -

23.1 Reserved characters

+

23.1 Reserved characters

- - - - + + + +

LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For example, the percent sign % is for comments. They are -called reserved characters or special characters. +called reserved characters or special characters. They are +all discussed elsewhere in this manual.

# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \ 
 
- - - - - - - + + + + + + +

If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply put a backslash \ in front of the character. Thus, typing \$1.23 will produce $1.23 in your output.

- - - + + +

As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font use \~{} (omitting the curly braces would result in the next -character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text -body font circumflex use \^{}. To get a backslash in the font -of the text body, enter \textbackslash{}. +character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a text body +font circumflex use \^{}. To get a backslash in the font of +the text body, enter \textbackslash{}.

To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use \verb!! as below (the double backslash \\ is only -there to split the lines). +there to split the lines in the output).

\begin{center}
@@ -18867,17 +20232,16 @@ there to split the lines).
 
 
 
- -
+ - -

23.2 Upper and lower case

+

23.2 Upper and lower case

- - - + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -18888,13 +20252,13 @@ Next:

\protect). +

Change the case of characters. The TeX primitive commands +\uppercase and \lowercase are set up by default to work +only with the 26 letters a–z and A–Z. The LaTeX commands +\MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase commands also change +characters accessed by commands such as \ae or \aa. The +commands \MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase are robust +but they have moving arguments (see \protect).

These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of a command within text. But they do change the case of every other @@ -18920,308 +20284,321 @@ you need to do expansion. Here the \Schoolname produces \expandafter{\schoolname}}

- - + +

The textcase package brings some of the missing feature of the standard LaTeX commands \MakeUppercase and \MakeLowerCase.

- - - + + +

To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package mfirstuc.

+ + + + +

Handling all the casing rules specified by Unicode, e.g., for +non-Latin scripts, is a much bigger job than anything envisioned in +the original TeX and LaTeX. It has been implemented in the +expl3 package as of 2020. The article “Case changing: From +TeX primitives to the Unicode algorithm”, (Joseph Wright, +TUGboat 41:1, +https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb41-1/tb127wright-case.pdf), gives a +good overview of the topic, past and present. +


- -
+ - -

23.3 Symbols by font position

+

23.3 Symbols by font position

- - - + + +

You can access any character of the current font using its number with the \symbol command. For example, the visible space character -used in the \verb* command has the code decimal 32, so it can be -typed as \symbol{32}. +used in the \verb* command has the code decimal 32 in the +standard Computer Modern typewriter font, so it can be typed as +\symbol{32}.

You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a ' -prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a " prefix, so the previous -example could also be written as \symbol{'40} or -\symbol{"20}. +prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a " prefix, so the +visible space at 32 decimal could also be written as +\symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}.


- -
+ - -

23.4 Text symbols

+

23.4 Text symbols

- - + + - -

LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in -running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not -available in OT1. Unless you are using XeLaTeX or LuaLaTeX then -you may need to load the textcomp package. + + +

LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols +in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are +not available in OT1. As of the LaTeX February 2020 release, all +symbols are available by default; before that, it was necessary to use +the textcomp package for some (technically, those in the +TS1 font encoding).

\copyright - +
\textcopyright - +
-
+

© The copyright symbol.

\dag - +
-
+

† The dagger symbol (in text).

\ddag - +
-
+

‡ The double dagger symbol (in text).

\LaTeX - +
-
- +
+

The LaTeX logo.

\LaTeXe - +
-
- +
+

The LaTeX2e logo.

\guillemotleft («) - +
\guillemotright (») - +
\guilsinglleft (‹) - +
\guilsinglright (›) - -
-
- - - - - - - + + +
+ + + + + + +

«, », ‹, › Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French.

\ldots - +
\dots - +
\textellipsis - +
-
+

… An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): \ldots and \dots also work in math mode.

\lq - +
-
- +
+

‘ Left (opening) quote.

\P - +
\textparagraph - +
-
- +
+

¶ Paragraph sign (pilcrow).

\pounds - +
\textsterling - +
-
- +
+

£ English pounds sterling.

\quotedblbase („) - +
\quotesinglbase (‚) - +
-
- - +
+ +

„ and ‚ Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.

\rq - +
-
- +
+

’ Right (closing) quote.

\S - +
\textsection - +
-
+

§ Section sign.

\TeX - +
-
- +
+

The TeX logo.

\textasciicircum - +
-
- +
+

^ ASCII circumflex.

\textasciitilde - +
-
- +
+

~ ASCII tilde.

\textasteriskcentered - +
-
- +
+

* Centered asterisk.

\textbackslash - +
-
+

\ Backslash.

\textbar - +
-
- +
+

| Vertical bar.

\textbardbl - +
-
- - +
+ +

⏸ Double vertical bar.

\textbigcircle - +
-
- -

◯ Big circle symbol. +

+ +

◯, Big circle symbol.

\textbraceleft - +
-
- +
+

{ Left brace.

\textbraceright - +
-
- +
+

} Right brace.

\textbullet - +
-
+

• Bullet.

\textcircled{letter} - +
-
-

Ⓐ Circle around letter. +

+

Ⓐ, Circle around letter.

\textcompwordmark - +
\textcapitalcompwordmark - +
\textascendercompwordmark - +
-
- - +
+ +

Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For example, f\textcompwordmark i produces ‘fi’ without a ligature. This is most useful in non-English languages. The @@ -19230,259 +20607,296 @@ while the \textascendercompwordmark form has the ascender height.

\textdagger - +
-
+

† Dagger.

\textdaggerdbl - +
-
- +
+

‡ Double dagger.

\textdollar (or \$) - +
-
- +
+

$ Dollar sign.

\textemdash (or ---) - +
-
-

— Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in -The playoffs --- if you are fortunate enough to make the playoffs --- -is more like a sprint.). +

+

— Em-dash. Used for punctuation, usually similar to commas or +parentheses, as in ‘The playoffs---if you're lucky +enough to make the playoffs---are more like a sprint.’ Conventions +for spacing around em-dashes vary widely.

\textendash (or --) - +
-
-

– En-dash (used for ranges, as in See pages 12--14). +

+

– En-dash. Used for ranges, as in ‘see pages 12--14’.

\texteuro - +
-
- - - +
+ + + -

The Euro symbol: €. For an alternative glyph design, try the +

The Euro currency symbol: €. + + +

+

For an alternative glyph design, try the eurosym package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).

\textexclamdown (or !`) - +
-
+

¡ Upside down exclamation point.

+
\textfiguredash + +
+
+

Dash used between numerals, Unicode U+2012. Defined in the June 2021 +release of LaTeX. When used in pdfTeX, approximated by an +en-dash; with a Unicode engine, either typesets the glyph if available +in the current font, or writes the usual “Missing character” warning +to the log file. +

+
\textgreater - +
-
+

> Greater than symbol.

+
\texthorizontalbar + +
+
+

Horizontal bar character, Unicode U+2015. Defined in the June 2021 +release of LaTeX. Behavior as with \textfiguredash above; +the pdfTeX approximation is an em-dash. +

+
\textless - +
-
+

< Less than symbol.

\textleftarrow - +
-
- -

← Left arrow. +

+ +

←, Left arrow. +

+
+
\textnonbreakinghyphen + +
+
+ +

Non-breaking hyphen character, Unicode U+2011. Defined in the June +2021 release of LaTeX. Behavior as with \textfiguredash +above; the pdfTeX approximation is a regular ASCII hyphen (with +breaks disallowed after).

\textordfeminine - +
\textordmasculine - +
-
- - - +
+ + +

ª, º Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.

\textperiodcentered - +
-
- +
+

· Centered period.

\textquestiondown (or ?`) - +
-
+

¿ Upside down question mark.

\textquotedblleft (or ``) - +
-
- +
+

“ Double left quote.

\textquotedblright (or '') - +
-
- +
+

” Double right quote.

\textquoteleft (or `) - +
-
- +
+

‘ Single left quote.

\textquoteright (or ') - +
-
- +
+

’ Single right quote.

\textquotesingle - +
-
- - -

' Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.) +

+ + +

', Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)

\textquotestraightbase - +
\textquotestraightdblbase - +
-
- - - +
+ + +

Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.

\textregistered - +
-
+

® Registered symbol.

\textrightarrow - +
-
- -

→ Right arrow. +

+ +

→, Right arrow.

\textthreequartersemdash - +
-
- -

﹘ “Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. +

+ +

﹘, “Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.

\texttrademark - +
-
+

™ Trademark symbol.

\texttwelveudash - +
-
- -

﹘ “Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. +

+ +

﹘, “Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.

\textunderscore - +
-
+

_ Underscore.

\textvisiblespace - +
-
-

␣ Visible space symbol. +

+

␣, Visible space symbol.


- -
+ - -

23.5 Accents

+

23.5 Accents

- - - + + + - - + + - - + + - -

LaTeX has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and languages, -through the babel package and related support if you are using -pdfLaTeX, or polyglossia if you are using XeLaTeX or -LuaLaTeX. This section does not cover that support. It only lists -the core LaTeX commands for creating accented characters. The -\capital... commands shown here produce alternative forms for use -with capital letters. These are not available with OT1. + +

LaTeX has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and +languages, provided through the core babel package, which +supports pdfLaTeX, XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX. The +polyglossia package provides similar support with the latter +two engines. +

+

This section does not cover that support. It only lists the core +LaTeX commands for creating accented characters. The +\capital... commands shown here produce alternative forms for +use with capital letters. These are not available with OT1.

Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated with lowercase ‘o’.

- - + +

Note that \i produces a dotless i, - - + + and \j produces a dotless j. These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are accented. @@ -19490,70 +20904,70 @@ accented.

\"
\capitaldieresis
-
- - - +
+ + +

ö Umlaut (dieresis).

\'
\capitalacute
-
- - +
+ +

ó Acute accent.

\.
-
- - +
+ +

ȯ Dot accent.

\=
\capitalmacron
-
- - - - +
+ + + +

ō Macron (overbar) accent.

\^
\capitalcircumflex
-
- - - +
+ + +

ô Circumflex (hat) accent.

\`
\capitalgrave
-
- - +
+ +

ò Grave accent.

\~
\capitaltilde
-
- - +
+ +

ñ Tilde accent.

\b
-
- +
+

o_ Bar accent underneath.

- - + +

Related to this, \underbar{text} produces a bar under text. The argument is always processed in LR mode (see Modes). The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline, @@ -19563,41 +20977,41 @@ thus crossing through descenders. See also \underline in

\c
\capitalcedilla
-
- - +
+ +

ç Cedilla accent underneath.

\d
\capitaldotaccent
-
- - +
+ +

ọ Dot accent underneath.

\H
\capitalhungarumlaut
-
- - +
+ +

ő Long Hungarian umlaut accent.

\k
\capitalogonek
-
- - +
+ +

ǫ Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding.

\r
\capitalring
-
- - +
+ +

o* Ring accent.

@@ -19605,51 +21019,108 @@ thus crossing through descenders. See also \underline in
\capitaltie
\newtie
\capitalnewtie
-
- - - - +
+ + + +

oo[ Tie-after accent. The \newtie form is centered in its box.

\u
\capitalbreve
-
- - +
+ +

ŏ Breve accent.

\v
\capitalcaron
-
- - - - +
+ + + +

ǒ Háček (check, caron) accent.

+ + + + + +
+
+

+Up: Accents   [Contents][Index]

+
+

23.5.1 \accent

+ + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\accent number character
+
+ +

A TeX primitive command used to generate accented characters from +accent marks and letters. The accent mark is selected by number, +a numeric argument, followed by a space and then a character argument +constructs the accented character in the current font. +

+

These are accented ‘e’ characters. +

+
+
\accent18 e
+\accent20 e
+\accent21 e
+\accent22 e
+\accent23 e
+
+ +

The first is a grave, the second is breve, etc. +

+

The position of the accent is determined by the font designer and so the +outcome of \accent use may differ between fonts. In LaTeX it is +desirable to have glyphs for accented characters rather than building +them using \accent. Using glyphs that already contain the +accented characters (as in T1 encoding) allows correct hyphenation +whereas \accent disables hyphenation (specifically with OT1 font +encoding where accented glyphs are absent). +

+

There can be an optional font change between number and +character. Note also that this command sets the +\spacefactor to 1000 (see \spacefactor). +

+

An unavoidable characteristic of some Cyrillic letters and +the majority of accented Cyrillic letters is that they must be +assembled from multiple elements (accents, modifiers, etc.) while +\accent provides for a single accent mark and a single letter +combination. There are also cases where accents must appear between +letters that \accent does not support. Still other cases exist where +the letters I and J have dots above their lowercase counterparts that +conflict with dotted accent marks. The use of \accent in these +cases will not work as it cannot analyze upper/lower case. +


- -
+

-Next: , Previous: , Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

- -

23.6 Additional Latin letters

+

23.6 Additional Latin letters

- - - - - - + + + + + +

Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters beyond A–Z that extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other @@ -19658,26 +21129,26 @@ than English.

\aa
\AA
-
- - +
+ +

å and Å.

\ae
\AE
-
- - +
+ +

æ and Æ.

\dh
\DH
-
- - - +
+ + +

Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the fontenc package to select an alternate font encoding, such as T1. @@ -19685,8 +21156,8 @@ font encoding, such as T1.

\dj
\DJ
-
- +
+

Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke. Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the fontenc package to select an alternate font encoding, such as T1. @@ -19694,58 +21165,58 @@ select an alternate font encoding, such as T1.

\ij
\IJ
-
- - +
+ +

ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).

\l
\L
-
- - +
+ +

ł and Ł.

\ng
\NG
-
- +
+

Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.

\o
\O
-
- - +
+ +

ø and Ø.

\oe
\OE
-
- - +
+ +

œ and Œ.

\ss
\SS
-
- - - +
+ + +

ß and SS.

\th
\TH
-
- - - +
+ + +

Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the fontenc package to select an alternate font encoding, such as T1. @@ -19755,15 +21226,83 @@ font encoding, such as T1.


- -
+ +

23.7 inputenc package

+ + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\usepackage[encoding-name]{inputenc}
+
+ +

Declare the input file’s text encoding to be encoding-name. The +default, if this package is not loaded, is UTF-8. Technically, +specifying the encoding name is optional, but in practice it is not +useful to omit it. +

+ + + +

In a computer file, the characters are stored according to a scheme +called the encoding. There are many different encodings. The +simplest is ASCII, which supports 95 printable characters, not enough +for most of the world’s languages. For instance, to typeset the +a-umlaut character ä in an ASCII-encoded LaTeX source file, the +sequence \"a is used. This would make source files for anything +but English hard to read; even for English, often a more extensive +encoding is more convenient. +

+

The modern encoding standard, in some ways a union of the others, is +UTF-8, one of the representations of Unicode. This is the default for +LaTeX since 2018. +

+

The inputenc package is how LaTeX knows what encoding is +used. For instance, the following command explicitly says that the +input file is UTF-8 (note the lack of a dash). +

+
+
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+
+ +

Caution: use inputenc only with the pdfTeX engine +(see TeX engines). (The XeTeX and LuaTeX engines assume +that the input file is UTF-8 encoded.) If you invoke LaTeX with +either the xelatex command or the lualatex +command, and try to declare a non-UTF-8 encoding with inputenc, +such as latin1, then you will get the error inputenc is +not designed for xetex or luatex. +

+

An inputenc package error such as Invalid UTF-8 byte "96 +means that some of the material in the input file does not follow the +encoding scheme. Often these errors come from copying material from a +document that uses a different encoding than the input file; this one +is a left single quote from a web page using latin1 inside a +LaTeX input file that uses UTF-8. The simplest solution is to +replace the non-UTF-8 character with its UTF-8 equivalent, or use a +LaTeX equivalent command or character. +

+

In some documents, such as a collection of journal articles from a +variety of authors, changing the encoding in mid-document may be +necessary. Use the command +\inputencoding{encoding-name}. The most common values +for encoding-name are: ascii, latin1, +latin2, latin3, latin4, latin5, +latin9, latin10, and utf8. +

+ +
+ - -

23.7 \rule

+

23.8 \rule

- +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -19774,17 +21313,17 @@ Next: , Previous: Produce a rule, a filled-in rectangle.

-
- -

This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol, -often used to mark the end of a proof. + + +

This example produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol, +or just “qed”, often used to mark the end of a proof:

\newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
 
- - + +

The amsthm package includes this command, with a somewhat different-looking symbol. @@ -19806,21 +21345,19 @@ thickness is common in LaTeX.

A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in the output, but can cause LaTeX to change the output around it. -See \strut for examples. +See \strut, for examples.


- -
+

Previous: , Up: Special insertions   [Contents][Index]

- -

23.8 \today

+

23.9 \today

- - - + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -19832,11 +21369,11 @@ Previous: , Up: yyyy’. An example of a date in that format is ‘July 4, 1976’.

-
- + + - - + +

Multilingual packages such as babel or polyglossia, or classes such as lettre, will localize \today. For example, @@ -19854,8 +21391,8 @@ the following will output ‘4 juillet 1976’:

\today uses the counters \day, \month, and \year (see \day & \month & \year).

- - + +

A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is datetime package which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO standards. @@ -19865,24 +21402,22 @@ date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

24 Splitting the input

+

24 Splitting the input

- - + +

LaTeX lets you split a large document into several smaller ones. This can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the document. It can also speed processing.

Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one - - + + root file, on which LaTeX compilation starts. This shows such a file with five included files.

@@ -19911,7 +21446,7 @@ a file with five included files.

This will bring in material from pref.tex, chap1.tex, chap2.tex, append.tex, and bib.tex. If you compile this file, and then comment out all of the lines inside -\includeonly{...} except for chap1, and compile again, +\includeonly{...} except for chap1, and compile again, then LaTeX will only process the material in the first chapter. Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to print. However, the advantage of the \includeonly command is that @@ -19919,29 +21454,27 @@ LaTeX will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in your output correctly.

-

See Larger book template for another example of \includeonly. +

See Larger book template, for another example of \includeonly.

- - -
- -
+ - -

24.1 \endinput

+

24.1 \endinput

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -19965,12 +21498,13 @@ This will not appear.

This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end of a -file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during mailing. -It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to -put \endinput halfway through the included file and see if the -error disappears. Now, knowing which half contains the error, moving -\endinput to halfway through that area further narrows down the -location. This process rapidly finds the offending line. +file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added if the file is +transmitted in the body of an email. It is also useful for debugging: +one strategy to localize errors is to put \endinput halfway +through the included file and see if the error disappears. Now, knowing +which half contains the error, moving \endinput to halfway +through that area further narrows down the location. This process +rapidly finds the offending line.

After reading \endinput, LaTeX continues to read to the end of the line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless. @@ -19979,16 +21513,14 @@ This allows you, for instance, to close an \if... with a


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Splitting the input   [Contents][Index]

- -

24.2 \include & \includeonly

+

24.2 \include & \includeonly

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -20009,10 +21541,12 @@ LaTeX document. \clearpage (see \clearpage & \cleardoublepage), then it inputs the material from filename.tex into the document, and then it does another \clearpage. This command can only -appear in the document body. The \includeonly command controls -which files will be read by LaTeX under subsequent \include -commands. Its list of filenames is comma-separated, and it can only -appear in the preamble. +appear in the document body. +

+

The \includeonly command controls which files will be read by +LaTeX under subsequent \include commands. Its list of +filenames is comma-separated. It must appear in the preamble or even +earlier, e.g., the command line; it can’t appear in the document body.

This example root document, constitution.tex, brings in three files, preamble.tex, articles.tex, and @@ -20045,7 +21579,7 @@ in Order to form a more perfect Union, ...

Running LaTeX on constitution.tex makes the material from the three files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary files preamble.aux, articles.aux, and -amendments.tex. These contain information such as page numbers +amendments.aux. These contain information such as page numbers and cross-references (see Cross references). If you now comment out \includeonly’s lines with preamble and amendments and run LaTeX again then the resulting document shows only the @@ -20062,7 +21596,7 @@ commands. \input (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary information).

-

See Larger book template for another example using \include +

See Larger book template, for another example using \include and \includeonly. That example also uses \input for some material that will not necessarily start on a new page.

@@ -20105,7 +21639,7 @@ this works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux: \end{document}
- +

You cannot use \include inside a file that is being included or you get ‘LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.’ The \include command cannot appear in the document preamble; you will @@ -20119,20 +21653,18 @@ athiesm.tex.’ (It will also create athiesm.aux.)

If you \include the root file in itself then you first get ‘LaTeX Error: Can be used only in preamble.’ Later runs get ‘TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]’. To fix -this, you must remove the inclusion \include{root} but also -delete the file root.aux and rerun LaTeX. +this, you must remove the inclusion \include{root} but +also delete the file root.aux and rerun LaTeX.


- -
+ - -

24.3 \input

+

24.3 \input

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -20178,41 +21710,37 @@ this works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux:
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

25 Front/back matter

+

25 Front/back matter

- - -
- -
+ - -

25.1 Table of contents etc.

+

25.1 Table of contents etc.

- + - - - - - - + + + + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -20248,7 +21776,7 @@ LaTeX will produce a table of contents on the book’s first page.

Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter and section listings but not subsection listings, because the -\section command has level 1. See Sectioning for level +\section command has level 1. See Sectioning, for level numbers of the sectioning units. For more on the tocdepth see Sectioning/tocdepth.

@@ -20258,7 +21786,7 @@ see Sectioning/tocdepth. \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command, as above.

-

To make the table of contents LaTeX stores the information in an +

To make the table of contents, LaTeX stores the information in an auxiliary file named root-file.toc (see Splitting the input). For example, this LaTeX file test.tex

-

The section or subsection is the sectioning unit. The -hook \numberline lets you to change how the information appears -in the table of contents. Of its two arguments, 1 or 1.1 -is the sectioning unit number and First section or First -subsection is the title. Finally, 2 is the page number on which -the sectioning units start. -

-

One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to get the -contents page correct you must run LaTeX twice, once to store the -information and once to get it. In particular, the first time that you -run LaTeX on a new document, the table of contents page will be empty -except for its ‘Contents’ header. Just run it again. + +

Each line contains a single command, \contentsline +(see \contentsline). The first argument, the section or +subsection, is the sectioning unit. The second argument has two +components. The hook \numberline determines how the sectioning +number, 1 or 1.1, appears in the table of contents +(see \numberline). The remainder of the second argument of +\contentsline, ‘First section’ or ‘First subsection’, +is the sectioning title text. Finally, the third argument, ‘2’, is +the page number on which this sectioning unit starts. +

+

To typeset these lines, the document class provides +\l@section-unit commands such as +\l@section{text}{pagenumber} and +\l@subsection{text}{pagenumber}. These commands +often use the \@dottedtocline command +(see \@dottedtocline). +

+

A consequence of LaTeX’s strategy of using auxiliary files is that to +get the correct information in the document you must run LaTeX twice, +once to store the information and the second time to retrieve it. In +the ordinary course of writing a document authors run LaTeX a number +of times, but you may notice that the first time that you compile a new +document, the table of contents page will be empty except for its +‘Contents’ header. Just run LaTeX again.

The commands \listoffigures and \listoftables produce a -list of figures and a list of tables. They work the same way as the -contents commands; for instance, these work with information stored in -.lof and .lot files. -

- - - - - +list of figures and a list of tables. Their information is stored in +files with extension .lof and .lot. They work the same way +as \tableofcontents but the latter is more common, so we use it +for most examples. +

+

You can manually add material to the table of contents, the list of +figures, and the list of tables. For instance, add a line about a +section to the table of contents with +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{text}. +(see \addcontentsline). Add arbitrary material, that is, non-line +material, with \addtocontents, as with the command +\addtocontents{lof}{\protect\vspace{2ex}}, which adds +vertical space to the list of figures (see \addtocontents). +

+

Lines in the table of contents, the list of figures, and the list of +tables, have four parts. First is an indent. Next is a box into which +sectioning numbers are placed, and then the third box holds the title +text, such as ‘First section’. Finally there is a box up against +the right margin, inside of which LaTeX puts the page number box. +For the indent and the width of the number box, +see \@dottedtocline. The right margin box has width +\@tocrmarg and the page number is flush right in that space, +inside a box of width \@pnumwidth. By default +\@tocrmarg is 2.55em and \@pnumwidth is +1.55em. Change these as with +\renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{3.5em}. +

+ + + + + -

To change the header for the table of contents page do something like -the first line here. +

CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures +and tables (see CTAN). The package tocloft is convenient for +adjusting some aspects of the default such as spacing. And, +tocbibbind will automatically add the bibliography, index, +etc. to the table of contents. +

+

To change the header for the table of contents page, do something like +these commands before you call \tableofcontents, etc.

-
\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
+
\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of Contents}
 \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
-\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables}
+\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Specifications}
 
-

Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two. -Internationalization packages such as babel or polyglossia -will change the headers depending on the chosen base language. +

+

- - + + - - - -

CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures -and tables. One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the -default, such as spacing, is tocloft. And, tocbibbind -will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of -contents. +

Internationalization packages such as babel or polyglossia +will change these headers depending on the chosen base language.

- + + + - -
- -
+ +

25.1.1 \@dottedtocline

+ + + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\@dottedtocline{section-level-num}{indent}{numwidth}{text}{pagenumber}
+
+ +

Used internally by LaTeX to format an entry line in the table of +contents, list of figures, or list of tables. Authors do not directly +enter \@dottedtocline commands. +

+

This command is typically used by \l@section, \l@subsection, +etc., to format the content lines. For example, the article.cls +file contains these definitions: +

+
+
\newcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+\newcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}
+\newcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}
+
+ +

In this example, \@dottedcline appears to have been given only +three arguments. But tracing the internal code shows that it picks up +the final text and pagenumber arguments in the synopsis +from a call to \contentsline. +

+ +

Between the box for the title text of a section and the right margin +box, these \@dottedtocline commands insert leaders, that +is, evenly-spaced dots. The dot-to-dot space is given by the command +\@dotsep. By default it is 4.5 (it is in math units, which +are 1/18 em. Change it using \renewcommand, as +in \renewcommand{\@dotsep}{3.5}. +

+

In the default book class, LaTeX does not use dotted leaders for +the Part and Chapter table entries, and in the default article class +it does not use dotted leaders for Section entries. +

+ +
+ - -

25.1.1 \addcontentsline

+

25.1.2 \addcontentsline

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -20354,10 +21969,8 @@ Next:
-

Add an entry to the file specified by ext. Usually ext is -one of toc for the table of contents, lof for the list of -figures, or lot for the list of tables. + +

Add an entry to the auxiliary file with extension ext.

The following will result in an ‘Appendices’ line in the table of contents. @@ -20374,16 +21987,16 @@ where it appears in the input file. root-name.ext. It writes that information as the text of the command \contentsline{unit}{text}{num}, where -num is the current value of counter unit. The -most common case is the table of contents and there num is the -page number of the first page of unit. +num is the current value of counter unit +(see \contentsline). The most common case is the table of contents +and there num is the page number of the first page of unit.

This command is invoked by the sectioning commands \chapter, etc., and also by \caption inside a float environment. But it is -also used by authors. For example, in a book to have the preface -unnumbered, you may use the starred \chapter*. But that does not -put in table of contents information, so you can enter it manually, as -here. +also used by authors. For example, an author writing a book whose style +is to have an unnumbered preface may use the starred \chapter*. +But that command leaves out table of contents information, which can be +entered manually, as here.

\chapter*{Preface}
@@ -20391,10 +22004,9 @@ here.
 

In the .toc file LaTeX will put the line \contentsline -{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}; note the page number -‘3’. +{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}; note that the page number +‘3’ is automatically generated by the system, not entered manually.

-

All of the arguments for \addcontentsline are required.

@@ -20447,15 +22059,13 @@ will not make sense.


- -
+ - -

25.1.2 \addtocontents

+

25.1.3 \addtocontents

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -20465,7 +22075,7 @@ Next: , Previous

Add text, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to the auxiliary file with extension ext. This is most commonly used -for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also +for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but it also applies to the list of figures and list of tables.

This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the @@ -20476,6 +22086,28 @@ applies to the list of figures and list of tables. \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}}

+

This puts the word ‘Page’, in boldface, above the column of page +numbers and after the header. +

+
+
\tableofcontents
+\addtocontents{toc}{~\hfill\textbf{Page}\par}
+\chapter{...}
+
+ +

This adds a line announcing work by a new author. +

+
+
\addtocontents{toc}{%
+  \protect\vspace{2ex}
+  \textbf{Chapters by N. Other Author}\par}
+
+ +

The difference between \addtocontents and \addcontentsline +is that the latter is strictly for lines, such as with a line giving the +page number for the start of a new subset of the chapters. As the above +examples show, \addtocontents is for material such as spacing. +

The \addtocontents command has two arguments. Both are required.

@@ -20506,15 +22138,77 @@ move \addtocontents into the file being included.


- -
+
+

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Table of contents etc.   [Contents][Index]

+
+

25.1.4 \contentsline

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\contentsline{unit}{text}{pagenumber}
+
+ +

Used internally by LaTeX to typeset an entry of the table of +contents, list of figures, or list of tables (see Table of contents etc.). Authors do not directly enter \contentsline commands. +

+

Usually adding material to these lists is done automatically by the +commands \chapter, \section, etc. for the table of +contents, or by the \caption command inside of a \figure +or \table environment (see figure and see table). Thus, +where the base file is thesis.tex, and contains the declaration +\tableofcontents, the command \chapter{Chapter One} +produces something like this in the file thesis.toc. +

+
+
\contentsline {chapter}{\numberline {1}Chapter One}{3}
+
+ +

If the file contains the declaration \listoffigures then a figure +environment involving \caption{Test} will produce +something like this in thesis.lof. +

+
+
\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {1.1}{\ignorespaces Test}}{6}
+
+ +

To manually add material, use +\addcontentsline{filetype}{unit}{text}, +where filetype is toc, lof, or lot +(see \addcontentsline). +

+

For manipulating how the \contentline material is typeset, see +the tocloft package. +

+

Note that the hyperref package changes the definition of +\contentsline (and \addcontentsline) to add more +arguments, to make hyperlinks. This is the source of the error +Argument of \contentsline has an extra }. Fix this error by +deleting the .toc or .lof or .lot file, and running +LaTeX again. +

+ +
+ - -

25.1.3 \nofiles

+

25.1.5 \nofiles

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -20545,19 +22239,59 @@ the old information.


- -
+
+

+Previous: , Up: Table of contents etc.   [Contents][Index]

+
+

25.1.6 \numberline

+ + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\numberline{number}
+
+ +

Typeset its argument flush left in a box. This is used in a +\contentsline command to typeset the section number +(see \contentsline). +

+

For example, this line in a .toc file causes the 1 to be +typeset flush left. +

+
+
\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}Motivation}{2}
+
+ +

By default, LaTeX typesets the section numbers in a box of length +\@tempdima. That length is set by the commands +\l@section, \l@subsection, etc. Put section numbers +inside a natural-width box with +\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{#1~}. +

+

This command is fragile, so you may need to precede it with +\protect (see \protect). An example is the use of +\protect in the command +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}Summary} +to get the \numberline into this command in the .toc file: +\contentsline {section}{\numberline {}Summary}{6} (the +page number ‘6’ is automatically added by LaTeX; +see \addcontentsline). +

+ +
+ - -

25.2 Indexes

+

25.2 Indexes

- + - - - + + +

This document has an index.

@@ -20588,40 +22322,41 @@ These output a file root-name.ind. Finally, you bring t information back into your document and typeset it with the \printindex command (see \printindex).

- - + + - - + + -

There are many packages that apply to indexing commands. The -showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in the -margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing -the index. The multind package supports multiple indexes. See -also the TeX FAQ entry on this topic, -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. + + +

There are many packages in the area of indexing. The showidx +package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the +page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index. +The multind package, among others, supports multiple indexes. +See also the TeX FAQ entry on this topic, +https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-multind, and the CTAN topic, +https://ctan.org/topic/index-multi.

- - -
- -
+

Next: , Up: Indexes   [Contents][Index]

- -

25.2.1 \index

+

25.2.1 \index

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -20662,7 +22397,7 @@ document as above will give an index entry like ‘Ackermann, 22, instance \index{Ackermann!function} could come before \index{Ackermann}.

- +

Get a page range in the output, like ‘Hilbert, 23--27’, as here.

@@ -20682,14 +22417,14 @@ the output is the item ‘Jones’ with no comma or page nu followed by two subitems, like ‘program, 50’ and ‘results, 51’.

- - - - - - - - + + + + + + + +

Generate a index entry that says ‘See’ by using a vertical bar @@ -20744,8 +22479,8 @@ would naturally give it. entry, preceding it with a double quote, ". (The double quote gets deleted before alphabetization.)

- - + +

A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond that provided by makeidx. One is index, which allows for @@ -20753,8 +22488,8 @@ multiple indices and contains a command \index*{index-entry-string} that prints the index-entry-string as well as indexing it.

- - + +

The \index command writes the indexing information to the file root-name.idx file. Specifically, it writes text of the command @@ -20773,19 +22508,17 @@ message like this.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Indexes   [Contents][Index]

- -

25.2.2 makeindex

+

25.2.2 makeindex

- - - - - + + + + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -20801,9 +22534,9 @@ raw index files, filename.idx files, and produces the actual index file, the filename.ind file that is input by \printindex (see \printindex).

- - - + + +

The first form of the command suffices for many uses. The second allows you to format the index by using an index style file, a .isty file. The third form is the most general; see the full @@ -20840,33 +22573,33 @@ is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with another backslash, comment.

-
+
preamble - +

Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the index is formatted. Default: "\\begin{theindex}\n".

-
+
postamble - +

Postamble of the output file. Default: "\n\n\\end{theindex}\n".

-
+
group_skip - +
-
+

Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group for entries starting with ‘a’, etc. This specifier gives what is inserted when a new group begins. Default: "\n\n \\indexspace\n" -(\indexspace is a rubber length with default value 10pt -plus5pt minus3pt). +(\indexspace is a command inserting a rubber length, by default +10pt plus5pt minus3pt).

-
+
lethead_flag - +

An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter. If it is 0 (which is the default) then other than group_skip nothing @@ -20876,129 +22609,129 @@ inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them. If it is negative then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase. The default is 0.

-
+
lethead_prefix - +

If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the prefix inserted before the new letter header. Default: ""

-
+
lethead_suffix - +

If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix inserted after the new letter header. Default: "".

-
+
item_0 - +

What is put between two level 0 items. Default: "\n \\item ".

-
+
item_1 - +

Put between two level 1 items. Default: "\n \\subitem ".

-
+
item_2 - +

put between two level 2 items. Default: "\n \\subsubitem ".

-
+
item_01 - +

What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item. Default: "\n \\subitem ".

-
+
item_x1 - +

What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item in the case that the level 0 item doesn’t have any page numbers (as in \index{aaa|see{bbb}}). Default: "\n \\subitem ".

-
+
item_12 - +

What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item. Default: "\n \\subsubitem ".

-
+
item_x2 - +

What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, if the level 1 item doesn’t have page numbers. Default: "\n \\subsubitem ".

-
+
delim_0 - +

Delimiter put between a level 0 key and its first page number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, ", ".

-
+
delim_1 - +

Delimiter put between a level 1 key and its first page number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, ", ".

-
+
delim_2 - +

Delimiter between a level 2 key and its first page number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, ", ".

-
+
delim_n - +

Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any level). Default: a comma followed by a blank, ", ".

-
+
delim_r - +

What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a range. Default: "--".

-
+
line_max - +

An integer. Maximum length of an index entry’s line in the output, beyond which the line wraps. Default: 72.

-
+
indent_space - +

What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line. Default: "\t\t".

-
+
indent_length - +

A number. The length of the wrapped line indentation. The default indent_space is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the default here is 16.

-
+
page_precedence - +

A document may have pages numbered in different ways. For example, a book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman while main @@ -21012,27 +22745,29 @@ roman R, and uppercase alphabetic A. Default:

- - +

There are a number of other programs that do the job -makeindex does. One is xindy, which does -internationalization and can process indexes for documents marked up -using LaTeX and a number of other languages. It is highly -configurable, both in markup terms and in terms of the collating order -of the text, as described in its documentation. +makeindex does. One is xindy +(https://ctan.org/pkg/xindy), which does internationalization and can +process indexes for documents marked up using LaTeX and a number of +other languages. It is written in Lisp, highly configurable, both in +markup terms and in terms of the collating order of the text, as +described in its documentation. +

+ +

A more recent indexing program supporting Unicode is xindex, +written in Lua (https://ctan.org/pkg/xindex).


- -
+

Previous: , Up: Indexes   [Contents][Index]

- -

25.2.3 \printindex

+

25.2.3 \printindex

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -21040,30 +22775,28 @@ Previous: , Up: \printindex
- +

Place the index into the output.

To get an index you must first include \usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex in the document preamble and compile the document, then run the system command makeindex, -and then compile the document again. See Indexes for further +and then compile the document again. See Indexes, for further discussion and an example of the use of \printindex.


- -
+

Previous: , Up: Front/back matter   [Contents][Index]

- -

25.3 Glossaries

+

25.3 Glossaries

- - - - - + + + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -21106,9 +22839,9 @@ of a Turing machine’. In addition, in a separate sectional unit he ‘Turing machine’ and the rest of the item says in normal type ‘A model of a machine … Computer Science’.

- - - + + +

The command \makeglossary opens the file that will contain the entry information, root-file.glo. Put the \printglossaries command where you want the glossaries to appear @@ -21120,24 +22853,22 @@ commands for a list of acronyms. See the package documentations on CTAN.

- -
- -
+

Next: , Up: Glossaries   [Contents][Index]

- -

25.3.1 \newglossaryentry

+

25.3.1 \newglossaryentry

- - + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -21165,7 +22896,7 @@ Next: , Up: @@ -21184,13 +22915,13 @@ here are a few.

name - +

(Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining.

description - +

(Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary. If this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second command @@ -21198,20 +22929,20 @@ form given in the synopsis.

plural - +

The plural form of name. Refer to the plural form using \glspl or \Glspl (see \gls).

sort - +

How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary holds.

symbol - +

A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name.

@@ -21220,16 +22951,14 @@ form given in the synopsis.
- -
+ - -

25.3.2 \gls

+

25.3.2 \gls

- - + +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -21264,16 +22993,14 @@ which also takes the plural.


- -
+

-Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

26 Letters

+

26 Letters

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -21323,7 +23050,7 @@ such as \chapter that make no sense in a letter are turned off. Each letter environment body typically ends with a \closing command such as \closing{Yours,}.

- +

Additional material may come after the \closing. You can say who is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like \cc{the Boss \\ the Boss's Boss}. There’s a similar \encl command for @@ -21360,41 +23087,39 @@ I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you.

These commands are used with the letter class.

- - - - - - - - - - -
- -
+

Next: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

- -

26.1 \address

+

26.1 \address

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -21424,16 +23149,14 @@ is formatted as a personal letter.
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

- -

26.2 \cc

+

26.2 \cc

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -21454,17 +23177,15 @@ with a double backslash, \\, as in:
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

- -

26.3 \closing

+

26.3 \closing

- - - + + +

Synopsis:

@@ -21481,16 +23202,14 @@ at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature. For example:
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

- -

26.4 \encl

+

26.4 \encl

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -21510,15 +23229,13 @@ Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, \\.
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

- -

26.5 \location

+

26.5 \location

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -21531,15 +23248,13 @@ appears if the page style is firstpage.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

- -

26.6 \makelabels

+

26.6 \makelabels

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -21595,8 +23310,8 @@ columns having two labels each.

The first column contains the return address twice. The second column contains the address for each recipient.

- - + +

The package envlab makes formatting the labels easier, with standard sizes already provided. The preamble lines @@ -21605,15 +23320,13 @@ are all that you need to print envelopes.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

- -

26.7 \name

+

26.7 \name

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -21626,16 +23339,14 @@ with the return address.


- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

- -

26.8 \opening

+

26.8 \opening

- - + +

Synopsis:

@@ -21652,15 +23363,13 @@ Next: , Previous: - -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

- -

26.9 \ps

- - +

26.9 \ps

+ +

Synopsis:

@@ -21677,113 +23386,253 @@ Next: , Prev
- -
+

Next: , Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

- -

26.10 \signature

+

26.10 \signature

+ +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\signature{first line \\
+            ... }
+
+ + + +

The sender’s name. This command is optional, although its inclusion is +usual. +

+

The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing. +LaTeX leaves some vertical space for a handwritten +signature. Separate multiple lines with a double +backslash, \\. For example: +

+
+
\signature{J Fred Muggs \\
+           White House}
+
+ +

LaTeX’s default for the vertical space from the \closing text +down to the \signature text is 6\medskipamount, which is +six times \medskipamount (where \medskipamount is equal to +a \parskip, which in turn is defined by default here to +0.7em). +

+

This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters in +the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a +letter environment and before the \closing. +

+

You can include a graphic in the signature as here. +

+
+
\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
+             My name}
+
+ +

For this you must put \usepackage{graphicx} in the preamble +(see Graphics). +

+ +
+
+

+Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+
+

26.11 \telephone

+ + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\telephone{number}
+
+ +

The sender’s telephone number. This is typically in the preamble, where +it applies to all letters. This only appears if the firstpage +pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the +page. +

+ +
+
+

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+
+

27 Input/output

+ + + + + +

LaTeX uses the ability to write to a file and later read it back in +to build document components such as a table of contents or index. You +can also read a file that other programs written, or write a file for +others to read. You can communicate with users through the terminal. +And, you can issue instructions for the operating system. +

+ + + + + + + + + +
+
+

+Next: , Up: Input/output   [Contents][Index]

+
+

27.1 \openin & \openout

+ + + + + + + +

Synopsis:

-
\signature{first line \\
-            ... }
+
\openin number=filename
 
- +

or: +

+
+
\openout number=filename
+
-

The sender’s name. This command is optional, although its inclusion is -usual. +

Open a file for reading material, or for writing it. The number +must be between 0 and 15, as in \openin3 (in LuaLaTeX +number can be between 0 and 255).

-

The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing. -LaTeX leaves some vertical space for a handwritten -signature. Separate multiple lines with a double -backslash, \\. For example: +

Here TeX opens the file presidents.tex for reading.

-
\signature{J Fred Muggs \\
-           White House}
+
\newread\presidentsfile
+\openin\presidentsfile=presidents
+\typeout{presidentsfile is \the\presidentsfile}
+\read\presidentsfile to\presidentline
+\typeout{\presidentline}
 
- -

LaTeX’s default for the vertical space from the \closing text -down to the \signature text is 6\medskipamount, which is -six times \medskipamount (where \medskipamount is equal to -a \parskip, which in turn is defined by default here to -0.7em). + +

The \newread command allocates input stream numbers from 0 +to 15 (there is also a \newwrite). The +\presidentsfile is more memorable but under the hood it is still +a number; the first \typeout gives something like +‘presidentsfile is 1’. In addition, \newread keeps track of +the allocation so that if you use too many then you get an error like +‘! No room for a new \read’. The second \typeout gives the +first line of the file, something like ‘1 Washington, George’.

-

This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters in -the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a -letter environment and before the \closing. +

Ordinarily TeX will not try to open the file until the next page +shipout. To change this, use +\immediate\openin number=filename or +\immediate\openout number=filename.

-

You can include a graphic in the signature as here. +

Close files with \closein number and +\closeout number. +

+

How LaTeX handles filenames varies among distributions, and even can +vary among versions of a distribution. If the file does not have an +extension then TeX will add a .tex. This creates +presidents.tex, writes one line to it, and closes it.

-
\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
-             My name}
+
\newwrite\presidentsfile
+\openout\presidentsfile=presidents
+\write\presidentsfile{1 Washington, George}
+\closeout\presidentsfile
 
-

For this you must put \usepackage{graphicx} in the preamble -(see Graphics). +

But filenames with a period can cause trouble: if TeX finds a +filename of presidents.dat it could look first for +presidents.dat.tex and later for presidents.dat, or it +could do the opposite. Your distribution’s documentation should say +more, and if you find something that works for you then you are good, +but to ensure complete portability the best thing is to use file names +containing only the twenty six ASCII letters (not case-sensitive) and +the ten digits, along with underscore and dash, and in particular with +no dot or space. +

+

For \openin, if TeX cannot find the file then it does not give +an error. It just considers that the stream is not open (test for this +with \ifeof; one recourse is the command +\InputIfFileExists, see Class and package commands). If you +try to use the same number twice, LaTeX won’t give you an error. If +you try to use a bad number then you get an error message like ‘! +Bad number (16). <to be read again> = l.30 \openin16=test.jh’.

- - -
- -
+

-Previous: , Up: Letters   [Contents][Index]

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Input/output   [Contents][Index]

- -

26.11 \telephone

+

27.2 \read

- + + +

Synopsis:

-
\telephone{number}
+
\read number tomacro
 
-

The sender’s telephone number. This is typically in the preamble, where -it applies to all letters. This only appears if the firstpage -pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the -page. +

Make the command macro contain the next line of input from text +stream number, as in \read5 to\data.

+

This opens the file email.tex for reading, puts the contents of +the first line into the command \email, and then closes the file. +

+
+
\newread\recipientfile
+\openin\recipientfile=email
+\read\recipientfile to\email
+\typeout{Email address: \email}
+\closein\recipientfile
+
-
- -
-

-Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

-
- -

27 Terminal input/output

- - - - - - - - +

If number is outside the range from 0 to 15 or if no file +of that number is open, or if the file has ended, then \read +will take input from the terminal (or exit if interaction is not +allowed, e.g., \nonstopmode; see interaction modes). +(However, the natural way in LaTeX to take input from the terminal +is \typein (see \typein.) +

+

To read an entire file as additional LaTeX source, use +\input (see \input) or \include (see \include & \includeonly). +

+ + + +

A common reason to want to read from a data file is to do mail merges. +CTAN has a number of packages for that; one is datatool. +


- -
+

-Next: , Up: Terminal input/output   [Contents][Index]

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Input/output   [Contents][Index]

- -

27.1 \typein

+

27.3 \typein

- +

Synopsis, one of:

@@ -21817,9 +23666,9 @@ the input you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the \typein command.

In the second command version the optional argument cmd -argument must be a command name — it must begin with a backslash, \. -This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you -typed. For example, this +argument must be a command name, that is, it must begin with a +backslash, \. This command name is then defined or redefined to be +the input that you typed. For example, this

\typein[\student]{Enter student name:}
@@ -21839,15 +23688,13 @@ Recommendation for John Dee.
 


- -
+

-Previous: , Up: Terminal input/output   [Contents][Index]

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Input/output   [Contents][Index]

- -

27.2 \typeout

+

27.4 \typeout

- +

Synopsis:

@@ -21887,15 +23734,423 @@ character with \csname @percentchar\endcsname.


- -
+
+

+Previous: , Up: Input/output   [Contents][Index]

+
+

27.5 \write

+ + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\write number{string}
+
+ +

Write string to the log file, to the terminal, or to a file +opened by \openout. For instance, \write6 writes to text +stream number 6. +

+

If the following appears in basefile.tex then it opens +basefile.jh, writes ‘Hello World!’ and a newline to +it, and closes that file. +

+
+
\newwrite\myfile
+\immediate\openout\myfile=\jobname.jh  % \jobname is root file basename
+...
+\immediate\write\myfile{Hello world!}
+...
+\immediate\closeout\myfile
+
+ + +

The \newwrite allocates a stream number, giving it a symbolic +name to make life easier, so that stream +\newwrite\myfile\the\myfile produces something like ‘stream 3’. +Then \openout associates the stream number with the given file +name. TeX ultimately executed \write3 which puts the string +in the file. +

+ + + +

Typically number is between 0 and 15, because typically +LaTeX authors follow the prior example and the number is allocated +by the system. If number is outside the range from 0 to 15 or +if it is not associated with an open file then LaTeX writes +string to the log file. If number is positive then in +addition LaTeX writes string to the terminal. +

+

Thus, test \write-1{Hello World!} puts ‘Hello World!’ +followed by a newline in the log file. (This is what the \wlog +command does; see \wlog). And \write100{Hello World!} +puts the same in the log file but also puts ‘Hello World!’ +followed by a newline in the terminal output. (But 16, 17, and 18 are +special as number; see below.) +

+ +

In LuaTeX, instead of 16 output streams there are 256 +(see TeX engines). +

+ + +

Use \write\@auxout{string} to write to the current +.aux file, which is associated with either the root file or +with the current include file; and use +\write\@mainaux{string} to write to the main +.aux. These symbolic names are defined by LaTeX. +

+

By default LaTeX does not write string to the file right +away. This is because, for example, you may need \write to +save the current page number, but when TeX comes across a +\write it typically does not know what the page number is, +since it has not yet done the page breaking. So, you use \write +in one of three contexts: +

+
+
\immediate\write\@auxout{string}      %1
+\write\@auxout{string}                %2
+\protected@write\@auxout{}{string}    %3
+
+ +
    +
  1. + +With the first, LaTeX writes string to the file immediately. +Any macros in string are fully expanded (just as in +\edef) so to prevent expansion you must use \noexpand, +toks, etc., except that you should use # instead of +##). + +
  2. + + +With the second, string is stored on the current list of things +(as a TeX “whatsit” item) and kept until the page is shipped out +and likewise the macros are unexpanded until \shipout. At +\shipout, string is fully expanded. + +
  3. +The third, \protected@write, is like the second except that +you can use \protect to avoid expansion. The extra first +argument allows you to locally insert extra definitions to make more +macros protected or to have some other special definition for the +write. +
+ +

As a simple example of expansion with \write, string here +contains a control sequence \triplex which we’ve defined to be +the text ‘XYZ’: +

+
+
\newwrite\jhfile
+\openout\jhfile=test.jh
+\newcommand{\triplex}{XYZ}
+\write\jhfile{test \triplex test}
+
+ +

This results in the file test.jh containing the text +‘test XYZtest’ followed by a newline. +

+ +

The cases where number is 16, 17, or 18 are special. Because of +\write’s behavior when number is outside the range from 0 +to 15 described above, in Plain TeX \write16 and +\write17 were sometimes used to write to the log file and the +terminal; however, in LaTeX, the natural way to do that is with +\typeout (see \typeout). The \write18 command is +even more special; modern TeX systems use it for giving commands to +the operating system (see \write18). +

+ + +

Ordinarily \write outputs a single line. You can include a +newline with ^^J. Thus, this produces two lines in the log +file: +

+
+
\wlog{Parallel lines have a lot in common.^^JBut they never meet.}
+
+ + + + +

A common case where authors need to write their own file is for +answers to exercises, or another situation where you want to write +out verbatim, without expanding the macros. CTAN has a number of +packages for this; one is answers. +

+ + + + + + + + +
+
+

+Next: , Up: \write   [Contents][Index]

+
+

27.5.1 \write and security

+ + + + +

The ability to write files raises security issues. If you compiled a +downloaded LaTeX file and it overwrote your password file then you +would be justifiably troubled. +

+

Thus, by default TeX systems only allow you to open files for +writing that are in the current directory or output directory, if +specified (see output directory), or in a subdirectory of +those. So, this code +

+
+
\newwrite\jhfile
+\openout\jhfile=../test.jh
+
+ +

gives an error like: +

+
Not writing to ../test.jh (openout_any = p).
+! I can't write on file `../test.jh'
+
+ + +

You can get just such an error when using commands such as +\include{../filename} because LaTeX will try to open +../filename.aux. The simplest solution is to put the included +files in the same directory as the root file, or in subdirectories. +

+ +
+
+

+Next: , Previous: , Up: \write   [Contents][Index]

+
+

27.5.2 \message

+ + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\message{string}
+
+ +

Write string to the log file and the terminal. +

+

Typically, LaTeX authors use \typeout (see \typeout). It +allows you to use \protect on any fragile commands in +string (see \protect). But \typeout always inserts a +newline at the end of string while \message does not, so +the latter can be useful. +

+

With this example document body. +

+
+
before\message{One Two}\message{Three}\message{Four^^JI}
+\message{declare a thumb war.}After
+
+ +

under some circumstances (see below) LaTeX writes the following to +both the terminal and the log file. +

+
+
One Two Three Four
+I declare a thumb war.
+
+ +

The ^^J produces a newline. Also, in the output document, +between ‘before’ and ‘After’ will be a single space (from +the end of line following ‘I}’). +

+

While \message allows you more control over formatting, a +gotcha is that LaTeX may mess up that formatting because it inserts +line breaks depending on what it has already written. Contrast this +document body, where the ‘Two’ has moved, to the one given above. +

+
+
before\message{One}\message{Two Three}\message{Four^^JI}
+\message{declare a thumb war.}After
+
+ +

This can happen: when LaTeX is outputting the messages to the +terminal, now the message with ‘One’ is shorter and it fits at the +end of the output terminal line, and so LaTeX breaks the line between +it and the ‘Two Three’. That line break appears also in the log +file. This line break insertion can depend on, for instance, the length +of the full path names of included files. So producing finely-formatted +lines in a way that is portable is hard, likely requiring +starting your message at the beginning of a line. +

+ +
+
+

+Next: , Previous: , Up: \write   [Contents][Index]

+
+

27.5.3 \wlog

+ + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\wlog{string}
+
+ +

Write string to the log file. +

+
+
\wlog{Did you hear about the mathematician who hates negatives?}
+\wlog{He'll stop at nothing to avoid them.}
+
+ +

Ordinarily string appears in a single separate line. Use +^^J to insert a newline. +

+
+
\wlog{Helvetica and Times Roman walk into a bar.}
+\wlog{The barman says,^^JWe don't serve your type.}
+
+ + +
+

-Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+Previous: , Up: \write   [Contents][Index]

- -

28 Command line

+

27.5.4 \write18

+ + + + + + + +

Synopsis: +

+
+
\write18{shell_command}
+
+ +

Issue a command to the operating system shell. The operating system +runs the command and LaTeX’s execution is blocked until that +finishes. +

+ + - +

This sequence (on Unix) +

+
+
\usepackage{graphicx}  % in preamble
+  ...
+\newcommand{\fignum}{1}
+\immediate\write18{cd pix && asy figure\fignum}
+\includegraphics{pix\figure\fignum.pdf}
+
+ +

will run Asymptote (the asy program) on pix/figure1.asy, +so that the document can later read in the resulting graphic +(see \includegraphics). Like any \write, here LaTeX +expands macros in shell_command so that \fignum is +replaced by ‘1’. +

+

Another example is that you can automatically run BibTeX at the start +of each LaTeX run (see Using BibTeX) by including +\immediate\write18{bibtex8 \jobname} as the first line of the +file. Note that \jobname expands to the basename of the root +file unless the --jobname option is passed on the command line, +in which case this is the option argument. +

+

You sometimes need to do a multi-step process to get the information +that you want. This will insert into the input a list of all PDF files +in the current directory (but see texosquery below): +

+
+
\immediate\write18{ls *.pdf > tmp.dat}
+\input{tmp.dat}
+
+ +

The standard behavior of any \write is to wait until a page is +being shipped out before expanding the macros or writing to the stream +(see \write). But sometimes you want it done now. For this, use +\immediate\write18{shell_command}. +

+

There are obvious security issues with allowing system commands inside +a LaTeX file. If you download a file off the net and it contains +commands to delete all your files then you would be unhappy. The +standard settings in modern distributions turn off full shell +access. You can turn it on, if you are sure the shell commands are +safe, by compiling with latex --enable-write18 filename +(see Command line options). (The --shell-escape option is +a synonym, in TeX Live.) +

+ +

In the place of full shell access, modern distributions by default use +a restricted version that allows some commands to work, such as those +that run Metafont to generate missing fonts, even if you do not use +the enable-write18 option. By default this list of allowed +commands is short and features only commands that are under the +control of the distribution maintainers (see Command line options). +

+ + + + +

The shell_command text is always passed to /bin/sh on +Unix-like operating systems, and the DOS command interpreter +cmd.exe on Windows. Any different shell set by the user, and +the SHELL environment variable, is ignored. +

+ + + + + + + +

If what you need is system information, such as the operating system +name, locale information, or directory contents, take a look at the +texosquery package, which provides a convenient and secure +interface for this, unlike the above examples using the raw +\write18: https://ctan.org/pkg/texosquery. +

+ + + + + +

LaTeX provides a package shellesc on top of the primitive +\write18 command. Its primary purpose is to provide a command +\ShellEscape which works identically on all TeX engines; +LuaTeX intentionally did not retain \write18 as a way to +invoke a shell command, so some engine-specific code is needed. The +shellesc package also provides a command +\DelayedShellEscape, executed at \output time, for the +same reason. +

+ +
+
+

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+
+

28 Command line interface

+ + + +

Synopsis (from a terminal command line):

@@ -21903,9 +24158,10 @@ Next:

TeX engines).

For example, this will run LaTeX on the file thesis.tex, creating the output thesis.pdf. @@ -21914,20 +24170,21 @@ creating the output thesis.pdf.

pdflatex thesis
 
-

-Note that .tex is the default file extension. +

+Note that .tex is the default file name extension.

-

pdfTeX is a development of the original TeX program, as are -XeTeX and LuaTeX (see TeX engines). They are completely -backward compatible. But the original program had a custom output -format, DVI, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF. This -allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as -hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and -ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run pdflatex or -xelatex or lualatex then you will by default get PDF -and have access to all its modern features. If you run latex, -or dvilualatex, then you will get DVI. The description here -assumes pdfLaTeX. +

pdfTeX is an extension of the original TeX program, as are +XeTeX and LuaTeX (see TeX engines). The first two are +completely backward compatible and the latter, almost so. Perhaps the +most fundamental new feature for all three is that the original TeX +output its own DVI format, while the newer ones can output directly to +PDF. This allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF +such as hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and +PNG, and ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run +pdflatex or xelatex or lualatex then you +will by default get PDF and have access to all its modern features. +If you run latex, or dvilualatex, then you will get +DVI. The description here assumes pdfLaTeX.

See Command line options, for a selection of the most useful command line options. As to argument, the usual case is that it @@ -21938,68 +24195,75 @@ input, which can be used for special effects (see

If you gave no arguments or options then pdflatex prompts for input from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering -<control>-D. +CTRL-D.

If LaTeX finds an error in your document then by default it stops and -asks you about it. See Recovering from errors for an outline of what +asks you about it. See Recovering from errors, for an outline of what to do.

- + - -
- -
+ - -

28.1 Command line options

+

28.1 Command line options

- +

These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document authoring. For a full list, try running ‘latex --help’ from the command line.

With many implementations you can specify command line options by -prefixing them with ‘-’ or ‘--’. This is the case for -both TeX Live (and MacTeX) and MiKTeX. We will use both -conventions interchangeably. +prefixing them with ‘-’ or ‘--’. This is the case for both +TeX Live (including MacTeX) and MiKTeX. We will use both +conventions interchangeably. If an option takes a value, it can be +specified either as a separate argument (‘--foo val’), or as one +argument with an ‘=’ sign (‘--foo=val’), but there can be no +spaces around the ‘=’. We will generally use the ‘=’ syntax.

-
+
-version

Show the current version, like ‘pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX Live 2015/Debian)’ along with a small amount of additional information, and exit.

- +
-help

Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit.

- +
-interaction=mode
-

TeX compiles a document in one of four interaction modes: +

+ + + +

TeX compiles a document in one of four interaction modes: batchmode, nonstopmode, scrollmode, -errorstopmode. In errorstop mode (the default), TeX -stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In batch -mode it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the -user hit <return> at every error, and missing files cause the -job to abort. In nonstop mode, diagnostic message appear on the -terminal but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In -scroll mode, TeX only stops for missing files or keyboard -input. +errorstopmode. In errorstopmode (the default), TeX +stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In batchmode +it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the user +hit RETURN at every error, and missing files cause the job to +abort. In nonstopmode, diagnostic message appear on the terminal +but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In +scrollmode, TeX stops for missing files or keyboard +input, but nothing else.

For instance, starting LaTeX with this command line

@@ -22009,65 +24273,65 @@ input.

eliminates most terminal output.

- + + +
-jobname=string
-

Set the value of TeX’s jobname to the string. The log file +

Set the value of TeX’s jobname to the string. The log file and output file will then be named string.log and -string.pdf. +string.pdf. see Jobname.

-

When you run pdflatex options argument, if -argument does not start with a backslash then TeX considers it -the name of a file to input. Otherwise it waits for the first -\input instruction and the name of the input file will be the job -name. This is used to name the log file the output file. The -jobname option overrides that process and directly specifies the -name. See Command line input for an example of its use. -

- + +
-output-directory=directory

Write files in the directory directory. It must already exist. -

- - - - +This applies to all external files created by TeX or LaTeX, such +as the .log file for the run, the .aux, .toc, +etc., files created by LaTeX, as well as the main .pdf or +.dvi output file itself. +

+

When specified, the output directory directory is also +automatically checked first for any file that it is input, so that the +external files can be read back in, if desired. The true current +directory (in which LaTeX was run) remains unchanged, and is also +checked for input files. +

+ + + + + +
-
--shell-escape
-
--no-shell-escape
--enable-write18
--disable-write18
-

Enable or disable \write18{shell command}. The first two -options are for with TeX Live or MacTeX while the second two are -for MiKTeX. -

- - - -

Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a -LaTeX file. For instance the package sagetex allows you to -have the mathematics software system Sage do calculations or draw -graphs and then incorporate that output in your document. For this -TeX provides the \write18 command. +

--shell-escape
+
--no-shell-escape
+

Enable or disable \write18{shell_command} +(see \write18). The first two options are supported by both +TeX Live and MiKTeX, while the second two are synonyms supported +by TeX Live.

-

But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen if you -compiled a LaTeX file from the Internet. By default \write18 -is disabled. (More precisely, by default TeX Live, MacTeX, and -MiKTeX only allow the execution of a limited number of TeX-related -programs, which they distribute.) +

Enabling this functionality has major security implications, since it +allows a LaTeX file to run any command whatsoever. Thus, by +default, unrestricted \write18 is not allowed. (The default +for TeX Live, MacTeX, and MiKTeX is to allow the execution of +a limited number of TeX-related programs, which they distribute.)

-

If you invoke LaTeX with the option no-shell-escape, and in -your document you call \write18{ls -l}, then you do not get an -error but the log file says ‘runsystem(ls -l)...disabled’. +

For example, if you invoke LaTeX with the option +no-shell-escape, and in your document you call +\write18{ls -l}, then you do not get an error but the log +file says ‘runsystem(ls -l)...disabled’.

- +
-halt-on-error

Stop processing at the first error.

- - + +
-file-line-error
-no-file-line-error
@@ -22078,27 +24342,29 @@ error messages. These are only available with TeX Live or MacTeX.
- -
+ - -

28.2 Command line input

+

28.2 Command line input

- + -

As part of the command line invocation pdflatex options -argument you can specify arbitrary LaTeX input by starting -argument with a backslash. This allows you to do some special -effects. +

As part of the command line invocation

- - +
+
latex-engine options argument
+
-

For example, this file (which uses the hyperref package for -hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a -PDF. +

you can specify arbitrary LaTeX input by starting +argument with a backslash. (All the engines support this.) This +allows you to do some special effects. +

+ + +

For example, this file (which uses the +hyperref package for hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of +output, one to be read on physical paper and one to be read online.

\ifdefined\paperversion        % in preamble
@@ -22114,10 +24380,17 @@ PDF.
 
 

Compiling this document book.tex with the command line pdflatex book will give the ‘CTAN’ link in blue. But -compiling it with pdflatex "\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex" -has the link in black. (Note the use of double quotes to prevent -interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell; your system may -do this differently.) +compiling it with +

+
+
pdflatex "\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex"
+
+ +

has the link in black. We use double quotes to prevent +interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell. (This +usually works on both Unix and Windows systems, but there are many +peculiarities to shell quoting, so read your system documentation if +need be.)

In a similar way, from the single file main.tex you can compile two different versions. @@ -22128,29 +24401,121 @@ pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}"

The jobname option is there because otherwise both files would be -called main.pdf and the second would overwrite the first. +called main.pdf and the second would overwrite the first. (See +the next section.) +

+

In this example, we pass the draft option to the +graphicx package: +

+
+
pdflatex "\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+
+ +

so the graphic files are read for their bounding box size information +but replaced in the PDF by a box with same size and that contains only +the file name, which speeds up compilation time and saves printer ink. +

+ +
+ +

28.3 Jobname

+ + + + + + +

Running LaTeX creates a number of files, including the main PDF (or +DVI) output but also including others. These files are named with the +so-called jobname. The most common case is also the simplest, +where for instance the command pdflatex thesis creates +thesis.pdf and also thesis.log and thesis.aux. +Here the job name is thesis. +

+

In general, LaTeX is invoked as latex-engine +options argument, where latex-engine is +pdflatex, lualatex, etc. (see TeX engines). +If argument does not start with a backslash, as is the case +above with thesis, then TeX considers it to be the name of +the file to input as the main document. The name of that root file, +without the .tex extension, is the jobname. If argument +does start with a backslash, or if TeX is in interactive mode, then +it waits for the first \input command, and the jobname is the +argument to \input. +

+

There are two more possibilities for the jobname. It can be directly +specified with the -jobname option, as in pdflatex +-jobname=myname (see Command line input for a real example). +

+ + +

The final possibility is texput, which is the final fallback +default if no other name is available to TeX. For example, if no +-jobname option was specified, and the compilation stops before +there is any output, then the log file will be named +texput.log. +

+ + +

A special case of this is that in LaTeX versions of (approximately) +2020 or later, the jobname is also texput if the first +\input occurs as a result of being called by either +\documentclass or \RequirePackage. So this will produce +a file named texput.pdf: +

+
+
pdflatex "\documentclass{minimal}\begin{document}Hello!\end{document}"
+
+ +

However, this special case only applies to those two commands. Thus, with +

+
+
pdflatex "\documentclass{article}\usepackage{lipsum}\input{thesis}"
+
+ +

the output file is lipsum.pdf, as \usepackage calls +\input. +

+ +

Within the document, the macro \jobname expands to the jobname. +(When you run LaTeX on a file whose name contains spaces, the string +returned by \jobname contains matching start and end quotes.) +In the expansion of that macro, all characters are of +catcode 12 (other) except that spaces are category 10, +including letters that are normally catcode 11.

-

A final example. This loads the package graphicx with the option -draft + + + + +

Because of this catcode situation, using the jobname in a conditional +can become complicated. One solution is to use the macro +\IfBeginWith from the xstring package in its star +variant, which is insensitive to catcode. For example, in the +following text the footnote “Including Respublica Bananensis +Francorum.” is only present if the task name starts with +my-doc.

-
pdflatex -jobname=aa "\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+
If a democracy is just a regime where citizens vote then
+all banana republics \IfBeginWith*{\jobname}{my-doc}%
+{\footnote{Including Respublica Bananensis Francorum.}}{} are
+democracies.
 
-

so the graphic files are read for their size information but not -incorporated into the PDF. (The jobname option is there because -otherwise the output file would be graphicx.pdf, as -\RequirePackage does an \input of its own.) +

Manipulating the value of \jobname inside of a document does not +change the name of the output file or the log file.


- -
+ - -

28.3 Recovering from errors

+

28.4 Recovering from errors

If LaTeX finds an error in your document then it gives you an error message and prompts you with a question mark, ?. For instance, @@ -22170,19 +24535,20 @@ l.5 The \PN ?

-

The simplest thing is to enter ‘x’ and <return> and fix the -typo. You could instead enter ‘?’ and <return> to see other +

The simplest thing is to enter x and RETURN and fix the +typo. You could instead enter ? and RETURN to see other options.

- - - + + +

There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to include the \end{document} or misspelled it. In this case LaTeX gives you a ‘*’ prompt. You can get back to the command -line by typing \stop and <return>. +line by typing \stop and RETURN; this command does its +best to exit LaTeX immediately, whatever state it may be in.

-

The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name. For instance, +

The last scenario is that you mistyped the filename. For instance, instead of pdflatex test you might type pdflatex tste.

@@ -22193,51 +24559,48 @@ instead of pdflatex test you might type pdflatex tste. Please type another input file name:
-

The simplest thing is to enter <Control> and ‘d’ (holding -them down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line. +

The simplest thing is to enter CTRL d (holding the Control and d +keys down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line.


- -
+

-Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

+Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

Appendix A Document templates

+

Appendix A Document templates

- - + + -

Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will +

Although illustrative material, perhaps these document templates will be useful. Additional template resources are listed at -http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates. +https://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates.

- - - - -
- -
+ - -

A.1 beamer template

+

A.1 beamer template

+ + + + + - -

The beamer class creates presentation slides. It has a vast array of features, but here is a basic template: @@ -22246,7 +24609,7 @@ array of features, but here is a basic template: \title{Beamer Class template} \author{Alex Author} -\date{July 31, 2007} +\date{July 31, 2020} \begin{document} @@ -22264,21 +24627,20 @@ array of features, but here is a basic template: \end{document} -

One web resource for this: -http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/. +

The Beamer package on CTAN: https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer.


- -
+ - -

A.2 article template

+

A.2 article template

- + +

A simple template for an article. +

\documentclass{article}
 \title{Article Class Template}
 \author{Alex Author}
@@ -22294,21 +24656,20 @@ Additional text.
 
 \section{Second section}
 Some more text.
+
 \end{document}
 

- -
+ - -

A.3 book template

+

A.3 book template

- + -

This is a straightforward template for a book. See See Larger book template for a more elaborate one. +

This is a straightforward template for a book. See Larger book template, for a more elaborate one.

\documentclass{book}
 \title{Book Class Template}
@@ -22325,33 +24686,35 @@ Some other text.
 
 \section{A subtopic}
 The end.
+
 \end{document}
 

- -
+ - -

A.4 Larger book template

+

A.4 Larger book template

- + -

This is a more elaborate template for a book. It has -\frontmatter, \mainmatter, and \backmatter to -control the typography of the three main areas of a book -(see \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter). The book has a -bibliography and an index. +

This is a somewhat elaborate template for a book. See book template, +for a simpler one.

-

Notable is that it uses \include and \includeonly +

This template uses \frontmatter, \mainmatter, and +\backmatter to control the typography of the three main areas +of a book (see \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter). The +book has a bibliography and an index. +

+

Also notable is that it uses \include and \includeonly (see Splitting the input). While you are working on a chapter you can comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to -\includeonly. That will speed up compilation without losing any -information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to -come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of -\include. You don’t get the cross-reference benefit this way.) +\includeonly. That will speed up compilation without losing +any information such as cross-references. (Material that does not +need to come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of +\include. You don’t get the cross-reference benefit with +\input.)

\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
 \usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
@@ -22360,11 +24723,12 @@ come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of
 \author{Alex Author}
 
 \includeonly{%
-  frontcover,
+% frontcover,
   preface,
   chap1,
-  ...
+% appenA,
   }
+
 \begin{document}
 \frontmatter
 \include{frontcover}
@@ -22372,154 +24736,60 @@ come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of
 \maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright}
 \tableofcontents
 \include{preface}
+
 \mainmatter
 \include{chap1}
 ...
 \appendix
-\include{appena}
+\include{appenA}
 ...
+
 \backmatter
 \bibliographystyle{apalike}
 \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
 \bibliography
 \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
 \printindex
-\include{backcover}
-\end{document}
-
-
- - - -

A.5 tugboat template

- - - - - -

TUGboat is the journal of the TeX Users Group, -http://tug.org/TUGboat. -

-
\documentclass{ltugboat}
-
-\usepackage{graphicx}
-\usepackage{ifpdf}
-\ifpdf
-\usepackage[breaklinks,hidelinks]{hyperref}
-\else
-\usepackage{url}
-\fi
-
-%%% Start of metadata %%%
-
-\title{Example \TUB\ article}
-
-% repeat info for each author.
-\author{First Last}
-\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
-\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
-\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
-
-%%% End of metadata %%%
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
-This is an example article for \TUB{}.
-Please write an abstract.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
-\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
-
-We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
-\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
-output).  Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
-
-The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
-% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
-\begin{verbatim}[\small]
-\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
-\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
-\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
-\mf \MFB
-\plain \POBox \PS
-\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
-\TUB \TUG \tug
-\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
-
-\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph
-
-\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred}  % please use!
-\cs{fred}   -> \fred
-\meta{fred} -> <fred>
-\nth{n}     -> 1st, 2nd, ...
-\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
-\booktitle{Book of Fred}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
-\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.
-
-This file is just a template.  The \TUB\ style documentation is the
-\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}.  (For
-\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
-\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
-\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)
-
-Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
-
-\bibliographystyle{plain}  % we recommend the plain bibliography style
-\nocite{book-minimal}      % just making the bibliography non-empty
-\bibliography{xampl}       % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
-
-\makesignature
+\include{backcover}
 \end{document}
 

- -
+

Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

- -

Index

+

Index

- -
Jump to:   & + +Command 10pt 11pt 12pt @@ -1675,8 +2330,9 @@ options). 24.88 24.88 24.88 -The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by -declaring them, as with this example. +declaration form of font size commands +The commands are listed here in declaration (not environment) form, +since that is how they are typically used. For example.
\begin{quotation} \small
@@ -1685,20 +2341,32 @@ declaring them, as with this example.
 
-The scope of the \small lasts until the end of the -quotation environment. It would also end at the next type style -command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it in -extra curly braces {\small We are here, we are here, we are -here!}. You can instead use the environment form of these commands; -for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. +Here, the scope of the \small lasts until the end of the +quotation environment. It would also end at the next type +style command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it +in curly braces {\small This text is typeset in the small font.}. + +environment form of font size commands +An environment form of each of these commands is also defined; for +instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. However, in practice +this form can easily lead to unwanted spaces at the beginning and/or +end of the environment without careful consideration, so it&textrsquo;s +generally less error-prone to stick to the declaration form. + +(Aside: Technically, due to the way &latex; defines \begin and +\end, nearly every command that does not take an argument +technically has an environment form. But in almost all cases, it would +only cause confusion to use it. The reason for mentioning the +environment form of the font size declarations specifically is that +this particular use is not rare.) Low-level font commandsFont sizesFonts
Low-level font commands -low-level font commands -font commands, low-level +low-level font commands +font commands, low-level These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available @@ -1709,7 +2377,7 @@ ones.
Jump to:   $ +   +&   -* +*   -- +-   -. +.   -1 +/   -: +1   -[ +:   -\ +[   -^ +\   -_ +^   -` +_   -{ +{   -~ +~  
A @@ -22574,16 +24844,20 @@ Previous:
low level font commands fontencoding \fontencoding{encoding} -\fontencoding +\fontencoding Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There are a large number of valid encodings. The most common are OT1, Knuth&textrsquo;s original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and @@ -1721,11 +2389,11 @@ hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see low level font commands fontfamily \fontfamily{family} -\fontfamily -families, of fonts -font catalogue +\fontfamily +families, of fonts +font catalogue Select the font family. The web page -http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/ provides one way to browse +https://tug.org/FontCatalogue/ provides one way to browse through many of the fonts easily used with &latex;. Here are examples of some common families. @@ -1775,8 +2443,8 @@ examples of some common families. low level font commands fontseries \fontseries{series} -\fontseries -series, of fonts +\fontseries +series, of fonts Select the font series. A series combines a weight and a width. Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible combinations. Some common combined series values include: @@ -1794,7 +2462,7 @@ combinations. Some common combined series values include: Bold extended -weights, of fonts +weights, of fonts The possible values for weight, individually, are: xx Medium (normal) xx @@ -1818,7 +2486,7 @@ combinations. Some common combined series values include: Ultra bold -widths, of fonts +widths, of fonts The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces): @@ -1849,8 +2517,8 @@ weight and width are m, in which case use just one (m). \fontshape{shape} -\fontshape -shapes, of fonts +\fontshape +shapes, of fonts low level font commands fontshape Select font shape. Valid shapes are: @@ -1874,40 +2542,21 @@ small caps are often missing as well. low level font commands fontsize \fontsize{size}{skip} -\fontsize -font size -\baselineskip +\fontsize +font size +\baselineskip Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both parameters defaults to points (pt). The line spacing is the nominal vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is stored in the parameter \baselineskip. The default \baselineskip for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the \fontsize. Changing \baselineskip directly is inadvisable since its value is -reset every time a size change happens; see \baselinestretch, next. - -low level font commands baselinestretch -\baselinestretch -\baselinestretch -&latex; multiplies the line spacing by the value of the -\baselinestretch parameter; the default factor is 1. A change -takes effect when \selectfont (see below) is called. You can -make a line skip change happen for the entire document, for instance -doubling it, by doing \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0} in -the preamble. - -package, setspace -setspace package - -double spacing -However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the -setspace package. In addition to offering a number of spacing -options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in places -where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure -captions. See the package documentation. +reset every time a size change happens; instead use +\baselinestretch. (\baselineskip & \baselinestretch). low level font commands linespread \linespread{factor} -\linespread +\linespread Equivalent to \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and therefore must be followed by \selectfont to have any effect. @@ -1916,7 +2565,7 @@ just described. low level font commands selectfont \selectfont -\selectfont +\selectfont The effects of the font commands described above do not happen until \selectfont is called, as in \fontfamily{familyname}\selectfont. It is often useful @@ -1926,7 +2575,7 @@ to put this in a macro:&linebreak; low level font commands usefont \usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} -\usefont +\usefont The same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape with the given parameters, followed by \selectfont. For example: @@ -1943,7 +2592,7 @@ followed by \selectfont. For example: LayoutSectioningFontsTop Layout -layout commands +layout commands Commands for controlling the general page layout. @@ -1953,6 +2602,7 @@ followed by \selectfont. For example: \flushbottom
Make all text pages the same height.
 
\raggedbottom
Allow text pages of differing height.
 
Page layout parameters
\headheight \footskip.
+
\baselineskip & \baselinestretch
Space between lines.
 
Floats
Figures, tables, etc.
 
@@ -1960,8 +2610,8 @@ followed by \selectfont. For example: \onecolumn\twocolumnLayout
\onecolumn -\onecolumn -one-column output +\onecolumn +one-column output Synopsis: @@ -1979,9 +2629,9 @@ behavior (Document class opt \twocolumn\flushbottom\onecolumnLayout
\twocolumn -\twocolumn -multicolumn text -two-column output +\twocolumn +multicolumn text +two-column output Synopses: @@ -2002,27 +2652,27 @@ typesetting starts. These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: -\columnsep\columnsep +\columnsep\columnsep twocolumn columnsep The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with a -command such as \setlength{\columnsep}{40pt} You must change -it before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good +command such as \setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}. You must change +it before the two column mode starts; in the preamble is a good place. -\columnseprule\columnseprule +\columnseprule\columnseprule twocolumn columnseprule -The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between -the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is no rule. -Change it with a command such as +The width of the rule between columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that +there is no rule. Otherwise, the rule appears halfway between the two +columns. Change it with a command such as \setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}, before the two-column -environment starts. +mode starts. -\columnwidth\columnwidth +\columnwidth\columnwidth twocolumn columnwidth The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to \textwidth. In two-column mode by default &latex; sets the -width of each of the two columns to be half of \textwidth minus -\columnsep. +width of each of the two columns, \columnwidth, to be half of +\textwidth minus \columnsep. @@ -2034,17 +2684,17 @@ The following parameters control float behavior of two-column output. twocolumn dbltopfraction -\dbltopfraction\dbltopfraction +\dbltopfraction\dbltopfraction The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that the height of a table* or figure* environment must not -exceed 0.7\textheight . If the height of your starred float +exceed 0.7\textheight. If the height of your starred float environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following actions to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the document: -Use the [tp] location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put +Use the [tp] location specifier to tell &latex; to try to put the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of a page. @@ -2059,29 +2709,29 @@ to avoid going to float pages so soon. You can redefine it, as with \renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}. -twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction -\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction -For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction +\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction +twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction +For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of blank space. &latex;&textrsquo;s default is 0.5. Change it with \renewcommand. -twocolumn dblfloatsep -\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep -On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance +\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep +twocolumn dblfloatsep +On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page. The default is 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for a document set at 10pt or 11pt, and 14pt plus2pt minus4pt for a document set at 12pt. -twocolumn dbltextfloatsep -\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep -This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or +\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep +twocolumn dbltextfloatsep +This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page and the main text. The default is 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. -twocolumn dbltopnumber -\dbltopnumber\dbltopnumber -On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the +\dbltopnumber\dbltopnumber +twocolumn dbltopnumber +On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The &latex; default is 2. @@ -2116,7 +2766,7 @@ Two column text here. \flushbottom\raggedbottom\twocolumnLayout
\flushbottom -\flushbottom +\flushbottom Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the @@ -2141,8 +2791,8 @@ is to, in a final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages \raggedbottomPage layout parameters\flushbottomLayout
\raggedbottom -\raggedbottom -stretch, omitting vertical +\raggedbottom +stretch, omitting vertical Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided @@ -2154,23 +2804,23 @@ option (Document class optio
-Page layout parametersFloats\raggedbottomLayout +Page layout parameters\baselineskip & \baselinestretch\raggedbottomLayout
Page layout parameters -page layout parameters -parameters, page layout -layout, page parameters for -header, parameters for -footer, parameters for -running header and footer +page layout parameters +parameters, page layout +layout, page parameters for +header, parameters for +footer, parameters for +running header and footer -\columnsep\columnsep -\columnseprule\columnseprule -\columnwidth\columnwidth -\columnsep -\columnseprule -\columnwidth +\columnsep\columnsep +\columnseprule\columnseprule +\columnwidth\columnwidth +\columnsep +\columnseprule +\columnwidth page layout parameters columnsep page layout parameters columnseprule page layout parameters columnwidth @@ -2179,24 +2829,24 @@ columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class option twocolumn is in effect (Document class options). \twocolumn. -\headheight\headheight -\headheight +\headheight\headheight +\headheight page layout parameters headheight Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in the article, report, and book classes is 12pt, at all type sizes. -\headsep\headsep -\headsep +\headsep\headsep +\headsep page layout parameters headsep Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of the main text. The default in the article and report classes is 25pt. In the book class the default is: if the -document is set at 10pt then it is 0.25in, and at 11pt and 12pt +document is set at 10pt then it is 0.25in, and at 11pt or 12pt it is 0.275in. -\footskip\footskip -\footskip +\footskip\footskip +\footskip page layout parameters footskip Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of the page footer. The default in the article and report @@ -2204,8 +2854,8 @@ classes is 30pt. In the book class the default is: wh the type size is 10pt the default is 0.35in, while at 11pt it is 0.38in, and at 12pt it is 30pt. -\linewidth\linewidth -\linewidth +\linewidth\linewidth +\linewidth page layout parameters linewidth Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list (list). That is, the nominal value for \linewidth is to @@ -2216,12 +2866,12 @@ is decreased by the sum of that list&textrsquo;s \leftmargin and -\marginparpush\marginparpush -\marginsep\marginsep -\marginparwidth\marginparwidth -\marginparpush -\marginsep -\marginparwidth +\marginparpush\marginparpush +\marginsep\marginsep +\marginparwidth\marginparwidth +\marginparpush +\marginsep +\marginparwidth page layout parameters marginparpush page layout parameters marginsep page layout parameters marginparwidth @@ -2249,41 +2899,42 @@ classes, in two-column mode the default is 60% of \paperwidth − \textwidth, while in one-column mode it is 50% of that distance. -\oddsidemargin\oddsidemargin -\evensidemargin\evensidemargin -\oddsidemargin -\evensidemargin +\oddsidemargin\oddsidemargin +\evensidemargin\evensidemargin +\oddsidemargin +\evensidemargin page layout parameters oddsidemargin page layout parameters evensidemargin -The \oddsidemargin is the extra distance between the left side of + +The \oddsidemargin length is the extra distance between the left side of the page and the text&textrsquo;s left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the document class option twoside is chosen and on all pages when oneside is in effect. When twoside is in effect, on even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is -evensidemargin. +\evensidemargin. &latex;&textrsquo;s default is that \oddsidemargin is 40% of the difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth, and \evensidemargin is the remainder. -\paperheight\paperheight -\paperheight +\paperheight\paperheight +\paperheight page layout parameters paperheight The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area. Normally set with a document class option, as in \documentclass[a4paper]{article} (Document class options). -\paperwidth\paperwidth -\paperwidth +\paperwidth\paperwidth +\paperwidth page layout parameters paperwidth The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area. Normally set with a document class option, as in \documentclass[a4paper]{article} (Document class options). -\textheight\textheight -\textheight +\textheight\textheight +\textheight page layout parameters textheight The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is set at a nominal type size of 10pt then for an article or report @@ -2292,8 +2943,8 @@ the default is 43\baselineskip, while for a book it is 38\baselineskip for all document classes. At 12pt it is 36\baselineskip for all classes. -\textwidth\textwidth -\textwidth +\textwidth\textwidth +\textwidth page layout parameters textwidth The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an article or report document, the default is 345pt @@ -2314,24 +2965,25 @@ column), while \linewidth may decrease for nested lists. specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the minipage or \parbox. -\hsize +\hsize\hsize +\hsize page layout parameters hsize -\hsize\hsize -This entry is included for completeness: \hsize is the &tex; +This entry is included for completeness: \hsize is the &tex; primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal &latex; documents. -\topmargin\topmargin -topmargin +\topmargin\topmargin +topmargin page layout parameters topmargin + Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is computed based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in − \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip, and then divided by two. -\topskip\topskip -\topskip +\topskip\topskip +\topskip page layout parameters topskip Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default is the @@ -2341,7 +2993,123 @@ same as the font size, e.g., 10pt at a type size of 10pt.
-FloatsPage layout parametersLayout +\baselineskip & \baselinestretchFloatsPage layout parametersLayout +
\baselineskip & \baselinestretch + +\baselineskip +\baselinestretch +\linespread +space between lines +interline space +leading +double spacing + +The \baselineskip is a rubber length (Lengths). It gives +the leading, the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from +baseline to baseline. + +Ordinarily document authors do not directly change \baselineskip +while writing. Instead, it is set by the low level font selection +command \fontsize (low level font commands fontsize). +The \baselineskip&textrsquo;s value is reset every time a font change +happens and so any direct change to \baselineskip would vanish +the next time there was a font switch. For how to influence line +spacing, see the discussion of \baselinestretch below. + +Usually, a font&textrsquo;s size and baseline skip is assigned by the font +designer. These numbers are nominal in the sense that if, for instance, +a font&textrsquo;s style file has the command \fontsize{10pt}{12pt} +then that does not mean that the characters in the font are 10pt tall; +for instance, parentheses and accented capitals may be taller. Nor does +it mean that if the lines are spaced less than 12pt apart then they risk +touching. Rather these numbers are typographic judgements. (Often, the +\baselineskip is about twenty percent larger than the font size.) + + +The \baselineskip is not a property of each line but of the +entire paragraph. As a result, large text in the middle of a paragraph, +such as a single {\Huge Q}, will be squashed into its line. +&tex; will make sure it doesn&textrsquo;t scrape up against the line above but +won&textrsquo;t change the \baselineskip for that one line to make extra +room above. For the fix, use a \strut (\strut). + +The value of \baselineskip that &tex; uses for the paragraph is +the value in effect at the blank line or command that ends the paragraph +unit. So if a document contains this paragraph then its lines will be +scrunched together, compared to lines in surrounding paragraphs. + + + +
Many people see a page break between text and a displayed equation as 
+bad style, so in effect the display is part of the paragraph.
+Because this display is in footnotesize, the entire paragraph has the
+baseline spacing matching that size.
+{\footnotesize $$a+b = c$$}
+
+ +\lineskip +\lineskiplimit +\prevdepth +The process for making paragraphs is that when a new line is added, if +the depth of the previous line plus the height of the new line is less +than \baselineskip then &tex; inserts vertical glue to make up +the difference. There are two fine points. The first is that if the +lines would be too close together, closer than \lineskiplimit, +then &tex; instead uses \lineskip as the interline glue. The +second is that &tex; doesn&textrsquo;t actually use the depth of the previous +line. Instead it uses \prevdepth, which usually contains that +depth. But at the beginning of the paragraph (or any vertical list) +or just after a rule, \prevdepth has the value -1000pt and this +special value tells &tex; not to insert any interline glue at the +paragraph start. + +In the standard classes \lineskiplimit is 0pt and +\lineskip is 1pt. By the prior paragraph then, the distance +between lines can approach zero but if it becomes zero (or less than +zero) then the lines jump to 1pt apart. + +Sometimes authors must, for editing purposes, put the document in double +space or one-and-a-half space. The right way to influence the interline +distance is via \baselinestretch. It scales +\baselineskip, and has a default value of 1.0. It is a command, +not a length, so change the scale factor as in +\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.5}\selectfont. + +The most straightforward way to change the line spacing for an entire +document is to put \linespread{factor} in the preamble. +For double spacing, take factor to be 1.6 and for one-and-a-half +spacing use 1.3. These number are rough: for instance, since the +\baselineskip is about 1.2 times the font size, multiplying by +1.6 gives a font size to baseline ratio of about 2. (The +\linespread command is defined as +\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor} so it won&textrsquo;t +take effect until a font setting happens. But that always takes place at +the start of a document, so there you don&textrsquo;t need to follow it with +\selectfont.) + +package, setspace +setspace package + +A simpler approach is the setspace package. The basic example: + + +
\usepackage{setspace}
+\doublespacing  % or \onehalfspacing for 1.5
+
+ +In the preamble these will start the document off with that sizing. +But you can also use these declarations in the document body to change +the spacing from that point forward, and consequently there is +\singlespacing to return the spacing to normal. In the +document body, a better practice than using the declarations is to use +environments, such as \begin{doublespace} +... \end{doublespace}. The package also has commands to do +arbitrary spacing: \setstretch{factor} and +\begin{spacing}{factor} ... \end{spacing}. + + +
+Floats\baselineskip & \baselinestretchLayout
Floats Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken @@ -2369,8 +3137,8 @@ float that is big may migrate to the end of the document. In which event, because all floats in a class must appear in sequential order, every following float in that class also appears at the end. -placement of floats -specifier, float placement +placement of floats +specifier, float placement In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its placement argument. The possible values are a sequence of the @@ -2386,24 +3154,24 @@ both article and book classes, is tbp. allowed for full-width floats (figure*) with double-column output. To ameliorate this, use the stfloats or dblfloatfix package, but see the discussion at caveats in the -FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat. +FAQ: https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-2colfloat. h (Here)&textmdash;at the position in the text where the figure environment appears. However, h is not allowed by itself; t is automatically added. -here, putting floats -package, float -float package +here, putting floats +package, float +float package To absolutely force a float to appear &textldquo;here&textrdquo;, you can \usepackage{float} and use the H specifier which it defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere. +https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-figurehere. p -float page +float page (Page of floats)&textmdash;on a separate float page, which is a page containing no text, only floats. @@ -2431,8 +3199,8 @@ use the afterpage package and issue \afterpage{\clearpage}. This will wait until the current page is finished and then flush all outstanding floats. -package, flafter -flafter package +package, flafter +flafter package &latex; can typeset a float before where it appears in the source (although on the same output page) if there is a t specifier in @@ -2440,7 +3208,7 @@ the placement parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting the t is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using the flafter package or using the command -\suppressfloats +\suppressfloats \suppressfloats[t], which causes floats for the top position on this page to moved to the next page. @@ -2449,27 +3217,27 @@ non-float text (change them with \renewcommand{parameter}{decimal between 0 and 1}): -\bottomfraction\bottomfraction -\bottomfraction +\bottomfraction\bottomfraction +\bottomfraction floats bottomfraction The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at the bottom; default .3. -\floatpagefraction\floatpagefraction -\floatpagefraction +\floatpagefraction\floatpagefraction +\floatpagefraction floats floatpagefraction The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; default .5. -\textfraction\textfraction -\textfraction +\textfraction\textfraction +\textfraction floats textfraction Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a different page. The default is .2. -\topfraction\topfraction -\topfraction +\topfraction\topfraction +\topfraction floats topfraction Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before floats; default .7. @@ -2480,21 +3248,21 @@ command of the form \setlength{parameter}{ expression}): -\floatsep\floatsep -\floatsep +\floatsep\floatsep +\floatsep floats floatsep Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default 12pt plus2pt minus2pt. -\intextsep\intextsep -\intextsep +\intextsep\intextsep +\intextsep floats intextsep Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for 10 point and 11 point documents, and 14pt plus4pt minus4pt for 12 point documents. -\textfloatsep\textfloatsep -\textfloatsep +\textfloatsep\textfloatsep +\textfloatsep floats textfloatsep Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. @@ -2505,38 +3273,38 @@ command of the form \setcounter{ctrname}{< number}): -bottomnumberbottomnumber -bottomnumber +bottomnumberbottomnumber +bottomnumber floats bottomnumber Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; default 1. -dbltopnumberdbltopnumber -dbltopnumber +dbltopnumberdbltopnumber +dbltopnumber floats dbltopnumber Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a two-column page; default 2. -topnumbertopnumber -topnumber +topnumbertopnumber +topnumber floats topnumber Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; default 2. -totalnumbertotalnumber -totalnumber +totalnumbertotalnumber +totalnumber floats totalnumber Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. The principal &tex; FAQ entry relating to floats -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats contains +https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-floats contains suggestions for relaxing &latex;&textrsquo;s default parameters to reduce the problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach&textrsquo;s article &textldquo;How to influence the position of float environments like figure and table in &latex;?&textrdquo; -(http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf). +(https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2014-FMi-TUB-tb111mitt-float-placement.pdf).
@@ -2544,19 +3312,21 @@ influence the position of float environments like figure and table in SectioningCross referencesLayoutTop Sectioning -sectioning commands -part -chapter -section -subsection -paragraph -subparagraph -\part -\chapter -\section -\subsection -\paragraph -\subparagraph +sectioning commands +part +chapter +section +subsection +subsubsection +paragraph +subparagraph +\part +\chapter +\section +\subsection +\subsubsection +\paragraph +\subparagraph Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc. All sectioning commands have the same form, one of: @@ -2576,7 +3346,7 @@ available in all of &latex;&textrsquo;s standard document classes bookreport, and article, except that \chapter is not available in article. - +
Sectioning unit Command Level Part \part -1 (book, report), 0 (article) @@ -2594,10 +3364,10 @@ not available in article. \subparagraph 5 -*-form of sectioning commands +*-form of sectioning commandsAll these commands have a *-form that prints title as usual -but is not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents. -An example of using this is for an appendix in an article . The +but does not number it and does not make an entry in the table of contents. +An example of using this is for an appendix in an article. The input \appendix\section{Appendix} gives the output A Appendix (\appendix). You can lose the numbering A by instead entering \section*{Appendix} (articles often omit a @@ -2620,32 +3390,42 @@ of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit (Sectioning/tocdepth). &latex; expects that before you have a \subsection you will have -a \section and, in a book, that before a \section you will -have a \chapter. Otherwise you can get a something like a -subsection numbered 3.0.1. +a \section and, in a book class document, that before a +\section you will have a \chapter. Otherwise you can get +something like a subsection numbered 3.0.1. -Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands. +package, titlesec +titlesec package + +&latex; lets you change the appearance of the sectional units. As a +simple example, you can change the section numbering to upper-case +letters with \renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}} in the +preamble (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). CTAN +has many packages that make this adjustment easier, notably +titlesec. + +Two counters relate to the appearance of headings made by sectioning commands. -secnumdepthsecnumdepth -secnumdepth counter -section numbers, printing +secnumdepthsecnumdepth +secnumdepth counter +section numbers, printing sectioning secnumdepth Sectioning/secnumdepth -Controls which sectioning commands are -numbered. Suppress numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than -level \setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} -(\setcounter). See the above table for the level numbers. For -instance, if the secnumdepth is 1 in an article then a -\section{Introduction} command will produce output like 1 -Introduction while \subsection{Discussion} will produce output -like Discussion, without the number. &latex;&textrsquo;s default -secnumdepth is 3 in article class and  2 in the -book and report classes. - -tocdepthtocdepth -tocdepth counter -table of contents, sectioning numbers printed +Controls which sectioning unit are numbered. Setting the counter with +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} will suppress +numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than level +(\setcounter). See the above table for the level numbers. +For instance, if the secnumdepth is 1 in an article then +a \section{Introduction} command will produce output like +1 Introduction while \subsection{Discussion} will +produce output like Discussion, without the number. &latex;&textrsquo;s +default secnumdepth is 3 in article class and + 2 in the book and report classes. + +tocdepthtocdepth +tocdepth counter +table of contents, sectioning numbers printed sectioning tocdepth Sectioning/tocdepth Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of contents. @@ -2654,7 +3434,7 @@ sectioning units at level be the smallest ones listed (\setcounter). See the above table for the level numbers. For instance, if tocdepth is 1 then the table of contents will list sections but not subsections. &latex;&textrsquo;s default -secnumdepth is 3 in article class and  2 in the +tocdepth is 3 in article class and  2 in the book and report classes. @@ -2667,16 +3447,16 @@ list sections but not subsections. &latex;&textrsquo;s default \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph
Lower divisions.
 
\appendix
Start appendices.
 
\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter
The three parts of a book.
-
\&arobase;startsection
Layout of sectional units.
+
\&arobase;startsection
Sectional unit headings.
 
\part\chapterSectioning
\part -\part -part -sectioning, part +\part +part +sectioning, part Synopsis, one of: @@ -2726,17 +3506,17 @@ out the break in the table of contents. For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in the table of contents, the level number of a part is -1 -(Sectioning/secnumdepth and Sectioning/tocdepth). +(Sectioning/secnumdepth, and Sectioning/tocdepth). -package, indentfirst -indentfirst package +package, indentfirst +indentfirst package In the class article, if a paragraph immediately follows the part title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package indentfirst. -package, titlesec -titlesec package +package, titlesec +titlesec package One package to change the behavior of \part is titlesec. See its documentation on CTAN. @@ -2746,8 +3526,8 @@ See its documentation on CTAN. \chapter\section\partSectioning
\chapter -\chapter -chapter +\chapter +chapter Synopsis, one of: @@ -2807,15 +3587,15 @@ the title but that doesn&textrsquo;t work well with running headers so it omits the break in the contents -
\chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
+
\chapter[Given it all; my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
 
For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is 0 (Sectioning/secnumdepth and Sectioning/tocdepth). -package, indentfirst -indentfirst package +package, indentfirst +indentfirst package The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package @@ -2832,10 +3612,10 @@ something like Lecture 1, put in the preamble either \makeatother
-package, babel -babel package +package, babel +babel package - To make this change because of the primary language for +To make this change because of the primary language for the document, see the package babel. In a two-sided document &latex; puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if @@ -2843,8 +3623,8 @@ necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any running headers. To make that page completely blank, see \clearpage & \cleardoublepage. -package, titlesec -titlesec package +package, titlesec +titlesec package To change the behavior of the \chapter command, you can copy its definition from the &latex; format file and make adjustments. But @@ -2871,8 +3651,8 @@ running headers. \section\subsection\chapterSectioning
\section -\section -section +\section +section Synopsis, one of: @@ -2940,15 +3720,15 @@ so it is omitted from the contents and headers. the table of contents, the level number of a section is 1 (Sectioning/secnumdepth and Sectioning/tocdepth). -package, indentfirst -indentfirst package +package, indentfirst +indentfirst package The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the package indentfirst. -package, titlesec -titlesec package +package, titlesec +titlesec package In general, to change the behavior of the \section command, there are a number of options. One is the \&arobase;startsection command @@ -2976,8 +3756,8 @@ example below gives a sense of what they can do. \subsection\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph\sectionSectioning
\subsection -\subsection -subsection +\subsection +subsection Synopsis, one of: @@ -3009,13 +3789,13 @@ holds in article except that there are no chapters in that class so it looks like 2.3 title. The * form shows title. -But it does not show the section number, does not increment the -section counter, and produces no table of contents entry. +But it does not show the subsection number, does not increment the +subsection counter, and produces no table of contents entry. -The optional argument toc-title will appear as the section title +The optional argument toc-title will appear as the subsection title in the table of contents (Table of contents etc.). If it is -not present then title will be there. This shows the full name in -the title of the section, +not present then title will be there. This shows the full text in +the title of the subsection,
\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
@@ -3030,15 +3810,15 @@ paper on the contents page.
 the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is 2
 (Sectioning/secnumdepth and Sectioning/tocdepth).
 
-package, indentfirst
-indentfirst package
+package, indentfirst
+indentfirst package
 
 The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as is a
 standard typographical practice.  One way to get an indent is to use the
 package indentfirst.
 
-package, titlesec
-titlesec package
+package, titlesec
+titlesec package
 
 There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
 \subsection command.  One is the \&arobase;startsection command
@@ -3065,12 +3845,12 @@ text.
 
 
\subsubsection, \paragraph, \subparagraph -\subsubsection -subsubsection -\paragraph -paragraph -\subparagraph -subparagraph +\subsubsection +subsubsection +\paragraph +paragraph +\subparagraph +subparagraph Synopsis, one of: @@ -3136,15 +3916,15 @@ the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is 3, of a paragraph is 4, and of a subparagraph is 5 (Sectioning/secnumdepth and Sectioning/tocdepth). -package, indentfirst -indentfirst package +package, indentfirst +indentfirst package The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented, as is a standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the package indentfirst. -package, titlesec -titlesec package +package, titlesec +titlesec package There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these commands. One is the \&arobase;startsection command (\&arobase;startsection). @@ -3157,9 +3937,9 @@ There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
\appendix -\appendix -appendix -appendices +\appendix +appendix +appendices Synopsis: @@ -3188,39 +3968,46 @@ book or report, and in an article resets the section and the first two will generate output numbered Chapter 1 and Chapter 2. After the \appendix the numbering will be -Appendix A and Appendix B. Larger book template +Appendix A and Appendix B. Larger book template, for another example. -package, appendix -appendix package - The appendix package adds the command +package, appendix +appendix package + +The appendix package adds the command \appendixpage to put a separate Appendices in the document body before the first appendix, and the command \addappheadtotoc to do the same in the table of contents. You can reset the name -Appendix with a command like +Appendices with a command like \renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}, as well as a number of other features. See the documentation on CTAN.
\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter\&arobase;startsection\appendixSectioning -
\frontmatter, \mainmatter, \backmatter -\frontmatter -book, front matter -\mainmatter -book, main matter -\backmatter -book, back matter -book, end matter +\frontmatter +book, front matter +front matter of a book +\mainmatter +book, main matter +main matter of a book +\backmatter +book, back matter +book, end matter +back matter of a book +end matter of a book -Synopsis, one of: +Synopsis, one or more of:
\frontmatter
+...
 \mainmatter
+...
 \backmatter
+...
 
Format a book class document differently according to which part @@ -3233,22 +4020,26 @@ pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not numbered.) The back matter may contain such things as a glossary, notes, a bibliography, and an index. -The \frontmatter declaration makes the pages numbered in -lowercase roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each -chapter&textrsquo;s title appears in the table of contents; if you use other -sectioning commands here, use the *-version (Sectioning). -The \mainmatter changes the behavior back to the expected -version, and resets the page number. The \backmatter leaves the -page numbering alone but switches the chapters back to being not -numbered. Larger book template for an example using the three. +The \frontmatter command makes the pages numbered in lowercase +roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each chapter&textrsquo;s title +appears in the table of contents; if you use other sectioning commands +here, use the *-version (Sectioning). + +The \mainmatter command changes the behavior back to the expected +version, and resets the page number. + +The \backmatter command leaves the page numbering alone but +switches the chapters back to being not numbered. + +Larger book template, for an example using these three commands.
\&arobase;startsection\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatterSectioning -
\&arobase;startsection +
\&arobase;startsection, typesetting sectional unit headings -\&arobase;startsection -section, redefining +\&arobase;startsection +section, redefining Synopsis: @@ -3291,12 +4082,13 @@ make such a command you may want to use the \secdef command.
-redefines \section to have the form -\section*[toctitle]{title} (here too, the -star * is optional). Sectioning. This implies that -when you write a command like \renewcommand{section}{...}, -the \&arobase;startsection{...} must come last in the definition. See -the examples below. +redefines \section while keeping its standard calling form +\section*[toctitle]{title} (in which, for reminder, +the star * is optional). Sectioning. This implies +that when you write a command like +\renewcommand{\section}{...}, the +\&arobase;startsection{...} must come last in the definition. See the +examples below.
@@ -3317,7 +4109,7 @@ example below. startsection level \&arobase;startsection/level An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command. -Sectioning for the list of standard level numbers. +Sectioning, for the list of standard level numbers. If level is less than or equal to the value of the counter secnumdepth then titles for this sectioning command will be @@ -3346,7 +4138,7 @@ the title into the left margin. \&arobase;startsection/beforeskip The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that is inserted before this sectioning unit&textrsquo;s title. This space will be -discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the top of a fresh +discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the beginning of a page. If this number is negative then the first paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the negative of 1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt @@ -3409,20 +4201,31 @@ produce titles that are bold and uppercase. These are &latex;&textrsquo;s defaults for the first three sectioning units that are defined with \&arobase;startsection, for the article, -book, and report classes. For section, the level is -1, the indent is 0pt, the beforeskip is -3.5ex -plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the afterskip is 2.3ex plus 0.2ex, -and the style is \normalfont\Large\bfseries. For -subsection, the level is 2, the indent is 0pt, the -beforeskip is -3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the -afterskip is 1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and the style is -\normalfont\large\bfseries. For subsubsection, the level -is 3, the indent is 0pt, the beforeskip is --3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the afterskip is -1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and the style is -\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries. +book, and report classes. + + + +For section: level is 1, indent is 0pt, +beforeskip is -3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, +afterskip is 2.3ex plus 0.2ex, and style is +\normalfont\Large\bfseries. -Here are examples. They go either in a package or class file or in the + +For subsection: level is 2, indent is 0pt, +beforeskip is -3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, +afterskip is 1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and style is +\normalfont\large\bfseries. + + + +For subsubsection: level is 3, indent is 0pt, +beforeskip is -3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, +afterskip is 1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and style is +\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries. + + + +Some examples follow. These go either in a package or class file or in the preamble of a &latex; document. If you put them in the preamble they must go between a \makeatletter command and a \makeatother. (Probably the error message You can't use @@ -3486,9 +4289,9 @@ display that counter. Cross referencesEnvironmentsSectioningTop Cross references -cross references +cross references -label +label We often want something like See Theorem~31. But by-hand typing the 31 is poor practice. Instead you should write a label such as \label{eq:GreensThm} and then reference it, as with @@ -3512,8 +4315,8 @@ the \label. So if \label is in calculus.texcalculus.aux. &latex; puts the information in that file every time it runs across a \label. -forward reference -reference, forward +forward reference +reference, forward The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that happens when your document has a forward reference, a \ref that appears before the associated \label. If this is the first @@ -3525,8 +4328,8 @@ change some things so the references changes; you get the same warning and the output contains the old reference information. In both cases, resolve this by compiling the document a second time. -package, cleveref -cleveref package +package, cleveref +cleveref package The cleveref package enhances &latex;&textrsquo;s cross referencing features. You can arrange that if you enter \begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm} then @@ -3537,13 +4340,14 @@ having to enter the &textldquo;Theorem.&textrdquo; \label
Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
 
\pageref
Refer to a page number.
 
\ref
Refer to a section, figure or similar.
+
xr package
References from another document.
 
\label\pagerefCross references
\label -\label +\label Synopsis: @@ -3615,9 +4419,9 @@ See Figure~\ref{fig:test}. \pageref\ref\labelCross references
\pageref -\pageref -cross referencing with page number -page number, cross referencing +\pageref +cross referencing with page number +page number, cross referencing Synopsis: @@ -3647,15 +4451,15 @@ those.)
-\ref\pagerefCross references +\refxr package\pagerefCross references
\ref -\ref -cross referencing, symbolic -section number, cross referencing -equation number, cross referencing -figure number, cross referencing -footnote number, cross referencing +\ref +cross referencing, symbolic +section number, cross referencing +equation number, cross referencing +figure number, cross referencing +footnote number, cross referencing Synopsis: @@ -3685,21 +4489,97 @@ so this document would have to be compiled twice. \end{enumerate} -package, cleveref -cleveref package +package, cleveref +cleveref package The cleveref package includes text such as Theorem in the reference. See the documentation on CTAN. +
+xr package\refCross references +
xr package + +xr package +xr-hyper package +\externaldocument +cross referencing, across documents + +Synopsis: + + +
\usepackage{xr}
+  \externaldocument{document-basename}
+
+ +or + + +
\usepackage{xr}
+  \externaldocument[reference-prefix]{document-basename}
+
+ +Make cross references to the external document +document-basename.tex. + +Here is an example. If lectures.tex has this in the preamble + + +
\usepackage{xr}
+  \externaldocument{exercises}
+  \externaldocument[H-]{hints} 
+  \externaldocument{answers}
+
+ +then it can use cross reference labels from the other three documents. +Suppose that exercises.tex has an enumerated list containing +this, + + +
\item \label{exer:EulersThm} What if every vertex has odd degree?
+
+ +and hints.tex has an enumerated list with this, + + +
\item \label{exer:EulersThm} Distinguish the case of two vertices.
+
+ +and answers.tex has an enumerated list with this. + + +
\item \label{ans:EulersThm} There is no Euler path, except if there
+  are exactly two vertices.
+
+ +After compiling the exercises, hints, and answers documents, entering +this in the body of lectures.tex will result in the lectures +getting the reference numbers used in the other documents. + + +
See Exercise~\ref{exer:EulersThm}, with Hint~\ref{H-exer:EulersThm}.
+The solution is Answer~\ref{ans:EulersThm}.
+
+ +The prefix H- for the reference from the hints file is needed +because the label in the hints file is the same as the label in the +exercises file. Without that prefix, both references would get the +number from the later file. + +Note: if the document uses the hyperref package then in place of +xr, put \usepackage{xr-hyper} before the +\usepackage{hyperref}. Also, if any of the multiple documents +uses hyperref then they all must use it. + +
EnvironmentsLine breakingCross referencesTop Environments -environments -\begin -\end +environments +\begin +\end &latex; provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior. An environment begins with \begin and ends with \end, @@ -3717,7 +4597,7 @@ the end. For instance, the input ! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by \end{table}. -group, and environments +group, and environments Environments are executed within a group. @@ -3755,10 +4635,10 @@ the end. For instance, the input abstractarrayEnvironments
abstract -environment, abstract -abstract environment +environment, abstract +abstract environment -abstracts +abstracts Synopsis: @@ -3785,6 +4665,9 @@ default only in the report class. \end{abstract} +package, abstract +abstract package + The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column document (for a more flexible solution, use the package abstract). @@ -3815,10 +4698,10 @@ a more flexible solution, use the package abstract). arraycenterabstractEnvironments
array -environment, array -array environment +environment, array +array environment -arrays, math +arrays, math Synopsis: @@ -3875,13 +4758,13 @@ the column with p{...}, which causes the entry to be text mode. The second is that, instead of tabular&textrsquo;s parameter \tabcolsep, &latex;&textrsquo;s intercolumn space in an array is governed by -\arraycolsep +\arraycolsep \arraycolsep, which gives half the width between columns. The default for this is 5pt so that between two columns comes 10pt of space. -package, amsmath -amsmath package +package, amsmath +amsmath package To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the amsmath package. It comes with environments pmatrix for an array @@ -3892,8 +4775,8 @@ an array surrounded by vertical bars |...|, and Vmatrix for an array surrounded by double vertical bars ||...||, along with a number of other array constructs. -package, amsmath -amsmath package +package, amsmath +amsmath package The next example uses the amsmath package. @@ -3908,11 +4791,11 @@ bars ||...||, along with a number of other array constructs. \end{equation} -package, array (package) -array (package) package +package, array (package) +array (package) package -package, dcolumn -dcolumn package +package, dcolumn +dcolumn package There are many packages concerning arrays. The array package has many useful extensions, including more column types. The dcolumn @@ -3924,10 +4807,10 @@ the documentation on CTAN. centerdescriptionarrayEnvironments
center -environment, center -center environment +environment, center +center environment -centering text, environment for +centering text, environment for Synopsis: @@ -3942,7 +4825,7 @@ the documentation on CTAN. Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are centered within the left and right margins. Use double-backslash, \\, to get a line break (\\). -\\ (for center) +\\ (for center) If some text is too long to fit on a line then &latex; will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any interword space. @@ -3972,7 +4855,7 @@ ending.
\begin{center}
   My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink 
   alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\ 
-  I grew up in that belief.  --Richard Burton 
+  I grew up in that belief.  ---Richard Burton 
 \end{center}
 
@@ -3990,8 +4873,8 @@ entire page. \centeringcenter \centering -\centering -centering text, declaration for +\centering +centering text, declaration for Synopsis: @@ -4048,11 +4931,11 @@ centered lines xx and yy, followed by a new paragraph descriptiondisplaymathcenterEnvironments
description -environment, description -description environment +environment, description +description environment -labelled lists, creating -description lists, creating +labelled lists, creating +description lists, creating Synopsis: @@ -4073,24 +4956,24 @@ missing \item. This example shows the environment used for a sequence of definitions. -
\begin{definition}
+
\begin{description}
   \item[lama] A priest.
   \item[llama] A beast.
-\end{definition}
+\end{description}
 
The labels lama and llama are output in boldface, with the left edge on the left margin. -\item +\item Start list items with the \item command (\item). Use the optional labels, as in \item[Main point], because there is no sensible default. Following the \item is optional text, which may contain multiple paragraphs. -bold typewriter, avoiding -typewriter labels in lists +bold typewriter, avoiding +typewriter labels in lists Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a font change given in argument style (see Font styles) then it will come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with @@ -4123,8 +5006,8 @@ lists.
displaymath -environment, displaymath -displaymath environment +environment, displaymath +displaymath environment Synopsis: @@ -4135,9 +5018,9 @@ lists. \end{displaymath}
-Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display style -and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global option -fleqn; see Document class options. +Environment to typeset the mathematical text on its own line, in +display style and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the +global option fleqn; see Document class options. In the displaymath environment no equation number is added to the math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the @@ -4145,25 +5028,27 @@ math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the &latex; will not break the math text across lines. -package, amsmath -amsmath package +package, amsmath +amsmath package Note that the amsmath package has significantly more extensive displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of ways in that package for having math text broken across lines. -The construct \[math text\] is essentially a synonym for -\begin{displaymath}math text\end{displaymath} but the -latter is easier to work with in the source file; for instance, +\[...\] display math +The construct \[math\] is a synonym for the environment +\begin{displaymath} math \end{displaymath} but the +latter is easier to work with in the source; for instance, searching for a square bracket may get false positives but the word -displaymath will likely be unique. (The construct -$$math text$$ from Plain &tex; is sometimes -mistakenly used as a synonym for displaymath. It is not a -synonym, because the displaymath environment checks that it isn&textrsquo;t -started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching -environment start, because the displaymath environment has -different vertical spacing, and because the displaymath -environment honors the fleqn option.) +displaymath will likely be unique. + +$$...$$ plain &tex; display math +(Aside: The construct $$math$$ from Plain &tex; is +sometimes mistakenly used as a synonym for displaymath. It is +not a synonym, and is not officially supported in &latex; at all; +$$ doesn&textrsquo;t support the fleqn option (Document +class options), has different vertical spacing, and doesn&textrsquo;t perform +consistency checks.) The output from this example is centered and alone on its line. @@ -4182,8 +5067,8 @@ environment honors the fleqn option.) documentenumeratedisplaymathEnvironments
document -environment, document -document environment +environment, document +document environment The document environment encloses the entire body of a document. @@ -4198,8 +5083,8 @@ It is required in every &latex; document. \AtBeginDocument\AtEndDocumentdocument \AtBeginDocument -\AtBeginDocument -beginning of document hook +\AtBeginDocument +beginning of document hook Synopsis: @@ -4221,8 +5106,8 @@ will be executed in the order that you gave them. \AtEndDocument\AtBeginDocumentdocument \AtEndDocument -\AtEndDocument -end of document hook +\AtEndDocument +end of document hook Synopsis: @@ -4246,10 +5131,10 @@ will be executed in the order that you gave them. enumerateeqnarraydocumentEnvironments
enumerate -environment, enumerate -enumerate environment +environment, enumerate +enumerate environment -lists of items, numbered +lists of items, numbered Synopsis: @@ -4279,7 +5164,7 @@ As a top-level list the labels would come out as 1. and \end{enumerate} -\item +\item Start list items with the \item command (\item). If you give \item an optional argument by following it with square brackets, as in \item[Interstitial label], then the next item @@ -4301,10 +5186,10 @@ the outermost level. uppercase letter followed by a period: A., B., &dots; -\enumi -\enumii -\enumiii -\enumiv +\enumi +\enumii +\enumiii +\enumiv enumerate enumi enumerate enumii enumerate enumiii @@ -4318,10 +5203,10 @@ parameters, including the default values, and for information about customizing list layout, see list. The package enumitem is useful for customizing lists. -\labelenumi -\labelenumii -\labelenumiii -\labelenumiv +\labelenumi +\labelenumii +\labelenumiii +\labelenumiv enumerate labelenumi enumerate labelenumii enumerate labelenumiii @@ -4332,7 +5217,7 @@ through \labelenumiv. For instance, this first level list will be labelled with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing period. -\Alph example +\Alph example
\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\textbf{\Alph{enumi}}}
 \begin{enumerate}
@@ -4349,19 +5234,19 @@ period.
 eqnarrayequationenumerateEnvironments
 
eqnarray -environment, eqnarray -eqnarray environment +environment, eqnarray +eqnarray environment -equations, aligning -aligning equations +equations, aligning +aligning equations -align environment, from amsmath -amsmath package, replacing eqnarray -Madsen, Lars +align environment, from amsmath +amsmath package, replacing eqnarray +Madsen, Lars The eqnarray environment is obsolete. It has infelicities, including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements. (See &textldquo;Avoid eqnarray!&textrdquo;&noeos; by Lars Madsen -http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf). New documents +https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf). New documents should include the amsmath package and use the displayed mathematics environments provided there, such as the align environment. We include a description only for completeness and for @@ -4386,7 +5271,7 @@ working with old documents. \end{eqnarray*}
-\\ (for eqnarray) +\\ (for eqnarray) Display a sequence of equations or inequalities. The left and right sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text mode. @@ -4394,18 +5279,18 @@ mode. It is similar to a three-column array environment, with items within a row separated by an ampersand (&), and with rows separated by double backslash  \\). -\\* (for eqnarray) +\\* (for eqnarray) The starred form of line break (\\*) can also be used to separate equations, and will disallow a page break there (\\). -\nonumber -equation numbers, omitting +\nonumber +equation numbers, omitting The unstarred form eqnarray places an equation number on every line (using the equation counter), unless that line contains a \nonumber command. The starred form eqnarray* omits equation numbering, while otherwise being the same. -\lefteqn +\lefteqn The command \lefteqn is used for splitting long formulas across lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of zero width. @@ -4426,11 +5311,11 @@ while the third line has not entry on the left side. equationfigureeqnarrayEnvironments
equation -environment, equation -equation environment +environment, equation +equation environment -equations, environment for -formulas, environment for +equations, environment for +formulas, environment for Synopsis: @@ -4448,8 +5333,8 @@ The equation number is generated using the equation counter. \begin{equation}, or &latex; will tell you that there is a missing dollar sign. -package, amsmath -amsmath package +package, amsmath +amsmath package The package amsmath package has extensive displayed equation facilities. New documents should include this package. @@ -4459,11 +5344,11 @@ facilities. New documents should include this package. figurefilecontentsequationEnvironments
figure -environment, figure -figure environment +environment, figure +figure environment -inserting figures -figures, inserting +inserting figures +figures, inserting Synopsis: @@ -4509,7 +5394,7 @@ in Floats. The label is optional; it is used for cross references (Cross references). -\caption +\caption The optional \caption command specifies caption text for the figure. By default it is numbered. If loftitle is present, it is used in the list of figures instead of title (Table of @@ -4532,21 +5417,21 @@ end of the document, on a page of floats.
filecontentsflushleftfigureEnvironments -
filecontents: Write an external file +
filecontents -environment, filecontents -filecontents environment +environment, filecontents +filecontents environment -environment, filecontents* -filecontents* environment +environment, filecontents* +filecontents* environment -external files, writing -writing external files +external files, writing +writing external files Synopsis: -
\begin{filecontents}{filename}
+
\begin{filecontents}[option]{filename}
   text
 \end{filecontents}
 
@@ -4555,29 +5440,52 @@ end of the document, on a page of floats. or -
\begin{filecontents*}{filename}
+
\begin{filecontents*}[option]{filename}
   text
 \end{filecontents*}
 
-Create a file named filename and fill it with text. The -unstarred version of the environment filecontents prefixes the -content of the created file with a header; see the example below. The -starred version filecontents* does not include the header. +Create a file named filename in the current directory (or the +output directory, if specified; output directory) and write +text to it. By default, an existing file is not overwritten. -This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it often -appears before the \documentclass command. It is typically used -when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The -environment will write that file to the directory containing the source -and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include -bib references in the file, again to make it self-contained. +The unstarred version of the environment +filecontents prefixes the content of the created file with a +header of &tex; comments; see the example below. The starred +version filecontents* does not include the header. -The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and if -so, does not do anything. There is a filecontents package that -redefines the filecontents environment so that instead of doing -nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file. +The possible options are: -For example, this document +
+force +overwrite +force option for filecontents +overwrite option for filecontents +Overwrite an existing file. + +noheader +noheader option for filecontents +Omit the header. Equivalent to using filecontents*. + +nosearch +nosearch option for filecontents +Only check the current directory (and the output directory, if +specified) for an existing file, not the entire search path. + +
+ +These options were added in a 2019 release of &latex;. + +self-contained sources +source files, making self-contained +This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it +often appears before the \documentclass command. It is +commonly used to create a .bib or other such data file from the +main document source, to make the source file self-contained. +Similarly, it can be used to create a custom style or class file, +again making the source self-contained. + +For example, this document:
\documentclass{article}
@@ -4591,7 +5499,7 @@ Article by \myname.
 
-produces this file JH.sty. +produces this file JH.sty:
%% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
@@ -4606,11 +5514,11 @@ Article by \myname.
 flushleftflushrightfilecontentsEnvironments
 
flushleft -environment, flushleft -flushleft environment +environment, flushleft +flushleft environment -left-justifying text, environment for -ragged right text, environment for +left-justifying text, environment for +ragged right text, environment for Synopsis: @@ -4622,11 +5530,11 @@ Article by \myname. \end{flushleft}
-\\ for flushleft +\\ for flushleft An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and -stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use a double +stretching or shrinking interword spaces. To force a new line use a double backslash, \\. For the declaration form see \raggedright. @@ -4652,10 +5560,10 @@ flush left and ragged right. \raggedrightflushleft \raggedright -\raggedright -ragged right text -left-justifying text -justification, ragged right +\raggedright +ragged right text +left-justifying text +justification, ragged right Synopses: @@ -4673,7 +5581,7 @@ flush left and ragged right. A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and -ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as quote +ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a parbox. For the environment form see flushleft. @@ -4702,11 +5610,11 @@ delimit its effect. flushrightitemizeflushleftEnvironments
flushright -environment, flushright -flushright environment +environment, flushright +flushright environment -ragged left text, environment for -right-justifying text, environment for +ragged left text, environment for +right-justifying text, environment for
\begin{flushright}
@@ -4716,15 +5624,17 @@ delimit its effect.
 \end{flushright}
 
-\\ (for flushright) +\\ (for flushright) An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long to fit the margins then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that -avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new +avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking inter-word spaces. To force a new line use a double backslash, \\. For the declaration form see \raggedleft. -For an example related to this environment, see flushleft. +For an example related to this environment, see flushleft, +where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace flushleft by +flushright. \raggedleft
Declaration form of the flushright environment.
@@ -4734,10 +5644,10 @@ see \raggedleft\raggedleftflushright
 \raggedleft
 
-\raggedleft
-ragged left text
-justification, ragged left
-right-justifying text
+\raggedleft
+ragged left text
+justification, ragged left
+right-justifying text
 
 Synopses:
 
@@ -4755,7 +5665,7 @@ see \raggedleft
 
 A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
-ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as quote
+ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as quote
 or in a parbox.  For the environment form
 see flushright.
 
@@ -4765,7 +5675,9 @@ formats paragraph units.  To affect a paragraph unit&textrsquo;s format, the
 scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end
 command that ends the paragraph unit.
 
-For an example related to this environment, see \raggedright.
+For an example related to this environment, see \raggedright,
+where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace \raggedright by
+\raggedleft.
 
 
 
@@ -4773,14 +5685,14 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit.
 itemizeletterflushrightEnvironments
 
itemize -environment, itemize -itemize environment +environment, itemize +itemize environment -\item -lists of items -unordered lists -bulleted lists -bullet lists +\item +lists of items +unordered lists +bulleted lists +bullet lists Synopsis: @@ -4792,8 +5704,8 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit. \end{itemize}
-Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list. The -environment must have at least one \item; having none causes the +Produce an unordered list, sometimes called a bullet list. There +must be at least one \item within the environment; having none causes the &latex; error Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item. This gives a two-item list. @@ -4806,39 +5718,43 @@ environment must have at least one \item; having none causes the -As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, •. -The format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below. +With the default locale&textmdash;without loading e.g.&noeos; babel package +with another language than USenglish&textmdash;as a top-level list each label +would come out as a bullet, •. The format of the labeling +depends on the nesting level; see below. -\item +\item Start list items with the \item command (\item). If you give \item an optional argument by following it with square -brackets, as in \item[Optional label], then by default it will -appear in bold and be flush right, so it could extend into the left -margin. For labels that are flush left see the description -environment. Following the \item is optional text, which may -contain multiple paragraphs. +brackets, as in \item[Optional label], then by default +Optional label will appear in bold and be flush right, so it could +extend into the left margin. For labels that are flush left see the +description environment. Following the \item is the text of +the item, which may be empty or contain multiple paragraphs. + +Unordered lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. +They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such +as enumerate (enumerate). -\labelitemi -\labelitemii -\labelitemiii -\labelitemiv +\labelitemi +\labelitemii +\labelitemiii +\labelitemiv itemize labelitemi itemize labelitemii itemize labelitemiii itemize labelitemiv -Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. -They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such -as enumerate (enumerate). The itemize environment -uses the commands \labelitemi through \labelitemiv to -produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase -roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting -level). These are the default marks at each level. +The itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi +through \labelitemiv to produce the default label (note the +convention of lowercase roman numerals at the end of the command names +that signify the nesting level). These are the default marks at each +level. • (bullet, from \textbullet) -- (bold en-dash, from \normalfont\bfseries\textendash) * (asterisk, from \textasteriskcentered) -. (centered dot, rendered here as a period, from \textperiodcentered) +. (vertically centered dot, rendered here as a period, from \textperiodcentered) Change the labels with \renewcommand. For instance, this makes @@ -4848,13 +5764,13 @@ the first level use diamonds.
\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
 
-\leftmargin -\leftmargini -\leftmarginii -\leftmarginiii -\leftmarginiv -\leftmarginv -\leftmarginvi +\leftmargin +\leftmargini +\leftmarginii +\leftmarginiii +\leftmarginiv +\leftmarginv +\leftmarginvi itemize leftmargin itemize leftmargini itemize leftmarginii @@ -4864,18 +5780,22 @@ the first level use diamonds. itemize leftmarginvi The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the left margin of the itemize list is determined by the -parameters \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi. (Note the -convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command -name to denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: 2.5em in -level 1 (2em in two-column mode), 2.2em in level 2, -1.87em in level 3, and 1.7em in level 4, with smaller -values for more deeply nested levels. +parameters \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi. (This also +uses the convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the +command name to denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: +2.5em in level 1 (2em in two-column mode), 2.2em in +level 2, 1.87em in level 3, and 1.7em in level 4, with +smaller values for more deeply nested levels. +package, enumitem +enumitem package + For other major &latex; labeled list environments, see -description and enumerate. For information about list -layout parameters, including the default values, and for information -about customizing list layout, see list. The package -enumitem is useful for customizing lists. +description and enumerate. The itemize, +enumerate and description environment use the same list +layout parameters. For a description, including the default values, and +for information about customizing list layout, see list. The +package enumitem is useful for customizing lists. This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized lists. @@ -4884,7 +5804,7 @@ lists.
\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
 
-\parskip example +\parskip example Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize* environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs @@ -4905,8 +5825,8 @@ within a single item (\parskip is not list-specific, letterlistitemizeEnvironments
letter environment: writing letters -environment, letter -letter environment +environment, letter +letter environment This environment is used for creating letters. Letters. @@ -4916,10 +5836,10 @@ within a single item (\parskip is not list-specific, listmathletterEnvironments
list -environment, list -list environment +environment, list +list environment -lists of items, generic +lists of items, generic Synopsis: @@ -4966,11 +5886,11 @@ environment. The mandatory first argument labeling specifies the default labeling of list items. It can contain text and &latex; commands, as -above where it contains both Item and \Roman{...}. +above where it contains both Item and \Roman{&dots;}. &latex; forms the label by putting the labeling argument in a box of width \labelwidth. If the label is wider than that, the additional material extends to the right. When making an instance of a -list you can override the default labeling by giving \item an +list you can override the default labeling by giving \item an optional argument by including square braces and the text, as in the above \item[Special label.]; \item. @@ -4982,7 +5902,7 @@ counter will be reset to zero each time &latex; enters the environment, and the counter is incremented by one each time &latex; encounters an \item that does not have an optional argument. -\makelabel +\makelabel list makelabel Another command that can go in spacing is \makelabel, which constructs the label box. By default it puts the contents flush right. Its only argument is the label, which it @@ -4992,7 +5912,7 @@ definition of the environment add \newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}, and between the \setlength command and the parenthesis that closes the spacing argument also add \let\makelabel\namedmakelabel. -Then the items will be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the +Then the labels will be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the second code line to \let\makelabel\fbox puts the labels inside a framed box. Another example of the \makelabel command is below, in the definition of the redlabel environment. @@ -5008,12 +5928,12 @@ command such as \setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus For some effects these lengths should be zero or negative. -\itemindent\itemindent +\itemindent\itemindent list itemindent Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond leftmargin, of the first line each item. Its default value is 0pt. -\itemsep\itemsep +\itemsep\itemsep list itemsep Vertical space between items, beyond the \parsep. The defaults for the first three levels in &latex;&textrsquo;s article, book, @@ -5021,18 +5941,18 @@ and report classes at 10 point size are: 4pt plus2pt minus1pt, \parsep (that is, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt), and \topsep (that is, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt). The defaults at 11 point are: 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt, \parsep (that is, -2pt plus1pt minus1pt), and topsep (that is, 2pt +2pt plus1pt minus1pt), and \topsep (that is, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt). The defaults at 12 point are: 5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt, \parsep (that is, 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt), and \topsep (that is, 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt). -\labelsep\labelsep +\labelsep\labelsep list labelsep Horizontal space between the label and text of an item. The default for &latex;&textrsquo;s article, book, and report classes is 0.5em. -\labelwidth\labelwidth +\labelwidth\labelwidth list labelwidth Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this wide. If \makelabel returns text that is wider than this then the first @@ -5054,7 +5974,7 @@ mode and 1.5em in two column mode). At the second level it is label&textrsquo;s left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing environment. -\leftmargin\leftmargin +\leftmargin\leftmargin list leftmargin Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment (or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level list), and the @@ -5072,25 +5992,24 @@ error message Too deeply nested.) 2.5em (in two column mode, 2em), \leftmarginii is 2.2em, and \leftmarginiii is 1.87em. -\listparindent\listparindent +\listparindent\listparindent list listparindent Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond \leftmargin, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list item. A negative value makes this an &textldquo;outdent&textrdquo;. Its default value is 0pt. -\parsep\parsep -list parsep -Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the book -and article classes The defaults for the first three levels in -&latex;&textrsquo;s article, book, and report classes at 10 -point size are: 4pt plus2pt minus1pt, 2pt plus1pt -minus1pt, and 0pt. The defaults at 11 point size are: -4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt, and -0pt. The defaults at 12 point size are: 5pt plus2.5pt -minus1pt, 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt, and 0pt. - -\partopsep\partopsep +\parsep\parsep +list parsep Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. +The defaults for the first three levels in &latex;&textrsquo;s article, +book, and report classes at 10 point size are: 4pt +plus2pt minus1pt, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt, and 0pt. The +defaults at 11 point size are: 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt, +2pt plus1pt minus1pt, and 0pt. The defaults at 12 point +size are: 5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt, 2.5pt plus1pt +minus1pt, and 0pt. + +\partopsep\partopsep list partopsep Vertical space added, beyond \topsep+\parskip, to the top and bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded by @@ -5106,13 +6025,13 @@ minus1pt. The defaults at 11 point are: 3pt plus1pt minus1pt3pt plus2pt minus3pt, 3pt plus2pt minus2pt, and 1pt plus0pt minus1pt. -\rightmargin\rightmargin +\rightmargin\rightmargin list rightmargin Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is 0pt. It must be non-negative. -\topsep\topsep +\topsep\topsep list topsep Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition to \parskip (\parindent & \parskip). The defaults for @@ -5191,22 +6110,22 @@ e.g., \&arobase;beginparpenalty=9999; a value of 10000 prohibits a page break. -\&arobase;beginparpenalty\&arobase;beginparpenalty +\&arobase;beginparpenalty\&arobase;beginparpenalty list beginparpenalty The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default -51). -\&arobase;itempenalty\&arobase;itempenalty +\&arobase;itempenalty\&arobase;itempenalty list itempenalty The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default -51). -\&arobase;endparpenalty\&arobase;endparpenalty +\&arobase;endparpenalty\&arobase;endparpenalty list endparpenalty The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default -51). -package, enumitem -enumitem package +package, enumitem +enumitem package The package enumitem is useful for customizing lists. @@ -5229,7 +6148,7 @@ edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text. \let\makelabel=\makeredlabel } } -{\end{list} } +{\end{list}} @@ -5258,7 +6177,7 @@ edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text. depends on the list type. Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets -[...], if you have an item whose text starts with [, you +[...], if you have an item whose text starts with [, you have to hide the bracket inside curly braces, as in: \item {[} is an open square bracket; otherwise, &latex; will think it marks the start of an optional label. @@ -5300,7 +6219,7 @@ labelled 3.. A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are not indented and an \item without an optional argument produces no text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where -the \item command as part of the environment&textrsquo;s definition. For +the \item command is part of the environment&textrsquo;s definition. For instance, the center environment is defined essentially like this: @@ -5338,10 +6257,10 @@ default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated. mathminipagelistEnvironments
math -environment, math -math environment +environment, math +math environment -in-line formulas +inline formulas Synopsis: @@ -5351,6 +6270,8 @@ default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated. \end{math} +$ inline math +\(...\) inline math The math environment inserts given math material within the running text. \(...\) and $...$ are synonyms. Math formulas. @@ -5360,10 +6281,10 @@ the running text. \(...\) and $...$ are synonyms. minipagepicturemathEnvironments
minipage -environment, minipage -minipage environment +environment, minipage +minipage environment -minipage, creating a +minipage, creating a Synopses: @@ -5411,25 +6332,31 @@ It gives the width of the box into which contents are typeset. There are three optional arguments, position, height, and inner-pos. You need not include all three. For example, get the default position and set the height with -\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] contents \end{minipage}. -(Get the natural height with an empty argument, [].) +\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm]{\columnwidth} contents +\end{minipage}. (Get the natural height with an empty argument, +[].) The optional argument position governs how the minipage vertically aligns with the surrounding material. c -(synonym m) Default. Positions the minipage so its -vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what -Plain &tex; calls \vcenter). + + +(synonym m) Default. Positions the minipage so its +vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line. t -Match the top line in the minipage with the baseline of the -surrounding text (Plain &tex;&textrsquo;s \vtop. +\vtop plain &tex; + + +Match the top line in the minipage with the baseline of the +surrounding text (plain &tex;&textrsquo;s \vtop). b -Match the bottom line in the minipage with the baseline of the -surrounding text (Plain &tex;&textrsquo;s \vbox. +\vbox plain &tex; +Match the bottom line in the minipage with the baseline of the +surrounding text (plain &tex;&textrsquo;s \vbox).
To see the effects of these, contrast running this @@ -5443,6 +6370,8 @@ surrounding text (Plain &tex;&textrsquo;s \vbox. with the results of changing c to b or t. + + The optional argument height is a rigid length (Lengths). It sets the height of the minipage. You can enter any value larger than, or equal to, or smaller than the minipage&textrsquo;s natural @@ -5450,12 +6379,12 @@ height and &latex; will not give an error or warning. You can also set it to a height of zero or a negative value. The final optional argument inner-pos controls the placement of -content inside the box. These are the possible values are (the +contents inside the box. These are the possible values are (the default is the value of position). t -Place content at the top of the box. +Place contents at the top of the box. c Place it in the vertical center. @@ -5484,15 +6413,15 @@ in place of b. Text after -indentation of paragraphs, in minipage -paragraph indentation, in minipage -\parindent +indentation of paragraphs, in minipage +paragraph indentation, in minipage +\parindent By default paragraphs are not indented in a minipage. Change that with a command such as \setlength{\parindent}{1pc} at the start of contents. -footnotes in figures -figures, footnotes in +footnotes in figures +figures, footnotes in Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A \footnote or \footnotetext command puts the footnote at @@ -5525,20 +6454,30 @@ Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic. They are vertically centered. +package, siunitx +siunitx package + -
\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{&arobase;{}c&arobase;{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+
% siunitx to have the S column specifier,
+% which aligns numbers on their decimal point.
+\usepackage{siunitx}
+\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{&arobase;{}c&arobase;{}}#1\end{tabular}}
   ...
 \begin{center}
   \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}}
   \hspace{0.1\textwidth}
   \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
-    \begin{tabular}{r|l}
-      \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &Pop (million)  \\ \hline
-      The Bronx      &$1.5$  \\
-      Brooklyn       &$2.6$  \\
-      Manhattan      &$1.6$  \\
-      Queens         &$2.3$  \\
-      Staten Island  &$0.5$  
+    \begin{tabular}{r|S}
+      % \multicolumn to remove vertical bar between column headers
+      \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &
+      % braces to prevent siunitx from misinterpreting the
+      % period as a decimal separator
+      {Pop. (million)}  \\ \hline
+      The Bronx      &1.5  \\
+      Brooklyn       &2.6  \\
+      Manhattan      &1.6  \\
+      Queens         &2.3  \\
+      Staten Island  &0.5  
     \end{tabular}
   \end{minipage}              
 \end{center}
@@ -5549,16 +6488,16 @@ are vertically centered.
 picturequotation & quoteminipageEnvironments
 
picture -environment, picture -picture environment +environment, picture +picture environment -creating pictures -pictures, creating +creating pictures +pictures, creating Synopses:
\begin{picture}(width,height)
-   picture commands 
+   picture command
 \end{picture}
 
@@ -5567,19 +6506,22 @@ are vertically centered.
\begin{picture}(width,height)(xoffset,yoffset)
-  picture commands
+  picture command
 \end{picture}
 
+ +Where there may be any number of picture command&textrsquo;s. + An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows, -boxes, circles, and text. Note that while this environment is not -obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics -creation systems, such as TikZ, PSTricks, MetaPost, -or Asymptote. These are not covered in this document; see CTAN. +boxes, circles, and text. This environment is not obsolete, but new +documents typically use much more powerful graphics creation systems, +such as TikZ, PSTricks, MetaPost, or Asymptote. None of these are +covered in this document; see CTAN. -This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors. +To start, here&textrsquo;s an example showing the parallelogram law for adding vectors. -\unitlength +\unitlength
\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
 \begin{picture}(6,6)      % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
@@ -5587,45 +6529,25 @@ or Asymptote.  These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
     \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}}
   \put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}}
     \put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}}  
-  \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}}
+  \put(0,0){\vector(1,1){6}}
     \put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }}  
 \end{picture}
 
-You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an -exact location. - - -
\usepackage{color,graphicx}  % in preamble
-  ...
-\begin{center}
-\setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth} 
-\begin{picture}(1,1)      % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
-  \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
-  \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
-\end{picture}
-\end{center}
-
- - -The red X will be precisely a quarter of the \linewidth from -the left margin, and 0.35\linewidth up from the bottom. Another -example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get -repeat material on each of a document&textrsquo;s pages. - The picture environment has one required argument, a pair of -numbers (width,height). Multiply these by the value -\unitlength to get the nominal size of the output, the space that -&latex; reserves on the output page. This nominal size need not be how -large the picture really is; &latex; will draw things from the picture -outside the picture&textrsquo;s box. +positive real numbers (width,height). Multiply these by the +value \unitlength to get the nominal size of the output, i.e.&noeos; +the space that &latex; reserves on the output page. This nominal size +need not be how large the picture really is; &latex; will draw things +from the picture outside the picture&textrsquo;s box. This environment also has an optional argument (xoffset,yoffset). It is used to shift the origin. Unlike most optional arguments, this one is not contained in square brackets. -As with the required argument, it consists of two real numbers. -Multiply these by \unitlength to get the point at the lower-left -corner of the picture. +As with the required argument, it consists of a pair of two real +numbers, but these may also be negative or null. Multiply these +by \unitlength to get the coordinates of the point at the +lower-left corner of the picture. For example, if \unitlength has been set to 1mm, the command @@ -5643,26 +6565,29 @@ the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate optional argument. -position, in picture +position, in picture Each picture command tells &latex; where to put something by -naming its position. A position is a pair such as (2.4,-5) +providing its position. A position is a pair such as (2.4,-5) giving the x- and y-coordinates. A coordinate is a not a length, it is a real number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It specifies a length in multiples of the unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate -2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters. +2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters. -&latex;&textrsquo;s default for \unitlength is 1pt. it is a rigid +&latex;&textrsquo;s default for \unitlength is 1pt. It is a rigid length (Lengths). Change it with the \setlength command (\setlength). Make this change only outside of a picture environment. -Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at +The picture environment supports using standard arithmetic +expressions as well as numbers. + +Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is by default at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears as an argument, as with \put(1,2){...}, it is not enclosed in braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also, unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are -further up the page. +further up the page, for example, y = 1 is above y = 0. There are four ways to put things in a picture: \put, \multiput, \qbezier, and \graphpaper. The most @@ -5676,7 +6601,7 @@ often used is \put. This places the object with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-0.3). The reference points for various objects will be described below. -LR box +LR box The \put command creates an LR box (Modes). Anything that can go in an \mbox (\mbox & \makebox) can go in the text argument of the \put command. The reference point @@ -5699,27 +6624,31 @@ line of length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of The \multiput, qbezier, and graphpaper commands are described below. -This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using \qbezier for -that curve. +You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an +exact location. For example: -
\begin{picture}(3,1.5)
-  \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}}  % x axis
-  \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}}  % y axis
-  \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}}       % left side rectangle
-  \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}}     % right side
-  \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
-    \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
-  \thicklines                 % below here, lines are twice as thick
-  \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
-  \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+
\usepackage{color,graphicx}  % in preamble
+  ...
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth} 
+\begin{picture}(1,1)      % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+  \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
+  \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
 \end{picture}
+\end{center}
 
+ +The red X will be precisely a quarter of the \textwidth from +the left margin, and 0.35\textwidth up from the bottom of the +picture. Another example of this usage is to put similar code in the +page header to get repeat material on each of a document&textrsquo;s pages. + \put
Place an object at a specified place.
 
\multiput
Draw multiple instances of an object.
-
\qbezier
Draw a quadratic Bezier curve.
+
\qbezier
Draw a quadratic Bezier curve.
 
\graphpaper
Draw graph paper.
 
\line
Draw a straight line.
 
\linethickness
Set thickness of horizontal and vertical lines.
@@ -5739,7 +6668,7 @@ that curve.
 \put\multiputpicture
 \put
 
-\put
+\put
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -5766,7 +6695,7 @@ text, at the bottom left of the A.
 \multiput\qbezier\putpicture
 \multiput
 
-\multiput
+\multiput
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -5797,7 +6726,7 @@ text, at the bottom left of the A.
 \qbezier\graphpaper\multiputpicture
 \qbezier
 
-\qbezier
+\qbezier
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -5828,12 +6757,28 @@ intermediate points.  The default is to draw a smooth curve whose
 maximum number of points is \qbeziermax (change this value with
 \renewcommand).
 
+This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using \qbezier for
+that curve.
+
+
+
\begin{picture}(8,4)
+  \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}}  % x axis
+  \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}}  % y axis
+  \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}}       % left side
+  \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}}     % right side
+  \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+    \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+  \thicklines                 % below here, lines are twice as thick
+  \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
+  \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+\end{picture}
+
\graphpaper\line\qbezierpicture \graphpaper -\graphpaper +\graphpaper Synopsis: @@ -5841,7 +6786,10 @@ maximum number of points is \qbeziermax (change this value with \graphpaper[spacing](x_init,y_init)(x_dimen,y_dimen)
-Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the graphpap package. +package, graphpap +graphpap package + +Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the graphpap package. The grid&textrsquo;s origin is (x_init,y_init). Grid lines come every spacing units (the default is 10). The grid extends x_dimen units to the right and y_dimen units up. @@ -5865,7 +6813,7 @@ All arguments must be positive integers. \line\linethickness\graphpaperpicture \line -\line +\line Synopsis: @@ -5875,7 +6823,7 @@ All arguments must be positive integers. Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises y_rise for every horizontal x_run. The travel is the total horizontal -change &textmdash; it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in +change&textmdash;it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special case of vertical lines, where (x_run,y_rise)=(0,1), the travel gives the change in y. @@ -5905,22 +6853,22 @@ then the line&textrsquo;s ending point has a second coordinate that is less than If travel is negative then you get LaTeX Error: Bad \line or \vector argument. -pict2e package -graphics packages -package, pict2e -pict2e package +pict2e package +graphics packages +package, pict2e +pict2e package -package, TikZ -TikZ package +package, TikZ +TikZ package -package, PSTricks -PSTricks package +package, PSTricks +PSTricks package -package, MetaPost -MetaPost package +package, MetaPost +MetaPost package -package, Asymptote -Asymptote package +package, Asymptote +Asymptote package Standard &latex; can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes because these lines are made by putting together line segments from @@ -5930,16 +6878,17 @@ relatively prime, so that (x_run,y_rise) can be (2,1) but not (4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former). To get lines of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like -picture, see the package pict2e on CTAN. Another solution -is to use a full-featured graphics system such as TikZ, or -PSTricks, or MetaPost, or Asymptote +picture, see the package pict2e +(https://ctan.org/pkg/pict2e). Another solution +is to use a full-featured graphics system such as TikZ, PSTricks, +MetaPost, or Asymptote. \linethickness\thinlines\linepicture \linethickness -\linethickness +\linethickness Synopsis: @@ -5958,7 +6907,7 @@ lines, circles, or ovals. \thinlines\thicklines\linethicknesspicture \thinlines -\thinlines +\thinlines Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals in a picture environment to be 0.4pt. This is the default @@ -5970,7 +6919,7 @@ changed with either \linethickness \thicklines\circle\thinlinespicture \thicklines -\thicklines +\thicklines Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals in a picture environment to be 0.8pt. See also @@ -5982,7 +6931,7 @@ in the Trapezoidal Rule example of picture\circle\oval\thicklinespicture \circle -\circle +\circle Synopsis: @@ -6000,8 +6949,8 @@ one. The * form produces a filled-in circle.
\put(5,7){\circle{6}}
 
-The available radii for circle are, in points, the even -numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive. For circle* they are all the +The available radii for \circle are, in points, the even +numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive. For \circle* they are all the integers from 1 to 15. @@ -6009,7 +6958,7 @@ integers from 1 to 15. \oval\shortstack\circlepicture \oval -\oval +\oval Synopsis: @@ -6056,7 +7005,7 @@ boxes with a small amount of corner rounding. \shortstack\vector\ovalpicture \shortstack -\shortstack +\shortstack Synopsis: @@ -6091,7 +7040,7 @@ the left of the y axis. Center objects (default)
-\\ (for \shortstack objects) +\\ (for \shortstack objects) Separate objects into lines with \\. These stacks are short in that, unlike in a tabular or array environment, here the rows are not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in @@ -6110,7 +7059,7 @@ argument \shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}. \vector\makebox (picture)\shortstackpicture \vector -\vector +\vector Synopsis: @@ -6120,7 +7069,7 @@ argument \shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}. Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it vertically rises y_rise for every horizontal x_run. The -travel is the total horizontal change &textmdash; it is not the +travel is the total horizontal change&textmdash;it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special case of vertical vectors, if (x_run,y_rise)=(0,1), then travel gives the change in y. @@ -6139,7 +7088,7 @@ not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence of arrowheads). \makebox (picture)\framebox (picture)\vectorpicture \makebox (picture) -\makebox (for picture) +\makebox (for picture) Synopsis: @@ -6188,7 +7137,7 @@ two of these letters. \framebox (picture)\frame\makebox (picture)picture \framebox (picture) -\framebox +\framebox Synopsis: @@ -6220,8 +7169,8 @@ the text in the center. text; see \makebox (picture) for the values that it can take. -\fboxrule -\fboxsep +\fboxrule +\fboxsep The rule has thickness \fboxrule and there is a blank space \fboxsep between the frame and the contents of the box. @@ -6235,7 +7184,7 @@ determined in some other way then either use \fbox (\frame\dashbox\framebox (picture)picture \frame -\frame +\frame Synopsis: @@ -6253,7 +7202,7 @@ between the frame and the object. It is fragile (\dashbox\framepicture \dashbox -\dashbox +\dashbox Synopsis: @@ -6294,18 +7243,18 @@ take. quotation & quotetabbingpictureEnvironments
quotation & quote -environment, quotation -quotation environment +environment, quotation +quotation environment -quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying -displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation -paragraph indentations in quoted text -environment, quote -quote environment +quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying +displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation +paragraph indentations in quoted text +environment, quote +quote environment -quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying -displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation -paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting +quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying +displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation +paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting Synopsis: @@ -6346,12 +7295,14 @@ between paragraphs (it is the rubber length \parsep). tabbingtablequotation & quoteEnvironments
tabbing -environment, tabbing -tabbing environment + + +environment, tabbing +tabbing environment -tab stops, using -lining text up using tab stops -alignment via tabbing +tab stops, using +lining text up using tab stops +alignment via tabbing Synopsis: @@ -6374,12 +7325,12 @@ widths, ended by a \kill command (which is described below):
\begin{tabbing}
-\hspace{0.75in}     \= \hspace{0.40in}  \= \hspace{0.40in}    \kill
-Ship                \> Guns             \> Year    \\ 
-\textit{Sophie}     \> 14               \> 1800    \\
-\textit{Polychrest} \> 24               \> 1803    \\
-\textit{Lively}     \> 38               \> 1804    \\
-\textit{Surprise}   \> 28               \> 1805    \\
+\hspace{1.2in}\=\hspace{1in}\=\kill
+Ship                \>Guns             \>Year    \\ 
+\textit{Sophie}     \>14               \>1800    \\
+\textit{Polychrest} \>24               \>1803    \\
+\textit{Lively}     \>38               \>1804    \\
+\textit{Surprise}   \>28               \>1805    \\
 \end{tabbing}
 
@@ -6390,24 +7341,25 @@ determined automatically by &latex;, while in tabbing the user sets the tab stops. Another distinction is that tabular generates a box, but tabbing can be broken across pages. Finally, while tabular can be used in any mode, tabbing -can be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph. +can be used only in paragraph mode and it always starts a new paragraph, +without indentation. -A tabbing environment always starts a new paragraph, without -indentation. Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need +Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need to use the starred form of the \hspace command at the beginning of a tabbed row. The right margin of the tabbing environment is the end of line, so that the width of the environment is \linewidth. -row, tabbing +row, tabbing The tabbing environment contains a sequence of tabbed rows. The first tabbed row begins immediately after \begin{tabbing} and each row ends with \\ or \kill. The last row may omit the \\ and end with just \end{tabbing}. -At any point the tabbing environment has a current tab stop -pattern, a sequence of n > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, +pattern, current tab stops, tabbing +At any point the tabbing environment has a current tab stop +pattern, a sequence of n > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, etc. These create n corresponding columns. Tab stop 0 is always the left margin, defined by the enclosing environment. Tab stop number i is set if it is assigned a horizontal @@ -6423,37 +7375,37 @@ done in LR mode (Modes They are all fragile (\protect). -\\ (tabbing)\\ (tabbing) +\\ (tabbing)\\ (tabbing) End a tabbed line and typeset it. -\= (tabbing)\= (tabbing) +\= (tabbing)\= (tabbing) Sets a tab stop at the current position. -\> (tabbing)\> (tabbing) -\> +\> (tabbing)\> (tabbing) +\> Advances to the next tab stop. -\<\< +\<\< Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line. -\+\+ +\+\+ Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary. -\-\- +\-\- Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary. -\' (tabbing)\' (tabbing) +\' (tabbing)\' (tabbing) Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e., everything from the most recent \>, \<, \', \\, or \kill command, to the previous column and aligned to the right, flush against the current column&textrsquo;s tab stop. -\` (tabbing)\` (tabbing) +\` (tabbing)\` (tabbing) Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab stop 0. However, it can&textrsquo;t move text to the right of the last column because there&textrsquo;s no tab stop there. The \` command moves @@ -6463,29 +7415,29 @@ of the tabbing environment. There must be no \> or \' command between the \` and the \\ or \end{tabbing} command that ends the line. -\a (tabbing)\a (tabbing) -\a' (acute accent in tabbing) -\a` (grave accent in tabbing) -\a= (macron accent in tabbing) +\a (tabbing)\a (tabbing) +\a' (acute accent in tabbing) +\a` (grave accent in tabbing) +\a= (macron accent in tabbing) In a tabbing environment, the commands \=, \' and \` do not produce accents as usual (Accents). Instead, use the commands \a=, \a' and \a`. -\kill\kill +\kill\kill Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\ except that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it. Any \=, \+ or \- commands in that line remain in effect. -\poptabs\poptabs -\poptabs +\poptabs\poptabs +\poptabs Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs. -\pushtabs\pushtabs +\pushtabs\pushtabs Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing environment. -\tabbingsep\tabbingsep +\tabbingsep\tabbingsep Distance of the text moved by \' to left of current tab stop. @@ -6517,15 +7469,15 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ end; -package, algorithm2e -algorithm2e package - package, listings -listings package - package, minted -minted package +package, algorithm2e +algorithm2e package + package, listings +listings package + package, minted +minted package -package, fancyvrb -fancyvrb package +package, fancyvrb +fancyvrb package This example is just for illustration of the environment. To actually @@ -6539,11 +7491,11 @@ there are quite a few packages, including algorithm2e, tabletabulartabbingEnvironments
table -environment, table -table environment +environment, table +table environment -tables, creating -creating tables +tables, creating +creating tables Synopsis: @@ -6577,20 +7529,18 @@ are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a following page. -but you can put many different kinds of content in a table, -including text, &latex; commands, etc. +but you can put many different kinds of content in a table: +the table body may contain text, &latex; commands, graphics, etc. It is +typeset in a parbox of width \textwidth. For the possible values of placement and their effect on the float placement algorithm, see Floats. -The table body is typeset in a parbox of width \textwidth. -It can contain text, commands, graphics, etc. - The label is optional; it is used for cross references (Cross references). -\caption +\caption The \caption command is also optional. It specifies caption text -for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional +title for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional lottitle is present then that text is used in the list of tables instead of title (Table of contents etc.). @@ -6615,11 +7565,11 @@ unless it is pushed to a float page at the end. tabularthebibliographytableEnvironments
tabular -environment, tabular -tabular environment +environment, tabular +tabular environment -lines in tables -lining text up in tables +lines in tables +lining text up in tables Synopsis: @@ -6657,12 +7607,12 @@ illustrates many of the features. The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar between them. This is specified in tabular&textrsquo;s argument {l|l}. -& +& for table cells Put the entries into different columns by separating them with an ampersand, &. The end of each row is marked with a double backslash, \\. Put a horizontal rule below a row, after a double backslash, with \hline. -\\ for tabular +\\ for tabular After the last row the \\ is optional, unless an \hline command follows to put a rule below the table. @@ -6740,7 +7690,7 @@ arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on it. \end{tabular} -\extracolsep +\extracolsep An \extracolsep{wd} command in an &arobase;-expression causes an extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep. Unlike @@ -6773,7 +7723,7 @@ a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleftp-column element these declarations must appear inside braces, as with {\centering .. \\ ..}). Otherwise &latex; will misinterpret the double backslash as -ending the row. Instead, to get a line break in there use +ending the tabular row. Instead, to get a line break in there use \newline (\newline). *{num}{cols} @@ -6799,25 +7749,25 @@ are likely to get the Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment -\arrayrulewidth\arrayrulewidth +\arrayrulewidth\arrayrulewidth tabular arrayrulewidth A length that is the thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and \vline in the tabular and array environments. The default is .4pt. Change it as in \setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}. -\arraystretch\arraystretch +\arraystretch\arraystretch tabular arraystrech A factor by which the spacing between rows in the tabular and array environments is multiplied. The default is 1, for no scaling. Change it as \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}. -\doublerulesep\doublerulesep +\doublerulesep\doublerulesep tabular doublerulesep A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the || specifier. The default is 2pt. -\tabcolsep\tabcolsep +\tabcolsep\tabcolsep tabular tabcolsep A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is 6pt. Change it with \setlength. @@ -6839,7 +7789,7 @@ lines: \multicolumn\vlinetabular \multicolumn -\multicolumn +\multicolumn Synopsis: @@ -6939,7 +7889,7 @@ in the first row here. That&textrsquo;s because there is no vertical bar in the \vline\cline\multicolumntabular \vline -\vline +\vline Draw a vertical line in a tabular or array environment extending the full height and depth of an entry&textrsquo;s row. Can also be used in an &arobase;-expression, although its synonym vertical @@ -6972,7 +7922,7 @@ the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next to the \cline\hline\vlinetabular \cline -\cline +\cline Synopsis: @@ -7002,7 +7952,7 @@ height. \hline\clinetabular \hline -\hline +\hline Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing tabular or array environment. It&textrsquo;s most commonly used to draw a line at the @@ -7027,10 +7977,10 @@ is required. thebibliographytheoremtabularEnvironments
thebibliography -environment, thebibliography -thebibliography environment +environment, thebibliography +thebibliography environment -bibliography, creating (manually) +bibliography, creating (manually) Synopsis: @@ -7043,7 +7993,7 @@ is required. Produce a bibliography or reference list. There are two ways to produce bibliographic lists. This environment is suitable when you have only a -few references and can maintain the list by hand. Using BibTeX +few references and can maintain the list by hand. Using BibTeX, for a more sophisticated approach. This shows the environment with two entries. @@ -7066,15 +8016,17 @@ Together they are \cite{latexdps, texbook}. This styles the first reference as [1] Leslie ..., and so that -\cite{latexdps} produces the matching ... based on [1]. -The second \cite produces [1, 2]. You must compile the -document twice to resolve these references. +... based on \cite{latexdps} produces the matching +... based on [1]. The second \cite produces [1, +2]. You must compile the document twice to resolve these references. The mandatory argument widest-label is text that, when typeset, is as wide as the widest item label produced by the \bibitem commands. The tradition is to use 9 for bibliographies with less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. +\bibname +\refname The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as Bibliography. To change it there are two cases. In the book and report classes, where the top level sectioning is \chapter and the @@ -7082,16 +8034,18 @@ default title is Bibliography, that title is in the macro \bibname. For article, where the class&textrsquo;s top level sectioning is \section and the default is References, the title is in macro \refname. Change it by redefining the command, -as with \renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references} after +as with \renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}, after \begin{document}. -package, babel -babel package +package, babel +babel package Language support packages such as babel will automatically redefine \refname or \bibname to fit the selected language. +list, for the list layout control parameters. + \bibitem
Specify a bibliography item.
 
\cite
Refer to a bibliography item.
@@ -7103,7 +8057,7 @@ language.
 \bibitem\citethebibliography
 \bibitem
 
-\bibitem
+\bibitem
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -7118,16 +8072,16 @@ language.
 
\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
 
-Generate an entry labeled by label. The default is for &latex; to -generates a number using the enumi counter. The citation key -citation key -cite_key is a string of +Generate an entry labeled by default by a number generated using the +enumi counter. The citation key +citation key +cite_key can be any string of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma). -thebibliography for an example. +thebibliography, for an example. -The optional label changes the default label from an integer to the -given string. With this +When provided, the optional label becomes the entry label and the +enumi counter is not incremented. With this
\begin{thebibliography}
@@ -7159,8 +8113,8 @@ Warning: There were multiply-defined labels.
 
 Under the hood, &latex; remembers the cite_key and label
 information because \bibitem writes it to the auxiliary file
-filename.aux.  For instance, the above example causes
-\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993} and
+jobname.aux (Jobname).  For instance, the above
+example causes the two \bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993} and
 \bibcite{texbook}{1} to appear in that file.  The .aux
 file is read by the \begin{document} command and then the
 information is available for \cite commands.  This explains why
@@ -7177,7 +8131,7 @@ recompiling.
 \cite\nocite\bibitemthebibliography
 \cite
 
-\cite
+\cite
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -7210,20 +8164,21 @@ comma-separated list of citation keys (
 
 
-produces output like ... source is [1].  (You can change the
-appearance of the citation with bibliography styles.  More is in
-Using BibTeX.)
+produces output like ... source is [1].  You can change the
+appearance of the citation and of the reference by using bibliography
+styles if you generate automatically the thebibliography
+environment.  More information in Using BibTeX.
 
 The optional argument subcite is appended to the citation.  For
 example, See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook} might produce
 See 14.3 in [1, p. 314].
 
 In addition to what appears in the output, \cite writes
-information to the auxiliary file filename.aux.  For
-instance, \cite{latexdps} writes \citation{latexdps}
-to that file.  This information is used by Bib&tex; to include in your
-reference list only those works that you have actually cited; see
-\nocite also.
+information to the auxiliary file jobname.aux
+(Jobname).  For instance, \cite{latexdps} writes
+\citation{latexdps} to that file.  This information is used by
+Bib&tex; to include in your reference list only those works that you
+have actually cited; see \nocite also.
 
 If keys is not in your bibliography information then you get
 LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references, and in the output
@@ -7239,7 +8194,7 @@ the fix may be to run &latex; again.
 \nociteUsing BibTeX\citethebibliography
 \nocite
 
-\nocite
+\nocite
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -7248,28 +8203,28 @@ the fix may be to run &latex; again.
 
Produces no output but writes keys to the auxiliary file -doc-filename.aux. +jobname.aux (Jobname). The mandatory argument keys is a comma-separated list of one or more citation keys (\bibitem). This information is used by Bib&tex; to include these works in your reference list even though you -have not cited them (\cite). +have not explicitly cited them (\cite).
Using BibTeX\nocitethebibliography Using Bib&tex; -using Bib&tex; -bib&tex;, using -bibliography, creating (automatically) -\bibliographystyle -\bibliography +using Bib&tex; +bib&tex;, using +bibliography, creating (automatically) +\bibliographystyle +\bibliography As described in thebibliography (thebibliography), a sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the Bib&tex; program. This is only an introduction; see the full -documentation on CTAN. +documentation on CTAN (CTAN). With Bib&tex;, you don&textrsquo;t use thebibliography (thebibliography). Instead, include these lines. @@ -7297,9 +8252,9 @@ Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically. Like plain, but more compact labels.
- Many, many other Bib&tex; style files exist, +Many, many other Bib&tex; style files exist, tailored to the demands of various publications. See CTAN&textrsquo;s listing -http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib. +https://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib. The \bibliography command is what actually produces the bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to @@ -7336,10 +8291,10 @@ you used. theoremtitlepagethebibliographyEnvironments
theorem -environment, theorem -theorem environment +environment, theorem +theorem environment -theorems, typesetting +theorems, typesetting Synopsis: @@ -7367,11 +8322,11 @@ The next result follows immediately. \end{thm} -package, amsmath -amsmath package +package, amsmath +amsmath package -package, amsthm -amsthm package +package, amsthm +amsthm package Most new documents use the packages amsthm and amsmath from the American Mathematical Society. Among other things these @@ -7383,11 +8338,11 @@ such as styling options. titlepageverbatimtheoremEnvironments
titlepage -environment, titlepage -titlepage environment +environment, titlepage +titlepage environment -making a title page -title pages, creating +making a title page +title pages, creating Synopsis: @@ -7434,14 +8389,14 @@ environment, use \maketitle (verbatimversetitlepageEnvironments
verbatim -environment, verbatim -verbatim environment +environment, verbatim +verbatim environment -verbatim text -simulating typed text -typed text, simulating -code, typesetting -computer programs, typesetting +verbatim text +simulating typed text +typed text, simulating +code, typesetting +computer programs, typesetting Synopsis: @@ -7467,19 +8422,24 @@ Symbol swearing: %&$#?&eosexcl;. The only restriction on literal-text is that it cannot include the string \end{verbatim}. -package, cprotect -cprotect package +package, cprotect +cprotect package You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros, for instance in the argument to a \section. This is not the same as -commands being fragile (\protect), instead it just cannot appear -there. (But the cprotect package can help with this.) +commands being fragile (\protect), instead it just cannot work, +as the verbatim environment changes the catcode regime before +processing its contents, and restore it immediately afterward, +nevertheless with a macro argument the content of the argument has +already be converted to a token list along the catcode regime in effect +when the macro was called. However, the cprotect package can +help with this. -package, listings -listings package +package, listings +listings package -package, minted -minted package +package, minted +minted package One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There are packages that are an improvement the verbatim environment. For @@ -7487,16 +8447,16 @@ instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external files, or parts of those files. Such packages include listings, and minted. -package, fancyvrb -fancyvrb package +package, fancyvrb +fancyvrb package -package, verbatimbox -verbatimbox package +package, verbatimbox +verbatimbox package A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments is fancyvrb. Another is verbatimbox. -For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN. +For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN (CTAN). \verb
The macro form of the verbatim environment.
@@ -7506,8 +8466,8 @@ and minted.
 \verbverbatim
 \verb
 
-\verb
-verbatim text, inline
+\verb
+verbatim text, inline
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -7532,49 +8492,54 @@ exclamation point, !.  The second instead uses plus, +
 because the exclamation point is part of literal-text.
 
 The single-character delimiter char surrounds
-literal-text &textmdash; it must be the same character before and
-after.  No spaces come between \verb or \verb* and
-char, or between char and literal-text, or between
-literal-text and the second occurrence of char (the synopsis
-shows a space only to distinguish one component from the other).  The
-delimiter must not appear in literal-text. The literal-text
-cannot include a line break.
-
-visible space
+literal-text&textmdash;it must be the same character before and after.
+No spaces come between \verb or \verb* and char,
+or between char and literal-text, or between
+literal-text and the second occurrence of char (the
+synopsis shows a space only to distinguish one component from the
+other).  The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. The
+literal-text cannot include a line break.
+
+visible space
 The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
 space character.
 
 
 
-The output from this will include a character showing the spaces.
+The output from this will include a visible space on both side of word
+with:
 
 
-
The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+
The command's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
 
-package, url -url package +package, url +url package For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package url -provides an option that is better than the \verb command, since +is a better option than the \verb command, since it allows line breaks. -package, listings -listings package +package, listings +listings package -package, minted -minted package +package, minted +minted package For computer code there are many packages with advantages over \verb. One is listings, another is minted. -package, cprotect -cprotect package +package, cprotect +cprotect package You cannot use \verb in the argument to a macro, for instance in the argument to a \section. It is not a question of \verb -being fragile (\protect), instead it just cannot appear there. -(But the cprotect package can help with this.) +being fragile (\protect), instead it just cannot work, as the +\verb command changes the catcode regime before reading its +argument, and restore it immediately afterward, nevertheless with a +macro argument the content of the argument has already be converted to a +token list along the catcode regime in effect when the macro was called. +However, the cprotect package can help with this. @@ -7582,10 +8547,10 @@ being fragile (\protect verseverbatimEnvironments
verse -environment, verse -verse environment +environment, verse +verse environment -poetry, an environment for +poetry, an environment for Synopsis: @@ -7606,7 +8571,7 @@ being fragile (\protect On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
-\\ for verse +\\ for verse Separate the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more blank lines to separate the stanzas. @@ -7634,8 +8599,8 @@ are not indented, and the text is not right-justified. Line breakingPage breakingEnvironmentsTop Line breaking -line breaking -breaking lines +line breaking +breaking lines The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To @@ -7666,9 +8631,9 @@ fiddling with breaks that will change anyway. \\\obeycr & \restorecrLine breaking
\\ -\\ force line break -new line, starting -line break, forcing +\\ force line break +new line, starting +line break, forcing Synopsis, one of: @@ -7750,17 +8715,17 @@ something like this. \obeycr & \restorecr\newline\\Line breaking
\obeycr & \restorecr -\obeycr -\restorecr -new line, output as input +\obeycr +\restorecr +new line, output as input The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file (^^M, internally) the same as \\, followed by \relax. So each new line in the input will also be a new line in the output. The \restorecr command restores normal line-breaking behavior. -This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. -verbatim instead. +This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. Use +verbatim (verbatim) instead. With &latex;&textrsquo;s usual defaults, this @@ -7802,8 +8767,8 @@ fff ggg \newline\- (hyphenation)\obeycr & \restorecrLine breaking
\newline -\newline -new line, starting (paragraph mode) +\newline +new line, starting (paragraph mode) In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph mode @@ -7835,8 +8800,8 @@ single cell of the table. \- (hyphenation)\discretionary\newlineLine breaking
\- (discretionary hyphen) -\- (hyphenation) -hyphenation, forcing +\- (hyphenation) +hyphenation, forcing Tell &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you insert \- commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at @@ -7877,8 +8842,8 @@ care.
\discretionary\fussy & \sloppy\- (hyphenation)Line breaking
\discretionary (generalized hyphenation point) -hyphenation, discretionary -discretionary hyphenation +hyphenation, discretionary +discretionary hyphenation Synopsis: @@ -7909,9 +8874,9 @@ automatically by &tex;&textrsquo;s hyphenation algorithm. \fussy & \sloppy\hyphenation\discretionaryLine breaking
\fussy & \sloppy -\fussy -\sloppy -line breaks, changing +\fussy +\sloppy +line breaks, changing Declarations to make &tex; more picky or less picky about line breaking. Declaring \fussy usually avoids too much space between @@ -7933,8 +8898,8 @@ the command. sloppypar\fussy & \sloppy sloppypar -sloppypar -sloppypar environment +sloppypar +sloppypar environment Synopsis: @@ -7971,8 +8936,8 @@ the command. \hyphenation\linebreak & \nolinebreak\fussy & \sloppyLine breaking
\hyphenation -\hyphenation -hyphenation, defining +\hyphenation +hyphenation, defining Synopsis: @@ -7998,10 +8963,10 @@ exactly. Multiple \hyphenation commands accumulate. \linebreak & \nolinebreak\hyphenationLine breaking
\linebreak & \nolinebreak -\linebreak -\nolinebreak -line breaks, forcing -line breaks, preventing +\linebreak +\nolinebreak +line breaks, forcing +line breaks, preventing Synopses, one of: @@ -8037,7 +9002,7 @@ underrepresented groups. When you issue \linebreak, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right margin. \\ -and \newline to have the spaces not stretched out. +and \newline, to have the spaces not stretched out. @@ -8046,8 +9011,8 @@ and \newline t Page breakingFootnotesLine breakingTop Page breaking -page breaking -breaking pages +page breaking +breaking pages Ordinarily &latex; automatically takes care of breaking output into pages with its usual aplomb. But if you are writing commands, or @@ -8077,7 +9042,7 @@ second one is lousy; to break the current page &latex; doesn&textrsquo;t look as far ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to influence page breaks while preparing a final version of a document. -Layout for more material that is relevant to page breaking. +Layout, for more material that is relevant to page breaking. \clearpage & \cleardoublepage
Start a new page; eject floats.
@@ -8090,11 +9055,11 @@ influence page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
 \clearpage & \cleardoublepage\newpagePage breaking
 
\clearpage & \cleardoublepage -\clearpage -flushing floats and starting a page -starting a new page and clearing floats -\cleardoublepage -starting on a right-hand page +\clearpage +flushing floats and starting a page +starting a new page and clearing floats +\cleardoublepage +starting on a right-hand page Synopsis: @@ -8149,9 +9114,9 @@ two-column mode then \newpage ends the current column while \newpage\enlargethispage\clearpage & \cleardoublepagePage breaking
\newpage -\newpage -new page, starting -starting a new page +\newpage +new page, starting +starting a new page Synopsis: @@ -8185,7 +9150,7 @@ proposition that all men are created equal.
-makes a new page start after continent, and the cut-off line is +makes a new page start after continent, and the cut-off line is not right justified. In addition, \newpage does not vertically stretch out the page, as \pagebreak does. @@ -8194,8 +9159,8 @@ stretch out the page, as \pagebreak does. \enlargethispage\pagebreak & \nopagebreak\newpagePage breaking
\enlargethispage -\enlargethispage -enlarge current page +\enlargethispage +enlarge current page Synopsis, one of: @@ -8228,10 +9193,10 @@ explicit \pagebreak. \pagebreak & \nopagebreak\enlargethispagePage breaking
\pagebreak & \nopagebreak -\pagebreak -\nopagebreak -page break, forcing -page break, preventing +\pagebreak +\nopagebreak +page break, forcing +page break, preventing Synopses: @@ -8272,13 +9237,13 @@ that all men are created equal.
-does not give a page break at continent, but instead at -nation, since that is where &latex; breaks that line. In +does not give a page break at continent, but instead at +nation, since that is where &latex; breaks that line. In addition, with \pagebreak the vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. This can look strange, and if \flushbottom is in effect this can cause you to get Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has -occurred while \output is active. \newpage for a command that +occurred while \output is active. \newpage, for a command that does not have these effects. @@ -8287,7 +9252,7 @@ does not have these effects. FootnotesDefinitionsPage breakingTop Footnotes -footnotes, creating +footnotes, creating Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here. @@ -8321,7 +9286,7 @@ include a bibliographic style with that behavior (\footnote\footnotemarkFootnotes
\footnote -\footnote +\footnote Synopsis, one of: @@ -8345,9 +9310,9 @@ include a bibliographic style with that behavior (footnote counter. -footnotes, symbols instead of numbers -\fnsymbol, and footnotes -\&arobase;fnsymbol +footnotes, symbols instead of numbers +\fnsymbol, and footnotes +\&arobase;fnsymbol By default, &latex; uses arabic numbers as footnote markers. Change this with something like \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}, which @@ -8358,11 +9323,11 @@ you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with &latex; determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters. -footnote parameters -parameters, for footnotes +footnote parameters +parameters, for footnotes -\footnoterule\footnoterule +\footnoterule\footnoterule footnote footnoterule Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page&textrsquo;s footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document classes (except @@ -8378,7 +9343,7 @@ Change the rule with something like this. \kern 2pt} % and this 2 -\footnotesep\footnotesep +\footnotesep\footnotesep footnote footnotesep The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote (\strut). By default, this is set to the normal strut for @@ -8397,8 +9362,8 @@ sectioning command such as \chapter (it can only be used in outer paragraph mode; Modes). There are some workarounds; see following sections. -Footnotes, in a minipage -mpfootnote counter +footnotes, in a minipage +mpfootnote counter In a minipage environment the \footnote command uses the mpfootnote counter instead of the footnote counter, so they are numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the @@ -8410,7 +9375,7 @@ shown alphabetically. minipage\footnotemark\footnotetext\footnoteFootnotes
\footnotemark -\footnotemark +\footnotemark Synopsis, one of: @@ -8463,11 +9428,11 @@ Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver&rb Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby. -package, cleveref -cleveref package +package, cleveref +cleveref package -package, hyperref -hyperref package +package, hyperref +hyperref package This example accomplishes the same by using the package cleveref. @@ -8481,8 +9446,8 @@ The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers, Chance, 1990.} But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE} -package, hyperref -hyperref package +package, hyperref +hyperref package It will work with the package hyperref. @@ -8491,7 +9456,7 @@ But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE} \footnotetextFootnotes in section headings\footnotemarkFootnotes
\footnotetext -\footnotetext +\footnotetext Synopsis, one of: @@ -8506,7 +9471,7 @@ that command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (number changes the number of the footnote mark. -\footnotemark and Footnotes in a table for usage +\footnotemark and Footnotes in a table, for usage examples. @@ -8514,8 +9479,8 @@ examples. Footnotes in section headingsFootnotes in a table\footnotetextFootnotes
Footnotes in section headings -footnote, in section headings -table of contents, avoiding footnotes +footnote, in section headings +table of contents, avoiding footnotes Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in: @@ -8544,7 +9509,7 @@ what gets moved to the table of contents is the optional argument. Footnotes in a tableFootnotes of footnotesFootnotes in section headingsFootnotes
Footnotes in a table -footnote, in a table +footnote, in a table Inside a tabular or array environment the \footnote command does not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but @@ -8625,10 +9590,10 @@ other footnotes. Footnotes of footnotesFootnotes in a tableFootnotes
Footnotes of footnotes -footnote, of a footnote +footnote, of a footnote -package, bigfoot -bigfoot package +package, bigfoot +bigfoot package Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package @@ -8651,7 +9616,7 @@ second.\footnotefrom{% DefinitionsCountersFootnotesTop Definitions -definitions +definitions &latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds. @@ -8668,17 +9633,18 @@ second.\footnotefrom{% \newfont
Define a new font name.
 
\protect
Using tricky commands.
 
\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend
Discard extra spaces.
+
xspace package
Space after a macro, conditionally.
 
\newcommand & \renewcommand\providecommandDefinitions
\newcommand & \renewcommand -\newcommand -commands, defining new ones -commands, redefining -defining a new command -new commands, defining +\newcommand +commands, defining new ones +commands, redefining +defining a new command +new commands, defining Synopses, one of: @@ -8703,13 +9669,16 @@ second.\footnotefrom{% \renewcommand*{\cmd}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} -Define or redefine a command. See also the discussion of -\DeclareRobustCommand in Class and package commands. -starred form, defining new commands -*-form, defining new commands -The starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain -multiple paragraphs of text (in plain &tex; terms that it not be -\long). +Define or redefine a command (see also the discussion of +\DeclareRobustCommand in Class and package commands). + +starred form, defining new commands +*-form, defining new commands +\long +The starred form of these two forbids the arguments from containing +multiple paragraphs of text (in plain &tex; terms, the commands +are not \long). With the default form, arguments can be +multiple paragraphs. These are the parameters: @@ -8731,10 +9700,10 @@ different number of arguments than the old version. optargdefault Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of \cmd is optional, with default value optargdefault -(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then -\cmd does not take an optional argument. +(which may be the empty string). If optargsdefault is not present +then \cmd does not take an optional argument. -positional parameter +positional parameter That is, if \cmd is used with square brackets, as in \cmd[optval]{...}..., then within defn the parameter #1 is set to the value of optval. On the @@ -8835,10 +9804,10 @@ is to put another pair of braces inside the definition: \providecommand\makeatletter & \makeatother\newcommand & \renewcommandDefinitions
\providecommand -\providecommand -commands, defining new ones -defining a new command -new commands, defining +\providecommand +commands, defining new ones +defining a new command +new commands, defining Synopses, one of: @@ -8856,14 +9825,14 @@ If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect as \newcommand. If a command of this name already exists then this definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file that may be loaded more than once, such as a style file. -\newcommand & \renewcommand for the description of the arguments. +\newcommand & \renewcommand, for the description of the arguments. This example
\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
 \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
-From \myaffiliation.
+>From \myaffiliation.
 
@@ -8890,9 +9859,9 @@ letter, code 11. The \makeatother declaration sets the category code of the at-sign to code 12, its default value. As &tex; reads characters, it assigns each one a category code, or -catcode -character category code -category code, character +catcode +character category code +category code, character catcode. For instance, it assigns the backslash character \ the catcode 0. Command names consist of a category 0 character, ordinarily backslash, followed @@ -8906,19 +9875,19 @@ or class writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a package or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of their own, because by default the at-sign has catcode 12. -The pair \makeatletter and \makeatother changes the -default code and then changes it back. Use them inside a .tex -file, in the preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands -named with &arobase;, by having them surround your definition. Don&textrsquo;t -use these inside .sty or .cls files since the -\usepackage and \documentclass commands already arrange -that the at-sign has the character code of a letter, catcode 11. +Use the pair \makeatletter and \makeatother inside a +.tex file, typically in the preamble, when you are defining or +redefining commands named with &arobase;, by having them surround your +definition. Don&textrsquo;t use these inside .sty or .cls files +since the \usepackage and \documentclass commands already +arrange that the at-sign has the character code of a letter, +catcode 11. -package, macros2e -macros2e package +package, macros2e +macros2e package For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see -http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. +https://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. In this example the class file has a command \thesis&arobase;universityname that the user wants to change. These @@ -8936,9 +9905,9 @@ three lines should go in the preamble, before the \&arobase;ifstar\newcounter\makeatletter & \makeatotherDefinitions
\&arobase;ifstar -\&arobase;ifstar -commands, star-variants -star-variants, commands +\&arobase;ifstar +commands, star-variants +star-variants, commands Synopsis: @@ -8955,28 +9924,34 @@ Examples are the table and table* environments and the When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward because \newenvironment and \renewenvironment allow the -environment name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more -complex. As in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command, -given above as \mycmd, which peeks ahead to see if it is followed -by a star. For instance, &latex; does not really have a -\section* command; instead, the \section command peeks -ahead. This command does not accept arguments but instead expands to -one of two commands that do accept arguments. In the synopsis these two -are \mycmd&arobase;nostar and \mycmd&arobase;star. They could take the -same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all. -As always, in a &latex; document a command using at-sign &arobase; -must be enclosed inside a \makeatletter ... \makeatother block +environment name to contain a star. So you just have to write +\newenvironment{myenv} or +\newenvironment{myenv*} and continue the definition as +usual. For commands the situation is more complex as the star not being +a letter cannot be part of the command name. As in the synopsis above, +there will be a user-called command, given above as \mycmd, which +peeks ahead to see if it is followed by a star. For instance, &latex; +does not really have a \section* command; instead, the +\section command peeks ahead. This command does not accept +arguments but instead expands to one of two commands that do accept +arguments. In the synopsis these two are \mycmd&arobase;nostar and +\mycmd&arobase;star. They could take the same number of arguments or a +different number, or no arguments at all. As always, in a &latex; +document a command using an at-sign &arobase; in its name must be +enclosed inside a \makeatletter ... \makeatother block (\makeatletter & \makeatother). This example of \&arobase;ifstar defines the command \ciel and a variant \ciel*. Both have one required argument. A call to -\ciel{night} will return "starry night sky" while -\ciel*{blue} will return "starry not blue sky". +\ciel{blue} will return "not starry blue sky" while +\ciel*{night} will return "starry night sky". -
\newcommand*{\ciel&arobase;unstarred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
-\newcommand*{\ciel&arobase;starred}[1]{starry not #1 sky}
+
\makeatletter
+\newcommand*{\ciel&arobase;unstarred}[1]{not starry #1 sky}
+\newcommand*{\ciel&arobase;starred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
 \newcommand*{\ciel}{\&arobase;ifstar{\ciel&arobase;starred}{\ciel&arobase;unstarred}}
+\makeatother
 
In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of @@ -8992,16 +9967,32 @@ arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007&textrsquo;s \&arobase;ifstar{\agentsecret&arobase;starred}{\agentsecret&arobase;unstarred}}
-There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of -\&arobase;ifstar. The suffix package allows the construct -\newcommand\mycommand{unstarred version} followed by -\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{starred version}. And -&latex;3 has the xparse package that allows this code. +After a command name, a star is handled similarly to an optional +argument. (This differs from environment names in which the star is +part of the name itself and as such could be in any position.) Thus, +it is technically possible to put any number of spaces between the +command and the star. Thus \agentsecret*{Bond} and +\agentsecret *{Bond} are equivalent. However, the +standard practice is not to insert any such spaces. + +package, suffix +suffix package + +package, xparse +xparse package + +There are two alternative ways to accomplish the work of +\&arobase;ifstar. (1) The suffix package allows the +construct \newcommand\mycommand{unstarred-variant} +followed by +\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{starred-variant}. +(2) &latex; provides the xparse package, which allows +this code:
\NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
-  {starred version}%
-  {unstarred version}% 
+  {starred-variant}%
+  {unstarred-variant}% 
   }
 
@@ -9010,8 +10001,8 @@ arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007&textrsquo;s \newcounter\newlength\&arobase;ifstarDefinitions
\newcounter: Allocating a counter -\newcounter -counters, defining new +\newcounter +counters, defining new Synopsis, one of: @@ -9063,11 +10054,11 @@ defined. \newlength\newsavebox\newcounterDefinitions
\newlength -\newlength -lengths, allocating new -rubber lengths, defining new -skip register, plain &tex; -glue register, plain &tex; +\newlength +lengths, allocating new +rubber lengths, defining new +skip register, plain &tex; +glue register, plain &tex; Synopsis: @@ -9098,8 +10089,8 @@ Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual. \newsavebox\newenvironment & \renewenvironment\newlengthDefinitions
\newsavebox -\newsavebox -box, allocating new +\newsavebox +box, allocating new Synopsis: @@ -9136,11 +10127,11 @@ Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}. \newenvironment & \renewenvironment\newtheorem\newsaveboxDefinitions
\newenvironment & \renewenvironment -\newenvironment -\renewenvironment -environments, defining -defining new environments -redefining environments +\newenvironment +\renewenvironment +environments, defining +defining new environments +redefining environments Synopses, one of: @@ -9168,7 +10159,7 @@ Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}. Define or redefine the environment env, that is, create the construct \begin{env} ... body ... \end{env}. -*-form of environment commands +*-form of environment commands The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not contain multiple paragraphs of text. However, the body of these environments can contain multiple paragraphs. @@ -9300,12 +10291,12 @@ the document, use the environment like this. \newtheorem\newfont\newenvironment & \renewenvironmentDefinitions
\newtheorem -\newtheorem -theorems, defining -defining new theorems +\newtheorem +theorems, defining +defining new theorems -theorem-like environment -environment, theorem-like +theorem-like environment +environment, theorem-like Synopses: @@ -9435,9 +10426,9 @@ by Theorem 2.1 and Definition 2.2. \newfont\protect\newtheoremDefinitions
\newfont -\newfont -fonts, new commands for -defining new fonts +\newfont +fonts, new commands for +defining new fonts This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with old @@ -9458,8 +10449,8 @@ boldface with a roman (Fonts\. -at clause, in font definitions -design size, in font definitions +at clause, in font definitions +design size, in font definitions The font description consists of a fontname and an optional at clause. &latex; will look on your system for a file named fontname.tfm. The at clause can have the form either @@ -9483,9 +10474,9 @@ relative to the font&textrsquo;s design size, which is a value defined in the \protect\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend\newfontDefinitions
\protect -\protect -fragile commands -robust commands +\protect +fragile commands +robust commands All &latex; commands are either fragile or robust. A fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to certain @@ -9503,7 +10494,7 @@ name} command it writes the section name text to document such as in the table of contents. Any argument that is internally expanded by &latex; without typesetting it directly is referred to as a -moving arguments +moving arguments moving argument. A command is fragile if it can expand during this process into invalid &tex; code. Some examples of moving arguments are those that appear in the \caption{...} @@ -9546,13 +10537,13 @@ to \protect\(..\protect\).
-\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend\protectDefinitions +\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterendxspace package\protectDefinitions
\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend -\ignorespaces -\ignorespacesafterend -spaces, ignore around commands -commands, ignore spaces +\ignorespaces +\ignorespacesafterend +spaces, ignore around commands +commands, ignore spaces Synopsis: @@ -9569,7 +10560,7 @@ to \protect\(..\protect\). Both commands cause &latex; to ignore spaces after the end of the command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command -from Plain &tex;, and the second is &latex;-specific. +from plain &tex;, and the second is &latex;-specific. The ignorespaces is often used when defining commands via \newcommand, or \newenvironment, or \def. The @@ -9600,10 +10591,9 @@ as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then \fullname will reproduce that. -
\makeatletter
-\newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\&arobase;honorific{#1}} % remember title
-\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\&arobase;honorific~#1}       % put title before name
-\makeatother
+
\newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\honorific{#1}} % remember title
+\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\honorific~#1}       % put title before name
+
 \begin{tabular}{|l|}
 \honorific{Mr/Ms}  \fullname{Jones} \\  % no extra space here
 \honorific{ Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones}     % extra space before title
@@ -9612,11 +10602,11 @@ as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
 
 
 To fix this, change to
-\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\&arobase;honorific~#1}.
+\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\honorific~#1}.
 
 The \ignorespaces is also often used in a \newenvironment
-at the end of the begin clause, that is, as part of the second
-argument, as in \begin{newenvironment}{env
+at the end of the begin clause, as in
+\begin{newenvironment}{env
 name}{... \ignorespaces}{...}.
 
 To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
@@ -9643,13 +10633,74 @@ inconvenient.  The solution is to change to
 \newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}\ignorespacesafterend}.
 
 
+
+xspace package\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterendDefinitions +
xspace package + +\xspace +spaces, ignore around commands +commands, ignore spaces + +Synopsis: + + +
\usepackage{xspace}
+  ...
+\newcommand{...}{...\xspace}
+
+ +The \xspace macro, when used at the end of a command, adds a +space unless the command is followed by certain punctuation characters. + +After a command name that uses letters (as opposed to single character +command names using non-letters such as \$), &tex; gobbles white +space. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output has Vermont +placed snugly against the period, without any intervening space. + + +
\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont}
+Our college is in \VT .
+The \VT{} summers are nice.
+
+ +But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the dummy curly +braces or else there would be no space separating Vermont from +summers. (Many authors instead instead use a backslash-space +\ for this. \(SPACE).) + +The xspace package provides \xspace. It is for writing +commands which are designed to be used mainly in text. It inserts a +space after that command unless what immediately follows is in a list of +exceptions. In this example, the dummy braces are not needed. + + +
\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont\xspace}
+Our college is in \VT .
+\VT summers are nice.
+
+ +The default exception list contains the characters ,.'/?;:!~-), +the open curly brace and the backslash-space command discussed above, +and the commands \footnote or \footnotemark. Add to that +list as with \xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii} and remove +from that list as with \xspaceremoveexception{!}. + + +A comment: many experts prefer not to use \xspace. Putting it in +a definition means that the command will usually get the spacing right. +But it isn&textrsquo;t easy to predict when to enter dummy braces because +\xspace will get it wrong, such as when it is followed by another +command, and so \xspace can make editing material harder and more +error-prone than instead always remembering the dummy braces. + +
CountersLengthsDefinitionsTop Counters -counters, a list of -variables, a list of +counters, a list of +variables, a list of Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The name of the counter is often the same as the name of the @@ -9694,7 +10745,7 @@ up to four levels of nesting (enumerate\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol\usecounterCounters
\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol: Printing counters -counters, printing +counters, printing Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if the counter counter has the value 1 then a @@ -9706,30 +10757,30 @@ instance, \alph{enumi}. Note that the counter name d start with a backslash. -\alph{counter}\alph{counter} +\alph{counter}\alph{counter} Print the value of counter in lowercase letters: &textlsquo;a&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;b&textrsquo;, &enddots; If the counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get LaTeX Error: Counter too large. -\Alph{counter}\Alph{counter} +\Alph{counter}\Alph{counter} Print in uppercase letters: &textlsquo;A&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;B&textrsquo;, &enddots; If the counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get LaTeX Error: Counter too large. -\arabic{counter}\arabic{counter} +\arabic{counter}\arabic{counter} Print in Arabic numbers such as 5 or -2. -\roman{counter}\roman{counter} +\roman{counter}\roman{counter} Print in lowercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;i&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;ii&textrsquo;, &enddots; If the counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but &latex; does not print anything in the output. -\Roman{counter}\Roman{counter} +\Roman{counter}\Roman{counter} Print in uppercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;I&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;II&textrsquo;, &enddots; If the counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but &latex; does not print anything in the output. -\fnsymbol{counter}\fnsymbol{counter} +\fnsymbol{counter}\fnsymbol{counter} Prints the value of counter using a sequence of nine symbols that are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of counter should be between 1 and 9, inclusive. If the @@ -9739,7 +10790,7 @@ warning but &latex; does not output anything. Here are the symbols: - + NumberNameCommandSymbol 1asterisk\ast* @@ -9770,9 +10821,9 @@ warning but &latex; does not output anything. \usecounter\value\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbolCounters
\usecounter -\usecounter -list items, specifying counter -numbered items, specifying counter +\usecounter +list items, specifying counter +numbered items, specifying counter Synopsis: @@ -9807,8 +10858,8 @@ enumerated with testcounter: \value\setcounter\usecounterCounters
\value -\value -counters, getting value of +\value +counters, getting value of Synopsis: @@ -9851,9 +10902,9 @@ preceded by \protect (\pr \setcounter\addtocounter\valueCounters
\setcounter -\setcounter -counters, setting -setting counters +\setcounter +counters, setting +setting counters Synopsis: @@ -9879,12 +10930,13 @@ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}. \addtocounter\refstepcounter\setcounterCounters
\addtocounter -\addtocounter +\addtocounter Synopsis: -
\addtocounter{counter}{value
+
\addtocounter{counter}{value}
+
Globally increment counter by the amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. @@ -9902,7 +10954,7 @@ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}. \refstepcounter\stepcounter\addtocounterCounters
\refstepcounter -\refstepcounter +\refstepcounter Synopsis: @@ -9926,7 +10978,7 @@ locally, i.e., inside the current group. \stepcounter\day & \month & \year\refstepcounterCounters
\stepcounter -\stepcounter +\stepcounter Synopsis: @@ -9939,7 +10991,7 @@ within it. (For the definition of &textldquo;counters numbered within&textrdquo \newcounter.) This command differs from \refstepcounter in that this one does -not influence references &textmdash; it does not define the current +not influence references; that is, it does not define the current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter (\refstepcounter). @@ -9948,9 +11000,9 @@ not influence references &textmdash; it does not define the current \day & \month & \year\stepcounterCounters
\day & \month & \year -\day -\month -\year +\day +\month +\year &latex; defines the counter \day for the day of the month (nominally with value between 1 and 31), \month for the month of @@ -9977,19 +11029,25 @@ bogus month value produces no output). LengthsMaking paragraphsCountersTop Lengths -lengths, defining and using +lengths, defining and using A length is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a length as an argument. +rigid lengths +rubber lengths +dimen plain &tex; +skip plain &tex; +glue plain &tex; Lengths come in two types. A rigid length such as 10pt -does not contain a plus or minus component. (Plain &tex; -calls this a dimen.) A rubber length (what Plain &tex; -calls a skip) such as as with 1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm -can contain either or both of those components. In that rubber length, -the 1cm is the natural length while the other two, the -plus and minus components, allow &tex; to stretch or -shrink the length to optimize placement. +does not contain a plus or minus component. (Plain +&tex; calls this a dimen.) A rubber length (what plain +&tex; calls a skip or glue) such as with 1cm +plus0.05cm minus0.01cm can contain either or both of those +components. In that rubber length, the 1cm is the natural +length while the other two, the plus and minus +components, allow &tex; to stretch or shrink the length to optimize +placement. The illustrations below use these two commands. @@ -10100,6 +11158,8 @@ that after \setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in&rbrace \settodepth
Set a length to the depth of something.
 
\settoheight
Set a length to the height of something.
 
\settowidth
Set a length to the width of something.
+
\stretch
Add infinite stretchability.
+
Expressions
Compute with lengths and integers.
 
 
@@ -10107,76 +11167,76 @@ that after \setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in&rbrace Units of length\setlengthLengths
Units of length -units, of length +units, of length &tex; and &latex; know about these units both inside and outside of math mode. pt -pt -Point +pt +point units of length pt -Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two decimal -places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm. +Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units +is 1point = 2.845mm = .2845cm. pc -pica -pc +pica +pc units of length pc Pica, 12 pt in -in -inch +in +inch units of length in Inch, 72.27 pt bp -bp -Big point +bp +big point units of length bp Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in PostScript and many desktop publishing systems. cm -Centimeter -cm +centimeter +cm units of length cm Centimeter mm -Millimeter -mm +millimeter +mm units of length mm Millimeter dd -Didot point -dd +didot point +dd units of length dd Didot point, 1.07 pt cc -Cicero -cc +cicero +cc units of length cc Cicero, 12 dd sp -Scaled point -sp +scaled point +sp units of length sp Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
-ex -x-height -ex -m-width -em -em +ex +x-height +ex +m-width +em +em Lengths/em Lengths/en Lengths/ex @@ -10195,8 +11255,8 @@ of the vertical space between list items given as likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a definition given in points. -mu, math unit -mu +mu, math unit +mu In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit mu given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current math symbols family. Spacing in math mode. @@ -10206,8 +11266,8 @@ math symbols family. Spacing i \setlength\addtolengthUnits of lengthLengths
\setlength -\setlength -lengths, setting +\setlength +lengths, setting Synopsis: @@ -10244,8 +11304,8 @@ read again> \relax l.19 \setlength{specparindent}{0.6\pa \addtolength\settodepth\setlengthLengths
\addtolength -\addtolength -lengths, adding to +\addtolength +lengths, adding to Synopsis: @@ -10284,7 +11344,7 @@ If you leave off the backslash at the start of len, as in \settodepth\settoheight\addtolengthLengths
\settodepth -\settodepth +\settodepth Synopsis: @@ -10316,7 +11376,7 @@ then you get something like Undefined control sequence. <argument> \settoheight\settowidth\settodepthLengths
\settoheight -\settoheight +\settoheight Synopsis: @@ -10346,10 +11406,10 @@ you leave the backslash out of len, as in
-\settowidth\settoheightLengths +\settowidth\stretch\settoheightLengths
\settowidth -\settowidth +\settowidth Synopsis: @@ -10377,13 +11437,170 @@ then you get something like Undefined control sequence. <argument> Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox. +
+\stretchExpressions\settowidthLengths +
\stretch + +\stretch + +Synopsis: + + +
\stretch{number}
+
+ +Produces a rubber length with zero natural length and number times +\fill units of stretchability (Lengths). The +number can be positive or negative. This command is robust +(\protect). + +It works for both vertical and horizontal spacing. In this horizontal +example, &latex; produces three tick marks, and the distance between +the first and second is half again as long as the distance between the +second and third. + + +
\rule{0.4pt}{1ex}\hspace{\stretch{1.5}}%
+  \rule{0.4pt}{1ex}\hspace{\stretch{1}}%
+  \rule{0.4pt}{1ex} 
+
+ +In this vertical example, the We dedicate &dots; will have three +times as much space under it as above it. + + +
\newenvironment{dedication}{% in document preamble
+  \clearpage\thispagestyle{empty}% 
+  \vspace*{\stretch{1}} % stretchable space at top 
+  \it
+}{%
+  \vspace{\stretch{3}}  % space at bot is 3x as at top
+  \clearpage
+}
+  ...
+\begin{dedication}  % in document body
+We dedicate this book to our wives.
+\end{dedication}
+
+ + +
+Expressions\stretchLengths +
Expressions + +expressions + + +Synopsis, one of: + + +
\numexpr expression 
+\dimexpr expression
+\glueexpr expression
+\muglue expression
+
+ +Any place where you may write an integer, or a &tex; dimen, or &tex; +glue, or muglue, you can instead write an expression to compute that +type of quantity. + +An example is that \the\dimexpr\linewidth-4pt\relax will +produce as output the length that is four points less than width of a +line (the only purpose of \the is to show the result in the +document). Analogously, \romannumeral\numexpr6+3\relax will +produce ix, and \the\glueexpr 5pt plus 1pt * 2 \relax +will produce 10.0pt plus 2.0pt. + +A convenience here over doing calculations by allocating registers and +then using \advance, etc., is that the evaluation of expressions +does not involve assignments and can therefore be performed in places +where assignments are not allowed. The next example computes the width +of the \parbox. + + +
\newlength{\offset}\setlength{\offset}{2em}
+\begin{center}
+\parbox{\dimexpr\linewidth-\offset*3}{With malice toward none
+with charity for all with firmness in the right as God gives us to see
+the right let us strive on to finish the work we are in to bind up the
+nation's wounds, to care for him who shall have borne the battle and
+for his widow and his orphan \textasciitilde\ to do all which may
+achieve and cherish a just and lasting peace among ourselves and with
+all nations.  ---Abraham Lincoln, Second Inaugural Address, from the
+memorial}
+\end{center}
+
+ +The expression consists of one or more terms of the same type +(integer, dimension, etc.) that are added or subtracted. A term that is +a type of number, dimension, etc., consists of a factor of that type, +optionally multiplied or divided by factors. A factor of a type is +either a quantity of that type or a parenthesized subexpression. The +expression produces a result of the given type, so that \numexpr +produces an integer, \dimexpr produces a dimension, etc. + +In the quotation example above, changing to +\dimexpr\linewidth-3*\offset gives the error Illegal unit +of measure (pt inserted). This is because for \dimexpr and +\glueexpr, the input consists of a dimension or glue value +followed by an optional multiplication factor, and not the other way +around. Thus \the\dimexpr 1pt*10\relax is valid and produces +10.0pt, but \the\dimexpr 10*1pt\relax gives the +Illegal unit error. + +The expressions absorb tokens and carry out appropriate mathematics up +to a \relax (which will be absorbed), or up to the first +non-valid token. Thus, \the\numexpr2+3px will print +5px, because &latex; reads the \numexpr2+3, which is +made up of numbers, and then finds the letter p, which cannot +be part of a number. It therefore terminates the expression and +produces the 5, followed by the regular text px. + +This termination behavior is useful in comparisons. In +\ifnum\numexpr\parindent*2 < 10pt Yes\else No\fi, the less than +sign terminates the expression and the result is No (in a +standard &latex; article). + +Expressions may use the operators +, -, * and +/ along with parentheses for subexpressions, (...). In +glue expressions the plus and minus parts do not need +parentheses to be affected by a factor. So \the\glueexpr 5pt plus +1pt * 2 \relax results in 10pt plus 2pt. + +&tex; will coerce other numerical types in the same way as it does when +doing register assignment. Thus \the\numexpr\dimexpr +1pt\relax\relax will result in 65536, which is 1pt +converted to scaled points (&tex;&textrsquo;s internal unit) and then coerced +into an integer. With a \glueexpr here, the stretch and shrink +would be dropped. Going the other way, a \numexpr inside a +\dimexpr or \glueexpr will need appropriate units, as in +\the\dimexpr\numexpr 1 + 2\relax pt\relax, which produces +3.0pt. + +The details of the arithmetic: each factor is checked to be in the +allowed range, numbers must be less than 2^{31} in absolute +value, and dimensions or glue components must be less than +2^{14} points, or mu, or fil, etc. The +arithmetic operations are performed individually, except for a scaling +operation (a multiplication immediately followed by a division) which +is done as one combined operation with a 64-bit product as +intermediate value. The result of each operation is again checked to +be in the allowed range. + +Finally, division and scaling take place with rounding (unlike &tex;&textrsquo;s +\divide, which truncates). Thus +\the\dimexpr 5pt*(3/2)\relax puts 10.0pt in the document, +because it rounds 3/2 to 2, while +\the\dimexpr 5pt*(4/3)\relax produces 5.0pt. + +
Making paragraphsMath formulasLengthsTop Making paragraphs -making paragraphs -paragraphs +making paragraphs +paragraphs To start a paragraph, just type some text. To end the current paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, separated by @@ -10446,8 +11663,8 @@ complete
. \par\indent & \noindentMaking paragraphs
\par -\par -paragraph, ending +\par +paragraph, ending Synopsis (note that while reading the input &tex; converts two consecutive newlines to a \par): @@ -10511,10 +11728,10 @@ there is an empty horizontal space of 3 inches and then \indent & \noindent\parindent & \parskip\parMaking paragraphs
\indent & \noindent -\indent -\noindent -\parindent -indent, forcing +\indent +\noindent +\parindent +indent, forcing Synopsis: @@ -10522,7 +11739,7 @@ there is an empty horizontal space of 3 inches and then
\indent
 
- or +or
\noindent
@@ -10533,7 +11750,7 @@ first outputs an empty box whose width is \parindent.  These
 commands are robust (\protect).
 
 Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
-\par for the difference between this command and \par.  To
+\par, for the difference between this command and \par.  To
 start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
 paragraph, use \noindent.
 
@@ -10567,8 +11784,8 @@ because &latex; is already in horizontal mode there.  The
 you may want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs,
 \parskip (\parindent & \parskip).
 
-package, indentfirst
-indentfirst package
+package, indentfirst
+indentfirst package
 
 Default &latex; styles have the first paragraph after a section that is
 not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English.  To change that,
@@ -10579,23 +11796,25 @@ look on CTAN for the package indentfirst.
 \parindent & \parskipMarginal notes\indent & \noindentMaking paragraphs
 
\parindent & \parskip -\parindent -\parskip -paragraph indentation -vertical space before paragraphs +\parindent +\parskip +paragraph indentation +horizontal paragraph indentation +vertical space before paragraphs Synopsis: -
\setlength{\parskip}{horizontal len}
-\setlength{\parinden}{vertical len}
+
\setlength{\parindent}{horizontal len}
+\setlength{\parskip}{vertical len}
 
-Both are a rubber lengths (Lengths). They give the indentation -of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages -(minipage), and the vertical space between paragraphs. +Both are rubber lengths (Lengths). They affect the +indentation of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside +minipages (minipage), and the vertical space between +paragraphs, respectively. -This, put in the preamble, +For example, if this is put in the preamble:
\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
@@ -10603,26 +11822,30 @@ of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages
 
-arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented, -but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase -x. +The document will have paragraphs that are not indented, but instead +are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase x. In standard &latex; documents, the default value for \parindent in one-column documents is 15pt when the default text size is -10pt , 17pt for 11pt, and 1.5em for -12pt. In two-column documents it is 1em. The default -value for \parskip in &latex;&textrsquo;s standard document styles is -0pt plus1pt. +10pt, 17pt for 11pt, and 1.5em for +12pt. In two-column documents it is 1em. (These values +are set before &latex; calls \normalfont so em is derived +from the default font, Computer Modern. If you use a different font +then to set \parindent in units matching that font, do +\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}.) + +The default value for \parskip in &latex;&textrsquo;s standard document +styles is 0pt plus1pt.
Marginal notes\parindent & \parskipMaking paragraphs
Marginal notes -marginal notes -notes in the margin -remarks in the margin -\marginpar +marginal notes +notes in the margin +remarks in the margin +\marginpar Synopsis, one of: @@ -10643,8 +11866,8 @@ two-sided layout (document option twoside) then it goes in the outside margin. If you are in two-column layout (document option twocolumn) then it goes in the nearest margin. -\reversemarginpar -\normalmarginpar +\reversemarginpar +\normalmarginpar If you declare \reversemarginpar then &latex; will place subsequent marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the prior paragraph. Revert that to the default position with @@ -10661,17 +11884,18 @@ hyphenation there by beginning left or right with These parameters affect the formatting of the note: -\marginparpush\marginparpush +\marginparpush\marginparpush marginal notes marginparpush -Minimum vertical space between notes; default 7pt for -12pt documents, 5pt else. +Minimum vertical space between notes; default 7pt for 12pt +documents, 5pt else. See also page layout parameters +marginparpush. -\marginparsep\marginparsep +\marginparsep\marginparsep marginal notes marginparsep Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default 11pt for 10pt documents, 10pt else. -\marginparwidth\marginparwidth +\marginparwidth\marginparwidth marginal notes marginparwidth Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided 10pt document is 90pt, 83pt for 11pt, and 68pt for @@ -10692,17 +11916,17 @@ notes from falling off the bottom of the page. Math formulasModesMaking paragraphsTop Math formulas -math formulas -formulas, math -math mode, entering -environment, math -math environment +math formulas +formulas, math +math mode, entering +environment, math +math environment -environment, displaymath -displaymath environment +environment, displaymath +displaymath environment -environment, equation -equation environment +environment, equation +equation environment Produce mathematical text by putting &latex; into math mode or display @@ -10776,7 +12000,7 @@ equivalent to \begin{displaymath} math \end{displaymath}. These environments can only be used in paragraph mode (Modes). -\displaystyle +\displaystyle The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some differences. One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts; in display math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they are closer @@ -10805,14 +12029,14 @@ fraction will be scrunched. But, because of its \displaystyle, the Geometric line&textrsquo;s fraction will be easy to read, with characters the same size as in the rest of the line. -package, amsmath -amsmath package +package, amsmath +amsmath package -package, amsfonts -amsfonts package +package, amsfonts +amsfonts package -package, mathtools -mathtools package +package, mathtools +mathtools package The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics, @@ -10836,11 +12060,11 @@ see their documentation on CTAN. Subscripts & superscriptsMath symbolsMath formulas
Subscripts & superscripts -superscript -subscript -exponent -_ -^ +superscript +subscript +^ superscript +_ subscript +exponent Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of: @@ -10907,15 +12131,15 @@ subscript. subscript something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally attaching to a prior symbols. -Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or +Using the subscript or superscript character outside of math mode or display math mode, as in the expression x^2, will get you the error Missing $ inserted. -package, mhchem -mhchem package +package, mhchem +mhchem package A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to -typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as +typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that, such as mhchem; see CTAN. @@ -10923,19 +12147,19 @@ typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as Math symbolsMath functionsSubscripts & superscriptsMath formulas
Math symbols -math symbols -symbols, math -greek letters +math symbols +symbols, math +greek letters -package, symbols -symbols package +package, comprehensive +comprehensive package &latex; provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that -anyone uses. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, -you will get the pi symbol 03C0. See the Comprehensive -&latex; Symbol List at -https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/. +anyone uses. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, +you will get the pi symbol 03C0. See the &textldquo;Comprehensive +&latex; Symbol List&textrdquo; package at +https://ctan.org/pkg/comprehensive. Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means exhaustive. Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its symbol class, @@ -10948,184 +12172,184 @@ mode, see \ensuremath< -\|\| +\|\| 2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: \parallel. -\aleph\aleph +\aleph\aleph 2135 Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary). -\alpha\alpha +\alpha\alpha 03B1 Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary). -\amalg\amalg +\amalg\amalg 2A3F Disjoint union (binary) -\angle\angle +\angle\angle 2220 Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than sign < and angle bracket \langle. -\approx\approx +\approx\approx 2248 Almost equal to (relation). -\ast\ast +\ast\ast 2217 Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed (binary). Synonym: *, which is often a superscript or subscript, as in the Kleene star. Similar: \star, which is five-pointed, and is sometimes used as a general binary operation, and sometimes reserved for cross-correlation. -\asymp\asymp +\asymp\asymp 224D Asymptotically equivalent (relation). -\backslash\backslash +\backslash\backslash \ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus \setminus, and \textbackslash for backslash outside of math mode. -\beta\beta +\beta\beta 03B2 Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary). -\bigcap\bigcap +\bigcap\bigcap 22C2 Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar: binary intersection \cap. -\bigcirc\bigcirc +\bigcirc\bigcirc 26AA Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function composition \circ. -\bigcup\bigcup +\bigcup\bigcup 22C3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary union \cup. -\bigodot\bigodot +\bigodot\bigodot 2A00 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator). -\bigoplus\bigoplus +\bigoplus\bigoplus 2A01 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator). -\bigotimes\bigotimes +\bigotimes\bigotimes 2A02 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator). -\bigtriangledown\bigtriangledown +\bigtriangledown\bigtriangledown 25BD Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down (operator). -\bigtriangleup\bigtriangleup +\bigtriangleup\bigtriangleup 25B3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up (operator). -\bigsqcup\bigsqcup +\bigsqcup\bigsqcup 2A06 Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator). -\biguplus\biguplus +\biguplus\biguplus 2A04 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus (operator). (Note that the name has only one p.) -\bigvee\bigvee -22C1 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator). +\bigvee\bigvee +22C1 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator). -\bigwedge\bigwedge -22C0 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator). +\bigwedge\bigwedge +22C0 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator). -\bot\bot -22A5 Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered +\bot\bot +22A5, Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered set, or a contradiction (ordinary). See also \top. -\bowtie\bowtie +\bowtie\bowtie 22C8 Natural join of two relations (relation). -\Box\Box +\Box\Box 25A1 Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. -\bullet\bullet -bullet symbol +\bullet\bullet +bullet symbol 2022 Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication dot \cdot. -\cap\cap +\cap\cap 2229 Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigcap. -\cdot\cdot +\cdot\cdot 22C5 Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet dot \bullet. -\chi\chi +\chi\chi 03C7 Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary). -\circ\circ +\circ\circ 2218 Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigcirc. -\clubsuit\clubsuit +\clubsuit\clubsuit 2663 Club card suit (ordinary). -\complement\complement -2201 Set complement, used as a superscript as in +\complement\complement +2201, Set complement, used as a superscript as in $S^\complement$ (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. Also used: $S^{\mathsf{c}}$ or $\bar{S}$. -\cong\cong +\cong\cong 2245 Congruent (relation). -\coprod\coprod +\coprod\coprod 2210 Coproduct (operator). -\cup\cup +\cup\cup 222A Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigcup. -\dagger\dagger +\dagger\dagger 2020 Dagger relation (binary). -\dashv\dashv +\dashv\dashv 22A3 Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar: turnstile \vdash. -\ddagger\ddagger +\ddagger\ddagger 2021 Double dagger relation (binary). -\Delta\Delta +\Delta\Delta 0394 Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary). -\delta\delta +\delta\delta 03B4 Greek lowercase delta (ordinary). -\Diamond\Diamond +\Diamond\Diamond 25C7 Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. -\diamond\diamond +\diamond\diamond 22C4 Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large diamond \Diamond, circle bullet \bullet. -\diamondsuit\diamondsuit +\diamondsuit\diamondsuit 2662 Diamond card suit (ordinary). -\div\div +\div\div 00F7 Division sign (binary). -\doteq\doteq +\doteq\doteq 2250 Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically equal to \Doteq. -\downarrow\downarrow +\downarrow\downarrow 2193 Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: \Downarrow double line down arrow. -\Downarrow\Downarrow +\Downarrow\Downarrow 21D3 Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: \downarrow single line down arrow. -\ell\ell +\ell\ell 2113 Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary). -\emptyset\emptyset +\emptyset\emptyset 2205 Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is \varnothing. -\epsilon\epsilon +\epsilon\epsilon 03F5 Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small letter epsilon \varepsilon 03B5. Related: @@ -11133,204 +12357,205 @@ the set membership relation \in 2208. -\equiv\equiv +\equiv\equiv 2261 Equivalence (relation). -\eta\eta +\eta\eta 03B7 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\exists\exists +\exists\exists 2203 Existential quantifier (ordinary). -\flat\flat +\flat\flat 266D Musical flat (ordinary). -\forall\forall +\forall\forall 2200 Universal quantifier (ordinary). -\frown\frown +\frown\frown 2322 Downward curving arc (ordinary). -\Gamma\Gamma +\Gamma\Gamma 0393 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\gamma\gamma +\gamma\gamma 03B3 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\ge\ge +\ge\ge 2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for \geq. -\geq\geq +\geq\geq 2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for \ge. -\gets\gets +\gets\gets 2190 Is assigned the value (relation). Synonym: \leftarrow. -\gg\gg +\gg\gg 226B Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less than \ll. -\hbar\hbar +\hbar\hbar 210F Planck constant over two pi (ordinary). -\heartsuit\heartsuit +\heartsuit\heartsuit 2661 Heart card suit (ordinary). -\hookleftarrow\hookleftarrow +\hookleftarrow\hookleftarrow 21A9 Hooked left arrow (relation). -\hookrightarrow\hookrightarrow +\hookrightarrow\hookrightarrow 21AA Hooked right arrow (relation). -\iff\iff +\iff\iff 27F7 If and only if (relation). It is \Longleftrightarrow with a \thickmuskip on either side. -\Im\Im +\Im\Im 2111 Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part \Re. -\imath\imath -dotless i, math +\imath\imath +dotless i, math Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (Math accents). -\in\in +\in\in 2208 Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate epsilon \epsilon03F5 and small letter script epsilon \varepsilon. -\infty\infty +\infty\infty 221E Infinity (ordinary). -\int\int +\int\int 222B Integral (operator). -\iota\iota +\iota\iota 03B9 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\Join\Join +\Join\Join 2A1D Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain &tex;. -\jmath\jmath -dotless j, math +\jmath\jmath +dotless j, math Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (Math accents). -\kappa\kappa +\kappa\kappa 03BA Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\Lambda\Lambda +\Lambda\Lambda 039B uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\lambda\lambda +\lambda\lambda 03BB Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\land\land -2227 Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for \wedge. -See also logical or \lor. +\land\land +2227 Logical and (binary). Synonym: \wedge. +See also logical or \lor. -\langle\langle +\langle\langle 27E8 Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar: less-than <. Matches \rangle. -\lbrace\lbrace +\lbrace\lbrace 007B Left curly brace (opening). Synonym: \{. Matches \rbrace. -\lbrack\lbrack +\lbrack\lbrack 005B Left square bracket (opening). Synonym: [. Matches \rbrack. -\lceil\lceil +\lceil\lceil 2308 Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the bottom shaved off (opening). Matches \rceil. -\le\le +\le\le 2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for \leq. -\leadsto\leadsto -21DD Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. +\leadsto\leadsto +21DD Squiggly right arrow (relation). To get this symbol outside of math mode you can put \newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}} in the preamble and then use \Leadsto instead. -\Leftarrow\Leftarrow +\Leftarrow\Leftarrow 21D0 Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar: single-line left arrow \leftarrow. -\leftarrow\leftarrow +\leftarrow\leftarrow 2190 Single-line left arrow (relation). Synonym: \gets. Similar: double-line left arrow \Leftarrow. -\leftharpoondown\leftharpoondown +\leftharpoondown\leftharpoondown 21BD Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation). -\leftharpoonup\leftharpoonup +\leftharpoonup\leftharpoonup 21BC Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation). -\Leftrightarrow\Leftrightarrow +\Leftrightarrow\Leftrightarrow 21D4 Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: single-line double headed arrow \leftrightarrow. -\leftrightarrow\leftrightarrow +\leftrightarrow\leftrightarrow 2194 Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: double-line double headed arrow \Leftrightarrow. -\leq\leq +\leq\leq 2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for \le. -\lfloor\lfloor +\lfloor\lfloor 230A Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: \floor. -\lhd\lhd +\lhd\lhd 25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). -Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load +For the normal subgroup symbol you should load amssymb and use \vartriangleleft (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). -\ll\ll +\ll\ll 226A Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater than \gg. -\lnot\lnot +\lnot\lnot 00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: \neg. -\longleftarrow\longleftarrow +\longleftarrow\longleftarrow 27F5 Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long double-line left arrow \Longleftarrow. -\longleftrightarrow\longleftrightarrow +\longleftrightarrow\longleftrightarrow 27F7 Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: long double-line double-headed arrow \Longleftrightarrow. -\longmapsto\longmapsto +\longmapsto\longmapsto 27FC Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation). Similar: shorter version \mapsto. -\longrightarrow\longrightarrow +\longrightarrow\longrightarrow 27F6 Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long double-line right arrow \Longrightarrow. -\lor\lor -2228 Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge \wedge. +\lor\lor +2228 Logical or (binary). Synonym: \vee. +See also logical and \land. -\mapsto\mapsto -21A6 Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation). +\mapsto\mapsto +21A6 Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar +(relation). Similar: longer version \longmapsto. -\mho\mho +\mho\mho 2127 Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary). -Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. -\mid\mid +\mid\mid 2223 Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of \mid is for a set \{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}. @@ -11340,42 +12565,42 @@ ordinary) and you should not use them as relations but instead only as ordinals, i.e., footnote symbols. For absolute value, see the entry for \vert and for norm see the entry for \Vert. -\models\models +\models\models 22A8 Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash (relation). Similar: long double dash \vDash. -\mp\mp +\mp\mp 2213 Minus or plus (relation). -\mu\mu +\mu\mu 03BC Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\nabla\nabla +\nabla\nabla 2207 Hamilton&textrsquo;s del, or differential, operator (ordinary). -\natural\natural +\natural\natural 266E Musical natural notation (ordinary). -\ne\ne +\ne\ne 2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: \neq. -\nearrow\nearrow +\nearrow\nearrow 2197 North-east arrow (relation). -\neg\neg +\neg\neg 00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: \lnot. Sometimes instead used for negation: \sim. -\neq\neq +\neq\neq 2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: \ne. -\ni\ni +\ni\ni 220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation). Synonym: \owns. Similar: is a member of \in. -\not\not +\not\not 0020Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a following operator (relation). @@ -11384,82 +12609,85 @@ following operator (relation). particularly with the amssymb package. For example, \notin is typographically preferable to \not\in. -\notin\notin +\notin\notin 2209 Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset of \nsubseteq. -\nu\nu +\nu\nu 03BD Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\nwarrow\nwarrow +\nwarrow\nwarrow 2196 North-west arrow (relation). -\odot\odot +\odot\odot 2299 Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigodot. -\oint\oint +\oint\oint 222E Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle (operator). -\Omega\Omega +\Omega\Omega 03A9 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\omega\omega +\omega\omega 03C9 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\ominus\ominus +\ominus\ominus 2296 Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary). -\oplus\oplus +\oplus\oplus 2295 Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigoplus. -\oslash\oslash +\oslash\oslash 2298 Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary). -\otimes\otimes +\otimes\otimes 2297 Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized operator \bigotimes. -\owns\owns +\owns\owns 220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation). Synonym: \ni. Similar: is a member of \in. -\parallel\parallel +\parallel\parallel 2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: \|. -\partial\partial +\partial\partial 2202 Partial differential (ordinary). -\perp\perp +\perp\perp 27C2 Perpendicular (relation). Similar: \bot uses the same glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class ordinary. -\phi\phi +\Phi\Phi +03A6 Uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). + +\phi\phi 03D5 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varphi 03C6. -\Pi\Pi +\Pi\Pi 03A0 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\pi\pi +\pi\pi 03C0 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varpi 03D6. -\pm\pm +\pm\pm 00B1 Plus or minus (binary). -\prec\prec +\prec\prec 227A Precedes (relation). Similar: less than <. -\preceq\preceq +\preceq\preceq 2AAF Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or equals \leq. -\prime\prime +\prime\prime 2032 Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically used as a superscript: $f^\prime$; $f^\prime$ and $f'$ produce the same result. An advantage of the second @@ -11469,357 +12697,334 @@ typing. You can only use \prime in math mode. Using the right single quote ' in text mode produces a different character (apostrophe). -\prod\prod +\prod\prod 220F Product (operator). -\propto\propto +\propto\propto 221D Is proportional to (relation) -\Psi\Psi +\Psi\Psi 03A8 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\psi\psi +\psi\psi 03C8 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\rangle\rangle +\rangle\rangle 27E9 Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater than >. Matches:\langle. -\rbrace\rbrace +\rbrace\rbrace 007D Right curly brace (closing). Synonym: \}. Matches \lbrace. -\rbrack\rbrack +\rbrack\rbrack 005D Right square bracket (closing). Synonym: ]. Matches \lbrack. -\rceil\rceil +\rceil\rceil 2309 Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches \lceil. -\Re\Re +\Re\Re 211C Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary). Related: double-line, or blackboard bold, R \mathbb{R}; to access this, load the amsfonts package. -\restriction\restriction -21BE Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym: +\restriction\restriction +21BE, Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym: \upharpoonright. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. -\revemptyset\revemptyset -29B0 Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related: +\revemptyset\revemptyset +29B0, Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related: \varnothing. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the stix package. -\rfloor\rfloor +\rfloor\rfloor 230B Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut off (closing). Matches \lfloor. -\rhd\rhd +\rhd\rhd 25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). -Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead +For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load amssymb and use \vartriangleright (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). -\rho\rho +\rho\rho 03C1 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varrho 03F1. -\Rightarrow\Rightarrow +\Rightarrow\Rightarrow 21D2 Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation). Similar: right single-line arrow \rightarrow. -\rightarrow\rightarrow +\rightarrow\rightarrow 2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation). Synonym: \to. Similar: right double line arrow \Rightarrow. -\rightharpoondown\rightharpoondown +\rightharpoondown\rightharpoondown 21C1 Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation). -\rightharpoonup\rightharpoonup +\rightharpoonup\rightharpoonup 21C0 Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation). -\rightleftharpoons\rightleftharpoons +\rightleftharpoons\rightleftharpoons 21CC Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation). -\searrow\searrow +\searrow\searrow 2198 Arrow pointing southeast (relation). -\setminus\setminus +\setminus\setminus 29F5 Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash, like \ (binary). Similar: backslash \backslash and also \textbackslash outside of math mode. -\sharp\sharp +\sharp\sharp 266F Musical sharp (ordinary). -\Sigma\Sigma +\Sigma\Sigma 03A3 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\sigma\sigma +\sigma\sigma 03C3 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varsigma 03C2. -\sim\sim +\sim\sim 223C Similar, in a relation (relation). -\simeq\simeq +\simeq\simeq 2243 Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation). -\smallint\smallint +\smallint\smallint 222B Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a display (operator). -\smile\smile +\smile\smile 2323 Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary). -\spadesuit\spadesuit +\spadesuit\spadesuit 2660 Spade card suit (ordinary). -\sqcap\sqcap +\sqcap\sqcap 2293 Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar: intersection cap. -\sqcup\sqcup +\sqcup\sqcup 2294 Square union symbol (binary). Similar: union cup. Related: variable-sized operator \bigsqcup. -\sqsubset\sqsubset -228F Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: +\sqsubset\sqsubset +228F, Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset \subset. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. -\sqsubseteq\sqsubseteq +\sqsubseteq\sqsubseteq 2291 Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or equal to \subseteq. -\sqsupset\sqsupset -2290 Square superset symbol (relation). Similar: +\sqsupset\sqsupset +2290, Square superset symbol (relation). Similar: superset \supset. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. -\sqsupseteq\sqsupseteq +\sqsupseteq\sqsupseteq 2292 Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset or equal \supseteq. -\star\star +\star\star 22C6 Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary). Similar: the synonyms asterisk * and \ast, which are six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript, as with the Kleene star. -\subset\subset +\subset\subset 2282 Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation). -\subseteq\subseteq +\subseteq\subseteq 2286 Subset or equal to (relation). -\succ\succ +\succ\succ 227B Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less than >. -\succeq\succeq +\succeq\succeq 2AB0 Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less than or equal to \leq. -\sum\sum +\sum\sum 2211 Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital sigma \Sigma. -\supset\supset +\supset\supset 2283 Superset (relation). -\supseteq\supseteq +\supseteq\supseteq 2287 Superset or equal to (relation). -\surd\surd +\surd\surd 221A Radical symbol (ordinary). The &latex; command \sqrt{...} typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar that extends to cover the argument. -\swarrow\swarrow +\swarrow\swarrow 2199 Southwest-pointing arrow (relation). -\tau\tau +\tau\tau 03C4 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\theta\theta +\theta\theta 03B8 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \vartheta 03D1. -\times\times +\times\times 00D7 Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See also \cdot. -\to\to +\to\to 2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation). Synonym: \rightarrow. -\top\top +\top\top 22A4 Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set (ordinary). See also \bot. -\triangle\triangle +\triangle\triangle 25B3 Triangle (ordinary). -\triangleleft\triangleleft +\triangleleft\triangleleft 25C1 Not-filled triangle pointing left (binary). Similar: \lhd. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load amssymb and use \vartriangleleft (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). -\triangleright\triangleright +\triangleright\triangleright 25B7 Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load amssymb and use \vartriangleright (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). -\unlhd\unlhd +\unlhd\unlhd 22B4 Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is, -triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For the +triangle, with a line under (binary). For the normal subgroup symbol load amssymb and use \vartrianglelefteq (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). -\unrhd\unrhd +\unrhd\unrhd 22B5 Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is, -triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For the +triangle, with a line under (binary). For the normal subgroup symbol load amssymb and use \vartrianglerighteq (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). -\Uparrow\Uparrow +\Uparrow\Uparrow 21D1 Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar: single-line up-pointing arrow \uparrow. -\uparrow\uparrow +\uparrow\uparrow 2191 Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation). Similar: double-line up-pointing arrow \Uparrow. -\Updownarrow\Updownarrow +\Updownarrow\Updownarrow 21D5 Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow \updownarrow. -\updownarrow\updownarrow +\updownarrow\updownarrow 2195 Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow \Updownarrow. -\upharpoonright\upharpoonright -21BE Up harpoon, with barb on right side +\upharpoonright\upharpoonright +21BE, Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation). Synonym: &backslashchar;restriction. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. -\uplus\uplus +\uplus\uplus 228E Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the middle (binary). Similar: union \cup. Related: variable-sized operator \biguplus. -\Upsilon\Upsilon +\Upsilon\Upsilon 03A5 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\upsilon\upsilon +\upsilon\upsilon 03C5 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\varepsilon\varepsilon +\varepsilon\varepsilon 03B5 Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form \epsilon 03F5. Related: set membership \in. -\vanothing\vanothing -2205 Empty set symbol. Similar: \emptyset. Related: +\vanothing\vanothing +2205, Empty set symbol. Similar: \emptyset. Related: \revemptyset. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. -\varphi\varphi +\varphi\varphi 03C6 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \phi 03D5. -\varpi\varpi +\varpi\varpi 03D6 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \pi 03C0. -\varrho\varrho +\varrho\varrho 03F1 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \rho 03C1. -\varsigma\varsigma +\varsigma\varsigma 03C2 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \sigma 03C3. -\vartheta\vartheta +\vartheta\vartheta 03D1 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \theta 03B8. -\vdash\vdash +\vdash\vdash 22A2 Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation). Similar: turnstile rotated a half-circle \dashv. -\vee\vee +\vee\vee 2228 Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical and \wedge. Similar: variable-sized operator \bigvee. -\Vert\Vert -2016 Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single -bar \vert. - -For a norm symbol, you can use the mathtools package and put in -your preamble -\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}. This gives you -three command variants for double-line vertical bars that are correctly -horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred -version $\norm*{M^\perp}$ then the height of the vertical bars -will match the height of the argument, whereas with -\norm{M^\perp} the bars do not grow with the height of the -argument but instead are the default height, and \norm[size -command]{M^\perp} also gives bars that do not grow but are set to -the size given in the size command, e.g., \Bigg. - -\vert\vert -007C Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line -vertical bar \Vert. For such that, as in the definition of a -set, use \mid because it is a relation. - -For absolute value you can use the mathtools package and in your -preamble put -\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}. This gives you -three command variants for single-line vertical bars that are correctly -horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred -version $\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$ then the height of the -vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with -\abs{\frac{22}{7}} the bars do not grow with the height of -the argument but instead are the default height, and -\abs[size command]{\frac{22}{7}} also gives bars that -do not grow but are set to the size given in the size command, -e.g., \Bigg. - -\wedge\wedge +\Vert\Vert +2016 Vertical double bar (ordinary). Delimiters, +for how to use the mathtools package to create flexibly-sized +norm symbols. + +\vert\vert +007C Single line vertical bar (ordinary). For &textldquo;such +that&textrdquo;, as in the definition of a set, use \mid because it +is a relation. Delimiters, for how to use the mathtools +package to create flexibly-sized absolute-value symbols. + +\wedge\wedge 2227 Logical and (binary). Synonym: \land. See also logical or \vee. Similar: variable-sized operator \bigwedge. -\wp\wp +\wp\wp 2118 Weierstrass p (ordinary). -\wr\wr +\wr\wr 2240 Wreath product (binary). -\Xi\Xi +\Xi\Xi 039E uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\xi\xi +\xi\xi 03BE Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). -\zeta\zeta +\zeta\zeta 03B6 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). @@ -11828,36 +13033,191 @@ operator \bigwedge. provides versions to use in mathematical text. -\mathdollar\mathdollar +\mathdollar\mathdollar Dollar sign in math mode: $. -\mathparagraph\mathparagraph +\mathparagraph\mathparagraph Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, 00B6. -\mathsection\mathsection +\mathsection\mathsection Section sign in math mode 00A7. -\mathsterling\mathsterling +\mathsterling\mathsterling Sterling sign in math mode: £. -\mathunderscore\mathunderscore +\mathunderscore\mathunderscore Underscore in math mode: _. -Blackboard bold
Doublestruck characters.
-
Calligraphic
Cursive characters.
+Arrows
List of arrows.
 
\boldmath & \unboldmath
Symbols in boldface.
+
Blackboard bold
Doublestruck characters.
+
Calligraphic
Cursive characters.
+
Delimiters
Parentheses, braces, etc.
 
Dots
Ellipses, etc.
+
Greek letters
List of Greek letters.
 
-Blackboard boldCalligraphicMath symbols +Arrows\boldmath & \unboldmathMath symbols +Arrows + +arrows +symbols, arrows +math, arrows + +package, amsfonts +amsfonts package + +package, latexsym +latexsym package + +These are the arrows that come with standard &latex;. The +latexsym and amsfonts packages contain many more. + + +SymbolCommand + +021D3 \Downarrow + +02193 \downarrow + +021A9 \hookleftarrow + +021AA \hookrightarrow + +2190 \leftarrow + +021D0 \Leftarrow + +021D4 \Leftrightarrow + +02194 \leftrightarrow + +027F5 \longleftarrow + +027F8 \Longleftarrow + +027F7 \longleftrightarrow + +027FA \Longleftrightarrow + +027FC \longmapsto + +027F9 \Longrightarrow + +027F6 \longrightarrow + +021A6 \mapsto + +02197 \nearrow + +02196 \nwarrow + +021D2 \Rightarrow + +02192 \rightarrow, or \to + +02198 \searrow + +02199 \swarrow + +02191 \uparrow + +021D1 \Uparrow + +02195 \updownarrow + +021D5 \Updownarrow + + +An example of the difference between \to and \mapsto +is: \( f\colon D\to C \) given by \( n\mapsto n^2 \). + +package, amscd +amscd package + +package, tikz-cd +tikz-cd package + +For commutative diagrams there are a number of packages, including +tikz-cd and amscd. + + + +\boldmath & \unboldmathBlackboard boldArrowsMath symbols +\boldmath & \unboldmath + +boldface mathematics +symbols, boldface +\boldmath +\unboldmath + +Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode): + + +
\boldmath \( math \)
+
+ + +or + + +
\unboldmath \( math \)
+
+ +\boldmath +\unboldmath +Declarations to change the letters and symbols in math to be in +a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular +(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display +math mode (Modes). Both commands are fragile +(\protect). + +In this example each \boldmath command takes place inside an +\mbox, + + +
we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+
+ + +which means \boldmath is only called in a text mode, here LR +mode, and explains why &latex; must switch to math mode to set v +and u. + +If you use either command inside math mode, as with Trouble: \( +\boldmath x \), then you get something like LaTeX Font Warning: +Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11 and LaTeX +Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line +11. + +package, bm +bm package + +There are many issues with \boldmath. New documents should use +the bm package provided by the &latex; Project team. A complete +description is outside the scope of this document (see the full +documentation on CTAN) but even this small example + + +
\usepackage{bm}   % in preamble
+...
+we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+
+ + +shows that it is an improvement over \boldmath. + + +
+Blackboard boldCalligraphic\boldmath & \unboldmathMath symbols Blackboard bold -blackboard bold -doublestruck +blackboard bold +doublestruck Synopsis: @@ -11878,7 +13238,7 @@ integers, etc.
-the \mathbb{N} gives blackboard bold symbol 2115 +the \mathbb{N} gives blackboard bold symbol 2115, representing the natural numbers. If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error @@ -11889,12 +13249,12 @@ capital letters; look on CTAN. -Calligraphic\boldmath & \unboldmathBlackboard boldMath symbols +CalligraphicDelimitersBlackboard boldMath symbols Calligraphic -calligraphic fonts -script fonts -fonts, script +calligraphic fonts +script fonts +fonts, script Synopsis: @@ -11911,83 +13271,370 @@ capital letters; look on CTAN. If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not get -an error. Instead you get unexpected output. For instance, -\mathcal{g} outputs a close curly brace symbol, while -\mathcal{+} outputs a plus sign. +an error but you also do not get math calligraphic output. For instance, +\mathcal{g} outputs a close curly brace symbol. -\boldmath & \unboldmathDotsCalligraphicMath symbols -\boldmath & \unboldmath +DelimitersDotsCalligraphicMath symbols +Delimiters -boldface mathematics -symbols, boldface -\boldmath -\unboldmath +delimiters +parentheses +braces +curly braces +brackets -Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode): +Delimiters are parentheses, braces, or other characters used to mark +the start and end of subformulas. This formula has three sets of +parentheses delimiting the three subformulas. -
\boldmath \( math \)
+
(z-z_0)^2 = (x-x_0)^2 + (y-y_0)^2
+
+ + +The delimiters do not need to match, so you can enter \( [0,1) \). + +Here are the common delimiters: + + +DelimiterCommandName + +( ( Left parenthesis + +) ) Right parenthesis + +\} { or \lbrace Left brace + +\{ } or \rbrace Right brace + +[ [ or \lbrack Left bracket + +] ] or \rbrack Right bracket + +230A \lfloor Left floor bracket + +230B \rfloor Right floor bracket + +2308 \lceil Left ceiling bracket + +2309 \rceil Right ceiling bracket + +27E8 \langle Left angle bracket + +27E9 \rangle Right angle bracket + +/ / Slash, or forward slash + +\ \backslash Reverse slash, or backslash + +| | or \vert Vertical bar + +2016 \| or \Vert Double vertical bar + + +package, mathtools +mathtools package + +The mathtools package allows you to create commands for paired +delimiters. For instance, if you put +\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert} in your preamble +then you get two commands for single-line vertical bars (they only work +in math mode). The starred version, such as +\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}, has the height of the vertical bars +match the height of the argument. The unstarred version, such as +\abs{\frac{22}{7}}, has the bars fixed at a default height. +This version accepts an optional argument, as in \abs[size +command]{\frac{22}{7}}, where the height of the bars is given in +size command, such as \Bigg. Using \lVert and +\rVert as the symbols will give you a norm symbol with the same +behavior. + + +\left & \right
Automatically sized delimiters.
+
\bigl & \bigr etc.
Manually sized delimiters.
+
+ + +\left & \right\bigl & \bigr etc.Delimiters +\left & \right + +delimiters, paired +paired delimiters +matching parentheses +matching brackets +null delimiter +\left +\right + + + +Synopsis: + + +
\left delimiter1 ... \right delimiter2
+
+ +Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. &latex; makes +the delimiters tall enough to just cover the size of the formula that +they enclose. + +This makes a unit vector surrounded by parentheses tall enough to cover +the entries. + + +
\begin{equation}
+  \left(\begin{array}{c}
+    1   \\
+    0   \\
+  \end{array}\right)
+\end{equation}
+
+ +Delimiters, for a list of the common delimiters. + +Every \left must have a matching \right. In the above +example, leaving out the \left( gets the error message +Extra \right. Leaving out the \right) gets You +can't use `\eqno' in math mode. + +package, amsmath +amsmath package + +package, mathtools +mathtools package + +However, delimiter1 and delimiter2 need not match. A common +case is that you want an unmatched brace, as below. Use a period, +., as a null delimiter. + + +
\begin{equation}
+  f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
+                1             &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
+                f(n-1)+3n^2   &\mbox{--else}       
+       \end{array}\right.
+\end{equation}
+
+ + +Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a +backslash, \{. (The packages amsmath and +mathtools allow you to get the above construct through in a +cases environment.) + +The \left ... \right pair make a group. One consequence is that +the formula enclosed in the \left ... \right pair cannot have +line breaks in the output. This includes both manual line breaks and +&latex;-generated automatic ones. In this example, &latex; breaks the +equation to make the formula fit the margins. + + +
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
+\( (a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q+r+s+t+u+v+w+x+y+z) \)
+
+ + +But with \left and \right + + +
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
+\( \left(a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q+r+s+t+u+v+w+x+y+z\right) \)
+
+ + +&latex; won&textrsquo;t break the line, causing the formula to extend into the +margin. + +Because \left ... \right make a group, all the usual grouping +rules hold. Here, the value of \testlength set inside the +equation will be forgotten, and the output is 1.2pt. + + +
\newlength{\testlength} \setlength{\testlength}{1.2pt}
+\begin{equation}
+  \left( a+b=c \setlength{\testlength}{3.4pt} \right)
+  \the\testlength
+\end{equation}
+
+ +The \left ... \right pair affect the horizontal spacing of the +enclosed formula, in two ways. The first is that in \( \sin(x) = +\sin\left(x\right) \) the one after the equals sign has more space +around the x. That&textrsquo;s because \left( ... \right) inserts +an inner node while ( ... ) inserts an opening node. The second +way that the pair affect the horizontal spacing is that because they +form a group, the enclosed subformula will be typeset at its natural +width, with no stretching or shrinking to make the line fit better. + +&tex; scales the delimiters according to the height and depth of the +contained formula. Here &latex; grows the brackets to extend the full +height of the integral. + + +
\begin{equation}
+  \left[ \int_{x=r_0}^{\infty} -G\frac{Mm}{r^2}\, dr \right] 
+\end{equation}
+
+ +Manual sizing is often better. For instance, although below the rule +has no depth, &tex; will create delimiters that extend far below the +rule. + + +
\begin{equation}
+  \left( \rule{1pt}{1cm} \right)
+\end{equation}
+
+ + +&tex; can choose delimiters that are too small, as in \( \left| +|x|+|y| \right| \). It can also choose delimiters that are too large, +as here. + + +
\begin{equation}
+  \left( \sum_{0\leq i<n} i^k \right)
+\end{equation}
+
+ + +A third awkward case is when a long displayed formula is on more than +one line and you must match the sizes of the opening and closing +delimiter; you can&textrsquo;t use \left on the first line and +\right on the last because they must be paired. + +To size the delimiters manually, see \bigl & \bigr etc.. + + +
+\bigl & \bigr etc.\left & \rightDelimiters +\bigl, \bigr, etc. + +Synopsis, one of: + + +
\bigldelimiter1 ... \bigrdelimiter2
+\Bigldelimiter1 ... \bigrdelimiter2
+\biggldelimiter1 ... \biggrdelimiter2
+\Biggldelimiter1 ... \Biggrdelimiter2  
+
+ + +(as with \bigl[...\bigr]; strictly speaking they need not be +paired, see below), or one of: + + +
\bigmdelimiter
+\Bigmdelimiter
+\biggmdelimiter
+\Biggmdelimiter
+
+ + +(as with \bigm|), or one of: + + +
\bigdelimiter
+\Bigdelimiter
+\biggdelimiter
+\Biggdelimiter
 
-or +(as with \big[). + +Produce manually-sized delimiters. For delimiters that are +automatically sized see \left & \right). + +This produces slightly larger outer vertical bars. -
\unboldmath \( math \)
+
  \bigl| |x|+|y| \bigr|
 
-\boldmath -\unboldmath -Declarations to change the letters and symbols in math to be in -a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular -(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display -math mode (Modes). Both commands are fragile -(\protect). +The commands above are listed in order of increasing size. You can use +the smallest size such as \bigl...\bigr in a paragraph without +causing &latex; to spread the lines apart. The larger sizes are meant +for displayed equations. -In this example each \boldmath command takes place inside an -\mbox, +Delimiters, for a list of the common delimiters. In the family of +commands with l and r, delimiter1 and +delimiter2 need not be the same. + +The l and r commands produce open and close delimiters +that insert no horizontal space between a preceding atom and the +delimiter, while the commands without l and r insert some +space (because each delimiter is set as an ordinary variable). Compare +these two. + -
we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+
\begin{tabular}{l}
+  \(\displaystyle \sin\biggl(\frac{1}{2}\biggr) \)  \\  % good
+  \(\displaystyle \sin\bigg(\frac{1}{2}\bigg)  \)   \\  % bad
+\end{tabular}
 
-which means \boldmath is only called in a text mode, here LR -mode, and explains why &latex; must switch to math mode to set v -and u. +The traditional typographic treatment is on the first line. On the +second line the output will have some extra space between the +\sin and the open parenthesis. -If you use either command inside math mode, as with Trouble: \( -\boldmath x \), then you get something like LaTeX Font Warning: -Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11 and LaTeX -Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line -11. +Commands without l or r do give correct spacing in +some circumstances, as with this large vertical line -package, bm -bm package + +
\begin{equation}
+  \int_{x=a}^b x^2\,dx = \frac{1}{3} x^3 \Big|_{x=a}^b
+\end{equation}
+
-There are many issues with \boldmath. New documents should use -the bm package provided by the &latex; Project team. A complete -description is outside the scope of this document (see the full -documentation on CTAN) but even this small example +package, amsmath +amsmath package + + +(many authors would replace \frac with the \tfrac command +from the amsmath package), and as with this larger slash. -
\usepackage{bm}   % in preamble
-...
-we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+
\begin{equation}
+  \lim_{n\to\infty}\pi(n) \big/ (n/\log n) = 1
+\end{equation}
 
- -shows that it is an improvement over \boldmath. +Unlike the \left...\right pair (\left & \right), the +commands here with l and r do not make a group. +Strictly speaking they need not be matched so you can write something +like this. + +
\begin{equation}
+  \Biggl[ \pi/6 ] 
+\end{equation}
+
+ +The commands with m are for relations, which are in the middle of +formulas, as here. + + +
\begin{equation}
+  \biggl\{ a\in B \biggm| a=\sum_{0\leq i<n}3i^2+4 \biggr\}
+\end{equation}  
+
+ + + + + -Dots\boldmath & \unboldmathMath symbols +DotsGreek lettersDelimitersMath symbols Dots, horizontal or vertical -ellipses -dots +ellipses +dots Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern continues. @@ -12004,18 +13651,18 @@ continues. ellipses cdots -\cdots\cdots +\cdots\cdots Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line, as in 22EF. Used as: \( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} \). ellipses ddots -\ddots\ddots +\ddots\ddots Diagonal ellipsis, 22F1. See the above array example for a usage. ellipses ldots -\ldots\ldots +\ldots\ldots Ellipsis on the baseline, 2026. Used as: \( x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \). Another example is the above array example. A synonym is \mathellipsis. A synonym from the amsmath @@ -12026,14 +13673,14 @@ package is \hdots. mode or LR mode a synonym for \ldots is \dots.) ellipses vdots -\vdots\vdots +\vdots\vdots Vertical ellipsis, 22EE. See the above array example for a usage. -package, amsmath -amsmath package +package, amsmath +amsmath package The amsmath package has the command \dots to semantically mark up ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs @@ -12061,127 +13708,202 @@ or relation symbol, \dotsi for dots with integrals, or \dotso for others. + +Greek lettersDotsMath symbols +Greek letters + +Greek letters + +The upper case versions of these Greek letters are only shown when they +differ from Roman upper case letters. + + +SymbolCommandName + +03B1\alphaAlpha + +03B2\betaBeta + +03B3, 0393\gamma, \GammaGamma + +03B4, 0394\delta, \DeltaDelta + +03B5, 03F5 + \varepsilon, \epsilonEpsilon + +03B6\zetaZeta + +03B7\etaEta + +03B8, 03D1\theta, \vartheta + Theta + +03B9\iotaIota + +03BA\kappaKappa + +03BB, 039B\lambda, \Lambda + Lambda + +03BC\muMu + +03BD\nuNu + +03BE, 039E\xi, \XiXi + +03C0, 03A0\pi, \PiPi + +03C1, 03F1\rho, \varrhoRho + +03C3, 03A3\sigma, \SigmaSigma + +03C4\tauTau + +03D5, 03C6, 03A6 + \phi, \varphi, \PhiPhi + +03C7\chichi + +03C8, 03A8\psi, \PsiPsi + +03C9, 03A9\omega, \OmegaOmega + + +package, unicode-math +unicode-math package + +For omicron, if you are using &latex;&textrsquo;s default Computer Modern font +then enter omicron just as o or O. If you like having the +name or if your font shows a difference then you can use something like +\newcommand\omicron{o}. The package unicode-math has +\upomicron for upright omicron and \mitomicron for math +italic. + +While the set membership relation symbol 2208 generated by +\in is related to epsilon, it is never used for a variable. + +
Math functionsMath accentsMath symbolsMath formulas
Math functions -math functions -functions, math +math functions +functions, math These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper spacing. -\arccos\arccos +\arccos\arccos Inverse cosine -\arcsin\arcsin +\arcsin\arcsin Inverse sine -\arctan\arctan +\arctan\arctan Inverse tangent -\arg\arg +\arg\arg Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane -\bmod\bmod +\bmod\bmod Binary modulo operator, used as in \( 5\bmod 3=2 \) -\cos\cos +\cos\cos Cosine -\cosh\cosh +\cosh\cosh Hyperbolic cosine -\cot\cot +\cot\cot Cotangent -\coth\coth +\coth\coth Hyperbolic cotangent -\csc\csc +\csc\csc Cosecant -\deg\deg +\deg\deg Degrees -\det\det +\det\det Determinant -\dim\dim +\dim\dim Dimension -\exp\exp +\exp\exp Exponential -\gcd\gcd +\gcd\gcd Greatest common divisor -\hom\hom +\hom\hom Homomorphism -\inf\inf +\inf\inf Infinum -\ker\ker +\ker\ker Kernel -\lg\lg +\lg\lg Base 2 logarithm -\lim\lim +\lim\lim Limit -\liminf\liminf +\liminf\liminf Limit inferior -\limsup\limsup +\limsup\limsup Limit superior -\ln\ln +\ln\ln Natural logarithm -\log\log +\log\log Logarithm -\max\max +\max\max Maximum -\min\min +\min\min Minimum -\pmod\pmod +\pmod\pmod Parenthesized modulus, as used in \( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \) -\Pr\Pr +\Pr\Pr Probability -\sec\sec +\sec\sec Secant -\sin\sin +\sin\sin Sine -\sinh\sinh +\sinh\sinh Hyperbolic sine -\sup\sup +\sup\sup sup -\tan\tan +\tan\tan Tangent -\tanh\tanh +\tanh\tanh Hyperbolic tangent -package, amsmath -amsmath package +package, amsmath +amsmath package The amsmath package adds improvements on some of these, and also allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but @@ -12196,68 +13918,68 @@ below, as is traditional with \lim, \sup, or \ma Math accentsOver- and UnderliningMath functionsMath formulas
Math accents -math accents -accents, mathematical +math accents +accents, mathematical &latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in math. These are different from accents in normal text (Accents). -\acute\acute -acute accent, math +\acute\acute +acute accent, math Math acute accent -\bar\bar -bar-over accent, math -macron accent, math +\bar\bar +bar-over accent, math +macron accent, math Math bar-over accent -\breve\breve -breve accent, math +\breve\breve +breve accent, math Math breve accent -\check\check -check accent, math -hacek accent, math +\check\check +check accent, math +hacek accent, math Math hacek (check) accent -\ddot\ddot -double dot accent, math +\ddot\ddot +double dot accent, math Math dieresis accent -\dot\dot -overdot accent, math -dot over accent, math +\dot\dot +overdot accent, math +dot over accent, math Math dot accent -\grave\grave -grave accent, math +\grave\grave +grave accent, math Math grave accent -\hat\hat -hat accent, math -circumflex accent, math +\hat\hat +hat accent, math +circumflex accent, math Math hat (circumflex) accent -\mathring\mathring -ring accent, math +\mathring\mathring +ring accent, math Math ring accent -\tilde\tilde -tilde accent, math +\tilde\tilde +tilde accent, math Math tilde accent -\vec\vec -vector symbol, math +\vec\vec +vector symbol, math Math vector symbol -\widehat\widehat -wide hat accent, math +\widehat\widehat +wide hat accent, math Math wide hat accent -\widetilde\widetilde -wide tilde accent, math +\widetilde\widetilde +wide tilde accent, math Math wide tilde accent @@ -12270,35 +13992,35 @@ one without a dot, \imath or jmath (Over- and UnderliningSpacing in math modeMath accentsMath formulas
Over- and Underlining -overlining -underlining +overlining +underlining &latex; provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or putting braces over or under some material. -\underline{text}\underline{text} +\underline{text}\underline{text} Underline text. Works inside math mode, and outside. The line is always completely below the text, taking account of descenders, so in \(\underline{y}\) the line is lower than in \(\underline{x}\). This command is fragile (\protect). -package, ulem -ulem package +package, ulem +ulem package Note that the package ulem does text mode underlining and allows line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the documentation on CTAN. See also \hrulefill & \dotfill for producing a line, for such things as a signature. -\overline{text}\overline{text} +\overline{text}\overline{text} Put a horizontal line over text. Works inside math mode, and outside. For example, \overline{x+y}. Note that this differs from the command \bar (Math accents). -\underbrace{math}\underbrace{math} +\underbrace{math}\underbrace{math} Put a brace under math. For example, this (1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3) emphasizes the telescoping part. Attach text to the brace by using subscript, _, or superscript, @@ -12314,15 +14036,15 @@ Attach text to the brace by using subscript, _, or superscript, The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look unconnected to the underbrace. -\overbrace{math}\overbrace{math} +\overbrace{math}\overbrace{math} Put a brace over math, as with \overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}. See also \underbrace. -package, mathtools -mathtools package +package, mathtools +mathtools package The package mathtools adds an over- and underbrace, as well as some improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN. @@ -12332,17 +14054,17 @@ some improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN. Spacing in math modeMath miscellanyOver- and UnderliningMath formulas
Spacing in math mode -spacing within math mode -math mode, spacing +spacing within math mode +math mode, spacing When typesetting mathematics, &latex; puts in spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter y=m x then &latex; ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x, as y=mx. -But &latex;&textrsquo;s rules sometimes need tweaking. For example, in an +But &latex;&textrsquo;s rules occasionally need tweaking. For example, in an integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the -f(x) and the dx, here done with the \, command. +f(x) and the dx, here done with the \, command:
\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
@@ -12357,25 +14079,39 @@ a M.
 
 \;
-\;
-\thickspace
+\;
+\thickspace
 spacing in math mode thickspace
-Synonym: \thickspace.  Normally 5.0mu plus 5.0mu.  Math
-mode only.
+Synonym: \thickspace.  Normally 5.0mu plus 5.0mu.
+With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be
+used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+
+\negthickspace
+\negthickspace
+Normally -5.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu.
+With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be
+used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
 
 \:
 \>
-\:
-\>
-\medspace
+\:
+\>
+\medspace
 spacing in math mode medspace
 Synonym: \medspace.  Normally 4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu.
-Math mode only.
+With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be
+used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+
+\negmedspace
+\negmedspace
+Normally -4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu.
+With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be
+used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
 
 \,
-\,
-\thinspace
-thin space
+\,
+\thinspace
+thin space
 Spacing in math mode/\thinspace
 spacing in math mode thinspace
 Synonym: \thinspace.  Normally 3mu, which is 1/6em.
@@ -12394,17 +14130,19 @@ this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.
 
 
 \!
-\!
-\negthinspace
-thin space, negative
+\!
+\negthinspace
+thin space, negative
 spacing in math mode negthinspace
-A negative thin space. Normally -3mu.  The \! command is
-math mode only but the \negthinspace command is available for
-text mode (\thinspace & \negthinspace).
+A negative thin space. Normally -3mu.
+With amsmath, or as of the 2020-10-01 &latex; release, can be
+used in text mode as well as math mode; before that, 
+The \! command is math mode only but the \negthinspace
+command has always worked in text mode (\thinspace & \negthinspace).
 
 \quad
-quad
-\quad
+quad
+\quad
 spacing in math mode quad
 This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
 surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space between
@@ -12412,23 +14150,24 @@ two equations inside a displaymath environment.  It is available
 in both text and math mode.
 
 \qquad
-\qquad
+\qquad
 spacing in math mode qquad
 A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em.  It is available in
 both text and math mode.
 
-\smash
Eliminate height or depth of a subformula.
-
\phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom
Make empty box with the same size as the argument.
+\smash
Eliminate height or depth of a subformula.
+
\phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom
Make empty box same size as argument.
+
\mathstrut
Add some vertical space to a formula.
 
\smash\phantom & \vphantom & \hphantomSpacing in math mode \smash -vertical spacing, math mode -math mode, vertical space +vertical spacing, math mode +math mode, vertical space Synopsis: @@ -12495,23 +14234,23 @@ mode. So if it starts a paragraph then you should first put a \leavevmode\smash{zzz} % usual paragraph indent
-package, mathtools -mathtools package +package, mathtools +mathtools package The package mathtools has operators that provide even finer control over smashing a subformula box. -\phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom\smashSpacing in math mode +\phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom\mathstrut\smashSpacing in math mode \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom -spacing, math mode -horizontal spacing -vertical spacing -math mode, spacing -invisible character -character, invisible +spacing, math mode +horizontal spacing +vertical spacing +math mode, spacing +invisible character +character, invisible Synopsis: @@ -12533,28 +14272,38 @@ control over smashing a subformula box. The \phantom command creates a box with the same height, depth, and width as subformula, but empty. That is, this command causes -&latex; to typeset the box but not its ink. The \vphantom -variant also produces an invisible box with the same height and depth as -subformula, but it has width zero. And \hphantom makes a -box with the same width as subformula but with height and depth -zero. - -Without the \vphantom in this example, the top bars of the two -square roots would be at different heights. +&latex; to typeset the space but not fill it with the material. Here +&latex; will put a box of the right size for the quotation, but empty. -
\( \sqrt{\vphantom{a^3}a}\cdot\sqrt{a^3} \)
+
\fbox{\phantom{Conservatism is the fear-filled worship of dead radicals.
+               --- Mark Twain}}
 
-The \vphantom{a^3} causes the first \sqrt to have inside -it a box of the same height as the second \sqrt, so &latex; -makes the bars align. +The \vphantom variant produces an invisible box with the same +vertical size as subformula, the same height and depth, but having +zero width. And \hphantom makes a box with the same width as +subformula but with zero height and depth. -These commands often are combined with \smash. \smash -for another example of the use of \vphantom. +In this example, the tower of exponents in the second summand expression +is so tall that &tex; places this expression further down than its +default. Without adjustment, the two summand expressions would be at +different levels. The \vphantom in the first expression tells +&tex; to leave as much vertical room as it does for the tower, so the +two expressions come out at the same level. + + +
\begin{displaymath}
+    \sum_{j\in\{0,\ldots\, 10\}\vphantom{3^{3^{3^j}}}}
+      \sum_{i\in\{0,\ldots\, 3^{3^{3^j}}\}} i\cdot j
+\end{displaymath}
+
+ +These commands are often used in conjunction with \smash. +\smash, which includes another example of \vphantom. -package, mathtools -mathtools package +package, mathtools +mathtools package The three phantom commands appear often but note that &latex; provides a suite of other commands to work with box sizes that may be more @@ -12564,8 +14313,8 @@ as \settodepth (\setto In addition, the mathtools package has many commands that offer fine-grained control over spacing. -package, amsmath -amsmath package +package, amsmath +amsmath package All three commands produce an ordinary box, without any special mathematics status. So to do something like attaching a superscript you @@ -12578,12 +14327,45 @@ mode. So if one of these starts a paragraph then you should prefix it with \leavevmode. + +\mathstrut\phantom & \vphantom & \hphantomSpacing in math mode +\mathstrut + +\mathstrut +spacing, math mode +vertical spacing +math mode, spacing +invisible character +character, invisible + +Synopsis: + + +
\mathstrut
+
+ +The analogue of \strut for mathematics. \strut. + +The input $\sqrt{x} + \sqrt{x^i}$ gives output where the +second radical is taller than the first. To add extra vertical space +without any horizontal space, so that the two have the same height, use +$\sqrt{x\mathstrut} + \sqrt{x^i\mathstrut}$. + +The \mathstrut command adds the vertical height of an open +parenthesis, (, but no horizontal space. It is defined as +\vphantom{(}, so see \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom for +more. An advantage over \strut is that \mathstrut adds no +depth, which is often the right thing for formulas. Using the height of +an open parenthesis is just a convention; for complete control over the +amount of space, use \rule with a width of zero. \rule. + +
Math miscellanySpacing in math modeMath formulas
Math miscellany -math miscellany +math miscellany &latex; contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are some that don&textrsquo;t fit into other categories. @@ -12592,7 +14374,6 @@ some that don&textrsquo;t fit into other categories. Colon character & \colon
Colon.
 
\*
Discretionary multiplication.
 
\frac
Fraction.
-
\left & \right
Paired delimiters.
 
\sqrt
Radicals.
 
\stackrel
Text over a relation.
 
@@ -12601,10 +14382,9 @@ some that don&textrsquo;t fit into other categories. Colon character & \colon\*Math miscellany Colon character : & \colon -: -colon character -: -\colon +colon character +: for math +\colon Synopsis, one of: @@ -12619,16 +14399,16 @@ some that don&textrsquo;t fit into other categories.
With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
 
-package, amsmath -amsmath package +package, amsmath +amsmath package Ordinary &latex; defines \colon to produce the colon character with the spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation \{x\colon 0\leq x<1\}. -package, amsmath -amsmath package +package, amsmath +amsmath package But the widely-used amsmath package defines \colon for use in the definition of functions f\colon D\to C. So if you want @@ -12639,11 +14419,11 @@ the colon character as a punctuation then use \mathpunct{:}< \*\fracColon character & \colonMath miscellany \* -multiplication, discretionary -breaks, multiplication discretionary -line breaks, multiplication discretionary -discretionary breaks, multiplication -\* +multiplication, discretionary +breaks, multiplication discretionary +line breaks, multiplication discretionary +discretionary breaks, multiplication +\* Synopsis: @@ -12663,11 +14443,11 @@ break, followed by \( A_3 A_4 \).
-\frac\left & \right\*Math miscellany +\frac\sqrt\*Math miscellany \frac -fraction -\frac +fraction +\frac Synopsis: @@ -12682,65 +14462,13 @@ mode it comes out small; see the discussion of \displaystyle
-\left & \right\sqrt\fracMath miscellany -\left & \right - -delimiters, paired -paired delimiters -matching parentheses -matching brackets -null delimiter -\left -\right - -Synopsis: - - -
\left delimiter1 ... \right delimiter2
-
- -Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. The delimiters -are sized according to the math they enclose. This makes a unit vector -surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses. - - -
\begin{equation}
-  \left(\begin{array}{c}
-    1   \\
-    0   \\
-  \end{array}\right)
-
- -Every \left must have a matching \right. Leaving out the -\left( in the above gets Extra \right. Leaving off the -\right) gets You can't use `\eqno' in math mode. - -However, the two delimiters delimiter1 and delimiter2 need -not match. A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as -below. Use a period, ., as a null delimiter. - - -
\begin{equation}
-  f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
-                1             &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
-                f(n-1)+3n^2   &\mbox{--else}       
-       \end{array}\right.
-\end{equation}
-
- - -Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a -backslash, \{. - - -
-\sqrt\stackrel\left & \rightMath miscellany +\sqrt\stackrel\fracMath miscellany \sqrt -square root -roots -radical -\sqrt +square root +roots +radical +\sqrt Synopsis, one of: @@ -12763,9 +14491,9 @@ a large enough arg, it is vertical). \stackrel\sqrtMath miscellany \stackrel -stack math -relation, text above -\stackrel +stack math +relation, text above +\stackrel Synopsis, one of: @@ -12783,7 +14511,7 @@ arrow enter \stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}ModesPage stylesMath formulasTop Modes -modes +modes As &latex; processes your document, at any point it is in one of six modes. They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal @@ -12791,16 +14519,16 @@ modes, the math modes, and the vertical modes. Some commands only work in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of the math modes), and error messages will refer to these. - + modes paragraph mode -paragraph mode +paragraph mode Paragraph mode is what &latex; is in when processing ordinary text. It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. This is the mode &latex; is in most of the time. -left-to-right mode -LR mode +left-to-right mode +LR mode modes lr mode LR mode (for left-to-right mode; in plain &tex; this is called restricted horizontal mode) is in effect when &latex; starts @@ -12813,24 +14541,24 @@ that box into a line, it could very well complain that the finished LR box won&textrsquo;t fit there.) -math mode +math mode modes math mode Math mode is when &latex; is generating an inline mathematical formula. -display math mode +display math mode Display math mode is when &latex; is generating a displayed mathematical formula. (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from inline ones. One example is that the placement of the subscript on \int differs in the two situations.) -vertical mode +vertical mode modes vertical mode Vertical mode is when &latex; is building the list of lines and other material making the output page. This is the mode &latex; is in when it starts a document. -internal vertical mode +internal vertical mode modes internal vertical mode Internal vertical mode is in effect when &latex; starts making a \vbox. This is the vertical analogue of LR mode. @@ -12845,8 +14573,8 @@ mode, then the next switch happens at the \( where &latex; changes to math mode, and then when it leaves the formula it pops back to paragraph mode. -inner paragraph mode -outer paragraph mode +inner paragraph mode +outer paragraph mode modes inner paragraph mode modes outer paragraph mode Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a \parbox command @@ -12896,8 +14624,8 @@ But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf. Page stylesSpacesModesTop Page styles -styles, page -page styles +styles, page +page styles The style of a page determines where &latex; places the components of that page, such as headers and footers, and the text body. This @@ -12905,8 +14633,8 @@ includes pages in the main part of the document but also includes special pages such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or the first page of an article. -package, fancyhdr -fancyhdr package +package, fancyhdr +fancyhdr package The package fancyhdr is very helpful for constructing page styles. See its documentation on CTAN. @@ -12922,8 +14650,8 @@ styles. See its documentation on CTAN. \maketitle\pagenumberingPage styles
\maketitle -titles, making -\maketitle +titles, making +\maketitle Synopsis: @@ -12933,7 +14661,7 @@ styles. See its documentation on CTAN. Generate a title. In the standard classes the title appears on a separate page, except in the article class where it is at the top -of the first page. (Document class options for information about +of the first page. (Document class options, for information about the titlepage document class option.) This example shows \maketitle appearing in its usual place, @@ -12966,10 +14694,10 @@ the following declarations. These must come before the \maketitle, either in the preamble or in the document body. -\author{name1 \and name2 \and ...}\author{name1 \and name2 \and ...} -author, for titlepage -\\ for \author -\and for \author +\author{name1 \and name2 \and ...}\author{name1 \and name2 \and ...} +author, for titlepage +\\ for \author +\and for \author Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is a list of authors separated by \and commands. To separate lines within a single author&textrsquo;s entry, for instance to give the author&textrsquo;s @@ -12977,25 +14705,25 @@ institution or address, use a double backslash, \\. If you omit the \author declaration then you get LaTeX Warning: No \author given. -\date{text}\date{text} -date, for titlepage +\date{text}\date{text} +date, for titlepage Optional. Declare text to be the document&textrsquo;s date. The text doesn&textrsquo;t need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If you omit \date then &latex; uses the current date (\today). To have no date, instead use \date{}. -\thanks{text}\thanks{text} -thanks, for titlepage -credit footnote +\thanks{text}\thanks{text} +thanks, for titlepage +credit footnote Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author information for acknowledgements as illustrated above, but you can also use it in the title, or any place a footnote makes sense. It can be any text at all so you can use it for any purpose, such as to print an email address. -\title{text}\title{text} -title, for titlepage -\\ for \title +\title{text}\title{text} +title, for titlepage +\\ for \title Required. Declare text to be the title of the document. Get line breaks inside text with a double backslash, \\. If you omit the \title declaration then you get LaTeX Error: No @@ -13014,8 +14742,8 @@ house requirements.) \pagenumbering\pagestyle\maketitlePage styles
\pagenumbering -\pagenumbering -page numbering style +\pagenumbering +page numbering style Synopsis: @@ -13061,8 +14789,8 @@ get LaTeX Error: Counter too large. get LaTeX Error: Counter too large. gobble -package, hyperref -hyperref package +package, hyperref +hyperref package &latex; does not output a page number, although it does get reset. References to that page also are blank. (This does not work with the popular package hyperref so to have the page number @@ -13086,10 +14814,10 @@ number then you will manipulate the page counter \pagestyle\thispagestyle\pagenumberingPage styles
\pagestyle -\pagestyle -header style -footer style -running header and footer style +\pagestyle +header style +footer style +running header and footer style Synopsis: @@ -13100,8 +14828,8 @@ number then you will manipulate the page counter Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are typeset, from the current page onwards. -package, fancyhdr -fancyhdr package +package, fancyhdr +fancyhdr package A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package fancyhdr is now the standard way to manipulate headers and @@ -13174,7 +14902,7 @@ setting \rightmark to Subsection 2.1, etc. Here are the descriptions of \markboth and \markright: -\markboth{left-head}{right-head}\markboth{left-head}{right-head} +\markboth{left-head}{right-head}\markboth{left-head}{right-head} Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for either a page style of headings or myheadings. A left hand page heading left-head is generated by the last \markboth @@ -13183,7 +14911,7 @@ command before the end of the page. A right hand page heading \markright that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one that came before that page. -\markright{right}\markright{right} +\markright{right}\markright{right} Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged. @@ -13193,8 +14921,8 @@ the last one that came before that page. \thispagestyle\pagestylePage styles
\thispagestyle -\thispagestyle -page style, this page +\thispagestyle +page style, this page Synopsis: @@ -13234,8 +14962,8 @@ To make the page entirely empty, the command SpacesBoxesPage stylesTop Spaces -spaces -white space +spaces +white space &latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. Some of these are best suited to mathematical text; see Spacing in @@ -13250,7 +14978,7 @@ chapter. \hfill
Stretchable horizontal space.  
 
\hss
Infinitely stretchable/shrinkable horizontal space.
 
\spacefactor
Stretchability of following space
-
\(SPACE)
Backslash-space; and explicit space.
+
\(SPACE)
Backslash-space, and explicit space.
 
~
Tie, an unbreakable space.
 
\thinspace & \negthinspace
One-sixth of an em, and negative one-sixth.  
 
\/
Italic correction.
@@ -13269,9 +14997,9 @@ Vertical space
 \enspace & \quad & \qquad\hspaceSpaces
 
\enspace & \quad & \qquad -\enspace -\quad -\qquad +\enspace +\quad +\qquad Synopsis, one of: @@ -13297,7 +15025,7 @@ measurement such as points (Lengths/
-Spacing in math mode for \quad and \qquad. These +Spacing in math mode, for \quad and \qquad. These are lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice in many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with \hspace. @@ -13307,7 +15035,7 @@ in many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with \hspace\hfill\enspace & \quad & \qquadSpaces
\hspace -\hspace +\hspace Synopsis, one of: @@ -13368,10 +15096,10 @@ space won&textrsquo;t shrink more than 0.25cm (\hfill\hss\hspaceSpaces
\hfill -\hfill +\hfill -stretch, infinite horizontal -infinite horizontal stretch +stretch, infinite horizontal +infinite horizontal stretch Synopsis: @@ -13389,7 +15117,7 @@ of the page and Quiz One on the right.
\noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
 
-\fill +\fill The \hfill command is equivalent to \hspace{\fill} and so the space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use \hspace*{\fill} (\hspace). @@ -13416,10 +15144,10 @@ so the space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use \hss\spacefactor\hfillSpaces
\hss -\hss -horizontal space -horizontal space, stretchable -space, inserting horizontal +\hss +horizontal space +horizontal space, stretchable +space, inserting horizontal Synopsis: @@ -13456,7 +15184,7 @@ X\hbox to 0pt{\hss Z}Y
\spacefactor=integer
 
-\spacefactor +\spacefactor Influence &latex;&textrsquo;s glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level documents do not use this command. @@ -13523,11 +15251,11 @@ then you have probably tried to redefine an internal command. \&arobase;\frenchspacing\spacefactor \&arobase; -\&arobase; -at-sign -period, sentence-ending -period, abbreviation-ending -period, spacing after +\&arobase; +at-sign +period, sentence-ending +period, abbreviation-ending +period, spacing after \AT Synopsis: @@ -13588,9 +15316,9 @@ Examples are Nat.\ Acad.\ Science, and Mr.~Bean, and \frenchspacing\normalsfcodes\&arobase;\spacefactor \frenchspacing -\frenchspacing -\nonfrenchspacing -spacing, inter-sentence +\frenchspacing +\nonfrenchspacing +spacing, inter-sentence Synopsis, one of: @@ -13608,7 +15336,7 @@ The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring \frenchspacing -(the command is from Plain &tex;) switches to the tradition that all +(the command is from plain &tex;) switches to the tradition that all spaces are treated equally. @@ -13616,8 +15344,8 @@ spaces are treated equally. \normalsfcodes\frenchspacing\spacefactor \normalsfcodes -\normalsfcodes -spacing, inter-sentence +\normalsfcodes +spacing, inter-sentence Synopsis: @@ -13634,9 +15362,11 @@ spaces are treated equally. \(SPACE)~\spacefactorSpaces
Backslash-space, \ -\NEWLINE -\SPACE -\TAB +\NEWLINE +\SPACE +\ (backslash-space) +\TAB +\SPACE This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a backslash followed by a space. Synopsis: @@ -13676,7 +15406,7 @@ in \TeX\ is nice. (But using curly parentheses, as in \TeX{} is best, has the advantage of still working if the next character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in So -says Prof.\ Smith (\&arobase;). +says Prof.\ Smith or Jones et al.\ (1993) (\&arobase;). Under normal circumstances, \tab and \newline are equivalent to backslash-space, \ . @@ -13690,11 +15420,12 @@ are equivalent to backslash-space, \ . ~\thinspace & \negthinspace\(SPACE)Spaces
~ -~ -tie -space, hard -space, unbreakable -NBSP +~ +tie +space, unbreakable +hard space +unbreakable space +NBSP Synopsis: @@ -13717,30 +15448,38 @@ space has length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus In addition, despite the period, &latex; does not use the end-of-sentence spacing (\&arobase;). -Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could cause -confusion. But they also reduce &latex;&textrsquo;s options when it breaks lines -into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters of -taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers. Nevertheless, -here are some usage models, many of them from the &tex;book. +Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could +cause confusion. They also still allow hyphenation (of either of the +tied words), so they are generally preferable to putting consecutive +words in an \mbox (\mbox & \makebox). + +They are also matters of taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, +among readers. Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them +from The &tex;book. Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references: Chapter~12, or Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}, or -Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}. When cases are enumerated inline: -(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded. +Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}. + + +When cases are enumerated inline: (b)~Show that $f(x)$ is +(1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded. -package, siunitx -siunitx package +package, siunitx +siunitx package Between a number and its unit: $745.7.8$~watts (the siunitx package has a special facility for this) or 144~eggs. This includes between a month and a date: -October~12 or 12~Oct. In general, in any expressions where -numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space: +October~12 or 12~Oct. In general, in any expressions +where numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space: AD~565, or 2:50~pm, or Boeing~747, or -268~Plains Road, or \$$1.4$~billion. +268~Plains Road, or \$$1.4$~billion. Other common +choices here are a thin space (\thinspace & \negthinspace) and +no space at all. When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: equals~$n$, or @@ -13757,14 +15496,11 @@ common with~$m$. \ldots,~$n$. -Between a person&textrsquo;s forenames and between multiple surnames: +Between a person&textrsquo;s given names and between multiple surnames: Donald~E. Knuth, or Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo, or -Charles~XII (but you must give TeX places to break the line so -you may do Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin). - - -Before a dash: pages 12~--14 or it is~--- it must be -said~--- plausible. +Charles~XII&textmdash;but you must give &tex; places to break the line +so you might do Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la +Vall\'ee~Poussin. @@ -13773,12 +15509,12 @@ said~--- plausible. \thinspace & \negthinspace\/~Spaces
\thinspace & \negthinspace -\thinspace -\negthinspace -thin space -space, thin -thin space, negative -space, negative thin +\thinspace +\negthinspace +thin space +space, thin +thin space, negative +space, negative thin Synopsis, one of: @@ -13787,14 +15523,14 @@ said~--- plausible. \negthinspace -Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6em and --1/6em. These are the text mode equivalents of \, and -\! (Spacing in math mode/\thinspace). You can use -\, as a synonym for \thinspace in text mode. +These produce unbreakable and unstretchable spaces of 1/6em and +-1/6em, respectively. These are the text mode equivalents of +\, and \! (Spacing in math mode/\thinspace). -The \negthinspace command is used in text mode mostly for -fiddling with spaces. One common use of \thinspace is as the -space between nested quotes. +You can use \, as a synonym for \thinspace in text mode. + +One common use of \thinspace is as the space between nested +quotes:
Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
@@ -13803,16 +15539,22 @@ space between nested quotes.
 
 Another use is that some style guides call for a \thinspace
 between an ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides,
-though, think the three dots are quite enough already).  Still another
-use is between initials, as in D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth.
+think the three dots and/or four dots are plenty).  Another
+style-specific use is between initials, as in D.\thinspace E.\
+Knuth.
+
+&latex; provides a variety of similar spacing commands
+(Spacing in math mode).  With amsmath, or as of the
+2020-10-01 &latex; release, they can be used in text mode as well as
+math mode, including \! for \negthinspace; before that,
+they were available only in math mode.
 
-
 
\/\hrulefill & \dotfill\thinspace & \negthinspaceSpaces
\/ -\/ -italic correction +\/ +italic correction Synopsis: @@ -13821,10 +15563,11 @@ use is between initials, as in D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth. Insert an italic correction, a small space defined by the font -designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with -whatever follows. When you use \/, &latex; takes the correction -from the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been -applied to the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space. +designer for each character (possibly zero), to avoid the character +colliding with whatever follows. When you use \/, &latex; +takes the correction from the font metric file, scales it by any +scaling that has been applied to the font, and then inserts that much +horizontal space. Here, were it not for the \/, the before-character italic f would hit the after-character roman H @@ -13834,30 +15577,42 @@ italic f would hit the after-character roman H -because the italic letter leans far to the right. +because the italic letter f leans far to the right. If after-character is a period or comma then don&textrsquo;t insert an -italic correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small -height. However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal -letters, the italic correction can help. +italic correction since those punctuation symbols are so low to the +baseline already. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as with +normal letters, the italic correction can help. It is typically used +between a switch from italic or slanted fonts to an upright font. + +When you use commands such as \emph and \textit and +\textsl to change fonts, &latex; automatically inserts the +italic correction when needed (Font styles). However, +declarations such as \em and \itshape and +\slshape do not automatically insert italic corrections. -When you use commands such as \textit or \itshape to -change fonts, &latex; will automatically insert any needed italic -correction (Font styles). +Upright characters can also have an italic correction. An example +where this is needed is the name pdf\/\TeX. However, most +upright characters have a zero italic correction. Some font creators +do not include italic correction values even for italic fonts. -Roman characters can also have an italic correction. An example is in -the name pdf\/\TeX. +\fontdimen1 +font dimension, slant +Technically, &latex; uses another font-specific value, the so-called +slant parameter (namely \fontdimen1), to determine whether to +possibly insert an italic correction, rather than tying the action to +particular font commands. -There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done -in a different way. +There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; math spacing is +done in a different way.
\hrulefill & \dotfill\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip\/Spaces
\hrulefill & \dotfill -\hrulefill -\dotfill +\hrulefill +\dotfill Synopsis, one of: @@ -13954,22 +15709,22 @@ file. bigskip -\bigskip\bigskip -\bigskipamount +\bigskip\bigskip +\bigskipamount The same as \vspace{\bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the book and article classes is 12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt. medskip -\medskip\medskip -\medskipamount +\medskip\medskip +\medskipamount The same as \vspace{\medskipamount}, ordinarily about half of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the book and article classes is 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt. smallskip -\smallskip\smallskip -\smallskipamount +\smallskip\smallskip +\smallskipamount The same as \vspace{\smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the book and article classes is 3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt. @@ -14024,8 +15779,8 @@ with def. \strut\vspace\bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreakSpaces
\strut -\strut -strut +\strut +strut Synopsis: @@ -14090,10 +15845,10 @@ third list&textrsquo;s \parbox goes only to the bottom of its secon the baseline. The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra below-baseline space. -package, TikZ -TikZ package - package, Asymptote -Asymptote package +package, TikZ +TikZ package + package, Asymptote +Asymptote package The \strut command is often useful in graphics, such as in TikZ or Asymptote. For instance, you may have a command @@ -14129,9 +15884,9 @@ integral would still hit the line.) \vspace\vfill\strutSpaces
\vspace -\vspace -vertical space -space, vertical +\vspace +vertical space +space, vertical Synopsis, one of: @@ -14154,7 +15909,7 @@ The new day dawned cold. -(\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip for common inter-paragraph +(\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, for common inter-paragraph spaces.) The *-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More @@ -14196,10 +15951,10 @@ the page, with at least one inch of space below each. \vfill\addvspace\vspaceSpaces
\vfill -\vfill +\vfill -stretch, infinite vertical -infinite vertical stretch +stretch, infinite vertical +infinite vertical stretch Synopsis: @@ -14237,9 +15992,9 @@ Lost Dog! \addvspace\vfillSpaces
\addvspace -\addvspace -vertical space -space, inserting vertical +\addvspace +vertical space +space, inserting vertical Synopsis: @@ -14278,7 +16033,7 @@ The two rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the Now uncomment the second \addvspace. It does not make the gap 20pt longer; instead the gap is the sum of \baselineskip and 20pt. So \addvspace in a sense does the opposite of -its name &textmdash; it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not +its name&textmdash;it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not accumulate, but instead that only the largest one is used. &latex; uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below @@ -14298,12 +16053,15 @@ with a \par command (\parBoxesColorSpacesTop Boxes -boxes +boxes At its core, &latex; puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a page. So these commands are central. +package, adjustbox +adjustbox package + There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating boxes. One useful adjunct to the commands here is adjustbox. @@ -14321,11 +16079,11 @@ One useful adjunct to the commands here is adjustbox. \mbox & \makebox\fbox & \frameboxBoxes
\mbox & \makebox -\mbox -\makebox -box -make a box -hyphenation, preventing +\mbox +\makebox +box +make a box +hyphenation, preventing Synopsis, one of: @@ -14343,13 +16101,13 @@ LR mode (Modes) so it Because text is not broken into lines, you can use \mbox to prevent hyphenation. In this example, &latex; will not hyphenate -the table name, T-4. +the tank name, T-34. -
See Table~\mbox{T-4}
+
The soviet tank \mbox{T-34} is a symbol of victory against nazism.
 
-The first two command versions, \mbox and \makebox, are +The first two command synopsis versions, \mbox and \makebox, are roughly equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the text. (They are like plain &tex;&textrsquo;s \hbox.) @@ -14381,7 +16139,7 @@ size you can say this.
\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
 
-For the fourth command version the optional argument position +For the fourth command synopsis version the optional argument position gives position of the text within the box. It may take the following values: @@ -14414,18 +16172,17 @@ puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
-package, TikZ -TikZ package +package, TikZ +TikZ package -package, Asymptote -Asymptote package +package, Asymptote +Asymptote package -The right edge of the output 10 points (note the ending space) -will be just before the What (note the space after -points). You can use \makebox similarly when making -graphics, such as in TikZ or Asymptote, where you put the -edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the length of that -text. +The right edge of the output 10 points (note the ending space +after points) will be just before the What. You can use +\makebox similarly when making graphics, such as in TikZ +or Asymptote, where you put the edge of the text at a known +location, regardless of the length of that text. For boxes with frames see \fbox & \framebox. For colors see Colored boxes. @@ -14434,19 +16191,20 @@ see Colored boxespicture environment, where the length is given in terms of \unitlength (\makebox (picture)). -If you put a double-backslash into text then &latex; will not -give you a new line; for instance \makebox{abc def \\ ghi} -outputs abc defghi while \makebox{abc def \par ghi} -outputs abc def ghi, but neither go to a second line. To get -multiple lines see \parbox and minipage. +As text is typeset in LR mode, neither a double backslash +\\ nor \par will give you a new line; for instance +\makebox{abc def \\ ghi} outputs abc defghi while +\makebox{abc def \par ghi} outputs abc def ghi, both on +a single line. To get multiple lines see \parbox +and minipage.
\fbox & \framebox\parbox\mbox & \makeboxBoxes
\fbox & \framebox -\fbox -\framebox +\fbox +\framebox Synopses, one of: @@ -14475,7 +16233,7 @@ a frame. \framebox{...}, are roughly the same. As to the third and fourth invocations, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as width and the position of the text inside that box as -position. \mbox & \makebox for the full description but +position. \mbox & \makebox, for the full description but here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4in wide. @@ -14490,18 +16248,18 @@ here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4in wide. fbox framebox fboxrule -\fboxrule\fboxrule -frame, line width -frame rule width -\fboxrule +\fboxrule\fboxrule +frame, line width +frame rule width +\fboxrule The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box. The default is 0.2pt. Change it with a command such as \setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt} (\setlength). fbox framebox fboxsep -\fboxsep\fboxsep -frame, separation from contents -\fboxsep +\fboxsep\fboxsep +frame, separation from contents +\fboxsep The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is 3pt. Change it with a command such as \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt} (\setlength). Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes: @@ -14530,7 +16288,7 @@ paragraph, and then frame the result. \end{minipage}} -Colored boxes for colors other than black and white. +Colored boxes, for colors other than black and white. The picture environment has a version of this command where the units depend on picture&textrsquo;s \unitlength (\framebox @@ -14541,9 +16299,9 @@ units depend on picture&textrsquo;s \unitlength (\parbox\raisebox\fbox & \frameboxBoxes
\parbox -\parbox -paragraph mode -paragraph, in a box +\parbox +paragraph mode +paragraph, in a box Synopses, one of: @@ -14583,10 +16341,10 @@ in that box. It should not have any paragraph-making components. There are three optional arguments, position, height, and inner-pos. The position gives the vertical alignment of the -parbox with respect to the surrounding material. The possible +parbox with respect to the surrounding material. The supported values are c or m to make the vertical center of the -parbox lines up with the center of the adjacent line (this is the -default), or t to match the top line of the parbox with +parbox lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (this is the +default), or t to match the top line of the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding material, or b to match the bottom line. @@ -14605,7 +16363,7 @@ stretchable space). \raisebox\sbox & \savebox\parboxBoxes
\raisebox -\raisebox +\raisebox Synopsis, one of: @@ -14617,12 +16375,12 @@ stretchable space). Raise or lower text. This command is fragile (\protect). -This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by -lowering the vertical bar symbol. +This example makes a command for denoting the restriction of a function +by lowering the vertical bar symbol. -
\newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
+
\newcommand*\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
 $f\restricted{A}$
 
@@ -14650,7 +16408,7 @@ depth). -
\usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc}  % in preamble
+
\usepackage{graphicx,calc}  % in preamble
    ...
 \begin{center}
   \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
@@ -14670,9 +16428,9 @@ second is the height of meta.png.
 \sbox & \saveboxlrbox\raiseboxBoxes
 
\sbox & \savebox -\sbox -\savebox -box, save +\sbox +\savebox +box, save Synopsis, one of: @@ -14685,13 +16443,13 @@ second is the height of meta.png. Typeset text just as with \makebox (\mbox & \makebox) except that &latex; does not output it but instead saves it -in a storage bin named box-cmd. The bin name box-cmd begins -with a backslash, \. You must have previously allocated the bin -box-cmd with \newsavebox (\newsavebox).The -\sbox command is robust while \savebox is fragile -(\protect). +in a box register referred to by a variable named box-cmd. The +variable name box-cmd begins with a backslash, \. You must +have previously allocated the box register box-cmd with \newsavebox +(\newsavebox). The \sbox command is robust while +\savebox is fragile (\protect). -This creates and uses a bin. +This creates and uses a box register.
\newsavebox{\fullname}
@@ -14699,34 +16457,34 @@ with a backslash, \.  You must have previously allocated the bin
   ...
 \usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too!
 Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
-There goes \\usebox{\fullname}!  Ya da da da da da da.
+There goes \usebox{\fullname}!  Ya da da da da da da.
 
-One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a \newcommand is -efficiency, that &latex; need not repeatedly retypeset the contents. -See the example below. +One advantage of using and reusing a box register over a +\newcommand macro variable is efficiency, that &latex; need not +repeatedly retypeset the contents. See the example below. The first two command invocations, \sbox{box-cmd}{text} and \savebox{box-cmd}{text}, are roughly equivalent. As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as width, and the position of the text inside that -box as position. \mbox & \makebox for the full +box as position. \mbox & \makebox, for the full description. In the \sbox and \savebox commands the text is typeset in LR mode so it does not have line breaks (Modes). If you use these then &latex; doesn&textrsquo;t give you an error but it ignores -what you want: if you enter \sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test} and -\usebox{\newbin} then you get testtest, while if you -enter \sbox{\newbin}{test \par test} and -\usebox{\newbin} then you get test test, but no error or +what you want: if you enter \sbox{\newreg}{test \\ test} and +\usebox{\newreg} then you get testtest, while if you +enter \sbox{\newreg}{test \par test} and +\usebox{\newreg} then you get test test, but no error or warning. To fix this use a \parbox or minipage as here. -
\savebox{\abin}{%
+
\savebox{\areg}{%
   \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
     \begin{enumerate}
       \item First item
@@ -14734,17 +16492,17 @@ warning.  To fix this use a \parbox or minipage as her
     \end{enumerate}
   \end{minipage}}
   ...
-\usebox{\abin}
+\usebox{\areg}
 
-As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin&textrsquo;s contents, this puts +As an example of the efficiency of reusing a register&textrsquo;s contents, this puts the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the header. &latex; only typesets it once.
\usepackage{graphicx}  % all this in the preamble
-\newsavebox{\sealbin}
-\savebox{\sealbin}{%
+\newsavebox{\sealreg}
+\savebox{\sealreg}{%
   \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}%
   \begin{picture}(0,0)%
      \put(1.5,-2.5){%
@@ -14754,22 +16512,22 @@ header.  &latex; only typesets it once.
        \end{tabular}}
   \end{picture}%
 }
-\markright{\usebox{\sealbin}}
+\markright{\usebox{\sealreg}}
 \pagestyle{headings}
 
The picture environment is good for fine-tuning the placement. -If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like -Undefined control sequence. <argument> \nobin. +If the register \noreg has not already been defined then you get something like +Undefined control sequence. <argument> \noreg.
lrbox\usebox\sbox & \saveboxBoxes
lrbox -lrbox +lrbox Synopsis: @@ -14779,26 +16537,27 @@ header. &latex; only typesets it once. \end{lrbox}
-The text inside the environment is saved in the bin -box-cmd. The box-cmd must begin with a -backslash. You must create this bin in advance with \newsavebox -(\newsavebox). This is the environment form of the \sbox -and \savebox commands, and is equivalent to them. \sbox & -\savebox for the full information. +This is the environment form of the \sbox and \savebox +commands, and is equivalent to them. for the full description, +\sbox & \savebox. -In this example the environment is convenient for entering the -tabular. +The text inside the environment is saved in the box register +referred to by variable box-cmd. The variable name +box-cmd must begin with a backslash, \. You must allocate +this box register in advance with \newsavebox +(\newsavebox). In this example the environment is convenient +for entering the tabular. -
\newsavebox{\jhbin}
-\begin{lrbox}{\jhbin}
+
\newsavebox{\jhreg}
+\begin{lrbox}{\jhreg}
   \begin{tabular}{c}
     \includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\
     Jim Hef{}feron
   \end{tabular}
 \end{lrbox}    
   ...
-\usebox{\jhbin}
+\usebox{\jhreg}
 
@@ -14806,8 +16565,8 @@ and \savebox commands, and is equivalent to them. \useboxlrboxBoxes
\usebox -\usebox -box, use saved box +\usebox +box, use saved box Synopsis: @@ -14815,11 +16574,11 @@ and \savebox commands, and is equivalent to them. \usebox{box-cmd}
-Produce the box most recently saved in the bin box-cmd by the -commands \sbox or \savebox, or the lrbox -environment. \sbox & \savebox for more information and examples. -(Note that box-cmd starts with a backslash.) This command is -robust (\protect). +Produce the box most recently saved in the box register box-cmd by +the commands \sbox or \savebox, or the lrbox +environment. For more information and examples, \sbox & +\savebox. (Note that the variable name box-cmd starts with a +backslash, \.) This command is robust (\protect).
@@ -14827,7 +16586,7 @@ robust (\protectColorGraphicsBoxesTop Color -color +color You can add color to text, rules, etc. You can also have color in a box or on an entire page and write text on top of it. @@ -14851,8 +16610,8 @@ significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding Color package optionsColor modelsColor
color package options -color package options -options, color package +color package options +options, color package Synopsis (must be in the document preamble): @@ -14902,7 +16661,7 @@ memory space. Color modelsCommands for colorColor package optionsColor
Color models -color models +color models A color model is a way of representing colors. &latex;&textrsquo;s capabilities depend on the printer driver. However, the pdftex, @@ -14963,7 +16722,7 @@ names depends on the driver, but all support the names black, Commands for colorColor modelsColor
Commands for color -color package commands +color package commands These are the commands available with the color package. @@ -14978,9 +16737,9 @@ names depends on the driver, but all support the names black, Define colorsColored textCommands for color Define colors -color -define color -color, define +color +define color +color, define Synopsis: @@ -15014,8 +16773,8 @@ or style, rather than in the document body. Colored textColored boxesDefine colorsCommands for color Colored text -color -colored text +color +colored text Synopses: @@ -15089,10 +16848,10 @@ synopses.
Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
-{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team.
+{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37}Gold} for the team.
 
-The format of color specification depends on the color model +The format of color specification depends on the color model (Color models). For instance, while rgb takes three numbers, gray takes only one. @@ -15116,9 +16875,9 @@ numbers, gray takes only one. Colored boxesColored pagesColored textCommands for color Colored boxes -color -colored boxes -box, colored +color +colored boxes +box, colored Synopses: @@ -15172,10 +16931,10 @@ of the second line. Colored pagesColored boxesCommands for color Colored pages -color -colored page -page, colored -background, colored +color +colored page +page, colored +background, colored Synopses: @@ -15206,8 +16965,8 @@ rather than the default transparent background.) GraphicsSpecial insertionsColorTop Graphics -graphics -graphics package +graphics +graphics package You can use graphics such as PNG or PDF files in your &latex; document. You need an additional package, which comes standard with &latex;. @@ -15256,8 +17015,8 @@ see their documentation on CTAN. Graphics package optionsGraphics package configurationGraphics
graphics package options -graphics package options -options, graphics package +graphics package options +options, graphics package Synopsis (must be in the document preamble): @@ -15304,7 +17063,7 @@ rectangle (unless another size is specified in the \includegraphics command). draft -For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead the file name is +For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead its file name is printed in a box of the correct size. In order to determine the size, the file must be present. @@ -15337,14 +17096,9 @@ option has &latex; to read the size from the latter. Graphics package configurationCommands for graphicsGraphics package optionsGraphics
graphics package configuration -graphics -graphics package -configuration, graphics package -EPS files -JPEG files -JPG files -PDF graphic files -PNG files +graphics +graphics package +configuration, graphics package These commands configure the way &latex; searches the file system for the graphic. @@ -15365,21 +17119,22 @@ the documentation in grfguide.pdf, or the &latex; source, or your \graphicspath\DeclareGraphicsExtensionsGraphics package configuration \graphicspath -\graphicspath +\graphicspath Synopsis: -
\graphicspath{list of dir names inside curly brackets}
+
\graphicspath{list of directories inside curly braces}
 
Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files. This allows you to later say something like \includegraphics{lion.png} instead of having to give its path. -&latex; always looks for graphic files first in the current directory. -The declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory -pix, and then ../pix. +&latex; always looks for graphic files first in the current directory +(and the output directory, if specified; output directory). +The declaration below tells the system to then look in the +subdirectory pix, and then ../pix.
\usepackage{graphicx}   % or graphics; put in preamble
@@ -15414,7 +17169,7 @@ current directory,
 
 
 for each of the listed directories, &latex; concatenates it with the
-file name and searches for the result, checking for pix/lion.png
+filename and searches for the result, checking for pix/lion.png
 and then ../pix/lion.png.  This algorithm means that the
 \graphicspath command does not recursively search subdirectories:
 if you issue \graphicspath{{a/}} and the graphic is in
@@ -15442,7 +17197,7 @@ instead in book/plots.
 \DeclareGraphicsExtensions\DeclareGraphicsRule\graphicspathGraphics package configuration
 \DeclareGraphicsExtensions
 
-\DeclareGraphicsExtensions
+\DeclareGraphicsExtensions
 
 Synopses:
 
@@ -15465,7 +17220,7 @@ files.
 
-Because the file name lion does not have a period, &latex; uses +Because the filename lion does not have a period, &latex; uses the extension list. For each directory in the graphics path (\graphicspath), &latex; will try the extensions in the order given. If it does not find such a file after trying all the directories @@ -15482,9 +17237,14 @@ your document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example, the most recent pdftex.def has this extension list. -
.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+
.pdf,.png,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PDF,.PNG,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
 
+package, grfext +grfext package + +To change the order, use the grfext package. + You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it more than once. Show its value with \makeatletter\typeout{\Gin&arobase;extensions}\makeatother. @@ -15494,7 +17254,7 @@ than once. Show its value with \DeclareGraphicsRule\DeclareGraphicsExtensionsGraphics package configuration \DeclareGraphicsRule -\DeclareGraphicsRule +\DeclareGraphicsRule Synopsis: @@ -15530,7 +17290,7 @@ extension not covered by another rule, so it covers filename.1, extension The file extension to which this rule applies. The extension is anything after and including the first dot in the filename. Use the Kleene star, -*, to denote the default behaviour for all undeclared extensions. +*, to denote the default behavior for all undeclared extensions. type The type of file involved. This type is a string that must be defined @@ -15560,7 +17320,7 @@ other format is available.) command A command that will be applied to the -file. This is very often left blank. This command must start with a +file. This is very often left empty. This command must start with a single backward quote. Thus, \DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c #1} specifies that any file with the extension .eps.gz should @@ -15580,8 +17340,8 @@ See the documentation for your &tex; distribution. Commands for graphicsGraphics package configurationGraphics
Commands for graphics -graphics package commands -commands, graphics package +graphics package commands +commands, graphics package These are the commands available with the graphics and graphicx packages. @@ -15597,16 +17357,16 @@ See the documentation for your &tex; distribution. \includegraphics\rotateboxCommands for graphics \includegraphics -graphics -graphics package -including graphics -importing graphics -EPS files -JPEG files -JPG files -PDF graphic files -PNG files -\includegraphics +graphics +graphics package +including graphics +importing graphics +EPS files +JPEG files +JPG files +PDF graphic files +PNG files +\includegraphics Synopses for graphics package: @@ -15654,10 +17414,10 @@ is \includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}. The \includegraphics{filename} command decides on the type of graphic by splitting filename on the first dot. You can -use filename with no dot, as in \includegraphics{turing} -and then &latex; tries a sequence of extensions such as .png and -.pdf until it finds a file with that extension -(\DeclareGraphicsExtensions). +instead use filename with no dot, as in +\includegraphics{turing}, and then &latex; tries a sequence of +extensions such as .png and .pdf until it finds a file +with that extension (\DeclareGraphicsExtensions). If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can hide them with curly braces, as in @@ -15666,7 +17426,7 @@ the graphicx package then you can use the options type ext; see below. This and other filename issues are also handled with the package grffile. -This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so &latex; can +This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so &latex; can move it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward (figure). @@ -15741,8 +17501,10 @@ two will end with different widths and heights. There are many options. The primary ones are listed first. +bounding box +box, bounding Note that a graphic is placed by &latex; into a box, which is -traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the +traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic&textrsquo;s printed area may go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when &latex; makes up a page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the @@ -15756,7 +17518,7 @@ is \includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}. You can use th &tex; dimensions (Units of length) and also convenient is \linewidth, or in a two-column document, \columnwidth (Page layout parameters). An example is that by using the -calc package you can make the graphic be 1 cm narrow than +calc package you can make the graphic be 1 cm narrower than the width of the text with \includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}. @@ -15770,7 +17532,7 @@ layout parameters). For instance, the command graphic a quarter of the height of the text area. totalheight -includegraphics totalheght +includegraphics totalheight The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus depth. This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated. For instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero height @@ -15794,7 +17556,7 @@ is the graphic wider than width nor taller than height scale Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its nominal size, enter \includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}. This -number may be any value; a number between 1 and 0 will shrink the +number may be any value; a number between 0 and 1 will shrink the graphic and a negative number will reflect it. angle @@ -15826,10 +17588,10 @@ vertical center in lc or rc.) The default is lB viewport Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments, separated by spaces and given in &tex; dimensions, as with -\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}. The -dimensions default to big points, bp. They are taken -relative to the origin specified by the bounding box. See also the -trim option. +\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}. When +the unit is omitted, the dimensions default to big +points, bp. They are taken relative to the origin specified +by the bounding box. See also the trim option. includegraphics trim trim @@ -15887,7 +17649,7 @@ set with interpolate=true or just specified as here. quiet Do not write information to the log. You can set it with quiet=true or just specified it with -\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}, +\includegraphics[...,quiet,...]{...}, includegraphics draft draft @@ -15985,7 +17747,7 @@ Only use this in conjunction with the option type. includegraphics command command Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in -conjunction with the option type. Command line options +conjunction with the option type. Command line options, for a discussion of enabling the \write18 functionality to run external commands. @@ -15996,10 +17758,10 @@ external commands. \rotatebox\scalebox\includegraphicsCommands for graphics \rotatebox -rotation -rotating graphics -rotating text -\rotatebox +rotation +rotating graphics +rotating text +\rotatebox Synopsis if you use the graphics package: @@ -16017,7 +17779,7 @@ external commands. Put material in a box and rotate it angle degrees counterclockwise. -This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees. +This example rotates the table column heads forty-five degrees.
\begin{tabular}{ll}
@@ -16087,14 +17849,14 @@ setting units=6.283185 changes to radians counterclockwise.
 \scalebox\resizebox\rotateboxCommands for graphics
 \scalebox
 
-graphics, scaling
-graphics, resizing
-scaling
-resizing
-text, scaling
-text, resizing
-\scalebox
-\reflectbox
+graphics, scaling
+graphics, resizing
+scaling
+resizing
+text, scaling
+text, resizing
+\scalebox
+\reflectbox
 
 Synopses:
 
@@ -16137,13 +17899,13 @@ immediately followed by its mirror reflection.
 \resizebox\scaleboxCommands for graphics
 \resizebox
 
-graphics, scaling
-graphics, resizing
-scaling
-resizing
-text, scaling
-text, resizing
-\resizebox
+graphics, scaling
+graphics, resizing
+scaling
+resizing
+text, scaling
+text, resizing
+\resizebox
 
 Synopses:
 
@@ -16182,8 +17944,8 @@ text two inches wide but keep the original height with
 Special insertionsSplitting the inputGraphicsTop
 Special insertions
 
-special insertions
-insertions of special characters
+special insertions
+insertions of special characters
 
 &latex; provides commands for inserting characters that have a
 special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
@@ -16195,6 +17957,7 @@ special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
 
Text symbols
Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
 
Accents
Inserting accents.
 
Additional Latin letters
Inserting other non-English characters.
+
inputenc package
Set the input file text encoding.
 
\rule
Inserting lines and rectangles.
 
\today
Inserting today&textrsquo;s date.
 
@@ -16203,42 +17966,43 @@ special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. Reserved charactersUpper and lower caseSpecial insertions
Reserved characters -reserved characters -characters, reserved -special characters -characters, special +reserved characters +characters, reserved +special characters +characters, special &latex; sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For example, the percent sign % is for comments. They are -called reserved characters or special characters. +called reserved characters or special characters. They are +all discussed elsewhere in this manual.
# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \ 
 
-\# -\$ -\% -\& -\_ -\{ -\} +\# +\$ +\% +\& +\_ +\{ +\} If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply put a backslash \ in front of the character. Thus, typing \$1.23 will produce $1.23 in your output. -\~ -\^ -\textbackslash +\~ +\^ +\textbackslash As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font use \~{} (omitting the curly braces would result in the next -character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text -body font circumflex use \^{}. To get a backslash in the font -of the text body, enter \textbackslash{}. +character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a text body +font circumflex use \^{}. To get a backslash in the font of +the text body, enter \textbackslash{}. To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use \verb!! as below (the double backslash \\ is only -there to split the lines). +there to split the lines in the output).
\begin{center}
@@ -16252,9 +18016,10 @@ there to split the lines).
 Upper and lower caseSymbols by font positionReserved charactersSpecial insertions
 
Upper and lower case -uppercase -lowercase -characters, case of +uppercase +lowercase +characters, case of +changing case of characters Synopsis: @@ -16265,13 +18030,13 @@ there to split the lines). \MakeLowercase{text}
-Change the case of characters. The &tex; primitives commands -\uppercase and \lowercase only work for American -characters. The &latex; commands \MakeUppercase and -\MakeLowercase commands also change characters accessed by -commands such as \ae or \aa. The commands -\MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase are robust but they have -moving arguments (\protect). +Change the case of characters. The &tex; primitive commands +\uppercase and \lowercase are set up by default to work +only with the 26 letters a&textndash;z and A&textndash;Z. The &latex; commands +\MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase commands also change +characters accessed by commands such as \ae or \aa. The +commands \MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase are robust +but they have moving arguments (\protect). These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of a command within text. But they do change the case of every other @@ -16297,337 +18062,383 @@ you need to do expansion. Here the \Schoolname produces \expandafter{\schoolname}}
-package, textcase -textcase package +package, textcase +textcase package The textcase package brings some of the missing feature of the standard &latex; commands \MakeUppercase and \MakeLowerCase. -package, mfirstuc -mfirstuc package - +package, mfirstuc +mfirstuc package + To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package mfirstuc. +package, expl3 +expl3 package + +Wright, Joseph +Handling all the casing rules specified by Unicode, e.g., for +non-Latin scripts, is a much bigger job than anything envisioned in +the original &tex; and &latex;. It has been implemented in the +expl3 package as of 2020. The article &textldquo;Case changing: From +&tex; primitives to the Unicode algorithm&textrdquo;, (Joseph Wright, +TUGboat 41:1, +https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb41-1/tb127wright-case.pdf), gives a +good overview of the topic, past and present. +
Symbols by font positionText symbolsUpper and lower caseSpecial insertions
Symbols by font position -\symbol -accessing any character of a font -font symbols, by number +\symbol +accessing any character of a font +font symbols, by number You can access any character of the current font using its number with the \symbol command. For example, the visible space character -used in the \verb* command has the code decimal 32, so it can be -typed as \symbol{32}. +used in the \verb* command has the code decimal 32 in the +standard Computer Modern typewriter font, so it can be typed as +\symbol{32}. You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a ' -prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a " prefix, so the previous -example could also be written as \symbol{'40} or -\symbol{"20}. +prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a " prefix, so the +visible space at 32 decimal could also be written as +\symbol{'40} or \symbol{"20}.
Text symbolsAccentsSymbols by font positionSpecial insertions
Text symbols -text symbols -symbols, text +text symbols +symbols, text -textcomp package -&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in -running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not -available in OT1. Unless you are using Xe&latex; or Lua&latex; then -you may need to load the textcomp package. +textcomp package +TS1 encoding +&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols +in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are +not available in OT1. As of the &latex; February 2020 release, all +symbols are available by default; before that, it was necessary to use +the textcomp package for some (technically, those in the +TS1 font encoding). -\copyright\copyright -\textcopyright\textcopyright -copyright symbol +\copyright\copyright +\textcopyright\textcopyright +copyright symbol ©right; The copyright symbol. -\dag\dag -dagger, in text +\dag\dag +dagger, in text 2020 The dagger symbol (in text). -\ddag\ddag -double dagger, in text +\ddag\ddag +double dagger, in text 2021 The double dagger symbol (in text). -\LaTeX\LaTeX -&latex; logo -logo, &latex; +\LaTeX\LaTeX +&latex; logo +logo, &latex; The &latex; logo. -\LaTeXe\LaTeXe -&latex;2e logo -logo, &latex;2e +\LaTeXe\LaTeXe +&latex;2e logo +logo, &latex;2e The &latex;2e logo. -\guillemotleft («)\guillemotleft («) -\guillemotright (»)\guillemotright (») -\guilsinglleft (‹)\guilsinglleft (‹) -\guilsinglright (›)\guilsinglright (›) -double guillemets -single guillemets -left angle quotation marks -right angle quotation marks -double angle quotation marks -single angle quotation marks -French quotation marks -quotation marks, French +\guillemotleft («)\guillemotleft («) +\guillemotright (»)\guillemotright (») +\guilsinglleft (‹)\guilsinglleft (‹) +\guilsinglright (›)\guilsinglright (›) +double guillemets +single guillemets +left angle quotation marks +right angle quotation marks +double angle quotation marks +single angle quotation marks +French quotation marks +quotation marks, French «, », ‹, › Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French. -\ldots\ldots -\dots\dots -\textellipsis\textellipsis -ellipsis +\ldots\ldots +\dots\dots +\textellipsis\textellipsis +ellipsis &dots; An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): \ldots and \dots also work in math mode. -\lq\lq -left quote -opening quote +\lq\lq +left quote +opening quote &textlsquo; Left (opening) quote. -\P\P -\textparagraph\textparagraph -paragraph symbol -pilcrow +\P\P +\textparagraph\textparagraph +paragraph symbol +pilcrow 00B6 Paragraph sign (pilcrow). -\pounds\pounds -\textsterling\textsterling -pounds symbol -sterling symbol +\pounds\pounds +\textsterling\textsterling +pounds symbol +sterling symbol £ English pounds sterling. -\quotedblbase („)\quotedblbase („) -\quotesinglbase (‚)\quotesinglbase (‚) -double low-9 quotation mark -single low-9 quotation mark -low-9 quotation marks, single and double +\quotedblbase („)\quotedblbase („) +\quotesinglbase (‚)\quotesinglbase (‚) +double low-9 quotation mark +single low-9 quotation mark +low-9 quotation marks, single and double „ and ‚ Double and single quotation marks on the baseline. -\rq\rq -right quote -closing quote +\rq\rq +right quote +closing quote &textrsquo; Right (closing) quote. -\S\S -\textsection\textsection -section symbol +\S\S +\textsection\textsection +section symbol 00A7 Section sign. -\TeX\TeX -&tex; logo -logo, &tex; +\TeX\TeX +&tex; logo +logo, &tex; The &tex; logo. -\textasciicircum\textasciicircum -circumflex, ASCII, in text -ASCII circumflex, in text +\textasciicircum\textasciicircum +circumflex, ASCII, in text +ASCII circumflex, in text ^ ASCII circumflex. -\textasciitilde\textasciitilde -tilde, ASCII, in text -ASCII tilde, in text +\textasciitilde\textasciitilde +tilde, ASCII, in text +ASCII tilde, in text ~ ASCII tilde. -\textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered -asterisk, centered, in text -centered asterisk, in text +\textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered +asterisk, centered, in text +centered asterisk, in text * Centered asterisk. -\textbackslash\textbackslash -backslash, in text +\textbackslash\textbackslash +backslash, in text \ Backslash. -\textbar\textbar -vertical bar, in text -bar, vertical, in text +\textbar\textbar +vertical bar, in text +bar, vertical, in text | Vertical bar. -\textbardbl\textbardbl -vertical bar, double, in text -bar, double vertical, in text -double vertical bar, in text +\textbardbl\textbardbl +vertical bar, double, in text +bar, double vertical, in text +double vertical bar, in text 23F8 Double vertical bar. -\textbigcircle\textbigcircle -big circle symbols, in text -circle symbol, big, in text -25EF Big circle symbol. +\textbigcircle\textbigcircle +big circle symbols, in text +circle symbol, big, in text +25EF, Big circle symbol. -\textbraceleft\textbraceleft -left brace, in text -brace, left, in text +\textbraceleft\textbraceleft +left brace, in text +brace, left, in text { Left brace. -\textbraceright\textbraceright -right brace, in text -brace, right, in text +\textbraceright\textbraceright +right brace, in text +brace, right, in text } Right brace. -\textbullet\textbullet -bullet, in text +\textbullet\textbullet +bullet, in text • Bullet. -\textcircled{letter}\textcircled{letter} -circled letter, in text -24B6 Circle around letter. +\textcircled{letter}\textcircled{letter} +circled letter, in text +24B6, Circle around letter. -\textcompwordmark\textcompwordmark -\textcapitalcompwordmark\textcapitalcompwordmark -\textascendercompwordmark\textascendercompwordmark -composite word mark, in text -cap height -ascender height +\textcompwordmark\textcompwordmark +\textcapitalcompwordmark\textcapitalcompwordmark +\textascendercompwordmark\textascendercompwordmark +composite word mark, in text +cap height +ascender height Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For example, f\textcompwordmark i produces fi without a ligature. This is most useful in non-English languages. The \textcapitalcompwordmark form has the cap height of the font while the \textascendercompwordmark form has the ascender height. -\textdagger\textdagger -dagger, in text +\textdagger\textdagger +dagger, in text 2020 Dagger. -\textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl -dagger, double, in text -double dagger, in text +\textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl +dagger, double, in text +double dagger, in text 2021 Double dagger. -\textdollar (or \$)\textdollar (or \$) -dollar sign -currency, dollar +\textdollar (or \$)\textdollar (or \$) +dollar sign +currency, dollar $ Dollar sign. -\textemdash (or ---)\textemdash (or ---) -em-dash -&textmdash; Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in -The playoffs --- if you are fortunate enough to make the playoffs --- -is more like a sprint.). - -\textendash (or --)\textendash (or --) -e-dash -&textndash; En-dash (used for ranges, as in See pages 12--14). - -\texteuro\texteuro -euro symbol -currency, euro -package, eurosym -eurosym package - -The Euro symbol: €. For an alternative glyph design, try the +\textemdash (or ---)\textemdash (or ---) +em-dash + +&textmdash; Em-dash. Used for punctuation, usually similar to commas or +parentheses, as in &textlsquo;The playoffs---if you're lucky +enough to make the playoffs---are more like a sprint.&textrsquo; Conventions +for spacing around em-dashes vary widely. + + +\textendash (or --)\textendash (or --) +e-dash +&textndash; En-dash. Used for ranges, as in &textlsquo;see pages 12--14&textrsquo;. + +\texteuro\texteuro +euro symbol +currency, euro +package, eurosym +eurosym package + +The Euro currency symbol: €. +package, eurosym +eurosym package + +For an alternative glyph design, try the eurosym package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC). -\textexclamdown (or !`)\textexclamdown (or !`) -exclamation point, upside-down +\textexclamdown (or !`)\textexclamdown (or !`) +exclamation point, upside-down ¡ Upside down exclamation point. -\textgreater\textgreater -greater than symbol, in text +\textfiguredash\textfiguredash +figure dash character +Dash used between numerals, Unicode U+2012. Defined in the June 2021 +release of &latex;. When used in pdf&tex;, approximated by an +en-dash; with a Unicode engine, either typesets the glyph if available +in the current font, or writes the usual &textldquo;Missing character&textrdquo; warning +to the log file. + +\textgreater\textgreater +greater than symbol, in text > Greater than symbol. -\textless\textless -less than symbol, in text +\texthorizontalbar\texthorizontalbar +horizontal bar character +Horizontal bar character, Unicode U+2015. Defined in the June 2021 +release of &latex;. Behavior as with \textfiguredash above; +the pdf&tex; approximation is an em-dash. + +\textless\textless +less than symbol, in text < Less than symbol. -\textleftarrow\textleftarrow -arrow, left, in text -left arrow, in text -2190 Left arrow. - -\textordfeminine\textordfeminine -\textordmasculine\textordmasculine -feminine ordinal symbol -masculine ordinal symbol -ordinals, feminine and masculine -Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine +\textleftarrow\textleftarrow +arrow, left, in text +left arrow, in text +2190, Left arrow. + +\textnonbreakinghyphen\textnonbreakinghyphen +non-breaking hyphen character +hyphen character, non-breaking +Non-breaking hyphen character, Unicode U+2011. Defined in the June +2021 release of &latex;. Behavior as with \textfiguredash +above; the pdf&tex; approximation is a regular ASCII hyphen (with +breaks disallowed after). + +\textordfeminine\textordfeminine +\textordmasculine\textordmasculine +feminine ordinal symbol +masculine ordinal symbol +ordinals, feminine and masculine +Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine ª, º Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols. -\textperiodcentered\textperiodcentered -period, centered, in text -centered period, in text +\textperiodcentered\textperiodcentered +period, centered, in text +centered period, in text 00B7 Centered period. -\textquestiondown (or ?`)\textquestiondown (or ?`) -question mark, upside-down +\textquestiondown (or ?`)\textquestiondown (or ?`) +question mark, upside-down ¿ Upside down question mark. -\textquotedblleft (or ``)\textquotedblleft (or ``) -left quote, double -double left quote +\textquotedblleft (or ``)\textquotedblleft (or ``) +left quote, double +double left quote &textldquo; Double left quote. -\textquotedblright (or '')\textquotedblright (or '') -right quote, double -double right quote +\textquotedblright (or '')\textquotedblright (or '') +right quote, double +double right quote &textrdquo; Double right quote. -\textquoteleft (or `)\textquoteleft (or `) -left quote, single -single left quote +\textquoteleft (or `)\textquoteleft (or `) +left quote, single +single left quote &textlsquo; Single left quote. -\textquoteright (or ')\textquoteright (or ') -right quote, single -single right quote +\textquoteright (or ')\textquoteright (or ') +right quote, single +single right quote &textrsquo; Single right quote. -\textquotesingle\textquotesingle -quote, single straight -straight single quote -single quote, straight -0027 Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.) - -\textquotestraightbase\textquotestraightbase -\textquotestraightdblbase\textquotestraightdblbase -quote, straight base -straight quote, base -double quote, straight base -straight double quote, base +\textquotesingle\textquotesingle +quote, single straight +straight single quote +single quote, straight +0027, Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.) + +\textquotestraightbase\textquotestraightbase +\textquotestraightdblbase\textquotestraightdblbase +quote, straight base +straight quote, base +double quote, straight base +straight double quote, base Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. -\textregistered\textregistered -registered symbol +\textregistered\textregistered +registered symbol ®istered; Registered symbol. -\textrightarrow\textrightarrow -arrow, right, in text -right arrow, in text -2192 Right arrow. +\textrightarrow\textrightarrow +arrow, right, in text +right arrow, in text +2192, Right arrow. -\textthreequartersemdash\textthreequartersemdash -three-quarters em-dash -em-dash, three-quarters -FE58 &textldquo;Three-quarters&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. +\textthreequartersemdash\textthreequartersemdash +three-quarters em-dash +em-dash, three-quarters +FE58, &textldquo;Three-quarters&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. -\texttrademark\texttrademark -trademark symbol +\texttrademark\texttrademark +trademark symbol 2122 Trademark symbol. -\texttwelveudash\texttwelveudash -two-thirds em-dash -em-dash, two-thirds -FE58 &textldquo;Two-thirds&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. +\texttwelveudash\texttwelveudash +two-thirds em-dash +em-dash, two-thirds +FE58, &textldquo;Two-thirds&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. -\textunderscore\textunderscore -underscore, in text +\textunderscore\textunderscore +underscore, in text _ Underscore. -\textvisiblespace\textvisiblespace -visible space symbol, in text -2423 Visible space symbol. +\textvisiblespace\textvisiblespace +visible space symbol, in text +2423, Visible space symbol. @@ -16636,34 +18447,37 @@ Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC). AccentsAdditional Latin lettersText symbolsSpecial insertions
Accents -accents -characters, accented -letters, accented +accents +characters, accented +letters, accented -package, babel -babel package +package, babel +babel package -package, polyglossia -polyglossia package +package, polyglossia +polyglossia package -multilingual support -&latex; has wide support for many of the world&textrsquo;s scripts and languages, -through the babel package and related support if you are using -pdf&latex;, or polyglossia if you are using Xe&latex; or -Lua&latex;. This section does not cover that support. It only lists -the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. The -\capital... commands shown here produce alternative forms for use -with capital letters. These are not available with OT1. +multilingual support +&latex; has wide support for many of the world&textrsquo;s scripts and +languages, provided through the core babel package, which +supports pdf&latex;, Xe&latex; and Lua&latex;. The +polyglossia package provides similar support with the latter +two engines. + +This section does not cover that support. It only lists the core +&latex; commands for creating accented characters. The +\capital... commands shown here produce alternative forms for +use with capital letters. These are not available with OT1. Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated with lowercase o. -\i (dotless i) -dotless i +\i (dotless i) +dotless i Note that \i produces a dotless i, -\j (dotless j) -dotless j +\j (dotless j) +dotless j and \j produces a dotless j. These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are @@ -16672,63 +18486,63 @@ accented. \" \capitaldieresis -\" (umlaut accent) -\capitaldieresis -umlaut accent -dieresis accent +\" (umlaut accent) +\capitaldieresis +umlaut accent +dieresis accent o Umlaut (dieresis). \' \capitalacute -\' (acute accent) -\capitalacute -acute accent +\' (acute accent) +\capitalacute +acute accent o Acute accent. \. -\. (dot-over accent) -dot accent -dot-over accent +\. (dot-over accent) +dot accent +dot-over accent o Dot accent. \= \capitalmacron -\= (macron accent) -\capitalmacron -macron accent -overbar accent -bar-over accent +\= (macron accent) +\capitalmacron +macron accent +overbar accent +bar-over accent o Macron (overbar) accent. \^ \capitalcircumflex -\^ (circumflex accent) -\capitalcircumflex -circumflex accent -hat accent +\^ (circumflex accent) +\capitalcircumflex +circumflex accent +hat accent o Circumflex (hat) accent. \` \capitalgrave -\` (grave accent) -\capitalgrave -grave accent +\` (grave accent) +\capitalgrave +grave accent o Grave accent. \~ \capitaltilde -\~ (tilde accent) -\capitaltilde -tilde accent +\~ (tilde accent) +\capitaltilde +tilde accent n Tilde accent. \b -\b (bar-under accent) -bar-under accent +\b (bar-under accent) +bar-under accent o Bar accent underneath. -\underbar -underbar +\underbar +underbar Related to this, \underbar{text} produces a bar under text. The argument is always processed in LR mode (Modes). The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline, @@ -16737,81 +18551,137 @@ thus crossing through descenders. See also \underline in \c \capitalcedilla -\c (cedilla accent) -\capitalcedilla -cedilla accent +\c (cedilla accent) +\capitalcedilla +cedilla accent c Cedilla accent underneath. \d \capitaldotaccent -\d (dot-under accent) -\capitaldotaccent -dot-under accent +\d (dot-under accent) +\capitaldotaccent +dot-under accent o Dot accent underneath. \H \capitalhungarumlaut -\H (Hungarian umlaut accent) -\capitalhungarumlaut -hungarian umlaut accent +\H (Hungarian umlaut accent) +\capitalhungarumlaut +hungarian umlaut accent o Long Hungarian umlaut accent. \k \capitalogonek -\k (ogonek) -\capitalogonek -ogonek +\k (ogonek) +\capitalogonek +ogonek o Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding. \r \capitalring -\r (ring accent) -\capitalring -ring accent +\r (ring accent) +\capitalring +ring accent o Ring accent. \t \capitaltie \newtie \capitalnewtie -\t (tie-after accent) -\capitaltie -\newtie -\capitalnewtie -tie-after accent +\t (tie-after accent) +\capitaltie +\newtie +\capitalnewtie +tie-after accent oo Tie-after accent. The \newtie form is centered in its box. \u \capitalbreve -\u (breve accent) -\capitalbreve -breve accent +\u (breve accent) +\capitalbreve +breve accent o Breve accent. \v \capitalcaron -\v (breve accent) -\capitalcaron -hacek accent -check accent -caron accent +\v (breve accent) +\capitalcaron +hacek accent +check accent +caron accent o Hacek (check, caron) accent.
+ +\accent
Low level command to produce an accented character.
+
+ + +\accentAccents +\accent +\accent + +Synopsis: + + +
\accent number character
+
+ +A &tex; primitive command used to generate accented characters from +accent marks and letters. The accent mark is selected by number, +a numeric argument, followed by a space and then a character argument +constructs the accented character in the current font. + +These are accented e characters. + + +
\accent18 e
+\accent20 e
+\accent21 e
+\accent22 e
+\accent23 e
+
+ + +The first is a grave, the second is breve, etc. + +The position of the accent is determined by the font designer and so the +outcome of \accent use may differ between fonts. In &latex; it is +desirable to have glyphs for accented characters rather than building +them using \accent. Using glyphs that already contain the +accented characters (as in T1 encoding) allows correct hyphenation +whereas \accent disables hyphenation (specifically with OT1 font +encoding where accented glyphs are absent). + +There can be an optional font change between number and +character. Note also that this command sets the +\spacefactor to 1000 (\spacefactor). + +An unavoidable characteristic of some Cyrillic letters and +the majority of accented Cyrillic letters is that they must be +assembled from multiple elements (accents, modifiers, etc.) while +\accent provides for a single accent mark and a single letter +combination. There are also cases where accents must appear between +letters that \accent does not support. Still other cases exist where +the letters I and J have dots above their lowercase counterparts that +conflict with dotted accent marks. The use of \accent in these +cases will not work as it cannot analyze upper/lower case. + +
-Additional Latin letters\ruleAccentsSpecial insertions +Additional Latin lettersinputenc packageAccentsSpecial insertions
Additional Latin letters Non-English characters -Latin letters, additional -letters, additional Latin -extended Latin -special characters -non-English characters -characters, non-English +Latin letters, additional +letters, additional Latin +extended Latin +special characters +non-English characters +characters, non-English Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting letters beyond A&textndash;Z that extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other @@ -16820,84 +18690,84 @@ than English. \aa \AA -\aa (å) -\AA (Å) -aring +\aa (å) +\AA (Å) +aring å and Å. \ae \AE -\ae (æ) -\AE (Æ) -ae ligature +\ae (æ) +\AE (Æ) +ae ligature æ and Æ. \dh \DH -\dh (ð) -\DH (Ð) -Icelandic eth -eth, Icelandic letter +\dh (ð) +\DH (Ð) +Icelandic eth +eth, Icelandic letter Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the fontenc package to select an alternate font encoding, such as T1. \dj \DJ -\dj -\DJ +\dj +\DJ Crossed d and D, a.k.a.&noeos; capital and small letter d with stroke. Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the fontenc package to select an alternate font encoding, such as T1. \ij \IJ -\ij (ij) -\IJ (IJ) -ij letter, Dutch +\ij (ij) +\IJ (IJ) +ij letter, Dutch ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here). \l \L -\l (&lslash;) -\L (&Lslash;) -polish l +\l (&lslash;) +\L (&Lslash;) +polish l &lslash; and &Lslash;. \ng \NG -\ng -\NG +\ng +\NG Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics. \o \O -\o (ø) -\O (Ø) -oslash +\o (ø) +\O (Ø) +oslash ø and Ø. \oe \OE -\oe (œ) -\OE (Œ) -oe ligature +\oe (œ) +\OE (Œ) +oe ligature œ and Œ. \ss \SS -\ss (ß) -\SS (SS) -es-zet German letter -sharp S letters +\ss (ß) +\SS (SS) +es-zet German letter +sharp S letters ß and SS. \th \TH -\th (þ) -\TH (Þ) -Icelandic thorn -thorn, Icelandic letter +\th (þ) +\TH (Þ) +Icelandic thorn +thorn, Icelandic letter Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the fontenc package to select an alternate font encoding, such as T1. @@ -16906,10 +18776,77 @@ font encoding, such as T1. -\rule\todayAdditional Latin lettersSpecial insertions +inputenc package\ruleAdditional Latin lettersSpecial insertions +
inputenc package + +inputenc + +Synopsis: + + +
\usepackage[encoding-name]{inputenc}
+
+ +Declare the input file&textrsquo;s text encoding to be encoding-name. The +default, if this package is not loaded, is UTF-8. Technically, +specifying the encoding name is optional, but in practice it is not +useful to omit it. + +encoding, of input files +character encoding +Unicode +In a computer file, the characters are stored according to a scheme +called the encoding. There are many different encodings. The +simplest is ASCII, which supports 95 printable characters, not enough +for most of the world&textrsquo;s languages. For instance, to typeset the +a-umlaut character a in an ASCII-encoded &latex; source file, the +sequence \"a is used. This would make source files for anything +but English hard to read; even for English, often a more extensive +encoding is more convenient. + +The modern encoding standard, in some ways a union of the others, is +UTF-8, one of the representations of Unicode. This is the default for +&latex; since 2018. + +The inputenc package is how &latex; knows what encoding is +used. For instance, the following command explicitly says that the +input file is UTF-8 (note the lack of a dash). + + +
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+
+ +Caution: use inputenc only with the pdf&tex; engine +(&tex; engines). (The Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; engines assume +that the input file is UTF-8 encoded.) If you invoke &latex; with +either the xelatex command or the lualatex +command, and try to declare a non-UTF-8 encoding with inputenc, +such as latin1, then you will get the error inputenc is +not designed for xetex or luatex. + +An inputenc package error such as Invalid UTF-8 byte "96 +means that some of the material in the input file does not follow the +encoding scheme. Often these errors come from copying material from a +document that uses a different encoding than the input file; this one +is a left single quote from a web page using latin1 inside a +&latex; input file that uses UTF-8. The simplest solution is to +replace the non-UTF-8 character with its UTF-8 equivalent, or use a +&latex; equivalent command or character. + +In some documents, such as a collection of journal articles from a +variety of authors, changing the encoding in mid-document may be +necessary. Use the command +\inputencoding{encoding-name}. The most common values +for encoding-name are: ascii, latin1, +latin2, latin3, latin4, latin5, +latin9, latin10, and utf8. + + +
+\rule\todayinputenc packageSpecial insertions
\rule -\rule +\rule Synopsis, one of: @@ -16920,17 +18857,17 @@ font encoding, such as T1. Produce a rule, a filled-in rectangle. -Halmos symbol -tombstone -This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol, -often used to mark the end of a proof. +Halmos symbol +tombstone +This example produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol, +or just &textldquo;qed&textrdquo;, often used to mark the end of a proof:
\newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
 
-package, amsthm -amsthm package +package, amsthm +amsthm package The amsthm package includes this command, with a somewhat @@ -16954,16 +18891,16 @@ thickness is common in &latex;. A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in the output, but can cause &latex; to change the output around it. -\strut for examples. +\strut, for examples.
\today\ruleSpecial insertions
\today -\today -date, today&textrsquo;s -today&textrsquo;s date +\today +date, today&textrsquo;s +today&textrsquo;s date Synopsis: @@ -16975,11 +18912,11 @@ output, but can cause &latex; to change the output around it. yyyy. An example of a date in that format is July 4, 1976. -package, babel -babel package +package, babel +babel package -package, polyglossia -polyglossia package +package, polyglossia +polyglossia package Multilingual packages such as babel or polyglossia, or classes such as lettre, will localize \today. For example, @@ -16998,8 +18935,8 @@ the following will output 4 juillet 1976: \today uses the counters \day, \month, and \year (\day & \month & \year). -package, datetime -datetime package +package, datetime +datetime package A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is datetime package which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO standards. @@ -17013,16 +18950,16 @@ date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes. Splitting the inputFront/back matterSpecial insertionsTop Splitting the input -splitting the input file -input file +splitting the input file +input file &latex; lets you split a large document into several smaller ones. This can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the document. It can also speed processing. Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one -root file -file, root +root file +file, root root file, on which &latex; compilation starts. This shows such a file with five included files. @@ -17052,7 +18989,7 @@ a file with five included files. This will bring in material from pref.tex, chap1.tex, chap2.tex, append.tex, and bib.tex. If you compile this file, and then comment out all of the lines inside -\includeonly{...} except for chap1, and compile again, +\includeonly{...} except for chap1, and compile again, then &latex; will only process the material in the first chapter. Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to print. However, the advantage of the \includeonly command is that @@ -17060,7 +18997,7 @@ However, the advantage of the \includeonly command is that information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in your output correctly. -Larger book template for another example of \includeonly. +Larger book template, for another example of \includeonly. \endinput
Stop including material from a file.
@@ -17073,7 +19010,7 @@ your output correctly.
 \endinput\include & \includeonlySplitting the input
 
\endinput -\endinput +\endinput Synopsis: @@ -17097,12 +19034,13 @@ This will not appear.
This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end of a -file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during mailing. -It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to -put \endinput halfway through the included file and see if the -error disappears. Now, knowing which half contains the error, moving -\endinput to halfway through that area further narrows down the -location. This process rapidly finds the offending line. +file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added if the file is +transmitted in the body of an email. It is also useful for debugging: +one strategy to localize errors is to put \endinput halfway +through the included file and see if the error disappears. Now, knowing +which half contains the error, moving \endinput to halfway +through that area further narrows down the location. This process +rapidly finds the offending line. After reading \endinput, &latex; continues to read to the end of the line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless. @@ -17114,8 +19052,8 @@ This allows you, for instance, to close an \if... with a \include & \includeonly\input\endinputSplitting the input
\include & \includeonly -\include -\includeonly +\include +\includeonly Synopsis: @@ -17136,10 +19074,12 @@ This allows you, for instance, to close an \if... with a \clearpage (\clearpage & \cleardoublepage), then it inputs the material from filename.tex into the document, and then it does another \clearpage. This command can only -appear in the document body. The \includeonly command controls -which files will be read by &latex; under subsequent \include -commands. Its list of filenames is comma-separated, and it can only -appear in the preamble. +appear in the document body. + +The \includeonly command controls which files will be read by +&latex; under subsequent \include commands. Its list of +filenames is comma-separated. It must appear in the preamble or even +earlier, e.g., the command line; it can&textrsquo;t appear in the document body. This example root document, constitution.tex, brings in three files, preamble.tex, articles.tex, and @@ -17174,7 +19114,7 @@ in Order to form a more perfect Union, ... Running &latex; on constitution.tex makes the material from the three files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary files preamble.aux, articles.aux, and -amendments.tex. These contain information such as page numbers +amendments.aux. These contain information such as page numbers and cross-references (Cross references). If you now comment out \includeonly&textrsquo;s lines with preamble and amendments and run &latex; again then the resulting document shows only the @@ -17191,7 +19131,7 @@ commands. \input (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary information). -Larger book template for another example using \include +Larger book template, for another example using \include and \includeonly. That example also uses \input for some material that will not necessarily start on a new page. @@ -17234,7 +19174,7 @@ this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux: \end{document} -nested \include, not allowed +nested \include, not allowed You cannot use \include inside a file that is being included or you get LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested. The \include command cannot appear in the document preamble; you will @@ -17248,15 +19188,15 @@ athiesm.tex. (It will also create athiesm.aux.) If you \include the root file in itself then you first get LaTeX Error: Can be used only in preamble. Later runs get TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]. To fix -this, you must remove the inclusion \include{root} but also -delete the file root.aux and rerun &latex;. +this, you must remove the inclusion \include{root} but +also delete the file root.aux and rerun &latex;.
\input\include & \includeonlySplitting the input
\input -\input +\input Synopsis: @@ -17317,14 +19257,14 @@ this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux: Table of contents etc.IndexesFront/back matter
Table of contents etc. -table of contents, creating +table of contents, creating -\tableofcontents -.toc file -\listoffigures -\listoftables -.lof file -.lot file +\tableofcontents +.toc file +\listoffigures +\listoftables +.lof file +.lot file Synopsis, one of: @@ -17361,7 +19301,7 @@ commands \chapter, etc. Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter and section listings but not subsection listings, because the -\section command has level 1. Sectioning for level +\section command has level 1. Sectioning, for level numbers of the sectioning units. For more on the tocdepth Sectioning/tocdepth. @@ -17372,7 +19312,7 @@ book template. \newpage command after the \tableofcontents command, as above. -To make the table of contents &latex; stores the information in an +To make the table of contents, &latex; stores the information in an auxiliary file named root-file.toc (Splitting the input). For example, this &latex; file test.tex @@ -17386,76 +19326,160 @@ input). For example, this &latex; file test.tex -writes the following line to test.toc. +writes these lines to test.toc.
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2}
 \contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2}
 
+\contentsline -The section or subsection is the sectioning unit. The -hook \numberline lets you to change how the information appears -in the table of contents. Of its two arguments, 1 or 1.1 -is the sectioning unit number and First section or First -subsection is the title. Finally, 2 is the page number on which -the sectioning units start. - -One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to get the -contents page correct you must run &latex; twice, once to store the -information and once to get it. In particular, the first time that you -run &latex; on a new document, the table of contents page will be empty -except for its Contents header. Just run it again. +Each line contains a single command, \contentsline +(\contentsline). The first argument, the section or +subsection, is the sectioning unit. The second argument has two +components. The hook \numberline determines how the sectioning +number, 1 or 1.1, appears in the table of contents +(\numberline). The remainder of the second argument of +\contentsline, First section or First subsection, +is the sectioning title text. Finally, the third argument, 2, is +the page number on which this sectioning unit starts. + +To typeset these lines, the document class provides +\l&arobase;section-unit commands such as +\l&arobase;section{text}{pagenumber} and +\l&arobase;subsection{text}{pagenumber}. These commands +often use the \&arobase;dottedtocline command +(\&arobase;dottedtocline). + +A consequence of &latex;&textrsquo;s strategy of using auxiliary files is that to +get the correct information in the document you must run &latex; twice, +once to store the information and the second time to retrieve it. In +the ordinary course of writing a document authors run &latex; a number +of times, but you may notice that the first time that you compile a new +document, the table of contents page will be empty except for its +Contents header. Just run &latex; again. The commands \listoffigures and \listoftables produce a -list of figures and a list of tables. They work the same way as the -contents commands; for instance, these work with information stored in -.lof and .lot files. - -package, babel -babel package +list of figures and a list of tables. Their information is stored in +files with extension .lof and .lot. They work the same way +as \tableofcontents but the latter is more common, so we use it +for most examples. + +You can manually add material to the table of contents, the list of +figures, and the list of tables. For instance, add a line about a +section to the table of contents with +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{text}. +(\addcontentsline). Add arbitrary material, that is, non-line +material, with \addtocontents, as with the command +\addtocontents{lof}{\protect\vspace{2ex}}, which adds +vertical space to the list of figures (\addtocontents). + +Lines in the table of contents, the list of figures, and the list of +tables, have four parts. First is an indent. Next is a box into which +sectioning numbers are placed, and then the third box holds the title +text, such as First section. Finally there is a box up against +the right margin, inside of which &latex; puts the page number box. +For the indent and the width of the number box, +\&arobase;dottedtocline. The right margin box has width +\&arobase;tocrmarg and the page number is flush right in that space, +inside a box of width \&arobase;pnumwidth. By default +\&arobase;tocrmarg is 2.55em and \&arobase;pnumwidth is +1.55em. Change these as with +\renewcommand{\&arobase;tocrmarg}{3.5em}. + +package, tocloft +tocloft package + +package, tocbibbind +tocbibbind package -package, polyglossia -polyglossia package - -To change the header for the table of contents page do something like -the first line here. +CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures +and tables (CTAN). The package tocloft is convenient for +adjusting some aspects of the default such as spacing. And, +tocbibbind will automatically add the bibliography, index, +etc. to the table of contents. + +To change the header for the table of contents page, do something like +these commands before you call \tableofcontents, etc. -
\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
+
\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of Contents}
 \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
-\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables}
+\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Specifications}
 
-Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two. -Internationalization packages such as babel or polyglossia -will change the headers depending on the chosen base language. +package, babel +babel package -package, tocloft -tocloft package - -package, tocbibbind -tocbibbind package +package, polyglossia +polyglossia package -CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures -and tables. One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the -default, such as spacing, is tocloft. And, tocbibbind -will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of -contents. +Internationalization packages such as babel or polyglossia +will change these headers depending on the chosen base language. -\addcontentsline
Add an entry to table of contents, etc.
+\&arobase;dottedtocline
Format entry line in table of contents, etc.
+
\addcontentsline
Add an entry to table of contents, etc.
 
\addtocontents
Add text directly to table of contents file, etc.
+
\contentsline
Set line in table of contents, etc.
 
\nofiles
Prevent writing to auxiliary files.
+
\numberline
Put its number argument flush left in a box.
 
-\addcontentsline\addtocontentsTable of contents etc. +\&arobase;dottedtocline\addcontentslineTable of contents etc. +\&arobase;dottedtocline + +\&arobase;dottedtocline +table of contents entry, create dotted line + +Synopsis: + + +
\&arobase;dottedtocline{section-level-num}{indent}{numwidth}{text}{pagenumber}
+
+ +Used internally by &latex; to format an entry line in the table of +contents, list of figures, or list of tables. Authors do not directly +enter \&arobase;dottedtocline commands. + +This command is typically used by \l&arobase;section, \l&arobase;subsection, +etc., to format the content lines. For example, the article.cls +file contains these definitions: + + +
\newcommand*\l&arobase;section{\&arobase;dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+\newcommand*\l&arobase;subsection{\&arobase;dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}
+\newcommand*\l&arobase;subsubsection{\&arobase;dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}
+
+ + +In this example, \&arobase;dottedcline appears to have been given only +three arguments. But tracing the internal code shows that it picks up +the final text and pagenumber arguments in the synopsis +from a call to \contentsline. + +leaders, dots in table of contents +Between the box for the title text of a section and the right margin +box, these \&arobase;dottedtocline commands insert leaders, that +is, evenly-spaced dots. The dot-to-dot space is given by the command +\&arobase;dotsep. By default it is 4.5 (it is in math units, which +are 1/18 em. Change it using \renewcommand, as +in \renewcommand{\&arobase;dotsep}{3.5}. + +In the default book class, &latex; does not use dotted leaders for +the Part and Chapter table entries, and in the default article class +it does not use dotted leaders for Section entries. + + +
+\addcontentsline\addtocontents\&arobase;dottedtoclineTable of contents etc. \addcontentsline -\addcontentsline -table of contents entry, manually adding +\addcontentsline +table of contents entry, manually adding Synopsis: @@ -17463,10 +19487,8 @@ contents.
\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text}
 
-\contentsline -Add an entry to the file specified by ext. Usually ext is -one of toc for the table of contents, lof for the list of -figures, or lot for the list of tables. +\contentsline +Add an entry to the auxiliary file with extension ext. The following will result in an Appendices line in the table of contents. @@ -17484,16 +19506,16 @@ where it appears in the input file. root-name.ext. It writes that information as the text of the command \contentsline{unit}{text}{num}, where -num is the current value of counter unit. The -most common case is the table of contents and there num is the -page number of the first page of unit. +num is the current value of counter unit +(\contentsline). The most common case is the table of contents +and there num is the page number of the first page of unit. This command is invoked by the sectioning commands \chapter, etc., and also by \caption inside a float environment. But it is -also used by authors. For example, in a book to have the preface -unnumbered, you may use the starred \chapter*. But that does not -put in table of contents information, so you can enter it manually, as -here. +also used by authors. For example, an author writing a book whose style +is to have an unnumbered preface may use the starred \chapter*. +But that command leaves out table of contents information, which can be +entered manually, as here.
\chapter*{Preface}
@@ -17502,11 +19524,9 @@ here.
 
 
 In the .toc file &latex; will put the line \contentsline
-{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}; note the page number
-3.
+{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}; note that the page number
+3 is automatically generated by the system, not entered manually.
 
-
-
 All of the arguments for \addcontentsline are required.
 
 
@@ -17554,10 +19574,10 @@ will not make sense. -\addtocontents\nofiles\addcontentslineTable of contents etc. +\addtocontents\contentsline\addcontentslineTable of contents etc.\addtocontents -\addtocontents{ext}{text} +\addtocontents{ext}{text} Synopsis: @@ -17567,7 +19587,7 @@ will not make sense. Add text, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to the auxiliary file with extension ext. This is most commonly used -for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also +for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but it also applies to the list of figures and list of tables. This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the @@ -17578,6 +19598,30 @@ applies to the list of figures and list of tables. \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}} + +This puts the word Page, in boldface, above the column of page +numbers and after the header. + + +
\tableofcontents
+\addtocontents{toc}{~\hfill\textbf{Page}\par}
+\chapter{...}
+
+ + +This adds a line announcing work by a new author. + + +
\addtocontents{toc}{%
+  \protect\vspace{2ex}
+  \textbf{Chapters by N. Other Author}\par}
+
+ +The difference between \addtocontents and \addcontentsline +is that the latter is strictly for lines, such as with a line giving the +page number for the start of a new subset of the chapters. As the above +examples show, \addtocontents is for material such as spacing. + The \addtocontents command has two arguments. Both are required. @@ -17606,10 +19650,72 @@ move \addtocontents into the file being included.
-\nofiles\addtocontentsTable of contents etc. +\contentsline\nofiles\addtocontentsTable of contents etc. +\contentsline + +table of contents +\contentsline +\tableofcontents +.toc file +\listoffigures +\listoftables +.lof file +.lot file +\l&arobase;chapter +\l&arobase;section +\l&arobase;subsection + +Synopsis: + + +
\contentsline{unit}{text}{pagenumber}
+
+ +Used internally by &latex; to typeset an entry of the table of +contents, list of figures, or list of tables (Table of contents +etc.). Authors do not directly enter \contentsline commands. + +Usually adding material to these lists is done automatically by the +commands \chapter, \section, etc. for the table of +contents, or by the \caption command inside of a \figure +or \table environment (figure and table). Thus, +where the base file is thesis.tex, and contains the declaration +\tableofcontents, the command \chapter{Chapter One} +produces something like this in the file thesis.toc. + + +
\contentsline {chapter}{\numberline {1}Chapter One}{3}
+
+ +If the file contains the declaration \listoffigures then a figure +environment involving \caption{Test} will produce +something like this in thesis.lof. + + +
\contentsline {figure}{\numberline {1.1}{\ignorespaces Test}}{6}
+
+ +To manually add material, use +\addcontentsline{filetype}{unit}{text}, +where filetype is toc, lof, or lot +(\addcontentsline). + +For manipulating how the \contentline material is typeset, see +the tocloft package. + +Note that the hyperref package changes the definition of +\contentsline (and \addcontentsline) to add more +arguments, to make hyperlinks. This is the source of the error +Argument of \contentsline has an extra }. Fix this error by +deleting the .toc or .lof or .lot file, and running +&latex; again. + + +
+\nofiles\numberline\contentslineTable of contents etc.\nofiles -\nofiles +\nofiles Synopsis: @@ -17640,16 +19746,55 @@ a .toc then the table of contents page will continue to show the old information. + +\numberline\nofilesTable of contents etc. +\numberline + +\numberline + +Synopsis: + + +
\numberline{number}
+
+ +Typeset its argument flush left in a box. This is used in a +\contentsline command to typeset the section number +(\contentsline). + +For example, this line in a .toc file causes the 1 to be +typeset flush left. + + +
\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}Motivation}{2}
+
+ +By default, &latex; typesets the section numbers in a box of length +\&arobase;tempdima. That length is set by the commands +\l&arobase;section, \l&arobase;subsection, etc. Put section numbers +inside a natural-width box with +\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{#1~}. + +This command is fragile, so you may need to precede it with +\protect (\protect). An example is the use of +\protect in the command +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}Summary} +to get the \numberline into this command in the .toc file: +\contentsline {section}{\numberline {}Summary}{6} (the +page number 6 is automatically added by &latex;; +\addcontentsline). + +
IndexesGlossariesTable of contents etc.Front/back matter
Indexes -indexes +indexes -\makeindex -\index -.idx file +\makeindex +\index +.idx file This document has an index. @@ -17681,18 +19826,21 @@ These output a file root-name.ind. Finally, you bring t information back into your document and typeset it with the \printindex command (\printindex). -package, showidx -showidx package +package, showidx +showidx package -package, multind -multind package +package, multind +multind package -There are many packages that apply to indexing commands. The -showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in the -margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing -the index. The multind package supports multiple indexes. See -also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic, -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. +index, multiple +multiple indexes +There are many packages in the area of indexing. The showidx +package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the +page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index. +The multind package, among others, supports multiple indexes. +See also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic, +https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-multind, and the CTAN topic, +https://ctan.org/topic/index-multi. \index
Declare an index entry.
@@ -17704,8 +19852,8 @@ also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic,
 \indexmakeindexIndexes
 \index
 
-index entry
-\index
+index entry
+\index
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -17747,7 +19895,7 @@ document as above will give an index entry like Ackermann, 22,
 instance \index{Ackermann!function} could come before
 \index{Ackermann}.
 
-index, page range
+index, page range
 Get a page range in the output, like Hilbert, 23--27, as here.
 
 
@@ -17768,14 +19916,14 @@ the output is the item Jones with no comma or page number,
 followed by two subitems, like program, 50 and results,
 51.
 
-&textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo; index entries
-index entries, &textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo;
-\seename
-\alsoname
-package, babel
-babel package
- package, polyglossia
-polyglossia package
+see and see also index entries
+index entries, &textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo;
+\seename
+\alsoname
+package, babel
+babel package
+ package, polyglossia
+polyglossia package
 
 
 Generate a index entry that says See by using a vertical bar
@@ -17833,8 +19981,8 @@ would naturally give it.
 entry, preceding it with a double quote, ".  (The double quote
 gets deleted before alphabetization.)
 
-package, index
-index package
+package, index
+index package
 
 A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond that
 provided by makeidx.  One is index, which allows for
@@ -17842,8 +19990,8 @@ multiple indices and contains a command
 \index*{index-entry-string} that prints the
 index-entry-string as well as indexing it.
 
-\indexentry
-idx file
+\indexentry
+idx file
 The \index command writes the indexing information to the file
 root-name.idx file.  Specifically, it writes text of the
 command
@@ -17865,11 +20013,11 @@ message like this.
 makeindex\printindex\indexIndexes
 makeindex
 
-index, processing
-makeindex
-makeindex program
-.ind file
-.idx file
+index, processing
+makeindex
+makeindex program
+.ind file
+.idx file
 
 Synopsis, one of:
 
@@ -17885,9 +20033,9 @@ raw index files, filename.idx files, and produces the
 actual index file, the filename.ind file that is input by
 \printindex (\printindex).
 
-.isty file
-index, style file
-makeindex, style file
+.isty file
+index, style file
+makeindex, style file
 The first form of the command suffices for many uses.  The second allows
 you to format the index by using an index style file, a
 .isty file.  The third form is the most general; see the full
@@ -17925,25 +20073,25 @@ comment.
 
 
 makeindex preamble
-preamblepreamble
+preamblepreamble
 Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the index is
 formatted.  Default: "\\begin{theindex}\n".
 
 makeindex postamble
-postamblepostamble
+postamblepostamble
 Postamble of the output file.  Default: "\n\n\\end{theindex}\n".
 
 makeindex group skip
-group_skipgroup_skip
-\indexspace
+group_skipgroup_skip
+\indexspace
 Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group for
 entries starting with a, etc.  This specifier gives what is
 inserted when a new group begins.  Default: "\n\n \\indexspace\n"
-(\indexspace is a rubber length with default value 10pt
-plus5pt minus3pt).
+(\indexspace is a command inserting a rubber length, by default
+10pt plus5pt minus3pt).
 
 makeindex letheadflag
-lethead_flaglethead_flag
+lethead_flaglethead_flag
 An integer.  It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter.  If
 it is 0 (which is the default) then other than group_skip nothing
 will be inserted before the group. If it is positive then at a new
@@ -17953,93 +20101,93 @@ then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase.  The default
 is 0.
 
 makeindex lethead prefix
-lethead_prefixlethead_prefix
+lethead_prefixlethead_prefix
 If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the prefix
 inserted before the new letter header.  Default: ""
 
 makeindex lethead suffix
-lethead_suffixlethead_suffix
+lethead_suffixlethead_suffix
 If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix
 inserted after the new letter header.  Default: "".
 
 makeindex item 0
-item_0item_0 
+item_0item_0 
 What is put between two level 0 items.  Default: "\n \\item
 ".
 
 makeindex item 1
-item_1item_1
+item_1item_1
 Put between two level 1 items.  Default: "\n \\subitem ".
 
 makeindex item 2
-item_2item_2
+item_2item_2
 put between two level 2 items.  Default: "\n \\subsubitem ".
 
 makeindex item 01
-item_01item_01
+item_01item_01
 What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item.
 Default: "\n \\subitem ".
 
 makeindex item x1
-item_x1item_x1
+item_x1item_x1
 What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item in the
 case that the level 0 item doesn&textrsquo;t have any page numbers (as in
 \index{aaa|see{bbb}}).  Default: "\n \\subitem ".
 
 makeindex item 12
-item_12item_12
+item_12item_12
 What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item.
 Default: "\n \\subsubitem ".
 
 makeindex item x2
-item_x2item_x2
+item_x2item_x2
 What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, if the
 level 1 item doesn&textrsquo;t have page numbers.  Default: "\n
 \\subsubitem ".
 
 makeindex delim 0
-delim_0delim_0
+delim_0delim_0
 Delimiter put between a level 0 key and its first page
 number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, ", ".
 
 makeindex delim 1
-delim_1delim_1
+delim_1delim_1
 Delimiter put between a level 1 key and its first page
 number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, ", ".
 
 makeindex delim 2
-delim_2delim_2
+delim_2delim_2
 Delimiter between a level 2 key and its first page number. Default:
 a comma followed by a blank, ", ".
 
 makeindex delim n
-delim_ndelim_n
+delim_ndelim_n
 Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any
 level). Default: a comma followed by a blank, ", ".
 
 makeindex delim r
-delim_rdelim_r
+delim_rdelim_r
 What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a range.
 Default: "--".
 
 makeindex line max
-line_maxline_max
+line_maxline_max
 An integer.  Maximum length of an index entry&textrsquo;s line in the output,
 beyond which the line wraps.  Default: 72.
 
 makeindex indent space
-indent_spaceindent_space
+indent_spaceindent_space
 What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line.  Default:
 "\t\t".
 
 makeindex indent length
-indent_lengthindent_length
+indent_lengthindent_length
 A number.  The length of the wrapped line indentation.  The default
 indent_space is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
 default here is 16.
 
 makeindex page precedence
-page_precedencepage_precedence
+page_precedencepage_precedence
 A document may have pages numbered in different ways.  For example, a
 book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman while main
 matter pages are in arabic.  This string specifies the order in which
@@ -18051,22 +20199,26 @@ roman R, and uppercase alphabetic A.  Default:
 
 
 
-xindy
-xindy program
+xindy program
 There are a number of other programs that do the job
-makeindex does. One is xindy, which does
-internationalization and can process indexes for documents marked up
-using &latex; and a number of other languages. It is highly
-configurable, both in markup terms and in terms of the collating order
-of the text, as described in its documentation.
+makeindex does. One is xindy
+(https://ctan.org/pkg/xindy), which does internationalization and can
+process indexes for documents marked up using &latex; and a number of
+other languages. It is written in Lisp, highly configurable, both in
+markup terms and in terms of the collating order of the text, as
+described in its documentation.
+
+xindex program
+A more recent indexing program supporting Unicode is xindex,
+written in Lua (https://ctan.org/pkg/xindex).
 
 
 
 \printindexmakeindexIndexes
 \printindex
 
-index, printing
-\printindex
+index, printing
+\printindex
 
 Synopsis:
 
@@ -18074,13 +20226,13 @@ of the text, as described in its documentation.
 
\printindex
 
-\printindex +\printindex Place the index into the output. To get an index you must first include \usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex in the document preamble and compile the document, then run the system command makeindex, -and then compile the document again. Indexes for further +and then compile the document again. Indexes, for further discussion and an example of the use of \printindex. @@ -18089,11 +20241,11 @@ discussion and an example of the use of \printindex. GlossariesIndexesFront/back matter
Glossaries -glossary -glossaries -acronyms, list of -\makeglossary -\printglossaries +glossary +glossaries +acronyms, list of +\makeglossary +\printglossaries Synopsis: @@ -18137,9 +20289,9 @@ of a Turing machine. In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed Turing machine and the rest of the item says in normal type A model of a machine &dots; Computer Science. -\makeglossary -\printglossaries -.glo file +\makeglossary +\printglossaries +.glo file The command \makeglossary opens the file that will contain the entry information, root-file.glo. Put the \printglossaries command where you want the glossaries to appear @@ -18159,8 +20311,8 @@ CTAN. \newglossaryentry\glsGlossaries \newglossaryentry -glossary, entries -\newglossaryentry +glossary, entries +\newglossaryentry Synopsis, one of: @@ -18188,7 +20340,7 @@ CTAN. the document. The settings associated with the label are pairs: key=value. -This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers 211D in the +This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers 211D, in the glossary. @@ -18206,22 +20358,22 @@ paragraph. here are a few. -namename +namename (Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining. -descriptiondescription +descriptiondescription (Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary. If this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second command form given in the synopsis. -pluralplural +pluralplural The plural form of name. Refer to the plural form using \glspl or \Glspl (\gls). -sortsort +sortsort How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary holds. -symbolsymbol +symbolsymbol A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name. @@ -18231,8 +20383,8 @@ form given in the synopsis. \gls\newglossaryentryGlossaries \gls -glossary, entry reference -\gls +glossary, entry reference +\gls Synopsis, one of: @@ -18270,11 +20422,11 @@ which also takes the plural.
-LettersTerminal input/outputFront/back matterTop +LettersInput/outputFront/back matterTop Letters -letters, writing -writing letters +letters, writing +writing letters Synopsis: @@ -18324,7 +20476,7 @@ such as \chapter that make no sense in a letter are turned off. Each letter environment body typically ends with a \closing command such as \closing{Yours,}. -\\ for letters +\\ for letters Additional material may come after the \closing. You can say who is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like \cc{the Boss \\ the Boss's Boss}. There&textrsquo;s a similar \encl command for @@ -18378,7 +20530,7 @@ I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you. \address\ccLetters
\address -\address +\address Synopsis: @@ -18411,8 +20563,8 @@ is formatted as a personal letter. \cc\closing\addressLetters
\cc -\cc -cc list, in letters +\cc +cc list, in letters Synopsis: @@ -18436,9 +20588,9 @@ with a double backslash, \\, as in: \closing\encl\ccLetters
\closing -\closing -letters, ending -closing letters +\closing +letters, ending +closing letters Synopsis: @@ -18458,8 +20610,8 @@ at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature. For example: \encl\location\closingLetters
\encl -\encl -enclosure list +\encl +enclosure list Synopsis: @@ -18482,7 +20634,7 @@ Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, \\. \location\makelabels\enclLetters
\location -\location +\location Synopsis: @@ -18498,7 +20650,7 @@ appears if the page style is firstpage. \makelabels\name\locationLetters
\makelabels -\makelabels +\makelabels Synopsis: @@ -18555,8 +20707,8 @@ columns having two labels each. The first column contains the return address twice. The second column contains the address for each recipient. -package, envlab -envlab package +package, envlab +envlab package The package envlab makes formatting the labels easier, with standard sizes already provided. The preamble lines @@ -18568,7 +20720,7 @@ are all that you need to print envelopes. \name\opening\makelabelsLetters
\name -\name +\name Synopsis: @@ -18584,8 +20736,8 @@ with the return address. \opening\ps\nameLetters
\opening -\opening -letters, starting +\opening +letters, starting Synopsis: @@ -18604,8 +20756,8 @@ with the return address.
\ps\signature\openingLetters
\ps -\ps -postscript, in letters +\ps +postscript, in letters Synopsis: @@ -18632,7 +20784,7 @@ with the return address. ... }
-\signature +\signature The sender&textrsquo;s name. This command is optional, although its inclusion is usual. @@ -18669,29 +20821,11 @@ the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a (Graphics). - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
\telephone\signatureLetters
\telephone -\telephone +\telephone Synopsis: @@ -18707,22 +20841,167 @@ page.
-Terminal input/outputCommand lineLettersTop -Terminal input/output +Input/outputCommand line interfaceLettersTop +Input/output -input/output, to terminal -terminal input/output +input/output, to terminal +terminal input/output +input/output +&latex; uses the ability to write to a file and later read it back in +to build document components such as a table of contents or index. You +can also read a file that other programs written, or write a file for +others to read. You can communicate with users through the terminal. +And, you can issue instructions for the operating system. + -\typein
Read text from the terminal.
+\openin & \openout
Open a file.
+
\read
Read text from a file.
+
\typein
Read text from the terminal.
 
\typeout
Write text to the terminal.
+
\write
Write text to a file or terminal.
 
-\typein\typeoutTerminal input/output +\openin & \openout\readInput/output +
\openin & \openout + +\openin +\openout +\closein +\closeout +file, opening +file, closing +open a file + +Synopsis: + + +
\openin number=filename
+
+ +or: + + +
\openout number=filename
+
+ +Open a file for reading material, or for writing it. The number +must be between 0 and 15, as in \openin3 (in Lua&latex; +number can be between 0 and 255). + +Here &tex; opens the file presidents.tex for reading. + + +
\newread\presidentsfile
+\openin\presidentsfile=presidents
+\typeout{presidentsfile is \the\presidentsfile}
+\read\presidentsfile to\presidentline
+\typeout{\presidentline}
+
+ + +The \newread command allocates input stream numbers from 0 +to 15 (there is also a \newwrite). The +\presidentsfile is more memorable but under the hood it is still +a number; the first \typeout gives something like +presidentsfile is 1. In addition, \newread keeps track of +the allocation so that if you use too many then you get an error like +! No room for a new \read. The second \typeout gives the +first line of the file, something like 1 Washington, George. + +Ordinarily &tex; will not try to open the file until the next page +shipout. To change this, use +\immediate\openin number=filename or +\immediate\openout number=filename. + +Close files with \closein number and +\closeout number. + +How &latex; handles filenames varies among distributions, and even can +vary among versions of a distribution. If the file does not have an +extension then &tex; will add a .tex. This creates +presidents.tex, writes one line to it, and closes it. + + +
\newwrite\presidentsfile
+\openout\presidentsfile=presidents
+\write\presidentsfile{1 Washington, George}
+\closeout\presidentsfile
+
+ + +But filenames with a period can cause trouble: if &tex; finds a +filename of presidents.dat it could look first for +presidents.dat.tex and later for presidents.dat, or it +could do the opposite. Your distribution&textrsquo;s documentation should say +more, and if you find something that works for you then you are good, +but to ensure complete portability the best thing is to use file names +containing only the twenty six ASCII letters (not case-sensitive) and +the ten digits, along with underscore and dash, and in particular with +no dot or space. + +For \openin, if &tex; cannot find the file then it does not give +an error. It just considers that the stream is not open (test for this +with \ifeof; one recourse is the command +\InputIfFileExists, Class and package commands). If you +try to use the same number twice, &latex; won&textrsquo;t give you an error. If +you try to use a bad number then you get an error message like ! +Bad number (16). <to be read again> = l.30 \openin16=test.jh. + + +
+\read\typein\openin & \openoutInput/output +
\read + +\read +file, reading +read a file + +Synopsis: + + +
\read number tomacro
+
+ +Make the command macro contain the next line of input from text +stream number, as in \read5 to\data. + +This opens the file email.tex for reading, puts the contents of +the first line into the command \email, and then closes the file. + + +
\newread\recipientfile
+\openin\recipientfile=email
+\read\recipientfile to\email
+\typeout{Email address: \email}
+\closein\recipientfile
+
+ +If number is outside the range from 0 to 15 or if no file +of that number is open, or if the file has ended, then \read +will take input from the terminal (or exit if interaction is not +allowed, e.g., \nonstopmode; interaction modes). +(However, the natural way in &latex; to take input from the terminal +is \typein (\typein.) + +To read an entire file as additional &latex; source, use +\input (\input) or \include (\include & +\includeonly). + +package, datatool +datatool package + +mail merges +A common reason to want to read from a data file is to do mail merges. +CTAN has a number of packages for that; one is datatool. + + +
+\typein\typeout\readInput/output
\typein -\typein +\typein Synopsis, one of: @@ -18758,9 +21037,9 @@ the input you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the \typein command. In the second command version the optional argument cmd -argument must be a command name &textmdash; it must begin with a backslash, \. -This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you -typed. For example, this +argument must be a command name, that is, it must begin with a +backslash, \. This command name is then defined or redefined to be +the input that you typed. For example, this
\typein[\student]{Enter student name:}
@@ -18782,10 +21061,10 @@ Recommendation for John Dee.
 
 
 
-\typeout\typeinTerminal input/output +\typeout\write\typeinInput/output
\typeout -\typeout +\typeout Synopsis: @@ -18826,12 +21105,416 @@ character with \csname &arobase;percentchar\endcsname. produces on the command line The length is 5.0pt. +
+\write\typeoutInput/output +
\write + +\write + +Synopsis: + + +
\write number{string}
+
+ +Write string to the log file, to the terminal, or to a file +opened by \openout. For instance, \write6 writes to text +stream number 6. + +If the following appears in basefile.tex then it opens +basefile.jh, writes Hello World! and a newline to +it, and closes that file. + + +
\newwrite\myfile
+\immediate\openout\myfile=\jobname.jh  % \jobname is root file basename
+...
+\immediate\write\myfile{Hello world!}
+...
+\immediate\closeout\myfile
+
+ +\newwrite + +The \newwrite allocates a stream number, giving it a symbolic +name to make life easier, so that stream +\newwrite\myfile\the\myfile produces something like stream 3. +Then \openout associates the stream number with the given file +name. &tex; ultimately executed \write3 which puts the string +in the file. + +log file, writing to +terminal, writing to +-1, write stream number +Typically number is between 0 and 15, because typically +&latex; authors follow the prior example and the number is allocated +by the system. If number is outside the range from 0 to 15 or +if it is not associated with an open file then &latex; writes +string to the log file. If number is positive then in +addition &latex; writes string to the terminal. + +Thus, test \write-1{Hello World!} puts Hello World! +followed by a newline in the log file. (This is what the \wlog +command does; \wlog). And \write100{Hello World!} +puts the same in the log file but also puts Hello World! +followed by a newline in the terminal output. (But 16, 17, and 18 are +special as number; see below.) + +Lua&tex;, 256 output streams in +In Lua&tex;, instead of 16 output streams there are 256 +(&tex; engines). + +\&arobase;auxout +\&arobase;mainaux +Use \write\&arobase;auxout{string} to write to the current +.aux file, which is associated with either the root file or +with the current include file; and use +\write\&arobase;mainaux{string} to write to the main +.aux. These symbolic names are defined by &latex;. + + +By default &latex; does not write string to the file right +away. This is because, for example, you may need \write to +save the current page number, but when &tex; comes across a +\write it typically does not know what the page number is, +since it has not yet done the page breaking. So, you use \write +in one of three contexts: + + +
\immediate\write\&arobase;auxout{string}      %1
+\write\&arobase;auxout{string}                %2
+\protected&arobase;write\&arobase;auxout{}{string}    %3
+
+ + + +immediate \write +\immediate\write +With the first, &latex; writes string to the file immediately. +Any macros in string are fully expanded (just as in +\edef) so to prevent expansion you must use \noexpand, +toks, etc., except that you should use # instead of +##). + + +delayed \write +whatsit item +\shipout and expansion +With the second, string is stored on the current list of things +(as a &tex; &textldquo;whatsit&textrdquo; item) and kept until the page is shipped out +and likewise the macros are unexpanded until \shipout. At +\shipout, string is fully expanded. + + +\protected&arobase;write +The third, \protected&arobase;write, is like the second except that +you can use \protect to avoid expansion. The extra first +argument allows you to locally insert extra definitions to make more +macros protected or to have some other special definition for the +write. + + +As a simple example of expansion with \write, string here +contains a control sequence \triplex which we&textrsquo;ve defined to be +the text XYZ: + + +
\newwrite\jhfile
+\openout\jhfile=test.jh
+\newcommand{\triplex}{XYZ}
+\write\jhfile{test \triplex test}
+
+ + +This results in the file test.jh containing the text +test XYZtest followed by a newline. + +\write streams 16, 17, 18 +The cases where number is 16, 17, or 18 are special. Because of +\write&textrsquo;s behavior when number is outside the range from 0 +to 15 described above, in Plain &tex; \write16 and +\write17 were sometimes used to write to the log file and the +terminal; however, in &latex;, the natural way to do that is with +\typeout (\typeout). The \write18 command is +even more special; modern &tex; systems use it for giving commands to +the operating system (\write18). + +newline, in \write +^^J, in \write +Ordinarily \write outputs a single line. You can include a +newline with ^^J. Thus, this produces two lines in the log +file: + + +
\wlog{Parallel lines have a lot in common.^^JBut they never meet.}
+
+ +package, answers +answers package + +A common case where authors need to write their own file is for +answers to exercises, or another situation where you want to write +out verbatim, without expanding the macros. CTAN has a number of +packages for this; one is answers. + + +\write and security
Security.
+
\message
Write text to the log file and terminal.
+
\wlog
Write text to the log file.
+
\write18
Run an operating system command.
+
+ + +\write and security\message\write +\write and security + +security and \write +\write and security + +The ability to write files raises security issues. If you compiled a +downloaded &latex; file and it overwrote your password file then you +would be justifiably troubled. + +Thus, by default &tex; systems only allow you to open files for +writing that are in the current directory or output directory, if +specified (output directory), or in a subdirectory of +those. So, this code + + +
\newwrite\jhfile
+\openout\jhfile=../test.jh
+
+ + +gives an error like: + +
Not writing to ../test.jh (openout_any = p).
+! I can't write on file `../test.jh'
+
+ +parent directories, cannot write to +You can get just such an error when using commands such as +\include{../filename} because &latex; will try to open +../filename.aux. The simplest solution is to put the included +files in the same directory as the root file, or in subdirectories. + + +
+\message\wlog\write and security\write +\message + +\message + +Synopsis: + + +
\message{string}
+
+ +Write string to the log file and the terminal. + +Typically, &latex; authors use \typeout (\typeout). It +allows you to use \protect on any fragile commands in +string (\protect). But \typeout always inserts a +newline at the end of string while \message does not, so +the latter can be useful. + +With this example document body. + + +
before\message{One Two}\message{Three}\message{Four^^JI}
+\message{declare a thumb war.}After
+
+ + +under some circumstances (see below) &latex; writes the following to +both the terminal and the log file. + + +
One Two Three Four
+I declare a thumb war.
+
+ + +The ^^J produces a newline. Also, in the output document, +between before and After will be a single space (from +the end of line following I}). + +While \message allows you more control over formatting, a +gotcha is that &latex; may mess up that formatting because it inserts +line breaks depending on what it has already written. Contrast this +document body, where the Two has moved, to the one given above. + + +
before\message{One}\message{Two Three}\message{Four^^JI}
+\message{declare a thumb war.}After
+
+ +This can happen: when &latex; is outputting the messages to the +terminal, now the message with One is shorter and it fits at the +end of the output terminal line, and so &latex; breaks the line between +it and the Two Three. That line break appears also in the log +file. This line break insertion can depend on, for instance, the length +of the full path names of included files. So producing finely-formatted +lines in a way that is portable is hard, likely requiring +starting your message at the beginning of a line. + + +
+\wlog\write18\message\write +\wlog + +\wlog + +Synopsis: + + +
\wlog{string}
+
+ +Write string to the log file. + + +
\wlog{Did you hear about the mathematician who hates negatives?}
+\wlog{He'll stop at nothing to avoid them.}
+
+ +Ordinarily string appears in a single separate line. Use +^^J to insert a newline. + + +
\wlog{Helvetica and Times Roman walk into a bar.}
+\wlog{The barman says,^^JWe don't serve your type.}
+
+ + +
+\write18\wlog\write +\write18 + +\write18 +external commands +commands, run from &latex; +system commands, run from &latex; +shell access + + +Synopsis: + + +
\write18{shell_command}
+
+ +Issue a command to the operating system shell. The operating system +runs the command and &latex;&textrsquo;s execution is blocked until that +finishes. + +package, Asymptote +Asymptote package + +This sequence (on Unix) + + +
\usepackage{graphicx}  % in preamble
+  ...
+\newcommand{\fignum}{1}
+\immediate\write18{cd pix && asy figure\fignum}
+\includegraphics{pix\figure\fignum.pdf}
+
+ + +will run Asymptote (the asy program) on pix/figure1.asy, +so that the document can later read in the resulting graphic +(\includegraphics). Like any \write, here &latex; +expands macros in shell_command so that \fignum is +replaced by 1. + +Another example is that you can automatically run Bib&tex; at the start +of each &latex; run (Using BibTeX) by including +\immediate\write18{bibtex8 \jobname} as the first line of the +file. Note that \jobname expands to the basename of the root +file unless the --jobname option is passed on the command line, +in which case this is the option argument. + +You sometimes need to do a multi-step process to get the information +that you want. This will insert into the input a list of all PDF files +in the current directory (but see texosquery below): + + +
\immediate\write18{ls *.pdf > tmp.dat}
+\input{tmp.dat}
+
+ +The standard behavior of any \write is to wait until a page is +being shipped out before expanding the macros or writing to the stream +(\write). But sometimes you want it done now. For this, use +\immediate\write18{shell_command}. + +There are obvious security issues with allowing system commands inside +a &latex; file. If you download a file off the net and it contains +commands to delete all your files then you would be unhappy. The +standard settings in modern distributions turn off full shell +access. You can turn it on, if you are sure the shell commands are +safe, by compiling with latex --enable-write18 filename +(Command line options). (The --shell-escape option is +a synonym, in &tex; Live.) + +restricted shell access +In the place of full shell access, modern distributions by default use +a restricted version that allows some commands to work, such as those +that run Metafont to generate missing fonts, even if you do not use +the enable-write18 option. By default this list of allowed +commands is short and features only commands that are under the +control of the distribution maintainers (Command line +options). + +/bin/sh, used by \write18 +sh, used by \write18 +cmd.exe, used by \write18 +SHELL, environment variables +The shell_command text is always passed to /bin/sh on +Unix-like operating systems, and the DOS command interpreter +cmd.exe on Windows. Any different shell set by the user, and +the SHELL environment variable, is ignored. + +package, texosquery +texosquery package + +system information +operating system information +locale information, from system +directory listings, from system +If what you need is system information, such as the operating system +name, locale information, or directory contents, take a look at the +texosquery package, which provides a convenient and secure +interface for this, unlike the above examples using the raw +\write18: https://ctan.org/pkg/texosquery. + +package, shellesc +shellesc package + +\ShellEscape +\DelayedShellEscape +&latex; provides a package shellesc on top of the primitive +\write18 command. Its primary purpose is to provide a command +\ShellEscape which works identically on all &tex; engines; +Lua&tex; intentionally did not retain \write18 as a way to +invoke a shell command, so some engine-specific code is needed. The +shellesc package also provides a command +\DelayedShellEscape, executed at \output time, for the +same reason. + + +
-Command lineDocument templatesTerminal input/outputTop -Command line +Command line interfaceDocument templatesInput/outputTop +Command line interface -command line +Command line +command line interface +interface, command line +CLI Synopsis (from a terminal command line): @@ -18839,9 +21522,10 @@ character with \csname &arobase;percentchar\endcsname.
pdflatex options argument
 
-Run &latex; on argument. In place of pdflatex you can -also use xelatex, or lualatex, or dviluatex, or -latex. +Run &latex; on argument. In place of pdflatex you +can also use (for PDF output) xelatex or lualatex, or +(for DVI output) latex or dvilualatex, among others +(&tex; engines). For example, this will run &latex; on the file thesis.tex, creating the output thesis.pdf. @@ -18851,20 +21535,21 @@ creating the output thesis.pdf. -.tex, default extension -Note that .tex is the default file extension. - -pdf&tex; is a development of the original &tex; program, as are -Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; (&tex; engines). They are completely -backward compatible. But the original program had a custom output -format, DVI, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF. This -allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as -hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and -ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run pdflatex or -xelatex or lualatex then you will by default get PDF -and have access to all its modern features. If you run latex, -or dvilualatex, then you will get DVI. The description here -assumes pdf&latex;. +.tex, default extension +Note that .tex is the default file name extension. + +pdf&tex; is an extension of the original &tex; program, as are +Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; (&tex; engines). The first two are +completely backward compatible and the latter, almost so. Perhaps the +most fundamental new feature for all three is that the original &tex; +output its own DVI format, while the newer ones can output directly to +PDF. This allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF +such as hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and +PNG, and ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run +pdflatex or xelatex or lualatex then you +will by default get PDF and have access to all its modern features. +If you run latex, or dvilualatex, then you will get +DVI. The description here assumes pdf&latex;. Command line options, for a selection of the most useful command line options. As to argument, the usual case is that it @@ -18876,56 +21561,65 @@ input). If you gave no arguments or options then pdflatex prompts for input from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering -<control>-D. +CTRL-D. If &latex; finds an error in your document then by default it stops and -asks you about it. Recovering from errors for an outline of what +asks you about it. Recovering from errors, for an outline of what to do. -Command line options
Read text from the terminal.
-
Command line input
Write text to the terminal.
+Command line options
Commonly used command line options.
+
Command line input
Specify LaTeX code on the command line.
+
Jobname
How &tex; sets the current job name.
 
Recovering from errors
When something goes wrong.
 
-Command line optionsCommand line inputCommand line +Command line optionsCommand line inputCommand line interface
Command line options -options, command line +options, command line These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document authoring. For a full list, try running latex --help from the command line. With many implementations you can specify command line options by -prefixing them with - or --. This is the case for -both &tex; Live (and Mac&tex;) and MiK&tex;. We will use both -conventions interchangeably. +prefixing them with - or --. This is the case for both +&tex; Live (including Mac&tex;) and MiK&tex;. We will use both +conventions interchangeably. If an option takes a value, it can be +specified either as a separate argument (--foo val), or as one +argument with an = sign (--foo=val), but there can be no +spaces around the =. We will generally use the = syntax.
---version command-line option +--version command-line option -version Show the current version, like pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX Live 2015/Debian) along with a small amount of additional information, and exit. ---help command-line option +--help command-line option -help Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit. ---interaction command-line option +interaction modes +--interaction command-line option -interaction=mode -&tex; compiles a document in one of four interaction modes: +batchmode +scrollmode +errorstopmode +nonstopmode +&tex; compiles a document in one of four interaction modes: batchmode, nonstopmode, scrollmode, -errorstopmode. In errorstop mode (the default), &tex; -stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In batch -mode it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the -user hit <return> at every error, and missing files cause the -job to abort. In nonstop mode, diagnostic message appear on the -terminal but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In -scroll mode, &tex; only stops for missing files or keyboard -input. +errorstopmode. In errorstopmode (the default), &tex; +stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In batchmode +it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the user +hit RETURN at every error, and missing files cause the job to +abort. In nonstopmode, diagnostic message appear on the terminal +but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In +scrollmode, &tex; stops for missing files or keyboard +input, but nothing else. For instance, starting &latex; with this command line @@ -18936,61 +21630,62 @@ input. eliminates most terminal output. ---jobname command-line option +jobname +filename for current job +--jobname command-line option -jobname=string -Set the value of &tex;&textrsquo;s jobname to the string. The log file +Set the value of &tex;&textrsquo;s jobname to the string. The log file and output file will then be named string.log and -string.pdf. - -When you run pdflatex options argument, if -argument does not start with a backslash then &tex; considers it -the name of a file to input. Otherwise it waits for the first -\input instruction and the name of the input file will be the job -name. This is used to name the log file the output file. The -jobname option overrides that process and directly specifies the -name. Command line input for an example of its use. +string.pdf. Jobname. ---output-directory command-line option +output directory +output directory for all external files +--output-directory command-line option -output-directory=directory Write files in the directory directory. It must already exist. - ---shell-escape command-line option ---no-shell-escape command-line option ---enable-write18 command-line option ---disable-write18 command-line option ---shell-escape ---no-shell-escape ---enable-write18 +This applies to all external files created by &tex; or &latex;, such +as the .log file for the run, the .aux, .toc, +etc., files created by &latex;, as well as the main .pdf or +.dvi output file itself. + +When specified, the output directory directory is also +automatically checked first for any file that it is input, so that the +external files can be read back in, if desired. The true current +directory (in which &latex; was run) remains unchanged, and is also +checked for input files. + +shell escape +\write18, enabling +--enable-write18 command-line option +--disable-write18 command-line option +--shell-escape command-line option +--no-shell-escape command-line option +--enable-write18 --disable-write18 -Enable or disable \write18{shell command}. The first two -options are for with &tex; Live or Mac&tex; while the second two are -for MiK&tex;. - -package, sagetex -sagetex package - -Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a -&latex; file. For instance the package sagetex allows you to -have the mathematics software system Sage do calculations or draw -graphs and then incorporate that output in your document. For this -&tex; provides the \write18 command. - -But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen if you -compiled a &latex; file from the Internet. By default \write18 -is disabled. (More precisely, by default &tex; Live, Mac&tex;, and -MiK&tex; only allow the execution of a limited number of &tex;-related -programs, which they distribute.) - -If you invoke &latex; with the option no-shell-escape, and in -your document you call \write18{ls -l}, then you do not get an -error but the log file says runsystem(ls -l)...disabled. - ---halt-on-error command-line option +--shell-escape +--no-shell-escape +Enable or disable \write18{shell_command} +(\write18). The first two options are supported by both +&tex; Live and MiK&tex;, while the second two are synonyms supported +by &tex; Live. + +Enabling this functionality has major security implications, since it +allows a &latex; file to run any command whatsoever. Thus, by +default, unrestricted \write18 is not allowed. (The default +for &tex; Live, Mac&tex;, and MiK&tex; is to allow the execution of +a limited number of &tex;-related programs, which they distribute.) + +For example, if you invoke &latex; with the option +no-shell-escape, and in your document you call +\write18{ls -l}, then you do not get an error but the log +file says runsystem(ls -l)...disabled. + +--halt-on-error command-line option -halt-on-error Stop processing at the first error. ---file-line-error command-line option ---no-file-line-error command-line option +--file-line-error command-line option +--no-file-line-error command-line option -file-line-error -no-file-line-error Enable or disable filename:lineno:error-style @@ -18999,22 +21694,26 @@ error messages. These are only available with &tex; Live or Mac&tex;. -Command line inputRecovering from errorsCommand line optionsCommand line +Command line inputJobnameCommand line optionsCommand line interface
Command line input -input, on command line +input, on command line -As part of the command line invocation pdflatex options -argument you can specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting -argument with a backslash. This allows you to do some special -effects. +As part of the command line invocation -package, hyperref -hyperref package + +
latex-engine options argument
+
-For example, this file (which uses the hyperref package for -hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a -PDF. +you can specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting +argument with a backslash. (All the engines support this.) This +allows you to do some special effects. + +package, hyperref +hyperref package + For example, this file (which uses the +hyperref package for hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of +output, one to be read on physical paper and one to be read online.
\ifdefined\paperversion        % in preamble
@@ -19031,10 +21730,17 @@ PDF.
 
 Compiling this document book.tex with the command line
 pdflatex book will give the CTAN link in blue.  But
-compiling it with pdflatex "\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex"
-has the link in black.  (Note the use of double quotes to prevent
-interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell; your system may
-do this differently.)
+compiling it with
+
+
+
pdflatex "\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex"
+
+ +has the link in black. We use double quotes to prevent +interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell. (This +usually works on both Unix and Windows systems, but there are many +peculiarities to shell quoting, so read your system documentation if +need be.) In a similar way, from the single file main.tex you can compile two different versions. @@ -19047,25 +21753,117 @@ pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main The jobname option is there because otherwise both files would be -called main.pdf and the second would overwrite the first. +called main.pdf and the second would overwrite the first. (See +the next section.) + +In this example, we pass the draft option to the +graphicx package: + + +
pdflatex "\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+
+ + +so the graphic files are read for their bounding box size information +but replaced in the PDF by a box with same size and that contains only +the file name, which speeds up compilation time and saves printer ink. -A final example. This loads the package graphicx with the option -draft + +
+JobnameRecovering from errorsCommand line inputCommand line interface +
Jobname + +\jobname +jobname +document root name +name of document root + +Running &latex; creates a number of files, including the main PDF (or +DVI) output but also including others. These files are named with the +so-called jobname. The most common case is also the simplest, +where for instance the command pdflatex thesis creates +thesis.pdf and also thesis.log and thesis.aux. +Here the job name is thesis. + +In general, &latex; is invoked as latex-engine +options argument, where latex-engine is +pdflatex, lualatex, etc.&noeos; (&tex; engines). +If argument does not start with a backslash, as is the case +above with thesis, then &tex; considers it to be the name of +the file to input as the main document. The name of that root file, +without the .tex extension, is the jobname. If argument +does start with a backslash, or if &tex; is in interactive mode, then +it waits for the first \input command, and the jobname is the +argument to \input. + +There are two more possibilities for the jobname. It can be directly +specified with the -jobname option, as in pdflatex +-jobname=myname (Command line input for a real example). + +texput, jobname default +fallback jobname +The final possibility is texput, which is the final fallback +default if no other name is available to &tex;. For example, if no +-jobname option was specified, and the compilation stops before +there is any output, then the log file will be named +texput.log. + +\documentclass, and texput jobname +\RequirePackage, and texput jobname +A special case of this is that in &latex; versions of (approximately) +2020 or later, the jobname is also texput if the first +\input occurs as a result of being called by either +\documentclass or \RequirePackage. So this will produce +a file named texput.pdf: + + +
pdflatex "\documentclass{minimal}\begin{document}Hello!\end{document}"
+
+ +However, this special case only applies to those two commands. Thus, with -
pdflatex -jobname=aa "\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+
pdflatex "\documentclass{article}\usepackage{lipsum}\input{thesis}"
 
-so the graphic files are read for their size information but not -incorporated into the PDF. (The jobname option is there because -otherwise the output file would be graphicx.pdf, as -\RequirePackage does an \input of its own.) +the output file is lipsum.pdf, as \usepackage calls +\input. + +\jobname +Within the document, the macro \jobname expands to the jobname. +(When you run &latex; on a file whose name contains spaces, the string +returned by \jobname contains matching start and end quotes.) +In the expansion of that macro, all characters are of +catcode 12 (other) except that spaces are category 10, +including letters that are normally catcode 11. + +\IfBeginWith* macro from xstring +package, xstring +xstring package + +Because of this catcode situation, using the jobname in a conditional +can become complicated. One solution is to use the macro +\IfBeginWith from the xstring package in its star +variant, which is insensitive to catcode. For example, in the +following text the footnote &textldquo;Including Respublica Bananensis +Francorum.&textrdquo;&noeos; is only present if the task name starts with +my-doc. + + +
If a democracy is just a regime where citizens vote then
+all banana republics \IfBeginWith*{\jobname}{my-doc}%
+{\footnote{Including Respublica Bananensis Francorum.}}{} are
+democracies.
+
+ +Manipulating the value of \jobname inside of a document does not +change the name of the output file or the log file.
-Recovering from errorsCommand line inputCommand line +Recovering from errorsJobnameCommand line interface
Recovering from errors If &latex; finds an error in your document then it gives you an error @@ -19088,19 +21886,20 @@ l.5 The \PN -The simplest thing is to enter x and <return> and fix the -typo. You could instead enter ? and <return> to see other +The simplest thing is to enter x and RETURN and fix the +typo. You could instead enter ? and RETURN to see other options. -* prompt -prompt, * -\stop +* prompt +prompt, * +\stop There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to include the \end{document} or misspelled it. In this case &latex; gives you a * prompt. You can get back to the command -line by typing \stop and <return>. +line by typing \stop and RETURN; this command does its +best to exit &latex; immediately, whatever state it may be in. -The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name. For instance, +The last scenario is that you mistyped the filename. For instance, instead of pdflatex test you might type pdflatex tste. @@ -19112,36 +21911,38 @@ Please type another input file name: -The simplest thing is to enter <Control> and d (holding -them down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line. +The simplest thing is to enter CTRL d (holding the Control and d +keys down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line.
-Document templatesIndexCommand lineTop +Document templatesIndexCommand line interfaceTop Document templates -document templates -templates, document +document templates +templates, document -Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will +Although illustrative material, perhaps these document templates will be useful. Additional template resources are listed at -http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates. +https://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates. beamer template
 
article template
 
book template
 
Larger book template
-
tugboat template
 
beamer templatearticle templateDocument templates
beamer template -beamer template and class -template, beamer +beamer template and class +template, beamer +package, beamer +beamer package + The beamer class creates presentation slides. It has a vast array of features, but here is a basic template: @@ -19151,7 +21952,7 @@ array of features, but here is a basic template: \title{Beamer Class template} \author{Alex Author} -\date{July 31, 2007} +\date{July 31, 2020} \begin{document} @@ -19170,16 +21971,17 @@ array of features, but here is a basic template: \end{document} -One web resource for this: -http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/. +The Beamer package on CTAN: https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer.
article templatebook templatebeamer templateDocument templates
article template -template, article +template (simple), article +A simple template for an article. + \documentclass{article} \title{Article Class Template} @@ -19196,6 +21998,7 @@ Additional text. \section{Second section} Some more text. + \end{document} @@ -19204,10 +22007,10 @@ Some more text. book templateLarger book templatearticle templateDocument templates
book template -template, book +template, book -This is a straightforward template for a book. See Larger book -template for a more elaborate one. +This is a straightforward template for a book. Larger book +template, for a more elaborate one. \documentclass{book} @@ -19225,29 +22028,33 @@ Some other text. \section{A subtopic} The end. + \end{document}
-Larger book templatetugboat templatebook templateDocument templates +Larger book templatebook templateDocument templates
Larger book template -template, book +template, book -This is a more elaborate template for a book. It has -\frontmatter, \mainmatter, and \backmatter to -control the typography of the three main areas of a book -(\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter). The book has a -bibliography and an index. +This is a somewhat elaborate template for a book. book template, +for a simpler one. + +This template uses \frontmatter, \mainmatter, and +\backmatter to control the typography of the three main areas +of a book (\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter). The +book has a bibliography and an index. -Notable is that it uses \include and \includeonly +Also notable is that it uses \include and \includeonly (Splitting the input). While you are working on a chapter you can comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to -\includeonly. That will speed up compilation without losing any -information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to -come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of -\include. You don&textrsquo;t get the cross-reference benefit this way.) +\includeonly. That will speed up compilation without losing +any information such as cross-references. (Material that does not +need to come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of +\include. You don&textrsquo;t get the cross-reference benefit with +\input.) \documentclass[titlepage]{book} @@ -19257,11 +22064,12 @@ come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of \author{Alex Author} \includeonly{% - frontcover, +% frontcover, preface, chap1, - ... +% appenA, } + \begin{document} \frontmatter \include{frontcover} @@ -19269,113 +22077,22 @@ come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of \maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright} \tableofcontents \include{preface} + \mainmatter \include{chap1} ... \appendix -\include{appena} +\include{appenA} ... + \backmatter \bibliographystyle{apalike} \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography} \bibliography \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index} \printindex -\include{backcover} -\end{document} - - - -
-tugboat templateLarger book templateDocument templates -
tugboat template - -template, TUGboat -TUGboat template -ltugboat class - -TUGboat is the journal of the &tex; Users Group, -http://tug.org/TUGboat. - - -\documentclass{ltugboat} - -\usepackage{graphicx} -\usepackage{ifpdf} -\ifpdf -\usepackage[breaklinks,hidelinks]{hyperref} -\else -\usepackage{url} -\fi - -%%% Start of metadata %%% - -\title{Example \TUB\ article} - -% repeat info for each author. -\author{First Last} -\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country} -\netaddress{user (at) example dot org} -\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/} - -%%% End of metadata %%% - -\begin{document} - -\maketitle - -\begin{abstract} -This is an example article for \TUB{}. -Please write an abstract. -\end{abstract} - -\section{Introduction} - -This is an example article for \TUB, linked from -\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}. - -We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the -\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF} -output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively. - -The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more): -% verbatim blocks are often better in \small -\begin{verbatim}[\small] -\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW -\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML -\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe -\mf \MFB -\plain \POBox \PS -\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP -\TUB \TUG \tug -\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE - -\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph - -\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use! -\cs{fred} -> \fred -\meta{fred} -> <fred> -\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ... -\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4 -\booktitle{Book of Fred} -\end{verbatim} - -For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format -\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue. -This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the -\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For -\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using -\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location, -\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.) - -Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. - -\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style -\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty -\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX - -\makesignature +\include{backcover} \end{document} @@ -19388,7 +22105,7 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. Command Index - + diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.dtx index accfe35b85..d018076e50 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.dtx +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.dtx @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ % % \title{\sffamily easybook 文档类手册} % \author{瞿毅} -% \date{2021/07/22\hskip 1em\relax v1.27N\thanks{\url{https://gitee.com/texl3/easybook}}} +% \date{2021/07/24\hskip 1em\relax v1.27o\thanks{\url{https://gitee.com/texl3/easybook}}} % % \maketitle % \begin{abstract} @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ % cjkfont = % \end{syntax} % 中文字体采用 \CTeX 宏集包含的字库并与其一致,具体配置方案可以查看 \CTeX 使用手册。它与 \opt{fontset} 选项是等效的,如果没有指定 \opt{cjkfont} 的值,将会自动检测用户的操作系统并选择相应的字体。 -% \changes{v1.27N}{2021/07/12}{新增 \opt{cjkfont} 选项设置中文字体,原 \opt{font} 选项设置英文字体,中文字体使用 \CTeX 的字库。} +% \changes{v1.27o}{2021/07/12}{新增 \opt{cjkfont} 选项设置中文字体,原 \opt{font} 选项设置英文字体,中文字体使用 \CTeX 的字库。} % \end{function} % % 如果需要使用其它中文字体,可以在启用选项 \opt{cjkfont = none} 后,再使用 \pkg{xeCJK} 宏包的相关命令设置字体以及声明字体族: @@ -352,19 +352,30 @@ % \changes{v1.23}{2021/03/15}{增加控制编号连接符的选项。} % \end{function} % -% \subsubsection{上标和下标} +% \subsubsection{上下标全局设置} % \label{subsubsec:super-sub-script} -% \begin{function}[EXP,added = 2021-06-26]{super-vshift,super-hshift,sub-vshift,sub-hshift,supersubsep,supersubalign} +% \begin{function}[EXP,added = 2021-06-26,updated = 2021-07-24]{super-vshift,super-hshift,sub-vshift,sub-hshift,super-format,sub-format} % \begin{syntax} % super-vshift = <刚性长度|(0pt)> % super-hshift = <刚性长度|(0pt)> % sub-vshift = <刚性长度|(0pt)> % sub-hshift = <刚性长度|(0pt)> +% super-format = <上标格式> +% sub-format = <下标格式> +% \end{syntax} +% \ding{229} 以上选项路径为 \opt{style/...} \\ +% 可以使用 \tn{spbset} 命令设置上述选项,以上各个选项的参数对应 \tn{super} 或 \tn{sub} 上标下标命令的参数。其中 \meta{刚性长度} 为上标或下标的垂直和水平偏移量,\meta{上标格式} 和 \meta{下标格式} 为上标和下标的格式代码。 +% \end{function} +% +% \begin{function}[EXP,added = 2021-06-26,updated = 2021-07-24]{supersub-hshift,supersub-format,supersubsep,supersubalign} +% \begin{syntax} +% supersub-hshift = <刚性长度|(0pt)> +% supersub-format = \{<上标格式>,<下标格式>\} % supersubsep = <刚性长度|(0.3ex)> % supersubalign = <(l)|c|r> % \end{syntax} % \ding{229} 以上选项路径为 \opt{style/...} \\ -% 可以使用 \tn{spbset} 命令设置上述选项。各垂直和水平偏移的参数对应 \tn{super} 等上标下标命令的参数,并且具有优先性。\opt{supersubsep} 选项是 \tn{supersub} 命令中上标和下标的间距,\opt{supersubalign} 选项则是上标与下标的水平对齐方式,有左对齐、居中对齐和右对齐。 +% 可以使用 \tn{spbset} 命令设置上述选项,以上各个选项的参数对应 \tn{supersub} 上下标命令的参数。\opt{supersubsep} 选项是上下标的垂直间距,\opt{supersubalign} 选项则是上下标的水平对齐方式,有左对齐、居中对齐和右对齐三种。\opt{supersub-format} 选项分别设置上下标的格式,以英文逗号分隔为前后部分,也可以只有前部分,表示上标的格式。 % \end{function} % % \subsection{超链接} @@ -606,7 +617,7 @@ % \DeclareTheorem{定理环境名}{中文标题}[style = easy-theorem] % \declaretheorem[style = easy-theorem,name = 定理名]{定理环境名} % \end{ctexexam} -% \tn{declaretheorem} 定义的定理环境需要手动增加盒子边框,可以如下进行设置: +% \tn{declaretheorem} 定义的定理环境需要手动增加盒子边框: % \begin{ctexexam} % \tcolorboxenvironment{定理环境名}{tc-theorem} % \end{ctexexam} @@ -676,7 +687,7 @@ % sec-mark = \CTEXifname{\CTEXthesection——}{}#1 % } % \end{ctexexam} -% \opt{headrule}、\opt{footrule} 和 \opt{footnoterule} 三个选项可以使用 \tn{hrule} \texttt{width} \meta{长度} \texttt{height} \meta{高度} 或下述 \tn{markrule} 命令来绘制横线,脚注线默认为空。当然,手动绘制横线时线条粗细选项 \opt{style/rulewidth} 会失效。 +% \opt{headrule}、\opt{footrule} 和 \opt{footnoterule} 三个选项可以使用 \tn{hrule} \opt{width} \meta{长度} \opt{height} \meta{高度} 或下述 \tn{markrule} 命令来绘制横线,脚注线默认为空。当然,手动绘制横线时线条粗细选项 \opt{style/rulewidth} 会失效。 % % \begin{function}[added = 2021-01-13,updated = 2021-06-14]{\easyhead,\easyfoot,\markrule} % \begin{syntax} @@ -717,7 +728,7 @@ % \end{syntax} % \ding{229} 以上选项路径为 \opt{hdrset/...} \\ % \changes{v1.25}{2021/05/12}{增加脚注样式设置选项。} -% \changes{v1.27N}{2021/07/14}{增加脚注内容格式选项 \opt{fntext-form} 和脚注类型选项 \opt{footnotetype}。} +% \changes{v1.27o}{2021/07/14}{增加脚注内容格式选项 \opt{fntext-form} 和脚注类型选项 \opt{footnotetype}。} % \end{function} % % \begin{optdesc} @@ -798,8 +809,8 @@ % \end{function} % % \begin{optdesc} -% \item[lolskip] \opt{lolskip} 是代码目录中章之间的代码标题的距离,与 \CTeX 的表格目录和图片目录中章之间的标题距离选项 \opt{lotskip} 和 \opt{lofskip} 类似,它们的值均默认 0.8 pc,在 article 模式中此选项失效。 -% \item[belowoffset] \opt{belowoffset} 选项为主文档目录标题下方的间距补偿,一般为负值,用于抵消 \opt{format} 中额外的垂直间距。\opt{(level)} 中的 \opt{belowoffset} 与之意义类似,代表 figure、table 和 lstlisting 三个级别,也可以使用 \opt{list} 统一设置,一般为正值。 +% \item[lolskip] \opt{lolskip} 是代码目录中章之间的代码标题的距离,与 \CTeX 的表格目录和图片目录中章之间的标题距离选项 \opt{lotskip} 和 \opt{lofskip} 类似,它们的值均默认为 \opt{0.8pc},在 article 模式中此选项失效。 +% \item[belowoffset] \opt{belowoffset} 选项为主文档目录标题下方的间距补偿,一般为负值,用于抵消 \opt{format} 中额外的垂直间距。\opt{(level)} 中的 \opt{belowoffset} 与之意义类似,代表 \opt{figure}、\opt{table} 和 \opt{lstlisting} 三个级别,也可以使用 \opt{list} 统一设置,一般为正值。 % \item[tocline] 目录标签整体使用 \opt{tocline} 设置,在图表标签的参数中 \#1 代表编号,代码标签中则是 \tn{thelstlisting} 代表编号,标签中还可包含标签名称,默认标签名称与图、表和代码环境的标题名称一致。下面举个设置标签的例子: % \begin{ctexexam} % \tocset @@ -905,7 +916,7 @@ % \tn{end}\{hangparas\} % \end{syntax} % \tn{hangpara} 命令使其后的一个段落保持悬挂缩进,\env{hangparas} 环境使其中的段落均保持悬挂缩进。缩进将以 \meta{缩进长度} 从每个段落的 \meta{缩进开始行数} 开始。 -% \changes{v1.27N}{2021/07/11}{增加悬挂缩进段落命令 \tn{hangpara} 和环境 \env{hangparas}。} +% \changes{v1.27o}{2021/07/11}{增加悬挂缩进段落命令 \tn{hangpara} 和环境 \env{hangparas}。} % \end{function} % % \subsection{代码} @@ -1079,7 +1090,7 @@ % \tn{end}\{eqcomp\} % \end{syntax} % 一些公式之后可以使用基于列表环境的 \env{eqcomp} 进行符号对照。\tn{symb} 需要在环境内使用,带有星号的命令可单独在文本段落使用。对照列表第二个 \meta{键值列表} 与 \pkg{enumitem} 的选项相同,一般较少用到,可以用于设置垂直间距等。第一个 \meta{键值列表} 也可以使用 \tn{seteqcomp} 全局设置,选项如下: -% \changes{v1.27N}{2021/07/22}{增加公式符号对照环境 \env{eqcomp} 和命令 \tn{symb}。} +% \changes{v1.27o}{2021/07/22}{增加公式符号对照环境 \env{eqcomp} 和命令 \tn{symb}。} % \end{function} % % \begin{function}{width,delim,space,item-align,delim-align,intro,font,mode} @@ -1334,7 +1345,7 @@ %<*class> \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2020/10/01] \RequirePackage{l3keys2e} -\ProvidesExplClass{easybook}{2021/07/22}{1.27N} +\ProvidesExplClass{easybook}{2021/07/24}{1.27o} {Typeset Chinese theses or books} \bool_set_false:N \l__eb_compile_draft_bool @@ -1565,6 +1576,8 @@ { pagestyle = empty, format = \color{ctex@frame}\sffamily\Huge, + nameformat = { }, + titleformat = { }, aftername = { \bool_if:NTF \l__eb_title_newline_bool @@ -1580,6 +1593,8 @@ \color{ctex@frame}\sffamily\LARGE \bool_if:NF \l__eb_title_newline_bool { \centering } }, + nameformat = { }, + titleformat = { }, aftername = { \bool_if:NTF \l__eb_title_newline_bool @@ -1628,7 +1643,7 @@ %<*package> \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2020/10/01] \RequirePackage{l3keys2e,etoolbox} -\ProvidesExplPackage{easybase}{2021/07/22}{1.27N} +\ProvidesExplPackage{easybase}{2021/07/24}{1.27o} {Typeset Chinese theses or books} \cs_generate_variant:Nn \int_to_arabic:n { v } @@ -1690,13 +1705,30 @@ { \seq_set_split:Nnn \l_tmpa_seq { [ } {#1} \seq_pop_left:NN \l_tmpa_seq \l_tmpa_tl - \IfFileExists{\l_tmpa_tl.sty} + \seq_pop_right:NN \l_tmpa_seq \l_tmpb_tl + \eb_package_reload_check:nn { \l_tmpa_tl } { - \exp_last_unbraced:Nx \RequirePackage - { [\seq_use:Nn \l_tmpa_seq { , } }{\l_tmpa_tl} - }{} + \IfFileExists{\l_tmpa_tl.sty} + { + \exp_last_unbraced:Nx \RequirePackage + { [\l_tmpb_tl }{\l_tmpa_tl} + }{} + } + } + { + \eb_package_reload_check:nn {#1} + { \IfFileExists{#1.sty}{\RequirePackage{#1}}{} } } - { \IfFileExists{#1.sty}{\RequirePackage{#1}}{} } + } +\cs_new_protected:Npn \eb_package_reload_check:nn #1#2 + { + \@ifpackageloaded{#1} + {\msg_warning:nnn { easybase } { package-reload } {#1}}{#2} + } +\msg_new:nnn { easybase } { package-reload } + { + There~is~no~need~to~reload~the~#1~macro~package. \\ + Please~review~your~code. } \NewDocumentCommand{\LoadPackage}{O{}m} { @@ -3508,15 +3540,15 @@ { \eb_define_theme_color:n { \exp_not:n {#1} } } } -\cs_new:Npn \eb_allow_urlbreak: +\cs_new:Npn \eb_allow_url_break: { \eb_appto_cmd:Nn \UrlBreaks { \UrlOrds - \tl_map_function:NN \c__eb_urlbreak_points_tl \do + \tl_map_function:NN \c__eb_url_break_points_tl \do } } -\tl_const:Nn \c__eb_urlbreak_points_tl +\tl_const:Nn \c__eb_url_break_points_tl { ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz @@ -3526,7 +3558,7 @@ { \LoadPackage{hyperref} \urlstyle{same} - \eb_allow_urlbreak: + \eb_allow_url_break: \exp_args:NV \hypersetup \l__eb_hyperref_clist } @@ -3569,7 +3601,7 @@ } % %<*tcolorbox> -\ProvidesExplFile{eb-tcolorbox.cfg}{2021/07/22}{1.27N} +\ProvidesExplFile{eb-tcolorbox.cfg}{2021/07/24}{1.27o} {Customization of tcolorbox for easybook} \cs_new_protected:Npn \eb_tcb_theorem_set:n #1 diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.pdf index d1fb4c495f..030fcea69d 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/easybook/easybook.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.dtx index e7d2345dd0..0296e79a3a 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.dtx +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.dtx @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ %\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} %\ProvidesPackage{mindflow} %<*package> - [2021/05/27 mindflow environment] + [2021/07/24 mindflow environment] % % %<*driver> @@ -34,10 +34,10 @@ \setlist{noitemsep} \usepackage{mathpazo,newpxtext} \useosf +\usepackage[symbol]{footmisc} \usepackage{microtype} \PassOptionsToPackage{mathlines}{lineno} \usepackage[linenumber,rightmarker]{mindflow} -\usepackage{blindtext} \usepackage{parskip} \usepackage{listings} \definecolor{maintheme}{RGB}{50,100,150} @@ -62,7 +62,9 @@ \lstset{moretexcs=% {linenumbers,nolinenumbers,mindflowLeft,mindflowRight,mindflowTextFont,mindflowNumFont,mindflowMarkerFont,mindflowLineHeight,setlength,colorlet,color, RequirePackage,SetupKeyvalOptions,DeclareBoolOption,ProcessKeyvalOptions,PassOptionsToPackage, - if@mindflow@twocolumn,@mindflow@incolumntrue,if@mindflow@linenumber,@mindflow@leftlinenumbertrue,if@mindflow@on,if@mindflow@off,@mindflow@offfalse,if@mindflow@incolumn,if@mindflow@leftlinenumber,if@mindflow@rightlinenumber,if@mindflow@leftmarker,if@mindflow@rightmarker, + PackageWarning,MessageBreak, + if@mindflow@twocolumn,@mindflow@incolumntrue,if@mindflow@linenumber,@mindflow@leftlinenumbertrue,if@mindflow@on,if@mindflow@off,@mindflow@offfalse,if@mindflow@incolumn,if@mindflow@leftlinenumber,if@mindflow@rightlinenumber,if@mindflow@leftmarker,if@mindflow@rightmarker,if@mindflow@nonbreakable, + mindflow@parindent,mindflow@parskip, ifLNturnsON,LNturnsONtrue,LNturnsONfalse,ifLineNumbers, mindflowset, mindflow,endmindflow,comment,endcomment, @@ -77,7 +79,7 @@ \lstnewenvironment{code*}% {\setkeys{lst}{columns=fullflexible,keepspaces=true}}{} \lstnewenvironment{code}% -{\setkeys{lst}{columns=fullflexible,keepspaces=true,numbers=left,numberstyle=\scriptsize, stepnumber=1, numbersep=5pt,lastline=209}}{} +{\setkeys{lst}{columns=fullflexible,keepspaces=true,numbers=left,numberstyle=\scriptsize, stepnumber=1, numbersep=5pt,lastline=252}}{} \EnableCrossrefs \CodelineIndex \RecordChanges @@ -92,7 +94,7 @@ % \GetFileInfo{mindflow.dtx} % % -% \title{{\normalfont\textsf{mindflow}}, write your ideas in a clear way} +% \title{{\normalfont\textsf{mindflow}} -- write your ideas in a clear way} % \author{\scshape Jinwen Xu} % \date{\filedate} % @@ -113,10 +115,11 @@ % \item the complete code. % \end{itemize} % \end{mindflow} +% This example only shows the default effect. You can customize it further according to the instructions in the next section. % -% \section{Usage} +% \section{The usage} % -% \subsection{Initialization} +% \subsection{How to load it\,?} % Simply load the package with % \iffalse %<*example> @@ -128,10 +131,6 @@ % % \fi % -% \vspace{-.5\baselineskip} -% There are a few options available, which are listed in the next subsection. -% -% \subsection{Options} % By default, the environment has no line numbers or markers. You can use the % following options (they can be specified directly, like \verb|off|, or as a % boolean optional, like \verb|off=false|): @@ -146,45 +145,43 @@ % \verb|off|, \verb|on| & Turn the \verb|mindflow| environments \emph{off} or \emph{on} % \end{tabular} % +% Additionally, there is an option \verb|nonbreakble|, which enables the \textsf{tcolorbox} version, permits a background color, but is not breakable and doesn't support line numbering quite well. +% +% \subsection{How to use it\,?} % \DescribeEnv{\{mindflow\}} -% Then you can use the \verb|mindflow| environment as +% You can then use the \verb|mindflow| environment as % \iffalse %<*example> % \fi \begin{code*} \begin{mindflow} - (*\meta{text}*) + (*{\normalfont\meta{text}}*) \end{mindflow} \end{code*} % \iffalse % % \fi % -% \subsection{The configuration} +% \subsection{Further configuration} % % \DescribeMacro{\mindflowset} % You can use \lstinline|\mindflowset{|\meta{configuration}\lstinline|}| to -% configure the \texttt{mindflow} environment. The following keys are provided: +% configure the \texttt{mindflow} environment. The available keys are listed at the top of the next page. % % \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{ll} -% \verb|left| & The left marker\\ -% \verb|right| & The right marker\\ -% \verb|textcolor| & Color of the text\\ -% \verb|numcolor| & Color of line numbers\\ -% \verb|markercolor| & Color of the markers\\ -% \verb|linecolor| & Color of the separation line \\ -% \end{tabular} -% -% \begin{tabular}{ll} -% \verb|textfont| & Font of the text\\ -% \verb|numfont| & Font of line numbers\\ -% \verb|markerfont| & Font of the marker\\ -% \verb|lineheight| & Height of the separation line\\ +% \begin{tabular}{ll|ll} +% \hline +% \verb|left| & The left marker & \verb|right| & The right marker\\ +% \verb|textcolor| & Color of the text & \verb|textfont| & Font of the text\\ +% \verb|numcolor| & Color of line numbers & \verb|numfont| & Font of line numbers\\ +% \verb|markercolor| & Color of the markers & \verb|markerfont| & Font of the marker\\ +% \verb|linecolor| & Color of the separation line & \verb|lineheight| & Height of the separation line\\ +% \hline % \end{tabular} %\end{center} % -% Additionally, all the options mentioned in the previous section can be set with \lstinline|\mindflowset|. +% Additionally, all the options mentioned in the previous section (except for \verb|nonbreakble|) can be set with \lstinline|\mindflowset|.% +% \footnote{If the package option \texttt{nonbreakble} is enabled, then there is also a key \texttt{backgroundcolor}, similar to \texttt{textcolor}, for configuring the background color of the \texttt{mindflow} environments.} % % \section{An example} % With the following settings: @@ -193,8 +190,7 @@ % \fi \begin{code*} \mindflowset{ - leftlinenumber, rightlinenumber, - leftmarker, rightmarker, + leftlinenumber, rightlinenumber, leftmarker, rightmarker, linecolor = green!50!black, textcolor = blue!50!cyan, numcolor = red!50!orange, @@ -228,7 +224,7 @@ % \renewcommand{\mindflowRight}{\(\prec\)\hspace{1em}} % \setlength{\mindflowLineHeight}{1pt} % \begin{mindflow} -% \blindtext +% Hello, here is some text without a meaning. This text should show what a printed text will look like at this place. If you read this text, you will get no information. Really? Is there no information? Is there a difference between this text and some nonsense like “Huardest gefburn”? Kjift – not at all! A blind text like this gives you information about the selected font, how the letters are written and an impression of the look. % \end{mindflow} % \endgroup % @@ -250,8 +246,8 @@ % % \nolinenumbers % -% The feature of line numbering is provided by the package \textsf{lineno}. You -% can read its documentation to learn more about it. Notice that, by default, +% The line numbering feature is provided by the package \textsf{lineno}. For +% more details, please refer to its documentation. Notice that, by default, % displayed equations are not numbered. You can add the following line before % \lstinline|\usepackage{mindflow}|: % \iffalse @@ -272,12 +268,18 @@ % (a + b)^3 &= a^3 + 3a^2b + 3ab^2 + b^3 % \end{align*} % \end{mindflow} +% \smallskip % % \clearpage +% \makebox[\linewidth]{\rule{4\paperwidth}{\mindflowLineHeight}}% % \centerline{\itshape ---~~Readers who are not interested in technical details can skip the rest~~---} % +% \vspace{-\baselineskip} +% \makebox[\linewidth]{\rule{4\paperwidth}{\mindflowLineHeight}}% +% % \section{Some \TeX{}nical details} % +% \subsection{Internal macro for text elements} % \DescribeMacro{\mindflowTextFont} % \DescribeMacro{\mindflowNumFont} % \DescribeMacro{\mindflowMarkerFont} @@ -308,6 +310,7 @@ % The height of the separation lines is a length macro named \lstinline|\mindflowLineHeight|, % with default value \verb|0.4pt|. You can change this with \lstinline|\setlength|. % +% \subsection{Internal name of the colors} % \DescribeMacro{mindflowLine} % \DescribeMacro{mindflowText} % \DescribeMacro{mindflowNum} @@ -317,7 +320,10 @@ % \verb|mindflowLine|, \verb|mindflowText|, \verb|mindflowNum| and % \verb|mindflowMarker|, respectively. By default, they have the same color as % the context, with opacity 40\% for the separation lines and text, 20\% for -% the markers, and 8\% for the line numbers. +% the markers, and 8\% for line numbers. +% +% \DescribeMacro{*mindflowBackground} +% If the package option \verb|nonbreakable| is enabled, then there is also the background color \verb|mindflowBackground|, which by default is white. % % \section{The same example} % With option \verb|leftlinenumber, rightlinenumber, leftmarker, rightmarker| @@ -343,8 +349,16 @@ % \vspace{-.5\baselineskip} % One will get the same result as in the previous example. % +% \section{Known issues} +% +% \begin{itemize} +% \item There is no absolute guarantee that the separation lines will not fall alone at the top or bottom of the page, though great effort has been made to reduce the occurrence of such situation. +% \item The \textsf{tcolorbox} version doesn't support line numbering quite well, especially for displayed equations. This is due to the usage of \verb|internallinenumbers|. +% \end{itemize} +% % \StopEventually{} % +% \clearpage % \section{Implementation} % Below is the complete source code of this package. % @@ -363,6 +377,7 @@ \DeclareBoolOption[false]{rightlinenumber} % Right line numbers \DeclareBoolOption[false]{twocolumn} % Two column \DeclareBoolOption[false]{incolumn} % Separation line fits in column +\DeclareBoolOption[false]{nonbreakable} % Use the tcolorbox version \ProcessKeyvalOptions*\relax @@ -469,6 +484,41 @@ \medskip% } +\colorlet{mindflowBackground}{white} + +\if@mindflow@nonbreakable +\PassOptionsToPackage{many}{tcolorbox} +\RequirePackage{tcolorbox} +\newlength{\mindflow@parindent} +\newlength{\mindflow@parskip} +\def\mindflowON{% + \LNturnsONfalse% + \ifLineNumbers\LNturnsONtrue\fi\nolinenumbers% + \setlength{\mindflow@parindent}{\parindent}% + \setlength{\mindflow@parskip}{\parskip}% + \begin{tcolorbox}[enhanced jigsaw, + colback=mindflowBackground,colframe=mindflowLine, + leftrule=0pt, rightrule=0pt, sharp corners, + toprule=\mindflowLineHeight, bottomrule=\mindflowLineHeight, + boxsep=0pt, top=.3\baselineskip, bottom=.3\baselineskip, + grow to left by=\linewidth,left=\linewidth, + grow to right by=\linewidth,right=\linewidth, + fontupper=\mindflowTextFont,extras={colupper={mindflowText}}, + before upper={ + \setlength{\parindent}{\mindflow@parindent}% + \setlength{\parskip}{\mindflow@parskip}% + }] + \begin{internallinenumbers}% + \let\makeLineNumber\mindflow@makeLineNumber% +} +\def\endmindflowON{% + \nowidow[3]% + \end{internallinenumbers}% + \end{tcolorbox}\par% + \ifLNturnsON\linenumbers\fi% +} +\fi + \if@mindflow@off \let\mindflow=\mindflowOFF \let\endmindflow=\endmindflowOFF @@ -511,6 +561,13 @@ \define@key{mindflow}{textcolor}{\colorlet{mindflowText}{#1}} \define@key{mindflow}{numcolor}{\colorlet{mindflowNum}{#1}} \define@key{mindflow}{markercolor}{\colorlet{mindflowMarker}{#1}} +\define@key{mindflow}{backgroundcolor}{ + \if@mindflow@nonbreakable + \colorlet{mindflowBackground}{#1} + \else + \PackageWarning{mindflow}{The key ``backgroundcolor'' is only available when the package option\MessageBreak ``nonbreakable'' is enabled.} + \fi +} \define@key{mindflow}{textfont}{\renewcommand{\mindflowTextFont}{#1}} \define@key{mindflow}{numfont}{\renewcommand{\mindflowNumFont}{#1}} \define@key{mindflow}{markerfont}{\renewcommand{\mindflowMarkerFont}{#1}} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.pdf index cff0586010..14a26dd0ae 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/mindflow/mindflow.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.pdf index 006182bf85..8b74a38e7a 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.sty index cfc3941666..125979e55a 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.sty @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ \RequirePackage{xparse,l3keys2e,leftindex,semtex} -\ProvidesExplPackage{semantex}{2021/07/18}{0.508}{} +\ProvidesExplPackage{semantex}{2021/07/24}{0.510}{} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % @@ -156,15 +156,15 @@ { % the actual \#1 command \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } } } \exp_args:Nc\DeclareDocumentCommand{__semantex_make_object_of_\semantex_class_to_register:N #1_with_options:nnw}{mm} { %\semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { } % add nothing to file - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 } } @@ -209,16 +209,16 @@ \IfValueTF{##2} { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } { ##2 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } } } } @@ -227,17 +227,17 @@ \IfValueTF{##3} { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [##3] } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } } } { %\semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { } % write nothing to file - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 } } @@ -296,19 +296,19 @@ \IfValueTF { ##3 } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] { ##3 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##3 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } } } } @@ -316,16 +316,16 @@ \IfValueTF { ##3 } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } { ##3 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##3 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } } } } @@ -336,21 +336,21 @@ { \IfValueTF { ##4 }{ \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } } } } @@ -358,17 +358,17 @@ \IfValueTF { ##4 } { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { % \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { } % write nothing to file - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 } } @@ -462,22 +462,22 @@ { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] { * } { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } - \semantex_class_use_bullet:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] { * } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } - \semantex_class_use_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_bullet:N #1 } } } @@ -488,22 +488,22 @@ { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] { ** } { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } - \semantex_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] { ** } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } - \semantex_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 } } } @@ -512,22 +512,22 @@ { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] { ##3 } { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } - \semantex_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##3 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] { ##3 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } - \semantex_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##3 } } } } @@ -538,20 +538,20 @@ { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } } } } @@ -565,20 +565,20 @@ { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } { * } { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_use_bullet:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } { * } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_use_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_bullet:N #1 } } } @@ -589,20 +589,20 @@ { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } { ** } { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } { ** } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 } } } @@ -611,20 +611,20 @@ { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } { ##3 } { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##3 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } { ##3 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##3 } } } } @@ -635,17 +635,17 @@ { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } } } } @@ -663,24 +663,24 @@ { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] { * } { ##5 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } - \semantex_class_use_bullet:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } } } { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] { * } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } - \semantex_class_use_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_bullet:N #1 } } } @@ -691,24 +691,24 @@ { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] { ** } { ##5 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } - \semantex_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } } } { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] { ** } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } - \semantex_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 } } } @@ -717,24 +717,24 @@ { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] { ##4 } { ##5 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } - \semantex_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##4 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } } } { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } - \semantex_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } } @@ -745,22 +745,22 @@ { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] { ##5 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } } } { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } } } } @@ -774,22 +774,22 @@ { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { { * } { ##5 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_use_bullet:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } } } { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { { * } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_use_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_bullet:N #1 } } } @@ -800,22 +800,22 @@ { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { { ** } { ##5 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } } } { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { { ** } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_use_double_bullet:N #1 } } } @@ -824,22 +824,22 @@ { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { { ##4 } { ##5 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##4 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } } } { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_degree_default:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } } @@ -850,17 +850,17 @@ { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { { ##5 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##5 } } } { % \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { } % write nothing to file - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 } } @@ -1089,20 +1089,20 @@ { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] { ##3 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##3 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } [ ##2 ] } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##2 } } } } @@ -1111,17 +1111,17 @@ { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } { ##3 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##3 } } } { \semantex_write_original_source_to_semtex_file:n { #1 { ##1 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##1 } } } } @@ -1135,41 +1135,41 @@ { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] { ##4 } } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { [ ##3 ] } - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn #1 { ##3 } } } } { \IfValueTF { ##4 } { - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { { ##4 } } - \semantex_class_do_output:N #1 - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N #1 + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 - \semantex_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn #1 { ##4 } } } { % \semantex_add_to_existing_original_source_in_semtex_file:n { } % write nothing to file - \semantex_render_class:Nn #1 { - \semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } + \semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn #1 { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn #1 { ##2 } ##1 } } @@ -1253,6 +1253,12 @@ class_\cs_to_str:N #1 } +\cs_new:Npn\semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N#1 +{ + % #1 = name of class + object_associated_to_class_\cs_to_str:N #1 +} + \cs_new:Npn\semantex_object_to_register:N#1 { % #1 = name of object @@ -1279,7 +1285,7 @@ { \use:c { __semantex_make_object_of_\semantex_class_to_register:N #1_with_options:nnw } { - \semantex_keys_set:nn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { #2 } + \semantex_keys_set:nn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { #2 } } } { @@ -1344,6 +1350,9 @@ { \semantex_add_to_list_of_classes:N #1 \semantex_new_register:xn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { #2 } + \semantex_new_register:xn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { + \semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_class:Nn #1 { #1 } + } } } @@ -1372,9 +1381,14 @@ % complicated, but I've decided to use them anyway to make it more % user-friendly to create your own class type. -\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_class_set_symbol:Nn#1#2 +\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_class_set_keys:Nn#1#2 +{ + \semantex_keys_set:nn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { #2 } +} + +\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_symbol:Nn#1#2 { - \semantex_valuekey:nnn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { symbol } { #2 } + \semantex_valuekey:nnn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { symbol } { #2 } } \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_set_symbol:Nn#1#2 @@ -1382,9 +1396,9 @@ \semantex_valuekey:nnn { \semantex_object_to_register:N #1 } { symbol } { #2 } } -\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_class_do_output:N#1 +\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_associated_to_class_do_output:N#1 { - \semantex_data_bool_set_true:nn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { output } + \semantex_data_bool_set_true:nn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { output } } \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_do_output:N#1 @@ -1392,9 +1406,9 @@ \semantex_data_bool_set_true:nn { \semantex_object_to_register:N #1 } { output } } -\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_class_set_keys:Nn#1#2 +\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_keys:Nn#1#2 { - \semantex_keys_set:nn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { #2 } + \semantex_keys_set:nn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { #2 } } \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_set_keys:Nn#1#2 @@ -1402,9 +1416,9 @@ \semantex_keys_set:nn { \semantex_object_to_register:N #1 } { #2 } } -\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_class_set_arg:Nn#1#2 +\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_arg:Nn#1#2 { - \semantex_valuekey:nnn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { arg } { #2 } + \semantex_valuekey:nnn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { arg } { #2 } } \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_set_arg:Nn#1#2 @@ -1412,9 +1426,9 @@ \semantex_valuekey:nnn { \semantex_object_to_register:N #1 } { arg } { #2 } } -\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_class_set_degree_default:Nn#1#2 +\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_degree_default:Nn#1#2 { - \semantex_valuekey:nnn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { degree~default } { #2 } + \semantex_valuekey:nnn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { degree~default } { #2 } } \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_set_degree_default:Nn#1#2 @@ -1424,7 +1438,7 @@ \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_class_use_bullet:N#1 { - \semantex_singlekey:nn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { * } + \semantex_singlekey:nn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { * } } \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_use_bullet:N#1 @@ -1434,7 +1448,7 @@ \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_class_use_double_bullet:N#1 { - \semantex_singlekey:nn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { * } + \semantex_singlekey:nn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { * } } \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_use_double_bullet:N#1 @@ -1442,9 +1456,9 @@ \semantex_singlekey:nn { \semantex_object_to_register:N #1 } { * } } -\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_class_set_left_par:Nn#1#2 +\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_left_par:Nn#1#2 { - \semantex_data_tl_set:nnn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { left~par } { #2 } + \semantex_data_tl_set:nnn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { left~par } { #2 } } \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_set_left_par:Nn#1#2 @@ -1452,9 +1466,9 @@ \semantex_data_tl_set:nnn { \semantex_object_to_register:N #1 } { left~par } { #2 } } -\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_class_set_right_par:Nn#1#2 +\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_right_par:Nn#1#2 { - \semantex_data_tl_set:nnn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { right~par } { #2 } + \semantex_data_tl_set:nnn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { right~par } { #2 } } \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_set_right_par:Nn#1#2 @@ -1462,6 +1476,11 @@ \semantex_data_tl_set:nnn { \semantex_object_to_register:N #1 } { right~par } { #2 } } +\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_associated_to_class_set_class:Nn#1#2 +{ + \semantex_data_class_set:nn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { #2 } +} + \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_object_set_class:Nn#1#2 { \semantex_data_class_set:nn { \semantex_object_to_register:N #1 } { #2 } @@ -1514,6 +1533,9 @@ { \semantex_inner_pre_return:n { #1 } \tl_set:Nx \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl { \semantex_data_tl_get:nn { #1 } { output } } % The output class + \tl_set:Nx \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl { + object_associated_to_\l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl + } \exp_args:NNx\cs_set:Nn\l__semantex_render_output_options_temp_cs:n { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { output~options } } % \cs_set:Nx did not work here, as it changes ##1 to #1, which we don't want. @@ -1546,19 +1568,19 @@ % makes a one-time object of class ??? and allows us to % immediately pass options to it { - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { upper~put~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { upper } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { lower~put~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { lower } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { pre~upper } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { pre~upper } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { post~upper } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { post~upper } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { pre~lower } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { pre~lower } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { post~lower } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { post~lower } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { math~class } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { math~class } } \exp_not:V \l__semantex_render_output_options_temp_tl % These are the options we pass to the output class so that it @@ -1581,23 +1603,23 @@ % makes a one-time object of class ??? and allows us to % immediately pass options to it { - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { upper~left~put~right } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { upper~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { lower~left~put~right } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { lower~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { pre~upper~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { pre~upper~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { post~upper~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { post~upper~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { pre~lower~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { pre~lower~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { post~lower~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { post~lower~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { height~phantom } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { height~phantom } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { slanting~phantom } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { slanting~phantom } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { math~class } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { math~class } } \exp_not:V \l__semantex_render_output_options_temp_tl % These are the options we pass to the output class so that it @@ -1619,35 +1641,35 @@ % makes a one-time object of class ??? and allows us to % immediately pass options to it { - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { upper~put~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { upper } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { lower~put~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { lower } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { upper~left~put~right } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { upper~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { lower~left~put~right } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { lower~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { pre~upper } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { pre~upper } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { post~upper } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { post~upper } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { pre~lower } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { pre~lower } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { post~lower } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { post~lower } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { pre~upper~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { pre~upper~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { post~upper~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { post~upper~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { pre~lower~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { pre~lower~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { post~lower~left } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { post~lower~left } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { height~phantom } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { height~phantom } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { slanting~phantom } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { slanting~phantom } } - \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_output_class_temp_tl } + \exp_not:N\semantex_base_object_valuekey:nnn { \l__semantex_render_object_associated_to_output_class_tempt_tl } { math~class } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { math~class } } \exp_not:V \l__semantex_render_output_options_temp_tl % These are the options we pass to the output class so that it @@ -1690,9 +1712,9 @@ \cs_generate_variant:Nn \semantex_render_register:nn { xn } -\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_render_class:Nn#1#2 % a front-end command +\cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_render_object_associated_to_class:Nn#1#2 % a front-end command { - \semantex_render_register:xn { \semantex_class_to_register:N #1 } { #2 } + \semantex_render_register:xn { \semantex_class_to_associated_object_register:N #1 } { #2 } } \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_render_object:Nn#1#2 @@ -2090,7 +2112,7 @@ \tl_put_right:Nx #2 { { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { height~phantom } } - { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { slanting~phantom} } + { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { slanting~phantom } } { } { \semantex_data_tl_get_exp_not:nn { #1 } { pre~lower~left } @@ -7076,6 +7098,7 @@ \cs_new_protected:Npn\semantex_error_output_format:nN#1#2 { \tl_set:Nn \l__semantex_error_output_format_temp { #1 } + \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__semantex_error_output_format_temp { object_associated_to_class_ } { object~of~class~\cs:w } \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__semantex_error_output_format_temp { object_ } { object~\cs:w } \tl_replace_all:Nnn \l__semantex_error_output_format_temp { class_ } { class~\cs:w } \tl_put_right:Nn \l__semantex_error_output_format_temp { \cs_end: } diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.tex index 124296a291..2e212609ea 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.tex +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/semantex.tex @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ \usepackage[nameinlink]{cleveref} -\title{Seman\!\TeX: semantic, keyval-based mathematics (v0.508)} +\title{Seman\!\TeX: semantic, keyval-based mathematics (v0.510)} \date{\today} \author{Sebastian Ørsted (\href{mailto:sorsted@gmail.com}{sorsted@gmail.com})} @@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ Primes are added via the key~\lstinline!prime! or the keys~\lstinline!'!,~\lstinline!''! and~\lstinline!'''!: \begin{LTXexample} $\vf['] = \vf[prime]$, -$\vf[''] = \vf[prime,prime]$ +$\vf[''] = \vf[prime,prime]$, $\vf['''] = \vf[prime,prime,prime]$ \end{LTXexample} @@ -1331,7 +1331,7 @@ Unfortunately, it only works in~\hologo{LuaTeX}. If you don't know what \hologo{LuaTeX} is, that means that you are not using \hologo{LuaTeX}, and you should note that switching is a rather drastic affair since your existing font settings might very well not work -with LuaTeX. Also, \semantex does not exactly make your document faster, +with \hologo{LuaTeX}. Also, \semantex does not exactly make your document faster, and \hologo{LuaTeX} makes it even slower, so think carefully before you make the switch just for this. In any case, with \pack{stricttex}, you will be able to make brackets \enquote{strict}, which means that any \lstinline![! will be replaced diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/stripsemantex.sty b/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/stripsemantex.sty index 1723ee1f45..7d434805eb 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/stripsemantex.sty +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/semantex/stripsemantex.sty @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ \RequirePackage{xparse} -\ProvidesExplPackage{stripsemantex}{2021/07/18}{0.508}{} +\ProvidesExplPackage{stripsemantex}{2021/07/24}{0.510}{} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.dtx index ba9cc49e69..b2666aab80 100644 --- a/macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.dtx +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.dtx @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ % % \title{\pkg{spbmark} -- Customize superscripts and subscripts} % \author{Qu Yi} -% \date{2021/07/22\hskip 1em\relax v1.03\thanks{\url{https://github.com/texl3/spbmark}}} +% \date{2021/07/23\hskip 1em\relax v1.04\thanks{\url{https://github.com/texl3/spbmark}}} % % \maketitle % \begin{abstract} @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ % \tn{super} command is used to output superscripts, \tn{sub} command is used to output subscripts, \tn{supersub} command is used to output both superscripts and subscripts. % \end{function} % -% They match the corresponding pattern depending on whether they are currently in text mode or mathematical mode, or they can use an asterisk variant to force the mathematical pattern. The \meta{vshift} and \meta{hshift} represent respectively vertical and horizontal offsets of superscript or subscript, their default value is 0 pt, and the parameters of \meta{script align} are the same as the \texttt{supersubalign}. +% They match the corresponding pattern depending on whether they are currently in text mode or mathematical mode, or they can use an asterisk variant to force the mathematical pattern. The \meta{vshift} and \meta{hshift} represent respectively vertical and horizontal offsets of superscript or subscript, their default value is \texttt{0pt}, and the parameters of \meta{script align} are the same as the \texttt{supersubalign}. % % The second optional parameter generally does not need to be used. The \meta{height} and \meta{depth} are separated by commas. Only the front part indicates the height of the superscript or subscript, and only the back part indicates the depth. % @@ -66,22 +66,23 @@ % \end{function} % % \section{Global control interface} -% \begin{function}[added = 2021-06-26]{\spbset} +% \begin{function}[added = 2021-06-26,updated = 2021-07-23]{\spbset} % \begin{syntax} % \tn{spbset}\marg{key-value list} % \end{syntax} -% \pkg{spbmark} uses the \tn{spbset} command to control the global default format of superscripts and subscripts. The values ​​set by it will be overwritten by the optional parameters of the superscript and other commands. The list of key values it has is as follows: +% \pkg{spbmark} uses the \tn{spbset} command to control the global default format of superscripts and subscripts. The values ​​set by it will be overwritten by the optional parameters of the superscript and other commands. % \end{function} % -% \begin{function}{super-vshift,super-hshift,sub-vshift,sub-hshift,supersubsep,supersubalign} +% \begin{function}{super-vshift,super-hshift,sub-vshift,sub-hshift,super-format,sub-format} % \begin{syntax} % super-vshift = % super-hshift = % sub-vshift = % sub-hshift = -% supersubsep = -% supersubalign = +% super-format = +% sub-format = % \end{syntax} +% These list of keys control the format of superscript or subscript. They are equivalent to the optional parameters of the \tn{super} or \tn{sub} commands. % \end{function} % % \noindent @@ -89,17 +90,35 @@ % \DescribeOption{super-hshift} Extra horizontal shift of the superscripts. \\ % \DescribeOption{sub-vshift} Extra vertical shift of the subscripts. \\ % \DescribeOption{sub-hshift} Extra horizontal shift of the subscripts. \\ -% \DescribeOption{supersubsep} The distance between superscript and subscript when using \tn{supersub}, its default value is 0.3 ex. \\ -% \DescribeOption{supersubalign} The alignment of superscript and subscript when using \tn{supersub}, which contains l, c, and r parameters respectively for left, center, and right alignment. \\ +% \DescribeOption{super-format} Control the format of superscripts, the last command in the code can take an argument, which is a superscript. \\ +% \DescribeOption{sub-format} Control the format of subscripts, the last command in the code can take an argument, which is a subscript. +% +% \begin{function}{supersub-hshift,supersub-format,supersubsep,supersubalign} +% \begin{syntax} +% supersub-hshift = +% supersub-format = \{,\} +% supersubsep = +% supersubalign = +% \end{syntax} +% These list of keys control the format of superscripts and subscripts. They are equivalent to the optional parameters of the \tn{supersub} command. +% \end{function} +% +% \noindent +% \DescribeOption{supersub-hshift} Extra vertical shift of the superscripts and the subscripts. \\ +% \DescribeOption{supersub-format} Control the format of superscripts or subscripts. The first part is in superscript format, and the latter part is in subscript format. The two are separated by commas, or only the first part exists. \\ +% \DescribeOption{supersubsep} The distance between superscripts and subscripts, its default value is \texttt{0.3ex}. \\ +% \DescribeOption{supersubalign} The alignment of superscripts and subscripts, which contains \texttt{l}, \texttt{c}, and \texttt{r} parameters respectively for left, center, and right alignment. % % \section{Examples of use} % Here is a list of the three commands, please pay attention to the delimiter and usage of optional parameters: % \begin{quotation} % \noindent -% |A\super[0.2ex](\color{red}){exam}[0.2em]B| \\ +% |\spbset{supersub-format = {\ttfamily,\color{blue}}}| \\ +% |A\super[0.2ex](\textcolor{red}){exam}[0.2em]B| \\ % |$A\sub(\mathsf){exam}B$| \\ % |A\supersub[0.3ex][c]{examsuper}{sub}B| \\ -% A\super[0.2ex](\color{red}){exam}[0.2em]B \\ +% \spbset{supersub-format = {\ttfamily,\color{blue}}} +% A\super[0.2ex](\textcolor{red}){exam}[0.2em]B \\ % $A\sub(\mathsf){exam}B$ \\ % A\supersub[0.3ex][c]{examsuper}{sub}B % \end{quotation} @@ -136,7 +155,7 @@ %<*package> \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2018/12/31] \RequirePackage{xparse,l3keys2e} -\ProvidesExplPackage{spbmark}{2021/07/22}{1.03} +\ProvidesExplPackage{spbmark}{2021/07/23}{1.04} {Customize superscripts and subscripts} \cs_new_protected:Npn \spb_define:n { \keys_define:nn { spbmark } } @@ -155,20 +174,27 @@ \ProcessKeysOptions{spbmark/option} +\tl_new:N \l__spb_super_script_formatii_tl +\tl_new:N \l__spb_sub_script_formatii_tl \spb_define:n { - super-vshift .dim_set:N = \l__spb_super_script_vshift_dim, - super-vshift .initial:n = 0pt, - super-hshift .dim_set:N = \l__spb_super_script_hshift_dim, - super-hshift .initial:n = 0pt, - sub-vshift .dim_set:N = \l__spb_sub_script_vshift_dim, - sub-vshift .initial:n = 0pt, - sub-hshift .dim_set:N = \l__spb_sub_script_hshift_dim, - sub-hshift .initial:n = 0pt, - supersubsep .dim_set:N = \l__spb_supersub_script_sep_dim, - supersubsep .initial:n = 0.3ex, - supersubalign .tl_set:N = \l__spb_supersub_script_align_tl, - supersubalign .initial:n = l + super-vshift .dim_set:N = \l__spb_super_script_vshift_dim, + super-vshift .initial:n = 0pt, + super-hshift .dim_set:N = \l__spb_super_script_hshift_dim, + super-hshift .initial:n = 0pt, + sub-vshift .dim_set:N = \l__spb_sub_script_vshift_dim, + sub-vshift .initial:n = 0pt, + sub-hshift .dim_set:N = \l__spb_sub_script_hshift_dim, + sub-hshift .initial:n = 0pt, + supersub-hshift .dim_set:N = \l__spb_supersub_script_hshift_dim, + supersub-hshift .initial:n = 0pt, + super-format .tl_set:N = \l__spb_super_script_formati_tl, + sub-format .tl_set:N = \l__spb_sub_script_formati_tl, + supersub-format .code:n = \spb_both_format_assign:n {#1}, + supersubsep .dim_set:N = \l__spb_supersub_script_sep_dim, + supersubsep .initial:n = 0.3ex, + supersubalign .tl_set:N = \l__spb_supersub_script_align_tl, + supersubalign .initial:n = l } \tl_set:Nn \l__spb_boxa_wd_tl { \box_wd:N \l_tmpa_box } @@ -229,6 +255,16 @@ \tl_if_empty:nF {#1} { \box_set_ht:Nn \l_tmpb_box {#1} } \tl_if_novalue:nF {#2} { \box_set_dp:Nn \l_tmpb_box {#2} } } +\NewDocumentCommand{\spb_both_format_assign:n} + {>{\SplitArgument{1}{,}}m} + {\spb_supersub_script_both_format:nn #1} +\cs_new_protected:Npn \spb_supersub_script_both_format:nn #1#2 + { + \tl_set:Nn \l__spb_super_script_formatii_tl {#1} + \tl_if_novalue:nTF {#2} + { \tl_clear:N \l__spb_sub_script_formatii_tl } + { \tl_set:Nn \l__spb_sub_script_formatii_tl {#2} } + } \clist_map_inline:nn { super,sub } @@ -236,7 +272,8 @@ \exp_args:Nc \NewDocumentCommand {#1} { sO{\dim_use:c { l__spb_#1_script_vshift_dim }} - >{\SplitArgument{1}{,}}O{}D(){} + >{\SplitArgument{1}{,}}O{} + D(){\tl_use:c { l__spb_#1_script_formati_tl }} mO{\dim_use:c { l__spb_#1_script_hshift_dim }} } { @@ -256,7 +293,10 @@ \NewDocumentCommand{\supersub} { sO{\l__spb_supersub_script_sep_dim} - O{\l__spb_supersub_script_align_tl}D(){}mmO{0pt}D(){} + O{\l__spb_supersub_script_align_tl} + D(){\l__spb_super_script_formatii_tl}mm + O{\l__spb_supersub_script_hshift_dim} + D(){\l__spb_sub_script_formatii_tl} } { \IfBooleanTF{#1} diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.pdf index 1c3f271fe9..c7c7689c8d 100644 Binary files a/macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.pdf and b/macros/latex/contrib/spbmark/spbmark.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/musixtex/README b/macros/musixtex/README index 1d3a097d19..29bb184edb 100644 --- a/macros/musixtex/README +++ b/macros/musixtex/README @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -This is MusiXTeX, version 1.33a (2021-07-07). +This is MusiXTeX, version 1.34 (2021-07-24). MusiXTeX is a TeX-based system for typesetting music. The main author was Daniel Taupin, who died in a climbing @@ -47,6 +47,10 @@ To install (on TDS-compliant TeX systems): texmf tree and, if necessary, update the filename database; e.g., texhash texmf. + + update the font maps, for example, by executing + + updmap-user -enable Map frenchtab.map + + on Windows: move the scripts in Windows to a folder on the executable PATH (or add that folder to the PATH) @@ -83,7 +87,15 @@ http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/tex-music MusiXTeX may be freely copied, duplicated and used in conformance to the GNU General Public License (Version 2, 1991, see included file gpl.txt) or (at your option) any -later version. +later version. + +The font file frenchtab.pfb is derived from mscoreTab.ttf +by Maurizio M. Gavioli. It was obtained from + +https://github.com/musescore/MuseScore/blob/master/fonts/ + +and is licensed under the SIL Open Font Licence, +Version 1.1; the text may be found in the doc directory. This distribution is maintained by Bob Tennent rdt(at)cs(dot)queensu(dot)ca. diff --git a/macros/musixtex/doc/ChangeLog-134.txt b/macros/musixtex/doc/ChangeLog-134.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fb19280be0 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/musixtex/doc/ChangeLog-134.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ + +Changes from MusiXTeX 133 to 134: + + * new extension library musixftab.tex to support traditional French + tablature using script letters instead of numerals + + * \tabfnt ... commands re-defined to allow re-definition in + musixftab.tex + diff --git a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc.pdf b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc.pdf index 48fc1a33af..ce5a18080c 100644 Binary files a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc.pdf and b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/extensions.tex b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/extensions.tex index 3871f73268..164117f8f3 100644 --- a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/extensions.tex +++ b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/extensions.tex @@ -385,6 +385,57 @@ requiring ledger lines look better with \keyindex{longledgerlines}. \autoledgerlines \end{music} + \section{musixftab}\label{frenchtab}\index{tablature}\index{musixftab@{\tt musixftab.tex}} +This extension replaces the default (Helvetica) numerals of the tablature commands +of Section~\ref{tablature} with the traditional script letters of French tablature. +These glyphs are generated in \keyindex{tabfnt} by arguments \texttt{0}--\texttt{9} +or by (capital) Latin letters \texttt{A}--\texttt{R} (excluding \texttt{J}). +\clearpage + +The example of Section~\ref{tablature} with \texttt{musixftab.tex} is as follows: +\medskip + +\begin{music} +\input musixftab +\input musixps +\tabstylespacetrue +\largemusicsize +\def\psslurhgt{0.5} +\instrumentnumber{1} +\generalmeter{\meterfrac34} +\generalsignature{-1} +\setlines16\setclefsymbol1\tabclef\setsize1{1.2}\setsign10 +\nobarnumbers +\parindent=2ex +\setname1{\tabstringfnt\baselineskip=1.2\internote% +\vbox{\hbox{F}\hbox{D}\hbox{A}\hbox{F}\hbox{D}\hbox{A}}} +\nostartrule +\startextract +\scale{0.6} +\NOtes\tzqu\qa{*}\en +\NOtesp\zltab50\zltab40\tzqup\ltab30\en +\Notes\tzcu\ltab30\en +\bar% +\NOtes\zltab50\zltab42\zltab31\tzqu\ltab22\en +\NOtesp\zltab64\zltab35\zltab30\tzqup\ltab22\en +\Notes\tzcu\ltab22\en +\bar% +\NOtes\zltab50\zltab30\zltab20\tzqu\ltab10\en +\NOtes\zltab61\zltab40\tzqup\ltab20\en +\Notes\tzcu\ltab33\en +\bar% +\NOtes\zltab70\zltab55\tzqu\ltab45\en +\NOtes\zltab60\zltab53\ltab44\en +\notesp\zltab64\tzccu\ltab42\ilsluru03\ltab53\ltab52\tlslur03\ltab53\en +\bar% +\notesp\ztab{10}0\tzccu\ltab42\ilsluru03\ltab52\ltab53\tlslur03\ltab50\en +\NOtesp\zltab50\zltab40\tzqup\ltab30\en +\Notes\tzcu\ltab30\en +\bar% +\zendextract +\end{music} +\medskip + \section{musixgre}\label{gregnotes}\index{gregorian chant} % \section{Gregorian chant: staffs and clefs} diff --git a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/frontmatter.tex b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/frontmatter.tex index 7feaad8416..8713f1ee71 100644 --- a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/frontmatter.tex +++ b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/frontmatter.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ \title{\Huge\bfseries\musixtex\\[\bigskipamount] \LARGE\bfseries Using \TeX{} to write polyphonic\\or -instrumental music\\\Large\itshape Version 1.33} +instrumental music\\\Large\itshape Version 1.34} \author{} diff --git a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/miscellaneous.tex b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/miscellaneous.tex index db1ae9cf1e..83b62bed6d 100644 --- a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/miscellaneous.tex +++ b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixdoc/miscellaneous.tex @@ -830,20 +830,25 @@ The coding is \end{verbatim}\end{quote} -\section{Tablature} +\section{Tablature}\label{tablature}\index{tablature} Tablature is a notational system used for fretted stringed instruments such as lute, guitar, banjo, mandolin, and so on. Staff lines represent strings and conventional note heads are replaced by numbers (or sometimes letters) indicating which fret is to be stopped, with $0$ representing an open string. A special clef symbol -\keyindex{tabclef} may be used with \verb|\setclefsymbol| for a tablature staff; commands \verb|\setlines|, \verb|\setsign| -and \verb|\setsize| may be used as usual for a tablature staff. The macros that put numbers (or letters) on staff lines +\keyindex{tabclef} may be used with \verb|\setclefsymbol| for a tablature staff; commands \verb|\setlines|, \verb|\setsign|, +\verb|\setsize| and \verb|\setname| may be used as usual for a tablature staff. +A size-dependent font \keyindex{tabstringfnt} can be used for string names. + +The macros that put numbers (or letters) on staff lines are as follows: \begin{itemize} \item \keyindex{tab}\verb|{|$n$\verb|}|\verb|{|$p$\verb|}| puts $p$ on string $n$ (counting from top to bottom); $p$ is centered, using \verb|\ccharnote|. +Space for a ``rest'' can be generated by a command like +\verb|\qa{*}|. Ledger lines are replaced by slashes (/) for $n$ greater than the number of staff lines, or simply the number of courses below the staff if this is greater than 3. \item \keyindex{ltab}\verb|{|$n$\verb|}|\verb|{|$p$\verb|}| @@ -859,16 +864,14 @@ is a non-spacing \verb|\ltab| and \keyindex{zrtab}\verb|{|$n$\verb|}|\verb|{|$p$\verb|}| is a non-spacing \verb|\rtab|. \end{itemize} -A size-dependent font \keyindex{tabfnt} is used for tab characters; Helvetica bold is the default font family. +A size-dependent font \keyindex{tabfnt} is used for tab characters. Helvetica bold is the +default font family but the traditional script letters of French tablature may be obtained by +inputting the extension library \verb|musixftab.tex|\index{musixftab@{\tt musixftab.tex}} +described in Section~\ref{frenchtab}. The default tablature style is to place fingering notations \emph{on} staff lines; Postscript specials are used to ``blank'' staff lines below the tab characters. -If it is desired to locate the fingering notations \emph{above} staff lines, use -the command \keyindex{tabstylespacetrue}. -A size-dependent font \keyindex{tabstringfnt} is defined to allow string names to be -listed using \verb|\setname|. - Here is an example for baroque lute (from \emph{Ciaccona} in D~minor by J.S.~Bach): @@ -885,15 +888,10 @@ for baroque lute \setsign2{-1}\setclefsymbol2\treblelowoct \parindent=2ex \setname1{\tabstringfnt\baselineskip=1.2\internote% -\vbox{% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss F\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss D\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss A\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss F\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss D\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss A\hss}}} +\vbox{\hbox{F}\hbox{D}\hbox{A}\hbox{F}\hbox{D}\hbox{A}}} \startextract -\scale{0.88} +\scale{0.8} +\NOtes\qa{*}&\qp\en \NOtesp\zltab50\zltab40\ltab30&\zhl{d}\zhu{f}\qu{.h}\en \Notes\ltab30&\cu{h}\en \bar% @@ -930,14 +928,9 @@ The coding is \setsign2{-1}\setclefsymbol2\treblelowoct \parindent=2ex \setname1{\tabstringfnt\baselineskip=1.2\internote% -\vbox{% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss F\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss D\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss A\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss F\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss D\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss A\hss}}} +\vbox{\hbox{F}\hbox{D}\hbox{A}\hbox{F}\hbox{D}\hbox{A}}} \startextract +\NOtes\qa{*}&\qp\en \NOtesp\zltab50\zltab40\ltab30&\zhl{d}\zhu{f}\qu{.h}\en \Notes\ltab30&\cu{h}\en \bar% @@ -965,6 +958,8 @@ The coding is \clearpage \par\noindent +If it is desired that fingering notations be placed \emph{above} staff lines, use +the command \keyindex{tabstylespacetrue}. Here is the same example with \verb|\tabstylespacetrue|: \begin{music} \input musixps @@ -979,15 +974,10 @@ Here is the same example with \verb|\tabstylespacetrue|: \setsign2{-1}\setclefsymbol2\treblelowoct \parindent=2ex \setname1{\tabstringfnt\baselineskip=1.2\internote% -\vbox{% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss F\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss D\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss A\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss F\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss D\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss A\hss}}} +\vbox{\hbox{F}\hbox{D}\hbox{A}\hbox{F}\hbox{D}\hbox{A}}} \startextract -\scale{0.88} +\scale{0.8} +\NOtes\qa{*}&\qp\en \NOtesp\zltab50\zltab40\ltab30&\zhl{d}\zhu{f}\qu{.h}\en \Notes\ltab30&\cu{h}\en \bar% @@ -1028,15 +1018,11 @@ above the staff, as in: \nobarnumbers \parindent=2ex \setname1{\tabstringfnt\baselineskip=1.2\internote% -\vbox{\hbox to\parindent{\hss F\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss D\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss A\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss F\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss D\hss}% -\hbox to\parindent{\hss A\hss}}} +\vbox{\hbox{F}\hbox{D}\hbox{A}\hbox{F}\hbox{D}\hbox{A}}} \nostartrule \startextract -\scale{0.88} +\scale{0.8} +\NOtes\tzqu\qa{*}\en \NOtesp\zltab50\zltab40\tzqup\ltab30\en \Notes\tzcu\ltab30\en \bar% @@ -1066,12 +1052,18 @@ above the staff, as in: \noindent A tiny note can be generated above the staff using one of the commands \keyindex{tzwh}, \keyindex{tzwhp}, \keyindex{tzhu}, \keyindex{tzhup}, \keyindex{tzqu}, \keyindex{tzqup}, \keyindex{tzcu}, \keyindex{tzcup}, \keyindex{tzccu}, \ldots\ -\emph{before} a spacing command. Coding +\emph{before} a spacing command. These commands suppress spurious ledger lines and +avoid raising dots on dotted notes. + +\smallskip + +\noindent +Coding for the notes in the example above is as follows: \begin{footnotesize} \begin{quote}\begin{verbatim} \startextract -\scale{0.88} +\NOtes\tzqu\qa{*}\en \NOtesp\zltab50\zltab40\tzqup\ltab30\en \Notes\tzcu\ltab30\en \bar% diff --git a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.pdf b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.pdf index 8a1d27ac52..d06023158d 100644 Binary files a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.pdf and b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.tex b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.tex index b3e78f4328..d2876fa3d0 100644 --- a/macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.tex +++ b/macros/musixtex/doc/musixtex-install.tex @@ -48,6 +48,10 @@ compliant TeX distribution, including MikTeX, TeXlive and teTeX. After unzipping the archive, update the filename database as necessary, for example, by executing \verb\texhash ~/texmf\ or clicking the button labelled ``Refresh FNDB" in the MikTeX settings program. +Update the font map files, for example, by executing +\begin{list}{}{}\item +\verb|updmap-user -enable Map frenchtab.map| +\end{list} MusiXTeX requires a large set of specialized fonts. If necessary, install the \texttt{musixtex-fonts} package. diff --git a/macros/musixtex/map/frenchtab.map b/macros/musixtex/map/frenchtab.map new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..116a3f2e21 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/musixtex/map/frenchtab.map @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +frenchtab frenchtab } +\ifx\undefined\startpiece\errmessage{Input musixtex.tex before musixftab.tex}\fi + +\font\tabfntthirteen=frenchtab at 4pt +\font\tabfntsixteen=frenchtab at 5pt +\font\tabfnttwenty=frenchtab at 6pt +\font\tabfnttwentyfour=frenchtab at 8pt +\font\tabfnttwentynine=frenchtab at 12pt + +\makeatletter + +% need to raise note boxes 0.2ex for frenchtab.pfb + +\def\tabbox#1#2{% + \setbox0=\hbox{\tabfnt #2}% + \stringraise\nblines + \advance\stringraise by -#1 + \multiply\stringraise by 2 + \advancefalse\def\q@u{}\loffset{0.45}{\@nq{\the\stringraise}}% + \iftabstylespace\else\advance\stringraise-1\fi + \special{ps: 1 setgray}% + \ccharnote{\the\stringraise}{\vrule height \ht0 width \wd0 depth \dp0}% + \special{ps: 0 setgray}% + \ccharnote{\the\stringraise}{\raise 0.2ex\box0}% +} +% \ltabbox does the same as \tabbox, except that it produces +% left-outlined symbols +\def\ltabbox#1#2{\setbox0=\hbox{\tabfnt #2}% + \stringraise\nblines + \advance\stringraise by -#1 + \multiply\stringraise by 2 + \advancefalse\def\q@u{}\loffset{0.2}{\@nq{\the\stringraise}}% + \iftabstylespace\else\advance\stringraise-1\fi + \special{ps: 1 setgray}% + \zcharnote{\the\stringraise}{\vrule height \ht0 width \wd0 depth \dp0}% + \special{ps: 0 setgray}% + \zcharnote{\the\stringraise}{\raise 0.2ex\box0}% +} +% \rtabbox does the same as \tabbox, except that it produces +% right-outlined symbols +\def\rtabbox#1#2{\setbox0=\hbox{\tabfnt #2}% + \stringraise\nblines + \advance\stringraise by -#1 + \multiply\stringraise by 2 + \advancefalse\def\q@u{}\loffset{0.75}{\@nq{\the\stringraise}}% + \iftabstylespace\else\advance\stringraise-1\fi + \special{ps: 1 setgray}% + \lcharnote{\the\stringraise}{\vrule height \ht0 width \wd0 depth \dp0}% + \special{ps: 0 setgray}% + \lcharnote{\the\stringraise}{\raise 0.2ex\box0}% +} + +\makeatother + + +\def\tab#1#2{% +\stringnum=#1 +\ifnum\stringnum>\nblines +\nslashes=\stringnum +\advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi +\def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} +\ifcase\numslashes\tabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt V0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt W0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt X0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 7}\fi% +\else\tabbox{#1}{#2}\fi\sk} + +% left spilling \tab +\def\ltab#1#2{% +\stringnum=#1 +\ifnum\stringnum>\nblines +\nslashes=\stringnum +\advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi +\def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} +\ifcase\numslashes\ltabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt V0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt W0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt X0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 7}\fi% +\else\ltabbox{#1}{#2}\fi\sk} + +% right spilling \tab +\def\rtab#1#2{% +\stringnum=#1 +\ifnum\stringnum>\nblines +\nslashes=\stringnum +\advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi +\def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} +\ifcase\numslashes\rtabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt V0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt W0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt X0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 7}\fi% +\else\rtabbox{#1}{#2}\fi\sk} + +% \chord-tab symbol. Same as \tab, but no \sk is given, so multiple +% symbols can be placed above one another +\def\ztab#1#2{% +\stringnum=#1 +\ifnum\stringnum>\nblines +\nslashes=\stringnum +\advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi +\def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} +\ifcase\numslashes\tabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt V0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt W0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt X0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 7}\fi% +\else\tabbox{#1}{#2}\fi} + +% left spilling \ztab +\def\zltab#1#2{% +\stringnum=#1 +\ifnum\stringnum>\nblines +\nslashes=\stringnum +\advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi +\def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} +\ifcase\numslashes\ltabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt V0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt W0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt X0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 7}\fi% +\else\ltabbox{#1}{#2}\fi} + +% right spilling \ztab +\def\zrtab#1#2{% +\stringnum=#1 +\ifnum\stringnum>\nblines +\nslashes=\stringnum +\advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi +\def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} +\ifcase\numslashes\rtabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt V0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt W0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt X0}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabstringfnt\bf 7}\fi% +\else\rtabbox{#1}{#2}\fi} + +\endinput diff --git a/macros/musixtex/tex/musixtex.tex b/macros/musixtex/tex/musixtex.tex index d91c665a68..7dda85bd90 100644 --- a/macros/musixtex/tex/musixtex.tex +++ b/macros/musixtex/tex/musixtex.tex @@ -25,15 +25,21 @@ \def\mufl@x{0.83}% \def\mxmajorvernumber{1} -\def\mxminorvernumber{33} +\def\mxminorvernumber{34} \def\mxvernumber{\mxmajorvernumber\mxminorvernumber}% make it possible to compare with \ifnum -\def\mxversuffix{a}% +\def\mxversuffix{}% \edef\mxversion{\mxmajorvernumber.\mxminorvernumber\mxversuffix} -\def\mxdate{2021-07-07} +\def\mxdate{2021-07-24} \immediate\write16{MusiXTeX(c) \mxversion\space<\mxdate>}% \everyjob{\immediate\write16{MusiXTeX(c) \mxversion\space<\mxdate>}}% +% version 1.34 +% +% redefine \tabfnt... commands to allow re-definition in musixftab.tex +% decrement the number of slashes if tabstylespace is true +% + % version 1.33a % % improved implementations of the tablature commands: @@ -870,6 +876,11 @@ \def\normdyn{\let\ppff\ppfftwenty} \def\meddyn{\let\ppff\ppfftwentyfour} +\font\tabfntthirteen=phvb8t at 4pt % version 1.34 RDT +\font\tabfntsixteen=phvb8t at 5pt +\font\tabfnttwenty=phvb8t at 6pt +\font\tabfnttwentyfour=phvb8t at 8pt +\font\tabfnttwentynine=phvb8t at 10pt \font\musiceleven=musix11 \font\musicthirteen=musix13 @@ -1769,8 +1780,8 @@ \else\ifdim\internote<1.19\Internote \smalltype\it \else\ifdim\internote<1.43\Internote \Smalltype\it \else\normtype\it\fi\fi\fi}% - \let\tabnorfnt\fivedc \let\tablargefnt\sixdc % 1.33 RDT - \let\tabLargefnt\eightdc \let\tabsmallfnt\fourdc + \let\tabnorfnt\tabfntsixteen \let\tablargefnt\tabfnttwenty % 1.34 RDT + \let\tabLargefnt\tabfnttwentyfour \let\tabsmallfnt\tabfntthirteen \let\tabnorcleffnt\eightdc \let\tablargecleffnt\tendc \let\tabLargecleffnt\twelvedc \let\tabsmallcleffnt\sixdc \def\tabstringfnt{\ifdim\internote<.95\Internote \fourss % 1.29 RDT @@ -1801,8 +1812,8 @@ \else\ifdim\internote<1.19\Internote \Smalltype\it \else\ifdim\internote<1.43\Internote \normtype\it \else\medtype\it\fi\fi\fi}% - \let\tabnorfnt\eightdc \let\tablargefnt\ninedc % 1.33 RDT - \let\tabLargefnt\elevendc \let\tabsmallfnt\sixdc + \let\tabnorfnt\tabfnttwentyfour \let\tablargefnt\tabfnttwentynine % 1.34 RDT + \let\tabLargefnt\tabfnttwentynine \let\tabsmallfnt\tabfnttwenty \let\tabnorcleffnt\twelvedc \let\tablargecleffnt\frtdc \let\tabLargecleffnt\svtdc \let\tabsmallcleffnt\tendc \def\tabstringfnt{\ifdim\internote<.95\Internote \sixss % 1.29 RDT @@ -1835,8 +1846,8 @@ \else\ifdim\internote<1.19\Internote \medtype\it \else\ifdim\internote<1.43\Internote \bigfont\it \else\Bigfont\it\fi\fi\fi}% - \let\tabnorfnt\ninedc \let\tablargefnt\elevendc % 1.33 RDT - \let\tabLargefnt\twelvedc \let\tabsmallfnt\eightdc + \let\tabnorfnt\tabfnttwentynine \let\tablargefnt\tabfnttwentynine % 1.34 RDT + \let\tabLargefnt\tabfnttwentynine \let\tabsmallfnt\tabfnttwentyfour \let\tabnorcleffnt\frtdc \let\tablargecleffnt\svtdc \let\tabLargecleffnt\twtydc \let\tabsmallcleffnt\twelvedc \def\tabstringfnt{\ifdim\internote<.95\Internote \eightss % 1.29 RDT @@ -1873,8 +1884,8 @@ \else\ifdim\internote<1.19\Internote \Smalltype\it \else\ifdim\internote<1.43\Internote \normtype\it \else\medtype\it\fi\fi\fi}% - \let\tabnorfnt\sixdc \let\tablargefnt\eightdc % 1.33 RDT - \let\tabLargefnt\ninedc \let\tabsmallfnt\fivedc + \let\tabnorfnt\tabfnttwenty \let\tablargefnt\tabfnttwentyfour % 1.34 RDT + \let\tabLargefnt\tabfntwentynine \let\tabsmallfnt\tabfntsixteen \let\tabnorcleffnt\tendc \let\tablargecleffnt\twelvedc \let\tabLargecleffnt\frtdc \let\tabsmallcleffnt\eightdc \def\tabstringfnt{\ifdim\internote<.95\Internote \fivess % 1.29 RDT @@ -5483,7 +5494,7 @@ % This version corrected 07/23/2007 by Rainer Dunker to make it % % insensitive to changes in \interstaff by PMX % % % -% Added to musixtex.tex version 1.16 by RDT % +% Added to musixtex.tex version 1.16 by RDT % % % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -5496,8 +5507,9 @@ % 1.33 RDT % % replace ledger lines by slashes (/) for string numbers > number of staff lines % % % -% 1.34 RDT % +% 1.33a RDT % % replace 4-7 slashes by numbers 4-7 % +% decrement number of slashes if tabstylespace is true % % % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -5525,7 +5537,7 @@ \advance\stringraise by -#1 \multiply\stringraise by 2 \advancefalse\def\q@u{}\loffset{0.2}{\@nq{\the\stringraise}}% - \iftabstylespace\else\advance\stringraise-1\fi + \iftabstylespace\else\advance\stringraise-1\fi \special{ps: 1 setgray}% \zcharnote{\the\stringraise}{\vrule height \ht0 width \wd0 depth \dp0}% \special{ps: 0 setgray}% @@ -5559,8 +5571,9 @@ \ifnum\stringnum>\nblines \nslashes=\stringnum \advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi \def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} -\ifcase\numslashes\or\ccn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\ccn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\ccn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\ccn{-3}{\tabfnt////#2}\ccn{-3}{\tabfnt/////#2}\or\ccn{-3}{\tabfnt//////#2}\or\ccn{-3}{\tabfnt///////#2}\fi% +\ifcase\numslashes\tabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 7}\fi% \else\tabbox{#1}{#2}\fi\sk} % left spilling \tab @@ -5569,8 +5582,9 @@ \ifnum\stringnum>\nblines \nslashes=\stringnum \advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi \def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} -\ifcase\numslashes\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt////#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt/////#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt//////#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt///////#2}\fi% +\ifcase\numslashes\ltabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 7}\fi% \else\ltabbox{#1}{#2}\fi\sk} % right spilling \tab @@ -5579,8 +5593,9 @@ \ifnum\stringnum>\nblines \nslashes=\stringnum \advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi \def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} -\ifcase\numslashes\or\lcn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\lcn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\lcn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\lcn{-3}{\tabfnt////#2}\or\lcn{-3}{\tabfnt/////#2}\or\lcn{-3}{\tabfnt//////#2}\or\lcn{-3}{\tabfnt///////#2}\fi% +\ifcase\numslashes\rtabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 7}\fi% \else\rtabbox{#1}{#2}\fi\sk} % \chord-tab symbol. Same as \tab, but no \sk is given, so multiple @@ -5590,8 +5605,9 @@ \ifnum\stringnum>\nblines \nslashes=\stringnum \advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi \def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} -\ifcase\numslashes\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 7}\fi% +\ifcase\numslashes\tabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 7}\fi% \else\tabbox{#1}{#2}\fi} % left spilling \ztab @@ -5600,8 +5616,9 @@ \ifnum\stringnum>\nblines \nslashes=\stringnum \advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi \def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} -\ifcase\numslashes\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 7}\fi% +\ifcase\numslashes\ltabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 7}\fi% \else\ltabbox{#1}{#2}\fi} % right spilling \ztab @@ -5610,8 +5627,9 @@ \ifnum\stringnum>\nblines \nslashes=\stringnum \advance\nslashes by -\nblines +\iftabstylespace\advance\nslashes by -1\fi \def\numslashes{\the\nslashes} -\ifcase\numslashes\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 7}\fi% +\ifcase\numslashes\rtabbox{#1}{#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt/#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt//#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt///#2}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 4}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 5}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 6}\or\zcn{-3}{\tabfnt 7}\fi% \else\rtabbox{#1}{#2}\fi} % @@ -5633,7 +5651,7 @@ %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % tiny duration notes placed above tablature staff % -% 1.34 RDT % +% 1.33a RDT % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \newcount\tiny@hgt % = 2 * \nblines + 1 diff --git a/macros/musixtex/tfm/frenchtab.tfm b/macros/musixtex/tfm/frenchtab.tfm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a072ef9172 Binary files /dev/null and b/macros/musixtex/tfm/frenchtab.tfm differ diff --git a/macros/musixtex/type1/frenchtab.pfb b/macros/musixtex/type1/frenchtab.pfb new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..99ea0e0354 Binary files /dev/null and b/macros/musixtex/type1/frenchtab.pfb differ diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl index f6b5ffdc3f..86965c9df1 100644 --- a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl +++ b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/installer/ctan-mirrors.pl @@ -1,8 +1,5 @@ $mirrors = { 'Africa' => { - 'Algeria' => { - 'http://ctan.epst-tlemcen.dz/tex-archive/' => 1, - }, 'Morocco' => { 'https://mirror.marwan.ma/ctan/' => 1, }, @@ -17,7 +14,6 @@ $mirrors = { 'https://mirror.bjtu.edu.cn/CTAN/' => 1, 'https://mirrors.aliyun.com/CTAN/' => 1, 'https://mirrors.bfsu.edu.cn/CTAN/' => 1, - 'https://mirrors.cqu.edu.cn/CTAN/' => 1, 'https://mirrors.dgut.edu.cn/CTAN/' => 1, 'https://mirrors.hit.edu.cn/CTAN/' => 1, 'https://mirrors.nju.edu.cn/CTAN/' => 1, @@ -50,7 +46,6 @@ $mirrors = { 'https://cran.asia/tex/' => 1, 'https://ftp.harukasan.org/CTAN/' => 1, 'https://ftp.kaist.ac.kr/pub/tex-archive/' => 1, - 'https://mirror.kakao.com/CTAN/' => 1, 'https://mirror.navercorp.com/CTAN/' => 1, 'https://mirror.yongbok.net/ctan/' => 1, }, @@ -175,10 +170,8 @@ $mirrors = { 'North America' => { 'Canada' => { 'https://ctan.math.ca/tex-archive/' => 1, - 'https://ctan.mirror.globo.tech/' => 1, 'https://ctan.mirror.rafal.ca/' => 1, 'https://mirror.0xem.ma/tex-archive/' => 1, - 'https://mirror.its.dal.ca/ctan/' => 1, 'https://muug.ca/mirror/ctan/' => 1, }, 'Costa Rica' => { diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb index 98836014fe..fc941b2320 100644 --- a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb +++ b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb @@ -26,11 +26,11 @@ depend container_split_src_files/1 depend frozen/0 depend minrelease/2016 depend release/2021 -depend revision/60030 +depend revision/60047 name 00texlive.image category TLCore -revision 60002 +revision 60037 shortdesc TeX Live files only in the source repository longdesc The files here are not copied by the installer and containers longdesc are not built for them; they exist only in the source @@ -3096,6 +3096,7 @@ runfiles size=13884 tlpkg/tlpsrc/petiteannonce.tlpsrc tlpkg/tlpsrc/petri-nets.tlpsrc tlpkg/tlpsrc/pfarrei.tlpsrc + tlpkg/tlpsrc/pfdicons.tlpsrc tlpkg/tlpsrc/pgf-blur.tlpsrc tlpkg/tlpsrc/pgf-cmykshadings.tlpsrc tlpkg/tlpsrc/pgf-pie.tlpsrc @@ -4429,7 +4430,7 @@ depend setting_available_architectures:aarch64-linux amd64-freebsd amd64-netbsd name 00texlive.installer category TLCore -revision 60012 +revision 60032 shortdesc TeX Live standalone installer package longdesc This package defines the files to go into the installer longdesc archives (install-tl-unx.tar.gz, install-tl.zip) built by the @@ -68769,7 +68770,7 @@ containerchecksum cee2884832df81710a4c0fa6bb0c850739fdd4740f620b26502222146a04cd name collection-mathscience category Collection -revision 59975 +revision 60037 shortdesc Mathematics, natural sciences, computer science packages relocated 1 depend 12many @@ -68920,6 +68921,7 @@ depend oplotsymbl depend ot-tableau depend oubraces depend perfectcut +depend pfdicons depend physconst depend physics depend physunits @@ -68994,8 +68996,8 @@ depend yhmath depend youngtab depend yquant depend ytableau -containersize 1500 -containerchecksum 8b55edd25ee1e97efeaf7f03b88c4d0dece144f539f22cf38cfc11e565d105c2cc860ac7975aaaf4eb3ca875904e86d201d0130cb302d9884572eb9f48b8bdbd +containersize 1504 +containerchecksum 71916649553ef44476b1349d9670ac9635d933abd317a2261e78240693c743024afb5bb7792ed4f7b87bdc2b940aa06711bb8dc0c14545c73fdcb2e9c2a32edf name collection-metapost category Collection @@ -98912,24 +98914,24 @@ catalogue-topics notes editorial name easybook category Package -revision 60026 +revision 60039 shortdesc Typeset Chinese theses or books relocated 1 longdesc Easybook is a minimalist style template based on the ctexbook longdesc book document class. -containersize 16392 -containerchecksum 2855459748edaf7537378549176432fcbda511c5d23d40b933819f3fb50c37e24657f00f9e9063be948bb4592c96fbae8368e15f8d9c4630a76d18814d34b74f -doccontainersize 597976 -doccontainerchecksum c8abde7adb0632b8f45265a77e37c78c9fdf118fe0932b2a0780eb3cdaf6c1307ea37b5b016bf820158ee153f43a2a0bd4f846e0b5eee375eb404e394854ff83 -docfiles size=148 +containersize 16488 +containerchecksum 948349789856c589fe2f68fd1f4cb5a5d039f0f887c2d302710a076b0c2d93b29e29250153c63562bfa0fed1208e9ced97f1eaf7abf078c88cf1bd995eb57afa +doccontainersize 602328 +doccontainerchecksum 5fbbcfeec4c0ccbf15a839e635bb85a705cc92a3c3e1deea8cfaf06f12beb14c53028f29948612256b9ba16d8d24c2b969bcd9296d5e60c333e287f988edb121 +docfiles size=149 RELOC/doc/latex/easybook/README.md details="Readme" RELOC/doc/latex/easybook/easybook.pdf details="Package documentation" language="zh" -srccontainersize 37516 -srccontainerchecksum 10375f344d9aa4410213ae3a9920f4515b60ea2174b5917a966d2cd1b59925611df9631097ec71a57b3940aa4ffa1f0265b0999b52938c7eebde91c524a08f60 +srccontainersize 37752 +srccontainerchecksum a945a6b2b1e2b7395d52cfbdf60fc8ceff33b917b9a23f01f9cfed3dfe6108d35a13f8f3f877ff8db2d37360247c17c851781e2fe98ad0b5dc9eee38ce98f5b2 srcfiles size=40 RELOC/source/latex/easybook/easybook.dtx RELOC/source/latex/easybook/easybook.ins -runfiles size=20 +runfiles size=21 RELOC/tex/latex/easybook/easybase.sty RELOC/tex/latex/easybook/easybook.cls RELOC/tex/latex/easybook/eb-tcolorbox.cfg @@ -98938,7 +98940,7 @@ catalogue-contact-repository https://gitee.com/texl3/easybook catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/easybook catalogue-license cc-by-4 catalogue-topics book-pub class chinese expl3 -catalogue-version 1.27N +catalogue-version 1.27o name easyfig category Package @@ -166724,7 +166726,7 @@ catalogue-topics book-ex name latex2e-help-texinfo category Package -revision 57213 +revision 60038 shortdesc Unofficial reference manual covering LaTeX2e relocated 1 longdesc The manual is provided as Texinfo source (which was originally @@ -166734,11 +166736,11 @@ longdesc development, and details of getting involved are to be found on longdesc the package home page. A French translation is available as a longdesc separate package. All the other formats in the distribution are longdesc derived from the Texinfo source, as usual. -containersize 708 -containerchecksum 914b0959cd94f13c8c8a9e3bf4ce88988816298853d73e02ef3bef24a03e621a43d6e7e2a33a0253991c32c4a02b87bff7eb6d6a8cec7f4ca80142308c4d79bd -doccontainersize 1725896 -doccontainerchecksum d659abed2563ca91820af487693cc91919ee3ae10c077c40a27fdbcc5ef1b7fc223007945bfe15ba6e5e8c2522b0f46c78810342cbebf9a6e9a96563d42c583e -docfiles size=1700 +containersize 704 +containerchecksum dff005a0b80915f4c1ffc520f95f1d1efc6437f1c46f18417c6fb2b4dbb48c8bacbde3d02554d08a149092bf499313c189010cf1963c67dcd55ffab2ec3eda28 +doccontainersize 2066616 +doccontainerchecksum 988c25f80ce06dd1a2e192231c2e6bd0faac600fc15fc772d1f88aaf48b7bf1f12f593f34505cc829760c4a3176c243a3c2271a8914b0578b6944587f5360362 +docfiles size=1975 RELOC/doc/info/latex2e.info RELOC/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog RELOC/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile @@ -166761,7 +166763,7 @@ docfiles size=1700 RELOC/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml RELOC/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ltx-help.el catalogue-contact-bugs https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/bugs/?group=latexrefman -catalogue-contact-home http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/projects/latexrefman/ +catalogue-contact-home https://latexref.xyz catalogue-contact-support https://lists.tug.org/latexrefman catalogue-ctan /info/latex2e-help-texinfo catalogue-license other-free @@ -168086,16 +168088,16 @@ catalogue-topics version-control doc-mgmt name latexindent category Package -revision 59645 +revision 60045 shortdesc Indent a LaTeX document, highlighting the programming structure longdesc The Perl script (also available as a windows executable) longdesc processes a LaTeX file, indenting parts so as to highlight the longdesc structure for the reader. depend latexindent.ARCH -containersize 61568 -containerchecksum db201cc901869eab599d132135bfaefbdad97b2e40d51ee8e85c27a4c4cbaa5fb6901e54c8036f526aaf818efd535b5f78fab520a5366aebb14c1977e16ec9af -doccontainersize 1026240 -doccontainerchecksum d4eddce726532e1af05236449549546cc8eaad3f6126bcacff312bb5ff04593181026cd7d4383bbc661466b093d5796d6117493b1af711dd6baeeb1e586cd69d +containersize 63476 +containerchecksum 8011f24a50449721255b09737e9fb7cbf0560eecf6556676289ccaccaff4d003db6b4256597ce1a59a826222b6a6d9bc21ea509611214eba655283ddd4bf332f +doccontainersize 1030844 +doccontainerchecksum f2ebb0c49974957d8855620a8746a308cbb30f6bdd2fec3c9c25c897ecd228f6daa064a1c43e089eaff6efc01d823e665c65766d8a54dfd349fcce44772ebf9b docfiles size=350 texmf-dist/doc/support/latexindent/README details="Readme" texmf-dist/doc/support/latexindent/appendices.tex @@ -168129,7 +168131,7 @@ docfiles size=350 texmf-dist/doc/support/latexindent/subsubsec-no-add-remaining-code-blocks.tex texmf-dist/doc/support/latexindent/subsubsec-special.tex texmf-dist/doc/support/latexindent/title.tex -runfiles size=125 +runfiles size=129 texmf-dist/scripts/latexindent/LatexIndent/AlignmentAtAmpersand.pm texmf-dist/scripts/latexindent/LatexIndent/Arguments.pm texmf-dist/scripts/latexindent/LatexIndent/BackUpFileProcedure.pm @@ -168175,7 +168177,7 @@ catalogue-contact-repository https://github.com/cmhughes/latexindent.pl catalogue-ctan /support/latexindent catalogue-license gpl3 catalogue-topics code-layout -catalogue-version 3.10 +catalogue-version 3.10.1 name latexindent.aarch64-linux category Package @@ -168269,11 +168271,11 @@ binfiles arch=universal-darwin size=1 name latexindent.win32 category Package -revision 59645 +revision 60045 shortdesc win32 files of latexindent -containersize 3058740 -containerchecksum 57470b99ecd23b2477e8d4aa112b38badd2eaa9e9c979dfea3d7097602ea0ee7e51f19213f407b56a226cc993a5b84dba06b641c79ba17d22e095a59837f06b5 -binfiles arch=win32 size=1556 +containersize 3062052 +containerchecksum d3b9abae4ccf39e36ecb1b20fdcc451615664267884f870abc958234e5f8c7d06c92eabac70590d1ac850d6079cec7ea43a3a03b4d76d05cfad77b40a1b1b0b3 +binfiles arch=win32 size=1557 bin/win32/latexindent.exe name latexindent.x86_64-cygwin @@ -188231,7 +188233,7 @@ binfiles arch=x86_64-solaris size=35 name macrolist category Package -revision 60028 +revision 60040 shortdesc List operations for LaTeX2e relocated 1 longdesc This package provides a list data structure and common list @@ -188242,14 +188244,14 @@ longdesc languages, the lists in this package are 1-indexed, meaning the longdesc first element is numbered 1, the second element numbered 2, and longdesc so on. containersize 2176 -containerchecksum f521dda5413750511486049eb51e278a7334fe04a4d5bd3bf40e08792dc208034a7db32f1a427882701d766398bd86a1bb92dcb8b03b46bc81ff1f0c07f34ae5 -doccontainersize 180764 -doccontainerchecksum b2ba77ea52f50c7db6514a506032ed36084b66be0f44445dd8e3cc9b5918b2b8e02a8bf338722cff4122411a54a6f7aadcab98ea43f56372fa8b209d906226bb +containerchecksum 26984ab74b656c8061ad41d4c4877ca682edc369d6c7b8497ea8be9ec8db3e1b629354f91a680ecad8e64ef1bf55d2a30deba679635119a71a9c243b6d2f5b36 +doccontainersize 180988 +doccontainerchecksum 84dfe7fb7d6c2ac367704a0d6f098f9bcf7cc34972429d40aa551841ed325b67eb0c03d4193939693f5d0ab96d1a277436168eaef1d667c4dd03f10fe269634a docfiles size=46 RELOC/doc/latex/macrolist/README.md details="Readme" RELOC/doc/latex/macrolist/macrolist.pdf details="Package documentation" -srccontainersize 3712 -srccontainerchecksum 6d0ec8d31951040822775402ea1bb8d5a7de6417434de0d2e91786e2d3af9c7702edab2bb817c2b6442a6bafccdaea041089811896a9298734c2cf8dfa1000d1 +srccontainersize 3736 +srccontainerchecksum e7cfe49884cb0decb881937bd69d83de85858ff0cd582a175988ca6a08bfcfdb0c410606249bb58712ba3ddc4ecb35487be7b1b1fa084cbf9b24eb95e36fc3a1 srcfiles size=4 RELOC/source/latex/macrolist/macrolist.dtx RELOC/source/latex/macrolist/macrolist.ins @@ -198060,26 +198062,26 @@ catalogue-version 1.02 name mindflow category Package -revision 59358 +revision 60041 shortdesc Write your ideas in a clear way relocated 1 longdesc This package provides an environment that has its own line longdesc numbers or markers and can be well distinguished from the main longdesc text, for writing you ideas or annotations. -containersize 2228 -containerchecksum a244cb7bbbb59139b7410ef188cfd9158de8d580cbec7e2bca57fdca97a9dcc9c6271efdf97f721a7b6c0174b4f6bc335b3eb1ba19c8138d4c8489bd4f1507bb -doccontainersize 199788 -doccontainerchecksum bbb8b74e91add90b8253b55d0aad595293290c21cf0a80707b1f5cc884e11f425273e7394aaa8a7710008e6d75963ca45845477bb26ec8a44286d0298db7331f -docfiles size=54 +containersize 2660 +containerchecksum 08c086ccbd3f8545ee9df2bee6ccd2882b9c700e2d38b5466a183b25e7be83f1b396cba0c5180ca419ef856ea1180ff7448e67deb0f1d55ff7adaea315291770 +doccontainersize 213188 +doccontainerchecksum 7c7e08ab751c4f50c4cefb85d01991ab04c8714ed0e0183022e9855b7a5ebbf6aeab0c961f1b2e26cecb44f23397100882be52b31b3d66650143a3d3efbcb962 +docfiles size=57 RELOC/doc/latex/mindflow/LICENSE RELOC/doc/latex/mindflow/README.md details="Readme" RELOC/doc/latex/mindflow/mindflow.pdf details="Package documentation" -srccontainersize 5352 -srccontainerchecksum d76deeaae34372b840b462d468151ec35ec4bdf87052cdcf1d4e2a93da653427546c532dcb851abac12de6131f61430dd13c2f254ce15456016af5f9ce1e863c -srcfiles size=6 +srccontainersize 6360 +srccontainerchecksum cf617c972e061bc4ca2c64d5c3aecdec2b5e27c9c90f628ca410600a907cfbc7bd43586fcfe2198e96a3ae64073b221d432d3bd175a3eea5566420201bfbf3f6 +srcfiles size=7 RELOC/source/latex/mindflow/mindflow.dtx RELOC/source/latex/mindflow/mindflow.ins -runfiles size=2 +runfiles size=3 RELOC/tex/latex/mindflow/mindflow.sty catalogue-contact-repository https://github.com/Jinwen-XU/mindflow catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/mindflow @@ -208813,7 +208815,7 @@ catalogue-version 1.2.2 name musixtex category Package -revision 59879 +revision 60046 shortdesc Sophisticated music typesetting longdesc MusiXTeX provides a set of macros, based on the earlier longdesc MusicTeX, for typesetting music with TeX. To produce optimal @@ -208829,11 +208831,11 @@ longdesc are universally acknowledged to be challenging to use directly: longdesc the pmx preprocessor compiles a simpler input language to longdesc MusiXTeX macros.. depend musixtex.ARCH -containersize 103780 -containerchecksum 96f22618255d33b728b0447b58d7b9bb9bb451460b2493de00205b0ec064f7a029d18b26e10ca89969aa27b37a969cde38c9a31e673afa12680b75259223fefb -doccontainersize 2085692 -doccontainerchecksum 6cd5e14e257e8ae7e6a2150164977c78c11f1cb4c4c85aefc9fb5490a361eac41e7b5d94c0120f972c28bf78871f4ead0f7bce3c65dc59cec949c47d0d12b396 -docfiles size=1093 +containersize 118056 +containerchecksum f6a381510334e815c1f0c4921ea47ed2ef63f26967a10144b4854764451d5dfa9b1230bff414aac855cc8c4c8e7af4285024ad53dc6f0208855a9b0ae364f6a3 +doccontainersize 2135676 +doccontainerchecksum c211fa882a41381ce3dc7400b5a6ef1c472069bfc9e05470f5b48e07964f7a4afa4d144d1176a03abf92ba30f264c769a2368ccad97d0c82ec04d6430964f098 +docfiles size=1111 texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/ChangeLog-114.txt texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/ChangeLog-115.txt texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/ChangeLog-116.txt @@ -208854,6 +208856,7 @@ docfiles size=1093 texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/ChangeLog-131.txt texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/ChangeLog-132.txt texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/ChangeLog-133.txt + texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/ChangeLog-134.txt texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/ChangeLog-musixdoc.txt texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/README details="Readme" texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/examples/adagio.tex @@ -208967,6 +208970,9 @@ docfiles size=1093 texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/musixdoc/summary.tex texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/musixdoc/transposition.tex texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/musixdoc/writingnotes.tex + texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/musixftab/OFL.txt + texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/musixftab/frenchtab-samples.pdf + texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/musixftab/frenchtab-samples.tex texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/musixlyr/README.musixlyr texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/musixlyr/examples/nonmoriar.pdf texmf-dist/doc/generic/musixtex/musixlyr/examples/nonmoriar.tex @@ -208991,16 +208997,19 @@ docfiles size=1093 texmf-dist/doc/man/man1/musixflx.man1.pdf texmf-dist/doc/man/man1/musixtex.1 texmf-dist/doc/man/man1/musixtex.man1.pdf -srccontainersize 9008 -srccontainerchecksum 3d1a447423fc371b11ff724ad48675d3f47ce87b2c291e4b2609270a883fa3d5857efcb277f1e13f6baf25e931ef07ea1450eed7ed4247545162c47f31b656bf +srccontainersize 9012 +srccontainerchecksum a1d1903fe5bf28b435e5a7d1e7156bc10dbda10e387e8f25176e17e97cd4371c0df4bcf2a371e68da134c82f8aaa450a708429944810e6a2dbc1c235a449d81c srcfiles size=12 texmf-dist/source/generic/musixtex/musixcrd/doc.tex texmf-dist/source/generic/musixtex/musixcrd/makefile texmf-dist/source/generic/musixtex/musixcrd/musixcrd.dtx texmf-dist/source/generic/musixtex/musixcrd/readme texmf-dist/source/generic/musixtex/musixcrd/strip.tex -runfiles size=154 +runfiles size=162 texmf-dist/dvips/musixtex/psslurs.pro + texmf-dist/fonts/map/dvips/musixtex/frenchtab.map + texmf-dist/fonts/tfm/public/musixtex/frenchtab.tfm + texmf-dist/fonts/type1/public/musixtex/frenchtab.pfb texmf-dist/scripts/musixtex/musixflx.bat texmf-dist/scripts/musixtex/musixflx.lua texmf-dist/scripts/musixtex/musixtex.bat @@ -209023,6 +209032,7 @@ runfiles size=154 texmf-dist/tex/generic/musixtex/musixevo.tex texmf-dist/tex/generic/musixtex/musixext.tex texmf-dist/tex/generic/musixtex/musixfll.tex + texmf-dist/tex/generic/musixtex/musixftab.tex texmf-dist/tex/generic/musixtex/musixgre.tex texmf-dist/tex/generic/musixtex/musixgui.tex texmf-dist/tex/generic/musixtex/musixhor.tex @@ -209058,9 +209068,9 @@ catalogue-also pmx catalogue-contact-home http://icking-music-archive.org/software/htdocs catalogue-contact-support https://www.tug.org/mailman/listinfo/tex-music catalogue-ctan /macros/musixtex -catalogue-license gpl2+ +catalogue-license gpl2+ ofl catalogue-topics music -catalogue-version 1.33a +catalogue-version 1.34 name musixtex-fonts category Package @@ -215011,7 +215021,7 @@ catalogue-topics font font-type1 font-decor name nicematrix category Package -revision 59952 +revision 60042 shortdesc Improve the typesetting of mathematical matrices with PGF relocated 1 longdesc This package is based on the package array. It creates PGF/TikZ @@ -215023,26 +215033,26 @@ longdesc border matrices); control of the width of the columns; tools to longdesc color rows and columns with a good PDF result; blocks of cells; longdesc etc. The package requires and loads l3keys2e, xparse, array, longdesc amsmath, pgfcore, and the module shapes of PGF. -containersize 30100 -containerchecksum f580e57f0286f05e8d0629fb09a11004738cbe84a4b1e520cb7994e7c5481067cba172d3490c3a07ae440e2fd356bd259180d53f823c05b2036a6662c1e96daa -doccontainersize 1767384 -doccontainerchecksum 7360f00fd6aaf3472727f6b029b15bf89b741a91ca2ad555d663d4672c788af981ac91529420ba777b3226dc70a1892c0336fac066fcffd3f9241d1c7893db06 -docfiles size=485 +containersize 30636 +containerchecksum 15db7ef1c1df792b79ded403faffd973fd248586d1d2730585d44bbb7a2c687f0d8dc3a4a6412312d4d31c69e3cee89cc69d479df24adc72954c81c99e5b0df1 +doccontainersize 1784760 +doccontainerchecksum 714cd694dc38012095b22bcc8ca4be439d478ca2942b73218f37bcda398cd80adf84c31c7125df5d831e78b10dea9104d5c647769753c66dff5adb847439b913 +docfiles size=488 RELOC/doc/latex/nicematrix/README.md details="Readme" RELOC/doc/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.pdf details="Package documentation in French" language="fr" RELOC/doc/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix-french.tex RELOC/doc/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix.pdf details="Package documentation" -srccontainersize 100864 -srccontainerchecksum 10f3ada6e9013c34e4dc1fe1d495c64698cefa6d7a6a7b33bac64425c3330d03836f804ea0e89c858cde251db7965e8c75c424d149c77bd98280988e1ffc64c4 -srcfiles size=154 +srccontainersize 102368 +srccontainerchecksum a797dbfc67d89aefc4c60ae30bb0e89241ac5df55497f79bd60aa780abdcf36ad8d3afadc3ce779854e140001181c4b389106dee94b6ed58cf39e9b6296fa5fe +srcfiles size=157 RELOC/source/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix.dtx RELOC/source/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix.ins -runfiles size=67 +runfiles size=68 RELOC/tex/latex/nicematrix/nicematrix.sty catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/nicematrix catalogue-license lppl1.3 catalogue-topics maths matrix pgf-tikz expl3 -catalogue-version 5.18 +catalogue-version 5.19 name nicetext category Package @@ -241557,6 +241567,36 @@ binfiles arch=x86_64-solaris size=2 bin/x86_64-solaris/a5toa4 bin/x86_64-solaris/pfarrei +name pfdicons +category Package +revision 60037 +shortdesc Draw process flow diagrams in chemical engineering +relocated 1 +longdesc This package provides TikZ shapes to represent commonly +longdesc encountered unit operations for depiction in process flow +longdesc diagrams (PFDs) and, to a lesser extent, process and +longdesc instrumentation diagrams (PIDs). The package was designed with +longdesc undergraduate chemical engineering students and faculty in +longdesc mind, and the number of units provided should cover--in +longdesc Turton's estimate--about 90 percent of all fluid processing +longdesc operations. +containersize 9072 +containerchecksum 9a8de9d88df13d85ac0900cb5f281c9b45322cceb66e33ea8674966d06d7b94a27e109a8f8173cdf6584138ca65bb2a62a82b77b81e1b6d7f4cc033e84061ba8 +doccontainersize 948660 +doccontainerchecksum 09508bdf05684cd9b18c12b73b65df4f160514e604b25f9cd048020372efdcded1ca4e4b64dfb2627acfc7d34bf67e2916b1db22bcf1ff1f03cb4cfd7daf6c0a +docfiles size=292 + RELOC/doc/latex/pfdicons/README.txt details="Readme" + RELOC/doc/latex/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.pdf + RELOC/doc/latex/pfdicons/pfdicons-changelog.tex + RELOC/doc/latex/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.pdf details="Package documentation" + RELOC/doc/latex/pfdicons/pfdicons-doc.tex +runfiles size=16 + RELOC/tex/latex/pfdicons/pfdicons.sty +catalogue-ctan /graphics/pgf/contrib/pfdicons +catalogue-license lppl1.3 +catalogue-topics graphics pgf-tikz chemistry engineering +catalogue-version 1.0 + name pgf category Package revision 59210 @@ -272811,7 +272851,7 @@ catalogue-version 0.302 name semantex category Package -revision 59981 +revision 60043 shortdesc Semantic, keyval-based mathematics relocated 1 longdesc The SemanTeX package for LaTeX delivers a more semantic, @@ -272828,22 +272868,22 @@ longdesc considered feature-complete and more or less stable, so using longdesc it at this point should be safe. Still, suggestions, ideas, and longdesc bug reports are more than welcome! depend semtex -containersize 26844 -containerchecksum 0cadeaf96116d7ba4bb12b6e97a1cb73764c724e96e07f0c4d0ac9cc519cc2260c20b2feddf433275beb0e6ae96f0c93a58fac9def84c023c535af3129f15836 -doccontainersize 407220 -doccontainerchecksum de5f15d70eff1cb05c9112bb045dfd256eda3909a8f4fe7001ef318a0e9edb588a386108c2dd109792b1c5f99d451d79e75ce7f22ee1691cf814b3d93e379c3e +containersize 27008 +containerchecksum 70a7b2f1d858b8c9ef915ffb89483f7fc1a948349a183b849dd83b76edf59759aca8d2280bc42a8db0eaa376e2eb3d64967ab7c494ef747ba9ff673e93c83eb5 +doccontainersize 407144 +doccontainerchecksum 088738ea8d168f28b1581a1a347f860d08a28ffe631fc428c3e6f49748fa8c9aa6e8b649dea5ca217e783f877c0cc9b9358f4e70242062694d53a25f7172a811 docfiles size=140 RELOC/doc/latex/semantex/README.md details="Readme" RELOC/doc/latex/semantex/semantex.pdf details="Package documentation" RELOC/doc/latex/semantex/semantex.tex -runfiles size=81 +runfiles size=83 RELOC/tex/latex/semantex/semantex.sty RELOC/tex/latex/semantex/stripsemantex.lua RELOC/tex/latex/semantex/stripsemantex.sty catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/semantex catalogue-license lppl1.3c catalogue-topics maths expl3 -catalogue-version 0.508 +catalogue-version 0.510 name semantic category Package @@ -279999,22 +280039,22 @@ catalogue-version 2.4 name spbmark category Package -revision 60018 +revision 60044 shortdesc Customize superscripts and subscripts relocated 1 longdesc This package provides three commands \super, \sub and \supersub longdesc to improve the layout of superscripts and subscripts which can longdesc be adjusted with respect to relative position and format, and longdesc can be used in text and math mode. -containersize 2236 -containerchecksum 92515098f3215b9c8b011361fa0f91908dfeadee8b509a80c74063450024b4fa7b8755e6702984b2927d1a13340044b20a9c1f3d48125023c7cd22095e4b0fff -doccontainersize 67672 -doccontainerchecksum 9ed4918ff516102313c1a99249c15cee144c960a2d2719a6f921b0ffed1c2e1661f5c872a2673a51efc3e31199718bfa6230cf09897bcfce30f66f72a675afae -docfiles size=18 +containersize 2444 +containerchecksum 13a3f7ca63f1087d98c1705fad6d556ea56c80a3b4ed2744651a7a48920d2349549a1eff22a7c2fe354146f60b4d2f5db4fd85424b9361ff4a2e3b8513d6a094 +doccontainersize 70056 +doccontainerchecksum d0dc1113bd18d1cdf9e100e19e9c4c222f125fadb4e81aa9868a6651593f80cd8d444f24b748d771e6e531eba05a33b5dcd231eb55897eabeb466e7093234afb +docfiles size=19 RELOC/doc/latex/spbmark/README.md details="Readme" RELOC/doc/latex/spbmark/spbmark.pdf details="Package documentation" -srccontainersize 4464 -srccontainerchecksum 78ffd24ebe3557fb686f84713d42b7a8fa32b8a0e8e4b0d5fb04289d7b9c73ae88366240ae76484b7f7952232347d95ae4154a9f6c97b89a22598ea5c05e2819 +srccontainersize 4812 +srccontainerchecksum 2db728df97f5fcf744578ba94afc20bf588004378a4d7f6cfb000a7c51bb5cc3d2a2d38e995a3ff3a0c82bf9255073fb5ca70702fe263e22a19f13cff4bad63a srcfiles size=5 RELOC/source/latex/spbmark/spbmark.dtx RELOC/source/latex/spbmark/spbmark.ins @@ -280024,7 +280064,7 @@ catalogue-contact-repository https://github.com/texl3/spbmark catalogue-ctan /macros/latex/contrib/spbmark catalogue-license cc-by-4 catalogue-topics subsup-pos expl3 -catalogue-version 1.02 +catalogue-version 1.04 name spectral category Package @@ -301062,7 +301102,7 @@ docfiles size=376 name texlive-scripts category TLCore -revision 60012 +revision 60032 shortdesc TeX Live infrastructure programs longdesc Includes install-tl, tl-portable, rungs, etc.; not needed for longdesc tlmgr to run but still ours. Not included in tlcritical. @@ -301070,10 +301110,10 @@ depend texlive-scripts.ARCH depend texlive.infra execute addMap mathpple.map postaction shortcut type=menu name="TeX Live command-line" cmd=TEXDIR/tlpkg/installer/tl-cmd.bat -containersize 108044 -containerchecksum e36e81a42b30a40699ca4ce02e3ca05e97c0c6c3d2c1036bd83f220fb3f394858955edb444bce93d083a1c8b44dcbdd3d200de536aaa41add895159ef4219509 +containersize 107996 +containerchecksum b89c88270c5a2991a8ab2f330978508b0591fbce869c6c711d395c8179ee00cc33cd9e9b4c13136534821d720b31949b377d93afa1361b93ef4b17f5271148c8 doccontainersize 398708 -doccontainerchecksum eb1ba2d156e59400d226bfac01dc96813e5cadd21a1abae93440b629361920882e5bb84e48ecd2c26a6fcd9f0d6f4664bb4cd45189c8919a0ce8c43620a8524c +doccontainerchecksum 7efab2dab7058450026d80484bafc7006fffcd7c822ab9ec976cae2b2cda03f49c356b5071e44a546c1fe30607bdebc062a7af1e4e56366b9500b736208b5c52 docfiles size=493 doc.html texmf-dist/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1 diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5 b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5 index 638f3fa527..898a5e7a72 100644 --- a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5 +++ b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.md5 @@ -1 +1 @@ -2a706626de23a5f2ef4d636c7c3b0ba8 texlive.tlpdb +be26432e0dceca6d12329361610e5543 texlive.tlpdb diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512 b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512 index 1a43acacb9..58d6184247 100644 --- a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512 +++ b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512 @@ -1 +1 @@ -d6af5e1b4258fff75131ab8a9fe68bd78d0b50f1cc7a06d60f08a9f3f343b18680713e451ac0ad1606cd1eeac897b8761862e71ac47ab183aa370d47862d255e texlive.tlpdb +3bd6744a7ac8ab4dbb3c46ce269983dd14ec31fbf1086210ff61a01dfa9e5595b2031221927e9753b5702aeab58f95042c5c5a246455d79553372da3c179a4c7 texlive.tlpdb diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc index f30feac133..a1ed679025 100644 --- a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc +++ b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.sha512.asc @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -----BEGIN PGP SIGNATURE----- -iQEcBAEBCgAGBQJg+1ZfAAoJEEzhh34ZQ4xw70MH/iabiyHvQ3uQrJH20R7jP2Bc -LpeRcxs9/7vF5011H07AEcF7UWL2cZ1zTqleZXzcdr6Ej5CLGtGo8RiZgbtDnAhe -KMgv91njFkY9Yir/TczyGU2o0duzR45TA/mEFg9m/69lZTrEtveh3Clp/UqcJpXG -Nhye4kTrfithpquNUACWgrjaNDpasgAIP4htQAst0O2h2tqvswmqXvFz4mI3qnb/ -AWv87qqiZDXw1g3z4zt9ByShX/AEoRs1Qh5WIMKcNp/YalIjcOzYjW1LBL4S4SiP -VICoITIo8ceAP9FbnJ2UMWms5YHaIrydCI5XjCm4HYVqDMMds+yF3SreUi4OCx8= -=JMdC +iQEcBAEBCgAGBQJg/KfxAAoJEEzhh34ZQ4xw93QIAJiuL6zmZ8j78K15KKooP/JC +mYbbP9pUZSJfX7WEOeBvNyMtYGYH7FEiCl81kRcpS86SiUwDvHh2DqioK7cXZcNb +42WyHWGBcXGF1aSEtCtECZgbpniv5ZXzgcDt/Fp0j/9fyEB7K2b55R8/0YWsYwic +UlCDcgNEtBU9uIBQ5wIQ9JXfRdFjbIL9EPWyKrhib0PzT+kzUqj704fMs3Yw7qkM +RBnof78eJCICcNLPAZDCx9Z5SnRYp6Y7CzXnOYmr7Zv11qIxEdX7BJnqqDDY1dZp +z6+GSAmyjFNusrfZvl5eChWQW+5SZ176XAN0gQKRzRpxMHYUkvMA8T057XNDIFo= +=vXc8 -----END PGP SIGNATURE----- diff --git a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz index cd86e74e44..a9f9d754db 100644 Binary files a/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz and b/systems/texlive/tlnet/tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb.xz differ diff --git a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma index 761f1e9c53..9f41faa87b 100644 Binary files a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma and b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/files.csv.lzma differ diff --git a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma index bcb3c70dba..e280a495b9 100644 Binary files a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma and b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/files.csv.lzma differ diff --git a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini index d09137378b..af7329b63e 100644 --- a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini +++ b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/next/pr.ini @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ [repository] -date=1627071275 +date=1627157719 lastupd=miktex-arctrl-bin-2.9 miktex-arctrl-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-asymptote-bin-2.9 miktex-asymptote-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-autosp-bin-2.9 miktex-autosp-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-axohelp-bin-2.9 miktex-axohelp-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-bibarts-bin-2.9 miktex-bibarts-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-bibtex-bin-2.9 miktex-bibtex-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-2.9 miktex-bibtex8bit-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-bzip2-bin-2.9 miktex-bzip2-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-cairo-bin-2.9 miktex-cairo-bin-x64-2.9 miktex-chktex-bin-2.9 miktex-chktex-bin-x64-2.9 -lstdigest=c1d6d4be3bb89cd04e93fd470619f888 -numpkg=4538 +lstdigest=c902ba99940dcb36f7fb164684f40013 +numpkg=4570 relstate=next -version=7874 +version=7875 ;;;;This configuration file is signed by a MiKTeX maintainer. The signature follows. ;;;;-----BEGIN MIKTEX SIGNATURE----- -;;;; signature/miktex: BNRsr75y4GSCxkUfgA23je3VKibAnltRsR6ifX5V/RuKDbBhkqE9pqBVpY9xd+U7hijaO/aediIwhT9VOLbQWn86/oZ54MUqPb1VSNFW0fAZ+KeSU1aMBNBFHxmdTKbeLjLVcaeAf2eszCPDQX+whoesn1tePCaxF5G+SS+t3lo1eW1CtrLsRj6q77uEyYhTaRzSF1CR73rO+5YgeflCouA22trykWdlQXZpaG2AbpNzJ9/KeLYY4maABjk2rGnJLgt0PhW8G3Fst0is2TZsIKxiQ5jCwpIDJTCNXYsh/guC3qV5oK35bI/YA/WF1M6gO7yZp+m657a0AdjKEIhsbQ== +;;;; signature/miktex: YMP6UuVWXx+6DARepf7o0qsNptJadQh207FMWom4X1jvuZiCgBL2yp4MHA8mGZ1gJshXxozxUa0t7CHpuOrPK/eN53TYDxukFYmsXC3Kun9LhGJbmjcxQQnKneaRLI6iajIsnAx57XJIAEKOc6WG7l7AC0IyEpRopRdRf2Njj387GOIjSnSF6iEeBe18mptTYPSdRlz1WnNB7T5IUzwBCw8M+ZGg/8lEsRpiz6vX0gTuwEw7AtxnukVZSg4DDf68REybJWPPb8TqVMGFuUikV9YTy4U1MgvoKNYjj/KG26/fyBn7R+WUKT6ZO+2U1Z/dOggXH3mbDzzieOrvyxagEw== ;;;;-----END MIKTEX SIGNATURE----- diff --git a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini index 42aa746e2a..6198f1ee46 100644 --- a/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini +++ b/systems/win32/miktex/tm/packages/pr.ini @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ [repository] -date=1627071072 -lastupd=cjk-ko cjk-ko__doc cjk-ko__source easing easing__doc easing__source emoji emoji__doc latex-via-exemplos longdivision longdivision__doc longdivision__source lwarp lwarp__doc lwarp__source twemoji-colr twemoji-colr__doc miktex-runtime-bin-2.9 miktex-runtime-bin-x64-2.9 changes -lstdigest=3d4bf3c19a959cb8154cd36c5df96523 -numpkg=4538 +date=1627157464 +lastupd=babel babel-french babel-french__doc babel-french__source babel__doc babel__source beamertheme-focus beamertheme-focus__doc beamertheme-focus__source catechis catechis__doc catechis__source cjk-ko cjk-ko__doc cjk-ko__source fithesis fithesis__doc fithesis__source fontools fontools__doc +lstdigest=bcde5a9e5b7189c7543da02c2d758a52 +numpkg=4570 relstate=stable -version=7874 +version=7875 ;;;;This configuration file is signed by a MiKTeX maintainer. The signature follows. ;;;;-----BEGIN MIKTEX SIGNATURE----- -;;;; signature/miktex: MfxSnoSsdhUzO05zyDYU9QjRtwdlWlbeC0JQZqBtKq1Xm6n3bWQ/bIcE8ZfFlPHqA84M87iBsu7Ts/2R0/38wGNP3cv3wPL07n6rEnG4gj7Bps82/kvw3poz4LH81LQf7lWV76KcUhmrE9zQiy5KGy7+WPEgM+ixVMpQYV71pCIPOSk0DZGsQsvj30VbAHRleXno4NiYyGfEhU0ZgISKNHUUUvBlUasGgytuDj3k1tZ7iYJ+WgArk3UbYM8/sZg9TNXIkjzCuJl1ANWnS644rxakEodqeHKd1HMTjb8meX99nvbj1YV87KrpA+nS+JZ2V7oMbPrHuHqcoCLH1ulDtg== +;;;; signature/miktex: o/lUdIt04Z36UHReBjo1+1NRCJuudoKG43gS8+2X8BFrKPFlGjR2UIeTZ3Dahpac2KOQbtS++KP3lEpWdxqDVctiU8DhFX6EhhaedDdKt9RPOnGIJuS86oTDx7u3YILDqIhzuYOgJH4Vkdw/elsJ1wOdP8mkerJl+xL5bN+CyPSSDBeJLUBdkzS7NyBQjKfMgLXkYJWrlRFirGDiLauWh8w8OZJ/bmz+HcyjbIGLqj9J4oMbIViG9tSzjOw2hUmAK2MZBZOIXhr9ZWjtgnt8OYOCneasV6IW4D+5EegzZBy7l3kgYU4GHaHUyDLeFbh56gLif1HPD0ah3JLkasR0Ug== ;;;;-----END MIKTEX SIGNATURE----- diff --git a/timestamp b/timestamp index c0872d7ebb..3c4dac4b9b 100644 --- a/timestamp +++ b/timestamp @@ -2,4 +2,4 @@ # The source CTAN of this site's material: dante.ctan.org # The year-month-day-hour-minute of this site's material: -2021-07-24-02-02 +2021-07-25-02-02 -- cgit v1.2.3